RWANDA TRANSPORT DEVELOPMENT AGENCY

(RTDA)

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS
FINAL, DECEMBER 2014

Submitted by:
RWANDA TRANSPORT DEVELOPMENT AGENCY
(RTDA)
_________

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

FINAL

DECEMBER 2014
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

PREFACE

These Standard Specifications for the Construction of Roads and Bridges are issued primarily for
constructing roads and bridges on projects under the direct administration of the Rwanda Transport
Road Agency. These specifications are cited as "Rwanda Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Works, 2014.”

When designated in a contract, it becomes part of the contract and binding upon all parties to the
contract.

Preface i
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 1

Section 101. — TERMS, FORMAT, AND DEFINITIONS........................................................ 2
Section 103. — SCOPE OF WORK .......................................................................................... 11
Section 104. — CONTROL OF WORK .................................................................................... 16
Section 105. — CONTROL OF MATERIAL ........................................................................... 24
Section 106. — ACCEPTANCE OF WORK ............................................................................ 27
Section 107. — LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY TO THE PUBLIC ............. 39
Section 108. — PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS ................................................................ 44
Section 109. — MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .............................................................. 48
DIVISION 150 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS ........................................................... 64
Section 151. — MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION ................................................ 65
Section 152. — CONSTRUCTION SURVEY AND STAKING .............................................. 66
Section 153. — CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL ........................................................ 73
Section 154. — CONTRACTOR SAMPLING AND TESTING .............................................. 77
Section 155. — SCHEDULES FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS.................................. 79
Section 156. — PUBLIC TRAFFIC .......................................................................................... 88
Section 157. —SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL ............................................. 92
Section 158. — WATERING FOR DUST CONTROL ............................................................. 98
Section 159. — CAMPS AND FACILITIES ............................................................................ 99
DIVISION 200 EARTHWORK................................................................................... 109
Section 201. — CLEARING AND GRUBBING .................................................................... 110
Section 202. — ADDITIONAL CLEARING AND GRUBBING .......................................... 112
Section 203. — REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS ........................... 114
Section 204. — EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT....................................................... 118
Section 205. — ROCK BLASTING ........................................................................................ 129
Section 206. — RESERVED ................................................................................................... 137
Section 207. — EARTHWORK GEOSYNTHETICS ............................................................. 138
Section 208. — STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR SELECTED MAJOR
STRUCTURES .............................................................................................. 141
Section 209. — STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL ....................................... 146
Section 210. — RESERVED ................................................................................................... 151
Section 211. — ROADWAY OBLITERATION ..................................................................... 152
Section 212. — LINEAR GRADING ...................................................................................... 154
Section 213. — SUBGRADE STABILIZATION ................................................................... 156

Table of Contents ii
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

DIVISION 250 SLOPE REINFORCEMENT AND RETAINING WALLS........... 161

Section 251. — RIPRAP .......................................................................................................... 162
Section 252. — ROCKERY, SPECIAL ROCK EMBANKMENT, AND ROCK
BUTTRESS .................................................................................................... 165
Section 253. — GABIONS AND REVET MATTRESSES .................................................... 169
Section 254. — STEEL NETS AND FIXINGS ....................................................................... 171
Section 255. — MECHANICALLY-STABLILIZED EARTH WALLS ................................ 173
Section 256. — PERMANENT GROUND ANCHORS ......................................................... 177
Section 257. — CONTRACTOR DESIGNED RETAINING WALLS .................................. 185
Section 258. — REINFORCED CONCRETE RETAINING WALLS ................................... 189
Section 259. — SOIL NAIL RETAINING WALLS ............................................................... 191
Section 260. — ROCK BOLTS AND DOWELS .................................................................... 201
Section 261. — REINFORCED SOIL SLOPES ...................................................................... 209
DIVISION 300 AGGREGATE AND BASE COURSES ........................................... 212
Section 301. — UNTREATED AGGREGATE COURSES .................................................... 213
Section 302. — MINOR CRUSHED AGGREGATE .............................................................. 221
Section 303. — ROAD RECONDITIONING ......................................................................... 224
Section 304.— FULL DEPTH RECLAMATION ................................................................... 227
Section 305. – FULL DEPTH RECLAMATION WITH CEMENT ....................................... 230
Section 306. — FULL DEPTH RECLAMATION WITH ASPHALT .................................... 236
Section 307. – RESERVED ..................................................................................................... 246
Section 308. — LATERITE WEARING COURSE ................................................................. 247
Section 309. — EMULSIFIED ASPHALT-TREATED BASE COURSE .............................. 252
Section 310. — COLD IN-PLACE RECYCLED ASPHALT BASE COURSE ..................... 257
Section 311. — STABILIZED AGGREGATE SURFACE COURSE .................................... 265
Section 312. — DUST PALLIATIVE ..................................................................................... 271
Section 313. — AGGREGATE-TOPSOIL COURSE ............................................................. 273
Section 314. – STOCKPILED AGGREGATES ...................................................................... 275
DIVISION 400 ASPHALT PAVEMENTS AND SURFACE TREATMENTS ...... 277
Section 401. — RESERVED ................................................................................................... 278
Section 402. — ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT BY MARSHALL MIX DESIGN
METHOD....................................................................................................... 279
Section 403. — ASPHALT CONCRETE ................................................................................ 308
Section 404. — RESERVED ................................................................................................... 312
Section 405. — OPEN-GRADED ASPHALT FRICTION COURSE..................................... 313
Section 406. — FOG SEAL ..................................................................................................... 320
Section 407. — CHIP SEAL .................................................................................................... 323

Table of Contents iii

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 408. — RESERVED ................................................................................................... 331

Section 409. — MICRO SURFACING ................................................................................... 332
Section 410. — SLURRY SEAL ............................................................................................. 338
Section 411. — ASPHALT PRIME COAT ............................................................................. 343
Section 412. — ASPHALT TACK COAT .............................................................................. 345
Section 413. — ASPHALT PAVEMENT MILLING ............................................................. 347
Section 414. — ASPHALT PAVEMENT CRACK SEALING AND FILLING .................... 349
Section 415. — PAVING GEOTEXTILES ............................................................................. 352
Section 416. — RESERVED ................................................................................................... 354
Section 417. — RESERVED ................................................................................................... 354
Section 418. — ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT PATCHING .................................... 355
DIVISION 500 RIGID PAVEMENTS ........................................................................ 357
Section 501. — MINOR CONCRETE PAVEMENT .............................................................. 358
Section 502. — CONCRETE PAVEMENT RESTORATION ............................................... 368
DIVISION 550 BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION ............................................................ 379
Section 551. — DRIVEN PILES ............................................................................................. 380
Section 552. — STRUCTURAL CONCRETE ........................................................................ 392
Section 553. — PRESTRESSED CONCRETE ....................................................................... 416
Section 554. — REINFORCING STEEL ................................................................................ 430
Section 555. — STEEL STRUCTURES ................................................................................. 433
Section 556. — BRIDGE RAILING ........................................................................................ 450
Section 557. — TIMBER STRUCTURES .............................................................................. 453
Section 558. — DAMPPROOFING ........................................................................................ 458
Section 559. — WATERPROOFING ...................................................................................... 459
Section 560. — REMOVAL OF CONCRETE BY HYDRODEMOLITION ......................... 463
Section 561. — STRUCTURAL CONCRETE INJECTION AND CRACK REPAIR ........... 466
Section 562. — TEMPORARY WORKS ................................................................................ 470
Section 563. — PAINTING ..................................................................................................... 475
Section 564. — BEARING DEVICES .................................................................................... 484
Section 565. — DRILLED SHAFTS ....................................................................................... 487
Section 566. — SHOTCRETE ................................................................................................. 497
Section 567. — MICROPILES ................................................................................................ 506
Section 568. — HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE ......................................................... 514
Section 569. — CONCRETE OVERLAYS FOR BRIDGE DECKS ...................................... 524
DIVISION 600 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES AND INCIDENTAL
CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................ 537
Section 601. — MINOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES .......................................................... 538

Table of Contents iv
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 602. — CULVERTS AND DRAINS .......................................................................... 541

Section 603. — STRUCTURAL PLATE STRUCTURES ...................................................... 544
Section 604. — MANHOLES, INLETS, AND CATCH BASINS .......................................... 546
Section 605. — UNDERDRAINS, SHEET DRAINS, AND PAVEMENT EDGE DRAINS 549
Section 606. — CORRUGATED METAL SPILLWAYS....................................................... 554
Section 607. — CLEANING, RELAYING, AND REPAIRING EXISTING DRAINAGE
STRUCTURES .............................................................................................. 555
Section 608. — PAVED WATERWAYS ................................................................................ 556
Section 609. — CURB AND GUTTER................................................................................... 560
Section 610. — HORIZONTAL DRAINS .............................................................................. 565
Section 611. — WATER SYSTEMS ....................................................................................... 567
Section 612. — SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS .................................................................. 569
Section 613. — SIMULATED STONE MASONRY SURFACE ........................................... 571
Section 614. — LEAN CONCRETE BACKFILL ................................................................... 574
Section 615. — SIDEWALKS, PADS, AND PAVED MEDIANS ......................................... 576
Section 616. — SLOPE PAVING ............................................................................................ 579
Section 617. — GUARDRAIL ................................................................................................ 582
Section 618. — CONCRETE BARRIERS AND PRECAST GUARDWALLS ..................... 585
Section 619. — FENCES, GATES, CATTLE GUARDS AND BOLLARD POSTS ............. 588
Section 620. — STONE MASONRY ...................................................................................... 594
Section 621. — MONUMENTS AND MARKERS ................................................................ 600
Section 622. — RENTAL EQUIPMENT ................................................................................ 602
Section 623. — GENERAL LABOR ....................................................................................... 603
Section 624. — TOPSOIL ....................................................................................................... 604
Section 625. — TURF ESTABLISHMENT ............................................................................ 606
Section 626. — PLANTS, TREES, SHRUBS, VINES, AND GROUNDCOVERS ............... 609
Section 627. — SOD ................................................................................................................ 613
Section 628. — RESERVED ................................................................................................... 615
Section 629. — ROLLED EROSION CONTROL PRODUCTS AND CELLULAR
CONFINEMENT SYSTEMS ........................................................................ 616
DIVISION 630 SAFETY AND SIGNALLING .......................................................... 619
Section 630. — RESERVED ................................................................................................... 620
Section 631. — RESERVED ................................................................................................... 620
Section 632. — RESERVED ................................................................................................... 620
Section 633. — PERMANENT TRAFFIC CONTROL .......................................................... 621
Section 634. — PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKINGS................................................... 625
Section 635. — TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL .......................................................... 629

Table of Contents v
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 636. — TRAFFIC SIGNAL, TRAFFIC COUNTER, LIGHTING, AND

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ............................................................................ 635
DIVISION 700 MATERIAL ........................................................................................ 639
Section 701. — CEMENT ....................................................................................................... 640
701.01 Hydraulic Cement ..................................................................................................... 640
701.02 Masonry and Mortar Cement .................................................................................... 640
Section 702. — ASPHALT MATERIAL ................................................................................ 641
702.01 Asphalt Binder .......................................................................................................... 641
702.02 Emulsified Asphalt................................................................................................... 641
702.03 Material for Dampproofing and Waterproofing Concrete and Masonry Surfaces... 641
702.04 Asphalt Mastic .......................................................................................................... 643
702.05 Antistrip Additive ..................................................................................................... 643
702.06 Mineral Fiber ........................................................................................................... 643
Section 703. — AGGREGATE................................................................................................ 644
703.01 Fine Aggregate for Concrete ..................................................................................... 644
703.02 Coarse Aggregate for Concrete ................................................................................. 644
703.03 Granular Backfill ...................................................................................................... 645
703.04 Reserved. .................................................................................................................. 645
703.05 Subbase, Base, and Surface Course Aggregate ......................................................... 645
703.06 Crushed Aggregate ................................................................................................... 646
703.07 Asphalt Concrete Aggregate ..................................................................................... 646
703.08 Open-Graded Asphalt Friction Course Aggregate ..................................................... 649
703.09 Chip Seal Aggregate ................................................................................................ 649
703.10 Slurry Seal and Micro Surfacing Aggregate ............................................................ 650
703.11 Reserved ................................................................................................................... 651
703.12 Blotter ....................................................................................................................... 651
703.13 Aggregate for Aggregate-Topsoil Course ................................................................. 651
703.14 Sand .......................................................................................................................... 651
703.15 Aggregate for Lean Concrete Backfill....................................................................... 651
703.16 Shotcrete Aggregate .................................................................................................. 652
703.17 Granular Rock Backdrain ........................................................................................ 652
Section 704. — SOIL ............................................................................................................... 654
704.01 Foundation Fill ......................................................................................................... 654
704.02 Bedding Material ...................................................................................................... 654
704.03 Backfill Material ....................................................................................................... 654
704.04 Structural Backfill ..................................................................................................... 654

Table of Contents vi
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

704.05 Topping .................................................................................................................... 654

704.06 Unclassified Borrow ................................................................................................. 655
704.07 Select Borrow ........................................................................................................... 655
704.08 Select Granular Backfill ............................................................................................ 655
Section 705. — ROCK ............................................................................................................. 657
705.01 Gabion and Revet Mattress Rock .............................................................................. 657
705.02 Riprap....................................................................................................................... 657
705.03 Rock for Masonry Structures .................................................................................... 659
705.04 Rock for Special Rock Embankment ........................................................................ 659
705.05 Rock for Buttresses ................................................................................................... 659
705.06 Rock for Rockeries ................................................................................................... 660
Section 706. — CONCRETE PIPE.......................................................................................... 661
706.01 Non-Reinforced Concrete Pipe ................................................................................. 661
706.02 Reinforced Concrete Pipe ......................................................................................... 661
706.03 Perforated Concrete Pipe .......................................................................................... 661
706.04 Reinforced Arch-Shaped Concrete Pipe .................................................................... 661
706.05 Reinforced Elliptically-Shaped Concrete Pipe .......................................................... 661
706.06 Reinforced D-Load Concrete Pipe ............................................................................ 661
706.07 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections.............................................................. 661
706.08 Gaskets for Concrete Pipe........................................................................................ 661
706.09 Supplemental Concrete Pipe Ties.............................................................................. 661
Section 707. — METAL PIPE ................................................................................................. 661
707.01 Ductile Iron Culvert Pipe .......................................................................................... 661
707.02 Metallic-Coated Corrugated Steel Pipe ..................................................................... 661
707.03 Aluminum-Alloy Corrugated Pipe ............................................................................ 662
707.04 Asphalt-Coated Pipe ................................................................................................. 662
707.05 Steel Structural Plate Structures ................................................................................ 662
707.06 Aluminum-Alloy Structural Plate Structures............................................................. 662
707.07 Asphalt-Coated Structural Plate Structures ............................................................... 662
707.08 Polymer-Coated Steel Pipe ....................................................................................... 662
707.09 Reserved ................................................................................................................... 662
707.10 Slotted Drain Pipe .................................................................................................... 663
707.11 Metallic-Coated Spiral Rib Pipe................................................................................ 663
707.12 Aluminum-Alloy Spiral Rib Pipe.............................................................................. 663
707.13 Concrete-Lined Corrugated Steel Pipe ...................................................................... 663

Table of Contents vii

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

707.14 Invert-Paved Corrugated Steel Pipe .......................................................................... 663

707.15 Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ............................................................................... 663
707.16 Seamless Copper Water Tube and Fittings .............................................................. 663
707.17 Gaskets for Metal Pipe ............................................................................................. 663
707.18 Gaskets for Ductile Iron Pipe ................................................................................... 663
Section 708. — PLASTIC PIPE............................................................................................... 664
708.01 Smooth Wall Polyethylene Pipe................................................................................ 664
708.02 Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe ................................................................................... 664
708.03 Profile Wall (Ribbed) Polyethylene Pipe .................................................................. 664
708.04 Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Tubing ............................................................... 664
708.05 Smooth Wall Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe ........................................................... 664
708.06 Profile Wall (Ribbed) Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe ......................................................... 665
708.07 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Pipe ............................................................ 665
708.08 Gaskets for Plastic Pipe ........................................................................................... 665
Section 709. — REINFORCING STEEL AND WIRE ROPE ................................................ 666
709.01 Reinforcing Steel ...................................................................................................... 666
709.02 Prestressing Steel ...................................................................................................... 667
Section 710. — FENCE AND GUARDRAIL ......................................................................... 668
710.01 Barbed Wire.............................................................................................................. 668
710.02 Woven Wire.............................................................................................................. 668
710.03 Chain Link Fence ...................................................................................................... 668
710.04 Fence Posts and Bollards .......................................................................................... 668
710.05 Fence Gates .............................................................................................................. 668
710.06 Rail Elements............................................................................................................ 668
710.07 Guardrail Posts.......................................................................................................... 669
710.08 Guardrail Blocks ....................................................................................................... 669
710.09 Guardrail Nuts, Bolts, and Cables ............................................................................. 669
710.10 Guardrail Hardware .................................................................................................. 670
710.11 Temporary Plastic Fence........................................................................................... 670
Section 711. — CONCRETE CURING MATERIAL AND ADMIXTURES ........................ 671
711.01 Curing Material......................................................................................................... 671
711.02 Air-Entraining Admixtures ....................................................................................... 671
711.03 Chemical Admixtures ............................................................................................... 671
711.04 Latex Emulsion ......................................................................................................... 671
711.05 Concrete Coloring Agents ......................................................................................... 671

Table of Contents viii

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 712. — JOINT MATERIAL ....................................................................................... 672

712.01 Sealants, Fillers, and Seals ........................................................................................ 672
712.02 Mortar ....................................................................................................................... 673
Section 713. — ROADSIDE IMPROVEMENT MATERIAL ................................................ 674
713.01 Topsoil ...................................................................................................................... 674
713.02 Agricultural Limestone ............................................................................................. 674
713.03 Fertilizer ................................................................................................................... 674
713.04 Seed .......................................................................................................................... 675
713.05 Mulch ....................................................................................................................... 675
713.06 Plant Material ........................................................................................................... 677
713.07 Cellular Confinement Systems .................................................................................. 678
713.08 Miscellaneous Planting Material ............................................................................... 678
713.09 Sod............................................................................................................................ 679
713.10 Pegs for Sod .............................................................................................................. 679
713.11 Tackifiers .................................................................................................................. 679
713.12 Fiber Rolls and Socks ............................................................................................... 680
713.13 Gravel Bags.............................................................................................................. 680
713.14 Sandbags .................................................................................................................. 680
713.15 Temporary Culvert Pipe ............................................................................................ 681
713.16 Silt Fence .................................................................................................................. 681
713.17 Temporary Rolled Erosion Control Products ............................................................ 681
713.18 Turf Reinforcement Mats .......................................................................................... 684
713.19 Sediment Filter Bags ................................................................................................. 684
713.20 Prefabricated Filter Insert.......................................................................................... 685
713.21 Floating Turbidity Curtains ....................................................................................... 685
Section 714. — GEOSYNTHETIC MATERIAL .................................................................... 686
714.01 Geotextile ................................................................................................................. 686
714.02 Geocomposite Drain ................................................................................................ 687
714.03 Stabilization Geogrid ............................................................................................... 688
714.04 Reinforcement Geotextile and Geogrid ................................................................... 689
714.05 Geomembrane .......................................................................................................... 691
Section 715. — PILING ........................................................................................................... 692
715.01 Untreated Timber Piles. ............................................................................................ 692
715.02 Treated Timber Piles. ................................................................................................ 692
715.03 Concrete Piles. .......................................................................................................... 692

Table of Contents ix
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

715.04 Steel Shells. .............................................................................................................. 693

715.05 Steel Pipes. ............................................................................................................... 693
715.06 Steel H-Piles. ............................................................................................................ 693
715.07 Sheet Piles. ............................................................................................................... 694
715.08 Pile Shoes. ................................................................................................................ 694
715.09 Splices. ..................................................................................................................... 694
Section 716. — MATERIAL FOR TIMBER STRUCTURES ................................................ 695
716.01 Untreated Structural Timber and Lumber.................................................................. 695
716.02 Hardware .................................................................................................................. 695
716.03 Treated Structural Timber and Lumber ..................................................................... 695
716.04 Structural Glued Laminated Timber.......................................................................... 695
Section 717. — STRUCTURAL METAL ............................................................................... 696
717.01 Structural Steel.......................................................................................................... 696
717.02 Steel Forgings ........................................................................................................... 697
717.03 Pins and Rollers ........................................................................................................ 697
717.04 Castings .................................................................................................................... 697
717.05 Welded Stud Shear Connectors ................................................................................. 698
717.06 Steel Pipe .................................................................................................................. 698
717.07 Galvanized Coatings ................................................................................................. 698
717.08 Sheet Lead ................................................................................................................ 698
717.09 Steel Grid Floors ....................................................................................................... 698
717.10 Bearings .................................................................................................................... 698
717.11 Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Surfaces for Bearings ............................................. 698
717.12 Aluminum Alloy for Bridge Rail .............................................................................. 699
717.13 Aluminum Bolt Heads and Nuts ............................................................................... 699
717.14 Aluminum Welding Wire ......................................................................................... 700
Section 718. — TRAFFIC SIGNING AND MARKING MATERIAL ................................... 701
718.01 Retroreflective Sheeting............................................................................................ 701
718.02 Reserved ................................................................................................................... 701
718.03 Panels ....................................................................................................................... 701
718.04 Sign Posts ................................................................................................................. 702
718.05 Object Marker and Delineator Posts.......................................................................... 703
718.06 Hardware .................................................................................................................. 703
718.07 Legends and Borders ................................................................................................ 703
718.08 Delineator and Object Marker Retroreflectors .......................................................... 703

Table of Contents x
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

718.09 Solventborne Traffic Paint ........................................................................................ 704

718.10 Waterborne Traffic Paint .......................................................................................... 704
718.11 Epoxy Markings ....................................................................................................... 705
718.12 Thermoplastic Markings ........................................................................................... 707
718.13 Preformed Pavement Marking Tape.......................................................................... 707
718.14 Glass Beads .............................................................................................................. 707
718.15 Pavement Markers .................................................................................................... 707
718.16 Temporary Pavement Markings ................................................................................ 707
718.17 Epoxy Resin Adhesives ............................................................................................ 707
Section 719. — PAINT ............................................................................................................ 708
719.01 General ..................................................................................................................... 708
719.02 Paint for Timber Structures ....................................................................................... 709
719.03 Paint for Masonry Block Structures .......................................................................... 709
719.04 Paint for Steel Structures........................................................................................... 709
719.05 Paint for Concrete Structures. ................................................................................... 709
719.06 Paint for Aluminum Structures. ................................................................................ 709
719.07 Paint for Other Metal Structures. .............................................................................. 709
719.08 Penetrating Stain ....................................................................................................... 710
719.09 Mineral Spirits (Petroleum Spirits) .......................................................................... 710
Section 720. — STRUCTURAL WALL AND STABILIZED EMBANKMENT
MATERIAL ................................................................................................... 711
720.01 Mechanically-Stabilized Earth Wall Material ........................................................... 711
720.02 Gabion and Revet Mattress Material ....................................................................... 712
Section 721. — ELECTRICAL AND ILLUMINATION MATERIAL .................................. 713
721.01 Electrical Material..................................................................................................... 713
721.02 Lighting Material ...................................................................................................... 714
Section 722. — ANCHOR MATERIAL ................................................................................. 717
722.01 Anchorage Devices ................................................................................................... 717
722.02 Anchor Tendons ....................................................................................................... 717
722.03 Rock Bolts ................................................................................................................ 718
722.04 Soil Nails .................................................................................................................. 719
Section 723. — RESERVED ................................................................................................... 720
Section 724. — RESERVED ................................................................................................... 720
Section 725. — MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL.............................................................. 721
725.01 Water........................................................................................................................ 721
725.02 Calcium Chloride, Magnesium Chloride, and Lignosulfonate ................................ 721

Table of Contents xi
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

725.03 Lime ......................................................................................................................... 721

725.04 Pozzolans ................................................................................................................. 722
725.05 Mineral Filler ........................................................................................................... 722
725.06 Concrete Building Brick .......................................................................................... 722
725.07 Concrete Masonry Units .......................................................................................... 722
725.08 Paving Brick ............................................................................................................ 722
725.09 Precast Concrete Units and Accessories .................................................................. 722
725.10 Frames, Grates, Covers, and Ladder Rungs ............................................................. 723
725.11 Corrugated Metal Units............................................................................................ 723
725.12 Plastic Lining ........................................................................................................... 723
725.13 Grout ........................................................................................................................ 723
725.14 Polymer Concrete and Mortar .................................................................................. 724
725.15 Color Coating ........................................................................................................... 724
725.16 Slurry (Drilling Fluids) ............................................................................................ 725
725.17 Reinforcing Fibers ................................................................................................... 725
725.18 Epoxy Resin Adhesives ........................................................................................... 725
DIVISION 800 ENVIRONMENTAL MEASURES .................................................. 726
Section 801. — ENVIRONMENTAL / SAFETY EXPERT ................................................... 727
Section 802. — ENVIRONMENTAL / SOCIAL STUDIES AND INVESTIGATIONS ....... 728
Section 803. — EQUIPMENT AND WORKERS SAFETY ................................................... 729
Section 804. — HIV /STD AWARENESS CAMPAIGNS FOR WORKERS ........................ 730
Section 805 — ROAD SAFETY AWARENESS CAMPAIGNS ............................................ 731
Section 806 — MANAGEMENT OF THE ENVIROMENTAL AWARENESS
CAMPAIGNS ................................................................................................ 732
Section 807 — HIV /STD AWARENESS CAMPAIGNS FOR POPULATION.................... 733
Section 808 — EQUIPMENT AND FUNCTIONAL SITE INFIRMARY IN THE
SITE CAMP ................................................................................................... 734
Section 809 — ADJUSTMENT, EQUIPMENT AND SERVICES FOR ENVIRONMENT
PRESERVATION .......................................................................................... 735

Table of Contents xii

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

DIVISION 100
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 100 – General Requirements 1

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 101. — TERMS, FORMAT, AND DEFINITIONS

101.01 Meaning of Terms. These specifications are generally written in the imperative mood. In
sentences using the imperative mood, the subject, "the Contractor", is implied. Also implied in this
language are "shall", "shall be", or similar words and phrases. In material specifications, the subject
may also be the supplier, fabricator, or manufacturer supplying material, products, or equipment for
use on the project.

Wherever "directed", "required", "prescribed", or "ordered" are used, the "direction", "requirement",
“prescription”, or "order" of the Engineer is intended. Wherever something is to be "submitted",
"submitting to", the Engineer is intended. Similarly, wherever "approved", "acceptable", "suitable",
"satisfactory", or similar words are used, the words mean "approved by", "acceptable to", or
"satisfactory to" the Engineer.

The word "will" generally pertains to decisions or actions of the Engineer.

101.02 Specifications Format. These specifications are divided into 10 Divisions.

Division 100 consists of general contract requirements for which no direct payment is made. The
requirements contained in Division 100 are applicable to all contracts.

Division 150 consists of project contract requirements that are applicable to all contracts. Work under
Division 150 is paid for directly or indirectly according to Subsection 109.05 and the Section ordering
the work. When there is no pay item in the bid schedule, no direct payment is made.

Divisions 200 through 600 consist of construction contract requirements for specific items of work.
Work under these Divisions is paid for directly or indirectly according to Subsection 109.05 and the
Section ordering the work. When there is no pay item in the bid schedule, no direct payment is made.

Division 700 contains the material requirements for Divisions 150 through 600. No direct payment is
made in Division 700. Payment for material is included as part of the work required in Divisions
150 through 600.

The first three digits of the pay item number in the bid schedule identify the Section under which the
work is performed.

101.03 Abbreviations. Whenever these abbreviations are used in the contract, they represent the
following:

(a) Acronyms.

AASHTO — American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

ACI — American Concrete Institute
AGC — Associated General Contractors of America
AISC — American Institute of Steel Construction
AITC — American Institute of Timber Construction
ANSI — American National Standards Institute

Section 101 – Terms, Format, and Definitions 2

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

APWA — American Public Works Association

ARTBA — American Road and Transportation Builders Association
ASTM — ASTM International
ATSSA — American Traffic Safety Services Association
AWPA — American Wood Protection Association
AWS — American Welding Society
AWWA — American Water Works Association
BMP — Best Management Practice
CRSI — Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
Engineer —authorized representatives
EPA — Environmental Protection Agency
FHWA — Federal Highway Administration
FLH — Federal Lands Highway
FSS — Federal Specifications and Standards
FED-STD — Federal Standards
ISO — International Organization for Standardization
ISSA — International Slurry Surfacing Association
JMF — Job-Mix Formula
MASH – Manual for Assessing Safety Hardware
MPI — Master Painters Institute
MUTCD — Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (for Streets and Highways)
NCHRP — National Cooperative Highway Research Program
NEMA — National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NIST — National Institute of Standards and Technology
OSHA — Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PCI — Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
PVC — Polyvinyl Chloride
PTI — Post-Tensioning Institute
SEP — Sand Equivalent Passing
SF — Standard Form
SI — International System of Units
SSPC — The Society for Protective Coatings
SWPPP — Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan
UL — Underwriter's Laboratory

Section 101 – Terms, Format, and Definitions 3

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

U.S. — United States of America

USC — United States Code
USD — United States Dollar
(c) Metric unit abbreviations and symbols.

A — ampere electric current

cd — candela luminous intensity
°C — degree Celsius temperature
cu m — cubic meter volume
d — day time
g — gram mass
H — Henry inductance
ha — hectare area
Hz — hertz (s-1) frequency
J — joule (N•m) energy
K — kelvin temperature
kg — kilogram mass
km — kilometer length
L — liter volume
lx — lux illuminance
m — meter length
mm — millimeter length
sq m — square meter area
min — minute time
mn — month time
2
N — newton (kg•m/s ) force
2
Pa — pascal (N/m ) pressure
t — metric ton mass
V — volt (W/A) electric potential
W — watt (J/s) power
Ω — ohm V/A electric resistance
(d) Metric prefix symbols.

E — exa 1018
P — peta 1015
T — tera 1012

Section 101 – Terms, Format, and Definitions 4

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

G — giga 109
M — mega 106
k — kilo 103
c — centi 10-2
m — milli 10-3
µ — micro 10-6
n — nano 10-9
p — pico 10-12
f — femto 10-15
a — atto 10-18
(e) Slope notation (vertical : horizontal). For slopes flatter than 1V:1H, express the slope as the
ratio of one unit vertical to a number of units horizontal. For slopes steeper than 1V:1H, express the
slope as the ratio of a number of units vertical to one unit horizontal.

101.04 Definitions. The following definitions apply to this contract:

Award — The written acceptance of a bid by the Engineer.

Backfill — Material used to replace or the act of replacing material removed during construction.
Material placed or the act of placing material adjacent to structures.

Base — The layer or layers of material placed on a subbase or subgrade to support a surface course.

Bid — A written offer by a bidder to perform work at a quoted price.

Bidder — Any individual or legal entity submitting a bid.

Bid Guarantee — A form of security assuring that the bidder will not withdraw a bid within the
period specified for acceptance and will execute a written contract and furnish required bonds.

Bid Schedule — The prepared schedule included with the bid forms, containing the estimated
quantities of pay items for which unit bid prices are invited.

Bridge — A structure more than 6 meters long, including supports, spanning and providing passage
over a depression, waterway, railroad, carriageway, highway, or other obstruction.

Clear Zone — The portion of the roadside, including the shoulder, available for the safe use by an
errant vehicle in which the driver may regain control of the vehicle.

Commercial Certification — See Subsection 106.03.

Construction Limits — The limits on each side of the project that establish the area disturbed by
construction operations and beyond which no disturbance is permitted. Typically the construction
limits are the same as the clearing limits, except when additional clearing is required.

Contract — The written agreement between the Government and the Contractor setting forth the
obligations of the parties for the performance of and payment for the prescribed work.

Section 101 – Terms, Format, and Definitions 5

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Engineer — An official of the Government with the authority to enter into, administer, and terminate
contracts and make related determinations and findings. The term includes certain authorized
representatives of the Engineer acting within the limits of their authority as delegated by the Engineer.

Contract Modification — Any written change in the terms of the contract. Contract modifications are
of the following forms:

(a) Administrative change. A unilateral contract change, in writing, that does not affect the
substantive rights of the parties (e.g., a change in the paying office or the appropriation data).

(b) Change order. A written order, signed by the Engineer, directing the Contractor to make a
change.

(c) Supplemental agreement. A contract modification that is accomplished by the signature of the
Engineer (unilateral contract modification) or by the signature of the Engineer and the Contractor
(bilateral contract modification).

Contractor — The individual or legal entity contracting with the Government for performance of
prescribed work.

Contract Time — The specified time allowed for completion of contract work.

Crashworthy — A highway feature that has been successfully crash tested under MASH or the
NCHRP Report 350, Recommended Procedures for the Safety Performance Evaluation of Highway
Features, or accepted by the Government of Rwanda.

Cross-Section — A vertical section of the ground or structure at right angles to the centerline or
baseline of the roadway or other work.

Culvert — Any structure, not classified as a bridge, which provides an opening under the roadway.

Day — A calendar day beginning and ending at midnight.

Density — Mass per unit volume of material. Specific gravity multiplied by the density of water.

Detour — A temporary rerouting of public traffic onto alternate existing roadways in order to avoid
the work or part of the work.

Diversion — Defined as follows:

(a) A temporary rerouting of public traffic onto a temporary alignment within the project limits in
order to bypass the work or a portion of the work.

(b) A temporary rerouting of water into a temporary channel or through a system of structures
within the project limits in order to maintain water flow through or around the project.

Drawings — Design sheets or fabrication, erection, or construction details submitted to the Engineer
by the Contractor. Also refers to submissions and submittals.

Government — The Republic of Rwanda.

Section 101 – Terms, Format, and Definitions 6

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Highway, Street, or Road — A general term denoting a public way for purposes of vehicular travel,
including the entire area within the right-of-way.

Lane Kilometer — An area of pavement one mile (kilometer) long and one lane wide; not including
turn lanes, turnouts, parking area lanes, or other auxiliary lanes.

Layer — See "lift".

Lift — Defined as follows:

(a) When placing and compacting soils, aggregates, or pavement; a lift is any single, continuous
layer of material that receives the same compactive effort throughout during a single work
operation.

(b) When installing culvert pipe less than or equal to 1200 millimeter in diameter, the backfill
material placed on both sides of the pipe is considered to be contained in the same lift when the
material is placed to the same elevation on both sides of the culvert, the compactive effort applied
to one side of the culvert is the same as that applied to the other, and the compactive effort is
applied to both sides of the pipe in a continuous operation.

Material — Any substances specified or necessary to satisfactorily complete the contract work.

Measurement — The process of identifying the dimensions, quantity, or capacity of a pay item. See
Section 109 for measurement methods, terms, and definitions.

Notice to Proceed — Written notice to the Contractor to begin the contract work.

Pavement Structure — The combination of subbase, base, paving geotextiles, and surface courses
placed on a subgrade to support and distribute the traffic load to the roadbed.

Pay Item — A specific item of work for which a unit and price is provided in the contract.

Payment Bond — The security executed by the Contractor and surety or sureties and furnished to the
Engineer to ensure payments as required by law to persons supplying labor or material according to the
contract.

Performance Bond — The security executed by the Contractor and surety or sureties furnished to the
Engineer to guarantee completion of the contract work.

Plans — The contract plans furnished by the Government showing the location, type, dimensions, and
details of the work.

Production Certification — See Subsection 106.03.

Professional Engineer — Engineers who hold valid licenses permitting them to offer engineering
services directly to the public, who are experienced in the work for which they are responsible, who
take legal responsibility for their engineering designs, and who are bound by a code of ethics to protect
the public health.

Section 101 – Terms, Format, and Definitions 7

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Profile Grade — The trace of a vertical plane intersecting a particular surface of the proposed road
construction located according to the plans, usually along the longitudinal centerline of the roadbed.
Profile grade means either elevation or gradient of the trace according to the context.

Project — The specific section of the highway or other property on which construction is to be
performed under the contract.

Right-of-Way — Real property necessary for the project, including roadway, buffer areas, access, and
drainage areas.

Roadbed — The graded portion of a highway prepared as a foundation for the pavement structure and
shoulders.

Roadside — The area between the outside shoulder edge and the right-of-way limits. The area
between roadways of a divided highway may also be considered roadside.

Roadway — In general, the portion of a highway, including shoulders, for vehicular use. A divided
highway has two or more roadways. In construction specifications, the portion of a highway within the
construction limits.

Roadway Prism — The volume defined by the area between the original terrain cross-section and the
final design cross-section multiplied by the horizontal distance along the centerline of the roadway.

Roller Pass— One trip of a roller in one direction over any one spot.

Shoulder — A portion of the roadway contiguous with the traveled way for accommodation of
pedestrians, bicycles, stopped vehicles, and emergency use, as well as for lateral support of the
subbase, base, and surface courses.

Sieve — A device for determining aggregate size based on the size and number of openings. See
AASHTO M 92.

Solicitation — The complete assembly of documents (whether attached or incorporated by reference)

furnished to prospective bidders.

Special Contract Requirements (SCR) — Additions and revisions to the standard specifications
applicable to an individual project.

Specifications — The written requirements for performing work.

Standard Forms (SF) — Numbered forms issued by the General Services Administration for use as
contract documents.

Standard Plans — Detailed plans approved for repetitive use and included as part of the plans.

Standard Specifications — The Standard Specifications for Construction of Roads and Bridges in
Rwanda approved for general application and repetitive use.

Station —A precise location along a survey line. Typically measured from a known starting point in
units of 100, such as 1+00 is the same as 100 meters.

Section 101 – Terms, Format, and Definitions 8

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Structures — Bridges, culverts, catch basins, drop inlets, retaining walls, cribbing, manholes,
endwalls, buildings, sewers, service pipes, underdrains, foundation drains, and other constructed
features that may be encountered in the work.

Subbase — The layer or layers of material placed on a subgrade to support a base.

Subcontract — The written agreement between the Contractor and an individual or legal entity
prescribing the performance of a specific portion of the work.

Subcontractor — An individual or legal entity with which the Contractor sublets part of the work.
This includes subcontractors in any tier.

Subgrade — The top surface of a roadbed upon which the pavement structure, shoulders, and curbs
are constructed.

Substantial Completion — The point at which the project is complete such that it can be safely and
effectively used by the public without further delays, disruption, or other impediments. For
conventional bridge and highway work, the point at which bridge deck, parapet, pavement structure,
shoulder, drainage, sidewalk, major demolition, roadway obliteration, permanent signing and
markings, traffic barrier, safety appurtenance, utility, and lighting work is complete.

Substructure — All components of a bridge below the bearings of simple and continuous spans,
skewbacks of arches, and tops of footings of rigid frames including backwalls, wingwalls, and wing
protection railings.

Suitable Material — Rock or earth material that will provide stable foundations, embankments, or
roadbeds, and is free of organic matter, muck, roots, sod, or other deleterious material. Suitable
material may require drying or adding water, root picking, and other methods of manipulation before
use. Suitable material includes the classifications of materials for which the project was designed.

Superintendent — The Contractor's onsite representative who has authority to act for the Contractor
and who is responsible for directing and supervising construction operations on behalf of the
Contractor.

Superstructure — The entire bridge except the substructure.

Surety — An individual or corporation legally liable for the debt, default, or failure of a Contractor to
satisfy a contract obligation.

Surface Course — The top layer or layers of a pavement structure designed to accommodate the
traffic load and resist skidding, traffic abrasion, and weathering. Sometimes refered to as the wearing
course.

Target Value — A number established as a center for operating a given process. Once established,
adjustments should be made in the process as necessary to maintain a central tendency about the target
value. Test results obtained from a well-controlled process should cluster closely around the
established target value and the mean of the test results should be equal to or nearly equal to the
established target value.

Traveled Way — The portion of the roadway designated for the movement of vehicles, exclusive of
shoulders.

Section 101 – Terms, Format, and Definitions 9

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Unsuitable Material — Material not capable of creating stable foundations, embankments, or

roadbeds. Unsuitable material includes muck, sod, debris, or soils with high organic contents or
engineering characteristics.

Work — Includes but is not limited to, the furnishing of labor, material, equipment, workmanship,
manufacture/fabrication of components and other incidentals necessary to complete the project
according to the contract.

Working Days – A calendar day on which weather and other conditions not under the control of the
Contractor will permit construction operations to proceed for the major part of the day (5 hours) with
normal working force engaged in performing the controlling item or items of work which would be in
progress at that time, exclusive however of Saturday, Sundays, and recognized holidays. If the
Contractor elects to work on such days, and the Engineer allows it, those days will not be considered as
working days

Section 101 – Terms, Format, and Definitions 10

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 103. — SCOPE OF WORK

103.01 Intent of Contract. The intent of the contract is to provide for the construction and completion
of the work described. The precise details of performing the work are not described except as
considered essential for the successful completion of the work. Furnish labor, material, equipment,
tools, transportation, and supplies necessary to complete the work according to the contract.

103.02 Disputes. All disputes arising under or relating to this contract shall be resolved under this
clause.

Claim,” as used in this clause, means a written demand or written assertion by one of the contracting
parties seeking, as a matter of right, the payment of money in a sum certain, the adjustment or
interpretation of contract terms, or other relief arising under or relating to this contract. However, a
written demand or written assertion by the Contractor seeking the payment of money exceeding
$100,000 is not a claim under the Act until certified. A voucher, invoice, or other routine request for
payment that is not in dispute when submitted is not a claim under the Act. The submission may be
converted to a claim under the Act, by complying with the submission and certification requirements of
this clause, if it is disputed either as to liability or amount or is not acted upon in a reasonable time.

A claim by the Contractor shall be made in writing and, unless otherwise stated in this contract,
submitted within 1 year after accrual of the claim to the Engineer for a written decision. A claim by the
Government against the Contractor shall be subject to a written decision by the Engineer.

When the Contractor is submitting a claim exceeding $100,000 USD , the Contractor shall provide the
following certification in the claim:

“I certify that the claim is made in good faith; that the supporting data are accurate and
complete to the best of my knowledge and belief; that the amount requested accurately reflects
the contract adjustment for which the Contractor believes the Government is liable; and that I
am duly authorized to certify the claim on behalf of the Contractor.”

The certification requirement does not apply to issues in controversy that have not been submitted as
all or part of a claim.

The certification may be executed by any person duly authorized to bind the Contractor with respect to
the claim.

For Contractor claims of $100,000 or less, the Engineer must, if requested in writing by the Contractor,
render a decision within 60 days of the request. For Contractor-certified claims over $100,000 USD,
the Engineer must, within 60 days, decide the claim or notify the Contractor of the date by which the
decision will be made.

The Engineer’s decision shall be final unless the Contractor appeals or files a suit as provided in the
Act.

If the claim by the Contractor is submitted to the Engineer or a claim by the Government is presented
to the Contractor, the parties, by mutual consent, may agree to use alternative dispute resolution

Section 103 – Scope of Work 11

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(ADR). If the Contractor refuses an offer for ADR, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer, in
writing, of the Contractor’s specific reasons for rejecting the offer.

The Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of this contract, pending final resolution of
any request for relief, claim, appeal, or action arising under the contract, and comply with any decision
of the Engineer.

When requesting a Engineer's decision on an interpretation of contract terms for the recovery of
increased costs, quantify the amount, certify the amount. Include an explanation of the interpretation of
contract terms, the contract clause under which the claim is made, supporting documentation, and
adequate cost data to support the amount claimed.

103.03 Value Engineering. The Contractor is encouraged to develop, prepare, and submit value
engineering change proposals (VECP’s) voluntarily. The Contractor shall share in any instant contract
savings realized from accepted VECP’s, in accordance with paragraph (e) of this clause.

(a) Definitions. “Collateral costs,” as used in this clause, means agency costs of operation,
maintenance, logistic support, or Government-furnished property.

“Collateral savings,” as used in this clause, means those measurable net reductions resulting from a
VECP in the agency’s overall projected collateral costs, exclusive of acquisition savings, whether or
not the acquisition cost changes.

“Contractor’s development and implementation costs,” as used in this clause, means those costs the
Contractor incurs on a VECP specifically in developing, testing, preparing, and submitting the VECP,
as well as those costs the Contractor incurs to make the contractual changes required by Government
acceptance of a VECP.

“Government costs,” as used in this clause, means those agency costs that result directly from
developing and implementing the VECP, such as any net increases in the cost of testing, operations,
maintenance, and logistic support. The term does not include the normal administrative costs of
processing the VECP.

“Instant contract savings,” as used in this clause, means the estimated reduction in Contractor cost of
performance resulting from acceptance of the VECP, minus allowable Contractor’s development and
implementation costs, including subcontractors’ development and implementation costs (see
paragraph (h) of this clause).

“Value engineering change proposal (VECP)” means a proposal that—

(1) Requires a change to this, the instant contract, to implement; and

(2) Results in reducing the contract price or estimated cost without impairing essential
functions or characteristics; provided, that it does not involve a change—

(i) In deliverable end item quantities only; or

(ii) To the contract type only.

Section 103 – Scope of Work 12

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) VECP preparation. As a minimum, the Contractor shall include in each VECP the information
described in paragraphs (c)(1) through (7) of this clause. If the proposed change is affected by
contractually required configuration management or similar procedures, the instructions in those
procedures relating to format, identification, and priority assignment shall govern VECP
preparation. The VECP shall include the following:

(1) A description of the difference between the existing contract requirement and that proposed,
the comparative advantages and disadvantages of each, a justification when an item’s function
or characteristics are being altered, and the effect of the change on the end item’s performance.

(2) A list and analysis of the contract requirements that must be changed if the VECP is
accepted, including any suggested specification revisions.

(3) A separate, detailed cost estimate for (i) the affected portions of the existing contract
requirement and (ii) the VECP. The cost reduction associated with the VECP shall take into
account the Contractor’s allowable development and implementation costs, including any
amount attributable to subcontracts under paragraph (h) of this clause.

(4) A description and estimate of costs the Government may incur in implementing the VECP,
such as test and evaluation and operating and support costs.

(5) A prediction of any effects the proposed change would have on collateral costs to the
agency.

(6) A statement of the time by which a contract modification accepting the VECP must be
issued in order to achieve the maximum cost reduction, noting any effect on the contract
completion time or delivery schedule.

(7) Identification of any previous submissions of the VECP, including the dates submitted, the
agencies and contract numbers involved, and previous Government actions, if known.

(c) Submission. The Contractor shall submit VECP’s to the Resident Engineer at the worksite, with
a copy to the Engineer.

(d) Government action.

(1) The Engineer will notify the Contractor of the status of the VECP within 45 calendar days
after the contracting office receives it. If additional time is required, the Engineer will notify the
Contractor within the 45-day period and provide the reason for the delay and the expected date
of the decision. The Government will process VECP’s expeditiously; however, it will not be
liable for any delay in acting upon a VECP.

(2) If the VECP is not accepted, the Engineer will notify the Contractor in writing, explaining
the reasons for rejection. The Contractor may withdraw any VECP, in whole or in part, at any
time before it is accepted by the Government. The Engineer may require that the Contractor
provide written notification before undertaking significant expenditures for VECP effort.

(3) Any VECP may be accepted, in whole or in part, by the Engineer’s award of a modification
to this contract citing this clause. The Engineer may accept the VECP, even though an
agreement on price reduction has not been reached, by issuing the Contractor a notice to
proceed with the change. Until a notice to proceed is issued or a contract modification applies a

Section 103 – Scope of Work 13

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

VECP to this contract, the Contractor shall perform in accordance with the existing contract.
The decision to accept or reject all or part of any VECP is a unilateral decision made solely at
the discretion of the Engineer.

(e) Sharing—

(1) Rates. The Government’s share of savings is determined by subtracting Government costs
from instant contract savings and multiplying the result by—

(i) 45 percent for fixed-price contracts; or

(ii) 75 percent for cost-reimbursement contracts.

(2) Payment. Payment of any share due the Contractor for use of a VECP on this contract shall
be authorized by a modification to this contract to—

(i) Accept the VECP;

(ii) Reduce the contract price or estimated cost by the amount of instant contract savings;
and

(iii) Provide the Contractor’s share of savings by adding the amount calculated to the
contract price or fee.

(f) Collateral savings. If a VECP is accepted, the Engineer will increase the instant contract amount by
20 percent of any projected collateral savings determined to be realized in a typical year of use after
subtracting any Government costs not previously offset. However, the Contractor’s share of collateral
savings will not exceed the contract’s firm-fixed-price or estimated cost, at the time the VECP is
accepted, or $100,000, whichever is greater. The Engineer is the sole determiner of the amount of
collateral savings.

(g) Subcontracts. The Contractor shall include an appropriate value engineering clause in any
subcontract of $55,000 or more and may include one in subcontracts of lesser value. In computing any
adjustment in this contract’s price under paragraph (e) of this clause, the Contractor’s allowable
development and implementation costs shall include any subcontractor’s allowable development and
implementation costs clearly resulting from a VECP accepted by the Government under this contract,
but shall exclude any value engineering incentive payments to a subcontractor. The Contractor may
choose any arrangement for subcontractor value engineering incentive payments; provided, that these
payments shall not reduce the Government’s share of the savings resulting from the VECP.

(h) Data. The Contractor may restrict the Government’s right to use any part of a VECP or the
supporting data by marking the following legend on the affected parts:

These data, furnished under the Value Engineering—Construction clause of contract ___________,
shall not be disclosed outside the Government or duplicated, used, or disclosed, in whole or in part, for
any purpose other than to evaluate a value engineering change proposal submitted under the clause.
This restriction does not limit the Government’s right to use information contained in these data if it
has been obtained or is otherwise available from the Contractor or from another source without
limitations.

Section 103 – Scope of Work 14

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

If a VECP is accepted, the Contractor hereby grants the Government unlimited rights in the VECP and
supporting data, except that, with respect to data qualifying and submitted as limited rights technical
data, the Government shall have the rights specified in the contract modification implementing the
VECP and shall appropriately mark the data.

Before undertaking significant expenditures, submit a written description of the value engineering
change proposal (VECP) concept. Within 14 days, the Engineer will inform the Contractor as to
whether the concept appears to be viable or if the concept is unacceptable. If the Engineer indicates that
the concept appears to be viable, prepare and submit the formal VECP proposal.

103.04 Contractor Records. Upon request, provide records related to the contract to the Government
for up to 3 years after final payment and for longer periods as provided by law.

Include a provision in all subcontracts at all tiers giving the Government the same rights as provided
above with respect to the subcontractor's records.

Section 103 – Scope of Work 15

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 104. — CONTROL OF WORK

104.01 Authority of the Engineer. The Engineer may delegate authority to representatives to decide
on acceptability of work, progress of work, suspension of work, interpretation of the contract, and
acceptable fulfillment of the contract. The term Engineer includes authorized representatives of the
Engineer, including inspectors, acting within the limits of their authority as delegated by the Engineer.

104.02 Authority of Inspectors. Inspectors are authorized to inspect work including the preparation,
fabrication, or manufacture of material for the project. The inspector is not authorized to alter or waive
contract requirements, issue instruction contrary to the contract, act as foreman for the Contractor, or
direct the Contractor's operations. The inspector has authority to identify non-conforming work until
the issue can be referred to and decided by the Engineer. The inspector has the authority to take
necessary action to prevent imminent and substantial risk of death or injury including stopping work.

104.03 Specifications and Drawings.

The Contractor shall keep on the work site a copy of the drawings and specifications and shall at all
times give the Engineer access thereto. Anything mentioned in the specifications and not shown on
the drawings, or shown on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, shall be of like
effect as if shown or mentioned in both. In case of difference between drawings and specifications,
the specifications shall govern. In case of discrepancy in the figures, in the drawings, or in the
specifications, the matter shall be promptly submitted to the Engineer, who shall promptly make a
determination in writing. Any adjustment by the Contractor without such a determination shall be at
its own risk and expense. The Engineer shall furnish from time to time such detailed drawings and
other information as considered necessary, unless otherwise provided.

Wherever in the specifications or upon the drawings the words directed, required, ordered,
designated, prescribed, or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction,
requirement, order, designation,or prescription, of the Engineer is intended and similarly the words
approved,acceptable, satisfactory, or words of like import shall mean approved by, or acceptable
to,or satisfactory to the Engineer, unless otherwise expressly stated.

Where as shown, as indicated, as detailed,or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood
that the reference is made to the drawings accompanying this contract unless stated otherwise. The
word provided as used herein shall be understood to mean provide complete in place, that is
furnished and installed.

Shop drawings means drawings, submitted to the Government by the Contractor, subcontractor, or
any lower tier subcontractor pursuant to a construction contract, showing in detail (1) the proposed
fabrication and assembly of structural elements and (2) the installation (i.e., form, fit, and attachment
details) of materials or equipment. It includes drawings, diagrams, layouts, schematics, descriptive
literature, illustrations, schedules, performance and test data, and similar materials furnished by the
contractor to explain in detail specific portions of the work required by the contract. The Government
may duplicate, use, and disclose in any manner and for any purpose shop drawings delivered under
this contract.

If this contract requires shop drawings, the Contractor shall coordinate all such drawings, and review
them for accuracy, completeness, and compliance with contract requirements and shall indicate its
approval thereon as evidence of such coordination and review. Shop drawings submitted to the

Section 104 – Control of Work 16

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Engineer without evidence of the Contractor’s approval may be returned for resubmission. The
Engineer will indicate an approval or disapproval of the shop drawings and if not approved as
submitted shall indicate the Government’s reasons therefor. Any work done before such approval
shall be at the Contractor’s risk. Approval by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from
responsibility for any errors or omissions in such drawings, nor from responsibility for complying
with the requirements of this contract, except with respect to variations described and approved in
accordance with below.

If shop drawings show variations from the contract requirements, the Contractor shall describe such
variations in writing, separate from the drawings, at the time of submission. If the Engineer approves
any such variation, the Engineer shall issue an appropriate contract modification, except that, if the
variation is minor or does not involve a change in price or in time of performance, a modification
need not be issued.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval four copies (unless otherwise indicated) of
all shop drawings as called for under the various headings of these specifications. Three sets (unless
otherwise indicated) of all shop drawings, will be retained by the Engineer and one set will be
returned to the Contractor

(a) General. Review and submit documents required to construct the work for accuracy,
completeness, and compliance with the contract requirements for approval by the Engineer.
Documents submitted without evidence of Contractor approval may be returned for resubmission.
Time for approval starts over when documents are returned for revision or if additional information
is requested by the Engineer. Do not perform work related to submitted documents or drawings
before approval of the Engineer.

(1) Documents other than drawings. Documents other than drawings include descriptive
literature, illustrations, schedules, performance and test data, and similar materials submitted by
the Contractor to certify or explain, in detail, specific portions of the work required by the
contract. Unless otherwise indicated by the contract; submit 3 paper copies and an electronic
copy for review. Allow 14 days for approval by the Engineer unless otherwise specified.
(2) Drawings. Drawings include:
(a) Layouts that show the relative position (vertical and horizontal as appropriate) of work
to be performed;
(b) Fabrication details for manufactured items and assemblies;
(c) Installation and erection procedures;
(d) Details of post-tensioning and other systems;
(e) Detailed trench and excavation procedures that conform to OSHA requirements;
(f) Traffic control implementation drawings; and
(g) Methods for performing work near existing structures or other areas to be protected.
Show drawing dimensions in the same units as shown in the plans. Limit drawings to a
maximum size of 610 by 920 millimeters. Include on each drawing and calculation sheet, the
project number, name, and other identification as shown in the contract.

Section 104 – Control of Work 17

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Submit 3 paper sets of drawings, an electronic set of the drawings, and supporting calculations.
Drawings will be reviewed in the order they are received. Allow 40 days for Engineer approval
of railroad structure drawings and 30 days for approval of other drawings. Submit additional
specific drawings for unique situations in order to clarify layout, construction details, or
methodology when requested by the Engineer. Obtain written approval before changing or
deviating from the accepted drawings.
(b) Specific requirements for concrete and miscellaneous structures.

(1) Submit drawings for the following:

(a) Site-specific layouts for all wall types and gabion installations;
(b) Gabion and revet mattress details and installation procedures;
(c) Forms and falsework for cast-in-place non-bridge concrete structures and retaining
walls greater than or equal to 1.8 meters in height;
(d) Fabrication drawings for bridge railings and parapets;
(e) Fabrication drawings for prestressed members;
(f) Fabrication and installation drawings for expansion joint assemblies;
(g) Fabrication drawings for bearing assemblies;
(h) Construction joint location and concrete deck placement sequences not according to
the plans;
(i) Erection diagrams for Soil-Corrugated Metal Structure interaction systems (multi-plate
structures);
(j) Structural steel fabrication drawings;
(k) Utility hangar details;
(l) Fabrication and installation drawings for precast items; and
(m) Site-specific layouts for rockeries.
(2) Submit drawings that bear signature of a Senior Engineer proficient in the pertinent
design field for the following:
(a) Forms and falsework for cast-in-place concrete structures greater than 1.8 meters in
height;
(b) Shoring systems and cofferdams greater than 1.8 meters in height;
(c) Shoring systems that support traffic loadings;
(d) Bridge concrete forms, including deck forms; except for railings, parapets, and
components less than 1.8 meters in height;
(e) Containment structures for bridge work;
(f) Girder erection plans;
(g) Partial demolition of structural bridge elements;

Section 104 – Control of Work 18

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(h) Post-tensioning systems;

(i) Concrete box culvert and headwall details;
(j) Reinforced soil slopes details;
(k) Ground anchors, soil nail, rock bolt, driven pile, drilled shaft, and micropile assembly
details, layout, and installation and testing procedures;
(l) MSE and tie back wall details;
(m) Alternate retaining wall details; and
(n) Details and installation procedures for proprietary wall systems.
(3) Submit drawings that bear the seal and signature of a professional engineer who is
proficient in forms and falsework design and licensed in the state where the project will be
constructed for the following:
(a) Falsework for any structure with a span exceeding 4.8 meters;
(b) Falsework for any structure with a height exceeding 4.3 meters;
(c) Falsework for structures where traffic, other than workers involved in constructing the
structure, will travel under the structure; and
(d) Temporary bridge structures for public use.
(c) As-built drawings. Use one set of Government-provided plans exclusively for as-built
drawings. Use the color "red" to identify changes. Use approved methods to accurately and
neatly record changes. Include details and notes on additional information uncovered in the
course of construction. Note additions or revisions to the location, character, and dimensions of
the required work. Strikeout details shown that are not applicable to the completed work.

As work progresses, continuously update plan sheets to reflect the as-built details. Check and
initial plan sheets that were incorporated into the completed work without change. Include the
following:

(1) Title sheet.

(a) "AS-BUILT DRAWINGS" (bold text);
(b) Name of Contractor;
(c) Name of Engineer’s on-site representative;
(d) Project completion date;
(e) Revisions to project length;
(f) Revisions to begin and end stations of project;
(h) Revisions to index to sheets;
(i) Revisions to curve widening table;
(j) Strikeout any schedules or options not awarded;
(k) A note stating "Work was constructed as designed unless otherwise noted."; and

Section 104 – Control of Work 19

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(l) Plan notes.

(2)Typical section sheets.
(a) Revisions in dimensions;
(b) Revisions in material;
(c) Revisions in station range;
(d) Revisions to begin and end stations of project; and
(e) Strikeout schedules or options not awarded.
(3) Summary of Quantities and Tabulation sheets.
(a) Revisions to quantities, locations, notes/remarks, including totals;
(b) Strikeout unused pay items;
(c) Revisions to application rates; and
(d) Revisions to location, type, end treatments, riprap, and skew on the drainage
summary.
(4) Plan and profile sheets. Note additions or revisions to the location, character, and
dimensions of the following items:
(a) Plan.
(1) Alignment and curve and spiral information;
(2) Construction limits;
(3) Right of way;
(4) Road approaches;
(5) Sub-excavation and roadway obliteration;
(6) Underdrains;
(7) Trenches and drains;
(8) Channels and ditches;
(9) Monuments and permanent references;
(10) Constructed, relocated, or encountered utilities; and
(11) Walls.
(b) Profile.
(1) Grades, elevations, and stationing of points of intersection;
(2) Equations;
(3) Culvert diameter, length, type, and stationing;
(4) Culvert extension, and length of existing culvert;

Section 104 – Control of Work 20

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(5) Walls; and

(6) Guardrail, guardwall, and end treatment.
(5) Bridge sheets. Note additions or revisions to the location, character, and dimensions of
the following items:
(a) Stationing of bridge ends;
(b) Elevations including footing, bearing pads, deck, and top of walls;
(c) Pile driving record with pile length, size, type, and tip elevation;
(d) Modifications or repairs to drilled shafts or micropiles;
(e) Micropile installation records with drilling duration and observations, drill log, final
location and inclination, final tip elevation, cut-off elevation, modification or repairs,
grout pressures and quantities, and test records;
(f) Post-tensioning records including stressing sequence, jacking force, and duct size and
layout;
(g) Construction and concrete placement sequences;
(h) Bearing details with orientation;
(i) Expansion joints including actual clearance with atmospheric temperature at time of
setting joints; and
(j) Any changes in plan or dimensions including changes in reinforcing.
(6) Miscellaneous sheets. Note additions or revisions to the location, character, and
dimensions of the following items:
(a) Parking areas and turnouts;
(b) Curbs and sidewalks;
(c) Fencing;
(d) Landscaping and planting;
(e) Pavement markings;
(f) Signs;
(g) Permanent erosion control measures; and
(h) Any plan notes.
(7) Standard and detail sheets. Note the additions or revisions to the character and
dimensions of details.
Retain the drawings at the project site.

Keep the as-built drawings current and maintain a revision log of changes made. Meet with the
Engineer to jointly review the as-built drawings and log for accuracy, completeness, and
legibility before submission of each monthly invoice.

Section 104 – Control of Work 21

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Submit the final as-built drawings and revision logs before the final inspection. Correct errors
and omissions found during the final inspection and resubmit the final as-built drawings for
approval within 7 days after the final inspection.

When the final as-built drawings are approved, submit the finalized set of as-built drawings and a
single file, electronic color copy of the drawings. Submit the electronic copy in an approved format
on a CD-R, DVD-R, or other approved electronic media. Include the latest version of the approved
reader on the electronic media. Provide a resolution quality where color, text, and lines are clearly
discernible.

104.04 Coordination of Contract Documents. The special contract requirements, plans, and standard
specifications are contract documents. A requirement in one document is binding as though occurring
in all the contract documents. The contract documents are intended to be complementary and to
describe and provide for a complete contract. In case of discrepancy, calculated and shown dimensions
govern over scaled dimensions. The contract documents govern in the following order:

(a) Special contract requirements;

(b) Plans; and

(c) Standard specifications.

104.05 Load Restrictions.

The Contractor shall, under regulations prescribed by the Engineer, use only established roadways,
or use temporary roadways constructed by the Contractor when and as authorized by the Engineer.
When materials are transported in prosecuting the work, vehicles shall not be loaded beyond the
loading capacity recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle or prescribed by any law or
regulation. When it is necessary to cross curbs or sidewalks, the Contractor shall protect them from
damage. The Contractor shall repair or pay for the repair of any damaged curbs, sidewalks, or roads.

Comply with legal load restrictions when hauling material and equipment on public roads and bridges
to and from the project. A special permit does not relieve the Contractor of liability for damage
resulting from the moving of material or equipment.

Unless otherwise permitted, do not operate equipment or vehicles that exceed the legal load limits over
new or existing structures, or pavements within the project; except those pavements to be removed
during the same construction season.

104.06 Temporary Buildings and Utilities

The Contractor shall confine all operations (including storage of materials) on Government premises
to areas authorized or approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall hold and save the
Government, its officers and agents, free and harmless from liability of any nature occasioned by the
Contractor’s performance.

Temporary buildings (e.g., storage sheds, shops, offices) and utilities may be erected by the
Contractor only with the approval of the Engineer and shall be built with labor and materials
furnished by the Contractor without expense to the Government. The temporary buildings and
utilities shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall be removed by the Contractor at its

Section 104 – Control of Work 22

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

expense upon completion of the work. With the written consent of the Engineer, the buildings and
utilities may be abandoned and need not be removed.

104.07 Other Contracts

The Government may undertake or award other contracts for additional work at or near the site of the
work under this contract. The Contractor shall fully cooperate wit the other Contractors and with
government employees and shall carefully adapt scheduling and performing the work under this
contract to accommodate the additional work, heeding any direction that maybe provided by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall not commit or permit any act that will interfere with the performance of
work by any other Contractor or by government employees.

104.08 Inspection of Work by Others

For observing work that affects their respective properties, inspectors from the public agencies and
utility companies shall be permitted access to the works, but all official orders and directives to the
Contractor will be issued only by the Engineer.

Section 104 – Control of Work 23

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 105. — CONTROL OF MATERIAL

105.01 Source of Supply and Quality Requirements.

All equipment, material, and articles incorporated into the work covered by this contract shall be new
and of the most suitable grade for the purpose intended, unless otherwise specifically provided in this
contract. References in the specifications to equipment, material, articles, or patented processes by
trade name, make, or catalog number, shall be regarded as establishing a standard of quality and shall
not be construed as limiting competition. The Contractor may, at its option, use any equipment,
material, article, or process that, in the judgment of the Engineer, is equal to that named in the
specifications, unless otherwise specifically provided in this contract.

The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s approval of the machinery and mechanical and other
equipment to be incorporated into the work. When requesting approval, the Contractor shall furnish
to the Engineer the name of the manufacturer, the model number, and other information concerning
the performance, capacity, nature, and rating of the machinery and mechanical and other equipment.
When required by this contract or by the Engineer, the Contractor shall also obtain the Engineer’s
approval of the material or articles which the Contractor contemplates incorporating into the work.
When requesting approval, the Contractor shall provide full information concerning the material or
articles. When directed to do so, the Contractor shall submit samples for approval at the Contractor’s
expense, with all shipping charges prepaid. Machinery, equipment, material, and articles that do not
have the required approval shall be installed or used at the risk of subsequent rejection.

All work under this contract shall be performed in a skillful and workmanlike manner. The Engineer
may require, in writing, that the Contractor remove from the work any employee the Engineer deems
incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable.

Select sources and submit acceptable material. Notify the Engineer of proposed sources before delivery
to the project to expedite material inspection and testing. Do not incorporate material requiring
submittal into the work until approved.

Material may be approved at the source of supply before delivery to the project. Approval of a material
source does not constitute acceptance of material submitted from the source. If an approved source
fails to supply acceptable material during the life of the project, further use of that source may be
denied.

Submit samples of material for source quality verification testing for material required to conform to
Sections 703, 704, and 705.

105.02 Material Sources.

(a) Government-provided sources. The Government will acquire the permits and rights to
remove material from provided sources identified in the contract and to use such property for a
plant site and stockpiles. Test reports and available historical material data will be furnished to the
Contractor upon request.

Do not perform work within a source until a source development plan is approved. Allow 7 days
for approval. Include the following as applicable:

Section 105 – Control of Material 24

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(1) Requirements of written agreements;

(2) Requirements in Sections 107, 157, 204, 205, 624, and 625;
(3) Source development details;
(4) Restoration details; and
(5) Abandonment details.
Perform work necessary to produce acceptable material including work required by the approved
source development plan.

The quality of material is generally acceptable. Variations in quality should be expected as it is not
feasible to ascertain the quality of material for an entire deposit from exploratory samples.
Determine the quantity, type of equipment, and work necessary and produce acceptable material to
be incorporated into the work. Do not perform aggregate source quality tests listed in the Sampling,
Testing, and Acceptance Requirements table of other Sections when using Government-provided
sources. Perform quality control sampling and testing according to the approved Contractor Quality
Control Plan in Section 153 and the applicable Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
tables included at the end of each Section. Allow the Engineer the opportunity to witness sampling
and splitting of the test material.

(b) Government-provided material stockpile. The quality of the material in the stockpile has
been preapproved unless otherwise noted and is considered acceptable for the application for which
it has been designated. Perform quality control sampling and testing according to the approved
Contractor Quality Control Plan in Section 153 and the applicable Sampling, Testing, and
Acceptance Requirements table included at the end of each Section. Test results submitted will be
for the Government’s information only. Allow the Engineer the opportunity to witness sampling
and testing of the test material.

(c) Contractor-located sources. The Contractor is responsible for Contractor-located material

sources, including established commercial material sources. Use sources that fulfill the contract
quantity and quality requirements. Determine the quantity, type of equipment, and work necessary
to select and produce an acceptable material. Secure permits and clearances for use of the source
and submit copies of the documents to the Engineer. Follow the environmental requirements of
Subsection 107.10(d). Submit available historical data indicating acceptable material can be
produced from the source. Perform quality control sampling and testing according to the approved
Contractor Quality Control Plan in Section 153, aggregate source quality tests, and applicable
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements table included at the end of each Section. Allow
the Engineer the opportunity to witness sampling and splitting of the test material.

105.03 Material Source Management. Notify the Engineer at least 14 days before starting operations
in the source. Develop and operate according to the approved source development plan for
Government-provided sources or written agreement for Contractor-located sources.

Before developing a material source, measure the sediment content of bodies of water adjacent to the
work area that will receive drainage from the work area. Perform erosion and sediment control
according to the source development plan and the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) or
Erosion Control Plan.

Section 105 – Control of Material 25

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Do not remove material measured in-place from borrow sources or Government-provided stockpiles
until initial ground survey measurements have been taken according to Subsection 204.16(b) and
approved. Perform final ground survey measurements according to Subsection 204.16(b).

Dispose of rejected material in an approved manner.

105.04 Storing and Handling Material. Store and handle material to preserve its quality and fitness
for the work. Stored material approved before storage may again be inspected before use in the work.
Locate stored material to facilitate prompt inspection.

Use only approved portions of the right-of-way for storing material or equipment. Provide additional
space as needed. Do not use private property for storage without written permission of the owner or
lessee. Submit copies of agreements and documents.

Provide security for stored material. The Contractor and not the Governement is responsible for the
security of their project materials and any materials provided to them by the Government.

Restore Government-provided storage sites to their original condition unless otherwise directed in
writing by the Government.

105.05 Use of Material Found in the Work. Stone, gravel, sand, or other material found in the
excavation may be used for another pay item when approved. If material found in the excavation is
used for another pay item, material will be paid both as excavation and as the other pay item for
which it is used. Replace excavation used with acceptable material at no cost to the Government.
Excavate or remove material only from within the grading limits, as indicated by the slope and grade
lines.

The right to use and process material found in the work does not include the use and processing of
material for nongovernment contract work except for the disposal of waste material. If the Contractor
produces or processes material from Government lands in excess of the quantities required for the
contract, the Government may:

(a) Take possession of the excess material and direct its use, paying the Contractor only for the cost
of production or

(b) Require removal of the material and restoration of the land to a satisfactory condition at no cost
to the Government.

105.06 Material Source Restoration. Restore Government-provided sources according to the

approved source development plan. Restack the unused portion of the Government-provided stockpiles
upon completion of the work at no cost to the Government. Do not measure restoration of material
sources for payment.

Section 105 – Control of Material 26

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 106. — ACCEPTANCE OF WORK

106.01 Conformity with Contract Requirements.

The Contractor shall maintain an adequate inspection system and perform such inspections as will
ensure that the work performed under the contract conforms to contract requirements. The Contractor
shall maintain complete inspection records and make them available to the Government. All work
shall be conducted under the general direction of the Engineer and is subject to Government
inspection and test at all places and at all reasonable times before acceptance to ensure strict
compliance with the terms of the contract.

Government inspections and tests are for the sole benefit of the Government and do not—

(1) Relieve the Contractor of responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures;

(2) Relieve the Contractor of responsibility for damage to or loss of the material before acceptance;

(3) Constitute or imply acceptance; or

(4) Affect the continuing rights of the Government after acceptance of the completed work.

The presence or absence of a Government inspector does not relieve the Contractor from any
contract requirement, nor is the inspector authorized to change any term or condition of the
specification without the Engineer’s written authorization.

The Contractor shall promptly furnish, at no increase in contract price, all facilities, labor, and
material reasonably needed for performing such safe and convenient inspections and tests as may be
required by the Engineer. The Government may charge to the Contractor any additional cost of
inspection or test when work is not ready at the time specified by the Contractor for inspection or
test, or when prior rejection makes reinspection or retest necessary. The Government shall perform
all inspections
and tests in a manner that will not unnecessarily delay the work. Special, full size, and performance
tests shall be performed as described in the contract.

The Contractor shall, without charge, replace or correct work found by the Government not to
conform to contract requirements, unless in the public interest the Government consents to accept the
work with an appropriate adjustment in contract price. The Contractor shall promptly segregate and
remove rejected material from the premises.

If the Contractor does not promptly replace or correct rejected work, the Government may (1) by
contract or otherwise, replace or correct the work and charge the cost to the Contractor or (2)
terminate for default the Contractor’s right to proceed.

If, before acceptance of the entire work, the Government decides to examine already completed work
by removing it or tearing it out, the Contractor, on request, shall promptly furnish all necessary
facilities, labor, and material. If the work is found to be defective or nonconforming in any material
respect due to the fault of the Contractor or its subcontractors, the Contractor shall defray the
expenses of the examination and of satisfactory reconstruction. However, if the work is found to

Section 106 – Acceptance of Work 27

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

meet contract requirements, the Engineer shall make an equitable adjustment for the additional
services involved in the examination and reconstruction, including, if completion of the work was
thereby delayed, an extension of time.

Unless otherwise specified in the contract, the Government shall accept, as promptly as practicable
after completion and inspection, all work required by the contract or that portion of the work the
Engineer determines can be accepted separately. Acceptance shall be final and conclusive except for
latent defects, fraud, gross mistakes amounting to fraud, or the Government’s rights under any
warranty or guarantee.

References to standard documents and test methods of AASHTO, ASTM, GSA, and other recognized
standard authorities refer to the documents and methods in effect on the date of the Invitation for Bids
(IFB) or Request for Proposal (RFP).

Specification limits, tolerances, test results, and related calculations are according to ASTM E 29,
Absolute Method.

Perform work to the lines, grades, cross-sections, dimensions, and processes or material requirements
shown in the contract.

Incorporate manufactured material into the work according to the manufacturer’s recommendations or
to these specifications, whichever is stricter.

When standard manufactured items are specified (such as fence, wire, plates, rolled shapes, and pipe
conduits that are identified by gauge, density, or section dimensions) the identification will be
considered to be nominal masses or dimensions. Unless specific contract tolerances are noted,
established manufacturing tolerances will be accepted.

Plan dimensions and contract specification values are the values to be strived for and complied with as
the design values from which any deviations are allowed. Perform work and provide material that is
uniform in character and reasonably close to the prescribed value or within the specified tolerance
range. The purpose of a tolerance range is to accommodate occasional minor variations from the
median zone that are unavoidable for practical reasons.

The Government may inspect, sample, or test work at any time before final acceptance of the project.
If the Government tests work, copies of test reports are furnished to the Contractor upon request.
Government tests may or may not be performed at the work site.

If Government testing is performed on work, the result will be used for acceptance purposes under
Subsection 106.04.

Do not rely on the availability of Government test results for process control.

Acceptable work conforming to the contract will be paid for at the contract unit bid price. Four
methods of determining conformity and accepting work are described in Subsections 106.02 through
106.05. The primary method of acceptance is specified in each Section of work, but work may be
rejected at any time if it is found not to comply with the contract.

For work that is evaluated and accepted under Subsection 106.05, if Contractor testing and
inspection is verified by the Government, the Contractor’s results may be used by the Government to
evaluate work for acceptance. Contractor data will be verified using the F- and t-test statistics in

Section 106 – Acceptance of Work 28

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

comparison to Government test results at a significance level of 0.01. If the Contractor’s data is not
verified and the Engineer determines it to be appropriate, the Government will perform tests
associated for that discrete portion of work. In this situation, the Government test results will control
in determining the acceptability and pay factor of the work.

Remove and replace work that does not conform to the contract, or to prevailing industry standards
where no specific contract requirements are noted, at no cost to the Government.

As an alternative to removal and replacement, the Contractor may submit a written request to:

(a) Have the work accepted at a reduced price; or

(b) Perform corrective measures to bring the work into conformity.

Include supporting rationale and documentation in the request. Include references or data justifying the
proposal based on an evaluation of test results, effect on service life, value of material or work, quality,
aesthetics, and other tangible engineering basis. The Engineer will determine disposition of the
nonconforming work.

106.02 Visual Inspection. Acceptance is based on visual inspection of the work for compliance with
the contract and prevailing industry standards.

106.03 Certification. For material manufactured off-site, use a manufacturer with an ISO 9000
certification or an effective testing and inspection system. Require the manufacturer to clearly mark the
material or packaging with a unique product identification or specification standard to which it is
produced.

When these Standard Specifications or Special Contract Requirements reference certifications,

certificates or certified documents, equipment or individuals, these references refer to documentation of
non-regulatory, peripheral contract requirements that are required to be validated by an individual or
organization having unique knowledge or qualifications to perform such validation.

Check certifications before incorporating the material into the work to ensure that the requirements
of the contract have been met. Mark the certifications with the following information:

• Project number and name;

• Pay item number and description;
• Contractor’s signature; and
• Date.
Material accepted by certification may be sampled and tested at any time. If material is determined not
to be in conformance with the contract, the material will be rejected whether in place or not.

One of the following certifications may be required:

(a) Production certification. Material requiring a production certification is identified in the

Acceptance Subsection of each Section. Submit a production certification from the manufacturer
for each shipment of material. Include the following with each production certification:

Section 106 – Acceptance of Work 29

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(1) Date and place of manufacture;

(2) Lot number or other means of cross-referencing to the manufacturer’s inspection and
testing system; and
(3) Substantiating evidence that the material conforms to the contract quality requirements.
Maintaining substantiating evidence, when required by the contract, that the supplies or services
conform to contract quality requirements, and furnishing such information to the Government as
required., including the following:

(a) Test results on material from the same lot and documentation of the inspection and
testing system;
(b) A statement from the manufacturer that the material complies with contract
requirements; and
(c) Manufacturer’s signature or other means of demonstrating accountability for the
certification.
(b) Commercial certification. Submit one commercial certification for similar material from the
same manufacturer.

A commercial certification is a manufacturer’s or Contractor's representation that the material

complies with the contract requirements. The representation may be labels, catalog data, stamped
specification standards, or supplier's certifications indicating the material is produced to a
commercial standard or specification.

106.04 Measured or Tested Conformance. Perform necessary measurements and tests to ensure
work complies with the contract requirements.

Use prevailing industry standards in the absence of contract requirements or tolerances.

Submit measurements, tests, and supporting data for acceptance.

106.05 Statistical Evaluation of Work and Determination of Pay Factor. Statistical evaluation of
work is a method of analyzing inspection or test results to determine conformity with the contract
requirements. The work will be accepted as follows:

(a) General. For work evaluated based on statistical evaluation, both the Government and
Contractor assume some risk.

The Government's risk is the probability that work of a rejectable quality level is accepted. The
Contractor's risk is either the probability that work produced at an acceptable quality level (AQL) is
rejected (α) or the probability that the work produced at the AQL is accepted at less than the
contract unit bid price (α100).

Acceptable quality level is the lowest percentage of work within the specification limits that is
considered acceptable for payment at contract unit bid price. There are two categories:

• Category I is based on an AQL of 95 percent.

• Category II is based on an AQL of 90 percent.

Section 106 – Acceptance of Work 30

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

In both cases, the Contractor's risk (α100) is 5 percent and the risk of rejection (α) is significantly
lower.
As an incentive to produce uniform quality work and to offset the Contractor's risk, a final payment
greater than the contract unit bid price may be obtained under certain conditions.

The quality characteristics to be evaluated, sampling frequency, sampling location, test methods,
and category are listed in the Acceptance Subsection of each Section. The following applies:

(1) Lot size. A lot is a discrete quantity of work to which the statistical evaluation procedure
is applied. A lot normally represents the total quantity of work produced. More than one lot
may occur if changes in the target values, material sources, or job-mix formula are requested
in writing and approved.
(2) Sampling frequency. The frequency rate shown normally requires at least 5 samples. The
minimum required to perform a statistical evaluation is 3 samples. The maximum obtainable
pay factor with 3, 4, or 5 samples is 1.01. At least 8 samples are required to obtain a 1.05 pay
factor.
If the sampling frequencies and quantity of work would otherwise result in fewer than
8 samples; submit a written request to increase the sampling frequency to provide for at least
8 samples. Submit the request to increase the sampling frequency at least 48 hours before
beginning production. An increase in the sampling frequency may result in a reduced pay
factor.
(3) Sampling location. The exact location of sampling will be determined by the Engineer
based on random numbers.
(4) Specification limits. The specification limits for the quality characteristics are listed in
the contract for the work in question.
(b) Acceptance. The work in the lot will be paid for at a final pay factor when all inspections or
test results are completed and evaluated.

Before determining the final pay factor, the work may be incorporated into the project provided the
current pay factor does not fall below 0.90. If a lot is concluded with fewer than 3 samples, the
material will be evaluated under Subsection 106.04.

If the current pay factor of a lot falls below 0.90, end production. Production may resume after the
Contractor takes effective and acceptable actions to improve the quality of the production.

A lot containing an unsatisfactory percentage of non-specification material (less than 1.00 pay
factor) is accepted provided the lowest single pay factor has not fallen into the reject portion of
Table 106.2.

A lot containing an unsatisfactory percentage of non-specification material with the lowest single
pay factor falling into the reject portion of Table 106.2 is rejected. Remove rejected material from
the work.

When approved, it is permissible to voluntarily remove non-specification material and replace it

with new material to avoid or minimize a pay factor of less than 1.00. New material will be
sampled, tested, and evaluated according to this Subsection.

Section 106 – Acceptance of Work 31

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Any quantity of material may be rejected based on visual inspection or test results. Do not
incorporate rejected material in the work. The results of tests run on rejected material will be
excluded from the lot.

(c) Statistical evaluation. The Variability-Unknown/Standard Deviation Method will be used to

determine the estimated percentage of the lot that is within specification limits.

The estimated percentage of work that is within the specification limits for each quality
characteristic will be determined as follows:

(1) Calculate the arithmetic mean ( x ) of the test values: x = ∑ x

n

where: ∑ = summation of:

x = individual test value
n = total number of test values
(2) Calculate the standard deviation (s):

s= ( )
n ∑ x 2 − (∑ x )
2

n(n − 1)

where: ∑(x2) = summation of the squares of individual test values

(∑x)2 = summation of the individual test values squared
USL - x
(3) Calculate the upper quality index (QU): QU =
s
where: USL = upper specification limit
Note: The USL is equal to the contract specification limit or the target value plus the
allowable deviation.
x − LSL
(4) Calculate the lower quality index (QL): QL =
s
where: LSL = lower specification limit
Note: The LSL is equal to the contract specification limit or the target value minus the
allowable deviation.
(5) From Table 106.1, determine PU (the estimated percentage of work within the USL).
PU corresponds to a given QU. If a USL is not specified, PU is 100.
(6) From Table 106.1, determine PL (the estimated percentage of work within the lot within
the LSL). PL corresponds to a given QL. If an LSL is not specified, PL is 100.
(7) Calculate the total estimated percentage of work within the USL and LSL:
PU + PL - 100
(8) Repeat steps 1 through 7 for each quality characteristic listed for statistical evaluation.

Section 106 – Acceptance of Work 32

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 106.1
Estimated Percent of Work Within Specification Limits
Estimated Percent Upper Quality Index QU or Lower Quality Index QL
within n=10 n=12
Specification Limits n=3 n=4 n=5 n=6 n=7 n=8 n=9 to to
(PU or PL) n=11 n=14
100 1.16 1.49 1.72 1.88 1.99 2.07 2.13 2.20 2.28
99 - 1.46 1.64 1.75 1.82 1.88 1.91 1.96 2.01
98 - 1.43 1.58 1.66 1.72 1.75 1.78 1.81 1.84
97 1.15 1.40 1.52 1.59 1.63 1.66 1.68 1.71 1.73
96 - 1.37 1.47 1.52 1.56 1.58 1.60 1.62 1.64
95 1.14 1.34 1.42 1.47 1.49 1.51 1.52 1.54 1.55
94 - 1.31 1.38 1.41 1.43 1.45 1.46 1.47 1.48
93 1.13 1.28 1.33 1.36 1.38 1.39 1.40 1.41 1.41
92 1.12 1.25 1.29 1.31 1.33 1.33 1.34 1.35 1.35
91 1.11 1.22 1.25 1.27 1.28 1.28 1.29 1.29 1.30
90 1.10 1.19 1.21 1.23 1.23 1.24 1.24 1.24 1.25
89 1.09 1.16 1.18 1.18 1.19 1.19 1.19 1.19 1.20
88 1.07 1.13 1.14 1.14 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15
87 1.06 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.11
86 1.04 1.07 1.07 1.07 1.07 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06
85 1.03 1.04 1.03 1.03 1.03 1.03 1.02 1.02 1.02
84 1.01 1.01 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98
83 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.94
82 0.97 0.95 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.91 0.91 0.91
81 0.95 0.92 0.90 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.87 0.87
80 0.93 0.89 0.87 0.86 0.85 0.85 0.84 0.84 0.84
79 0.91 0.86 0.84 0.82 0.82 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.80
78 0.88 0.83 0.81 0.79 0.79 0.78 0.78 0.77 0.77
77 0.86 0.80 0.77 0.76 0.75 0.75 0.74 0.74 0.74
76 0.83 0.77 0.74 0.73 0.72 0.72 0.71 0.71 0.70
75 0.81 0.74 0.71 0.70 0.69 0.69 0.68 0.68 0.67
74 0.78 0.71 0.68 0.67 0.67 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.64
73 0.75 0.68 0.65 0.64 0.63 0.62 0.62 0.62 0.61
72 0.73 0.65 0.62 0.61 0.60 0.59 0.59 0.59 0.58
71 0.70 0.62 0.59 0.58 0.57 0.57 0.56 0.56 0.55
70 0.67 0.59 0.56 0.55 0.54 0.54 0.53 0.53 0.52
69 0.64 0.56 0.53 0.52 0.51 0.51 0.50 0.50 0.50
68 0.61 0.53 0.50 0.49 0.48 0.48 0.48 0.47 0.47
67 0.58 0.50 0.47 0.46 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.44 0.44
66 0.55 0.47 0.45 0.43 0.43 0.42 0.42 0.42 0.41
65 0.51 0.44 0.42 0.40 0.40 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.38
64 0.48 0.41 0.39 0.38 0.37 0.37 0.36 0.36 0.36
63 0.45 0.38 0.36 0.35 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.33 0.33
62 0.41 0.35 0.33 0.32 0.32 0.31 0.31 0.31 0.30
61 0.38 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.29 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28
60 0.34 0.28 0.28 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
59 0.31 0.27 0.25 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23
58 0.30 0.25 0.23 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
57 0.25 0.20 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18
56 0.20 0.18 0.16 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15
55 0.18 0.15 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13
54 0.15 0.13 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10
53 0.10 0.10 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08
52 0.08 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05
51 0.05 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03
50 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
If the value of QU or QL does not correspond to a value in the table, use the next lower Q value. If QU or QL are negative
values, PU or PL is equal to 100 minus the table value for PU or PL.

Section 106 – Acceptance of Work 33

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 106.1 (Continued)

Estimated Percent of Work Within Specification Limits
Estimated Percent Upper Quality Index QU or Lower Quality Index QL
within n=67
n=15 n=18 n=23 n=30 n=43
Specification Limits to
to to to to to
(PU or PL)
n=17 n=22 n=29 n=42 n=66 ∞
100 2.34 2.39 2.44 2.48 2.51 2.56
99 2.04 2.07 2.09 2.12 2.14 2.16
98 1.87 1.89 1.91 1.93 1.94 1.95
97 1.75 1.76 1.78 1.79 1.80 1.81
96 1.65 1.66 1.67 1.68 1.69 1.70
95 1.56 1.57 1.58 1.59 1.59 1.60
94 1.49 1.50 1.50 1.51 1.51 1.52
93 1.42 1.43 1.43 1.44 1.44 1.44
92 1.36 1.36 1.37 1.37 1.37 1.38
91 1.30 1.30 1.31 1.31 1.31 1.31
90 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.26 1.26
89 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20
88 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15
87 1.11 1.11 1.11 1.11 1.11 1.11
86 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06
85 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02
84 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98
83 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94
82 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90
81 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87
80 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83
79 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.79
78 0.77 0.76 0.76 0.76 0.76 0.76
77 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73
76 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70
75 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.66
74 0.64 0.64 0.64 0.64 0.64 0.63
73 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.60
72 0.58 0.58 0.58 0.58 0.58 0.57
71 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.54
70 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52
69 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49
68 0.47 0.46 0.46 0.46 0.46 0.46
67 0.44 0.44 0.43 0.43 0.43 0.43
66 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.40
65 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38
64 0.36 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35
63 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.32
62 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30
61 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28
60 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
59 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23
58 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
57 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18
56 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15
55 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13
54 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10
53 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08
52 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05
51 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03
50 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
If the value of QU or QL does not correspond to a value in the table, use the next lower Q value. If QU or QL are negative
values, PU or PL is equal to 100 minus the table value for PU or PL.

Section 106 – Acceptance of Work 34

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(d) Pay factor determination (value of the work). The pay factor for a lot will be determined
as follows:

(1) The pay factor for each quality characteristic will be determined from Table 106.2 using
the total number of test values and the total estimated percentage within the specification
limits from Subsection 106.05(c)(7).
(2) When all quality characteristics for a lot are Category I, the lot pay factor is based on the
lowest single pay factor for any Category I quality characteristic. The maximum obtainable
pay factor is 1.05.
(3) When quality characteristics for a lot are both Category I and II, the lot pay factor is based
on the following:
(a) When all Category II quality characteristics are 1.00, the lot payment is based on the
lowest single pay factor for all Category I characteristics. The maximum obtainable pay
factor is 1.05.
(b) When any Category II quality characteristic is less than 1.00, the lot payment is based
on the lowest single pay factor for any Category I or II quality characteristic.
(4) When all quality characteristics for a lot are Category II, the lot pay factor is based on the
lowest single pay factor for any Category II quality characteristic. The maximum obtainable
pay factor is 1.00.
(5) Adjusted payment for material in a lot will be made at a price determined by multiplying
the contract unit bid price by the lot pay factor as determined above, or as described in the
Payment Subsection of the Section ordering the work.

Section 106 – Acceptance of Work 35

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 106.2 Pay Factors

PAY FACTOR Minimum Required Percent of Work Within Specification Limits for a Given Pay Factor (PU + PL) – 100
Category n=10 n=12 n=15 n=18 n=23 n=30 n=43 n=67
n=3 n=4 n=5 n=6 n=7 n=8 n=9 to to to to to to to to
I II n=11 n=14 n=17 n=22 n=29 n=42 n=66 ∞
1.05 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
1.04 100 99 97 95 96 96 96 97 97 97 97
1.03 100 98 96 94 92 93 93 94 95 95 96 96
1.02 99 97 94 91 89 90 91 92 93 93 94 94
1.01 100 100 100 98 95 92 89 87 88 89 90 91 92 92 93
1.00 69 75 78 80 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92
0.99 66 72 76 78 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 89 90 91
0.98 64 70 74 76 78 79 80 81 82 84 85 86 87 88 90
0.97 63 68 72 74 76 77 78 79 81 82 83 84 86 87 88
0.96 61 67 70 72 74 75 76 78 79 81 82 83 84 86 87
0.95 1.00 59 65 68 71 72 74 75 76 78 79 80 82 83 84 86
0.94 0.99 58 63 67 69 71 72 73 75 76 78 79 80 82 83 85
0.93 0.98 57 62 65 67 69 71 72 73 75 76 78 79 80 82 84
0.92 0.97 55 60 63 66 68 69 70 72 73 75 76 78 79 81 82
0.91 0.96 54 59 62 64 66 68 69 70 72 74 75 76 78 79 81
0.90 0.95 53 57 61 63 65 66 67 69 71 72 74 75 77 78 80
0.89 0.94 51 56 59 62 63 65 66 68 69 71 72 74 75 77 79
0.88 0.93 50 55 58 60 62 64 65 66 68 70 71 73 74 76 78
0.87 0.92 49 53 57 59 61 62 63 65 67 68 70 71 73 75 77
0.86 0.91 48 52 55 58 59 61 62 64 66 67 69 70 72 74 76
If the value of (PU + PL) – 100 does not correspond to a (PU + PL) – 100 value in this table, use the next smaller (PU + PL) – 100 value.

Section 106 – Acceptance of Work 36

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 106.2 Pay Factors (Continued)

PAY FACTOR Minimum Required Percent of Work Within Specification Limits for a Given Pay Factor (PU + PL) – 100
Category n=10 n=12 n=15 n=18 n=23 n=30 n=43 n=67
n=3 n=4 n=5 n=6 n=7 n=8 n=9 to to to to to to to to
I II n=11 n=14 n=17 n=22 n=29 n=42 n=66 ∞
0.85 0.90 46 51 54 56 58 60 61 62 64 66 67 69 71 72 75
0.84 0.89 45 49 53 55 57 58 60 61 63 65 66 68 70 71 73
0.83 0.88 44 48 51 54 56 57 58 60 62 64 65 67 69 70 72
0.82 0.87 43 47 50 53 54 56 57 59 61 62 64 66 67 69 71
0.81 0.86 41 46 49 51 53 55 56 58 59 61 63 64 66 68 70
0.80 0.85 40 44 48 50 52 54 55 56 58 60 62 63 65 67 69
0.79 0.84 39 43 46 49 51 52 54 55 57 59 61 62 64 66 68
0.78 0.83 38 42 45 48 50 51 52 54 56 58 59 61 63 65 67
0.77 0.82 36 41 44 46 48 50 51 53 55 57 58 60 62 64 66
0.76 0.81 35 39 43 45 47 49 50 52 54 56 57 59 61 63 65
0.75 0.80 33 38 42 44 46 48 49 51 53 54 56 58 60 62 64
REJECT 0.79 32 37 40 43 45 47 48 49 52 53 55 57 59 60 63
0.78 30 36 39 42 44 45 47 48 50 52 54 56 57 59 62
0.77 28 34 38 41 43 44 46 47 49 51 53 55 56 58 61
0.76 27 33 37 39 42 43 45 46 48 50 52 53 55 57 60
0.75 25 32 36 38 40 42 43 45 47 49 51 52 54 56 59
Values Less Than Those Shown Above
If the value of (PU + PL) – 100 does not correspond to a (PU + PL) – 100 value in this table, use the next smaller (PU + PL) – 100 value.

Section 106 – Acceptance of Work 37

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

106.06 Inspection at the Plant. Work may be inspected at the point of production or fabrication.
Manufacturing plants may be inspected for compliance with specified manufacturing methods.
Material samples may be obtained for laboratory testing for compliance with quality requirements.
Allow full entry at all times to the parts of the plant producing the work.

106.07 Partial and Final Acceptance. Maintain the work during construction and until the project is
accepted. Repair damage caused by the Contractor before final acceptance of the entire project at no
cost to the Government.

The Government shall have the right to take possession of or use any completed or partially
completed part of the work. Before taking possession of or using any work, the Engineer shall
furnish the Contractor a list of items of work remaining to be performed or corrected on those
portions of the work that the Government intends to take possession of or use. However, failure of
the Engineer to list any item of work shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for complying
with the terms of the contract. The Government’s possession or use shall not be deemed an
acceptance of any work under the contract.

While the Government has such possession or use, the Contractor shall be relieved of the
responsibility for the loss of or damage to the work resulting from the Government’s possession or
use, notwithstanding the terms of the clause in this contract entitled Permits and Responsibilities. If
prior possession or use by the Government delays the progress of the work or causes additional
expense to the Contractor, an equitable adjustment shall be made in the contract price or the time of
completion, and the contract shall be modified in writing accordingly.

(a) Partial acceptance. When a segment of the project is completed, a final inspection of that
segment may be requested. If the segment is complete and in compliance, it may be accepted. If
accepted, the Engineer may relieve the Contractor of further responsibility for maintaining
accepted work.

When public traffic is accommodated through construction and begins using sections of roadway as
they are completed, continue maintenance of such sections until final acceptance.

(b) Final acceptance. Notify the Engineer when the entire project is complete to schedule an
inspection. If work is determined to be complete, the inspection will constitute the final inspection.
The Contractor will be notified in writing of final acceptance as of the date of the final inspection.
Final acceptance relieves the Contractor of further responsibility for the maintenance of the project.

If the inspection discloses unsatisfactory work, the Engineer will provide to the Contractor a list of
the work that is incomplete or requires correction. Immediately complete or correct the work. Submit
notification when the work has been completed as provided above.

Section 106 – Acceptance of Work 38

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 107. — LEGAL RELATIONS

AND RESPONSIBILITY TO THE PUBLIC

107.01 Laws to be Observed. The Contractor shall, without additional expense to the Government, be
responsible for obtaining any necessary licenses and permits, and for complying with any national
province, and municipal laws, codes, and regulations applicable to the performance of the work. The
Contractor shall also be responsible for all damages to persons or property that occur as a result of the
Contractor's fault or negligence, and shall take proper safety and health precautions to protect the work,
the workers, the public, and the property of others. The Contractor shall also be responsible for all
materials delivered and work performed until completion and acceptance of the entire work, except for
any completed unit of work which may have been accepted under the contract.

Comply with applicable laws, ordinances, safety codes, regulations, orders, and decrees. Protect and
indemnify the Government and its representatives against any claim or liability arising from or based
on the alleged violation of the same.

Comply with permits and agreements obtained by the Government for performing the work that is
included in the contract. Obtain additional permits or agreements and modifications to Government-
obtained permits or agreements that are required by the Contractor's methods of operation. Submit
copies of permits and agreements.

107.02 Protection and Restoration of Property and Landscape. The Contractor shall preserve and
protect all structures, equipment, and vegetation (such as trees, shrubs, and grass) on or adjacent to
the work site, which are not to be removed and which do not unreasonably interfere with the work
required under this contract. The Contractor shall only remove trees when specifically authorized to
do so, and shall avoid damaging vegetation that will remain in place. If any limbs or branches of
trees are broken during contract performance, or by the careless operation of equipment, or by
workmen, the Contractor shall trim those limbs or branches with a clean cut and paint the cut with a
tree-pruning compound as directed by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall protect from damage all existing improvements and utilities (1) at or near the
work site and (2) on adjacent property of a third party, the locations of which are made known to or
should be known by the Contractor. The Contractor shall repair any damage to those facilities,
including those that are the property of a third party, resulting from failure to comply with the
requirements of this contract or failure to exercise reasonable care in performing the work. If the
Contractor fails or refuses to repair the damage promptly, the Engineer may have the necessary work
performed and charge the cost to the Contractor.

Preserve public and private property, and protect monuments established for perpetuating horizontal,
vertical, cadastral, or boundary control. When necessary to destroy a monument, reestablish the
monument according to applicable government statute or by the direction of the agency or individual
who established the monument.

Do not disturb the area beyond the construction limits. Replace trees, shrubs, or vegetated areas
damaged by construction operations as directed and at no cost to the Government. Remove any
damaged limbs of existing trees by an approved arborist.

Section 107 – Legal Relations and Responsibility to the Public 39

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Do not excavate, remove, damage, alter, or deface any archeological or paleontological remains or
specimens. Control the actions of employees and subcontractors on the project to ensure that protected
sites are not disturbed or damaged. Should any of these items be encountered, suspend operations at the
discovery site, notify the Engineer, and continue operations in other areas. The Engineer will inform
the Contractor when operations may resume at the discovery site.

When utilities are to be relocated or adjusted, the Government will notify utility owners affected by the
relocations or adjustments. The relocations or adjustments will be performed by others or will be
included in the contract work.

Before beginning work in an area, contact the local utility locating service to mark the utilities. Protect
utilities from construction operations. Cooperate with utility owners to expedite the relocation or
adjustment of their utilities to minimize interruption of service and duplication of work.

If utility services are interrupted as a result of damage by the construction, immediately notify the
utility owner, the Engineer, and other proper authorities. Cooperate with them until service is restored.
Do not work around fire hydrants until provisions for continued service are made and approved by the
local fire authority.

Notify the Engineer if utility work is required. Compensation for the work will be provided under
applicable clauses of the contract. Satisfactorily repair damage due to the fault or negligence of the
Contractor at no cost to the Government.

Repair of damage to underground utilities that were not according to the plans or identified before
construction, and not caused by the fault or negligence of the Contractor will be paid for by the
Government.

107.03 Responsibility for Damage Claims. Indemnify and hold harmless the Government, its
employees, and its consultants from suits; actions; or claims brought for injuries or damage received
or sustained by any person, persons, or property resulting from the construction operations or arising
out of the negligent performance of the contract.

Procure and maintain until final acceptance of the contract, liability insurance of the types and limits
specified below. Obtain insurance from companies authorized to do business in the appropriate state.
Ensure the insurance covers operations under the contract whether performed by the Contractor or by
subcontractors.

Before work begins, submit "certificates of insurance" certifying that the policies will not be changed
or canceled until written notice has been given to the Government. Insurance coverage in the minimum
amounts set forth below does not relieve the Contractor of liability in excess of the coverage.

Carry insurance conforming to the following minimums:

(a) Worker's compensation insurance. Minimum required by law.

(b) Comprehensive or commercial general liability insurance.

(1) Personal injury and property damage coverage;

(2) Contractual liability coverage;
(3) Completed operations liability coverage;

Section 107 – Legal Relations and Responsibility to the Public 40

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(4) $1,000,000 combined single limit for each occurrence; and

(5) $2,000,000 general aggregate limit.
(c) Automobile liability insurance. $1,000,000 combined single limit for each occurrence.

107.05 Contractor's Responsibility for Work. Assume responsibility for all work until final
acceptance except as provided in Subsection 106.07. This includes periods of suspended work. Protect
the work against injury, loss, or damage from all causes whether arising from the execution or non-
execution of the work.

Maintain public traffic according to Section 156.

Rebuild, repair, restore, and make good losses, injuries, or damages to any portion of the work. This
includes losses, injuries, or damages caused by vandalism, theft, accommodation of public traffic, and
weather that occurs during the contract.

The Government will only be responsible for costs attributable to repairing or replacing damaged
work caused by declared enemies and terrorists of the Government and cataclysmic natural
phenomenon such as tornadoes, earthquakes, major floods, and other officially declared natural
disasters. The Government will not be responsible for delay costs, impact costs, or extended
overhead costs.

107.07 Furnishing Right-of-Way. The Government will obtain right-of-way.

107.08 Sanitation, Health, and Safety. The Contractor shall provide and maintain work environments
and procedures which will (1) safeguard the public and Government personnel, property, materials,
supplies, and equipment exposed to Contractor operations and activities; (2) avoid interruptions of
Government operations and delays in project completion dates; and (3) control costs in the
performance of this contract.

For these purposes on contracts for construction or dismantling, demolition, or removal of

improvements, the Contractor shall—

(1) Provide appropriate safety barricades, signs, and signal lights;

(2) Ensure that any additional measures the Engineer determines to be reasonably necessary for the
purposes are taken.

Whenever the Engineer becomes aware of any noncompliance with these requirements or any
condition which poses a serious or imminent danger to the health or safety of the public or
Government personnel, the Engineer shall notify the Contractor orally, with written confirmation,
and request immediate initiation of corrective action. This notice, when delivered to the Contractor
or the Contractor’s representative at the work site, shall be deemed sufficient notice of the
noncompliance and that corrective action is required. After receiving the notice, the Contractor shall
immediately take corrective action. If the Contractor fails or refuses to promptly take corrective
action, the Engineer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective
action has been taken. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any equitable adjustment of the contract
price or extension of the performance schedule on any stop work order issued under this clause. The
Contractor shall insert this clause, including this paragraph , with appropriate changes in the
designation of the parties, in subcontracts.

Section 107 – Legal Relations and Responsibility to the Public 41

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Observe rules and regulations of health officials. Do not allow any worker to work in surroundings or
under conditions that are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous.

Admit any legally responsible official involved in safety and health administration to the project work
site upon presentation of proper credentials.

Report accidents on forms furnished by the Government or, with prior approval, on forms used to
report accidents to other agencies or insurance carriers.

Install a reverse signal alarm audible above the surrounding noise level on motorized vehicles having
an obstructed view and on earth-moving and compaction equipment.

107.09 Legal Relationship of the Parties. In the performance of the contract, the Contractor is an
independent contractor. The Contractor's independent contractor status does not limit the Government's
general rights under the contract. No Government employee or a business organization owned or
substantially owned or controlled by one or more Government employees may be a Contractor.

107.10 Environmental Protection.

(a) Do not operate equipment or discharge material within the boundaries of wetlands and the
waters of Rwanda. In the event of an unauthorized discharge:
(a) Prevent further contamination;
(b) Notify appropriate authorities and the Engineer; and
(c) Mitigate damages.
(2) Construct and maintain barriers in work areas and in material sources to prevent sediment,
petroleum products, chemicals, and other liquids and solids from entering wetlands or waters.
Remove and properly dispose of barrier collected material.
(3) Do not revise any terms or conditions of permits without the approval of the issuing
agency.
(b) Oil and hazardous substances. Submit a Spill Prevention, Control, and Countermeasure
(SPCC) plan if required at least 2 days before beginning work.

If a SPCC plan is not required, submit a hazardous spill plan at least 2 days before beginning
work. Describe preventative measures including the location of refueling and storage facilities
and the handling of hazardous material. Describe actions to be taken in case of a spill.

Do not use equipment with leaking fluids. Repair equipment fluid leaks immediately. Keep
absorbent material manufactured for containment and cleanup of hazardous material on the job
site.

Notify the Engineer of hazardous spills.

(c) Noxious weeds. Remove dirt, plant, and foreign material from vehicles and equipment before
mobilizing to work site. Follow applicable Federal land management agency requirements and
state requirements. Repeat as necessary to prevent introduction of non-native plant species into
the work site. Maintain cleaning and inspection records.

Section 107 – Legal Relations and Responsibility to the Public 42

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(d) Clearances for Contractor-selected, noncommercial areas. Contractor-selected,

noncommercial areas include material sources, disposal sites, waste areas, haul roads, and staging
areas located outside project construction limits and permitted commercial areas. Permitted
commercial areas are enterprises or developed areas providing same-type material or use over the
last 2 years with appropriate permits.

Before using a Contractor-selected, noncommercial areas, submit the following:

(1) Description, schedule, and map of area.

(2) Documentation of compliance with applicable laws and regulations.
(3) Owner approval for the area use. When use of Government land is proposed, submit an
approval letter or special use permit from the applicable Government land management
agency.
(4) Legal compliance for the area use. Submit documentation showing compliance with
applicable Government laws including permits or other approvals issued for the area use.
107.11 Protection of Forests, Parks, and Public Lands. Comply with regulations of the
Government conservation commission, land management agency, or other authority having
jurisdiction governing the protection of land including or adjacent to the project.

Section 107 – Legal Relations and Responsibility to the Public 43

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 108. — PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS

108.01 Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion of Work. The Contractor shall be required to
commence work immediately after the Contractor receives the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor shall
prosecute the work diligently and complete the entire work ready for use not later than the contractual
end date. The time stated for completion shall include final cleanup of the premises.

A preconstruction conference will be held after the contract is awarded and before beginning work.
Seven days before the preconstruction conference, submit copies of the preliminary construction
schedule according to Section 155.

108.02 Subcontracting.

The Contractor shall perform on the site, and with its own organization, work equivalents toat least 51
percent of the total amount of work to be performed un the Contract. This percentage may be reduced
by a supplemental agreement to the Contract if, during performing the work, the Contractor requrests a
reduction and the Engineer determines that the reduction would be to the advantage of the
Government.

The Contractor shall not subcontract without the prior written authorization of the Engineer. The work
to be sub-contracted, total amount of money of the subcontract and the identity of the sub-contractors
shall be notified to the Engineer. The Contractor will also submit a separate statement documenting the
cumulative amount of on-site subcontracts to date as a percentage of the original contract amount.
Submit this information on subcontracts at lower tiers.

The Engineer will have 30 days to notify the Contractor of the Engineer’s acceptance or rejection of
the sub-contractor. On all portions of the work that are sublet, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer
with two copies of the subcontractor agreement.

Subcontracting does not relieve the Contractor of liability and responsibility under the contract and
does not create any contractual relation between subcontractors and the Government. The Contractor is
liable and responsible for any action or lack of action of subcontractors.

If a subcontractor is found by the Engineer to be incompetent in discharging its duties, the Engineer
may request the Contractor forthwith, either to provide a subcontractor with qualifications and
experience acceptable to the Engineer as a replacement or to resume the implementation of the tasks
itself.

The percentage of work performed by the Contractor will be computed as the cost of the contract work
performed on-site by the Contractor’s employees divided by the total cost of the contract.

108.03 Determination and Extension of Contract Time.

(a) Definitions.
(1) Time Impact Analysis. The procedure by which the Contractor demonstrates the effect
of specific time impacts on the overall construction schedule. Time impacts may result in an
increase or decrease in contract time.
(2) Float. The amount of time between when an activity "can start" (the early start) and when
an activity "must start" (the late start).

Section 108 – Prosecution and Progress 44

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Time Impact Analysis. Comply with the applicable contract clauses when requesting a time
extension. Notify the Engineer in writing within 7 days after identifying a time impact.
Submit a time impact analysis and revised construction schedule within 14 days after the end of
the time impact event for which notice has been given. Include the following:

(1) A title page or header block with:

(a) Contract number;
(b) Project number and name;
(c) Contractor name;
(d) Current fixed completion date;
(e) Date of submittal; and
(f) Consecutive number for each analysis.
(2) State the impact that requires a Time Impact Analysis:
(a) Engineer proposed or directed Contract Modification;
(b) Contractor proposed Contract Modification;
(c) Weather delay; or
(d) Other Government caused delay.
(3) A copy of the most current approved schedule existing before the impact;
(4) A detailed narrative describing each impact event. Describe impacts to each affected
activity in the construction schedule. Include the following information:
(a) Contract clauses under which the request is being made;
(b) The cause of the impact;
(c) The start date of the impact;
(d) The duration of the impact; and
(e) Methods to be employed to re-sequence or reschedule the work to mitigate the impact.
Discuss the feasibility of re-sequencing future work to mitigate delay. Re-sequencing or
rescheduling of work will be at no cost to the Government. Include corresponding
rationale and assumptions of any measures which increase the cost of mitigating the
impact; and
(5) A revised construction schedule to show the impact of the activities identified, including
any re-sequencing which would mitigate the delay.
(c) Time extensions. Only delays or modifications that affect critical activities or cause
noncritical activities to become critical will be considered for time extensions.
When a Critical Path Method schedule is used, no time extension will be made for delays or
modifications that use available float as shown in the most current approved schedule existing
before the impact.

Section 108 – Prosecution and Progress 45

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

No time extension will be made for a claim that states insufficient time was provided in the
contract.
(d) Execution of the Time Impact Analysis. Incorporate accepted logic changes or time
extensions into the baseline schedule by the next monthly submittal.

No compensation will be made for overhead costs resulting from time extensions.

108.04 Failure to Complete Work on Time. Liquidated damages in the amount specified in Table
108.1 will be assessed for each day beyond the time allowed to complete the contract until substantial
completion of the work.

If a winter shutdown occurs during this period, liquidated damages in an amount equal to 10 percent of
the amount specified in Table 108.1 will be assessed for each day until work resumes at which time full
liquidated damages will be assessed.

Liquidated damages in an amount equal to 20 percent of the amount specified in Table 108.1 will be
assessed for each day beyond the time allowed to complete the contract beginning with the day after
substantial completion and ending with the date of final completion and acceptance.

Liquidated damages will not be assessed for the following:

(a) The day of the final inspection;

(b) Days required to perform work added to the contract after substantial completion including
items identified during the final inspection that were not required before that time;

(c) Delays by the Government after all work is complete and before a formal acceptance is
executed; or

(d) Periods of time when all work is complete but acceptance is delayed pending the plant
establishment period or similar warranty period.

Table 108.1
Charge for Liquidated Damages for Each Day
Work Is Not Substantially Completed
Original Contract Price
Daily
From More To and Charge
Than — Including —
$0 $1,000,000 $1,000
$1,000,000 $2,000,000 $1,800
$2,000,000 $5,000,000 $3,500
$5,000,000 $10,000,000 $4,400
$10,000,000 and more $5,200

108.05 Stop Order. The Engineer may order the performance of the work to be stopped, either in
whole or in part, for such periods deemed necessary due to the following:

(a) Weather or soil conditions considered unsuitable for prosecution of the work; or

Section 108 – Prosecution and Progress 46

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Failure of the Contractor to:

(1) Correct conditions unsafe for the workers or the general public;
(2) Carry out written orders given by the Engineer; or
(3) Perform any provision of the contract.

(c)The delay in completing the work arises from unforeseeable causes beyond the control and
without the fault or negligence of the Contractor. Examples of such causes include

(1) acts of God or of the public enemy,

(2) acts of the Government in either its sovereign or contractual capacity,

(3) acts of another Contractor in the performance of a contract with the Government,

(4) fires,

(5) floods,

(6) epidemics,

(7) quarantine restrictions,

(8) strikes,

(9) freight embargoes,

(10) unusually severe weather, or

(11) delays of subcontractors or suppliers at any tier arising from unforeseeable causes
beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of both the Contractor and the
subcontractors or suppliers; and

(d) The Contractor, within 10 days from the beginning of any delay (unless extended by the
Engineer), notifies the Engineer in writing of the causes of delay. The Engineer shall ascertain
the facts and the extent of delay. If, in the judgment of the Engineer, the findings of fact warrant
such action, the time for completing the work shall be extended. The findings of the Engineer
shall be final and conclusive on the parties, but subject to appeal under the Disputes clause.

(e) If, after termination of the Contractor’s right to proceed, it is determined that the Contractor
was not in default, or that the delay was excusable, the rights and obligations of the parties will
be the same as if the termination had been issued for the convenience of the Government.

(f) The rights and remedies of the Government in this clause are in addition to any other rights
and remedies provided by law or under this contract.

No adjustment in contract time or amount will be made for stop orders issued under (a) or (b) above
except an adjustment in contract time.

Section 108 – Prosecution and Progress 47

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 109. — MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

109.01 Measurement of Work. Take and record measurements and perform calculations to determine
pay quantities for invoicing for work performed. Take or convert measurements of work according to
Metric measure.

Unless otherwise specified, measure when the work is in-place and complete according to the contract
requirements. Measure the actual work performed, except do not measure work outside the design
limits or other adjusted or specified limits (staked limits). Measure structures to the lines according to
the plans or to approved lines adjusted to fit field conditions.

Take measurements as described in Subsection 109.02 unless otherwise modified by the

Measurement Subsection of the Section controlling the work being performed. Measurement of
quantities for payment for the individual pay items will be based on the contract price for each pay
item according to Table 109.1.

Table 109.1
Decimal Accuracy of Quantities for Payment
Decimal Accuracy
Contract Price of Quantities
for Payment
< $1.00 0 decimal
≥ $1.00 to < $100.00 1 decimal
≥ $100.00 to < $1000.00 2 decimals
≥ $1000.00 3 decimals

Decimal precision for measurement is one decimal beyond accuracy of quantities for payment.

Remeasure quantities if it has been determined that any portion of the work is acceptable but has not
been completed to the lines, grades, and dimensions shown on the plans or established by the Engineer.

Submit measurement notes within 24 hours of completing work that is in-place and complete according
to the contract requirements. For on-going work, submit measurement notes daily. When work is not
complete, identify the measurement as being an interim measurement. Submit the final measurement
when the installation is completed. Measurement notes form the basis of the Government’s receiving
report; see Subsection 109.08(d). For lump sum pay items, submit documentation to support invoiced
progress payment on a monthly basis.

Use an acceptable format for measurement records. As a minimum, include the following information:

(a) Project number and name;

(b) Pay item number and description;

(c) Date the work was performed;

(d) Location of the work;

(e) Measured quantity;

Section 109 – Measurement and Payment 48

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(f) Calculations made to arrive at the quantity;

(g) Supporting sketch and details as needed to clearly define the work performed and the quantity
measured;

(h) Names of persons measuring the work;

(i) Identification as to whether the measurement is interim or final; and

(j) Signed certification statement by the persons taking the measurements and performing the
calculations, that the measurements and calculations are correct.

109.02 Measurement Terms and Definitions. Unless otherwise specified, the following terms are
defined as follows:

(a) Acre (Hectare). 10,000 square meters. Make longitudinal and transverse measurements for
area computations horizontally. Do not make deductions from the area computation for individual
fixtures having an area of 50 square meters or less.

(b) Contract quantity. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the bid schedule. The
contract quantity will be adjusted for authorized changes that affect the quantity or for errors made
in computing this quantity. If there is evidence that a quantity specified as a contract quantity is
incorrect, submit calculations, drawings, or other evidence indicating why the quantity is in error
and request, in writing, that the quantity be adjusted.

(c) Cubic meter.

(1) Cubic meter in place. Measure solid volumes by a method approved by the Engineer or
by the average end area method as follows:
(a) Take cross-sections of the original ground and use design or staked templates to
determine end areas. Do not measure work outside of the lines or slopes established by
the Engineer;
(b) If any portion of the work is acceptable but is not completed to the established lines
and slopes, retake cross-sections or comparable measurements of that portion of the work.
Use the remeasurements to calculate new end areas; and
(c) Compute the quantity using the average end areas multiplied by the horizontal
distance along a centerline or reference line between the end areas. Deduct any quantity
outside the designed or staked limits.
(2) Cubic meter in the hauling vehicle. Measure the cubic meter volume in the hauling
vehicle using three-dimensional measurements at the point of delivery. Use vehicles bearing
a legible identification mark with the body shaped so the actual contents may be readily and
accurately determined. Before use, mutually agree in writing on the volume of material to be
hauled by each vehicle. Vehicles carrying less than the agreed volume may be rejected or
accepted at the reduced volume.
Level selected loads. If leveling reveals the vehicle was hauling less than the approved
volume, reduce the quantity of all material received since the last leveled load by the same
ratio as the current leveled load volume is to the agreed volume. Payment will not be made
for material in excess of the agreed volume.

Section 109 – Measurement and Payment 49

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Material measured in the hauling vehicle may be weighed and converted to cubic meters for
payment purposes if the conversion factors are mutually agreed to in writing.
(3) Cubic meter in the structure. Measure according to the lines of the structure as shown
on the plans except as altered by the Engineer to fit field conditions. Make no deduction for
the volume occupied by reinforcing steel, anchors, weep holes, piling, or pipes less than 200
millimeters in diameter.
(4) Cubic meter by metering. Use an approved metering system.
(d) Day. A calendar day beginning and ending at midnight. Round portions of a day up to the full
day.

(e) Each. One entire unit. Measure the actual number of units completed and accepted.

(f) Liter. The quantity may be measured by any of the following methods:

(1) Measured volume container.

(2) Metered volume. Use an approved metering system.
(3) Commercially-packaged volumes.
(4) Measured by weight. Use an approved weighing device.
When asphalt material is measured by the liter, measure the volume at 15 °C or correct the volume
to 15 °C using recognized standard correction factors.

(g) Hour. 60 minutes. Measure the actual number of hours ordered by the Engineer and performed
by the Contractor. Round portions of an hour up to the next half hour. Measure time in excess of 40
hours per week at the same rate as the first 40 hours.

(h) Meter. As applicable, measure the work along its length from end-to-end; parallel to the base
or foundation; along the top; along the front face; or along the invert. Do not measure overlaps.

(i) Lump sum. Do not measure directly. The bid amount is complete payment for all work
described in the contract and necessary to complete the work for that pay item. The quantity is
designated as "All". Estimated quantities of lump sum work shown in the contract are approximate.

(j) M-litres. 1,000 litres. Measure according to (f) above.

(k) Kilometer. 1000 meters. Measure horizontally along the centerline of each roadway, approach
road, or ramp.

(l) Month. A month as defined by the Gregorian calendar. Measure portions of a month by
prorating based on the total days worked.

(m) Kilogram. Measure according to Subsection 109.03. If sacked or packaged material is

furnished, the net weight as packed by the manufacturer may be used.

(n) Slurry unit. Approximately 4,000 liters of water plus the specified material. Four (ten) slurry
units contain material to cover one acre hectare. Measure according to (f) above.

Section 109 – Measurement and Payment 50

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(o) Square meter. Measurements for area computations will be made horizontally or vertically to
the surface being measured. No deductions from the area computation will be made for individual
fixtures having area of 1 square meter or less.

(p) Ton. 1,000 kilograms. Measure according to Subsection 109.03.

No adjustment in a contract price will be made for variations in quantity due to differences in the
specific gravity or moisture content.

Use net-certified scale masses, or masses based on certified volumes in the case of rail shipments
as a basis of measurement subject to correction when asphalt material is lost from the car or the
distributor, wasted, or otherwise not incorporated in the work. When asphalt material is shipped by
truck or transport, net-certified masses, subject to correction for loss or foaming, may be used for
computing quantities.

When emulsified asphalt is converted from volume to mass, use a factor of 1000 liters per metric
ton regardless of temperature.

When asphalt binder for asphalt concrete pavement is stored in tanks devoted exclusively to the
project, base quantities on invoices. When asphalt binder for asphalt concrete pavement is not
stored in tanks devoted exclusively to the project, or when the validity of the quantity requested for
payment is in question, base quantities on the asphalt content determined by testing.

(q) Week. A seven day period beginning and ending at the same designated time. Measure portions
of a week by prorating based on the total days worked.

(r) Contingent Sum. The “Contingent Sum” is for unforeseen work, for which an amount is
included in the contract documents. This item is for other items of work not included in the
contract documents but is deemed necessary or desirable in order to complete the work as
contemplated. Such work shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with the
specifications and this Special Contract Requirement.

The amounts to be paid will include the costs of labor, tools, supplies, equipments, specialized
services, materials, applicable taxes and overhead and to include a profit commensurate with
those costs, 10% maximum. For minor items of work with an estimated cost less than $10,000
the amount to be paid will be determined as described in 1 thru 8 below. For work with an
estimated cost equal to or greater than $10,000, the amount to be paid will be at agreed unit
prices, by the payment method as described in 1 thru 8 below, or a combination of the two. No
work shall be charged to this item unless authorized in writing by the Engineer.

(1) Labor. For the time that workers and their immediate working foreman are engaged
specifically and solely in Contingent Sum work, the Contractor will be paid the costs of those
employees’ wages at the rates shown on the payroll (but not more that the rates for
comparable work performed by current employees on the project), plus the percent to cover
overhead, property damage and liability insurance, workers’ compensation insurance
premiums, unemployment insurance contributions, social security and other taxes. This 67
percent will not be applied to subsistence, travel allowance or to fringe benefits paid to a third
party or a trustee. The Contractor will be paid based on the actual hours of labor, to the
nearest recorded ½ hour each day.

Section 109 – Measurement and Payment 51

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(2) Materials. The Contractor will be paid for the actual costs of materials approved for use
by the Engineer and incorporated into the work, including transportation charges (exclusive
of equipment rentals), plus 10 percent.

(3) Owned or Leased Equipment. For the use of any machinery approved by the Engineer,
which is owned or leased directly by the Contractor or subcontractors, or by entities that are
divisions, affiliates, or subsidiaries or in any other way related to the Contractor or
subcontractors or their parent companies, the Contractor will be paid in the manner
hereinafter specified. Rental rates will be from the current edition of the Rental Rate Blue
Book of rental rates for Construction Equipment and will be used as follows:

(a) Determination of the rental rate to be used will be as follows:

Hourly Rate: RR = (ADJ BB / 176)(RF)+EOC

Standby Rate: SR = (ADJ BB / 176)(RF)(0.5)

Where: RR = Hourly Rental Rate

SR = Stand By Rate
ADJ BB = Approved rental rates
RF = Regional Factor of 1.00
EOC = Estimated Hourly Operating Costs from Blue Book

The Contractor shall furnish a list of all equipment to be used on the project at the
Preconstruction Conference. The list shall include the current Rental Rate for each piece of
equipment with approved documentation for this rental rate. If a piece of equipment for
which rental rates cannot be documented and may be needed for Contingent Sum work the
rates shall be agreed to in writing before the equipment is used.

(b). The number of hours to be paid for will be the number of hours that the equipment is
actually used on a specific Contingent Sum activity approved by the Engineer.

(c) Overtime shall be compensated at the same rate indicated in (a.) above.

(d) The EOC will be used for each hour that the equipment is in operation on the Contingent
Sum work. Such costs do not apply to idle time regardless of the cause.

(e). Idle time for equipment will not be paid for, except where the equipment has been held
on the Project site on a standby basis at the direction of the Engineer. Such payment will be
made at the standby rate established in subsection (a.) above. The Engineer must approve the
payment of standby rates for equipment before the costs are incurred. Payment for standby
time will not be made on any day the equipment operates for eight or more hours. For
equipment accumulating less than eight hours operating time on any normal work day
standby payment will be limited to only that number of hours that, when added to the
operating time for that day, equals eight hours. Additionally, payment for standby time will
not be made in any consecutive 30 day period, standby payment will be limited to only that
number of hours that, when added to the operating time for that consecutive 30 day period,
equals 176 hours. Standby payment will not be made in any case on days not normally a work
day.

Section 109 – Measurement and Payment 52

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(f) The rates established above include the cost of fuel, oil, lubrication, supplies, incidental
tools valued at less than $500, necessary attachments, repairs, overhaul and maintenance of
any kind, depreciation, storage, overhead, profit, insurance, all costs (including labor and
equipment) of moving equipment onto and away from the site, and all incidentals, except as
allowed in subsection (h.) below.

(g). The rental rate for small tools shall be $2.00 per hour. Small tools are defined as any tool
which would be valued between $500 and $2,000 if purchased new. No compensation will be
made for hand tools necessary to complete the work.

(h) Transportation charges for each piece of equipment to and from the site of work will be
paid provided:

(i) The equipment is obtained from the nearest source,

(ii) The charges are restricted to those units of equipment not already available or
required on the Project, and

(iii) The equipment is used solely for the Contingent Item work.

(4) Rental Equipment. Use of rental equipment not owned or leased by the Contractor or
subcontractors will be paid for by certified invoice cost. The EOC will also be paid if not
included in the rental rate. The use of and rates for rental equipment shall be approved by the
Engineer prior to use. Proration of rental rates to an hourly rate for equipment not used solely for
the Contingent Sum work shall be based on 176 hours per month, 40 hours per week or 8 hours
per day as applicable. The cost of moving the rental equipment onto and away from the job will
also be paid when the equipment is used solely for the Contingent Sum work. An amount equal
to 10 percent of the total due to the Contractor for rental equipment cost will be added to
compensate the Contractor for related overhead cost.

(5) Subcontract Work. If the Engineer directs the performance of work by Contingent Sum that
the Contractor then subcontracts, the Contractor will be paid in accordance with the provisions of
this Special Contract Requirement (Contingent Sum Work). As reimbursement for the
Contractor’s administrative expenses, the Contractor may add 5 percent to the amount of the
subcontractor’s actual cost for the work.

(6) Invoice (Specialty) Work. If the Engineer and the Contractor agree that an item of work is
minor in nature or requires a specialist, the work may be paid for based on a contractor or
subcontractor invoice. The government prefers invoices itemized by labor, material, and
equipment rental costs. As full reimbursement for the Contractor’s own administrative expenses,
the Contractor will be allowed to add 5 percent to a subcontractor’s invoice.

(7) Records. The Contractor’s representative and the Engineer shall, on a daily basis, agree in
writing on the quantities of labor, equipment and materials used for work completed on
Contingent Sum work.

(8) Statements. Payment will not be made for work performed on a Contingent Sum basis until
the Contractor has furnished the Engineer, in triplicate, itemized statements of the cost of the
Contingent Sum work, detailed as follows:

(a) Labor classification, hours, rate and extension for each labor class or pay rate within a class

Section 109 – Measurement and Payment 53

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Equipment type, hours, rate and extension for each unit of equipment.

(c) Quantities of materials, prices, extensions and transportation charges.

Statements shall be accompanied and supported by certified invoices for all materials and rental
equipment including transportation charges. If materials used on the Contingent Sum work are
not specifically purchased for the work, but are taken from the Contractor’s stock, the Contractor
shall furnish a signed and notarized affidavit certifying that the materials were taken from stock,
that the quantity claimed was actually used, and that the price and transportation claimed
represent the actual cost to the Contractor.

109.03 Weighing Procedures and Devices. Batch masses may be acceptable for determination of pay
quantities when an approved automatic weighing, cycling, and monitoring system is included as part of
the batching equipment.

When a weighing device is determined to indicate less than true mass, no additional payment will be
made for material previously weighed and recorded. When a weighing device is determined to indicate
more than true mass, material received after the last previously correct weighing accuracy test will be
reduced by the percentage of error in excess of 0.5 percent.

When material is proportioned or measured and paid for by mass, submit one of the following:

(a) Commercial weighing system. Use permanently-installed and certified commercial scales.

(b) Invoices. If bulk material is shipped by truck or rail and is not passed through a mixing plant,
submit a supplier's invoice with net mass or volume converted to mass. Periodic check weighing
may be required.

(c) Project weighing system. Furnish, erect, and maintain acceptable automatic digital scales.
Provide scales that record mass at least to the nearest 50 kilograms. Maintain the scale accuracy to
within 0.5 percent of the correct mass throughout the range of use.

Do not use spring balances.

Install and maintain platform scales with the platform level with rigid bulkheads at each end. Make
the platform of sufficient length to permit simultaneous weighing of all axle loads of the hauling
vehicle. Coupled vehicles may be weighed separately or together according to Section 2.20
paragraph UR 3.3 of NIST Handbook 44.

Install and maintain belt-conveyor scales according to Section 2.21 of NIST Handbook 44.

Before production on the project, after relocation, and at least once per year, have the weighing
portion of the system checked and certified by the State Bureau of Weights and Measures or a
private scale service certified by the Bureau of Weights and Measures. Seal the system to prevent
tampering or other adjustment after certification.

Attach an automatic printer to the scale that is programmed or otherwise equipped to prevent
manual override of all mass information. For weighed pay quantities, program the printer to
provide the following information for each weighing:

(1) Project number and name;

Section 109 – Measurement and Payment 54

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(2) Pay item number and description;

(3) Date;
(4) Time;
(5) Ticket number;
(6) Haul unit number;
(7) Net mass in load at least to the nearest 50 kilograms;
(8) Subtotal net mass for each haul unit since the beginning of the shift; and
(9) Accumulated total net mass for all haul units since the beginning of the shift.
If a printer malfunctions or breaks down, the Contractor may manually weigh and record masses for up
to 48 hours provided the method of weighing meets other contract requirements.

Furnish competent scale operators to operate the system.

When platform scales are used, weigh empty haul units at least twice per day.

Use an approved format for the mass records. Submit the original records and a written certification as
to the accuracy of the masses at the end of each shift.

109.04 Receiving Procedures. When the method of measurement requires weighing or volume
measurement in the hauling vehicle, furnish a person to direct the spreading and distribution of material
and to record the location and placement of the material on the project. During the placement, maintain
a record of each delivery and document it in an acceptable manner. Include the following information
as applicable:

(a) Project number and name;

(b) Pay item number and description;

(c) Location where placed;

(d) Date;

(e) Load number;

(f) Truck identification;

(g) Time of arrival;

(h) Mass or volume; and

(i) Spread person's signature.

Use an approved format for the delivery records. Submit the original records and a written certification
of the delivery of the material at the end of each shift.

109.05 Scope of Payment. Payment for contract work is provided, either directly or indirectly, under
the pay items shown in the bid schedule.

Section 109 – Measurement and Payment 55

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(a) Direct payment. Payment is provided directly under a pay item listed in the bid schedule when
one of the following applies:

(1) The work is measured in the Measurement Subsection of the Section ordering the work
and the bid schedule contains a pay item for the work from the Section ordering the work.
(2) The Measurement Subsection of the Section ordering the work, references another
Section for measuring the work and the bid schedule contains a pay item for the work from
the referenced Section.
(b) Indirect payment. Work for which direct payment is not provided is a subsidiary obligation of
the Contractor. Payment for such work is indirectly included under other pay items shown in the
bid schedule. This includes instances when the Section ordering the work references another
Section for performing the work and the work is not referenced in the Measurement Subsection of
the Section ordering the work.

Compensation provided by the pay items included in the bid schedule is full payment for performing
contract work in a complete and acceptable manner. Risk, loss, damage, or expense arising out of the
nature or prosecution of the work is included in the compensation provided by the pay items.

Work measured and paid for under one pay item will not be paid for under any other pay item.

The quantities listed in the bid schedule are approximate unless designated as a contract quantity. Limit
pay quantities to the quantities staked, ordered, or otherwise authorized before performing the work.
Payment will be made for the actual quantities of work performed and accepted or material furnished
according to the contract. No payment will be made for work performed in excess of that staked,
ordered, or otherwise authorized.

109.06 Pricing of Adjustments. Determine costs according to the contract cost principles.

If agreement on price and time cannot be reached, the Engineer may make a unilateral determination.

If the work will delay contract completion, request a time extension according to Subsection 108.03.

For contracts of 5,000,000 Euros or more, the use of the price revision formula, calculated on the
basis of the coefficients provided in the Detailed Breakdown of Price section (Volume 4 of the tender
dossier) is compulsory.

(a) Prices contained in the Contractor's tender shall be deemed to have been established at the
economic conditions in force 30 days prior the latest date fixed for the submission of the tenders
(reference date). If there is a variation in the economic conditions during the works, the monthly
interim certificate of payment will be adjusted by applying the revision formulas in accordance with
article 48.2.
(b) The revision of prices shall be calculated by combining the application of proportional formula
and mono-material formula for cement, bitumen and reinforced steel as follows:

(1) The revision of prices shall be calculated by applying the following proportional formula to the
amount of each interim certificate of payment after deduction of any amount due for repayment of
pre-financing:

Section 109 – Measurement and Payment 56

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

𝐸 1 + 𝐶𝐻𝑛 𝑇𝑥𝑜 𝑀𝑡𝑛 𝑇𝑥𝑜 ′ 𝐺𝑛 𝑇𝑥𝑜 "

𝑅𝑛 = 𝑃𝑛 �𝑎 + 𝑏 𝐸𝑛 × × +𝑐 × + � × � − 1�
𝑜 1 + 𝐶𝐻𝑜 𝑇𝑥𝑛 𝑀𝑡𝑜 𝑇𝑥𝑛 ′ 𝐺𝑜 𝑇𝑥𝑛 "

Where:

Rn = upwards or downwards price revision of the interim certificate of payment for the period "n"
concerned.

Pn= amount of the interim certificate of payment after deduction of any amount due for repayment of
pre-financing.

Eo= official daily pay of the working team (to be indicated by the tenderer in the break down of
prices) in Rwanda at the reference date:

En= official daily pay of the working team (to be indicated by the tenderer in Rwanda at the month n

CH0: percentage of increase in social contributions for a worker's pay resulting from the application of
the laws and regulations in force in Rwanda at the reference date.

CHn: same index but at the month n.

Mt0: official index for the supply and maintenance of fixed and moving parts of construction plant,
including vehicles, machines, tools and spare parts necessary for civil engineering works, as published
by the moniteur en France (www.lemoniteur.fr).

Mtn: same index but in month n.

G0: pump price of diesel recorded Rwanda at the reference date (excluding taxes if the contract is tax
and duty free).

Gn: same price but at the month n (excluding taxes if the contract is tax and duty free).

Txo: exchange rate between the currency of contract payment and the currency of the selected
indicator at the reference date.

Txn: same exchange rate at the month n.

The indices (CH, Mt, G and the working reference team and G) shall be selected as the most reliable
amongst those available. The indices listed above are understood to be strictly defined as in the source
document. The publishing entity and the title of the concerned publication shall be also specified.

The coefficients a, b, c and d shall be set by the Contractor on the basis of the detailed breakdown of
prices as submitted in its tenders. The Contractor will have to provide clear arithmetical calculations for
the proposed coefficients. The total of the coefficients must be equal to 1.

(b) Material review: bitumen, reinforced steel and cement.

(2) the revision of prices for bitumen, reinforced steel and cement shall be calculated by applying the
following formula, separately to each of the components:

𝑇𝑥𝑜 𝐼𝑛 (𝑀𝑎𝑡) − 𝐼𝑜 (𝑀𝑎𝑡)

𝑅𝑛 (𝑀𝑎𝑡) = 𝑄𝑛 𝐶𝑃𝑜
𝑇𝑥𝑛 𝐼𝑜 (𝑀𝑎𝑡)

Section 109 – Measurement and Payment 57

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Rm(Mat)= increase or decrease to be paid for the material concerned by the revision of prices during the
month "n".

Qn= quantity of works carried out during the month n involving one or more of the materials in
question.

C= coefficient of transformation allowing to calculate the quantity of material used in the

quantity of works carried out

The value of coefficient C is defined as follows:

 for cement, the coefficient C is expressed in tonnes for each cubic metre of concrete executed as per
category specified in the contract;

 for reinforcing steel, the coefficient C is expressed in tonnes of steel laid for each cubic metre of
reinforced concrete executed in accordance with the plans of reinforcement;

 for bituminous mixtures, the C coefficient is expressed in m² of asphalt concrete.

Po= price of material to be revised as contained in the Contractor's tender.

Io (Mat)= Official index of the material at the reference date.

In (Mat)= Official index of the material at the date of purchase.

Txo= exchange rate between the currency of contract payment and the currency of the material's country
of origin at the reference date.

Txn: exchange rate between the currency of contract payment and the currency of the material's country of
origin at the month n.

(3) there will be no revision treshold;

(4) If the Contractor modifies the country of origin of the source of its materials or other components to be
used for the execution of works, it shall inform by writing within 30 days the Supervisor, who will change
the formula for the revision of prices by introducing the indices of the new country of origin.

The conditions for applying the revised prices are as follows:

(a) There will be no price adjustment for the prices for site facilities, topographic works, control and
inspection works, and any standard position.

(b) Indexes for supplies and materials will be effective the month of their order or under certain
conditions, and at most a month of their supply on site. However, charging of any price revisions
thereto shall be made only after the effective use of these materials. This provision does not apply to
diesel-related indicators.

(c) Price revisions apply only if their respective price adjustment for that month is less than 0.99 or
above 1.03. The thresholds are 1% to the benefit of the Contracting Authority and 3% for the benefit
of the Contractor. If a price revision is to the benefit of the Contracting Authority, the amount will be
deducted from any subsequent payment or balance due the Contractor.

Section 109 – Measurement and Payment 58

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(d) The price revisions only apply from the month in which the threshold is exceeded and they are
not: retroactive. According to changes in the respective indices, they may no longer be applicable. for
some months when thresholds are not met.

(e) The variation coefficients calculation will be pushed to the fourth decimal place included. The
rounding rule is that when the following decimal is greater than or equal to five, there are rounded up
and when there are less than five rounded down.

(f) In case of delay in works execution, due to the Contractor, the indices of price revision to take into
account are those valid during the last month of the contractual period, or those of the subsequent
months until the provisional acceptance of works, if are for the benefit of the Contracting Authority.

(g) If the Contractor changes the origin of the supply sources for materials or other items involved in
works implementation, it will immediately inform the Supervisor through his representative, who will
change, accordingly and after approval by the Contracting Authority, dispositions on price revision to
include the indices of the new countries of origin.

(h) If the currencies in which the contract price is expressed are different from those which relate
indices, a correction, approved by the representative of the Supervisor, will be made to the price
adjustment factor in order to avoid distortions in price revision. This correction will apply to amounts
corresponding to the base cost review of various price components, and respond to the report of the
exchange rates of respective currencies at the dates of basic indices definition and those based on
current indices, such as defined. Exchange rates to consider are those published in the Official Journal
of the European Communities, Series S.

(i) Price adjustments are calculated on the expenses charged without prejudice of the above
dispositions and after any reduction in reimbursement of advances applicable to the statement
considered. Price revision statements are distinct from statements of work. They will have a quarterly
frequency or different upon formalized agreement by an exchange of correspondence between the
parties.

(c) Significant Changes in the Character of Work. The Engineer reserves the right to make, in
writing, at any time during the work, such changes in quantities and such alterations in the work
as are necessary to satisfactorily complete the project. Such changes in quantities and alterations
shall not invalidate the Contract nor release the surety, and the Contractor agrees to perform the
work as altered.

If the alterations or changes in quantities significantly change the character of the work under
the Contract, whether such alterations or changes are in themselves significant changes to the
character of the work, or by affecting other work cause such other work to become
significantly different in character, an adjustment, excluding loss of anticipated profit, will be
made to the Contract. The basis for the adjustment shall be agreed upon prior to the
performance of the work. If a basis cannot be agreed upon, then an adjustment will be made
either for or against the Contractor in such amount as the Engineer may determine to be fair
and equitable. If the alterations or changes in quantities do not significantly change the
character of the work to be performed under the Contract, the altered work will be paid for as
provided elsewhere in the Contract. The term “significant change” shall be construed to apply
only to the following circumstances:

(1) When the character of the work as altered differs materially in kind or nature fromthat
involved or included in the original proposed construction, or

Section 109 – Measurement and Payment 59

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(2) Where the quantity of a unit price in this contract is estimated on the proposal schedule
and where the actual quantity of such pay item varies more than 25 percent above or below
the estimated quantity stated in this contract, an adjustment in the contract price shall be
made upon demand of the party. The adjustment shall be limited to any increase or decrease
in direct costs due solely to the variation above 125 percent or below 75 percent of the
estimated quantity. Any allowance for an increase in quantity shall apply only to that portion
in excess of the 125 percent of original contract item quantity, or in case of a decrease below
75 percent, to the actual amount of work performed.

109.07 Eliminated Work. Work may be eliminated from the contract without invalidating the
contract. The Contractor is entitled to compensation for direct costs incurred before the date of
elimination of work plus profit and overhead on the direct incurred costs. Anticipated profit and
overhead expense on the eliminated work will not be compensated.

109.08 Progress Payments.

(a) General. Only invoice payments will be made under this contract. Invoice payments include
progress payments made monthly as work is accomplished and the final payment made upon final
acceptance. Only one progress payment will be made each month. No progress payment will be
made in a month in which the work accomplished results in a net payment of less than $1,000. Full
or partial progress payment will be withheld until a construction schedule or schedule update is
approved by the Engineer.

(b) Closing date and invoice submittal date. The closing date for progress payments will be
designated by the Engineer. Include work performed after the closing date in the following month’s
invoice. Submit invoices to the designated billing office.

(c) Invoice requirements. Submit the invoice to the Government’s designated billing office with
the following items in the invoice:

(1) A proper invoice must include the items listed in subdivisions (c)(1)(a) through (c)(1)(h)
of this clause. If the invoice does not comply with these requirements, the Contractor will be
notified of the defect within 14 days after receipt of the invoice at the designated billing
office.

(a) Name and address of the Contractor.

(b) Invoice date.

(c) Contract number or other authorization for supplies delivered or services performed
(including order number and contract line item number).

(d) Description of work or services performed.

(e) Delivery and payment terms.

(f) Name and address of Contractor official to whom payment is to be sent (must be the same
as that in the contract or in a proper notice of assignment).

(g) Name (where practicable), title, phone number and mailing address of person to be
notified in event of a defective invoice.

Section 109 – Measurement and Payment 60

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(h) Any other information or documentation required by the contract.

(2) A tabulation of total quantities and contract prices of work accomplished or completed on
each pay item. Do not include any quantities unless field note documentation for those
quantities was submitted by the closing date. Do not include quantities of work involving
material for which test reports required under Sections 153 or 154 or certifications required
by Subsection 106.03 are, or will be, past due as of the closing date.

(3) Along with each request for progress payments, the Contractor shall furnish the following
certification, or payment shall not be made:

I hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge and belief, that—

(a) The amounts requested are only for performance in accordance with the
specifications, terms, and conditions of the contract;

(b) All payments due to subcontractors and suppliers from previous payments received
under the contract have been made, and timely payments will be made from the proceeds
of the payment covered by this certification, in accordance with subcontract agreements.

(c) This request for progress payments does not include any amounts which the prime
contractor intends to withhold or retain from a subcontractor or supplier in accordance
with the terms and conditions of the subcontract; and

(d) This certification is not to be construed as final acceptance of a subcontractor’s

performance.

Name, Title and Date

(4) If applicable, the Contractor shall issue a written notice of any withholding to a
subcontractor, with a copy furnished to the Engineer specifying,
(a) The amount to be withheld
(b) The specific causes for the withholding wunder the terms of the subcontract
(c) The remedial actions to be taken by the subcontractor in order to receive payment of
the amounts withheld. .
(5) The amount included for work performed by each subcontractor under the contract.
(6) The total amount of each subcontract under the contract.
(7) The amounts previously paid to each subcontractor under the contract.
(8) Adjustments to the proposed total payment that relate to the quantity and quality of pay
items. Adjustments for the following may be made by the Government after validation of the
invoice:
(a) Retent resulting from a failure to maintain acceptable progress;
(b) Retent resulting from violations of the labor provisions;
(c) Retent pending completion of incomplete work, other "no pay" work, and verification
of final quantities;

Section 109 – Measurement and Payment 61

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(d) Obligations to the Government such as excess testing cost or if the Contractor does
not prompty replace or correct rejected work the Government may by contract or
otherwise replace or correct the work and change the cost to the Contractor or
terminate for default the Contractor’s right to proceed or
(e) Liquidated damages for failure to complete work on time.
(d) Government’s receiving report. The Government’s receiving report will be developed using
the measurement notes received by the Engineer and determined acceptable. Within 14 days after
the closing date, the Engineer will be available by appointment at the Government’s designated
billing office to advise the Contractor of quantities and contract prices appearing on the
Government’s receiving report.

(e) Processing progress payment requests. No payment will be made for work unless field note
documentation for the work was submitted.

(1) Proper invoices. If the invoice meets the requirements of Subsection 109.08(c), and the
quantities and contract prices shown on the Contractor’s invoice agree with the corresponding
quantities and contract prices shown on the Government’s receiving report, the invoice will
be paid.
(2) Defective invoices. If the invoice does not meet the requirements of Subsection
109.08(c), or if any of the quantities or contract prices shown on the Contractor’s invoice
exceed the corresponding quantities and contract prices shown on the Government’s
receiving report, the invoice is defective, and the Contractor will be notified that the invoice
is defective and the reasons why it is not a proper invoice. Defective invoices will be returned
to the Contractor within 14 days after receipt by the Government’s designated billing office.
Correct and resubmit returned invoices. If the defects are minor, the Contractor may elect, in
writing, to accept the quantities and contract prices shown on the Government’s receiving
report for payment.
(f) Partial payments. Progress payments may include partial payment for material to be
incorporated in the, provided the material meets the requirements of the contract, the Contractor
furnishes satisfactory evidence that it has acquired title to such material, that the material will be
used in this contract and is delivered on, or in the vicinity of, the project site or stored in
acceptable storage places.

Partial payment for material does not constitute acceptance of the material for use in completing
items of work. Partial payments will not be made for living or perishable material until
incorporated into the project.

Individual and cumulative partial payments for preparatory work and material will not exceed the
lesser of:

(1) 80 percent of the contract price for the pay item; or

(2) 100 percent of amount supported by copies of invoices submitted.
The quantity paid will not exceed the corresponding quantity estimated in the contract. The
Engineer may adjust partial payments as necessary to protect the Government.

(g) Retainage. In making such payments, there shall be retained ten (10) percent of the estimated
amount until completion and acceptance of the contract work. However, if the Engineer, any time

Section 109 – Measurement and Payment 62

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

after 50 percent of the work had been completed, finds that satisfactory progress is being made, he
may authorize payment in full of each progress payment for work performed beyond the 50 percent
stage of completion. Also, whenever the work is substantially complete, the Engineer, if he
considers the amount retained to be in excess of the amount adequate for the protection of the
Government, at his discretion, may release to the Contractor all or part excess amount.

109.09 Final Payment. Upon final acceptance and verification of final pay records, the Government
will send, a final voucher and a release of claims document. Execute both the voucher and the release
of claims, and return the documents to the Government for payment. The date of approval by the
Government of the final voucher for payment constitutes the date of final settlement of the contract.

If unresolved claims exist or claims are proposed, reserve the right to the claims by listing a description
of each claim and the amount being claimed on the release of claims document.

Failure to execute and return the voucher and release of claims document within 90 days after receipt
will constitute execution of the documents and the release of claims against the Government arising by
virtue of the contract. In this event, the day after 90 days from receipt constitutes the date of final
settlement of the contract.

Section 109 – Measurement and Payment 63

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

DIVISION 150
PROJECT
REQUIREMENTS

Section 150 – Project Requirements 64

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 151. — MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION

Description

151.01 Mobilization consists of moving personnel, equipment, material, and incidentals to the project
and performing work necessary before beginning work at the project site. Mobilization includes
obtaining permits, insurance, and bonds.

Demobilization consists of removing personnel, equipment, material, and incidentals from the project
and performing work necessary after work at the project site is completed. Demobilization includes
clean-up of project site and other areas which the contractor may have used as stockpile areas,
equipment yard and any other areas which the contractor or the contractor’s work may have impacted.

Measurement

151.02 Measure the Section 151 items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

151.03 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 151 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Progress payments for mobilization by the lump sum will be paid as follows:

(a) Bond premiums will be reimbursed, after receipt of the evidence of payment.

(b) When 5 percent of the original contract amount is earned from pay items (not including
mobilization), 50 percent of the mobilization pay item, or 5 percent of the original contract amount,
whichever is less, will be paid.

(c) When 10 percent of the original contract amount is earned from pay items (not including
mobilization), 100 percent of the mobilization pay item, or 10 percent of the original contract
amount, whichever is less, will be paid.

(d) Any portion of the mobilization pay item in excess of 10 percent of the original contract
amount will be paid after final acceptance.

Progress payments for demobilization by the lump sum will be paid as follows:

(a) 100 percent when the Engineer certifies that the contractor has completed demobilization.

Section 151 – Mobilization and Demobilization 65

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 152. — CONSTRUCTION SURVEY AND STAKING

Description

152.01 This work consists of performing surveying, staking, calculating, and recording data for the
control of work.

The Contractor shall lay out its work from Government-established base lines and benchmarks
indicated on the drawings, and shall be responsible for all measurements in connection with the
layout. The Contractor shall furnish, at its own expense, all stakes, templates, platforms, equipment,
tools, materials, and labor required to lay out any part of the work. The Contractor shall be
responsible for executing the work to the lines and grades that may be established or indicated by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall also be responsible for maintaining and preserving all stakes and
other marks established by the Engineer until authorized to remove them. If such marks are
destroyed by the Contractor or through its negligence before their removal is authorized, the
Engineer may replace them and deduct the expense of the replacement from any amounts due or to
become due to the Contractor.

Construction Requirements

152.02 Qualifications. Provide technically qualified survey crews experienced in highway

construction survey and staking. Provide personnel capable of performing in a timely and accurate
manner.

152.03 Submittals. Submit the following at the preconstruction conference:

Submit the following when Automated Machine Guidance (AMG) methods are used:

(a) Technology statement. A written statement that includes:

(1) The manufacturer, model, and software version of the AMG equipment; and
(2) Certification that the final 3D data is compatible with the AMG equipment.
(b) Personnel qualifications.

(1) The name, authority, relevant experience, and qualifications of the person with overall
responsibility for the AMG system.
(2) The names, authority, and relevant experience of personnel directly responsible for
operating the AMG equipment.
(c) Contractor quality control plan. Comply with Section 153 and describe procedures for
checking, mechanical calibration, and maintenance of both survey and construction equipment.
Include the frequency and types of checks performed.

Submit a price breakdown by individual tasks when construction survey and staking is paid by the
lump sum for use in making progress payments and price adjustments

152.04 General. Conform to the following:

Section 152 – Construction Survey and Staking 66

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(a) Personnel. Provide a crew supervisor on the project whenever surveying and staking is in
progress.

(b) Equipment. Furnish survey instruments and supporting equipment capable of achieving the
specified tolerances.

Construction equipment controlled with a Global Positioning System (GPS) and Robotic Total
Station (RTS) machine guidance system may be used in the construction of subgrade, subbase,
and base aggregate courses, or other construction operations when approved.

(c) Material. Furnish acceptable tools and supplies of the type and quality suitable for highway
survey work. Furnish stakes and hubs of sufficient length to provide a solid set in the ground with
sufficient surface area above ground for necessary legible and durable markings.

Include staking activities in the construction schedule required under Section 155. Include the dates
and sequence of each staking activity.

The Government will set horizontal control points, vertical control points, and will provide data for use
in establishing control for completion of each element of the work.

Data relating to horizontal and vertical alignment, theoretical slope stake catch points, and other design
data will be furnished. Reformatting and additional calculations may be required for the convenient use
of the Government-furnished data. Provide immediate notification to the Engineer of apparent errors in
the initial staking or in the Government-furnished data.

Record survey and measurement field data in an approved format. Submit as-staked data and
corrections made to the Government-furnished survey data. Submit survey and measurement data at
least weekly. Field data and supporting documentation become the property of the Government upon
completion of the work.

Discuss and coordinate the following with the Engineer before surveying or staking:

(1) Surveying and staking methods;

(2) Stake marking;
(3) Grade control for courses of material;
(4) Referencing;
(5) Structure control;
(6) Field staking data;
(7) Localization of the GPS systems to the Government-established control points; and
(8) Any other procedures and controls necessary for the work.
Do not start work until staking or three-dimensional (3D) verification data for the affected work has
been approved.

Preserve initial reference and control points. Notify the Engineer of missing control points or stakes at
least 10 days before beginning construction. The Government will reestablish control points missing
before the beginning of construction.

Section 152 – Construction Survey and Staking 67

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Acceptance of the construction staking does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for correcting
errors discovered during the work and for bearing additional costs associated with the error.

Maintain legibility of stake markings for the duration of the project or until notified in writing the
stakes are no longer needed. Replace stakes if necessary to ensure markings are maintained.

Remove and properly dispose of flagging, paint, lath, stakes, and other staking material after the
project is complete.

152.05 Survey and Staking Requirements. Perform survey, staking, recording of data, and
calculations as necessary to construct the project from the initial layout to final completion. Survey
and set stakes to the tolerances in Table 152.1. Reset stakes, refine 3D data, or both as many times as
necessary to construct the work.

(a) Control points. Relocate initial horizontal and vertical control points in conflict with
construction to areas that will not be disturbed by construction operations. Furnish the
coordinates, elevations, and supporting documentation for the relocated points before the initial
points are disturbed. Set durable monuments for survey control that uniquely identify the points.

Furnish the GPS localization results at least 7 days before beginning construction layout survey
work. The Engineer may order the GPS localization calibration and associated 3D model to be
broken into two or more zones to maintain the localized relationship between control points and
original ground.

(b) Centerline establishment. Establish or reestablish centerline at roadway design cross-section

locations and as necessary to construct the work. Reestablish the centerline when construction
survey and staking work does not meet the tolerances.

(c) Original ground topographic verification. Use an approved method to regenerate cross-
section data in areas where theoretical and actual ground elevations do not meet a tolerance of
plus or minus 150 millimeters. Re-cross-section to verify existing ground topography to
mapping. Submit cross-section or 3D data in electronic and printed format for approval. Reduce
cross-sections to horizontal and vertical distances from centerline.

Re-cross-section 3 meters beyond catch points to verify existing ground topography.

(d) Slope and references stakes. Perform the following:

(1) AMG method. After clearing operations are completed, set centerline reference stakes
and hubs on both sides of centerline at 100-foot (30-meter) intervals at the clearing limit
locations. Where clearing limits are greater than 10 feet (3 meters) vertically, 25 feet (8
meters) horizontally, or both from subgrade hinge point; provide an additional reference stake
and hub as approved by the Engineer. Label each centerline reference stake with station, hub
elevation, and offset from centerline.
Construct a 300-meter long test section using AMG on the project at an approved location
before beginning grading operations. Select a test location with superelevation and curve
widening transitions, if applicable. Notify the Engineer 10 days before beginning the test
section. Demonstrate capability, knowledge, equipment, and experience to achieve work
within tolerances. Allow 14 days to evaluate the test section. Do not start full grading
operations until the test section is approved.

Section 152 – Construction Survey and Staking 68

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Provide as-built cross-sections at random locations specified by the Engineer not to exceed
150-meter intervals. If as-built cross-sections do not meet the tolerances in Subsection
204.13(d); rework the section until the specified tolerances are achieved and provide
additional cross-sections as directed by the Engineer at no cost to the Government.
(2) Conventional survey methods. Verify and set slope stakes on both sides of centerline
at the theoretical catch point. If the theoretical catch point is not within a tolerance of
150 millimeters, perform original ground topographic verification according to Subsection
152.05(c). Set the slope stake at the actual intersection of the design roadway slope with the
natural ground line. Set reference stakes outside the clearing limits. Include reference points
and slope-stake information on the reference stakes.
Establish slope stakes in the field as the actual point of intersection of the design roadway
slope with the natural ground line when theoretical catch point information is not available.
(e) Clearing and grubbing limits. Set clearing and grubbing limits on both sides of centerline
based on the actual slope-stake locations.

(f) Grade-finishing stakes.

(1) AMG method. Construct a 300-meter long test section using AMG on the project at an
approved location before beginning grading operations. Select a test location with
superelevation and curve widening transitions, if applicable. Notify the Engineer 10 days
before beginning the test section. Demonstrate the capability, knowledge, equipment, and
experience to achieve work within tolerances. Allow 14 days to evaluate the test section. Do
not start full grading operations until the test section is approved.

Verify the grade elevation and horizontal alignment of roadway grade-finishing operations.
Use conventional survey methods at random locations specified by the Engineer, not to
exceed 150-meter intervals. Submit 3D coordinates of grade-finishing quality control checks.

(2) Conventional survey methods. Set grade-finishing stakes for grade elevations and
horizontal alignment, on centerline and on each shoulder at design roadway cross-section
locations. Set stakes at the top of subgrade and the top of each aggregate course. Reset grade
finishing stakes as many times as necessary to construct the subgrade and each aggregate
course.

During turnout or pullout construction, set stakes on the centerline, on each normal shoulder,
and on the shoulder of the turnout. In parking areas, set stakes at the center and along the
edges of the parking area. Set stakes in ditches to be paved.

When the centerline curve radius is less than or equal to 75 meters, use a maximum
longitudinal spacing between stakes of 8 meters. When the centerline curve radius is greater
than 75 meters, use a maximum longitudinal spacing between stakes of 15 meters. Use a
maximum transverse spacing between stakes of 6 meters. Use brushes or guard stakes at each
stake.

(g) Culverts. Verify and set culvert locations at the inlet, outlet, and inlet basin points according
to the plans. Perform the following if culvert design does not fit field conditions:

(1) Survey and record the ground profile along the culvert centerline;

Section 152 – Construction Survey and Staking 69

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(2) Determine the slope catch points at the inlet and outlet;
(3) Set reference points and record information necessary to determine culvert length and end
treatments;
(4) Plot to scale the profile along the culvert centerline. Show the natural ground, the flow
line, the roadway section, and the culvert including end treatments and other appurtenances.
Show elevations, grade, culvert length, and degree of elbow.
(a) For single skewed culverts, submit a plotted field-design cross-section normal to
roadway centerline and at each end section. Plot the offset and elevation of natural ground
at the end section and at proposed template break points between centerline and the end
section. Ensure the template design embankment slope is not exceeded;
(b) For multiple skewed culverts, submit a plotted field design cross-section normal to
roadway centerline and at the end sections (left and right) nearest to the shoulder. Plot the
offset and elevation of natural ground at the end section and at proposed template break
points between centerline and the end section. Ensure the template design embankment
slope is not exceeded;
(c) Submit the plotted field-design cross-section for approval of final culvert length and
alignment. Plot a clear and readable scale;
(d) Set inlet, outlet, and reference stakes when the field design has been approved. Stake
inlet and outlet ditches to make sure the culvert and end treatments (e.g. drop inlets) are
functional; and
(e) Adjust slope, reference, and clearing stakes as necessary to provide for culvert inlet
treatments in cut slopes. Readjust slope, reference, and clearing stakes as necessary when
culvert inlets are moved from their plan locations. Review slope adjustments with the
Engineer and obtain approval.
(h) Bridges. Set adequate horizontal and vertical control and reference points for bridge
substructure and superstructure components. Establish and reference the bridge chord, bridge
tangent, or control lines as specified on the bridge plans. Also establish and reference the
centerline of each pier, bent, and abutment.

(i) Retaining walls and reinforced soil slopes.. Survey and record profile measurements along
the face of the proposed wall at 1.5 meters and 3 meters in front of the wall face. Take cross-
sections every 8 meters along the length of the wall and at major breaks in terrain within the
limits designated by the Engineer. Measure and record points every 8 meters and at major breaks
in terrain for each cross-section. Set additional references and control points to perform the work.

(j) Borrow and waste sites. Perform field work necessary for initial layout and measurement of
the borrow or waste site. Establish site limits and clearing limits. Measure both original and final
ground conditions and submit cross-sections and spot elevations as directed by the Engineer.

(k) Permanent monuments and markers. Perform survey and staking work necessary to
establish permanent monuments and markers as described in Section 621 or reestablish
monuments as described in Subsection 107.02.

Section 152 – Construction Survey and Staking 70

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(l) Miscellaneous survey and staking. Survey and stake other work (e.g. guardrail, curb and
gutter, turf establishment, utilities, and excavation limits for structures) to the proper location and
required tolerances. Propose staking increments for approval by the Engineer when not specified.

Table 152.1
Construction Survey and Staking Tolerances (1)
Staking Phase Horizontal Vertical
Control points set from existing (2)
±10 millimeters ±3 millimeters × N
Government control points
Mapping, topography, and cross-section
±50 millimeters ±50 millimeters
points
Centerline points (3) including (PC), (PT),
±20 millimeters ±20 millimeters
(POT),(POC), and references
Slope-stake and slope-stake references (4) ±50 millimeters ±50 millimeters
Culverts, ditches, and minor drainage
±50 millimeters ±20 millimeters
structures stakes
Retaining walls stakes ±20 millimeters ±10 millimeters
Curb and gutter stakes ±20 millimeters ±10 millimeters
Bridge substructures stakes ±10 millimeters(5) ±10 millimeters
Bridge superstructures stakes ±10 millimeters (5) ±10 millimeters
Clearing and grubbing limit stakes ±300 millimeters —
Roadway subgrade finish stakes (6) ±50 millimeters ±10 millimeters
(6)
Roadway finish grade stakes ±50 millimeters ±10 millimeters
(1) At statistical 95 percent confidence level. Tolerances are relative to existing Government control points.
(2) N is the number of instrument setups.
(3) Centerline points: PC - point of curve, PT - point of tangent, POT - point on tangent, POC - point on
curve.
(4) Take the cross-sections normal to the centerline ±1 degree.
(5) Bridge control is established as a local network and the tolerances are relative to that network.
(6) Includes paved ditches.

152.06 Acceptance. Construction survey and staking will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02
and 106.04.

Survey notes will be evaluated under Subsection 106.02.

Measurement

152.07 Measure the Section 152 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring grade finishing, measure one time for the subgrade and one time for each aggregate

Section 152 – Construction Survey and Staking 71

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

course.

Do not measure re-establishing missing control points or stakes after construction operations have
begun.

When measuring miscellaneous survey and staking paid by the hour; do not measure time spent in
making preparations, traveling to and from the project site, performing calculations, plotting cross-
sections and other data, processing computer data, and other efforts necessary to successfully
accomplish construction survey and staking.

Payment

152.08 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 152 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Payment for lump sum pay items will be prorated based on the progress of the work under this Section.

Section 152 – Construction Survey and Staking 72

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 153. — CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL

Description

153.01 This work consists of planning and implementing a construction quality process to ensure work
conforms to the contract. It includes quality control inspection and documentation, and process control
sampling and testing.

The Contractor is responsible for performing or having performed all inspections and tests necessary to
substantiate that the supplies or services furnished under this contract conform to contract
requirements, including any applicable technical requirements for specified manufacturers’ parts. This
clause takes precedence over any Government inspection and testing required in the contract’s
specifications, except for specialized inspections or tests specified to be performed solely by the
Government.

Construction Requirements

153.02 Qualifications. Submit the following for approval with the Quality Control Plan:

(a) Quality Control Manager (QCM). Provide a QCM according to Subsection 153.02(a)(1) or
(2). If neither is specified, conform to Subsection 153.02(a)(1).

(1) Full-time, on-site QCM. Provide a QCM with no responsibilities for performing testing
and inspection, managing the project, or performing operations other than managing quality
control and the following:
(a) One year experience managing quality control on construction projects of similar type
and scope, and
(b) One of the following:
(1) Two years experience as a construction project manager or superintendent on
construction projects of similar type and scope;
(2) Three years experience as a Engineer, resident engineer, foreman, construction
inspector, or equivalent on construction projects of similar type and scope; or
(2) Part-time, on-site QCM. Furnish a QCM who has at least two years experience in
highway construction, inspection, quality control, and material testing.
(b) Inspectors. Provide inspectors with at least two years experience inspecting projects of
similar complexity and with training related to the work to be inspected.

(c) Testers. Provide testers with at least one year experience in the type of sampling and testing
required
153.03 Quality Control Plan (QCP). Develop a QCP addressing all contract work categories. A
category consists of related work items performed in one operation, such as excavation, drainage, and
paving. Include the work of subcontractors, major material suppliers, and structural and geotechnical
services suppliers.

For each category, include the following:

Section 153 – Contractor Quality Control 73

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(a) Quality control personnel. Furnish the name, authority, responsibilities, and qualifications of
the quality control manager and other personnel directly involved in inspection and testing.
Conform to Subsection 153.02.

(b) Quality control procedures. Describe the inspection, testing, and other activities to be
performed for each phase of work in Subsection 153.04. Include methods, schedules, equipment,
and laboratory facilities. Conform to Subsections 153.04 and 153.05.

List the material to be tested by:

(1) Pay item;

(2) Applicable requirements of the Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements tables;
(3) Persons responsible for performing the sampling and testing;
(4) Laboratory testing facilities to be used for process control and project testing; and
(5) Proposed reporting formats.
As a minimum perform process control testing according to the Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance
Requirements tables included at the end of each Section where applicable.

(c) Records. Describe the reporting format for inspection, testing, certification, and daily reports.
Conform to Subsections 153.06 and 153.07.

At least 14 days before the start of work, submit the QCP for approval. Do not perform work on a work
category unless the quality control for that category is accepted. Approval does not imply that the QCP
will result in contract compliance.

Revise the QCP when contract quality requirements are not achieved and when changes occur in the
contract, work progress, or personnel.

153.04 Prosecution of Work. Complete the following:

(a) Preparatory phase.

(1) Before starting each work category, hold a preparatory phase meeting. Include the project
superintendent, work foreman, Engineer, QCM, and appropriate subcontractors. Be prepared
to discuss the following:
(a) Contract requirements for the work, including acceptance procedures, schedule, and
control strip;
(b) Process and equipment for constructing the work; and
(c) Plan for inspection, process control, testing, measuring, and reporting the work.
(2) Review and coordinate certifications, submittals, plans, drawings, and permits.
(3) Verify the capabilities of equipment, material, and personnel. Provide training as
necessary.
(4) Establish a detailed testing schedule based on the production schedule.

Section 153 – Contractor Quality Control 74

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(5) Ensure preparatory testing and inspection is accomplished.

(6) Review accuracy of the surveying and staking.
(b) Start-up phase.

(1) Hold a start-up meeting to review the contract, the construction processes, and the
inspection, testing, and reporting requirements with the personnel performing the work.
Include the project superintendent, inspectors, testers, Engineer, and QCM. Explain
procedures that will be followed if defective work is identified.
(2) Inspect, test, and report start-up work according to the QCP and ensure the work
conforms to the contract.
(c) Production phase.

(1) Inspect, test, and report according to the QCP and evaluate the acceptability of the work
produced.
(2) Identify and correct deficiencies.
(3) Request Government inspection and acceptance.
153.05 Sampling and Testing. Inspect commercial laboratory equipment within 45 days of project
use.

Have mobile laboratory equipment inspected and calibrated after the laboratory is moved to the
project and every time it is moved thereafter. Keep laboratory facilities clean and maintain
equipment in proper working condition. Certify that equipment conforms to testing requirements and
submit evidence of current calibrations.

Allow the Engineer unrestricted access to the laboratory for inspection and review. When requested
by the Engineer, provide additional inspections and tests to demonstrate sampling and testing
proficiency. Submit proficiency sample test results within 48 hours of sample receipt.

Perform quality control sampling and testing according to the QCP and the sampling, testing, and
acceptance requirements table in applicable sections.

When no sampling frequencies are specified, submit the proposed sampling and testing frequencies.

153.06 Certifications. Obtain, review, and verify certifications for work. Submit certifications when
required.

153.07 Records and Control Charts. Maintain records and control charts by pay item.

(a) Quality control and construction operations reports. Submit written quality control and
construction operations reports daily according to the QCP. Document meetings, work locations,
labor and equipment used including actual hours worked, testing and measurement activities,
inspection results, deficiencies observed, corrective actions taken, and process changes. Use
approved form which include the following certification signed by the QCM on all reports:

Section 153 – Contractor Quality Control 75

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

"I certify that the information contained in this record is accurate and that work documented
herein complies with the contract. Any exceptions to this certification are documented as a
part of this record."

(b) Control charts. Maintain linear control charts that identify the test number, test parameter,
upper and lower specification limit applicable to each test parameter, and test results for applicable
material. Use the control charts to document the variability of the process, to identify production
and equipment problems, and to identify actions to improve processes or quality.

Update and post control charts daily in a location accessible to the Engineer. Cease production and
correct the process when problems are evident.

153.08 Acceptance. The Contractor's quality control system will be evaluated under Subsection 106.02
based on its demonstrated effectiveness to ensure work conforms to the contract.

Measurement and Payment

153.09 Do not measure Contractor's quality control for payment. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 153 – Contractor Quality Control 76

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 154. — CONTRACTOR SAMPLING AND TESTING

Description

154.01 This work consists of obtaining samples for testing.

When there is a pay item for Contractor testing included in the bid schedule, it consists of sampling,
testing and reporting the required test results. It does not include Contractor quality control testing
required under Section 153.

Construction Requirements

154.02 General. Include the work required under this Section in the Section 153 quality control plan.

Sample and test material according to the Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements tables
included at the end of each Section. Perform additional sampling and testing as directed when material
does not meet requirements.

Provide the Engineer at least 2 hours written notice so the Engineer has the opportunity to witness
sampling, splitting, and testing of material.

Where process control sampling and testing frequencies are identical to the sampling and testing
frequencies for acceptance, the process control samples may be used for acceptance for the applicable
work.

154.03 Sampling. Sample and split samples according to AASHTO or other acceptable procedures.
The location of statistical acceptance sampling will be provided using a random number system.
Perform splits when required and deliver the Government’s portion of the sample or split sample in an
acceptable container suitable for shipment. Label samples with the following information:

(a) Project number and name;

(b) Pay item number and description;

(c) Source of material;

(d) Sample number;

(e) Date sampled;

(f) Time sampled;

(g) Location sample taken;

(h) Name of person sampling;

(i) Name of person witnessing sampling; and

(j) Type of test required on sample.

Section 154 – Contractor Sampling and Testing 77

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

154.04 Testing. Perform tests when there is a pay item for Contractor testing included in the bid
schedule. Demonstrate testing competency when requested by the Engineer.

154.05 Records. When tests are on material being incorporated in the work, report test results within
24 hours unless specified otherwise in the Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements tables.
Report test results on forms containing sample information required by Subsection 154.03. Label
interim measurements used to determine the results. Attach work sheets used to determine test values
to the test result forms. Payment for work may be delayed or the work stopped until test results are
submitted and approved.

154.06 Acceptance. Contractor sampling and testing will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.04 based on Government verification testing.

Measurement

154.07 Measure the Section 154 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

154.08 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 154 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Progress payments for Contractor testing lump sum will be paid as follows:

(a) 25 percent of the pay item amount, not to exceed 0.5 percent of the original contract amount,
will be paid after the testing facilities are in place, qualified sampling and testing personnel are
identified, and the work being tested has started.

(b) Payment for the remaining portion of the pay item amount will be prorated based on the total
work completed in Section 154.

Payment may be retained if Government verification testing does not validate the Contractor testing or
if it is determined that documentation of sampling and testing does not meet requirements.

Section 154 – Contractor Sampling and Testing 78

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 155. — SCHEDULES FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS

Description

155.01 This work consists of scheduling and monitoring the progress of construction activities.

155.02 Definitions.
(a) Construction schedule. A progress time-scaled logic diagram, tabular schedule, written
narrative, and submittal list.

(b) Preliminary construction schedule. A written narrative and a schedule diagram of contract
activities for the first 60 days after the effective date issued in the Notice to Proceed. A schedule
diagram consists of either a Bar Chart Method (BCM) or a Critical Path Method (CPM).

(c) Initial construction schedule. The first approved BCM or CPM construction schedule
submitted after the preliminary construction schedule. Once approved the initial construction
schedule becomes the first baseline construction schedule.

(d) Baseline construction schedule. The current approved initial construction schedule in which
subsequent construction schedule updates are based on.

(e) Baseline construction schedule update. The normal monthly updating of the currently
approved baseline schedule with no changes in the schedule logic or activities and no changes to
the critical path.

(f) Baseline construction schedule revision. A significant change to the schedule logic,
schedule activities or activity durations, or some other modification to the schedule of planned
work. Activities performed out of sequence from the baseline schedule affecting the critical path
require a revision. A baseline schedule revision may show construction being completed at a date
other than the contract completion date.

Construction Requirements

155.03 General. Designate an individual in the Contractor's organization who will be the authorized
representative responsible for the construction schedule. Identify the representative before or at the
preconstruction conference.

When preparing schedules, show completion of work within the contract time.

The Contractor shall, within five days after the work commences on the contract or another period of
time determined by the Engineer, prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval three copies of a
practicable schedule showing the order in which the Contractor proposes to perform the work, and
the dates on which the Contractor contemplates starting and completing the several salient features of
the work (including acquiring materials, plant, and equipment). The schedule shall be in the form of
a progress chart of suitable scale to indicate appropriately the percentage of work scheduled for
completion by any given date during the period. If the Contractor fails to submit a schedule within
the time prescribed, the Engineer may withhold approval of progress payments until the Contractor
submits the required schedule.

Section 155 – Schedules for Construction Contracts 79

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

The Contractor shall enter the actual progress on the chart as directed by the Engineer, and upon
doing so shall immediately deliver three copies of the annotated schedule to the Engineer. If, in the
opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor falls behind the approved schedule, the Contractor shall take
steps necessary to improve its progress, including those that may be required by the Engineer,
without additional cost to the Government. In this circumstance, the Engineer may require the
Contractor to increase the number of shifts, overtime operations, days of work, and/or the amount of
construction plant, and to submit for approval any supplementary schedule or schedules in chart form
as the Engineer deems necessary to demonstrate how the approved rate of progress will be regained.

Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of the Engineer under this clause shall be
grounds for a determination by the Engineer that the Contractor is not prosecuting the work with
sufficient diligence to ensure completion within the time specified in the contract. Upon making this
determination, the Engineer may terminate the Contractor’s right to proceed with the work, or any
separable part of it in accordance with the default terms of this contract.
VerDate Aug<31>2005 10:3 Nov 14, 2006 Jkt 208202 PO 00000 Frm 00287 Fmt 8010
155.04 Preliminary Construction Schedule. Do not begin work, except mobilization, traffic
control, and Section 637 work, without an approved preliminary construction schedule. No progress
payments will be made until a preliminary construction schedule has been approved.

Submit a written narrative that includes:

(a) A title page stating the contract number, project number, project name, Contractor name,
current contract completion date, date of submittal, submittal number and schedule name
designated as Preliminary Construction Schedule;

(b) A description of the work to be done within each activity including the type and quantity of
equipment, labor, and materials to be used;

(c) A description of the planned production rates by pay item units;

(d) A description of the work days per week, number of shifts per day, and number of hours per
shift. Include calendars used in the schedule module;

(e) Estimated periods during which an activity is idle or partially idle. Show the beginning and
end dates for reduced production or idle time;

(f) Identification of the vendor, supplier, or subcontractor to perform the activity. State
assumptions made in scheduling their work;

(g) A description of site mobilization such as dates of expected material shipments, planned dates
for equipment arrivals, office setup, material laboratory arrival and setup, and anticipated
portable crusher or batch plant setup;

(h) A list of drawing and sample submittals; and

(i) The fabrication and delivery of key and long-lead procurement activities.

Submit 2 physical copies and one electrionic copy in a format sutiable to the Engineer of a
preliminary construction schedule at least 7 days before the preconstruction conference. Within 7
days after the preconstruction conference, the preliminary construction schedule will be approved or

Section 155 – Schedules for Construction Contracts 80

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

rejected. If rejected, submit a revised schedule within 3 days.

The preconstruction conference will be rescheduled if the Engineer does not receive the schedule 7
days before the scheduled preconstruction conference date. Contract time will not be extended for
failure to submit a preliminary construction schedule by the date required.

155.05 Initial and Baseline Construction Schedule. Prepare and submit a Critical Path Method
(CPM) initial construction schedule unless otherwise required by the contract.

(a) Bar Chart Method (BCM). Include the contract number, project number, project name,
Contractor name, current contract completion date, date of submittal, and submittal number.

(1) Progress bar chart.

(a) Use a time scale to graphically show the percentage of work scheduled for completion
during the contract time;
(b) Define and relate activities to the contract pay items;
(c) Show activities in the order the work will be performed, including submittals,
submittal reviews, fabrication, and delivery;
(d) Show critical (major) activities that are controlling factors in the completion of the
work;
(e) Show the time needed to perform each activity and its relationship in time to other
activities;
(f) Show the total expected time to complete work; and
(g) Provide enough space for each activity to permit 2 additional plots parallel to the
original time span plot. Use one space for revision of the planned time span, and one for
showing actual time span achieved.
(2) Written narrative. Submit a written narrative of the activities displayed in the progress
bar chart. The following applies to the written narrative:
(a) Estimate starting and completion dates of each activity;
(b) Describe work to be done within each activity including the type and quantity of
equipment, labor, and material to be used;
(c) Describe the location on the project where each activity occurs;
(d) Describe planned production rates by pay item quantities (e.g., quantity of excavation
per day or week);
(e) Describe work days per week, holidays, number of shifts per day, and number of
hours per shift;
(f) Estimate periods during which an activity is idle or partially idle. Show the beginning
and end dates for reduced production or idle time;
(g) Describe expected and critical delivery dates for equipment or material that can affect
completion of the project;

Section 155 – Schedules for Construction Contracts 81

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(h) Describe critical completion dates for maintaining the construction schedule; and
(i) Identify the vendor, supplier, or subcontractor to perform the activity. State
assumptions made in the scheduling their work.
(3) Bar Chart Method updates. Review the construction schedule to verify or adjust: start
and finish dates of activities underway, remaining duration of uncompleted activities, and
finish dates of completed activities. Inform the Engineer of changes.
Submit two copies of an updated construction schedule with each progress estimate or every
30 days, whichever is less or within 2 days of:
(a) A delay occurs in the completion of a critical (major) activity;
(b) A delay occurs which causes a change in a critical activity;
(c) The actual prosecution of the work is different from that represented on the current
construction schedule;
(d) There is an addition, deletion, or revision of activities caused by a contract
modification; or
(e) There is a change in the schedule logic.
(b) Critical Path Method (CPM). Prepare an initial construction schedule using a CPM that is
computer-generated schedule prepared by a computer based scheduling software application
acceptable to the Engineer. Submit an initial construction schedule that includes all activities,
contractual requirements (e.g. construction or traffic staging), contract restrictions, and
subcontract work.

(1) Format. Prepare a construction schedule diagram and supporting documents as follows:
(a) A title page or header block for each component (time-scaled logic diagram, tabular
schedule, written narrative, and submittal list) with the contract number, project number,
project name, Contractor name, current fixed completion date, date of submittal, and
submittal number.
(b) A schedule diagram using the activity-on-arrow diagram method (ADM) or the
precedence diagram method (PDM). Depict the order and interdependence of all activities
and the sequence of the work that will be accomplished by the Contractor in coordination
with its subcontractors. Show how the completion of predecessor activities restricts the
start of successor activities.
(2) Time-scaled logic diagram.
(a) Show all activities including those in the preliminary construction schedule. Add
items for correcting punch-list items, and general cleanup. Relate an activity or groups of
activities to the contract pay items;
(b) Show all activity nodes or boxes, activity IDs, activity descriptions, and durations;
(c) Group the activities independently by area (i.e. separate distinct bridges or roadways)
and by type of work (e.g. submittals, utilities, roadway, bridge);
(d) Include a description of the work represented by each activity at or near the event
node or box for each activity;

Section 155 – Schedules for Construction Contracts 82

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(e) Code each subcontractor’s activities so that its activities can be shown separately as
well as cumulatively;
(f) Show durations for construction activities as whole working days, with a maximum
duration of 30 working days each. Divide activities with longer durations into subgroups
of activities not exceeding 30 working days in duration. Indicate logical start and end
points (e.g. stationing, staging, etc.) for each subgroup;
(g) Show the durations of non-construction activities. Non-construction activities include
mobilization, drawing and sample submittals by pay item number, and the fabrication and
delivery of key material. Non-construction activities may have durations exceeding
30 working days consistent with the contract. Indicate intended submittal dates and
delivery dates for fabrication and delivery activities. Allow for review, approval, and
distribution of each submittal or resubmittal. Where no times are specified, allow 14 days
for the review, approval, and distribution of each submittal or resubmittal after receipt by
the Engineer;
(h) Indicate the total number of anticipated working days to complete each activity of
work;
(i) Identify the critical path on the diagram; and
(j) Begin the construction schedule diagram with the date of the Notice to Proceed and
include the contract completion date. Float time within the construction schedule is not
for use or benefit of either party, but is a jointly owned project resource available to both
parties as needed to meet the completion date established in the contract.
(3) Tabular schedule. Submit a tabular schedule sorted by early start and total float. Include
the following information in the tabular schedule:

(a) Activity ID;

(b) Activity description;
(c) Subcontractors codes;
(d) Activity percent complete;
(e) Original and remaining duration;
(f) Early and late schedule dates;
(g) Total float;
(h) A predecessor/successor report; and
(i) Other tabular schedule report formats if requested by the Engineer for analyzing CPM
revisions or time impacts.
(4) Written narrative. Submit a written narrative describing the rationale and assumptions
utilized in the development of the construction schedule. Use the time-scaled logic diagram
as the basis of schedule-related comments, referencing specific activities by number and
description. Include the following:
(a) Describe the planned critical path and the general sequence of work;
(b) Information and references to adequately define the scope of work by pay item

Section 155 – Schedules for Construction Contracts 83

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

included in each major activity type (e.g. roadway excavation, aggregate base course).
Include such information as station numbers, location, etc.;
(c) Describe the resource loading planned for use in the performance of the work for each
major activity. The description should include manpower allocation by types of labor and
crew size, types and number of equipment and any special equipment, material, and
subcontractors involved;
(d) Describe the basis (including the resource loading above) for the calculation of the
duration for all major activities, to be stated as quantity production rates (e.g. quantity of
excavation per day, etc.);
(e) Describe work days per week, number of shifts per day, and number of hours per shift;
(f) A description of the assumptions used in converting working days to calendar dates.
Include anticipated holidays, non-work days, winter shutdowns, and other constraints
within the contract;
(g) Identify the subcontractor or supplier performing an activity and identify their activity
codes used on the schedule diagram. State assumptions made in the scheduling of the
subcontractor's or supplier's work;
(h) Describe expected and critical delivery dates for equipment or material that can affect
completion of the project;
(i) A description of any organizational limitations such as resource constraints or
subcontractor commitments, which limit scheduling flexibility;
(j) Ensure that there is no conflict between the diagram and the narrative;
(k) An explanation of the schedule’s Work Breakdown Structure (WBS), and Activity ID
protocol to be use throughout the life of the work; and
(l) A list and description of constraints used in the CPM scheduling software.
(5) Submittal list.
(a) Submit a list of drawings and other submittals by pay item number required for the
entire contract period.
(b) Include the following information for each submittal:
(1) Pay item number and description;
(2) Related activity ID number and description from the CPM;
(3) Planned date of initial submittal;
(4) Planned date of Engineer's initial response; and
(5) Any other comments.
(f) Submission and approval Submit 2 paper copies and one electronic copy of the initial
construction schedule within 45 days after the effective date of the Notice to Proceed has been
issued. Submit an electronic copy via media approved by the Engineer. In case of discrepancy
between the paper version and the electronic version, the paper version will govern over the
electronic version of the schedule.

Section 155 – Schedules for Construction Contracts 84

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Allow 14 days for the approval or rejection of the schedule. If rejected, submit corrected
schedule within 7 days after the date of the rejection of the schedule. If rejected, schedule a
meeting within 3 days to discuss corrections.

The approved copy of the initial construction schedule with supporting documents becomes
baseline construction schedule. Implement and execute the work under the contract according to
the baseline construction schedule. Update the baseline construction schedule according to
Subsection 155.06.

Failure to include any elements of work in the construction schedule diagram that are required for
performance of the contract, even when approved by the Government, will not excuse the Contractor
from completing the work required by the contract completion date.

155.06 Baseline Schedule Update. Submit a baseline construction schedule update no less than 7
days before the closing date for the progress estimate or every 30 days, whichever is less. Show
completion of work within the contract time. No progress payment will be made for any work until an
updated construction schedule is approved by the Engineer.

Unless previously approval by the Engineer, any change to the construction schedule for work that is
still to be completed, can only be changed with a Time Impact Analysis according to Subsection
108.03, and a Baseline Construction Schedule Revision according to Subsection 155.08. Receipt of a
baseline construction schedule update with negative float does not constitute agreement by the
Government of the revised completion date.

(a) Written narrative. Submit an update of the initial or previous written narrative identifying
adjustments made to each operation since the last update. Adjustments include but are not limited
to the following:

(1) Equipment added or removed from the project;

(2) Changes to Labor such as added crews or subcontractors;
(3) Work Shift adjustments such as extended hour or added shifts;
(4) Periods of anticipated suspension or holiday;
(5) Changes in material delivery;
(6) Early completion of individual work items; and
(7) Efficiency of operations
(b) Submittal list.
(1) Actual dates of initial (and expected dates for all subsequent) submittals;
(2) Actual dates of Engineer's initial (and expected dates for subsequent) responses;
(3) Status of Engineer's responses (i.e. approved, rejected, or approved as noted); and
(4) Any comments.
(c) Bar Chart Method updates. Submit 2 paper copies of an updated baseline construction
schedule. Verify or adjust: start and finish dates of activities underway, remaining duration of
uncompleted activities, and finish dates of completed activities. Include the initial time span plot

Section 155 – Schedules for Construction Contracts 85

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

adjacent to the updated span plot for each work activity.

(d) Critical Path Method updates. Submit 2 paper copies and one electronic copy in a format
sutiable to the Engineer of the construction schedule update. Provide an electronic copy via
media approved by the Engineer. In case of discrepancy between the paper version and the
electronic version, the paper version will govern over the electronic version of the schedule.

(1) Tabular schedule:

(a) Actual finish dates for completed activities;
(b) Remaining duration required to complete each activity started, or scheduled to start,
but not completed;
(c) Float remaining for each activity;
(d) Percentages for completed and partially completed activities; and
(e) Additional tabular schedules using different sort parameters when requested by the
Engineer.
(2) Updated time-scaled logic diagram.
(e) Review and approval of a construction schedule update. The Engineer will review and
approve the baseline construction schedule update within 7 days or return it for corrections. The
approved baseline construction schedule revision will become the new Baseline Construction
Schedule.

155.07 Baseline Schedule Revision. Submit a time impact analysis when requesting approval of a
baseline schedule revision. Submitting a proposed baseline schedule revision is not considered a
notification of delay or of any other basis for change. Continue to submit monthly schedule updates
according to Subsection 155.08 until a baseline construction schedule revision is approved.

(a) Time impact analysis. Perform a time impact analysis according to Subsection 108.03 within
20 days of impacts caused by:

(1) changes in the resource loading, durations, specifications, subcontractors;

(2) the addition or deletion of work;
(3) increased or decreased quantities;
(4) defective work;
(5) acceleration of the work; or
(6) any other changes.
(b) Bar Chart Method revisions. Submit a bar chart according to Subsection 155.05(a) which
includes revised construction activities affected by impacts addressed with a time impact
analysis. Include a revised completion date for the total work.

(c) Critical Path Method revisions. Submit a tabular schedule and time-scaled logic diagram
according to Subsection 155.05(b) which includes revised construction activities affected by
impacts addressed with a time impact analysis. Include a revised critical path and completion

Section 155 – Schedules for Construction Contracts 86

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

date for the total work.

(d)Written narrative. Submit a written narrative according to Subsection 155.05 describing the
changes to the critical path and any logic revisions. Identify delays and disruptions which are
ongoing as of the date of the proposed revision. When delays or disruptions have occurred which
are the responsibility of the Contractor; propose efforts to return the project to a schedule
consistent with the terms of the contract including the commitment of additional resources or
other appropriate action. Notify the Engineer which completion dates or other terms of the
contract will not be met.

155.08 Acceptance. Construction schedules and supporting documents will be evaluated under
Subsection 106.02 and Subsection 109.08(a).

Measurement

155.09 Measure the Section 155 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

155.10 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 155 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Progress payments for construction schedule lump sum will be paid as follows:

(a) 25 percent of the pay item amount, not to exceed 0.5 percent of the original contract amount,
will be paid after the initial baseline construction schedule is approved.

(b) Payment of the remaining portion of the lump sum pay item will be prorated based on the total
work completed.

Section 155 – Schedules for Construction Contracts 87

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 156. — PUBLIC TRAFFIC

Description

156.01 This work consists of controlling and protecting public traffic, construction equipment and
personnel to and within the project.

The Contractor shall provide and maintain work environments and procedures which will safeguard
the public, Contractor and Government personnel, property, materials, supplies, and equipment
exposed to Contractor operations and activities, avoid interruptions of Government operations and
delays in project completion dates; and control costs in the performance of this contract.

For these purposes on contracts for construction or dismantling, demolition, or removal of

improvements, the Contractor shall provide appropriate safety barricades, signs, flaggers, and signal
lights, and any additional measures the Engineer determines to be reasonably necessary for the
purposes are taken.

Material

156.02 Conform to the following Section:

Temporary Traffic Control 635

Construction Requirements

156.03 Qualifications. Provide a traffic control supervisor certified by a acceptable certification

program.

156.04 Accommodating Traffic During Work. Accommodate traffic according to the MUTCD,
contract traffic control plan, Section 635, and this Section. An alternate traffic control plan may be
submitted for approval according to Subsection 104.03. Submit alternate traffic control plans at least
30 days before intended use.

Perform work in a manner that ensures the safety and convenience of the public and protects the
residents and property adjacent to the project. Accommodate public traffic on roads adjacent to and
within the project until the project is accepted according to Subsection 106.07(b).

156.05 Maintaining Roadways During Work. Maintain roadways as follows:

(a) Construct and remove diversion roads and bridges as required by the traffic control plan;

(b) Maintain intersections with trails, roads, streets, businesses, parking lots, residences, garages,
farms, and other features;

(c) Mud and ruts removal to facilitate the work is the Contractor’s responsibility. Mud and ruts
removal to provide public access is the responsibility of the maintaining agency and will be
performed at the maintaining agency’s discretion. Allow the maintaining agency access to perform
Mud and ruts removal;

Section 156 – Public Traffic 88

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(d) Maintain a dust-free traveled way such that visibility and air quality are not affected and a
hazardous condition is not created;

(e) Remove accumulations of soil and other material from traveled way;

(f) Do not allow water to pond on the traveled way; and

(g) Maintain the roadway, detours, and diversions in a safe and acceptable condition.

If corrective action is requested and the corrective action is not taken immediately, the condition may
be corrected and the cost of the corrective action deducted from monies due the Contractor.

156.06 Maintaining Roadways During Non-Work Periods. Maintain roadways and traffic control
for public traffic during periods when work is not in progress. Debris and landslide removal to provide
public access is the responsibility of the maintaining agency.

156.07 Limitations on Construction Operations. When the roadway is open to public traffic, restrict
operations as follows:

(a) Operate equipment in the direction of traffic, where practical;

(b) For shoulder drop-offs of 75 millimeters or less, provide "Low Shoulder" warning signs. For
shoulder drop-offs in excess of 75 millimeters, provide a 1V:3H fillet with "Shoulder Drop-Off"
warning signs. Complete the construction of shoulders adjacent to traffic lanes to the same
elevation within 14 days;

(c) Provide minimum lane widths of 3 meters. Use barricades, drums, or other acceptable devices
to delineate traffic lanes through areas where the edge of pavement or intended path has been
obliterated by construction operations;

(d) Locate staging areas at least 9 meters from the traveled way or behind acceptable traffic
barriers. Obtain approval of the location and access to staging areas. Store unused traffic control
devices at staging areas;

(e) Park equipment at least 9 meters from the traveled way or behind acceptable traffic barriers;

(f) Provide parking areas for employee’s personal vehicles in approved areas;

(g) Provide un-interrupted two-way communications between flaggers and also between flaggers
and pilot cars unless flaggers are able to see each other and communicate. Use communications
devices approved by the Engineer. Citizen band radios are not acceptable. Make communication
devices available to the Engineer as necessary;

(h) Where switching traffic to a completed lane, provide adequate personnel and equipment to set
or relocate traffic control devices;

(i) Limit construction-caused delays to public traffic to a maximum of 30 minutes per passage
through the project; and

(k) Maintain existing guardrails, barriers, and bridge railings until removal is necessary for
construction. Use a temporary barrier or appropriate channelizing devices while the guardrails and

Section 156 – Public Traffic 89

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

bridge rails are absent. Install permanent barriers, guardrails, and bridge rails as soon as possible to
minimize risk to the public.

156.08 Nighttime Operations. Perform construction operations during the hours of daylight (½ hour
after sunrise to ½ hour before sunset).

Where night operations are permitted, submit a night lighting system for approval. Include the light
types, locations, and the manner in which the lights will be moved. Submit the proposed system at least
14 days before use. Use an independent source other than vehicle headlights. Do not use incandescent
lights. Furnish and install the approved system to illuminate the entire work area. Position the lights so
they do not shine directly at motorists traveling from any direction. If the operation is moving, move
the lighting with the operation. Provide lighting at each flagger location. Equip vehicles with an
exterior flashing yellow dome light.

156.09 Traffic Control Supervisor. Provide a traffic control supervisor according to Subsection
156.03. Do not designate the superintendent as the traffic control supervisor. Furnish the traffic control
supervisor's name, address, and 24-hour telephone numbers at the preconstruction conference. During
the contract, including periods of suspensions and work stoppages, perform the following:

(a) Implement the traffic control plans.

(b) Coordinate traffic control operations, including those of subcontractors and suppliers.

(c) Ensure the condition, position, and applicability of traffic control devices in use.

(d) Immediately correct traffic control deficiencies.

(e) Coordinate traffic control maintenance operations with the EngineerEngineer.

(f) Coordinate and ensure that traffic control devices are furnished, installed, maintained, removed,
stored, replaced, relocated and cleaned according to Subsection 635.04. Ensure unused traffic
control devices are properly handled and stored.

(g) Conduct weekly traffic safety meetings for construction workers, and invite the
EngineerEngineer to these weekly meetings.

(h) Submit a weekly certification that inspections and reviews were conducted and that the traffic
control devices meet contract requirements. Include the number and types of devices in use. Report
with the weekly certification, changes or corrective actions taken to ensure the safe passage of
public traffic through the project.

(i) Inspect traffic control devices, including those in staging, storage, material sources, and
disposal areas, as follows:

(1) Daily during daylight hours when daylight work is being performed;
(2) Daily during hours of darkness when nighttime work is being performed;
(3) Weekly during:
(a) Daylight hours and hours of darkness when work is suspended for periods of more
than one week, except when the project has been shut down for the winter; and

Section 156 – Public Traffic 90

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Periods of winter suspension, inspect only as requested by the Engineer.

(4) Additional inspections, day or night, as directed by the Engineer; and
(5) Submit reports of inspections in an acceptable format within 2 days.

(j) Provide temporary flagging assistance.

Whenever the Engineer becomes aware of any noncompliance with these requirements or any
condition which poses a serious or imminent danger to the health or safety of the public or
Government personnel, the Engineer shall notify the Contractor orally, with written confirmation,
and request immediate initiation of corrective action. This notice, when delivered to the Contractor
or the Contractor’s representative at the work site, shall be deemed sufficient notice of the
noncompliance and that corrective action is required. After receiving the notice, the Contractor shall
immediately take corrective action. If the Contractor fails or refuses to promptly take corrective
action, the Engineer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective
action has been taken. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any equitable adjustment of the contract
price or extension of the performance schedule on any stop work order issued under this clause.

156.10 Acceptance. Public traffic work will be evaluated under Subsection 106.02.

Traffic control devices and services will be evaluated under Section 635.

Measurement and Payment

156.11 Do not measure controlling and protecting public traffic for payment. See Subsection 109.05.

Measure temporary traffic control under Section 635.

Measure dust abatement under Section 158 or 312.

Section 156 – Public Traffic 91

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 157. —SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

Description

157.01 Work consists of designing, furnishing, constructing, and maintaining permanent and
temporary erosion and sediment control measures, as shown on the plans developed by the Contractor,
required by permits or as ordered by the Contracting Officer during the life of the contract. This work
is necessary to control water pollution, soil erosion and siltation through the use of berms, dikes,
grasses, slope drains, drain inlet protection, silt fences, swale, berms, and other approved erosion
control devices or methods.

157.02 Erosion and sediment control materials shall conform to the following Subsections:

Backfill material 704.03

Concrete masonry unit 725.07(c)
Fertilizer 713.03
Fiber rolls and socks 713.12
Floating turbidity curtains 713.21
Gravel bags 713.13
Mulch 713.05
Plastic lining 725.12
Prefabricated filter insert 713.20
Riprap 705.02
Rock mulch 705.07
Sandbags 713.14
Sediment filter bags 713.19
Seed 713.04
Separation and stabilization geotextile and geotextile filter 714.01(a)
Silt fence 713.16
Tackifiers 713.11(a)
Temporary culvert pipe 713.15
Temporary plastic fence 710.11
Temporary rolled erosion control products 713.17
Turf reinforcement mats 713.18
Water 725.01(b)

Construction Requirements

157.03 Qualifications. Submit the following for approval at least 14 days before earth disturbing
operations begin:

(a) Names of personnel responsible for soil erosion and sediment control; and

(b) A résumé for each individual describing their knowledge and experience providing erosion and
sediment control and pollution prevention on highway or road construction projects for at least five
years. Include certifications where applicable.

157.04 General. The Contractor shall prepare an Environmental Protection Plan (EPP) / Erosion
Control Plan (ECP)

Section 157 – Soil Erosion and Sediment Control 92

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

including a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) based on the Contractor’s proposed
sequence of work, and shall obtain approval of the plan from the Engineer and Governemt of Rwanda
departments if applicatal.

The EPP shall include but not limited to Solid and Hazardous Waste Disposal Plan and Fugitive Dust
Control Plan to obtain all related permits.

Provide soil erosion and sediment control measures according to the contract erosion plan and/or the
Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan, contract permits, Section 107, and this Section. Contract
permits amend the requirements of this Section. Do not modify the type, size, or location of any control
or practice without approval.

The erosion and sediment control plan reflects special concerns and measures to protect resources. An
alternate erosion and sediment control or stormwater pollution prevention plan, with necessary permits,
may be submitted for approval according to Subsection 104.03. Submit alternate erosion and sediment
control proposals at least 30 days before their intended use.

When soil erosion and sediment control measures are not functioning as intended, take corrective
action to eliminate or minimize pollutants in stormwater discharges from the project.

Items in the bid schedule for Soil Erosion Control, Silt Fence; Soil Erosion Control, Check Dam; and
Soil Erosion Control, Inlet Protection shall be used where indicated on the plans. This work includes
construction, maintenance, and subsequent removal of these erosion protection measures.

157.05 Controls and Limitations on Work. Before grubbing or grading construct sediment controls
around the perimeter of the project including filter barriers, diversion, and settling structures.

Limit the combined grubbing and grading operations areas to 3.2 hectares of exposed soil at one time.

Construct and implement soil erosion and sediment control measures as follows:

(a) Construct temporary controls in incremental stages as construction proceeds;

(b) Construct temporary slope drains, diversion channels, and earth berms to protect disturbed
areas and slopes;

(c) When a soil disturbing activity within a portion of the project is complete, apply permanent
measures to the finished slopes and ditches within 14 days;

(d) When a soil disturbing activity within a portion of the project has temporarily ceased, apply
temporary measures within 14 days;

(e) Construct temporary inlet protection and outlet protection as soon as culverts or other structures
are complete;

(f) Construct and maintain soil erosion and sediment controls on and around soil stockpiles;

(g) Following each day’s grading operations, shape earthwork to minimize and control erosion
from stormwater runoff; and

(h) Maintain stabilized construction exits to minimize tracking of soil onto existing roads.

Section 157 – Soil Erosion and Sediment Control 93

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

157.06 Filter Barriers. Construct silt fence, bales, wattles, logs, rolls, berms, and compost filter socks
to reduce the velocity of runoff to allow sediment to settle.

157.07 Sediment Retention Structures. Construct sediment retention structures of the following
types:

(a) Temporary sediment traps. Construct temporary sediment traps to detain runoff from
disturbed areas and settle out sediment. Provide outlet protection.

(b) Sediment basins. Construct sediment basins to store runoff and settle out sediment for large
drainage areas. Excavate and construct sediment basins according to Section 204. Construct riser
pipes according to Section 602. Provide outlet protection.

157.08 Outlet Protection. Construct riprap aprons or basins to reduce water velocity and prevent scour
at the outlet of permanent and temporary erosion and sediment control measures. Construct riprap
according to Section 251.

157.09 Water Crossings. Construct temporary culvert pipe at temporary crossings where construction
vehicles cross a live waterway.

157.10 Diversions. Construct temporary channels, temporary culverts, earth berms, or sandbags to
divert water around disturbed areas and slopes. Use temporary channels, temporary culverts, pumps,
sandbags, or other methods to divert the flow of live streams for permanent culvert installations and
other work. Stabilize channels according to Subsection 157.11. Provide outlet protection.

157.11 Waterway and Slope Protection and Stabilization. Use the following:

(a) Plastic lining. Use plastic lining to protect underlying soil from erosion. Place the plastic lining
loosely on a smooth soil surface free of projections or depressions that may cause the liner to
puncture or tear. Lap transverse joints a minimum of 3 feet (1 meter) in the direction of flow. Do
not use longitudinal joints. Anchor the lining in place using riprap, gravel bags, or sandbags.

(b) Riprap. Construct riprap for channel lining according to Section 251.

(c) Check dams. Construct riprap, gravel bags, sandbags, fiber rolls and socks, or earth berms for
temporary check dams to reduce the velocity of runoff in ditches and swales.

(d) Rolled erosion control products. Use rolled erosion control products to stabilize waterways
and slopes before or after temporary or permanent seeding. Install according to Section 629.

(e) Temporary slope drains. Use drainpipe, riprap, or plastic lined waterway for temporary slope
drains to channel runoff down slopes. Channel water into the slope drain with an earth berm, gravel
bag, or sandbag headwall constructed at the top of a cut or fill. Anchor slope drains to the slope.
Provide outlet protection.

(f) Floating turbidity curtains. Install floating turbidity curtains within a body of water to
minimize the migration of silt laden water out of the construction area.

157.12 Temporary Soil Stabilization. Control soil erosion on unprotected slopes. Use the following:

Section 157 – Soil Erosion and Sediment Control 94

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(a) Temporary cover. Use mulch, plastic, rolled erosion control product, or tackifier. Apply
according to the manufacturer’s recommendations or as approved by the Engineer.

(b) Temporary turf establishment. Apply seed and mulch for soil erosion protection at the rates
shown in Table 157.1. Protect and care for seeded areas, including watering, until permanent turf
establishment is in place.

Table 157.1
Application Rates for Temporary Turf Establishment
Application Rate
Material
kilograms/hector
Seed 50
Wood fiber or grass straw cellulose fiber mulch 1700 (1)
(1) Mulch applied using hydraulic method according to Subsection 625.08(b). For other mulch products and
application methods, use the manufacturer’s rate as approved by the Engineer.

157.13 Permanent Soil Stabilization. Control erosion on completed permanent slopes. Use the
following:

(a) Turf establishment. Apply seed, fertilizer and mulch according to Section 625.

(b) Plants, trees, shrubs, vines, groundcovers, and other plants. Furnish and plant trees, shrubs,
vines, groundcovers, and other plants according to Section 626.

(c) Sod. Furnish and place sod of perennial turf-forming grasses according to Section 627.

(d) Rock mulch. Furnish and place rock on finished surfaces.

157.14 Inspection and Reporting. Inspect erosion and sediment control measures using approved
personnel. When there are no contract permits, conduct erosion and sediment control inspections at
least once every 7 days and after every rainfall event exceeding 25mm in 24 hours .

Within 24 hours after each inspection, submit an inspection report to the Engineer. Include the
following:

(a) Date and time of the inspection;

(b) Names and titles of persons making the inspection;

(c) Summary of the inspection;

(d) Weather since the last inspection or since the start of work, if the first inspection. For each
storm event, include the beginning date and time, duration, rainfall amount in inches (millimeters),
and whether discharge occurred;

(e) Weather and description of discharges occurring during the inspection;

(f) Locations of discharges or other pollutants from the site;

Section 157 – Soil Erosion and Sediment Control 95

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(g) Locations of erosion and sediment control measures that need maintenance;

(h) Locations of erosion and sediment control measures that failed to operate as designated or
proved inadequate for a particular location;

(i) Locations where additional erosion and sediment control measures are needed; and

(j) Other necessary corrective actions including action taken, locations, dates, and times.

157.15 Maintenance and Cleanup. Maintain temporary erosion and sediment control measures in
working condition until the project is complete or the measures are no longer needed. Remove
sediment trapped in perimeter protection control measures before deposits reach 50 percent of the
above ground height. Remove sediment from sediment retention structures when their capacity is
reduced to 50 percent of design capacity. Use removed sediment in the work, if acceptable, or dispose
of it according to Subsection 204.14.

Replace erosion and sediment control measures that cannot be maintained and those that are damaged
by construction operations.

Remove and dispose of temporary erosion and sediment control measures when vegetation is
satisfactorily established and drainage ditches and channels are lined and stabilized. Remove and
dispose of erosion and sediment control measures according to Subsection 203.05.

Restore the ground to its natural or intended condition and provide permanent erosion control
measures.

157.16 Acceptance. Material for erosion and sediment control measures will be evaluated under
Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Construction, maintenance, and removal of erosion and sediment control measures will be evaluated
under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Separation and stabilization geotextile and geotextile filter will be evaluated under Section 207.

Measurement

157.17 Measure the Section 157 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable.

Do not measure replacement items.

Measure temporary soil stabilization on the ground surface. When measurement is by the pound
(kilogram), weigh the seed in pounds (kilograms).

Measure excavation for diversion channels and sediment basins under Section 204.

Measure riprap under Section 251.

Measure permanent paved waterways under Section 608.

Measure permanent turf establishment under Section 625.

Section 157 – Soil Erosion and Sediment Control 96

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Measure plants, trees, shrubs, vines, groundcovers, and other plants under Section 626.

Measure sod under Section 627.

Measure rolled erosion control products under Section 629.

Preparation of the Environmental Protection Plan (EPP) / Erosion Control Plan (ECP), obtaining
approval of the plan, and construction of and maintenance of additional erosion protection during the
life of the contract, and subsequent removal of additional erosion control items needed to implement
the approved plan shall not be measured and paid for separately but will be considered incidental to
complete the work.

Payment

157.18 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 157 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Progress payments for erosion control measures or devices will be paid as follows:

(a) 25 percent of the pay item amount will be paid upon installation.

(b) An additional 50 percent of the pay item amount will be prorated based on total work complete.

(c) The remaining portion of the pay item amount will be paid when the temporary erosion control
measures removed from the project or at final acceptance.

Section 157 – Soil Erosion and Sediment Control 97

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 158. — WATERING FOR DUST CONTROL

Description

158.01 This work consists of furnishing and applying water for the control of dust caused by the work
and public travel.

Material

158.02 Conform to the following Subsection:

Water 725.01(c)

Construction Requirements

158.03 General. Provide an adequate water supply and apply water uniformly across the traveled way
as necessary to control dust. Uniformly apply water using pressure-type distributors, pipelines
equipped with spray systems, or hoses with nozzles.

(a) Project dust control for public benefit. Control dust within the construction limits as
necessary including nights, weekends, and periods of non-work when the project is open to public
traffic. When the project is not open to public traffic, control dust in areas of the project that have
neighbor inhabited residences or places of business. Control dust on approved, active detours
established for the project. Apply water at the locations, rates, and frequencies as ordered.

(b) Other dust control. Control dust on active haul roads, in pits and staging areas, and on the
project during periods not covered in (a) above.

158.04 Acceptance. Water will be evaluated under Subsection 106.02.

Furnishing and applying water will be evaluated under Subsection 106.02.

Measurement

158.05 Measure the Section 158 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring water for dust control by volume or mass; measure in the hauling vehicle, or by
metering.

Do not measure water for dust control applied according to Subsection 158.03(b).

Payment

158.06 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 158 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 158 – Watering for Dust Control 98

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 159. — CAMPS AND FACILITIES

Description

159.01 Contractor shall, under this Section, construct, furnish, install, maintain, clean, guard and at the
Completion of the Contract, remove or dispose, all temporary field offices, weightbridges, manufacturing
plants, storage sheds, living quarters, workshops, and any other items which were set up and/or required for
the management and supervision of the project.

Construction Requirements

159.03 Planning and Documnetation.

(a) The Contractor must at all times comply with the requirements of National and Provincial
regulations.

(b) Offices and facilities shall be located in accordance with the general location and site plans
which shall be as close as possible to the site and approved by the Engineer.

(c)Buildings for offices and accommodation must be sited so as to be free of pollution from any
construction operations.

(d) Buildings shall be structurally sound, weatherproof with floors raised above ground.

(e)Buildings required for storage of materials shall be suitably insulated and protected from the
weather to prevent deterioration of the stored materials.

(f) At the Contractors option, buildings may be of in-situ or prefabricated construction.

(g) Temporary field offices and storage sheds should be installed on proper foundations and
provided with adequate drainage, security, and connections for utility services.

(h) Materials, equipment and furnishings used in the buildings may be new or used, but must be
serviceable, adequate for the required purpose, and must not violate applicable codes or
regulations.

(i) Sites for field offices and the like must be filled and graded to accept the building structures,
shall be free draining, surrounded by approved fencing and provided with graveled access
roads and parking areas.

(j) The Contractor shall provide adequate fire fighting equipment in all camps, offices, stores and
workshop areas.

(k) One month prior to installation of sites, borrow sites and storage areas the contractor shall:

provide location maps of lands to be used,

provide a detailed inventory of various sites and documentation that the Contractor is able to
use these sites until the completation and close out of the project.

Section 159 – Camps and Facilities 99

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

provide a general plan indicating various project areas, planned settlements and a description
of planned developments,
provide a plan for environmental protection of the site detailed for the base camp, before starting
construction. This plan will provide all the appropriate steps for disposal of sewage and garbage,
so that no pollution or danger to human health or animal results.

(l)The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent accidental leaks and spills of
products that could pollute water or soil. He will detail all measures he intends to take in the Site
Environmental Protection Plan. These precautions shall include concrete measures such as:

(1)- construction of earth berms of sufficient holding capacity around the storage tanks of
fuel, lubricants and bitumen to contain leaks,
(2)- oil separators in drainage systems associated with washing, maintenance and refueling
facilities for vehicles and equipment, and facilities for kitchen sewage.

These provisions will be effectively maintained throughout the period of activity.

(m)Waste management plan, the study of potential usable water with impacts, alternatives and
compensatory measures if necessary,
Description of measures to avoid and fight against pollution and accidents such as soil pollution,
groundwater and surface water pollution, fires and bush fires, road
accidents,
(n) Description of health infrastructure and its organization,

(o) List of measures intended to ensure a supply of food (meat, fish, …) and those provided to
encourage the purchase of local products of the project area, except for bushmeat,

(p)Redevelopment plan of areas at the end of works,

(1)Articles of site regulation dealing with environmental respect, waste management, actions
foreseen in case of accidents, obligations in conducting, repairing and maintaining vehicles,
(2)A plan for harvesting, conservation and implementation of seed and seedlings that will be
collected locally in sufficient quantity to ensure planting and complete revegetation,
sustainable and effective at level of protection against erosion of cutting areas, embankments,
borrow pits and road sides.

(q) Every six months:

According to work progress, a plan for revegetation of cut and fill areas,
For each borrow pit, a redevelopment plan for the area if this differs from the one already
submitted.

(r) One month before tree cutting:

A cutting plan and the intended use of felled trees, the goal being to minimize tree cutting at
maximum.

(s) Monthly:

Section 159 – Camps and Facilities 100

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Update on site security level and measures implemented to maintain it at a high level.

(t) At the end of works:

Road diagram completed with works carried out and specifying environmental improvement
made.

159.04 Contractor’s Office and Facilities

(a) General

The Contractor shall provide suitable office, accommodation and facilities to meet the
needs of the project in accordance with this Section of the Specifications and approval
of the Engineer.

(b) Size

The size shall be as required for the Contractor's general use and to provide a room for
progress meetings.

(c) Telephone

One direct line instrument shall be available.

In the event that telephone services cannot practicably be provided, or cannot be

provided within the scheduled Mobilization Period, the Contractor shall provide
instead a radio transceiver system capable of clear and reliable vocal communication
between the Employer's office in the provincial capital city and the farthest point on
the contract. This radio system shall have at least six stations capable of transmitting
and receiving spoken messages, and shall be located and used as directed by the
Engineer.

(d) Furnishings in Meeting Room and for the Storage of Project Record Documents

a) Conference table and chairs for at least eight persons.

b) Racks or drawers for vertical or horizontal filing of drawings and files for
Project Record Documents located in or adjacent to the meeting area.

(e) Branch Office

Should the Contractor find it necessary to erect one or more branch office for his own
use at a distance of 50 km or more from his main site office, he shall provide,
maintain and furnish to the satisfaction of the Engineer one room of approximately 12
square meter area for the exclusive use of the Engineer's staff at each of such branch
offices.

159.05 Contractor’s Workshop And Warehouse

(a) The Contractor shall have on the site a suitable workshop, adequately equipped with
the appropriate mechanics tools, safety equipment (first aid kit, fire extinguisher, eye

Section 159 – Camps and Facilities 101

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

wash, etc.) and provided with electric power, to allow for repairs on the equipment
employed to carry out the Works. A warehouse for the storage of equipment spare
parts shall also be provided.

(b) The workshop shall be managed by a chief foremen qualified for mechanical repairs
and have an adequate number of skilled mechanics.

159.06 Contractor’s Laboratory

(1) The Contractor shall provide such laboratory testing services and/or facilities as is required to
meet in full the quality control provisions of these Specifications.

(2) When specifically included in the scope of work of the Contract, the Contractor shall provide
and maintain on site a fully equipped laboratory in accordance with the following
requirements and to the approval of the Engineer:

(a) Premises

The laboratory shall be housed in a separate building located in accordance with the general
location and site plans approved by the Engineer. The location shall be such as to provide
sufficient distance from construction plant for the laboratory to be free of pollution and
vibration disturbance during the operation of the plant.

The building layout shall be in accordance with the Drawings, or as directed by the Engineer
for the accommodation and operation of the apparatus needed for the performance of all tests
specified or required as well as to provide office facilities for the testing personnel of both the
Contractor and the Engineer.

The building shall be provided with a concrete floor with waste water drainage facilities,
shall be fitted with two heating/air conditioning units of a size to control the environment for
the size of laboratory build built and be to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The interior fixtures for the building shall include work benches, cupboards, lock-up
storeroom, curing tanks, cabinets, tables and chairs of the same standard and quantity to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

(b) Equipment and Apparatus

The laboratory equipment and apparatus are to be as required to perform the testing which is
specificed by these specifications for the work to performed. The Contractor shall provide a
list of equipment which the Contractor perposes to be bring to site, to the Engineer for
approval. This list will show the AASHTO test required and the equipment which is being
brought to the contract for each test.

Measuring apparatus such as scale, proving ring, and the others shall be calibrated and
recorded by the formal institution showing the calibration certificate.

Section 159 – Camps and Facilities 102

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

159.04 Contractor’s Quarry/Crusher

The Contractor’s Quarry and Crusher set up will include but not be limited to, finding and
permitting of site, clearing and make ready for installation, delivery to site all equipment and
sundries, construction and maintenance of access roads,, set up of stockpile areas which will
not be contaminated by soils, water or cross contaminated by other materials, operation and
maintenance of equipment /plant, setup and take down of all equipment/plant, required power
supply, security, production tests and calibration, drainage, environmental impact and
mitigation, restoration of the site (s) to its environmental context after the withdrawal of all the
equipment and contractor’s operations.

The pay item for this work may be lump sum or by the month as outlined in the BOQ items and
the contract.

159.05 Contractor’s Hot Mix Plant

The Contractor’s Hot Mix Plant set up will include but not be limited to, finding and permitting
of site, clearing and make ready for installation, delivery to site all equipment and sundries,
construction of access roads and maintenance, set up of stockpile areas which will not be
contaminated by soils, water or cross contaminated by other materials, operation and
maintenance of equipment /plant, setup and take down of all equipment/plant, required power
supply, security, production tests and calibration, drainage, environmental impact and
mitigation, restoration of the site (s) to its environmental context after the withdrawal of all the
equipment and contractor’s operations.

The pay item for this work may be lump sum or by the month as outlined in the BOQ items and
the contract.

159.06 Contractor’s Concrete Plant

The Contractor’s Concrete Plant set up will include but not be limited to, finding and
permitting of site, clearing and make ready for installation, delivery to site all equipment and
sundries, construction of access roads and maintenance, set up of stockpile areas which will not
be contaminated by soils, water or cross contaminated by other materials, operation and
maintenance of equipment /plant, setup and take down of all equipment/plant, required power
supply, security, production tests and calibration, drainage, environmental impact and
mitigation, restoration of the site (s) to its environmental context after the withdrawal of all the
equipment and contractor’s operations.

The pay item for this work may be lump sum or by the month as outlined in the BOQ items and
the contract.

159.07 Topographic Materials and Equipment

The Contractor will supply all of the topographic materials and equipment on the project for
which is required under the contract (Section 152).

The Contractor may also be required to supply the Engineer with the required topographic
materials and equipment for the Engineer’s use on the project to perform checks of work
described in Section 152.

Section 159 – Camps and Facilities 103

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

159.08 Offices And Accommodations For The Engineer

(a) Locations:

Compound locations are subject to approval by the Engineer. Compounds shall be

located to facilitate the work and may be relocated during the project duration, if
relocation is in the best interest of the project and at the Engineers request or at the
Contractor’s request but only with the Engineer’s approval.

(b) General:
All habitable space shall be in weatherproof structures equipped and furnished
as follows:
i. Reliable utilities including available electrical systems with battery or
generator back-up, bottled gas and satellite Internet and communication
systems.
ii. Minimum ceiling heights will be 3 m
iii. Facilities will be air conditioned and artificially illuminated sufficient to
meet the Engineer’s approval
iv. Exterior doors and windows will have locks that are acceptable to the
Engineer
v. Windows need to be of sufficient sizes to provide adequate natural light
vi. All windows will be operable and equipped with shades, curtains or blinds
and exterior screens to allow adequate ventilation
vii. Each facility will be equipped with fire extinguishers having a minimum
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. rating of 4A60BC
viii. Each facility will have a minimum of two smoke detectors and carbon
monoxide detectors.

(c) Engineer’s Remote Offices:

Each compound office building shall have a minimum floor area of 95 square meters with
two offices with solid privacy doors for senior staff and a common work area for two support
staff.

The field offices shall be provided throughout the period of construction of this Contract and
shall be independent of any field office used by the Contractor. All keys for these buildings
or trailers shall be turned over to the Engineer. Office trailer(s), if used, shall be
interconnected by enclosed air conditioned passageways, shall be tied down at comers, and
shall be equipped with stairway(s) and landing(s). Office trailer(s) shall have 2 solid doors
and screen doors for each 95 square meters of office space. The solid doors shall be provided
with cylinder locks and master keyed with 16 keys furnished to the Engineer.

Suitable on-site sanitary facilities meeting local health requirements shall be provided and
maintained clean and in good working condition with American or European fixtures and
stocked with lavatory and sanitary supplies at all times during the period of the Contract.
Sanitary facilities shall include hot and cold potable running water, lavatory and toilet as an
integral part of the office where available. Solid waste disposal will consisting of two waste
baskets and an outside trash container of sufficient size to accommodate a weekly pick-up
service provided by the Contractor.

Section 159 – Camps and Facilities 104

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Offices furnishings shall be provided to meet the approval of the Engineer and include as a
minimum the following equipment and furniture:

Four desks with minimum working surface 1.1 m x 750 mm each and five non-folding chairs
with upholstered seats and backs.

One desk with minimum working surface 1.1 m x 750 mm with height adjustment of 585 to
750 mm for computer use.

One four-post drafting table with a minimum top size of 950 mm x 1.2 m. The top shall be
basswood or equivalent and capable of being tilted through an angle of 50 degrees. An
adjustable height drafting stool with upholstered seat and back shall also be provided.

Three free-standing four drawer A4 size file cabinets with locks and an Underwriters
Laboratories Inc. insulated file device 350 degree one hour rating.

Four folding or stackable chairs.

One equipment cabinet of minimum inside dimension of 1100 mm high x 600 mm wide x
750 mm deep with lock. The walls shall be of steel with 2 mm minimum thickness with
canceled hinges and enclosed lock constructed in such a manner as to prevent entry by force.
The cabinet assembly shall be permanently attached to a structural element of the field office
in a manner to prevent theft of the entire cabinet.

• One office style refrigerator with a minimum size of 1.1 cu m with a

freezer unit.
• One microwave oven with a minimum of 2,390 BTU per hour of power
and 36,800 cu cm of capacity.
• One electric desk type tape printing calculator and one pocket scientific
notation calculator with a 1000 hour battery life or solar power with a
portable recharger.
• One telephone with touch tone where available, and telephone answering
machine, or a smart cellphone for exclusive use by the Engineer. Two
additional separate telephone lines, without telephones, shall be provided
for the exclusive use of the Engineer.
• One dry process copy machine capable of reproducing prints up to A4 size
(210 mm x 297 mm) and A3 size (297 mm x 420 mm).
• One fax machine with paper, If phone service is avaiable.
• One electric water cooler dispenser.
• One first-aid cabinet fully equipped.
• Two wall clocks.
• One complete desktop computer of the latest design approved by the
Engineer
• High Speed Internet service with both Ethernet and Wireless Connections
• One A4 size Laser Jet black and white printer
• One scanner with A3 scanner glass size.

(d) Engineer’s Field Laboratories:

Section 159 – Camps and Facilities 105

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Materials laboratories shall be provided at the Contractor’s base camp, each remote
compound and each batch plant. Minimum ceiling heights will be 2 m; floor space will be
not less than 18.5 square meters; facilities will be air conditioned and illuminated sufficient to
meet the Engineer’s approval; exterior doors and windows will have locks that are acceptable
to the Engineer; windows need to be of sufficient sizes to provide adequate natural light and
all windows will be equipped with shades, curtains or blinds and exterior screens to allow
adequate ventilation. Each facility will be equipped with fire extinguishers having a
minimum Underwriters Laboratories Inc. rating of 4A60BC and a smoke detector and carbon
monoxide detector.

The field Laboratories shall be provided throughout the period of construction of this
Contract. Sanitary faculties shall be as specified for the Engineer’s Office, where available.
Laboratory furnishings shall be provided to meet the approval of the Engineer and include as
a minimum the following:
• One desk and chair.
• One drafting stool
• One chair
• One two drawer file cabinet of A4 size
• One two drawer file cabinet of A3 size
• One electric calculator
• One telephone for exclusive use by the Engineer
• One first-aid cabinet fully equipped.
• One service sink and potable water supply for testing purposes
• One wall clocks.
• One work bench 900 mm x 3 m x 900 mm high with drawers and cabinets
below and three 220 volt, 10 amp outlets or other available service above
the bench, which is required for test equipment and apparatus.

(e) Domicile Facilities:

Residences within compounds shall be provided for all staff assigned to the
compound plus a minimum of two additional units for project related visitors. These
residence building will be constructed as shown in the contract drawings. The number
of residences shall be provided as required by the Engineer’s staff assigned to the
compound. Supervisory staff either assigned or visiting overnight shall be provided
Individual residences similar to that shown in the Plans. Support staff either assigned
or visiting overnight shall be provided shared quarters for two individuals with similar
layouts to that for supervisory staff.

Residence buildings will as a minimum be furnished and equipped as follows:

• Bedroom with two single beds, chair, dresser and a wardrobe or closet;
• Living room with couch, chair, desk, computer and entertainment
center;
• Kitchen with two stove top burners, refrigerator, sink with running
potable hot and cold water, an oven, a microwave a table and three
chairs;
• Bathroom with hot and cold running water, an American or European
toilet, lavatory and either a shower or bathtub;

Section 159 – Camps and Facilities 106

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

• Laundry and Utility Room;

• Storage area; and
• Covered car park area.

(f) Contractor Provided Services:

The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer as a minimum the following:

• Potable water and sanitary facilities shall be maintained.
• Facilities shall be serviced daily and maintained, repaired or replaced
promptly when deficiencies are reported to the Contractor.
• Material samples shall be protected at and transported from field sites
to materials laboratories as required by the Engineer.
• Concrete cylinder curing tanks at field sites and compounds shall be
provided and maintained as needed.
• Office supplies shall include paper supplies; paper cutters; writing
instruments; staples, staplers and pullers; copiers and printers toner;
erasers; paper and magnetic clips, scissors, tape and other incidental
items.
• Cleaning:

Offices, laboratories and residences will be cleaned bi-weekly and windows will be cleaned
monthly. Residence will also be cleaned when occupancy changes.

Contractor or Engineer supplied furnishings, equipment and soft goods provided for the
project shall be cleaned and maintained by the Contractor weekly or as needed.

Laboratory equipment shall be cleaned and inspected for damage weekly. Items provided by
staff for personal use shall be cleaned and maintained by the owner.
• Food shall be provided for field staff at compounds.
• Food preparation at compounds shall be provided on work-days for
Continental breakfasts and evening meals and mid-day meals shall be
either packed for taking to field sites or provided at the compound as
required by staff activities. Meals shall include a limited American or
European menu in addition to local cuisine to the approval of the
Engineer. Dietary restrictions are also to be accommodated. Food will
also be provided for staff preparation in domicile facilities.
• Regularly scheduled personal and project mail and correspondence
pick-up and delivery to field offices.

Project vehicle refuel depots will be set up at the compounds

159.09 Vehicles

The Contractor will supply to the Engineer, within one calendar month from the Order to
commence works the number of vehicles required under the contract as shown in the BOQ
items.

Section 159 – Camps and Facilities 107

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

All vehicles will have air conditioning and be 4-wheel drive and be equipped to the approval of
the Engineer..

Contractor will pay for the working, maintenance, and current repairs of such vehicles for the
whole length of the contract (replacement parts, fuel and lubricants, current repairs, substitution
of vehicle in case of vehicle not being available as required) as well as for their administrative
costs (annual tax, insurances, and so on).

The vehicles will be available as required by the Engineer and/or the Engineer’s staff.

The Contractor will supply a driver for each vehicle provided to the Engineer. This driver will
be able to converse in the language of the person who is using the vehicle to the extent of being
able to follow directions. The driver will know the area of the project. The driver will also be
able to perform minor repairs of the vehicle (change batteries, change tires, and so on). Each
driver must meet the approval of the Engineer

Measurement

159.10 Measure the Section 159 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02

Payment

159.11 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 159 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 159 – Camps and Facilities 108

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

DIVISION 200
EARTHWORK

Section 200 – Earthwork 109

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 201. — CLEARING AND GRUBBING

Description

201.01This work shall consist of clearing, grubbing, removing and disposing of all vegetation and
debris within the project limits. Objects designated to remain in place or to be removed shall be
accomplished in accordance with the plans and other sections of these specifications. This work also
includes the preservation from injury or defacement of all vegetation and objects designated to
remain.

Material

201.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Backfill material 704.03

Tree wound dressing 713.08(g)

Construction Requirements

201.03 General. Construct erosion control measures according to Section 157. Perform work within
designated limits. Do not damage vegetation designated to remain; if damage occurs, repair or replace
the vegetation in an acceptable manner. Where possible, preserve vegetation adjacent to bodies of
water. Treat cuts or scarred surfaces of trees and shrubs with tree wound dressing.

201.04 Clearing. Within the clearing limits, clear trees, brush, downed timber, and other vegetation as
follows:

(a) Cut trees so they fall within the clearing limits.

(b) In areas of cut slope rounding, cut stumps flush with or below the final ground line.

(c) In areas outside the excavation, embankment, and slope rounding limits, cut stumps to within
6 inches (150 millimeters) of the ground.

(d) Trim tree branches that extend over the road surface and shoulders to attain a clear height of 20
feet (6 meters). If required, remove other branches to present a balanced appearance. Trim
according to accepted tree surgery practices. Treat wounds with tree wound dressing.

Except were noted above and in 201.05, stumps shall be removed entirely. Subsurface roots larger
than 1-1/2 in diameter and matted roots existing within the area bounded by the lines 5 feet outside
of any structure foundation shall be removed. Areas other the specified above shall be cleared of
trees, etc. All subsurface roots larger than 1-1/2 inches in diameter and all matted roots shall be
removed to a depth of 18 inches below the sub-grade, shoulder, slope or existing grade."

The entire area within the construction limits shall be cleared of trees, vines, shrubs and other
extraneous material as directed by the Engineer. Grass and other vegetation outside the construction
limits shall be preserved to the greatest extent possible. Any damage outside the right-of-way shall
be the Contractor's responsibility to repair as specified in Section 107.

Section 201 – Clearing and Grubbing 110

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

The Contractor shall avoid unnecessary clearing of vegetation and maximizing the use of existing
cleared areas whenever possible for stating or equipment and material. Areas of particular concern,
such as wetlands, shall be avoided and appropriate protection measure shall be implemented when
temporary staging, storage, or servicing of equipment is performed at the project site.

201.05 Grubbing. Grub deep enough to remove stumps, roots, buried logs, moss, turf, or other
vegetative debris as follows:

(a) Grub areas to be excavated except for cut slope rounding areas.

(b) Grub embankment areas. Undisturbed stumps less than 600 millimeters in diameter may be left
in place if they protrude less than 150 millimeters above the original ground and will be covered
with more than 1200 millimeters of embankment. Remove all other stumps.

(c) Grub pits, channel changes, and ditches only to the depth necessary for the excavation.

(d) Backfill stump holes and other grubbing holes with backfill material to the level of the
surrounding ground according to Subsection 209.09. Compact backfill according to Subsection
209.10.

201.06 Disposal. Merchantable timber is the Contractor's property. Dispose of clearing and grubbing
debris according to Subsection 203.05.

201.07 Acceptance. Clearing and grubbing will be evaluated under Subsection 106.02.

Material for tree wound dressing will be evaluated under Subsection 106.03.

Backfilling and compacting of stumps and grubbing holes will be evaluated under Section 209.

Measurement

201.08 Measure the Section 201 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Do not make deductions from the area computation unless excluded areas are shown in the plans.

Do not measure clearing and grubbing of borrow or material sources.

Payment

201.09 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 201 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 201 – Clearing and Grubbing 111

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 202. — ADDITIONAL CLEARING AND GRUBBING

Description

202.01 This work consists of clearing and grubbing outside the clearing limits specified in Section 201.
It includes scalloping clearing lines, clearing vistas, thinning vegetation, special clearing and grubbing,
and the removal of individual trees and stumps.

202.02 Definitions.

(a) Selective clearing. Clearing where some trees and vegetation is designated to remain.

(b) Selective clearing and grubbing. Clearing and grubbing where some trees and vegetation is
designated to remain.

(c) Special clearing and grubbing. Clearing and grubbing where all trees and vegetation are
removed.

(d) Removal of individual trees or stumps. Removing individual trees or stumps outside the
clearing limits designated in Section 201 or outside areas designated in (a) through (c) above.

Construction Requirements

202.03 General. Clear and grub according to Section 201 except as modified herein. Do not push, pull,
or fall trees into trees designated to remain. Remove designated debris by methods that prevent damage
to vegetation not designated to be removed. Dispose of clearing and grubbing debris according to
Subsection 203.05.

202.04 Selective Clearing. Clear and dispose of trees, snags, brush, downed timber, and other
vegetation designated to be removed.

202.05 Selective Clearing and Grubbing. Clear, grub, and dispose of trees, snags, brush, downed
timber, stumps, roots, buried logs, moss, turf, grass, and other vegetation designated to be removed.

202.06 Special Clearing and Grubbing. Clear, grub, and dispose of trees, snags, brush, downed
timber, stumps, roots, buried logs, moss, turf, grass, and other vegetation.

202.07 Removal of Individual Trees or Stumps. Remove and dispose of designated trees or stumps.
Cut trees to within 150 millimeters of the ground.

202.08 Acceptance. Additional clearing and grubbing work will be evaluated under Subsection
106.02.

Measurement

202.09 Measure the Section 202 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring removal of individual trees by the square foot (square meter), measure the average
diameter at the cutoff.

Section 202 – Additional Clearing and Grubbing 112

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Do not measure trees less than 150 millimeters in diameter at the cutoff.

Payment

202.10 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 202 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 202 – Additional Clearing and Grubbing 113

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 203. — REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND

OBSTRUCTIONS

Description
203.01 This work consists of salvaging, removing, and disposing of buildings, fences, structures,
pavements, culverts, utilities, curbs, sidewalks, and other obstructions.

Material

203.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsection:

Backfill material 704.03

Concrete 601

Construction Requirements

203.03 Salvaging Material. Salvage, with reasonable care, material designated to be salvaged.
Salvage in readily transportable sections or pieces. Replace or repair members, pins, nuts, plates, and
related hardware damaged, lost, or destroyed during the salvage operation. Securely attach parts to
adjacent members or pack them in sturdy boxes with the contents clearly marked.

Match mark members of salvaged structures. Submit one set of drawings according to Section 104
identifying the members and their respective match marks.

Stockpile salvaged material at a designated area on the project.

203.04 Removing Material.

(a) Submittals. Submit a bridge removal plan at least 30 days before beginning bridge removal for
approval. Include the following:

(1) Methods and equipment to be used,

(2) Measures to be used for protecting the environment, public, adjacent property, and
workers, and
(3) Methods to keep debris out of the stream and streambed.
(b) General. Saw cut sidewalks, curbs, pavements, and structures when partial removal is required.

Construct structurally adequate debris shields to contain debris within the construction limits. Do
not allow debris to enter waterways, travel lanes open to public traffic, or areas designated not to be
disturbed.

Handle material with lead paint contamination according to Subsection 563.05.

Raze and remove buildings, foundations, pavements, culverts, sidewalks, curbs, fences, structures,
and other obstructions interfering with the work and not designated to remain.

Section 203 – Removal of Structures and Obstructions 114

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Remove structures and obstructions in the roadbed to 900 millimeters below subgrade elevation.
Remove structures and obstructions outside the roadbed to 600 millimeters below finished ground
or to the natural stream bottom.

Abandon existing manholes, inlets, catch basins, and spring boxes according to Subsection 604.08.

When abandoning an existing culvert pipe, remove the upstream and downstream portion of the
culvert to within 1200 millimeters of the subgrade or embankment slope. Ensure the abandoned
pipe is at least 1200 millimeters from a new culvert or structure. Seal the abandoned culvert ends
with a tight fitting plug of concrete at least 150 millimeters thick. Ensure the structure does not
entrap water.

Except in excavation areas, backfill and compact cavities left by structure removal with backfill
material to the lines and grades of the finished ground. Backfill excavated areas according to
Subsection 209.09. Compact backfill according to Subsection 209.10.

(c) Concrete removal in repair areas. Saw cut 19 millimeters deep along boundaries of repair
areas. Use power-driven hand tools to remove existing concrete. Do not damage concrete
designated to remain in place.

Where the bond between existing concrete and reinforcing steel is destroyed, remove concrete
adjacent to the steel to provide at least 19-millimeter clearance for the new concrete to bond to the
reinforcing steel. Use care to prevent damage to remaining concrete when achieving the final
surface.

Clean exposed concrete surfaces that will be in contact with repair material. Provide a residue free
surface.

(d) Reinforcing steel. Do not cut or damage reinforcing steel designated to remain in place. Repair
or replace damaged bars. Replace deteriorated bars as directed by the Engineer.

Clean exposed reinforcing steel of coatings or residue that inhibits bonding with the new concrete.

Protect the steel from corrosion and contamination. If the steel becomes corroded or contaminated,
reclean the steel before placing concrete.

203.05 Disposing of Material. Dispose of debris, unsuitable material, and excess material as follows:

(a) Remove from project. Recycle or dispose of material legally off the project. Submit a
statement documenting the nature and quantity of material processed or sold for recycling.
Otherwise, submit a signed copy of the disposal agreement before disposal begins.

(b) Burn. Obtain necessary burning permits. Submit a copy of the burning permits before burning
begins.

Burn using high intensity burning processes that produce few emissions. Provide a watchperson
during the burning operations.

When burning is complete, extinguish the fire so no smoldering debris remains. Dispose of
unburned material according to (a) above.

Section 203 – Removal of Structures and Obstructions 115

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(c) Bury. Bury construction related debris in trenches or pits in approved areas within the right-of-
way when approved. Do not bury debris inside the roadway prism limits, beneath drainage ditches,
or in any areas subject to free-flowing water.

Place debris in alternating layers of 1200 millimeters of debris covered with 600 millimeters of
earth material. Distribute stumps, logs, and other large pieces to form a dense mass and minimize
air voids. Cover the top layer of buried debris with at least 300 millimeters of compacted earth.
Grade and shape the area. Seed and mulch disposal areas on Government property according to
Section 625.

(d) Hazardous material. Submit a copy of disposal permits. Dispose of material according to
Rwanda Government regulations.

Dispose of lead contaminated steel either by transporting to an approved scrap facility for
recycling or remelt; or remove and dispose of lead contamination in an appropriate waste facility.

(1) Disposal plan. Submit a detailed disposal plan that includes how material will be
handled, loaded, and transported to the disposal facility. Include the name and address of the
facility where the material will be taken. Describe steps that will be taken to ensure that lead
contamination will be contained throughout the process. Measures may include additional
steps or precautions when lifting and handling the steel on site.
(2) Transport and delivery. Ensure that loads transported from the site are adequately
contained and covered to prevent dispersion en route to the disposal facility. Submit a copy of
the receiving report from the disposal facility specifically acknowledging that the material
being delivered is contaminated with lead paint.
(3) Lead paint removal. Alternatively, if the Contractor chooses to salvage the steel members,
the paint may be removed subject to the following requirements:
(a) Remove lead contaminated paint in an appropriate containment facility;
(b) Comply with the requirements as listed in Subsection 563.05.
203.06 Acceptance. Removal of structures and obstructions will be evaluated under Subsection
106.02.

Backfilling and compacting cavities left by structures will be evaluated under Section 209.

Concrete will be evaluated under Section 601.

Measurement

203.07 Measure the Section 203 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

The removal of structures and obstructions, including disposal not indicated in the bid schedule will
not be measured separately but will be considered incidental to the work. Excavation and backfill for
removal of existing pipe culverts and headwalls will be evaluated under Section 209.

Removal of signs shall be measured by each per location. Each location shall include the removal of
all existing posts, sign panels, mounting hardware and foundations if applicable.

Section 203 – Removal of Structures and Obstructions 116

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Payment

203.08 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 203 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 203 – Removal of Structures and Obstructions 117

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 204. — EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT

Description

204.01 This work consists of excavating material and constructing embankments. This includes
furnishing, hauling, stockpiling, placing, disposing, sloping, shaping, compacting, and finishing
earthen and rocky material.

204.02 Definitions.

(a) Excavation. Excavation consists of the following:

(1) Roadway excavation. Material excavated from within the right-of-way or easement
areas, except subexcavation covered in (2) below and structure excavation covered in
Sections 208 and 209. Roadway excavation includes all material encountered regardless of its
nature or characteristics.

(2) Subexcavation. Material excavated from below subgrade elevation in cut sections or
from below the original ground line in embankment sections. Subexcavation does not include
the work required by Subsections 204.05 or 204.06.

(3) Borrow excavation. Material used for embankment construction that is obtained from
outside the roadway prism. Borrow excavation includes unclassified borrow, select borrow,
and topping.

(b) Embankment construction. Embankment construction consists of placing and compacting

roadway or borrow excavation. This work includes:

(1) Preparing foundation for embankment;

(2) Constructing roadway embankments;

(3) Benching for side-hill embankments;

(4) Constructing dikes, ramps, mounds, and berms; and

(5) Backfilling subexcavated areas, holes, pits, and other depressions.

(c) Conserved topsoil. Excavated material conserved from the roadway excavation and
embankment foundation areas that is suitable for growth of grass, cover crops, or native vegetation.

(d) Waste. Excess and unsuitable roadway excavation and subexcavation that cannot be used.

Material

204.03 Conform to the following Subsections:

Select borrow 704.07

Topping 704.05
Unclassified borrow 704.06
Water 725.01(c)

Section 204 – Excavation and Embankment 118

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Construction Requirements

204.04 Preparation for Roadway Excavation and Embankment Construction. Clear the area of
vegetation and obstructions according to Sections 201 and 203.

Road pioneering may proceed concurrently with excavation and embankment. Maintain drainage
during pioneering operations. Coordinate pioneering work with the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan
and/or Stormwater Pollutin Prevention Plan.

204.05 Conserved Topsoil. Conserve topsoil from roadway excavation and embankment foundation
areas. Stockpile conserved topsoil in low windrows immediately beyond the rounding limits of cut and
embankment slopes or in other approved locations. Separate topsoil from other excavated material.

Place conserved topsoil on completed slopes according to Section 624.

204.06 Roadway Excavation. Excavate as follows:

(a) Rock cuts. Blast rock according to Section 205. Excavate rock cuts to 150 millimeters below
subgrade within the roadbed limits. Backfill to subgrade with topping or other suitable material.
Compact the material according to Subsection 204.11.

(b) Earth cuts. Scarify earth cuts to 150 millimeters below subgrade within the roadbed limits.
Compact the scarified material according to Subsection 204.11.

Dispose of unsuitable or excess excavation material according to Subsection 204.14. Replace any
shortage of suitable material caused by premature disposal of roadway excavation.

Shape to drain and compact the work area to a uniform cross-section at the end of each day's
operations.

204.07 Subexcavation. Excavate material to the required limits. Dispose of unsuitable material
according to Subsection 204.14. Take cross-sections according to Section 152. Place backfill
material in horizontal layers not exceeding 300 millimeters in compacted thickness and compact
according to Subsection 204.11. Prevent unsuitable material from mixing with backfill.

204.08 Borrow Excavation. Use suitable roadway excavation in embankment construction. Do not
use borrow excavation when it results in excess roadway excavation. Deduct excess borrow excavation
from the total borrow excavation quantity.

Obtain borrow source approval according to Subsection 105.02. Develop and restore borrow sources
according to Subsections 105.03 and 105.06. Do not excavate beyond the established limits. When
applicable, shape the borrow source to permit accurate measurements when excavation is complete.

204.09 Preparing Foundation for Embankment Construction. Prepare foundation for embankment
construction as follows:

(a) Embankment over natural ground. Remove topsoil and break up the ground surface to a
minimum depth of 150 millimeters by plowing or scarifying. Compact the ground surface
according to Subsection 204.11.

Section 204 – Excavation and Embankment 119

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Embankments over an existing asphalt, concrete, or gravel road surface. Scarify gravel
roads to a minimum depth of 150 millimeters. Scarify or pulverize asphalt and concrete roads to
150 millimeters below the pavement. Reduce particles to a maximum size of 150 millimeters and
produce a uniform material. Compact the surface according to Subsection 204.11.

(c) Embankment across ground not capable of supporting equipment. Dump successive loads
of embankment material in a uniformly distributed layer to construct the lower portion of the
embankment. Limit the layer thickness to the minimum depth necessary to support the equipment.

(d) Embankment on an existing slope steeper than 1V:3H. Cut horizontal steps in the existing
slope to a sufficient width to accommodate placement and compaction operations and equipment.
Step the slope as the embankment is placed and compacted in layers. Begin each step at the
intersection of the original ground and the vertical cut of the previous step.

204.10 Embankment Construction. Incorporate only suitable roadway excavation material into the
embankment. When the supply of suitable roadway excavation is exhausted, furnish unclassified
borrow to complete the embankment. Construct embankments as follows:

(a) General. At the end of each day's operations, shape to drain and compact the embankment
surface to a uniform cross-section. Eliminate ruts and low spots that could hold water.

During all stages of construction, route and distribute hauling and leveling equipment over the
width and length of each layer of material.

Compact embankment side slopes with a tamping foot roller, by walking with a dozer, or by over-
building the fill and then removing excess material to the final slope line. For slopes 1V:1¾H or
steeper, compact the slopes as embankment construction progresses.

(b) Embankment within the roadway prism. Place embankment material in horizontal layers not
exceeding 300 millimeters in compacted thickness. Incorporate oversize boulders or rock
fragments into the 300-millimeters layers by reducing them in size or placing them individually as
required by (c) below. Compact each layer according to Subsection 204.11 before placing the next
layer.

Material composed predominately of boulders or rock fragments too large for 300-millimeters
layers may be placed in layers up to 600 millimeters thick. Incorporate oversize boulders or rock
fragments into the 600-millimeters layer by reducing them in size or placing individual rock
fragments and boulders greater than 600 millimeters in diameter as follows:

(1) Reduce rock to less than 1200 millimeters in the largest dimension.
(2) Distribute rock within the embankment to prevent nesting.
(3) Place layers of embankment material around each rock to a depth not greater than that
permitted by (b) above. Fill voids between rocks.
(4) Compact each layer according to Subsection 204.11(a) before placing the next layer.
(c) Embankment outside of roadway prism. When placing embankment outside the staked
roadway prism, place material in horizontal layers not exceeding 600 millimeters in compacted
thickness. Compact each layer according to Subsection 204.11.

Section 204 – Excavation and Embankment 120

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

204.11 Compaction. For compaction, use AASHTO T 27 to determine the amount of material retained
on a 4.75-millimeter sieve. Compact as follows:

(a) More than 80 percent retained on a 4.75-millimeter sieve. Adjust the moisture content to a
level suitable for compaction. Fill the interstices around rock with earth or other fine material as
practical. Use compression-type rollers at speeds less than 1.8 meters per second and vibratory
rollers at speeds less than 1 meter per second. Compact each layer of material full width with one
of the following and until there is no visible evidence of further consolidation:

(1) Four roller passes of a vibratory roller having a minimum dynamic force of 180
kilonewtons impact per vibration and a minimum frequency of 1000 vibrations per minute.
(2) Eight roller passes of a 20-metric ton compression-type roller.
(3) Eight roller passes of a vibratory roller having a minimum dynamic force of 130
kilonewtons impact per vibration and a minimum frequency of 1000 vibrations per minute.
Increase the compactive effort for layers deeper than 300 millimeters as follows:

• For each additional 150 millimeters or fraction thereof, increase the number of roller
passes in (1) above by four passes.
• For each additional 150 millimeters or fraction thereof, increase the number of roller
passes in (2) and (3) above, by eight passes.
(b) 50 to 80 percent retained on a 4.75-millimeter sieve. Classify the material according to
AASHTO M 145. Adjust the moisture content of material classified A-1 through A-5 to a moisture
content suitable for compaction. Adjust the moisture content of material classified A-6 and A-7 to
within 2 percent of the optimum moisture content. Use AASHTO T 99 to determine the optimum
moisture content of the portion of the material passing a 4.75-millimeter sieve. Multiply this
number by the percentage of material passing a 4.75-millimeter sieve, and add 2 percent to
determine the optimum moisture content of the material.

Use nonvibratory rollers at speeds less than 1.8 meters per second and vibratory rollers at speeds
less than 1 meter per second. Compact each layer of material full width according to (a) above.

(c) Less than 50 percent retained on a 4.75-millimeter sieve. Classify the material according to
AASHTO M 145. For material classified A-1 or A-2-4, determine the maximum density according
to AASHTO T 180, Method D. For other material classifications, determine the optimum moisture
content and maximum density according to AASHTO T 99, Method C.

Adjust the moisture content of material classified A-1 through A-5 to a moisture content suitable
for compaction. Adjust the moisture content of material classified A-6 and A-7 to within 2 percent
of the optimum moisture content.

Use compression-type or vibratory rollers. Compact each layer of material full width to at least
95 percent of the maximum density. Determine the in-place density and moisture content according
to AASHTO T 310 or other approved test procedures. When required, use AASHTO T 224 to
correct for coarse particles.

204.12 Ditches. Slope, grade, and shape ditches. Remove projecting roots, stumps, rock, or similar
matter. Maintain ditches in an open condition and without sticks, and other debris.

Section 204 – Excavation and Embankment 121

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Form furrow ditches by plowing or using other acceptable methods to produce a continuous furrow.
Place excavated material on the downhill side so the bottom of the ditch is approximately 18 inches
(450 millimeters) below the crest of the loose material. Clean the ditch using a hand shovel or other
suitable method. Shape to provide drainage without overflow.

204.13 Sloping, Shaping, and Finishing. Complete slopes, ditches, culverts, riprap, and other
underground minor structures before placing aggregate courses. Slope, shape, and finish as follows:

(a) Sloping. Leave earth slopes with uniform roughened surfaces, except as described in (b) below,
with no noticeable break as viewed from the road. Track equipment up and down slopes (not side
to side) that are within the safe operating limits of the equipment. Except in solid rock, round tops
and bottoms of slopes including the slopes of drainage ditches. Round material overlaying solid
rock to the extent practical. Scale rock slopes.

If a slide or slipout occurs on a cut or embankment slope, remove or replace the material, and repair
or restore damage to the work. Bench or key the slope to stabilize the slide. Reshape the cut or
embankment slope to an acceptable condition.

(b) Stepped slopes. Where required, construct steps on slopes of 1⅓V:1H to 1V:2H. Construct the
steps approximately 450 millimeters high. Blend the steps into natural ground at the end of the cut.
If the slope contains non-rippable rock outcrops, blend steps into the rock. Remove loose material
found in transitional area. Except for removing large rocks that may fall, scaling stepped slopes is
not required.

(c) Shaping. Shape the subgrade to a smooth surface and to the cross-section required. Shape
slopes to gradually transition into slope adjustments without noticeable breaks. At the ends of cuts
and at intersections of cuts and embankments, adjust slopes in the horizontal and vertical planes to
blend into each other or into the natural ground.

(d) Finishing. Remove material larger than 150 millimeters from the top 150 millimeters of the
roadbed. Remove unsuitable material from the roadbed, and replace it with suitable material. Finish
roadbeds that are compacted according to Subsection 204.11(b) and (c) to within ±15 millimeters
of the staked line and grade. Finish roadbeds that are compacted according to Subsection 204.11(a)
to within ±30 millimeters of the staked line and grade. Finish ditch cross-sections to within ±30
millimeters of the staked line and grade. Maintain proper ditch drainage.

204.14 Disposal of Unsuitable or Excess Material. Dispose of unsuitable or excess material

according to Subsection 203.05(a).

When there is a pay item for waste, shape and compact the waste material in its final location. Do not
mix clearing or other material not subject to payment with the waste material.

204.15 Acceptance. See Table 204.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Material for embankment and conserved topsoil will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.04.

Excavation and embankment construction will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.
Subexcavation will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Section 204 – Excavation and Embankment 122

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Measurement
204.16 Measure the Section 204 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

(a) Roadway excavation. Measure roadway excavation in its original position as follows:

(1) Include the following volumes in roadway excavation:

(a) Roadway prism excavation;
(b) Rock material excavated and removed from below subgrade in cut sections;
(c) Unsuitable material below subgrade and unsuitable material beneath embankment
areas when a pay item for subexcavation is not listed in the bid schedule;
(d) Ditches, except furrow ditches measured under a separate pay item;
(e) Conserved topsoil;
(f) Borrow material used in the work when a pay item for borrow is not listed in the bid
schedule;
(g) Loose scattered rocks removed and placed as required within the roadway;
(h) Conserved material taken from pre-existing stockpiles and used in Section 204 work
except topsoil measured under Section 624; and
(i) Slide and slipout material not attributable to the Contractor's method of operation.
(2) Do not include the following in roadway excavation:
(a) Overburden and other spoil material from borrow sources;
(b) Overbreakage from the backslope in rock excavation;
(c) Water or other liquid material;
(d) Material used for purposes other than required;
(e) Roadbed material scarified in place and not removed;
(f) Material excavated when stepping cut slopes;
(g) Material excavated when rounding cut slopes;
(h) Preparing foundations for embankment construction;
(i) Material excavated when benching for embankments;
(j) Slide or slipout material attributable to the Contractor's method of operation;
(k) Conserved material taken from stockpiles constructed at the option of the Contractor;
(l) Material excavated outside the established slope limits; and
(m) Road pioneering for the convenience of the Contractor.
(3) When both roadway excavation and embankment construction pay items are listed in the
bid schedule, measure roadway excavation only for the following:

Section 204 – Excavation and Embankment 123

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(a) Unsuitable material below subgrade in cuts and unsuitable material beneath
embankment areas when a pay item for subexcavation is not listed in the bid schedule;
(b) Slide and slipout material not attributable to the Contractor’s method of operations;
and
(c) Drainage ditches, channel changes, and diversion ditches.
(b) Unclassified borrow, select borrow, and topping. When measuring by the cubic yard (cubic
meter) measure in its original position. If borrow excavation is measured by the cubic yard (cubic
meter) in-place, take initial cross-sections of the ground surface after stripping overburden. Upon
completion of excavation and after the borrow source waste material is returned to the source,
retake cross-sections before replacing the overburden.

Do not measure borrow excavation until suitable roadway excavation is depleted.

(c) Embankment construction. Measure embankment construction in its final position. Do not
make deductions from the embankment construction quantity for the volume of minor structures.

(1) Include the following volumes in embankment construction:

(a) Roadway embankments;
(b) Material used to backfill subexcavated areas, holes, pits, and other depressions;
(c) Material used to restore obliterated roadbeds to original contours; and
(d) Material used for dikes, ramps, mounds, and berms.
(2) Do not include the following in embankment construction:
(a) Preparing foundations for embankment construction;
(b) Adjustments for subsidence or settlement of the embankment or of the foundation on
which the embankment is placed; and
(c) Material used to round fill slopes.
(d) Rounding cut slopes. Measure rounding cut slopes horizontally along the centerline of the
roadway.

(e) Waste. Measure waste by the cubic meter in its final position. Take initial cross-sections of the
ground surface after stripping over-burden. Upon completion of the waste placement, retake
cross-sections before replacing overburden.

(f) Slope scaling. Measure slope scaling by the cubic meter in the hauling vehicle.

(g) Subexcavation. Measure subexcavation by the cubic meter in its original position.

Payment

204.17 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 204 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 204 – Excavation and Embankment 124

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 204.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Material Source
(1)
Topping Measured and Classification – AASHTO 1 per soil Source of Yes Before
(704.05) tested for M 145 type and material using in
conformance source of work
(106.04) material
Unclassified " Classification(1) – " " " " "
borrow
(704.06)
Select borrow " Classification(1) – " " " " "
(704.07)
Gradation – AASHTO " " " "
T 27 & T 11

Liquid limit – AASHTO " " " "

R 58 & T 89,
Method A

Section 204 – Excavation and Embankment 125

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 204.1 (continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production
Topping Measured and Moisture- – AASHTO 1 per soil type Processed Yes Before
(704.05) tested for density T 180, Method D(2) but not less than material using in
conformance or 1 per each work
(106.04) T 99 Method C(2) 10,000 m3

Density – AASHTO 1 per In-place No Before

T 310 or 3000 m2 placement
other approved but not less of
procedures than 1 per layer next layer
Unclassified " Moisture- – AASHTO 1 per soil type Processed Yes Before
borrow density T 180, Method D(2) but not less than material using in
(704.06) or 1 per each work
T 99 Method C(2) 10,000 m3
Density – AASHTO 1 per In-place No Before
T 310 or 3000 m2 placement
other approved but not less of
procedures than 1 per layer next layer

Section 204 – Excavation and Embankment 126

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 204.1 (continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production (continued)
Select Measured and Classification – AASHTO 1 per soil type Processed Yes Before
borrow tested for M 145 but not less material using in
(704.07) conformance than 1 for work
(106.04) each day of
production
Gradation – AASHTO " " " "
T 27 & T 11
Liquid limit – AASHTO " " " "
R 58 & T 89,
Method A
Moisture- – AASHTO 1 per soil type " " "
density T 180, Method D(2) but not less than
or 1 per each
T 99 Method C(2) 10,000 m3
Density – AASHTO 1 per In-place No Before
T 310 or 3500 yd2 placement
other approved but not less of
procedures than 1 per layer next layer

Section 204 – Excavation and Embankment 127

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 204.1 (continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)

Production (continued)
Earth Measured and Classification – AASHTO 1 per soil type Source of Yes Before
embankment tested for M 145 material using in
(204.11) conformance work
(106.04)

Moisture- – AASHTO 1 per soil type " " "

density T 180, Method D(2) but not less than
or 1 per each
T 99 Method C(2) 10,000 m3
Density – AASHTO 1 per In-place No Before
T 310 or 3000 m2 placement
other approved but not less than of
procedures 1 per layer next layer
Top of " Density – AASHTO 1 per In-place No Before
subgrade T 310 or 2000 m2 placement
(204.11) other approved but not less than of
procedures 1 per layer next layer

Final Product
Roadbed Measured and Final – Field measured Determined Determined No Before
(204.13) tested for line & grade by the Engineer by the placement
conformance Engineer of
(106.04) next layer
(1) Not required when using Government provided source.
(2) Minimum 5 points per proctor.

Section 204 – Excavation and Embankment 128

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 205. — ROCK BLASTING

Description

205.01 This work consists of rock fragmentation blasting using production and controlled blasting
techniques to construct engineered rock cuts.

205.02 Definitions.

(a) Production blasting. Blasting using widely spaced blast holes that typically contain larger
explosive charges to expedite movement and fragmentation for rock removal.

(b) Controlled blasting. Blasting that includes presplit blasting and cushion blasting hole
techniques. Controlled blasting uses closely-spaced and carefully aligned blast holes that
typically contain lighter charges than production holes to produce stable, aesthetically pleasing
rock faces with minimal blast damage. Controlled blast holes are the first row of blast holes,
normally located within 600 millimeters of the top of the staked slope.

(1) Presplit blasting. Presplit blasting detonates closely-spaced backslope holes before
drilling for production blasting or before detonating the production blasting holes to produce
a highly controlled, smooth cut face.
(2) Cushion blasting. Cushion blasting is similar to presplitting except that the detonation of
the cushion holes along the backslope is detonated immediately after the detonation of the
production and buffer holes, generally resulting in a more natural cut face appearance.

Construction Requirements

205.03 Regulations. Comply with Rwandda Governmetn regulations for the purchase, transportation,
storage, and use of explosive material.

205.04 Qualifications. Submit the following for approval at least 14 days before drilling and
blasting operations begin:

(a) Blaster-in-charge. Furnish an individual who will directly supervise the drilling and blasting
crew during drilling, loading, and detonation of charges. Include the following:

(1) Name of blaster-in-charge;

(2) A résumé showing at least five years experience as a blaster-in-charge on projects with
similar work;
(3) Copy of a valid blaster license accepted by the Proper Authorities, and;
(4) Five references with knowledge of qualifications and reliability. Include name,
relationship, and current telephone number for each reference.
(b) Blasting crew personnel. Names of personnel and evidence they have completed at least
24 hours of blasting safety training in the last five years or have at least two years of blasting
experience.

Section 205 – Rock Blasting 129

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(c) Drillers. Names and evidence they are proficient in drilling methods required to perform the
work.

(d) Vibration specialist. Name and resume showing at least five years experience as a vibration
specialist on projects with similar work.

205.05 Blasting Plans. Submit proof of applicable permits, licenses, and a general blasting plan signed
by the blaster-in-charge at least 14 days before drilling and blasting operations. Blasting plans are not
required for boulder reduction blasts (mudcapping or blockholing).

(a) General blasting plan. Submit a general blasting plan for review and approval by the
Engineer. Include the following:

(1) Procedures and safety precautions for transporting, storing, handling, loading, and
detonating explosives, conducting pre- and post-blast surveys, monitoring blasts, managing
misfires, and removing and disposing of excess explosives.
(2) Explosives transportation and storage plan, including:
(a) Name, address, and telephone number of explosives suppliers;
(b) Description and license number of explosives transport vehicles, routes to be traveled,
proposed hours of travel, and driver qualifications;
(c) Magazine and day-box locations;
(d) Explosives and accessories inventory system; and
(e) Contact information for the person responsible for security of project blasting material
and supplies.
(3) Area security plan including explosives and general site security, methods of site
communication, pre- and post-blast signage and audible signaling systems, road closure
requirements, and pre-blast notification for affected agencies or entities.
(4) Manufacturer data sheets for proposed explosives, primers, initiators, and related blasting
devices and accessories.
(5) Excavation plans and equipment lists for pre-blast scaling and pioneered access roads, and
benches for drilling and blasting operations.
(6) Typical plan and section views for both production and controlled blasting, including
stationing intended for each typical plan, maximum blast length, free face, burden, hole
spacing, hole inclination, hole depth, hole diameter, stemming depth, subdrill depth, powder
factor, charge per delay, initiation method and sequence, and delay times.
(7) Methods for limiting dust and noise.
(8) Fire watch plan including number of post-blast observers and duration of the fire watch.
(9) Contingency plan for blast flyrock containment, including the names and qualifications of
those responsible for preparing containment system designs.
Do not deliver explosives to the project until the general blasting plan is accepted. Submit
revisions and updates within 48 hours of any change in the above information.

Section 205 – Rock Blasting 130

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Site-specific blasting plans and general plan revisions and updates. Submit site-specific
blasting plans after approval of the general blasting plan or any time there is a change in drilling
and blasting methods provided in the general blasting plan. Allow 3 days for approval. Do not
begin drilling until the plan is approved. Include the following:

(1) Proposed excavation sequence;

(2) Station limits and plan view of the proposed blast, showing how the proposed blast fits
into the lift excavation sequence;
(3) Elevations of the tops and bottoms of each lift;
(4) Scaled drawings for each blast showing access, containment, plan and section views of
drill patterns, clearing limits, free face, burden, blast hole locations, blast hole spacing,
subdrill depths, lift height, blast hole diameters, and blast hole angles;
(5) Loading diagram for each blast showing powder factor, charge per delay, type and
amount of explosives, primers, initiators, locations of decking, and range of stemming depths
for substantial variations within the drill pattern;
(6) Initiation method and sequence of blast holes for each blast. Include delay times, delay
system, and down hole firing times;
(7) Flyrock control measures;
(8) Estimated volume of in-place rock to be blasted. Include the total length of production
and controlled blast hole;
(9) Location and orientation of significant joints, fractures, faulting, bedding planes or other
rock mass structural features to be accounted for in the site-specific blasting plan; and
(10) Post-blast rockfall containment designs and procedures.
205.06 Pre-Blast Condition Survey and Vibration Monitoring and Control. The Contractor is
responsible for damage resulting from blasting-related ground vibrations and air-blast over-pressures.
Determine the need for vibration monitoring depending on soil and rock conditions, blasting
parameters as outlined in the blasting plan, and proximity of buildings, structures, utilities, and
sensitive natural features that may be subject to damage from ground vibrations or air-blasts. If
vibration monitoring is required conform to the following requirements:

(a) If not specified in the plans, establish referenceable blasting criteria for buildings, structures,
utilities and natural features that conform to federal, state, or local regulatory requirements. Present
blasting criteria in terms of distance of the facility or feature from blasting, maximum allowable
peak particle velocity limits versus structure type, maximum allowable peak particle velocity
versus peak frequency, and air over-pressure structure damage limits.

(b) Conduct a pre-blast condition survey of nearby buildings, structures, utilities, and natural
features potentially damaged by blasting-related ground vibrations or air-blast. Document the
natural frequency of each affected structure or feature. Use a survey method acceptable to the
Contractor’s insurance company. Submit a copy of pre-blast condition survey records with the site-
specific blasting plans for Engineer review.

(c) Control ground vibrations and air-blast over-pressures with properly designed delay sequences
and maximum allowable charge weights per delay. Verify allowable charge weights per delay by

Section 205 – Rock Blasting 131

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

conducting representative trial blasts and measuring ground vibrations and air-blast over-pressure
levels. Conduct test blasts with blast plan modifications that limit ground vibrations and air-blast
over-pressures to levels that will not cause damage to nearby buildings, structures, utilities and/or
natural features as determined by the vibration specialist.

(d) When ground vibration or air-blast damage is possible, monitor each blast with digital
recording seismographs and air-blast monitoring equipment calibrated within the last year and
approved by the Engineer. Locate monitoring equipment as directed by the vibration specialist.
Place a minimum of three recording stations between the blast area and closest susceptible
structures, utilities, or natural features. Place at least one station on the structure. For ground
vibration monitoring, use seismographs capable of recording particle velocity, displacement and
acceleration for three mutually perpendicular components of vibration. Use a seismograph with a
lower linear response limit over the response frequency range of not more than 2 hertz and upper
limit not less than 50 hertz. Use sensors having lower thresholds not higher than 0.13 millimeters,
1.3 millimeters per second, and 0.02g. Use seismographs capable of producing a permanent digital
time history file for each ground motion episode.

Ensure blasting operations incorporate collected data and findings from vibration monitoring by having
the vibration specialist interpret all seismograph and air-blast records.

205.07 Test Blasting. Before beginning full-scale drilling and blasting, demonstrate adequacy of the
site specific-blasting plan by drilling, blasting, and excavating a test blast of up to 75 cubic meters
with proposed containment measures in-place. Conduct the test at an approved location within the
planned excavation area.

A test blast is unacceptable when it results in oversized fragmentation, excessive or uncontrolled

flyrock, potentially damaging ground vibrations or air-blasts, unplanned overbreak, excessive
damage to the final rock face, or unwanted overhangs. When a test blast is unacceptable, revise the
site-specific blasting plan and conduct an additional test blasts until the combination of blast hole
pattern spacing, controlled blast hole alignment, and charges produce acceptable results.

205.08 Blasting. Use explosives and initiating devices less than 1-year old. Locate explosives
magazines at sites approved by the Engineer.

Inspect the pre-blast area and submit the proposed extent of pre-blast clearing and scaling for approval.

Use angle- or fan-drilled holes as needed during initial pioneering operations to obtain the desired face.
Controlled blasting requirements are applicable to pioneering work.

Record and maintain a log of each blast hole drilled identifying the depth, color, and character of the
cuttings, penetration rate, hole collar location and hole orientation, and other pertinent information.
Before initiating the blast, prepare a blast plan map and submit it showing designated hole numbers
along with individual hole logs completed, dated and signed by the driller.

Ensure blast holes are free of obstructions for the entire depth before placing charges. Take necessary
precautions when placing charges so caving of material from the walls of the holes and the hole collar
will not occur.

Mitigate uncontrolled gas pressure loss during blasting and excessive blast noise by stemming the
upper portion of blast holes with appropriate dry granular material passing the ½ inch sieve. Do not
stem holes with drill cuttings.

Section 205 – Rock Blasting 132

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Blast according to the approved site-specific blasting plan. Use blasting mats, rockfall containment
systems, and other protective devices to prevent damage to surrounding features.

Stop drilling and blasting operations, and submit a revised site-specific blasting plan according to
Subsection 205.05(b), when any of the following occur:

• Slopes are unstable;

• Slopes exceed overbreak tolerances;
• Unwanted overhangs, ridges, or ledges are created;
• Excessive blast damage occurs;
• Poor fragmentation results in oversize material requiring secondary blasting and rehandling;
• Safety of the public is jeopardized;
• Property or natural features are endangered;
• Excessive or uncontrolled flyrock is generated;
• Excessive ground vibration or air-blast over-pressures occurs where damage to buildings,
structures, utilities or natural features is possible; or
• Desired slope or rock face conditions are not produced.
Remove or stabilize cut face rock that is loose, hanging, or potentially dangerous after each blast.
Scale by methods approved by the Engineer. Leave minor irregularities or surface variations in place
if they do not create a hazard. Excavate and remove material outside of the planned neat line slopes
which is unstable and constitutes a potential hazard. Do not drill the next lift until slope stabilization
and blast cleanup work is complete.

(a) Production blasting. When conducting cushion blasting or presplitting, drill a lighter-loaded
buffer row of production holes on a parallel plane adjacent to the controlled blast line to
minimize blast damage to the final slope.

Drill production blast holes a maximum of 100 millimeters in diameter to a sufficient depth such
that unbroken rock does not extend above the finish surface. Drill production blast holes to the
design depth. If more than 5 percent of the production blast holes in any one lift do not conform
to the design depth requirements, re-drill the shallow holes to the proper. Except when
subdrilling, do not drill production blast holes, below the base plane of the controlled blast holes.

Drill production blast holes within two drill hole diameters of the planned collar location. If more
than 5 percent of the drill hole collars in any lift are out of tolerance, fill each hole outside of the
location tolerance with crushed stone and redrill at the proper.

Detonate production holes in a controlled delay sequence.

(b) Controlled blasting. Use angled or fan drilled holes for pioneering the tops of rock cuts and
preparing working platforms. Use equipment or methods approved by the Engineer for areas not
accessible to track drill equipment.

Section 205 – Rock Blasting 133

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Before drilling, completely remove overburden, soil, and loose or decomposed rock along the top
of the excavation for a distance of at least 9 meters beyond the end of the production hole drilling
limits, or to the end of the cut.

Use controlled blasting to form the final cut face on any rock cut where the staked slope ratio is
1⅓V:1H or steeper and the slope height is more than 3 meters above the ditch grade.

Use drilling equipment that accurately controls the angle the drill as it enters the rock. Select a
lift height and conduct drilling operations so the blast hole spacing and down-hole alignment
does not vary more than 200 millimeters from the proposed spacing and alignment. If more than
five percent of the holes exceed the variance, reduce the lift height and modify drilling operations
until the holes are within tolerance.

Drill holes a maximum of 75 millimeters in diameter and within 75 millimeters of the staked
collar location. Fill and redrill any blast hole outside of the location tolerance when more than 5
percent of the hole collars in any lift are outside of the location tolerance Use crushed stone to fill
the blast holes before redrilling. Drill the controlled blast hole line at least 9 meters beyond
loaded production holes or to the end of the cut.

Do not exceed 9 meters for bench height or drill hole length. Limit subdrilling of holes to one-
half of the hole spacing or 600 millimeters whichever is deeper.

Offset lifts up to 600 millimeters horizontally to allow for drill equipment clearance. Remove
benches resulting from the drilling offset.

Compensate for drift that may occur in the upper lifts. Adjust the drill inclination angle or the
initial drill collar location to obtain the required typical section. Limit drilling to one-half of the
hole spacing or 600 millimeters whichever is deeper.

Do not use bulk ammonium nitrate and fuel oil for controlled blasting. Only standard explosives
manufactured specifically for controlled blasting will be used in controlled blast holes, unless
approved by the Engineer.

Maximum diameter of explosives used in controlled blast holes will be no greater than one-half the
diameter of the presplit hole.

(1) Presplitting. Do not presplit final slopes and rock faces. When presplitting is allowed in the
plans, either presplit along the slope face before drilling for production blasting or presplit the
slope face in conjunction with production blasting.
(2) Cushion blasting. Perform cushion blasting to produce rough, natural looking rock slopes.
Use the existing geologic structure to create rock surfaces, terraces, and ridges that blend with
adjacent undisturbed rock faces. Preserve existing rock outcrops to the extent practical to vary
the cut face slope, composition, color, and texture.
(3) Horizontal blasting. With Engineer approval only, use horizontal drill holes instead of or
in conjunction with vertical cushion blasting drill holes to produce natural looking rock slopes,
mitigate drill hole traces, assist pioneering access for drill bench excavation, or to excavate
sliver rock cuts where vertical drilling is not feasible.
When required, preserve or create soil pockets and ledges for revegetation. Locate, size, and
shape these features to replicate the vegetated areas on the undisturbed rock faces. Incorporate

Section 205 – Rock Blasting 134

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

these features into the site-specific blasting plans. Do not create features by overshooting or
selectively removing damaged rock.
205.09 Reporting.

(a) Post blast. Prepare an post blast report for blasts. Submit the report within 3 days following a
blast and before drilling for the next blast. Include the following:

(1) Results of the blast (overbreak, blast damage, noise levels, flyrock, drill trace retention,
fragmentation, material containment, material rehandling requirements, and misfires);
Submit proposed changes for future site-specific blasting plans that will produce acceptable
results if blasting objectives were not met. Submit proposed repairs or stabilization plans for
unstable or blast damaged backslopes;
(2) A detailed blasting plan amended to show significant changes in pattern, loading, or timing;
(3) Drilling logs for each hole completed (dated and signed by the driller) that identify the
depth, color, and character of the cuttings. Also include the penetration rate, hole collar
location, hole orientation, and any conditions that adversely affected drilling or explosives
loading operations;
(4) Depth measurements of production and controlled blast holes;
(5) A drawing or sketch showing the direction of blast, the face, or faces, hole numbers, and the
physical blast layout;
(6) Measurement of overbreak quantities following lift mucking;
(7) Date and time of loading and detonating the blast; and
(8) Name and signature of the blaster-in-charge.
(b) Vibration and air-blast reporting. Submit a vibration and air-blast report within 3 days of a
blast for review by the Engineer. Do not drill until directed by the Engineer. Include the following:

(1) Type of vibration or air-blast recording station used and instrument identification
numbers;
(2) Name of vibration specialist observing the blast and interpreting vibration and air-blast
data;
(3) Blast identification number and location of blast;
(4) Distance and direction of ground vibration and air-blast over-pressure recording stations
from the blast area;
(5) Type of material ground vibration recording stations were sitting on at the time of the
blast;
(6) Maximum applicable charge weight per delay;
(7) Peak displacement, particle velocity and frequency recorded at each ground vibration
sensor location;
(8) Peak over-pressure recorded at each air-blast sensor location;

Section 205 – Rock Blasting 135

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(9) Dated and signed copy of all instrument records;

(10) Post-blast condition survey noting changes from the pre-blast survey; and
(11) Comments on success of the blast in terms of adherence to established ground vibration or
air-blast criteria and management practices.
When failing to meet ground vibration and air-blast criteria and management objectives, submit
proposed changes to future site-specific blasting plans that will produce acceptable results.
(c) Close-out. Submit a written statement signed by the blaster-in-charge certifying that:

(1) Blastholes loaded with explosive materials have been either detonated or unloaded and
disposed of properly; and
(2) Blasting is complete and explosive material has been removed from the project site.
205.10 Acceptance. Material for rock blasting will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.03. Rock blasting will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

205.11 Measure the Section 205 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring controlled blasting by the square meter, measure the face blast as shown in the
blasting plan.

When measuring controlled blast holes by the linear meter, measure the actual length of drilling
recorded in the post blast reports. Controlled blast hole includes the row of holes lying closest to the
trim line.

Do not measure presplit blast holes whose misalignment is more than 200 millimeters.

Do not measure production blast holes.

Payment

205.12 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 205 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 205 – Rock Blasting 136

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 206. — RESERVED

Section 206 – Reserved 137

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 207. — EARTHWORK GEOSYNTHETICS

Description

207.01 This work consists of furnishing and installing geotextile in separation, stabilization, and
filter applications, geogrid in stabilization applications, and geomembrane in moisture barrier
applications.

Geosynthethics are designated according to the tables in Section 714.

Material

207.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Geomembrane 714.05
Geotextile 714.01
Stabilization geogrid 714.03
Construction Requirements

207.03 General. Identify, store, and handle geosynthetics according to ASTM D4873 and the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Elevate and protect geosynthetic rolls with a waterproof cover if
stored outdoors. Limit geosynthetics exposure to less than 10 days of ultraviolet radiation.

For seams sewn on-site, conform to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Obtain approval of the seam
before installation. Use thread consisting of high strength polypropylene or polyester. Do not use nylon
thread. Use thread that is resistant to ultraviolet radiation and a contrasting color to the geotextile.

Submit a seam assembly description and a sample of the sewn material at least 14 days before
installation when geosynthetic joints are sewn as follows:

(a) Assembly description. Include the seam type, seam allowance, stitch type, sewing thread tex
ticket numbers and types, stitch density, and stitch gauge.

(b) Sewn seam samples. Sew seam samples using the same equipment and procedures used to sew
production seams. Submit samples that have at least 6 feet (1.8 meters) of sewn seam and are at
least 5 feet (1.5 meters) wide. If production seams are sewn in both the machine and cross-machine
directions, provide sewn seam samples that are oriented in both the machine and cross-machine
directions.

Replace or repair geosynthetic that is torn or punctured. Remove the damaged area and place a patch of
the same type of geosynthetic overlapping 36 inches (900 millimeters) beyond the damaged area or
sew a seam around the damaged area.

207.04 Geotextile and Geogrid Separation and Stabilization Applications.

(a) Surface preparation. Before placing the geotextile, geogrid, or both, prepare the surface as
follows:

Section 207 – Earthwork Geosynthetics 138

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(1) Existing ground. Cut trees and shrubs flush with the ground surface. Do not remove the
topsoil and vegetation mat. Clear the area of vegetation and obstructions according to Sections
201 and 203. Remove sharp objects and large rocks. Fill depressions or holes with suitable
material to provide a smooth surface.
(2) Subgrade. Prepare the subgrade according to Subsections 204.13(c) and (d).
(3) Subexcavation. Perform subexcavation according to Subsection 204.07.
(b) Geotextile or geogrid placement. Place geogrid on top of geotextile when both are shown at
the same elevation in the plans. Place the geosynthetic smooth, taut, and wrinkle free on the
underlying surface. Conform to curves. Overlap in the direction of construction. Overlap at least
600 millimeters at the ends and sides of adjoining sheets or sew the joints according to the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not place longitudinal overlaps below anticipated wheel
loads. Hold the geosynthetic in place with pins, staples, or piles of cover material.

(c) Backfilling.

(1) First layer placement and compaction. End dump the backfill material onto the geotextile
or geogrid from the edge of the geosynthetic or from previously placed cover material. Do not
operate equipment directly on the geosynthetic. Spread the end-dumped pile of cover material
maintaining a 300 millimeters lift over the geosynthetic. Avoid sudden stops, starts, or turns of
the construction equipment. Fill ruts from construction equipment with additional cover
material. Do not blade material down to remove ruts. If rutting exceeds 75 millimeters during
placement, decrease the construction equipment size, decrease the equipment weight, or
increase the first lift thickness as directed by the Engineer.
Compact according to Subsection 204.11. Do not use sheepsfoot or studded compaction
equipment. Compact the cover material with pneumatic-tire or nonvibratory smooth drum
rollers.
(2) Subsequent layer placement and compaction. Place subsequent layers according to
Subsection 204.10.
Compact according to Subsection 204.11. Vibratory rollers may be used unless pumping or
foundation failures occur. Repair damaged areas and then use only nonvibratory rollers.
207.05 Reinforcement Geotextile and Geogrid. See Section 261 for reinforcement geotextile and
geogrid placement.

207.06 Geotextile Filter Applications.

(a) Geotextile placement. For slope or wave protection, place the long dimension of the geotextile
down the slope. For stream bank protection, place the long dimension of the geotextile parallel to
the centerline of the channel.

Overlap or sow seams at the ends and sides of adjoining sheets.

(1) Overlapping. Overlap the uphill or upstream sheet over the downhill or downstream sheet.
For above water applications, overlap the geotextile at least 300 millimeters. For underwater
applications, overlap the geotextile at least 900 millimeters.
(2) Sewing. Sew the geotextile seam according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Section 207 – Earthwork Geosynthetics 139

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Offset end joints of adjacent sheets at least 1.5 meters. Use key trenches or aprons at the crest and
toe of slopes to hold the geotextile in place. As an alternative use anchor pins, at least 450
millimeters long and spaced at 900 millimeters centers to hold the geotextile sheets in place.

(b) Backfilling. Place aggregate, slope protection, or riprap on the geotextile starting at the toe of
the slope and proceeding upward. Place riprap onto the geotextile from a height of less than 300
millimeters. Place slope protection rock or aggregate backfill onto the geotextile from a height less
than 900 millimeters. Do not allow stones weighing more than 45 kilograms to roll down the slope.
In underwater applications, place the geotextile and cover material in the same day.

207.07 Geomembrane Applications. Submit a geomembrane installation plan at least 10 days before
installing the geomembrane. Include a drawing of the panel layout identifying the location of seams.
Include a seam detail and a written description of the seaming procedure.

(a) Surface preparation. Provide a smooth, flat, firm, unyielding foundation for the geomembrane
with no sudden, sharp, or abrupt changes or break in grade. Remove rocks, stones, sticks, sharp
objects, and debris of any kind protruding more than 13 millimeters above the prepared surface.

(b) Geomembrane placement. Orient seams parallel to the line of maximum slope. Use sandbags
or piles of cover material to hold the geomembrane in place. Do not drive equipment directly on the
geomembrane.

(c) Backfilling. Place backfill material within the same work shift that the geomembrane is
installed. End dump backfill material onto the edge of previously placed cover material and roll it
into place. Do not push material along the geomembrane which can result in damage or wrinkling.

207.08 Acceptance. Geosynthetics will be evaluated under Subsection 106.03. Submit a production
certification for geosynthetics.

Geosynthetic installation will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Sewn joints will be evaluated under Subsection 106.02.

Measurement

207.09 Measure the Section 207 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

When measuring geosynthetics by the square meter, measure on the plane parallel to the slope face.

Do not measure overlapping material.

Payment

207.10 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 207 pay item listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 207 – Earthwork Geosynthetics 140

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 208. — STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

FOR SELECTED MAJOR STRUCTURES
Description

208.01 This work consists of excavating material for the construction of selected structures. This work
also includes preserving channels, shoring and bracing, constructing cofferdams, sealing foundations,
dewatering, preparing foundations, backfilling, and subsequent removal of safety features and
cofferdams.

Material
208.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsections:

Foundation fill 704.01

Neat hydraulic cement grout 725.13(a)(2)
Structural backfill 704.04
Structural concrete 552

Construction Requirements

208.03 General. Follow safety regulations for sloping the sides of excavations, using shoring and
bracing, and using other safety features. Where support systems, shield systems, or other protective
systems are to be used, design the shoring according to Section 562. Submit drawings and construction
details according to Subsection 104.03.

Clear the area of vegetation and obstructions according to Sections 201 and 203.

Request approval from the Engineer as to the character and suitability of the foundation material when
the excavation is complete. Provide a firm foundation of uniform density throughout its length and
width.

Saw cut existing pavements or concrete structures adjacent to the area to be excavated that are
designated to remain.

Where necessary, blast rock according to Section 205.

Conserve suitable material for structural backfill from excavated material. Do not deposit excavated
material in or near a waterway. Do not stockpile excavated material or allow equipment closer than 600
millimeters from the edge of the excavation. Use suitable material in embankment construction when
approved. Dispose of unsuitable or excess material according to Subsection 204.14.

Remove safety features when no longer necessary. Remove shoring and bracing to at least 600
millimeters below the surface of the finished ground.

208.04 Channel Preservation. Perform work in or next to a running waterway as follows:

(a) Excavate and conserve material inside cofferdams, sheeting, or other separations such as dikes
or sandbags;

(b) Do not disturb the natural bed of the waterway adjacent to the work; and

Section 208 – Structure Excavation and Backfill for Selected Major Structures 141
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(c) Backfill the excavation to original ground-line with conserved material.

208.05 Cofferdams. Use cofferdams when excavating under water or when the excavation is affected
by groundwater.

Submit drawings showing proposed methods and construction details of cofferdams according to
Subsection 104.03 and Section 562. Design and construct cofferdams that conform to the following:

(a) Extend below the bottom of the footing;

(b) Brace to withstand pressure without buckling and secured in place to prevent tipping or
movement;

(c) Construct watertight as practical;

(d) Provide sufficient clearance for the placement of forms and the inspection of their exteriors;

(e) Provide for dewatering;

(f) Protect fresh concrete from damage; and

(g) Prevent damage to the foundation by erosion.

Remove cofferdam material down to the natural bed of the waterway or to the top of seal, whichever is
lower. Remove cofferdam material outside the waterway to at least 600 millimeters below the surface
of the finished ground.

208.06 Foundation Seal. Seal the foundation area from water by placing seal concrete when the area
cannot be pumped reasonably free of water. Design seal concrete mix according to Subsection 552.03.

Furnish and place seal concrete according to Section 552. Maintain the water level inside the
cofferdam at the same level as the water outside the cofferdam while placing a foundation seal. Vent or
port the cofferdam at low water level when a foundation seal is placed in tidal water.

Do not dewater a concrete-sealed cofferdam until the seal concrete strength is sufficient to withstand
the hydrostatic pressure.

208.07 Dewatering. Remove water as necessary to perform the work. Dispose of water according to
National and local regulations.

208.08 Foundation Preparation. Prepare foundations as follows:

(a) Footings placed on bedrock. Excavate to the specified elevation. Clean the foundation surface
of deleterious material. Clean and grout seams and crevices. Place foundation fill to provide a level
bearing pad for footing.

(b) Footings placed on an excavated surface other than bedrock. Excavate material to
foundation grade and compact the foundation before footing is placed.

(c) Footings keyed into undisturbed material. Excavate the foundation to the limits of the
footing and compact the foundation. Where material does not stand vertically, fill the space
between the limits of the footing and the undisturbed material with concrete. Fill only to the top of

Section 208 – Structure Excavation and Backfill for Selected Major Structures 142
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

the excavation if the excavation is below the top of the footing. Concrete placed against steel sheet
piles in cofferdams is considered as being against undisturbed material.

(d) Unstable material below footing elevation. Excavate unstable material below foundation
grade as directed by the Engineer and backfill with foundation fill. Place foundation fill in
horizontal layers that do not exceed 150 millimeters in compacted thickness. Compact each layer
according to Subsection 208.10.

(e) Foundations using piles. Where foundation seals are required drive the piles before placing
seal concrete unless otherwise specified. Remove loose and displaced material and reshape the
bottom of the excavation to the foundation elevation. Grade and compact the bed to receive the
footing.

208.09 Backfill. Place structural backfill in horizontal layers that do not exceed 150 millimeters in
compacted thickness. Compact each layer according to Subsection 208.10.

Place structural backfill layers evenly on all sides of the structure as appropriate. Extend each layer to
the limits of the excavation or to natural ground.

Do not place structural backfill against concrete until 80 percent of the design strength is achieved.

Backfill in or next to a running waterway according to Subsection 208.04.

208.10 Compacting. Determine optimum moisture content and maximum dry density according to
AASHTO T 99, Method C. Adjust the moisture content of the backfill material to a moisture content
suitable for compaction.

Compact material placed in all layers to at least 95 percent of the maximum density. Determine the
in-place density and moisture content according to AASHTO T 310 or other approved test procedures.

Do not apply density requirements as measured by AASHTO T 310 to material incapable of being
tested or compacted to maximum values determined by AASHTO T 99. For these materials, fill the
voids around the rocky material in each layer with earth or other fine material. Compact each layer
until there is no visible evidence of further consolidation.

208.11 Acceptance. See Table 208.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Material for structural backfill and foundation fill will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.04.

Structure excavation and backfill work will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Shoring, bracing, and cofferdams will be evaluated under Section 562.

Clearing and removal of obstructions will be evaluated under Sections 201 and 203.

Seal concrete will be evaluated under Section 552.

Material for grout will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03. Grout will be evaluated
under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Section 208 – Structure Excavation and Backfill for Selected Major Structures 143
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Measurement

208.12 Measure the Section 208 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring structural excavation by the cubic meter in its original position; do not include the
following volumes in structure excavation:

(a) Material excavated outside the vertical planes located 450 millimeters outside and parallel to
the limits of the footings or foundations;

(b) Material included within the staked limits of the excavation, such as contiguous channel
changes and ditches, for which measurement is covered under other Sections;

(c) Water or other liquid material;

(d) Material excavated before measurement of the original ground;

(e) Material re-handled, except when the contract specifically requires excavation after
embankment placement; or

(f) Excavation for cofferdam seals.

When measuring foundation fill and structural backfill by the cubic meter in place; measure the volume
placed inside the vertical planes located 450 millimeters outside and parallel to the limits of the
footings or foundations.

Payment

208.13 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 208 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Payment for structure excavation, shoring and bracing, and cofferdams will be full compensation for
excavation to a depth of 1.8 meters below the lowest elevation shown on the plans for each foundation
structure. When the excavation exceeds 1.8 meters, either the Contractor or the Engineer may request
an equitable price adjustment for the depth in excess of 1.8 meters.

Section 208 – Structure Excavation and Backfill for Selected Major Structures 144
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 208.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Material Source
Foundation Measured and Classification − AASHTO 1 per Source of Yes Before
fill (1) tested for M 145 soil type material using
(704.01) conformance in work
(106.04) Gradation − AASHTO " " " "
T 27 & T 11
Structural " Gradation − " " " " "
backfill (1)
Plasticity index − AASHTO " " " "
(704.04) R 58, T 89, & T 90
Production
Foundation Measured and Moisture- − AASHTO 1 per Source of Yes Before
fill tested for density T 99, soil type material using
(704.01) conformance Method C(2) in work
(106.04)
Density − AASHTO 1 per In-place No Before
T 310 250 m3 placing
or other approved next layer
procedures
Structural " Moisture- − AASHTO 1 per Source of Yes Before
backfill density T 99, soil type material using
(704.04) Method C(2) in work
Density − AASHTO 2 per In-place No Before
T 310 lift placing
or other next layer
approved procedures
(1)Not required when using Government provided source.
(2) Minimum of 5 points per proctor.

Section 208 – Structure Excavation and Backfill for Selected Major Structures 145
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 209. — STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

Description

209.01 This work consists of excavating material for the construction of structures, except those
specifically designated under Section 208. This work also includes preserving channels, shoring and
bracing, sealing foundations, dewatering, preparing foundations, bedding, and backfilling.

Structure excavation includes all materials encountered regardless of its nature or characteristics.

Material

209.02 Conform to the following Sections and Subsections:

Backfill material 704.03

Bedding material 704.02
Foundation fill 704.01
Lean concrete backfill 614
Structural concrete, Class S (Seal) 552
Unclassified borrow 704.06

Construction Requirements

209.03 General. Clear the area of vegetation and obstructions according to Sections 201 and 203.

Excavate trenches or foundation pits according to Subsection 208.03. Excavate to foundation grade
without disturbing the trench or foundation surface. Foundation grade is the elevation at the bottom of
any bedding for installing the structure.

209.04 Channel Preservation. Preserve channels according to Subsection 208.04 except excavate
inside separations such as dikes or sandbags.

209.05 Foundation Seal. When foundation seals are necessary, construct a foundation seal according
to Subsection 208.06.

209.06 Dewatering. When dewatering is necessary, dewater according to Subsection 208.07.

209.07 Foundation Preparation. Excavate unsuitable material when encountered at foundation grade
as directed by the Engineer. Backfill and compact with foundation fill according to Subsection
208.08(d).

Where a footing is required to be keyed into undisturbed material, prepare foundation and construct
footing according to Subsection 208.08(c).

209.08 Bedding. Place bedding as follows:

(a) For box culverts and structures other than pipe culverts. Construct bedding when specified.
Place and grade bedding material in compacted layers not exceeding 150 millimeters in depth.
Compact each layer according to Subsection 209.10.

Section 209 – Structure Excavation and Backfill 146

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) For pipe culverts. Level the foundation. Place uncompacted bedding material over the
foundation in a layer of uniform thickness. Lay a 100-millimeter thickness of bedding for pipes
with diameters of 300 to 1350 millimeters. Lay a 150-millimeters thickness of bedding for pipe
with diameters larger than 1350 millimeters. Recess the bedding to receive the joints for pipes with
belled joints. Place the culvert on the uncompacted bedding layer and backfill according to
Subsection 209.09(b).

209.09 Backfill. Backfill as follows:

(a) General. Place backfill layers evenly on all sides of the structure. Extend each layer to the
limits of the excavation or natural ground.

Place backfill material in compacted layers not exceeding 150 millimeters in depth.

Do not place backfill material against concrete until 80 percent of the design strength is achieved.

Compact each layer according to Subsection 209.10.

(b) Pipe culverts. Backfill according to one of the following:

(1) Pipe culverts. Place and compact backfill material in evenly balanced layers on each side
of the pipe to a height of 300 millimeters above the top of the pipe culvert.
Complete backfilling to the top of the trench. Place and compact backfill material in the trench
in layers not exceeding 150 millimeters in depth according to Subsection 209.10.

(2) Pipe culverts with lean concrete backfill. Place and anchor pipe to prevent floating and
movement. Backfill using lean concrete according to Section 614.
(c) Structural plate structures. Place and compact backfill material to a height of 300 millimeters
above the top of the structural plate structure. When applicable, complete backfilling and
compacting according to Subsection 204.10.

(d) Repair existing pavement areas. the bottom portion of the disturbed pavement within the trench
or excavation of approved crushed aggregate matching the grade of existing base course. Remove
existing pavement extending 18 inches minimum beyond the neat line of trench or excavation and
construct hot asphaltic concrete matching the thickness and finish surface of existing pavement.

209.10 Compacting. Determine optimum moisture content and maximum dry density according to
AASHTO T 99, Method C. Adjust the moisture content of the backfill material to a moisture content
suitable for compaction.

Compact material placed in all layers to at least 95 percent of the maximum density. Determine the
in-place density and moisture content according to AASHTO T 310 or other approved test procedures.

Do not apply density requirements as measured by AASHTO T 310 to material incapable of being
tested or compacted to maximum values determined by AASHTO T 99. For these materials, fill the
voids around the rock in each layer with earth or other fine material. Compact each layer until there
is no visible evidence of further consolidation.

Section 209 – Structure Excavation and Backfill 147

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

209.11 Acceptance. See Table 209.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Material for backfill, bedding, and foundation fill will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.04, except lean concrete for bedding or backfill will be evaluated according to Section 614.

Structural excavation and backfill work will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Shoring and bracing will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Clearing and removal of obstructions will be evaluated under Sections 201 and 203.

Seal concrete will be evaluated under Section 552.

Measurement and Payment

209.12 Do not measure structure excavation and backfill for payment. See Subsection 109.05.

Measure foundation fill under Section 208.

Do not measure excavation and concrete for cofferdam seals for payment.

Unless otherwise shown or specified, removal of existing asphalt pavement, including saw cutting,
excavations and backfills for new drainage, sewer, and water pipes or lines, drainage, sewer, water,
electrical, and communication manholes, catch basins/intlets, headwalls/endwalls, riprap, minor
grading, traffic signal and power poles, and other excavations and backfills, including restoration of
disturbed pavement, construction of supports for securing existing utility lines, and sub-grade
stabilization on wet and yielding soils, will not be measured for payment. It will be considered
subsidiary obligation of the Contractor to complete the project.

Section 209 – Structure Excavation and Backfill 148

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 209.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Material Source
Backfill Measured and Classification − AASHTO 1 per Source of Yes Before
material(1) tested for M 145 soil type material using
(704.03) conformance in work
(106.04) Gradation − AASHTO " " " "
T 27 & T 11
Bedding " " − " " " " "
material(1)
(704.02)
Foundation " Classification − AASHTO " " " "
fill(1) M 145
(704.01) Gradation − AASHTO " " " "
T 27 & T 11
Unclassified " Classification − AASHTO " " " "
borrow (1) M 145
(704.06)

Section 209 – Structure Excavation and Backfill 149

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 209.1 (continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production
Backfill Measured and Moisture- − AASHTO 1 per Source of Yes Before using
material tested for density T 99, soil type material in work
(704.03) conformance Method C(2)
(106.04)
Density − AASHTO 2 per In-place No Before placing
T 310 or other lift next layer
approved
procedures
Bedding " Moisture- − AASHTO 1 per Source of Yes Before using
material density T 99, soil type material in work
(704.02) Method C(2)
Density − AASHTO 2 per In-place No Before placing
T 310 or other lift next layer
approved
procedures
Foundation " Moisture- − AASHTO T 99, 1 per Source of Yes Before using
fill density Method C(2) soil type material in work
(704.01)
Density − AASHTO 2 per In-place No Before placing
T 310 or other lift next layer
approved
procedures
Unclassified " Moisture- − AASHTO 1 per Source of Yes Before using
borrow density T 99, soil type material in work
(704.06) Method C(2)
Density − AASHTO 2 per In-place No Before placing
T 310 or other lift next layer
approved
procedures
(1) Not required when using Government provided source.
(2) Minimum of 5 points per proctor.

Section 209 – Structure Excavation and Backfill 150

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 210. — RESERVED

Section 210 – Reserved 151

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 211. — ROADWAY OBLITERATION

Description

211.01 This work consists of obliterating or closing roadways and other areas outside the roadway
prism.

Roadway obliteration methods are designated as follows:

(a) Method 1. Obliterate the roadway by restoring to approximate original ground contours. Keep
excavated material within the original construction limits. Finish slopes to provide gradual
transitions in slope adjustments without noticeable breaks.

(b) Method 2. Close roads by filling ditches and outsloping the roadbed to drain. Remove and
slope embankment material at localized drainages to restore the natural drainage patterns.
Eliminate ruts and low spots that could hold water.

Construction Requirements

211.02 Conform to the following when obliterating or closing roadways:

(a) Rigid material.

(1) Nonasphalt material. Break concrete pavements, curbs, gutters, sidewalks, and other
nonasphalt rigid material into pieces with maximum dimension of 300 millimeters when
burying according to Subsection 203.05(c). As an alternative to breaking and burying,
remove the rigid material from the project and dispose of it according to Subsection
203.05(a).
(2) Asphalt material. Dispose of asphalt material in a manner consistent with state and local
regulations. Asphalt material may be considered hazardous waste. Submit copies of the
disposal permits. Where no regulations exist, dispose of the material as described in (1)
above.
(b) Nonrigid Material.

(1) Nonasphalt material. Scarify or rip the gravel, crushed stone, or other nonrigid surface,
base, and subbase material. Mix the scarified or ripped material with the underlying soil.
Bury the mixture under at least 300 millimeters of soil.
(2) Asphalt contaminated material. Dispose of asphalt contaminated material according to
Subsection 211.02(a)(2).
211.03 Waterbars and Barriers. Construct barriers to prevent vehicle access and waterbars as shown
in the plans.

211.04 Acceptance. Roadway obliteration will be evaluated under Subsection 106.02.

Section 211 – Roadway Obliteration 152

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Measurement

211.05 Measure the Section 211 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

211.06 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 211 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 211 – Roadway Obliteration 153

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 212. — LINEAR GRADING

Description

212.01 This work consists of constructing roadbeds within the specified alignment and grade
tolerances.

Construction Requirements

212.02 Roadway Preparation. Clear the area of vegetation and obstructions according to Sections 201
and 203.

212.03 Roadway Excavation and Embankment. Construct the roadbeds according to the applicable
requirements of Section 204 except as modified herein.

Adjust the moisture content of embankment material to a moisture content suitable for compaction.
Place embankment material in 300-millimeter layers and compact each layer according to Subsection
204.11(a). Where compacting with rollers is not practical, use approved mechanical or vibratory
compaction equipment.

Construct approach connections to existing roads, parking areas, and trails. Construct new approaches.

212.04 Grading Tolerance. Do not encroach on stream channels, impact wetlands, or extend beyond
right-of-way or easement limits. Do not make alignment or profile grade adjustments that adversely
affect drainage. Construct the roadbed within the following grading tolerances:

(a) Alignment (centerline). Alignment may be shifted a maximum of 3 meters left or right of the
planned centerline. Curve radii may be reduced by up to 50 percent. Do not construct curves with
radii less than 30 meters. Compound curves are permitted.

(b) Profile grade. Profile grade may be shifted a maximum of 1.5 meters up or down from the plan
elevation provided the new grade tangent does not vary more than 2 percent from the plan grade
tangent. Connect revised forward and back grade tangents with a uniform vertical curve consistent
with the design.

212.05 Acceptance. Linear grading will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Clearing and removal of obstructions will be evaluated under Sections 201 and 203.

Measurement

212.06 Measure the Section 212 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable.

Do not measure changes in the clearing and grubbing quantity caused by alignment adjustments under
Subsection 212.04.

Section 212 – Linear Grading 154

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Payment

212.07 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 212 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 212 – Linear Grading 155

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 213. — SUBGRADE STABILIZATION

Description

213.01 This work consists of processing and incorporating lime, lime/fly ash, or hydraulic cement into
the upper layer of subgrade.

Material

213.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Chemical admixtures 711.03

Fly ash 725.04(a)
Hydraulic cement 701.01
Lime 725.03(b)
Water 725.01(c)

Construction Requirements

213.03 Proportioning. Submit a subgrade stabilization mix design at least 30 days before production.
Include compressive strength values for at least three application rates with at least one application rate
above and one below the strength shown in Table 213.1.

Table 213.1
Subgrade Stabilization Compressive Strength Requirements
Stabilization Test Average Unconfined Compressive
Mixture Procedure Strength (minimum of 3 specimens)
ASTM D5102,
Lime/Soil 0.70 megapascals(1)
Procedure B
ASTM D5102,
Lime/Fly ash/Soil 1.0 megapascals(1)
Procedure B
Cement/Soil,
ASTM D1633,
Cement/Fly ash/Soil, 1.4 megapascals(2)
Method A
or Fly ash/Soil
(1) Seven-day cure at 40 °C.
(2) Seven-day cure.

Include the following with the mix design, as applicable:

(a) Source of each component material;

(b) Results of the applicable tests including optimum moisture content (after treatment), hydration
moisture rate, maximum dry density (after treatment), Atterberg limits (before and after treatment),
and recommended application rates of stabilizing material; and

Section 213 – Subgrade Stabilization 156

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(c) When requested by the Engineer:

(1) 90-kilogram sample of the subgrade soil;

(2) 12-kilogram sample of the fly ash;
(3) 10-kilogram sample of the lime;
(4) 10-kilogram sample of the cement; and
(5) 1-kilogram sample of each chemical admixtures.
Begin production after the mix design is approved. Furnish a new mix design if there is a material
source change.

213.04 Production Start-Up Procedures. Conduct a pre-stabilization preparatory phase meeting at

least 7 days before the start of stabilizing operations according to Subsection 153.04(a).

Provide at least 7 days notice before beginning production.

213.05 General. Store lime, fly ash, hydraulic cement, and chemical admixtures in closed,
weatherproof containers.

Prepare the subgrade according to Subsection 303.05. Scarify or pulverize the subgrade to the required
depth. Use a rotary mixer with direct water injection capabilities to adequately blend the material and
to produce a homogeneous mixture within 2 percent of the optimum moisture content.

At the end of each production day, shape the subgrade surface to provide positive drainage. Provide a
construction joint according to Subsection 305.11 for tying into existing stabilized subgrade.

213.06 Application. Do not apply lime, fly ash, or hydraulic cement when weather conditions cause
excessive material loss or when the air temperature may fall below 0 °C within 48 hours. Apply
material when the subgrade material temperature is at least 5 °C.

Adjust the subgrade material moisture content to 2 to 3 percent above optimum.

Apply fly ash by the dry method. Apply lime and cement by either the dry or slurry method.

(a) Dry method. Uniformly apply the stabilizers using a metered spreader approved by the
Engineer. A motor grader is not an approved spreader. Apply water using approved methods to
obtain the proper moisture content for mixing and compaction. If quicklime and fly ash are pre-
blended, limit the maximum particle size of the quicklime to 3 millimeters to avoid segregation.

(b) Slurry method. Mix material with water. Report the percent solids in the slurry to the Engineer
for each production day. Apply the slurry using either trucks with approved distributors or rotary
mixers. Equip the distributor truck or rotary mixer tank with an agitator to keep the stabilizers
suspended in water. Make successive passes over the material to obtain the proper moisture and
additive content.

213.07 Mixing. Keep traffic, except mixing equipment, off the spread material. Use a rotary mixer.

(a) Lime mixtures.

Section 213 – Subgrade Stabilization 157

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(1) Preliminary mixing. Adjust the moisture content of the mixture to optimum plus
necessary hydration moisture. Use the mix design hydration moisture rate. Thoroughly
mix the lime, soil, and water to obtain a homogeneous friable mixture. Complete the
mixing on the same day lime is applied. Spot-check areas to ensure lime is fully hydrated.
Add additional water if necessary.
Mellow the mixture for 1 to 4 days at a moisture content of 2 to 3 percent above optimum
as directed by the Engineer.
(2) Final mixing. Remix until 95 percent of the mixture, except hard and durable
particles, passes a 37.5-millimeter sieve and at least 50 percent of the soil portion of the
mixture passes a 4.75-millimeter sieve when tested according to AASHTO T 27 in the
non-dried condition.
(b) Lime/fly ash mixtures. Mix according to Subsection 213.07(a)(1). Use either a pre-blended
lime/fly ash mixture or mix the lime and fly ash in separate operations.
If the lime and fly ash are mixed separately, mix the lime first and mix the fly ash within 2 days
of lime mixing. Adjust the moisture content of the lime/fly ash mixture to 2 to 3 percent above
optimum. Mix the material to prevent formation of fly ash balls. Complete the mixing within 2
hours after adding the fly ash.
(c) Cement, fly ash, or cement/fly ash mixtures. Add water to adjust the moisture content of
the mixture to 2 to 3 percent above optimum. Mix the material until 95 percent of the soil portion
of the mixture hard and durable particles passes a 37.5-millimeter sieve and at least 50 percent of
the soil portion of the mixture passes a 4.75-millimeter sieve when tested according to AASHTO
T 27 in the non-dried condition. Complete the mixing within 2 hours after the cement, fly ash, or
both are added.

213.08 Compacting and Finishing. Immediately after final mixing, spread and compact the mixture.
Use a vibratory sheep-foot roller to achieve compaction. Use pneumatic-tire and smooth-drum rollers
for finish rolling.

Compact the mixture to at least 95 percent of maximum dry density from the approved mix design.
Complete compaction operations within 2 hours of completion of mixing.

Finish the compacted subgrade to within plus or minus 30 millimeters of the staked line, grade, and
cross section. Check the surface with a 3-meter straightedge.

Add or remove material to correct surface deviations in excess of 19 millimeters in 3 meters between
any two contacts of the straightedge with the surface. When adding material, scarify the subgrade to at
least 150 millimeters. Recompact the area to restore the required density and strength. For Subsection
213.07(b) or (c) mixtures, complete compaction operations within 2 hours of adding the cement, fly
ash, or both.

213.09 Curing. Keep the subgrade continuously moist and within 3 percent of optimum moisture
content until the next course is placed. Apply water under pressure through a spray bar equipped with
nozzles, which produce a fine, uniform spray. Place the next course within 14 days after compacting
and finishing. If the subgrade deforms, loses density, or ravels before placement of the next course;
correct the damaged subgrade.

Section 213 – Subgrade Stabilization 158

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Traffic may be allowed on the stabilized subgrade 24 hours after compaction and finishing if approved
by the Engineer.

213.10 Acceptance. See Table 213.2 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Material for chemical admixtures, fly ash, lime, hydraulic cement, and water will be evaluated under
Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Subgrade stabilization work will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Reconditioning of subgrade will be evaluated under Section 303.

Measurement

213.11 Measure the Section 213 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable.

Measure width horizontally to include the top of subgrade width and allowable widening. Measure
length horizontally along the centerline of the roadway.

Payment

213.12 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 213 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 213 – Subgrade Stabilization 159

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 213.2
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Mix Design
Subgrade Measured and Proportioning − Subsection 1 per Existing Yes 30 days
stabilization tested for 213.03 submitted roadbed / before
mix design conformance mix design subgrade production
(106.04)
Production
Stabilized Measured and Moisture-density − AASHTO 1 per Processed Yes, when Before
material tested for T 99, Method C(1) soil type but material behind requested using
conformance not less than mixer in work
(106.04) 1 for each day
of production
Gradation − AASHTO 1 per " " “
T 27 & T 11 3000 m2,
but not less
than 1 per layer
Density − AASHTO " In-place No Before
T 310 or other placing
approved procedures next layer
Compressive − ASTM " Processed Yes, when "
strength D5102(2), D1633(3), material behind requested
(7 day cure) as applicable mixer
(1) Minimum of 5 points per proctor.
(2) Seven-day cure at 105°F (40 °C). Compact sampled material immediately according to procedure B. Do not complete the proportioning and mixing of
Sections 10.2 and 10.3. Report average unconfined compressive strength from at least three specimens.
(3) Seven-day cure. Report average unconfined compressive strength from at least three specimens.

Section 213 – Subgrade Stabilization 160

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

DIVISION 250
SLOPE REINFORCEMENT
AND RETAINING WALLS

Section 250 – Slope Reinforcement and Retaining Walls 161

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 251. — RIPRAP

Description

251.01 This work consists of furnishing and placing riprap for bank protection, slope protection,
drainage structures, and erosion control.

Riprap acceptance methods are designated according to Table 251.1. If no acceptance method is
designated, use Method A.

Riprap classes are designated according to Table 705.1.

Geotextile filters are designated according to Table 714.1.

Material

251.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Geotextile 714.01
Neat hydraulic cement grout 725.13(a)(2)
Riprap 705.02

Construction Requirements

251.03 General. Perform the work under Section 209. Dress the slope to produce a smooth surface. If
geotextile filter is required, place according to Section 207.

251.04 Placed Riprap. Placed riprap is rock placed on a prepared surface to form a well-graded mass.

Place riprap to its full thickness in one operation to avoid displacing the underlying material. Do not
place riprap material by methods that cause segregation or damage to the prepared surface. Place or
rearrange individual rocks by mechanical or hand methods to obtain a dense uniform blanket with a
reasonably smooth surface.

251.05 Keyed Riprap. Keyed riprap is rock placed on a prepared surface and set into place by impact
pressure.

Place rock for keyed riprap according to Subsection 251.04. Set the riprap into place by exerting
impact pressure with a hydraulic-powered bucket or an approximate 2000-kilogram flat-faced mass.
Repeated impacts should be made until the rock is firmly seated and forms a reasonably uniform
surface without reducing the effective sizes of the rocks. Do not use impact pressure on riprap below
the water surface.

251.06 Grouted Riprap. Grouted riprap is rock placed or keyed on a prepared surface with the voids
filled with grout.

Place rock for grouted riprap according to Subsection 251.04 or 251.05. Thoroughly moisten the rocks
and wash excess fines from the riprap or to the underside of the riprap. Do not place grout unless the
air temperature is at or above 1 °C within the near-surface voids of the riprap. Place the grout in a

Section 251 – Riprap 162

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

manner to prevent segregation. Begin placing grout at the lowest elevation of the riprap. Fill voids
without unseating the rocks. Do not exceed 1.5-meter thickness for each layer of grouted riprap. Allow
3 days curing time before adding the next layer of riprap and grout. Provide weep holes through the
grouted riprap as required. Keep the grouted riprap moist for 3 days after the work is completed and
protect it from freezing for at least 7 days after grouting.

251.07 Acceptance. See Table 251.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Rock for riprap will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Acceptance Method A riprap construction will be evaluated under Subsection 106.02.

Acceptance Method B riprap construction will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Structure excavation and backfill will be evaluated under Section 209.

Geotextile filters will be evaluated under Section 207.

Material for grout will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Placing grout will be evaluated under Subsection 106.02.

Measurement

251.08 Measure the Section 251 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring riprap by the cubic meter, measure in place.

Payment

251.09 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 251 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 251 – Riprap 163

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 251.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Material Source
Riprap Measured and Apparent – AASHTO 1 per Source Yes Before –
(705.02) tested for specific gravity T 85 material of using in
conformance & absorption type material work
(106.04) Sodium sulfate – AASHTO " " " " –
soundness T 104
LA abrasion – AASHTO " " " " –
T 96
Production
Riprap Process control Size – See Note (2) 1 per In-Place " " –
(705.02) (153.03) Methods 80 m3
A&B per Class

Measured and Gradation(1) – FLH 1 per Stockpile No 24 –

tested for Method B T 521 800 m3 or hours
conformance per Class In-Place(3)
(106.02 &
106.04)
(1) Notify Engineer at least 7 days before performing test.
(2) Verify riprap class by confirming that the largest accessible rock has an intermediate dimension greater than the upper limit of the D85 size
range specified in Table 705.1.
(3) Point of sampling to be approved by Engineer.

Section 251 – Riprap 164

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 252. — ROCKERY, SPECIAL ROCK EMBANKMENT,

AND ROCK BUTTRESS

Description

252.01 This work consists of constructing rockeries, special rock embankments, and rock buttresses.

Geotextile filters are designated according to Table 714.1.

Material

252.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Foundation fill 704.01

Geotextile 714.01
Granular rock backdrain 703.17
Neat hydraulic cement grout 725.13(a)(2)
Rock for buttresses 705.05
Rock for rockeries 705.06
Rock for special rock embankment 705.04

Construction Requirements

252.03 Rockery. Verify the limits of the rockeries. Notify the Engineer if planned rockery lengths,
heights, or both are inadequate to intersect with adjacent slopes. Submit cross-sections verifying
intersections for approval.

Construct rockeries as follows:

(a) Excavation. Perform the work under Sections 204 and 209 as required. Do not excavate more
areas for rockeries than can be replaced with rockery construction in one shift unless shoring is
provided. Protect backslopes from damage by surface water.

(b) Erection. Remove sharp objects from the backslope before installing geotextile filter. Anchor
geotextile filter to the excavation backslope to withstand backfilling operations. Overlap the
geotextile filter at least 600 millimeters at seams. Reinforce damaged fabric with a patch of the
same type of geotextile filter by overlapping the patch 900 millimeters beyond the damaged area
in all directions.

Furnish and install drain systems according to Section 605 when specified. Do not connect
collector pipes to storm water retention systems unless approved by the Engineer.

Seat rocks firmly on a prepared foundation.

Place rocks to avoid continuous joints in either the vertical or horizontal direction. Locate at least
one bearing point a distance no greater than 150 millimeters from the face of the rockery. Place
each rock to ensure it bears on at least two rocks below. Place incrementally smaller rocks as
construction proceeds in successive lifts. Slope the top surface of each rock towards the back of
the rockery at an inclination of at least 5 percent.

Section 252 – Rockery, Special Rock Embankment, and Rock Buttress 165
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Choke voids from the drain side of the rockery in each successive lift. Choke voids greater than
150 millimeters with a rock large enough to fill the void.

Backfill with granular rock backdrain concurrent with rock placement until level with the top of
rock. Place granular rock backdrain in horizontal layers not to exceed 300 millimeters compacted
depth. Compact each layer according to Subsection 204.11. Compact areas not accessible to
rollers with other approved methods.

252.04 Special Rock Embankment and Rock Buttress. Verify the limits of embankments and
buttresses. Notify the Engineer if the embankment or buttress lengths, heights, or both are inadequate
to intersect with adjacent slopes. Perform the work under Sections 204 or 209 as required. When
specified, place geotextile filter according to Section 207.

Place rocks in a stable orientation with minimal voids to produce a random pattern. Construct the
exposed face of the rock mass reasonably uniform with projections beyond the line of the slope that
are no greater than 300 millimeters for mechanically-placed rock or 150 millimeters for hand-placed
rock.

Use rock smaller than the minimum rock size to choke the larger rock solidly in position and to fill
voids between the large rocks.

252.05 Acceptance. See Table 252.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Construction of rockeries, special rock embankments, and rock buttresses will be evaluated under
Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Geotextile filters will be evaluated under Section 207.

Roadway excavation will be evaluated under Section 204.

Structure excavation and backfill will be evaluated under Section 209.

Measurement

252.06 Measure the Section 252 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring rockeries by the square meter of rockery front face; measure the rockery from the
bottom of the base rock elevation to the top of the cap rock elevation. Measure front face on a plane
parallel to the rockery face.

When measuring special rock embankment and rock buttress by the cubic meter, measure in place.

Payment

252.07 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 252 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 252 – Rockery, Special Rock Embankment, and Rock Buttress 166
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 252.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Material Source
Rock for Measured and Rock breadth − Subsection 1 per Source of No Before −
buttresses tested for and thickness 705.05(a)(1) rock type material using
(705.05) conformance in work
(106.04) Apparent − AASHTO T 85 " " Yes " Not required
specific when using
gravity Government
provided
source
Absorption − " " " " " "
Coarse − AASHTO T 210 " " " " "
durability index
Rock for " Apparent − " 1 per Source of Yes Before Not required
rockeries specific gravity rock type material using when using
(705.06) in work Government
provided
source
Absorption − " " " " " "
LA abrasion − AASHTO T 96 " " " " "
Coarse − AASHTO T 210 " " " " "
durability index
Sodium sulfate − AASHTO T 104 " " " " "
soundness

Section 252 – Rockery, Special Rock Embankment, and Rock Buttress 167
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 252.1 (continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production
Rock for Process control Size − See Note (1) 1 per In-place No 24 −
special rock (153.03) 80 m3 hours
embankment
(705.04)
Rock for " " − " 1 per " " " −
buttresses 80 m3
(705.05)
Rock for " " − See Note (2) 2 per " " " −
rockeries lift of rock
(705.06) per rockery
(1) For mechanically placed embankments, verify rock size by confirming that the largest accessible rock has an intermediate dimension greater than the D50 size
specified in Table 705.2. Also confirm that the smallest accessible rock has an intermediate dimension within the lower D50 size range specified in Table 705.2.
For hand placed embankments, verify rock size by confirming that the largest accessible rock has an intermediate dimension greater than the D75 size specified in
Table 705.3. Also confirm that the smallest accessible rock has an intermediate dimension within the D25 size range specified in Table 705.3.
(2) Verify rock size by confirming that the largest accessible rock has a width greater than the minimum width specified in the Rockery Design Table and Rockery
Detail Sheets in the Plans.

Section 252 – Rockery, Special Rock Embankment, and Rock Buttress 168
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 253. — GABIONS AND REVET MATTRESSES

Description

253.01 This work consists of constructing rock filled gabion structures and revet mattresses.

(a) Gabions baskets. A rock filled wire enclosure having a height of 300 millimeters or more.

(b) Revet mattresses. A rock filled wire enclosure having a thickness of less than 1300 millimeters.

Geotextile filters are designated according to Table 714.1.

Material

253.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Backfill material 704.03

Gabion and revet mattress material 720.02
Gabion and revet mattress rock 705.01
Geotextile 714.01
Structural backfill 704.04

Construction Requirements

253.03 General. Verify the limits of the structure. Submit drawings according to Subsection 104.03.
Perform excavation and backfill according to Section 209.

253.04 Basket Assembly. Furnish twisted wire or welded wire baskets. Do not damage wire coatings
during basket assembly, structure erection, cell filling, or backfilling. Rotate the basket panels into
position and join the vertical edges with fasteners according to Subsection 253.05. Temporary fasteners
may be used for basket assembly if they are supplemented during structure erection with permanent
fasteners according to Subsection 253.05.

Rotate the diaphragms into position and join the vertical edges according to Subsection 253.05.

253.05 Structure Erection. Place the empty gabion baskets on the foundation and interconnect the
adjacent baskets along the top and vertical edges using permanent fasteners.

Where lacing wire is used, wrap the wire with alternating single and double loops every other mesh
opening and not more than 150 millimeters apart. Where spiral binders are used, crimp the ends to
secure the binders in place. Where alternate fasteners are used, space the fasteners in every mesh
opening and not more than 150 millimeters apart.

Interconnect each vertical layer of baskets to the underlying layer of baskets along the front, back, and
sides. Stagger the vertical joints between baskets of adjacent rows and layers by at least one-half the
cell length.

253.06 Cell Filling. Remove kinks and folds in the wire mesh, and properly align the baskets. Place
rock carefully in the basket cells to prevent bulging of the baskets and to minimize voids in the rock
fill. Maintain the basket alignment.

Section 253 – Gabians and Revet Mattresses 169

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Place stiffeners in each unrestrained exterior basket cell greater than 300 millimeters in height. This
includes interior basket cells left temporarily unrestrained. Place stiffeners concurrently with rock
placement.

Fill the cells in any row or layer to ensure no cell is filled more than 300 millimeters above an adjacent
cell. Repeat this process until the basket is full and the lid bears on the final rock layer.

Secure the lid to the sides, ends, and diaphragms according to Subsection 253.05. Make exposed basket
surfaces smooth and neat with no sharp rock edges projecting through the wire mesh.

253.07 Backfilling. Place a geotextile filter over the back face of the gabion structure. Concurrently
with the cell filling operation, backfill the area behind the gabion structure with structural backfill
according to Subsection 209.09. Compact each layer according to Subsection 209.10 except use an
acceptable lightweight mechanical or vibratory compactor within 900 millimeters of the gabion
structure.

253.08 Revet Mattresses. Place a geotextile filter according to Section 207. Construct revet mattresses
according to Subsections 253.04 through 253.06. Anchor the mattresses in place according to the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Place geotextile filter against the vertical edges of the mattress and
backfill against the geotextile filter using backfill material. Overfill revet mattresses by 25 to 50
millimeters.

253.09 Acceptance. See Table 209.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Material for gabion structures and revet mattresses will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.03.

Construction of gabion structures and revet mattresses will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.04.

Geotextile filters will be evaluated under Section 207.

Structure excavation, structural backfill, and backfill material will be evaluated under Section 209.

Measurement

253.10 Measure the Section 253 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring gabions by the cubic meter, measure in the structure.

Measure foundation fill under Section 208.

Payment

253.11 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 253 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 253 – Gabians and Revet Mattresses 170

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 254. — STEEL NETS AND FIXINGS

Description

254.01 This work consists of the placing of vertical or sub-vertical rock walls of steel net elements.

Material

254.02 Conform to the following:

Steel Net Elements: 6.00 sq m in double-twisted hot galvanized thread reinforced by steel
cable strands.

Bolts: minimum 1.00 m long

Construction Requirements

254.03 Submittals. At least 30 days before starting reinforced soil slope construction, submit the
following according to Subsection 104.03:

(a) Manufacturer’s certification. A certification and test results indicating the proposed steel
net elements, bolts, and avec mortar materials meets requirements.

(b) Bolt hole drilling and placement details. Detail proposed drilling, placement, and mortaring
into place the bolts for holding the steel nets

(c) Construction details. Provide installation methods and connection details for this work.

254.04 General.

Verify the limits of the steel nets installation.

Clear the area of vegetation and obstructions according to Sections 201 and 203. Conserve topsoil
according to Subsection 204.05.

254.05 Steel Nets and Bolting into Place. Drill bolt holes, 40 mm diameter into sound rock, at a
minimum of one bolt per every 6.00 sq m.. Place steel net elements of 6.00 sq m. Insert bolts into
drill holes, fill holes with avec mortar and attach steel net element to bolt

254.06 Acceptance.

Material for reinforced soil slopes will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02, 106.03, and 106.04.

Placing of steel nets and fixings will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Excavation will be evaluated under Section 204.

Measurement

254.07 Measure the Section 254 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Section 254 – Steel Nuts and Fixings 171

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Payment

254.08 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 254 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in

Section 254 – Steel Nuts and Fixings 172

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 255. — MECHANICALLY-STABLILIZED EARTH WALLS

Description

255.01 This work consists of constructing mechanically-stabilized earth (MSE) walls.

Geotextile filters are designated according to Table 714.1.

Reinforcement geotextile and geogrid are designated according to Tables 714-5 and 714-6.

Material

255.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsections:

Concrete 601
Concrete masonry units 725.07(a)
Geotextile 714.01
Mechanically-stabilized earth wall material 720.01
Reinforcement geotextile and geogrid 714.04
Select granular backfill 704.08
Unclassified borrow 704.06

Construction Requirements

255.03 General. Verify limits of the wall installation. Submit installation drawings according to
Subsection 104.03. See Section 257 for Contractor-designed MSE walls.

Perform the work under Section 209. Grade the foundation for a width equal to the length of
reinforcing elements plus the additional width shown on the plans.

When required, as determined by the Contractor, design and construct temporary shoring with
consideration of maintenance of traffic requirements in Section 156. See Section 208 for temporary
shoring.

For concrete panel and block-faced walls, provide a precast reinforced or a non-reinforced cast-in-
place concrete leveling pad. Cure cast-in-place leveling pads at least 12 hours before placing wall
panels.

255.04 Wall Erection. Erect the wall according to the drawings and manufacturer’s
recommendations. Have an field representative from the wall system manufacturer on-site during the
startup of wall erection. Construct MSE walls to the tolerance requirements of Table 255.1.

Section 255 – Mechanically Stablized Earth Walls 173

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 255.1
Construction Tolerance
Facing Type +/-Vertical +/- Horizontal +/- Horizontal
(1)
Tolerance Tolerance(2) Straight Edge
Point Check(3)
Precast concrete panel,
15 mm 15 mm 15 mm
masonry block units
Welded wire, gabions 38 mm 38 mm 75 mm
(1) Wall vertical tolerance at top of wall for every 3 meters of wall height. For example 20
meter wall height multiply 6.5×value.
(2) Wall horizontal tolerance at top of wall for every 3 meters of wall height.
(3) Maximum horizontal deviation at any point in the wall from a 3-meter straightedge placed
horizontally or vertically on the theoretical plane of the design face.

(a) Precast concrete panel-faced. Erect panels by means of lifting devices connected to the upper
edge of the panel.

Make the joint openings19±6 millimeters wide. Install joint material according to the drawings.
Cover joints on the backside of the panels with a 300-millimeter wide strip of geotextile filter.
Overlap geotextile filter splices at least 100 millimeters.

Hold the panels in position with temporary wedges or bracing during backfilling operations.

(b) Wire-faced. Place backing mats in successive horizontal lifts as backfill placement proceeds.
Connect, tighten, and anchor soil reinforcement elements to the wall facing units before placing
backfill. Do not place reinforcing elements below the corresponding connection elevations. Pull
and anchor the reinforcement mesh taut before placing additional backfill. Do not use hardware
cloth or geosynthetic material to retain backfill at the face of the wall.

(c) Gabion-faced. Place the first lift of backfill before filling the gabion baskets. Construct gabion
structures according to Section 253. Lay reinforcement mesh horizontally on compacted fill and
normal to the face of the wall. Connect the gabion facing unit to reinforcement mesh with spiral
binders or tie wire at 100-millimeter nominal spacing with alternating single and double locked
loops. Pull and anchor the reinforcement mesh taut before placing additional backfill.

(d) Concrete masonry block-faced. Place the first course of modular block wall units on top of
and in full contact with the leveling pad. Place units side by side for the full length of the wall
such that adjoining blocks are located according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Place
units to ensure only the front face of the unit is visible. Check for proper elevation and alignment
every two courses. Install connection devices, alignment devices, or both as required by design.
Fill voids in and around units with unit fill as required by manufacturer’s installation guidelines
to meet the required connection strength. Place geotextile filter between unit fill and select
granular backfill. If the unit fill is required to meet connection strength specifications, completely
fill each course of block before proceeding to the next course. Place reinforcement no more than
2 times the block depth or 600 millimeters, whichever is less. Remove excess material from the
top of the units before installing each succeeding block course.

255.05 Backfilling. Backfill the stabilized volume with select granular backfill according to
Subsection 209.09. Place select granular backfill material from the back of the wall face to the end of
the reinforcement. Ensure that no voids exist below the reinforcement. Compact each layer according

Section 255 – Mechanically Stablized Earth Walls 174

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

to Subsection 209.10, except use an acceptable lightweight mechanical or vibratory compactor

within 900 millimeters of the wall face. Consolidate facing backfill by rodding or other approved
means to produce a uniform, tight facing fill. Where the stabilized volume supports spread footings
for bridges or other structural loads, compact the top 1.5 meters to at least 100 percent of the
maximum density.

Do not damage or disturb the facing or reinforcing elements. Do not operate equipment directly on
top of the reinforcing mesh or strips. Correct damaged, misaligned, or distorted wall elements.

Backfill and compact behind the stabilized volume with unclassified borrow according to
Subsections 209.09 and 209.10. At the end of the day's operation, slope the last lift of backfill away
from the wall face to direct surface runoff away from the wall. Do not allow surface runoff from
adjacent areas to enter the wall construction area.

255.06 Acceptance. See Table 255.2 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Material for mechanically-stabilized earth walls listed under Subsection 720.01 will be evaluated under
Subsections 106.02 and 106.03. Submit a production certification with each shipment of concrete face
panels.

Construction of mechanically-stabilized earth walls will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.04.

Geotextile filters and reinforcement geotextile and geogrid will be evaluated under Section 207.

Structure excavation, select granular backfill, and unclassified borrow will be evaluated under Section
209.

Gabions will be evaluated under Section 253.

Concrete leveling pad will be evaluated under Section 601.

Measurement

255.07 Measure the Section 255 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring mechanically-stabilized earth walls by the square meter, measure the front face of
wall excluding footings.

When measuring select granular backfill within the stabilized volume by the cubic yard (cubic meter),
measure in place.

Measure foundation fill under Section 208.

Payment

255.08 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 255 pay item listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 255 – Mechanically Stablized Earth Walls 175

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 255.2
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Material Source
Select Measured Gradation − AASHTO 1 per Source of Yes Before Not required
granular and T 27 & T 11 soil type material using when using
backfill tested for in work Government
(704.08) conformance provided
(106.04) source
Angle of − AASHTO " " " " "
internal T 236 and
friction Subsection
704.08(a)(2)
Sodium − AASHTO " " " " "
sulfate T 104
soundness
loss
Plasticity − AASHTO " " " " "
index T 90
Resistivity(1) − AASHTO " " " " "
T 288
pH(1)(2) − AASHTO " " " " "
T 289
Sulfate − AASHTO " " " " "
content(1)(3) T 290
Chloride − AASHTO " " " " "
content(1)(3) T 291
Production
Select Measured Moisture- − AASHTO 1 per Source of Yes Before −
granular and density T 99, soil type material using
backfill tested for Method C(4) in work
(704.08) conformance Density − AASHTO 2 per In-place No Before −
(106.04) T 310 or lift placing
other approved next layer
procedures
(1) Required for MSE walls with metallic reinforcements.
(2) Required for MSE walls with geosynthetic reinforcements.
(3) Tests for sulfate and chloride content are not required when resistivity is greater than 5000 ohm centimeters.
(4) Minimum of 5 points per proctor.

Section 255 – Mechanically Stablized Earth Walls 176

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 256. — PERMANENT GROUND ANCHORS

Description

256.01 This work consists of furnishing and installing permanent ground anchors.

Material

256.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Anchor tendons 722.02

Neat hydraulic cement grout 725.13(a)(1)

Construction Requirements

256.03 Qualifications. Provide a professional engineer, on-site supervisor, and installation personnel
with experience installing and testing permanent ground anchors. Submit the following for approval
at least 30 days before starting work:

(a) Names of personnel; and

(b) A résumé for each individual describing their experience on at least 5 ground anchor projects
of similar complexity over the past 5 years. Include project names, locations and contact
information for project owners.

256.04 Submittal. At least 30 days before starting ground anchor work, submit the following
according to Subsection 104.03:

(a) Start date;

(b) Method of excavation to ensure slope stability;

(c) Ground anchor construction sequence;

(d) Ground anchor types, sizes, spacings, depths, installation angles, bond zone lengths, and
ultimate tendon strengths for the range of material to be encountered;

(e) Tendons, couplers, bearing plates, facing items, and additional hardware with manufacturer data
sheets, specifications, catalog cuts, and mill certificates;

(f) Manufacturer recommendations for tendon and hardware storage, handling, assembly, and
working temperature ranges;

(g) Grout type, mix design, mixing equipment, placement procedures, and 7-day grout compressive
strength test results;

(h) Procedures and material for repairing corrosion protection coatings in the field;

(i) Drilling methods and equipment;

Section 256 – Permanent Ground Anchors 177

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(j) Drill hole diameters to achieve the specified pullout resistance;

(k) Alternative drilling and grouting methods such as grout additives;

(l) Additional material needed to achieve required bond capacities such as grout socks;

(m) Methods to ensure borehole stability during excavation and grout placement;

(n) Ground anchor testing methods and equipment including type and capacity of reaction load
system, drawings, supporting calculations for structural components of the ground anchor load test
apparatus, and calculations for soil bearing and settlement below the reaction frame; and

(o) Identification number and calibration test certification for each jack, pressure gauge, and
electronic load cell. Clearly indicate the serial number of each component of the testing assembly
on calibration graphs. Submit results from calibration tests conducted by an independent testing
laboratory within the previous 60 days.

Begin construction only after the submittals have been approved. Obtain approval from the Engineer
before modifying the approved submittal.

256.05 Tendon Fabrication.

(a) General. Size tendons to ensure:

(1) The design load does not exceed 60 percent of the minimum ultimate tensile strength of
the tendon; and
(2) The maximum test load does not exceed 80 percent of the minimum ultimate tensile
strength of the tendon.
(b) Bond length. Determine the bond length necessary to develop the design load shown in the
drawings. Use a minimum bond length of 3 meters in rock and 4.5 meters in soil. Provide corrosion
protection of the tendon bond length with a cement grout cover.

Where encapsulation of the tendon is required, protect the tendon bond length from corrosion by
encapsulating it in a grout-filled corrugated plastic or deformed steel tube or by coating it with
fusion-bonded epoxy. Place the grout inside the tube either before or after the tendon is placed in
the drill hole. Centralize the tendon within the tube with a minimum 3-millimeter grout cover.

(c) Centralizers. Use spacers along the tendon bond length of a multi-element tendon to separate
each of the individual elements of the tendon. Use centralizers to ensure at least ½ inch
(13 millimeters) of grout cover over the tendon bond length or tendon bond length encapsulation as
appropriate. Use centralizers that do not impede the free flow of grout up the bore hole. Position
centralizers within 1.5 meters from the top of the tendon bond length, within 300 millimeters from
the bottom of the tendon bond length, and so their center-to-center spacing does not exceed 3
meters.

Centralizers are not required on hollow-stem-augured tendons if the ground anchor is grouted
through the auger and the hole is maintained full of a stiff grout during extraction of the auger. A
grout is considered "stiff" if its slump is less than 230 millimeters.

Section 256 – Permanent Ground Anchors 178

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(d) Unbonded length. Provide minimum unbonded length of 3 meters for steel bars and 4.5 meters
for steel strands.

(1) If the entire drill hole is grouted in one operation, provide corrosion protection of the
unbonded length with a sheath completely filled with corrosion-inhibiting grease or grout, or
a heat-shrinkable tube internally coated with an elastic adhesive.
If grease is used under the sheath, completely coat the unbonded tendon length, fill spaces
between individual elements of multi-element tendon with grease, and provide measures to
prevent grease from escaping at the ends of the sheath.
If the sheath is grout filled, provide a separate bond-breaker along the unbonded length of the
tendon.
(2) If a grease-filled sheath corrosion protection is provided and the drill hole above the bond
length is grouted after the ground anchor is locked off, grout the tendon inside a second
sheath.
Where restressable ground anchors are used, provide restressable anchorage compatible with the
post-tensioning system provided.

If multi-element tendons are used, properly seat the wedges as recommended by the manufacturer
for the post-tensioning system provided.
(e) Bearing plates. Size the bearing plates to ensure:

(1) The bending stresses in the plate do not exceed the yield strength of the steel when a load
equal to 95 percent of the minimum specified ultimate tensile strength of the tendon is
applied; and
(2) The average bearing stress of the bearing plate does not exceed that recommended in the
PTI, Guide Specification for Post-Tensioning Materials.
Weld trumpet to bearing plate. Make the inside diameter of the trumpet equal to or larger than the
hole in the bearing plate. Make the trumpet long enough to accommodate movements during
stressing and testing. For multiple or single element tendons with encapsulation over the
unbounded length, make the trumpet at least 600 millimeters beyond the structural fascia and soil
backslope interface to allow a transition from the unbounded length to the anchorhead without
damaging encapsulation. Fill the trumpet of restressable ground anchors with corrosion-inhibiting
grease. Provide a permanent Buna-N synthetic rubber seal or an approved equal between the
trumpet and the unbonded length corrosion protection.

Fill the trumpets of non-restressable ground anchors with grout. Provide a 300-millimeter
minimum tightly-fitting temporary seal between the trumpet and the unbonded length corrosion
protection.

256.06 Handling and Storing. Handle and store tendons in a manner to avoid damage or corrosion.
Replace tendons exhibiting abrasions, cuts, welds, weld splatter, corrosion, or pitting. Repair or replace
tendons exhibiting damage to encapsulation or sheathing. Degrease the bond length of tendons and
remove solvent residue before installation.

Section 256 – Permanent Ground Anchors 179

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

256.07 Installation.

(a) Drilling. Drill ground anchor holes within 300 millimeters of the required location. Drill the
longitudinal axis of the drill hole parallel to the longitudinal axis of the tendon. Install the ground
anchor within 3 degrees of the required inclination from horizontal. Install the ground anchor with
a horizontal angle within 3 degrees of a line drawn perpendicular to the plane of the structure. Do
not extend ground anchors beyond the right-of-way or easement limits.

Insert the tendon in the drill hole to the required depth without driving or forcing. Where the tendon
cannot be completely inserted, remove the tendon, and clean or redrill the hole to permit insertion.

(b) Grouting.

(1) Equipment. Use a positive displacement grout pump equipped with a pressure gage
capable of measuring pressures of at least 1 megapascal or twice the required grout pressure,
whichever is greater. Provide a secondary pressure capability of at least 7 megapascal to clean
out grout or dirt blockages in hoses, tremie tubes, or casings. Use a high speed, high shear grout
mixer with a minimum operating speed of 1,500 revolutions per minute to produce a well-
mixed grout that is free of lumps or other indications of prior cement hydration. Furnish
holding tanks with a variable speed high-efficiency paddle that maintains a thoroughly mixed
grout for pumping.
(2) Procedures. Grout tendons into drill holes using either a neat cement grout or a
sand/cement grout placed in one continuous operation. Inject the grout from the lowest point of
the drill hole. The grout may be placed either before or after insertion of the tendon. Record the
quantity of the grout and the grout pressure for each ground anchor. Control the grout pressures
to avoid excessive heaving or fracturing.
Except as indicated below, the grout above the top of the bond length may be placed at the
same time as the bond length grout, but do not placed it under pressure. Do not place grout at
the top of the drill hole in contact with the back of the structure or the bottom of the trumpet.
If the ground anchor is installed in a fine-grained soil using drill holes larger than 150
millimeters in diameter, place the grout above the top of the bond length after the ground
anchor has been tested and stressed. The entire drill hole may be grouted at one time if it can be
demonstrated that the ground anchor does not derive a significant portion of its load-carrying
capacity from the soil above the bond length.
Use pressure grouting for grout protected tendons anchored in rock. After sealing the drill hole,
pressure inject grout until a 0.3-megapascal grout pressure at the top of the drill hole is
maintained for 5 minutes.
(c) Finishing. After grouting is complete, fill the grout tube with grout if it will remain in the hole.
Wait at least 3 days before loading the tendon.

Extend the corrosion protection surrounding the unbonded length up beyond the bottom seal of the
trumpet or 300 millimeters into the trumpet if no trumpet seal is provided.

Trim the corrosion protection surrounding the tendon so it does not contact the bearing plate of the
anchorhead during testing and stressing.

Section 256 – Permanent Ground Anchors 180

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Place the bearing plate and anchorhead so the axis of the tendon is within 3 degrees of
perpendicular to the bearing plate and the axis of the tendon passes through the center of the
bearing plate without bending the tendon.

If grout protected tendons or fusion-bonded epoxy encapsulations are used, electronically isolate
the bearing plate, anchorhead, and trumpet from the surrounding concrete, soldier pile, or metallic
element embedded in the structure.

Place trumpet grease any time during construction. Place trumpet grout after the ground anchor has
been tested and stressed.

Completely cover anchorages permanently exposed to the atmosphere with a corrosion-inhibiting

grease or grout.

Inspect the trumpet and anchorage grout levels 24 hours after initial grout placement. If needed, re-
fill the trumpet or anchorage with grout.

256.08 Testing and Stressing.

(a) Testing equipment. Conform to the following:

(1) Dial gauges. Use two dial gauges capable of measuring to 0.025 millimeters and with
sufficient travel to measure the theoretical elastic elongation of the total length at the
maximum test load without resetting, accounting for elongation in both the bonded and
unbonded zones. Align the gauges parallel to the axis of the anchor or pile and support the
gauges independently from the hydraulic jack, ground anchor, or reaction frame.
(2) Hydraulic jack, pressure gauge and load cell. Apply test loads with a hydraulic jack
and measure with a calibrated pressure gauge and electronic load cell. Use a hydraulic jack
and pressure gauge with a pressure range not exceeding twice the anticipated maximum test
pressure and calibrated as a unit by an independent firm within 45 days of the start of work.
Use a pressure gauge graduated in 1-megapascal increments or less. Use a jack with ram
travel sufficient to allow testing without resetting.
(3) Reference gauge. Have the reference gauge calibrated with the test jack and pressure
gauge. Keep the reference gauge at the project site.
(4) Reaction frame. Provide a reaction frame designed by a registered professional engineer to
meet the requirements of the site, resist the maximum test loads and prevent excessive
deformation of the bearing surface.

(b) Stressing. Place testing equipment over the ground anchor tendon to ensure the jack, bearing
plates, load cells, and stressing assembly are axially aligned with the tendon and the tendon is
centered within the equipment. Do not apply loads greater than 80 percent of the minimum ultimate
tensile strength of the tendon.

Place the reference pressure gauge in series with the pressure gauge, jack, and load cell so they
need not be unloaded and repositioned during a test. Raise the load from one increment to another.
Hold the load just long enough to measure and record the ground anchor movement to the nearest
0.025 millimeters with respect to an independent fixed reference point. Repump the jack as
necessary to maintain a constant load. Monitor the load with a pressure gauge. If the load measured

Section 256 – Permanent Ground Anchors 181

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

by the pressure gauge and the load measured by the reference pressure gauge differ by more than
10 percent, recalibrate the jack, pressure gauge, and reference pressure gauge.

(1) Performance tests. The Engineer will designate locations for sacrificial ground anchors for
performance tests. Test according to Tables 256-1 and 256-3.
Table 256.1
Performance Test Load Sequence
Test Test Load Increment
Sequence 1.33D Reduce to
AL 0.25D 0.50D 0.75D 1.00D 1.20D (Load-Hold Test) Lock-Off
Load
1 • •
2 • • •
3 • • • •
4 • • • • •
5 • • • • • •
6 • • • • • • 10 minutes* •
AL = Alignment load (no greater than 5 percent of D (0.05 D) applied to the ground anchor before setting the
movement recording devices. Zero dial gauges after the first setting of A).
D = Design load.
* Hold the load to within 2 percent and measure and record the ground anchor movement during the load-hold
test at 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 10 minutes. When the ground anchor movement between 1 minute and 10 minutes
exceeds 1 millimeter, maintain the maximum test load an additional 50 minutes and record the movement at 20,
30, 40, 50, and 60 minutes.

(2) Proof tests. Test according to Tables 256-2 and 256-3.

Table 256.2
Proof Test Load Sequence
Test Load Increment
1.33D Reduce to
AL 0.25D 0.50D 0.75D 1.00D 1.20D (Load-Hold Test) Lock-Off
Load
• • • • • • 10 minutes* •
AL = Alignment load. See alignment load note in Table 256.1.
D = Design load.
* Hold the load to within 2 percent and measure and record the ground anchor movement during the
load-hold test at 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 10 minutes. When the ground anchor movement between 1 minute
and 10 minutes exceeds 1 millimeter, maintain the maximum test load an additional 50 minutes,
recording movement at 20, 30, 40, 50, and 60 minutes.

(c) Lock off. Reduce the load to the specified lock-off load and transfer the load to the anchorage
device. After transferring the load and before removing the jack, measure the lift-off load. If the
load is not within 10 percent of the specified lock-off load, reset the anchorage and remeasure the
lift-off load. Repeat as necessary.

256.09 Test Results and Reporting. Plot the ground anchor movement versus the maximum load for
each test sequence in Tables 256-1 and 256-2, and plot the residual movement of the tendon at each
alignment load versus the highest previously applied load.

Section 256 – Permanent Ground Anchors 182

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Provide preliminary results to the Engineer for each ground anchor tested before testing personnel
leave the site. Submit detailed verification and proof test load and deflection data in a tabular format.
Submit a graph that plots total ground anchor head movement versus load, the A-line, and the B-line.
The A-line is defined as 0.8 multiplied by the theoretical free test length elastic elongation. The B-line
is defined as the theoretical free test length elastic elongation plus 0.50 multiplied by the theoretical
bonded length elastic elongation. Allow 5 days for the Engineer to conduct a review of the data and
approve ground anchor installation.

256.10 Acceptance. See Table 256.3 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Material for ground anchors will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03. Submit a
production certification for the ground anchor material.

Construction of ground anchors will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Installed ground anchors will be evaluated based on one of the following performance or proof test
results:

(a) After a 10-minute hold, the ground anchor carries the maximum test load with less than 1
millimeter of movement between 1 and 10 minutes and the total movement at the maximum test
load exceeds 80 percent of the theoretical elastic elongation of the unbonded length.

(b) After a 60-minute hold, which is only conducted after 10-minute hold test fails, the ground
anchor carries the maximum test load with a movement rate that does not exceed 2 millimeters per
log cycle of time and the total movement at the maximum test load exceeds 80 percent of the
theoretical elastic elongation of the unbonded length.

Replace ground anchors with unacceptable performance or proof test results. Do not retest failed
ground anchors.

Measurement

256.11 Measure the Section 256 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Measure performance tests that indicate acceptable installations.

Payment

256.12 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 256 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 256 – Permanent Ground Anchors 183

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 256.3
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Material Source
Aggregate Measured and Quality – AASHTO 1 per Source of Yes Before –
quality tested for M6 material material producing
(fine) conformance type
(703.01) (106.04)
Mix Design
Neat Measured and Flow – ASTM 1 per " Yes, when " –
hydraulic tested for C939 mix design requested
cement conformance 7-day – AASHTO " " " " –
grout (1) (106.04) compressive T 106
(725.13(a)(1)) strength ASTM C942
Production
Performance Measured and Deformation – Subsection 5 percent Installation No 5 days –
test ground tested for 256.08(b)(1) or 3 min
anchor conformance
(106.04)
Proof test " " – Subsection Each " " " –
ground anchor 256.08(b)(2) anchor
(1) Prepare and test grout cube specimens according to ASTM C942. Make grout cubes for testing from random batches of grout as directed. Normally, strength
testing for permanent ground anchors will not be required as system performance will be measured by load holding each anchor. Grout cube testing will be
required if admixtures are used or irregularities occur in anchor testing.

Section 256 – Permanent Ground Anchors 184

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 257. — CONTRACTOR DESIGNED

RETAINING WALLS

Description

257.01 This work consists of designing various types of retaining walls. Wall types include gabion,
mechanically-stabilized earth, permanent ground anchor, reinforced concrete, soil nail, reinforced soil
slopes, micropiles, and other wall systems.

Material

257.02 Conform to the following Sections:

Driven piles 551

Gabions 253
Mechanically-stabilized earth walls 255
Micropiles 567
Permanent ground anchors 256
Reinforced concrete retaining walls 258
Reinforced soil slopes 261
Reinforcing steel 554
Soil nail retaining walls 259
Structural concrete 552

Construction Requirements

257.03 General. The designer/supplier furnishing the proposed retaining wall is responsible for the
stability of the structure. Do not qualify the responsibility for the design or restrict the use of the
drawings or calculations for the proposed alternate. Indemnify the Government from claims for
infringement of proprietary rights by others without the consent of the patent holders or licensees.

Verify the limits of structure installation.

Arrange and conduct a pre-design conference following selection of the structure designer/supplier and
before design work commences to discuss structure selection, constructability, and design parameters,
methods and limitations. Include the Engineer, subcontractors, supplier, and the supplier’s design
engineer.

257.04 Submittals. At least 90 days before starting construction, submit the following according to
Subsection 104.03:

(a) Plan and elevation drawings for each structure containing the following:

(1) A plan view of the structure showing:

(a) Horizontal offset from the construction centerline to the face of the structure at
defining points along the base, including start and end stations;
(b) Location, length, coverage ratio, and type of reinforcement/anchorage, as applicable
(such as strip, mesh, grid, geosynthetic fabric, anchor);

Section 257 – Contractor Designed Retaining Walls 185

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(c) Centerline and size of drainage structure or drainage pipe behind, passing through, or
passing under the structure; and
(d) Location, length and offset from the face of wall to guardrail or guardwall features or
parapet structures.
(2) An elevation view of the structure showing:
(a) Elevation and station at horizontal and vertical break points and at least every 15
meters along the top of the structure at the face;
(b) Elevation and station at the top of leveling pads and footings, at the top and tip of
piling, and at least every 15 meters along the structure base;
(c) Length and type of reinforcement, anchorage, structure module, and lagging;
(d) Distance and elevation along the structure face to all steps in the base, footings,
leveling pads, or lagging;
(e) Distance along the structure face to where changes in reinforcement or anchor lengths
occur;
(f) Construction joints; and
(g) Original and final ground line.
(3) A typical cross section view showing:
(a) Type and depth of facing elements and structural connections to reinforcing and
anchorage elements;
(b) Structure batter or face slope;
(c) Length, spacing, and type of reinforcement, anchorage, structure module and
corresponding limits of excavation and reinforced fill placement zones;
(d) Location of guardrail or guardwall features or parapet structures, including
embedment depths, offset from structure facing and connection details with structure
reinforcement/anchorage;
(e) Original and final ground line, including right-of-way limits; and
(f) Estimated or known location of subsurface soil and rock units.
(4) General construction notes.
(5) Horizontal and vertical curve data affecting the structure, including match lines or other
details to relate structure stationing to centerline stationing.
(6) Material list and summary of quantities. Include the gradation for facing rock. Facing rock
should be sufficiently sized to prevent migration of the rock through the facing basket for the
chosen wall system.
(b) Dimensions and schedules of reinforcing steel including reinforcing bar bending details,
dowels, studs, or both for attaching the facing.

(c) Details and dimensions for foundations and leveling pads including steps in the footings or
leveling pads.

Section 257 – Contractor Designed Retaining Walls 186

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(d) Details and dimensions for:

(1) Panels, modules, soldier piles, and lagging necessary to construct the structure;
(2) Reinforcing steel in structural elements;
(3) Details of proposed splices in reinforcements;
(4) Location of mesh, strip attachment, or anchor devices embedded in facing panels; and
(5) Anchors and soldier piling including the spacing and size of piles and the spacing and
angle of anchors.
(e) Details for the installation of structure drainage features, including strip, sheet, edge, blanket
and underdrain systems and associated piping;

(f) Details for constructing structures around drainage features, utilities, lighting foundations, traffic
barriers, and other obstructions.

(g) Details for terminating structures and adjacent slope construction.

(h) Architectural treatment details.

(i) Design notes including a description of any symbols, terminology and computer programs used
in the design of the structure. Specify the bearing pressure beneath the structure footing, stabilized
earth mass, or soldier piles.

(j) Verification of design criteria and soil, rock and reinforcement parameters for each structure.
Include results from creep, durability, construction induced damage, and junction strength tests, as
applicable.

(k) Design calculations, including assessment of temporary excavation stability and internal and
external stability of earth retaining structures. Include joint, splice, facing connection capacity
calculations, and geotechnical testing/report..

Include a checklist showing each of the items specified in these requirements have been addressed in
the design. Submit 3 sets of drawings with the initial submission. One set will be returned with
corrections if necessary. If revisions are required, make corrections and resubmit 3 revised sets.

Begin construction only after the submittals have been approved. Obtain approval from the Engineer
before modifying the approved submittal.

257.05 Design and Construction. Design and construct the wall according to the approved drawings
and the following Sections, as applicable:

(a) Gabions. See Section 253.

(b) Mechanically-stabilized earth walls. See Section 255.

(c) Permanent ground anchor walls. See Sections 256, 551, and 552.

(d) Reinforced concrete retaining walls. See Section 258.

Section 257 – Contractor Designed Retaining Walls 187

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(e) Soil nail retaining walls. See Section 259.

(f) Reinforced soil slopes. See Section 261.

(g) Micropiles. See Section 567.

Update drawings when plan dimensions are revised due to field conditions or for other reasons.

257.06 Acceptance. Design of the retaining walls will be evaluated under Subsection 106.02 and the
applicable Sections listed in Subsection 257.05.

Measurement

257.07 Measure the Section 257 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

257.08 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 257 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Progress payments for Contractor designed retaining walls will be paid as follows:

(a) 50 percent of the pay item amount will be paid when the design submittal is approved.

(b) An additional 25 percent of the pay item amount will be paid when 50 percent of the retaining
wall construction is complete.

(c) Payment of the remaining portion of the pay item amount will be paid when 100 percent of the
retaining wall construction is complete.

Section 257 – Contractor Designed Retaining Walls 188

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 258. — REINFORCED CONCRETE RETAINING WALLS

Description

258.01 This work consists of constructing reinforced concrete retaining walls.

Material

258.02 Conform to the following Sections and Subsections:

Forms and falsework 562

Reinforcing steel 709.01
Sealants, fillers, and seals 712.01
Structural backfill 704.04
Structural concrete 552

Construction Requirements

258.03 General. See Section 257 for Contractor-designed reinforced concrete walls.

Verify the limits of the wall installation. Prepare and submit forms, falsework drawings, and drainage
provisions according to Section 562.

Perform the work under Section 209.

After excavation is complete, request approval as to the character and suitability of the foundation
material. Allow the Engineer 24 hours to review and approve the foundation before constructing the
footing.

258.04 Reinforcing Steel. Submit order lists and bending diagrams according to Subsections 104.03
and 554.03. Fabricate reinforcing steel according to Subsection 554.05. Ship and protect material
according to Subsections 554.04, 554.06, and 554.07. Place, fasten, and splice reinforcing steel
according to Subsections 554.07, 554.08, and 554.09.

258.05 Structural Concrete. Design concrete mixture according to Subsection 552.03. Store, handle,
batch, and mix material and deliver concrete according to Subsections 552.04 through 552.08. Provide
quality control according to Section 153 and Subsection 552.09. Construct wall according to
Subsections 552.10 through 552.16.

258.06 Backfilling. Backfill the area behind the wall with structural backfill according to Subsection
209.09. Compact each layer according to Subsection 209.10 except use an approved lightweight
mechanical or vibratory compactor within 900 millimeters of the wall.

Do not place structural backfill against concrete until 80 percent of the design strength is achieved.

258.07 Acceptance. Reinforced concrete retaining wall material, and construction will be evaluated as
follows:

Forms and falsework drawings will be evaluated under Section 562.

Section 258 – Reinforced Concrete Retaining Walls 189

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Structure excavation and backfill will be evaluated under Section 209.

Concrete will be evaluated under Section 552.

Reinforcing steel will be evaluated under Section 554.

Material for joint fillers, sealants, tie bars, dowel bars, and hook bolts will be evaluated under
Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Measurement

258.08 Measure the Section 258 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring retaining walls by the square meter, measure by the front face of wall excluding
footings.

Measure foundation fill under Section 208.

Payment

258.09 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement adjusted
according to Subsection 106.05 for the Section 258 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will
be full compensation for the work prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Payment for reinforced concrete retaining wall will be made at a price determined by multiplying the
contract price by the material pay factor. The material pay factor is calculated as follows:

PFa = 1 - 0.5 (1-PF)

where:
PF = Pay factor for concrete as determined under Section 552.

Section 258 – Reinforced Concrete Retaining Walls 190

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 259. — SOIL NAIL RETAINING WALLS

Description

259.01 This work consists of constructing soil nail retaining walls.

Material

259.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsections:

Bolts and nuts 717.01(d)

Centralizers and spacers 722.02(e)
Geocomposite drain 714.02
Neat hydraulic cement grout 725.13(a)(1)
Shotcrete 566
Soil nails 722.04
Structural backfill 704.04
Structural carbon steel (bearing plates) 717.01(a)
Welded stud sheer connectors 717.05

Construction Requirements

259.03 Qualifications. Provide a professional engineer, on-site supervisors, and installation

personnel with experience installing and testing soil nails. Submit the following for approval at least
30 days before starting work:

(a) Names of personnel; and

(b) A résumé for each individual describing their experience on at least 5 soil nail retaining wall
projects of similar complexity over the past 5 years. Include project names, locations and contact
information for project owners.

259.04 Submittal. At least 30 days before starting soil nail retaining wall work, submit the following
according to Subsection 104.03:

(a) Start date;

(b) Method of excavation to ensure wall and slope stability;

(c) Retaining wall construction sequence.

(d) Soil nail types, sizes, spacings, depths, and installation angles, bond zone lengths, and ultimate
tendon strengths for the range of material to be encountered;

(e) Tendons, couplers, bearing plates, facing items, and additional hardware with manufacturer data
sheets, specifications, catalog cuts, and mill certificates.

(f) Manufacturer recommendations for tendon and hardware storage, handling, assembly, and
working temperature ranges;

Section 259 – Soil Nail Retaining Walls 191

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(g) Grout type, mix design, mixing equipment, placement procedures, and 3-day and 28-day grout
compressive strength test results;

(h) Procedures and material for repairing corrosion protection coatings in the field and for applying
epoxy finish coatings on end hardware;

(i) Drilling methods and equipment;

(j). Drill hole diameter to achieve the specified pullout resistance;

(k) Alternative drilling and grouting methods such as grout additives;

(l) Additional material needed to achieve required bond capacities such as grout socks;

(m) Methods to ensure borehole stability during excavation and grout placement;

(n) Soil nail testing methods and equipment including type and capacity of reaction load system,
drawings, supporting calculations for structural components of the soil nail load test apparatus; and

(o) Identification number and calibration test certification for each jack, pressure gauge, and
electronic load cell. Clearly indicate the serial number of each component of the testing assembly
on calibration graphs. Submit results from calibration tests conducted by an independent testing
laboratory within the previous 60 days.

Begin construction only after the submittals have been approved. Obtain approval from the Engineer
before modifying the approved submittal.

259.05 General. See Section 257 for Contractor-designed soil nail retaining walls. Verify the limits of
the wall installation.

Clear the work area of vegetation and obstructions according to Sections 201 and 203. Excavate
according to Section 204.

Excavate for the wall in staged lifts concurrent with soil nail installation and shotcrete placement. Do
not allow the exposed unsupported final excavation face cut height to exceed the vertical soil nail
spacing plus the required reinforcing lap or the short-term stand-up height of the ground, whichever is
less. Do not excavate to the next lower lift until soil nail installation, reinforced shotcrete placement,
attachment of bearing plates and nuts, and soil nail testing have been completed and accepted for the
current lift. Cure grout and shotcrete at least 72 hours, or attain the specified 3 day compressive
strength before excavating the next underlying lift. Application of the shotcrete may be delayed up to
24 hours if it can be demonstrated the delay will not adversely affect the excavation face stability.

259.06 Tendon Fabrication. Provide tendons designed to carry loads consistent with the approved
design. Thread tendon ends so they are capable of withstanding the approved test loads in addition to
accommodating the attachment of the bearing plate, beveled washer, nut or other appurtenances as
required by the manufacturer’s specifications and the contract.

Section 259 – Soil Nail Retaining Walls 192

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Limit coupling of tendons to two per installation. Use couplers manufactured with a center stop to
ensure equal length of thread connects each section. Do not use couplers that interfere with the flow of
grout. Protect couplings from corrosion using the same corrosion protection used on the soil nail
tendon assembly. Use centralizers to position the tendon within 25 millimeters of the center of the drill
hole. Use centralizers that do not impede the free flow of grout into the drill hole. Position centralizers
within 600 millimeters from the top and bottom of the tendon and so their center-to-center spacing
does not exceed 3 meters. Secure centralizers to the tendon to prevent shift during handling or inserting
into the drill hole.

259.07 Handling and Storing. See Subsection 256.06.

259.08 Installation.

(a) Drilling. Drill soil nail holes at the required locations and orientations. Use drilling equipment
and methods suitable for the ground conditions. Do not use water, drilling slurry, or other fluids for
drilling or removing cuttings.

Insert the soil nail tendon into the hole. Clean or re-drill drill holes where the tendon with
centralizers cannot be completely inserted without forcing or driving.

(b) Grouting. Use a positive displacement grout pump according to Subsection 256.07(b) (1).

Grout tendons into drill holes using a neat hydraulic cement grout. Mix grout as recommended by
the cement supplier at the specified water-to-cement ratio. Inject grout within 45 minutes of
adding the cement to the water or within 15 minutes after mixing when the ambient temperature
is 32°C or higher. Do not allow grout to exceed 32 °C.

Grout the drill hole within 2 hours of completing drilling.

Inject the grout at the lowest point of each drill hole. Place primary and secondary grout stages in
one continuous operations. Keep the outlet end of the grout tube below the surface of the grout as
the tube is withdrawn to prevent voids. Control grout pressures to avoid ground heaving or
fracturing. Record the quantity of injected grout and the grout pressure for each soil nail
installation. After grouting is complete, fill the grout tube with grout if it will remain in the hole.

Maintain the temporary unbonded length of proof test soil nails open for later grouting. If the
unbonded test length of production proof test soil nails cannot be satisfactorily grouted after testing,
install a new soil nail in its place.

Request approval for alternate soil nail installation methods, including grout socks, grout
admixtures, or both when conditions prove necessary. Provide the Engineer with an on-site
demonstration as part of the request.

259.09 Testing and Stressing.

(a) Testing equipment. See Subsection 256.08(a).

Section 259 – Soil Nail Retaining Walls 193

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Stressing. Place stressing equipment over the soil nail so that the jack, bearing plates, load
cells, and stressing assembly are axially aligned with the tendon and the tendon is centered within
the equipment. Do not apply loads greater than 80 percent of the minimum guaranteed ultimate
tensile strength of the tendon for grade 150 bars or 90 percent of the minimum guaranteed ultimate
tensile strength of the tendon for grade 60 or 75 bars. Do not test soil nails until the soil nail grout
and shotcrete facing have cured for at least 72 hours and attained the specified 3-day compressive
strength.

Place the reference pressure gauge in series with the pressure gauge and jack so they need not be
unloaded and repositioned during a test. Raise the load from one increment to another. Hold the
load for the required time beginning immediately after the load is applied and record the soil nail
head movement to the nearest 0.025 millimeters with respect to an independent fixed reference
point. Repump the jack as necessary to maintain a constant load. Monitor the load with a pressure
gauge. If the load measured by the pressure gauge and the load measured by the reference pressure
gauge differ by more than 10 percent, recalibrate the jack, pressure gauge, and reference pressure
gauge.

(1) Verification test. The Engineer will designate locations for sacrificial soil nails for
verification tests.
Provide verification test soil nails with a minimum unbonded length of 0.9 meters and a
minimum bonded length of 3 meters.
Use the following formula to determine the maximum bonded length:
Cf y As
LBV max =
2Qd
where:
LBVmax = Maximum verification test soil nail bonded length (meters)
C = 0.9 for grades 420 and 520 bars and 0.8 for grade1035 bars
fy = Bar yield or ultimate stress (kilonewtons per square meter)
As = Bar steel area (square meters)
Qd = Allowable pullout resistance (kilonewtons per meter)

Determine the design test load by the following equation:

DTL = LBV × Qd
where:
DTL = Design test load (kilonewtons)
LBV = Bonded test length (meters) as determined from test residual elongation
Qd = Allowable pullout resistance (kilonewtons per meter)

Section 259 – Soil Nail Retaining Walls 194

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Provide a larger bar size if necessary for safety and test according to Tables 259-1 and 259-7.
Table 259.1
Verification Test Load Schedule
Hold Time
Test Load Increment
(minutes)
AL 1
0.25DTL 10
0.50DTL 10
0.75DTL 10
1.00DTL 10
1.25DTL 10
1.50DTL (Load-hold test) 60*
1.75DTL 10
2.00DTL (Maximum acceptance load) 10
2.50DTL or failure 10
3.0 DTL or failure 10
AL 1
AL = Alignment load (no greater than 5 percent of DTL (0.05 DTL) applied to the
soil nail before setting the movement recording devices. Zero dial gauges after the
first setting of AL).
DTL = Design test load.
* Hold the load to within 2 percent and measure and record soil nail movement at
1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 10, 20, 30, 50, and 60 minutes.

A verification test is acceptable based on the criteria in Table 259.2.

Table 259.2
Verification Test Soil Nail Acceptance Criteria
Total Load-Test Total Movement Pullout
Hold Movement at Failure(1)
Maximum Load
<2 millimeters A-line criteria: Greater than 80% of the No pull-out
between apparent elastic elongation of the test soil at
6 and 60 minutes nail unbonded length. 2.00 DTL
B-line criteria: Less than the apparent elastic
elongation of the test soil nail unbonded
length and half of the bond length.

(1) Pullout failure is the inability to further increase the test load while there is continued pullout
movement of the test soil nail. Record the pullout failure load as part of the test data.

Provide the Engineer a written report confirming soil nail geometry, construction, testing
details, and verification test results. The test results must be reviewed and approved by the
Engineer before installing production soil nails.
If the soil nail verification is unacceptable, establish the cause and make design or construction
modifications. Submit modifications requiring changes to the structure and retest the new
system as directed by the Engineer.

Section 259 – Soil Nail Retaining Walls 195

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(2) Proof tests. The Engineer will designate production soil nails for proof testing.
Provide production proof test soil nails with a minimum temporary unbonded length of 0.9
meters and a minimum bonded length of 3 meters.
Use the following formula to determine the maximum bonded length:
Cf y As
LBP max =
1.5Qd
where:
LBPmax = Maximum proof test soil nail bonded length (meters)
C = 0.9 for Grade 420 and 520 bars and 0.8 for grade 1035 bars
fy = Bar yield or ultimate stress (kilonewton per square meter)
As = Bar steel area (square meters)
Qd = Allowable pullout resistance (kilonewtons per meter)
Determine the design test load by the following equation:
DTL = LBP × Qd
where:
DTL = Design test load (kilonewtons)
LBP = Bonded test length (meters) as determined by
test residual elongation
Qd = Allowable pullout resistance (kilonewtons per meter)

Test according to Tables 259-3 and 259-7.

Table 259.3
Proof Test Load Schedule
Hold Time
Test Load Increment
(minutes)
AL Until stable
0.25DTL "
0.50DTL "
0.75DTL "
1.00DTL "
1.25DTL "
1.50DTL (Maximum acceptance load) 60*
AL 1
AL = See alignment load note in Table 259.1.
DTL = Design test load. For load and resistance factor design, DTL = Nominal load × φ
(resistance factor) / γ (load factor).
* Hold the load to within 2 percent and measure and record soil nail movement at 1, 2, 3, 5,
6, and 10 minutes. If the soil nail movement between 1 and 10 minutes exceeds 1 millimeter,
continue measuring and recording soil nail movement at 20, 30, 50, and 60 minutes.

Section 259 – Soil Nail Retaining Walls 196

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(c) Test results and reporting. Provide preliminary results to the Engineer for each soil nail tested
before testing personnel leave the site. Submit detailed verification and proof test load and
deflection data in a tabular format. Submit a graph that plots total soil nail movement versus load,
the A-line, and the B-line. The A−line is defined as 0.8 multiplied by the theoretical free test length
elastic elongation. The B-line is defined as the theoretical free test length elastic elongation plus
0.50 multiplied by the theoretical bond length elastic elongation. Allow 5 days for the Engineer to
conduct a review of the data and approve ground anchor installation.

259.10 Wall Drainage Network. Install required elements of the wall drainage network, such as
geocomposite sheet drain, PVC connector pipes, and weep holes before shotcreting each lift.

Center geocomposite sheet drains between soil nail columns with the geotextile (filter) side against the
ground. Add additional sheet drain at wet locations and as requested by the Engineer. Secure sheet
drains to the excavated face to prevent shotcrete from contaminating the ground side of the geotextile.
Construct sheet drain splices according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Install foot drains at the bottom of the wall according to Section 605.

259.11 Wall Construction. Place welded wire steel mesh and reinforcing steel according to Section
554.

Construct a shotcrete construction facing according to Section 566. Completely fill ungrouted zones of
any soil nail drill holes or other voids with shotcrete.

Attach a bearing plate and nut to each soil nail head. Uniformly seat the plate by tightening the nut with
a hand wrench while the shotcrete is still plastic. Where uniform contact between the plate and the
shotcrete cannot be provided, set the plate in a bed of grout and tighten the nut with a hand wrench
after the grout has set for 24 hours.

Construct wall elements to tolerances shown in Table 259.4.

Table 259.4
Wall Element Construction Tolerances
Wall Element Tolerance
Horizontal location of headed studs, from plan location 10 millimeters
Location of headed studs on bearing plate, from plan location 6 millimeters
Soil nail head bearing plate, deviation from parallel to wall face 10 degrees

259.12 Permanent Wall Facing. Construct the permanent wall facing according to the applicable
Section below.

(a) Shotcrete-faced walls. Construct according to Section 566 and the construction tolerances
shown in Table 259.5.

(b) Concrete-faced walls. Construct according to Section 258.

(c) Simulated stone masonry. Construct according to Section 613.

(d) Stone masonry. Construct according to Section 620.

Section 259 – Soil Nail Retaining Walls 197

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 259.5
Permanent Shotcrete Facing Construction Tolerances
Tolerance
Facing Finish
millimeter
Complete thickness of shotcrete, from plan dimension:
Troweled or screeded finish 15
Shot finish 30
Planeness of finish face, surface gap under a 3-meter
straightedge:
Troweled or screeded finish 15
Shot finish 30

259.13 Backfilling Behind Wall Facing Upper Cantilever Section. Backfill behind the upper
cantilever wall sections with structural backfill according to Subsection 209.09. Use light mechanical
tamper to compact within 1 meter behind the wall facing section.

259.14 Acceptance. See Table 259.7 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Material for the soil nails will be evaluated under Subsections 106.03 and 106.04. Submit a production
certification with each shipment of soil nails.

Construction of soil nails will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Installed soil nails will be evaluated based on the criteria in Table 259.6.

Table 259.6
Proof Soil Nail Acceptance Criteria
Total Load-Hold Total Movement Pullout
Movement at Failure(2)
Maximum Load
<1 millimeter A-line criteria: Greater than 80% of the apparent No pull-out
between elastic elongation of the test soil nail unbonded at
1 and 10 minutes length. 1.50 DTL
or
<2 millimeters B-line criteria: Less than the apparent elastic
between elongation of the test soil nail unbonded length and
6 and 60 minutes(1) half of the bond length.

(1) And the rate of movement is linear or decreasing throughout the load-hold period.
(2) Pullout failure is the inability to further increase the test load while there is continued pullout movement
of the test soil nail. Record the pullout failure load as part of the test data.

If a proof-tested soil nail is unacceptable, replace some or all of the installed production soil nails
between the unacceptable proof test soil nail and the next proof test soil nail in the row, as directed
by the Engineer. Alternatively, install additional proof test soil nails within this area to ensure that
the acceptance criteria is met within this area. Propose alternative installation and testing methods
before installing additional soil nails. When ground conditions, soil nail installation methods, or
testing procedures change, conduct additional verification testing before proceeding with production
soil nail installation.

Section 259 – Soil Nail Retaining Walls 198

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Measurement

259.15 Measure the Section 259 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring soil nail retaining walls by the square meter, measure the front wall face.

When verification test soil nails are measured by the each; do not measure failed verification test soil
nails or additional verification test soil nails installed to verify alternative soil nail installation methods
proposed by the Contractor.

When production soil nails are measured by the linear foot (meter); measure along bar centerline from
the line of the wall excavation face to the tip of the soil nail.

Payment

259.16 The accepted quantities will be paid for at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 259 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 259 – Soil Nail Retaining Walls 199

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 259.7
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Mix Design
Neat Measured and Compressive − AASHTO 1 per Source of Yes 30 −
hydraulic tested for strength(1) T 106 mix design material days
cement conformance before
grout (106.04) production
(725.13(a)(1))
Production
Verification Measured and Performance − Subsection Each Installed No 7 days −
test soil nail tested for 259.09(b)(1) soil nail
conformance
(106.04)
Proof test " " − Subsection " " " 5 days −
soil nail 259.09(b)(2)
(1) 3-day and 28-day.

Section 259 – Soil Nail Retaining Walls 200

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 260. — ROCK BOLTS AND DOWELS

Description

260.01 This work consists of furnishing and installing rock bolts and dowels.

Rock bolts are pre- or post-tensioned, fully grouted, deformed steel bars that actively reinforce a rock
mass.

Rock dowels are untensioned, fully grouted deformed steel bars that passively reinforce a rock mass.

Material

260.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsections:

Concrete 601
Nonshrink grout 725.13(b)
Polyester resin grout 725.13(d)
Reinforcing bars (dowels) 709.01(b)
Rock bolts 722.03

Construction Requirements

260.03 Qualifications. Provide a professional engineer, on-site supervisors, and installation

personnel with experience installing and testing rock bolts or dowels. Submit the following for
approval at least 30 days before starting work:

(a) Names of personnel; and

(b) A résumé for each individual describing their experience on at least 5 rock bolt or dowel
projects of similar complexity over the past 5 years. Include project names, locations and contact
information for project owners.

260.04 Submittals. At least 30 days before starting bolt or dowel installation work, submit the
following according to Subsection 104.03:

(a) Start date;

(b) Method of access, excavation, scaling and drilling;

(c) Rock bolt or dowel construction sequence;

(d) Rock bolt or dowel type, length, and diameter. If threads are cut into deformed bars, size the bar
based on the loads specified;

(e) Couplers, bearing plates, washers, and stressing anchorages with manufacturer data sheets,
specifications, catalog cuts, and mill certificates;

(f) Manufacturer recommendations for tendon and hardware storage, handling, and working
temperature ranges;

Section 260 – Rock Bolts and Dowels 201

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(g) Grout type, mix design, placement procedures, and manufacturer data sheets;

(1) Polyester resin grout.

(a) Manufacturer certification for gel time, shelf life, compressive strength, and storage and
working temperature ranges; and
(b) Number, diameter, and length of resin cartridges with bar spin speed, travel speed, and
spin time for each tendon and hole size combination;
(2) Cement grout. Mixing equipment and 3-day grout compressive strength test results.
(a) Two-stage cement grouting. Means for determining the level of primary grout in the
hole; and
(b) Single-stage cement grouting. Fabrication details for proposed bond-breaker in the free
stressing zone, when applicable.
(h) Manufacturer certification for corrosion-resistant bar coating and procedures and material for
repairing corrosion protection coatings in the field;

(i) Details for placing, stressing and testing tendons. Schedule of a test installation to demonstrate
rock bolt or dowel installation, testing equipment and procedures, and countersink finishing if
applicable.
(j) For rock bolts, a detailed procedure for placing the anchor head assembly (bearing plate and
nut) below the exposed rock surface or for removing the anchor head assembly following final
lock-off without impacting the tendon design load. Include details for a countersink and colored
grout, or epoxy patch when applicable;
(k) Methods for verifying hole diameters;
(l) Special installation methods such as upwardly inclined reinforcements, grouting across open
joints, or debris-filled discontinuities used to ensure a fully-grouted, well-protected installation
when applicable;
(m) Report documentation examples including installation and testing report formats; and

(n) Identification number and calibration test certification for each jack, pressure gauge, and
electronic load cell. Clearly indicate the serial number of each component of the testing assembly
on calibration graphs. Submit results from calibration tests conducted by an independent testing
laboratory within the previous 60 days.

Begin construction only after the submittals have been approved. Obtain approval from the Engineer
before modifying the approved submittal.

260.05 Rock Bolt Fabrication.

(a) General. Fabricate rock bolts according to PTI, Recommendations for Prestressed Rock and
Soil Anchors. Size tendons to ensure:

(1) The design load does not exceed 60 percent of minimum ultimate tensile strength of the
tendon; and

Section 260 – Rock Bolts and Dowels 202

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(2) The maximum test load does not exceed 80 percent of the minimum ultimate tensile
strength of the tendon.
(b) Couplers. Couple only fully-grouted anchors. Couple sections together only when the design
length exceeds the standard, commercially-available bar lengths. Use couplers with a center stop to
ensure equal length of thread connects each section. Do not use couplings that interfere with the
flow of grout.

(c) Anchorage. For the stressing anchorage, use a steel bearing plate, washers (flat hardened,
beveled or spherical, as required), and a nut capable of developing 95 percent of the minimum
ultimate tensile strength of the tendon.

(d) Centralizers. For cement grouted rock bolts, place centralizers along the tendon at 2.5-meter
centers, with a minimum of one centralizer per rock bolt. Locate the lowermost centralizer within
300 millimeters of the end. Use centralizers of sufficient strength to support the anchor bar in the
drilled hole.

260.06 Handling and Storing. Handle and store tendons according to ASTM D 3963, the
manufacturer’s recommendations, and Subsection 256.06.

Store polyester resin grout cartridges according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not use
polyester resin grout cartridges that are expired, damaged, hardened, or otherwise defective.

260.07 Installation.

(a) Drilling. Provide equipment capable of drilling straight, uniform-diameter holes. Do not use
water or drilling slurry. Drill rock bolt and dowel hole collars and hole depths within 150
millimeters of the required location and depth. Size drill holes to provide a minimum of 13
millimeters of grout cover over the bond zone portion of the tendon. Clean drill holes of cuttings,
sludge, and debris.

(b) Grouting. Install the rock anchor within 24 hours of completing the drill hole. Orient
reinforcement within 5 degrees of the specified angle.

(1) Cement grout installations. Use a positive displacement grout pump according to
Subsection 256.07(b)(1).

Install the tendon and batch and inject grout according to the manufacturers’
recommendations. For single-stage cement-grouted tendons, do not grout beyond the top of
the bond-breaker assemblage along the free-stressing length before tensioning the tendon.
Place the grout in one continuous operation. Control grout pressures to avoid ground heaving
or fracturing. Fill the grout tube with grout if it will remain in the hole.
Record the quantity of injected grout and the grout pressure for each installation. Notify the
Engineer of grout quantity overruns including the reason for the overrun and proposed
actions to minimize future overruns. Obtain approval for alternative grouting methods.
(2) Resin grout installations. Insert the approved number and size of resin cartridges to fully
cover the bond zone and fill the drill hole to the collar. Follow the approved procedures for
tendon spin speed, travel speed, and spin time for resin used. Use spin adapters during tendon
installation to avoid damaging the finished end tendon threads.

Section 260 – Rock Bolts and Dowels 203

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(a) Rock bolts. Fully grout the bond zone with fast-set resin and the remainder of the hole
with slow-set resin or cement grout for combination grout installations.
(b) Rock dowels. Use a single resin grout with set time sufficient for complete installation.
(c) Bearing plate installation. Place the bearing plate so at least three quarters of the plate’s
surface is in contact with a rock face. Construct a bearing pad approved by the Engineer if the rock
face is irregular or unsound or the axis of the tendon is greater than 20 degrees from perpendicular
to the bearing plate when the axis of the tendon passes through the center of the bearing plate
without bending the tendon. Use beveled washers if the axis of the tendon is greater than 5 degrees
from perpendicular to the bearing plate. Allow a minimum of 100 millimeters of tendon length
beyond the nut.

For dowels, when the grout has reached final set per the manufacturer’s recommendations, or a
minimum compressive strength of 60 percent of the 7-day compressive strength, install the bearing
plate, washers and nut, and apply a torque of 135 newton-meters to ensure proper seating against
the rock face.

After load-testing, tension and lock-off of rock bolts, place non-structural filler (cement grout or
polyester resin grout) for the entire free stressing length. Remove excess grout from the rock face
and anchor assembly.

Paint exposed parts of the rock bolt, bearing plate and nut with an approved corrosion-protection
paint or epoxy patching compound. When covers are required, rock bolt the anchorage cover to the
bearing plate and completely fill cover with grout after the rock anchor has been tested and finally
locked-off. After the grout has achieved initial set, demonstrate to the Engineer that the anchorage
cover is completely filled with grout.

For rock bolt and dowel installations, ensure the tendon is fully grouted to the collar of the hole.

260.08 Rock Bolt Testing, Stressing, and Finishing. Conduct testing of tensioned and untensioned
rock bolts according to PTI Recommendations for Prestressed Rock and Soil Anchors.

Trim the corrosion protection surrounding the free stressing length of the tendon so it does not contact
the bearing plate during testing and stressing. For single-stage cement-grouted tendons, tension the
tendon after the bond zone grout is set and reaches sufficient pull-out strength. For two-stage cement-
grouted tendons, tension the tendon after the bond zone grout is set and reaches sufficient pull-out
strength and before the free stressing length is grouted. For resin-grouted tendons, tension the tendon
after the fast-set resin fully sets in the bond zone and before the slow-set resin begins to set in the
free stressing length. For mechanically-anchored tendons, tension the tendon immediately following
insertion in the hole and before fully grouting.

(a) Performance tests. Use the same equipment, tendons, drill hole specifications, grout, post-
tensioning, and installation methods as used for production installations to verify required bond
strengths in the anchorage zone before final grouting of the stressing length. For two-stage
grouted, post tensioned rock bolts and single-stage, grouted, post-tensioned rock bolts employing
bond breakers, conduct performance tests on sacrificial or production installations. For pre-
tensioned installations, conduct performance tests on sacrificial installations. When changes or
modifications in the equipment, tendons, drill hole specifications, or installation methods occur;
conduct another performance test as approved by the Engineer.

Section 260 – Rock Bolts and Dowels 204

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Tension rock bolts to 120 percent of the design load with a calibrated hollow-ram hydraulic jack
for a holding time of not more than 60 minutes. Take load and extension measurements during
tensioning with a measuring device such as a dial gauge or vernier scale capable of measuring to
0.025 millimeters. A rock bolt is acceptable if both of the following conditions are satisfied:

(1) The total elastic movement obtained at the maximum test load exceeds 80 percent of the
theoretical elastic elongation of the free stressing length, and;
(2) The rock bolt will carry the maximum test load with a creep rate that does not exceed 1
millimeter between 1 and 10 minutes or 2.0 millimeters per log cycle between the 6 and 60
minute readings.
Perform at least two successful performance tests for each different rock unit, anchor type, and
proposed drilling-installation-grouting method before beginning production rock bolt installation.
When a performance test fails, modify the design or construction procedure as needed and conduct
another performance test on a replacement production installation. Conduct performance tests at
locations approved by the Engineer.

(b) Proof tests. Conduct proof testing on production pre- and post-tensioned rock bolt
installations. Proof test each production rock bolt to 120 percent of the design load. If no loss of
load occurs in 10 minutes the rock bolt is approve. When a proof test fails or results vary
significantly from the performance test result, document the expected reasons for failure, modify
the design or construction procedure and conduct an additional performance test on a replacement
production rock bolt installation. Obtain approval from the Engineer for the location of all
replacement anchors.

After tensioning and achieving a successful rock bolt proof test, lock off the load at 100 percent of the
design load and grout the remaining portion of the rock bolt, as appropriate.

260.09 Rock Dowel Lift-Off Testing and Finishing. Conduct testing of rock dowels according to
PTI Recommendations for Prestressed Rock and Soil Anchors.

Test only fully grouted dowels. Conduct at least five successful lift-off tests in succession for each
different rock unit, anchor type, and proposed drilling-installation-grouting method. Gradually load
lift-off test reinforcements to 60 percent of the minimum ultimate tensile strength of the dowel
tendon and monitor the pressure gage to verify the anchor is holding the design load for at least 10
minutes. If the anchors do not pull out, test 5 percent of the remaining dowels. If pressure is lost on
the pressure gage due to anchorage movement, replace the dowel and conduct lift-off tests on an
additional five anchors in succession until all are satisfactory.

260.10 Test Results and Reporting. Submit test results to Engineer for review. Maintain daily
records of rock bolt and dowel work in a manner acceptable to the Engineer, including:

(a) As-constructed drawings depicting the location of each anchor, noting anchor designation,
date drilled and grouted, total anchor length, bonded length, free stressing length, grout mix,
grout volume, average grout pressure, hole diameter, size of tendon, tendon inclination, and
installation comments. Submit as-built drawings according to Section 104 after work completion.

(b) Performance and proof test data forms, including the anchor designation, bonded length, free
stressing length, stressing length, date of stressing operation, signature of stressing operator or
inspector, required elongation and associated gage pressure, actual elongation and associated

Section 260 – Rock Bolts and Dowels 205

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

gage pressure, identification numbers of jacking equipment, comments, and a table including
incremental jack pressure, jack load, and movement.

260.11 Acceptance. See Table 260.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Material for rock bolts and dowels will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02, 106.03, and 106.04.

Construction of rock bolts and dowels will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Installed rock bolts and dowels will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Grouting will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

260.12 Measure the Section 260 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

260.13 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 260 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 260 – Rock Bolts and Dowels 206

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 260.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material Type of Characteristic Category Test Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
or Acceptance Methods Frequency Sampling Sample Time
Product (Subsection) Specifications
(Subsection)

Material Source
Aggregate Measured and Quality – AASHTO 1 per Source Yes Before –
quality tested for M6 material of producing
(fine) conformance type material
(703.01) (106.04)

Mix Design
Grout Measured and Flow – ASTM 1 per Source Yes, Before –
(725.13(b)) tested for C939 mix of when producing
conformance design material requested
(106.04) Compressive – ASTM " " " " –
strength C942
(3-day)
Production
Performance Measured and Deformation – Subsection Subsection Installation No 24 –
test for tested for 260.08(a) 260.08(a) hours
rock bolts conformance
(106.04)
Proof test " " – Subsection Each " " " –
for rock 260.08(b) bolt
bolts

Section 260 – Rock Bolts and Dowels 207

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 260.1 (continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material Type of Characteristic Category Test Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
or Acceptance Methods Frequency Sampling Sample Time
Product (Subsection) Specifications
(Subsection)
Production (continued)
Lift-off test Measured and Deformation – Subsection Subsection " " " –
for rock tested for 260.09 260.09
dowel conformance
(106.04)

Section 260 – Rock Bolts and Dowels 208

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 261. — REINFORCED SOIL SLOPES

Description

261.01 This work consists of constructing reinforced soil slopes.

Material

261.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Backfill material 704.03

Reinforcement geotextile and geogrid 714.04

Construction Requirements

261.03 Submittals. At least 30 days before starting reinforced soil slope construction, submit the
following according to Subsection 104.03:

(a) Manufacturer’s certification. A certification and test results indicating the proposed soil
reinforcement, reinforced embankment and facing material meets requirements.

(b) Splice details. Detail proposed splices in soil reinforcement.

(c) Facing details. Provide installation methods and connection details for facing system.

261.04 General. See Section 257 for Contractor-designed reinforced soil slope systems.

Verify the limits of the reinforced soil slope installation.

Clear the area of vegetation and obstructions according to Sections 201 and 203. Conserve topsoil
according to Subsection 204.05.

Prepare and compact foundation soils according to Subsection 204.09. Grade the foundation soils
supporting the reinforced soil slope for a width equal to the length of the lowest soil reinforcement
level. Bench cut slope surfaces to key the reinforced soil slope into the existing embankment.
261.05 Soil Reinforcement and Facing. Lay each layer of soil reinforcement flat, pull tight, and
hold in place with pins, soil piles, or other approved methods. Construct the reinforced soil slope to
achieve the slopes specified and roadbed tolerances according to Subsection 204.13(d).

Grade and compact backfill material according to Subsection 204.09 and 204.11 before placing the
next soil reinforcement layer. Maintain a minimum cover of 150 millimeters over the reinforcement
during spreading and compacting of fill material. Avoid sudden stops, starts, or turns of the
equipment. Do not use sheepsfoot-rollers. Use lightweight mechanical tampers, rollers, vibratory
systems, or other methods for compaction within 900 millimeters of the slope face.

Place backfill material in a manner that tensions the reinforcement working from the slope face to the
back of reinforcement.

Do not leave reinforcement exposed at end of shift. At the end of each shift, shape to drain and
compact the work area to a uniform cross-section. At the end of the day’s operation, slope the last lift

Section 261 – Reinforced Soil Slopes 209

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

of backfill away from the slope face to direct surface runoff away from the slope.

261.06 Acceptance. See Table 261.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Material for reinforced soil slopes will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02, 106.03, and 106.04.

Construction of reinforced soil slopes will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Excavation will be evaluated under Section 204.

Measurement

261.07 Measure the Section 261 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

When measuring reinforced soil slope backfill within the stabilized volume by the cubic yard (cubic
meter), measure in place.

Payment

261.08 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 261 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 261 – Reinforced Soil Slopes 210

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 261.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Material Source
Select Measured Gradation − AASHTO 1 per Source of Yes Before Not required
borrow and T 27 & T 11 soil type material using when using
(704.07) tested for in work Government
conformance provided
(106.04) source
Classification − AASHTO " " " " "
M 145
Production
Select Measured Moisture- − AASHTO 1 per Source of Yes Before −
borrow and density T 99, soil type material using
(704.07) tested for Method C(1) in work
conformance Density − AASHTO 2 per In-place No Before −
(106.04) T 310 lift placing
or other next layer
approved
procedures
(1) Minimum of 5 points per proctor.

Section 261 – Reinforced Soil Slopes 211

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

DIVISION 300
AGGREGATE AND BASE
COURSES

Section 300 – Aggregate and Base Courses 212

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 301. — UNTREATED AGGREGATE COURSES

Description

301.01 This work consists of constructing one or more courses of untreated aggregate base on a
prepared surface.

Subbase and base aggregate grading is designated according to Table 703.2. Surface course aggregate
grading is designated according to Table 703.3.

Material

301.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Subbase, base, and surface course aggregate 703.05

Water 725.01(c)

Construction Requirements

301.03 General. Prepare the surface on which the aggregate course is placed according to Section 204
or 303 as applicable.

After a representative quantity of aggregate is produced, submit proposed target values for the
appropriate sieve sizes along with a representative 300-pound (150-kilogram) sample at least 14 days
before incorporating the aggregate into the work.

Set target values within the gradation ranges shown in Table 703.2 or 703.3 for the required grading.

301.04 Mixing and Spreading. Determine the optimum moisture content according to AASHTO T
180, Method D. Mix the aggregate and adjust the moisture content to obtain a uniform mixture with a
moisture content within 2 percent of the optimum moisture content. Spread and shape the mixture on
the prepared surface in a uniform layer.

Do not place the mixture in a layer exceeding 150 millimeters in compacted thickness. When more
than one layer is necessary, compact each layer according to Subsection 301.05 before placing the next
layer. Route hauling equipment uniformly over the full width of the surface to minimize rutting or
uneven compaction.

301.05 Compacting. Determine the maximum density of the mixture according to AASHTO T 180,
Method D.

Compact each layer full width. Roll from the sides to the center, parallel to the centerline of the road.
Along curbs, headers, walls, and places not accessible to the roller, compact the material with approved
tampers or compactors.

Compact each layer to at least 95.0 percent of maximum density. Determine the in-place density and
moisture content according to AASHTO T 310 or other approved test procedures.

Section 301 – Untreated Aggregate Courses 213

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

301.06 Surface Tolerance. If grade finishing stakes are required, finish the surface to within ±10
millimeters from staked line and grade elevation.

If grade finishing stakes are not required, shape the surface to the required template and check the
surface with a 3-meter straightedge. Defective areas are surface deviations in excess of 13 millimeters
in 3 meters between any two contacts of the straightedge with the surface.

Correct defective areas by loosening the material, adding or removing material, reshaping, and
compacting.

301.07 Extra Payment for Transportation. This item will remunerate the transport of lateritic
materials on distances averaging more than 5 km.

301.08 Maintenance. Maintain the aggregate course to the correct line, grade, and cross-section by
blading, watering, rolling, or any combination thereof until placement of the next course. Correct
defects according to Subsection 301.06.

301.09 Acceptance. See Table 301.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements; including the
category for quality characteristics.

Aggregate gradation and surface course plasticity index will be evaluated under Subsection 106.05.
Other aggregate quality properties will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

(a) Aggregate gradation. The upper and lower specification limits are equal to the calculated
mean of all test results plus or minus the allowable deviations shown in Tables 703.2 and 703.3,
except as follows:

(1) If the calculated mean value for any tested sieve exceeds the maximum gradation value
shown in Table 703.2 or 703.3, then the upper specification is equal to the maximum
gradation value plus the allowable deviation, and the lower specification is equal to the
maximum gradation value minus the allowable deviation.
(2) If the calculated mean value for any tested sieve is less than the minimum gradation value
shown in Table 703.2 or 703.3, then the upper specification is equal to the minimum
gradation value plus the allowable deviation and the lower specification is equal to the
minimum gradation value minus the allowable deviation.
(b) Plasticity index. The upper and lower specification limits for surface courses are shown in
Subsection 703.05(c)(3).

Construction of untreated aggregate courses will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

301.10 Measure the Section 301 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring aggregate by the cubic meter, measure in place.

When measuring aggregate by the square meter, measure the length horizontally along the centerline of
the roadway. Measure the width horizontally to include the top of aggregate width, including designed
widenings.

Section 301 – Untreated Aggregate Courses 214

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Transportation measurement will be the average distance calculated on the basis of the actual
quantities executed according to construction draings in several road sections, with a approximation
of 0/10 km.

Payment

301.11 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement adjusted
according to Subsection 106.05 for the Section 301 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will
be full compensation for the work prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Payment for transportation will be by the cubic meter times kilometer or in units shown in the BOQ

Section 301 – Untreated Aggregate Courses 215

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 301.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Aggregate Source
Aggregate Measured and LA abrasion − AASHTO 1 per Source of Yes Before Not required
quality tested for (coarse) T 96 type & material using when using
(703.05(a) conformance source in work Government-
(b) (c)) (106.04 & 105) of material provided
sources

Sodium sulfate − AASHTO " " " " "

soundness loss T 104
(coarse & fine)
Fractured − ASTM " " " " "
faces D5821
Liquid limit − AASHTO " " " " "
R58 & T 89
Surface course " Plasticity index − AASHTO " Crusher " " "
aggregate R 58, T 89, belt or
(703.05(c)) & T 90 after
processing

Section 301 – Untreated Aggregate Courses 216

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 301.1 (continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Aggregate Source (continued)
Subbase, base, Process Gradation − AASHTO 2 per Crusher No 24 Not required
or control T 11 & T27 day per belt hours when using
surface course (153.03) stockpile a pre-crushed
aggregate (minimum) commercial
(703.05(b) (c)) source
Fractured faces − ASTM " " " " "
D5821
Surface course " Plasticity index − AASHTO " Crusher belt " " "
aggregate R 58, T 89, or after
(703.05(c)) & T 90 processing
Production
Subbase Statistical Gradation AASHTO 1 per From Yes 4 −
course (106.05) No. 4 I T 27 & T 11 900 metric windrow hours
Grading (4.75 mm) tons or
A&B roadbed
No. 200 I after
(75µm) processing
Other II
specified
sieves

Section 301 – Untreated Aggregate Courses 217

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 301.1 (continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production (continued)
Base course Statistical Gradation AASHTO 1 per From windrow Yes 4 −
Grading C, (106.05) ⅜ inch I T 27 & T 11 900 metric tons or roadbed hours
D, & E (9.5 mm) after
processing
No. 4 I
(4.75 mm)
No. 200 I
(75µm)
Other II
specified sieves
Subbase & Measured and Liquid limit − AASHTO 1 per From windrow Yes 4 −
base course tested for R 58 & T 89 900 metric ton or roadbed hours
Grading A, conformance after processing
B, C, (106.04) Moisture- − AASHTO 1 per Stockpile " " −
D&E density T 180, type & or production
(max density) Method D (1) source output
of material
Density − AASHTO 1 per In-place, No End −
T 310 450 metric tons after of shift
or compaction
other approved
procedures
Moisture − " " " " " −
content
(in-place)

Section 301 – Untreated Aggregate Courses 218

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 301.1 (continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Surface Statistical Gradation AASHTO 1 per From windrow Yes 4 −
course (106.05) T 27 & T 11 900 metric tons or roadbed hours
aggregate No. 4 I after
(4.75 mm) processing

No. 40 I
(4.75 µm )
No. 200 I
(75 µm)
Other specified II
sieves
Plasticity index I AASHTO " " " " −
R 58, T 89,
& T 90
Measured and Moisture- − AASHTO 1 per Stockpile or Yes " −
tested for density T 180, type & production
conformance (max density) Method D (1) source output
(106.04) of material
Density − AASHTO 1 per In-place, after No End of shift −
T 310 or 450 metric tons compaction
other approved
procedures
Moisture − " " " " " −
content
(in-place)
Fractured − ASTM 1 per From windrow Yes 4 −
faces D5821 900 metric tons on roadbed hours
after
processing

Section 301 – Untreated Aggregate Courses 219

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 301.1 (continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Final Product
Subbase, base, Measured and Surface − Subsection Determined Surface of No Before −
and surface tested for tolerance 301.06 by the final course placement
course conformance & grade Engineer of next
(106.04) layer or as
requested
(1) Minimum of 5 points per proctor.

Section 301 – Untreated Aggregate Courses 220

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 302. — MINOR CRUSHED AGGREGATE

Description

302.01 This work consists of furnishing and placing crushed aggregate for bedding, backfill, and
roadway aggregates on a prepared surface.

Material

302.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Crushed aggregate 703.06

Water 725.01(c)

Construction Requirements

302.03 Preparing Surface.

(a) Roadway aggregate. Prepare the surface on which the aggregate course is placed according to
Section 303.

(b) Bedding and backfill aggregate. Shape, compact, and finish the surface to the required lines,
grade, elevation, and cross-section according to Section 209.

302.04 Placing Crushed Aggregate.

(a) Roadway aggregate. Mix the aggregate and adjust the moisture content to obtain a uniform
mixture. Adjust the moisture content to obtain proper compaction. Spread and shape in uniform
layers not to exceed 150 millimeters compacted thickness. Where more than one layer is necessary,
compact the underlying layer according to Subsection 302.05.

(b) Bedding and backfill aggregate. Place and shape the mixture in layers that, when compacted,
do not exceed 150 millimeters in depth.

302.05 Compacting and Finishing Crushed Aggregate.

(a) Roadway aggregate. When no compaction method is specified, use either method. Finish
surface according to Subsection 301.06.

(1) Method 1. Compact each layer according to Subsection 204.11(a). Roll from the sides to
the center, parallel to the centerline of the road. Compact the material along curbs, headers,
walls, and places not accessible to a roller with approved tampers or compactors.
Compactive effort may be decreased if in-place densities show that less compactive effort is
required under Method 2.
(2) Method 2. Compact each layer according to Subsection 301.05.
(b) Bedding and backfill aggregate. Compact each layer according to Subsection 209.10.

302.06 Acceptance. See Table 302.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Section 302 – Minor Crushed Aggregate 221

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Crushed aggregate will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03. Submit a production
certification including gradation and quality properties for each source.

Construction of roadway aggregate courses will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.
Method 2 compaction will be evaluated under Subsection 106.04.

Placement of bedding and backfill aggregate will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

302.07 Measure the Section 302 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring crushed aggregate by the cubic meter, measure in place.

When measuring aggregate by the square meter, measure the length horizontally along the centerline of
the roadway. Measure the width horizontally to include the top of aggregate width, including designed
widenings.

Payment

302.08 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 302 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 302 – Minor Crushed Aggregate 222

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 302.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production

Crushed Measured and Moisture- − AASHTO 1 per Production No 4

aggregate tested for density T 180 aggregate output hours −
(Method 2) conformance Method D (1) supplied or stockpile
(106.04) Density − AASHTO 1 per In-place " End of
T310 450 metric tons after shift
−
or other approved compaction
procedures
Crushed Process Moisture − " " " " " −
aggregate control content
(153.03) (in-place)
Final Product
Crushed Measured and Surface − Subsection Determined Surface of No Before −
aggregate tested for tolerance 301.06 by the Engineer final course placement
conformance & grade of next
(106.04) layer or as
requested
(1) Minimum of 5 points per proctor.

Section 302 – Minor Crushed Aggregate 223

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 303. — ROAD RECONDITIONING

Description

303.01 This work consists of reconditioning ditches, shoulders, roadbeds, aggregate surfaces, or the
entire road.

Material

303.02 Conform to the following Subsection:

Water 725.01(c)

Construction Requirements

303.03 Ditch Reconditioning. Remove slide material, sediment, vegetation, and other debris from
existing ditches and culvert inlets/outlets. Reshape ditches and culvert inlets/outlets to achieve positive
drainage and uniform ditch width, depth, and grade. Dispose of waste at designated sites or according
to Subsection 204.14.

303.04 Shoulder Reconditioning. Remove slide material, vegetation, and other debris from existing
shoulders including shoulders in parking areas, turnouts, and other widened areas. Repair soft and
unstable areas according to Subsection 204.07. Reshape shoulders to the widths and slopes shown in
the plans. Dispose of waste at designated sites or according to Subsection 204.14.

303.05 Roadbed Reconditioning. Remove organic, deleterious, and material larger than 150
millimeters from the top 150 millimeters of subgrade. Dispose of waste according to Subsection
204.14. Repair soft and unstable areas according to Subsection 204.07. Scarify surface to a 150-
millimeter depth. Remove irregularities and shape to a uniform surface. Finish earth surfaces to within
15 millimeters and rock surfaces to within 30 millimeters of required line, grade, and cross-section.
Compact according to Subsection 204.11.

303.06 Aggregate Surface Reconditioning. Repair soft and unstable areas to the full aggregate
surface depth and according to Subsection 204.07. Scarify the thickness of aggregate surfacing material
or to 150 millimeters, whichever is less. Remove irregularities and shape to a uniform surface with
positive slope by re-establishing the original crown or superelevation.. Finish and compact the surface
according to Subsection 302.05.

303.07 Roadway Reconditioning. Perform applicable work described in Subsections 303.03 through
303.06. Maintain existing cross slope and crown or as shown in the plans.

303.08 Acceptance. See Table 303.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Road reconditioning work will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

303.09 Measure the Section 303 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Section 303 – Road Reconditioning 224

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Measure waste under Section 204.

Payment

303.10 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 303 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 303 – Road Reconditioning 225

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 303.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production
Existing Measured and Classification – AASHTO 1 per Roadbed Yes Before –
roadbed tested for M 145 soil type using
material or conformance in work
aggregate (106.04)
surfacing Moisture- – AASHTO 1 per Processed No " –
density T 180, mixture material
Method D (1) or change
or AASHTO in material
T 99,
Method C(1)
Density – AASHTO 1 per In-place, " End For
T 310 or 1700 m2 after of shift Subsection
other approved compaction 204.11(c)
procedures cases only
Process Moisture – " " " " " −
control content
(153.03) (in-place)
Final Product
Aggregate Measured and Surface – Subsection Determine Surface No Before −
surface tested for tolerance 301.06 by the Engineer of final placement
reconditioning conformance & grade course of next
(303.06) (106.04) layer or as
requested
(1) Minimum of 5 points per proctor.

Section 303 – Road Reconditioning 226

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 304.— FULL DEPTH RECLAMATION

Description

304.01 This work consists of pulverizing an existing pavement and base in-place, adding crushed
aggregate if required, mixing this material with water, and shaping and compacting the mix to
produce a base.

Material

304.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Crushed aggregate 703.06

Water 725.01(c)

Construction Requirements

304.03 General. Establish profile and cross slope control. Maintain the existing cross slope or crown
if none is established.

Before pulverizing, remove and dispose of unsuitable material as directed by the Engineer. Replace
unsuitable material with crushed aggregate according to Subsection 304.04.

Protect inlets manholes, valve covers, and other buried facilities from damage.

304.04 Adding Crushed Aggregate. If required, add crushed aggregate to bring the finished surface
to the established line, grade, and cross section.

304.05 Pulverizing. Furnish a road reclaimer that is:

(a) Self-propelled;

(b) Specifically manufactured for in-place reclamation;

(c) Capable of reducing the existing material to the required size;

(d) Equipped with at least an 2.4-meter cutting width;

(e) Equipped with standard automatic depth controls adjustable in increments of ½ inch
(13 millimeters); and

(f) Equipped with sufficient horsepower to constantly pulverize to the required depth in a single
pass.

Use the reclaimer to pulverize the existing roadway material, in-place until 100 percent passes the
50-millimeter sieve. Reprocess or remove larger particles and dispose of them according to
Subsection 203.05.

Section 304 – Full Depth Reclamation 227

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

304.06 Mixing and Spreading. Add water as necessary to adjust the moisture content of the mixture
to within 2 percent of the optimum for compaction. Mix to produce a homogenous full depth mixture.
Spread the mixture uniformly across the existing roadbed to provide a final compacted shape
according to the established line, grade and cross-section.

304.07 Compacting. Compact using one of the following methods:

(a) Method 1. Compact material full width according to Subsection 204.11(a).

(b) Method 2. Compact material according to Subsection 301.05.

304.08 Surface Tolerance. See Subsection 301.06.

304.09 Maintenance. See Subsection 301.07. Overlay the base within 14 days after compacting.

304.10 Acceptance. See Table 304.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Construction of full depth reclamation will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Crushed aggregate will be evaluated under Subsection 106.03.

Measurement

304.11 Measure the Section 304 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable.

Measure crushed aggregate under Section 302.

Measure removal and disposal of unsuitable material under Sections 203 and 204.

Payment

304.12 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 304 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 304 – Full Depth Reclamation 228

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 304.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production
Pulverized Measured and Moisture – – AASHTO 1 per Behind Yes Before –
material tested for density T 180, change reclaimer using
conformance Method D (1) in material before in work
(106.04) compaction
Density – AASHTO 1 per In-place after No End of For
T 310 1,700 m2 compaction shift Method 2
compaction
only
Process Moisture – AASHTO Min 1 per " " Upon −
control content T 255 3000 m2 completion
(153.03) (in-place) or other of test
approved
methods
Gradation – AASHTO " Behind " " Minus
T 27 reclaimer 2-inch
before (50-mm)
compaction sieve
requirement
only
Final Product
Finished Measured and Surface – Subsection Determined Completed No Before −
pulverized tested for tolerance 301.06 by the FDR placement
material conformance & grade Engineer surface of next
(106.04) layer or as
requested
(1) Minimum of 5 points per proctor.

Section 304 – Full Depth Reclamation 229

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 305. – FULL DEPTH RECLAMATION WITH CEMENT

Description

305.01 This work consists of pulverizing an existing pavement and base in-place, adding crushed
aggregate if required, mixing this material with cement and water, and shaping and compacting the mix
to produce a stabilized base.

Material

305.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Crushed aggregate 703.06

Hydraulic cement 701.01
Water 725.01(c)

Construction Requirements

305.03 Proportioning. Collect representative samples of the pavement and base from the project.
Process and blend these materials to achieve a gradation representative of the in-place pulverized
material.

Estimate the median cement content by mass to meet the requirements of Table 305.1. At this median
cement content and at cement contents 2 percent above and below this median, determine the optimum
moisture content, maximum density, and the parameters included in Table 305.1.

Table 305.1
Soil-Aggregate-Cement Mix Design Parameters
Material or Property Requirement
Unconfined compressive strength,
ASTM D1633, Method A(1)
Average strength (3 specimens) 1.4 MPa min.
Maximum strength of any single 2.8 MPa or less
specimen break
Loss in mass, 14 percent max.
AASHTO T 135 & AASHTO T 136,
12 cycles
(1) At 7-day cure at 70 °F (21 °C) per ASTM D1632.

Submit a mix design for approval 30 days before production which includes the following:

(a) Optimum cement content conforming to the requirements of Table 305.1;

(b) Maximum density and moisture content at the optimum cement content according to AASHTO
T 134, minimum of 4 points;

Section 305 – Full Depth Reclamation with Cement 230

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(c) Source of each component material;

(d) Results of all tests and applicable charts and graphs;

(e) Gradation and proportion of imported crushed aggregate;

(f) 200-pound (90-kilogram) sample of the pavement, base, and imported crushed aggregate, if
requested; and

(g) 20-pound (9-kilogram) sample of Portland cement, if requested.

Begin production only after the mix design is approved. Submit a new mix design if the Engineer
requests due to a change in material.

305.04 General. See Subsection 304.03.

305.05 Production Start-Up Procedures.

(a) Preparatory phase meeting. Conduct a pre-stabilization preparatory phase meeting at least
7 days before the start of stabilizing operations according to Subsection 153.04(a).

(b) Control strip. Provide 7 days notice before beginning production.

On the first day of production, stabilize 300-meter control strip, one-lane wide, at the designated
lift thickness and mix design proportions. Construct the control strip on the project at an
approved location.

Construct the control strip using construction procedures intended for the entire project. Take
nuclear density readings behind each roller pass to determine the roller pattern necessary to
achieve the specification requirements in Subsection 305.10. Cease production after construction
of the control strip until the stabilized base layer and the control strip are evaluated for
acceptance.

Repeat the control strip process until an acceptable control strip is produced. See Subsection
106.01 for the disposition of material in unacceptable control strips. Accepted control strips may
remain in place and will be accepted and measured as a part of the completed base. When a
control strip is accepted, full production may begin.

Use these start-up procedures when changing construction procedures, when resuming production
after a termination of production due to unsatisfactory quality according to Subsection 106.04, or the
beginning of a new construction season.

305.06 Adding Crushed Aggregate. See Subsection 304.04.

305.07 Pulverizing. See Subsection 304.05.

305.08 Applying Cement. Do not add cement when the underlying surface is frozen, muddy, or when
conditions allow for excessive loss to eroding or blowing. Begin cement application when the air
temperature is above 5 °C and is expected to stay above 5 °C for 48 hours. Apply cement by one of the
following methods:

Section 305 – Full Depth Reclamation with Cement 231

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(a) Dry method. Use a metered mechanical spreader to uniformly apply the cement. Use canvas
(or similar) skirts around the spreader box to minimize dust.

(b) Slurry method. Use approved equipment and dispersal processes to uniformly apply a cement
and water slurry without pooling or run off. Equip slurry tanks with an agitator to keep the cement
suspended in water. Apply the slurry to the pulverized material with 60 minutes from time water
first contacts the cement. Make successive passes over the material if necessary to obtain the proper
moisture and cement content for mixing and compacting.

305.09 Mixing. Begin mixing within 30 minutes after cement application. Use a road reclaimer
conforming to Subsection 304.05. Add water as necessary to adjust the moisture content of the mixture
to within 2 percent of optimum as indicated in the approved mix design. Continue mixing until the
cement is uniformly distributed within the in situ material creating a homogeneous full depth layer.
Complete mixing within 1 hour of the cement application.

305.10 Compacting and Finishing. Compact the processed material uniformly to at least 95 percent
of maximum density as determined from AASHTO T 134. Furnish rollers sized and configured to
achieve the required compaction and finishing. Operate rollers according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Compact the processed material full width by rolling from the sides to the center,
parallel to the centerline of the road. Along curbs, headers, walls, and places not accessible to the
roller, compact the material with approved tampers or compactors.

During compaction and final grading maintain the moisture content of the mixture to within 2
percent of optimum. Do not leave areas of stabilized material uncompacted or undisturbed for more
than 30 minutes. Complete compaction within 1 hour after mixing.

Finish the compacted surface according to Subsection 301.06 to produce a surface that is smooth,
dense, and free of compaction planes, ridges, or loose material. Clean the compacted surface of loose
material, dirt, or other deleterious substances by approved methods. Complete finishing operations
within 4 hours from the start of mixing including corrections to irregularities in the surface.

305.11 Construction Joints. When cement application operations are delayed or stopped for more
than 2 hours, make a transverse construction joint by cutting back into the completed work to form an
approximately vertical face. Tie new work into the completed work by remixing approximately 900
millimeters of the completed course.

305.12 Curing. Cure the layer at least 1 day before placing the next course by one of the methods
below:

(a) Water method. Keep the surface continuously moist by applying water through a spray bar
equipped with nozzles producing a fine, uniform spray. During the first 24 hours of curing, use a
water truck with side spray to avoid driving on the newly stabilized layer.

(b) Prime coat method. Seal the surface by placing an inverted prime coat according to
Subsection 411.06(b). Provide and maintain a continuous film over the surface.

If approved by the Engineer, allow local automobile traffic on the cement stabilized layer 4 hours after
finishing operations are complete. Limit traffic speeds to 30 kilometers per hour. Stop traffic if there is
surface marring or deformation. Do not allow truck traffic (other than equipment necessary to complete
the next course) on the cement stabilized layer until the next course is placed.

Section 305 – Full Depth Reclamation with Cement 232

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

305.13 Maintenance. Maintain the cement stabilized layer to the correct line, grade, and cross
section until placement of the next course. If the cement stabilized layer loses stability, density, or
finish before placement of the next course, reprocess, recompact, and add cement as necessary to
restore the strength of the damaged material.

Overlay the stabilized base within 14 days after compacting.

305.14 Acceptance. See Table 305.2 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Construction of full depth reclamation with cement will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.04.

Crushed aggregate will be evaluated under Subsection 106.03.

Cement will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Prime coat will be evaluated under Section 411.

Measurement

305.15 Measure the Section 305 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Measure crushed aggregate under Section 302.

Measure prime coat under Section 411.

Measure removal and disposal of unsuitable material under Section 203 or 204.

Payment

305.16 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 305 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 305 – Full Depth Reclamation with Cement 233

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 305.2
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Mix Design
Full depth Measured and All – Subsection 1 per Existing Yes Min of –
reclamation tested for 305.03 submitted roadway 30 days
(FDR) with conformance mix design before
cement (106.04) production
mixture
Production Startup (control strip)
FDR with Measured and Gradation − AASHTO 3 Behind No Upon Minus
cement tested for T 27 min reclaimer Completion 2-inch
material conformance before of test (50-mm)
(106.04) compaction sieve
requirement
only
Moisture- – AASHTO 1 “ Yes " Min 4
density T 134 min points per
(max density) proctor
Moisture – AASHTO 3 In-place No " −
content T 255 min after
(in-place) compaction
Density − AASHTO Subsection " " " −
T 310 305.05(b)
or other
approved
methods

Section 305 – Full Depth Reclamation with Cement 234

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 305.2 (continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production
FDR with Measured and Moisture- – AASHTO 1 per Behind Yes Before Min 4
cement tested for density T 134 change reclaimer using in points
material conformance (maximum of material before work per proctor
(106.04) density) compaction
Density – AASHTO 1 per In-place No End of –
T 310 1,700 m2 after shift
or other compaction
approved
procedures
Process Gradation – AASHTO Min 1 per Behind " Upon Monitor percent
control T 27 3000 m2 reclaimer completion passing the
(153.03) before of test 2-inch (50-mm)
compaction and
No. 4 (4.75 mm)
sieves
Moisture – AASHTO " In-place " “ −
content T 255 or after
(in-place) other approved compaction
methods
Unconfined – Table Min 1 per Behind " 7 7-day
compression 305.1 day reclaimer days cure
strength before
(7 days) compaction
Final Product
Finished Measured and Surface – Subsection Determined Completed No Before −
FDR with tested for tolerance 301.06 by the FDR surface placement
cement conformance & grade Engineer of next
material (106.04) layer or as
requested

Section 305 – Full Depth Reclamation with Cement 235

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 306. — FULL DEPTH RECLAMATION WITH ASPHALT

Description

306.01 This work consists of pulverizing an existing pavement and base in-place, adding crushed
aggregate if required, mixing this material with emulsified asphalt or foamed asphalt and shaping
and compacting the mix to produce a stabilized base. The mixture may also include cement or fly
ash.

Emulsified asphalt grade is designated according to AASHTO M 140, AASHTO M 208, or Subsection
702.02.

Asphalt binder grade is designated according to AASHTO M 226 or AASHTO M 320.

Material

306.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsections:

Asphalt binder 702.01

Crushed aggregate 703.06
Emulsified asphalt 702.02
Fly ash, Class C 725.04(a)
Fog seal 406
Portland cement 701.01(a)
Water 725.01(c)

Construction Requirements

306.03 Proportioning. Collect representative samples of the pavement and aggregate base from the
project. Replace removed pavement with asphalt concrete conforming to Subsection 403.02(b) or
approved cold patch material.

Design a mix according to FLH T 522 conforming to the requirements of Table 306.1. When using
foamed asphalt, supply a binder conforming to the requirements of Table 306.2. Submit the mix design
and the following for approval 30 days before production:

(a) Optimum emulsified or foamed asphalt binder content based on total mass of mixture;

(b) Source and grade of emulsified or foamed asphalt binder;

(c) Optimum moisture content for compaction based on total mass of mixture;

(d) Recommended cement or fly ash content;

(e) Maximum wet and dry density for the mixture at the recommended proportions of binder,
water, and cement or fly ash according to AASHTO T 180, Method D;

(f) Gradation and proportion of imported crushed aggregate;

(g) Results of tests and applicable graphs;

Section 306 – Full Depth Reclamation with Asphalt 236

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(h) 350-pound 160-kilogram sample of pavement, base, and imported crushed aggregate, if
requested;

(i) Three, 4 liter samples of emulsified or asphalt binder, if requested;

(j) 7-kilogram sample of Portland cement or fly ash, if requested; and

(k) Optimum percent of injection water for foaming based on total mass of asphalt binder (when
using foamed asphalt for the binder)

Begin production only after the mix design is approved. Submit a new mix design if there is a change
in a material source.

Table 306.1
Asphalt Stabilized Base Course Mix Design Requirements
Binder type Material or Property Requirement
(1)
Emulsified asphalt Indirect tensile strength, AASHTO T 283
and foamed asphalt Tensile strength wet 170 kPa minimum
Tensile strength ratio (TSR) 60 percent minimum
(1) Follow the modified AASHTO T 283 procedures as indicated in FLH T 522.

Table 306.2
Foamed Asphalt Binder Property Requirements
Property Requirement
Foamed asphalt expansion characteristics at 160, 170, & 180 °C (1)

Asphalt expansion ratio 10 minimum

Half-life of foamed expansion 6 seconds minimum
(1) See FLH T 522 for test procedures.

306.04 General. See Subsection 304.03.

306.05 Production Start-Up Procedures.

(a) Preparatory phase meeting. Conduct a pre-stabilization preparatory phase meeting at least
7 days before the start of stabilizing operations according to Subsection 153.04(a).

(b) Control strip. Provide 7 days notice before beginning production.

On the first day of production, stabilize a 300-meter long control strip, one-lane wide, and at the
designated lift thickness. Construct the control strip on the project at an approved location.

Construct the control strip using the construction procedures intended for the entire project.
Cease production after construction of the control strip until the stabilized base layer and the
control strip are evaluated and verified for approval.

After the reclaimer has pulverized and mixed one reclaimer width for 30-meter of the control
strip and before compaction, dig a test pit to evaluate the mixing and distribution of the asphalt.

Section 306 – Full Depth Reclamation with Asphalt 237

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

If homogeneous mixing is not occurring, modify the process and pulverize, mix, and verify
another 30-meter. Continue until acceptable mixing and distribution of asphalt is obtained.

Take three random loose mix samples within the control strip and verify that 100 percent passes
the 50-millimeter sieve.

Take nuclear density readings behind each roller pass according to AASHTO T 310 to determine
the roller pattern necessary to achieve at least 97 percent of the maximum wet density. Determine
the maximum wet density by sampling processed material from behind the reclaimer (before
compaction) and testing the material according to AASHTO T 180, Method D.

Repeat the control strip process until an acceptable control strip is produced. See Subsection
106.01 for the disposition of material in unacceptable control strips. Accepted control strips may
remain in place and will be accepted and measured as a part of the completed base.

(c) Control strip verification. The control strip is verified when the specified density, gradation,
and moisture content is obtained. Full production may begin once control strip is verified.
Provide the Engineer with the reclaimer speed, emulsified or foamed asphalt application
temperature, and asphalt and water line pressures used on the verified control strip.

Use these start-up procedures when changing construction procedures, when resuming production
after a termination of production due to unsatisfactory quality according to Subsection 106.04, or the
beginning of a new construction season.

306.06 Adding Crushed Aggregate. See Subsection 304.04.

306.07 Pulverizing and Mixing.

(a) When using emulsified or foamed asphalt furnish a road reclaimer that is:

(1) Self-propelled;
(2) Specifically manufactured for in-place reclamation;
(3) Capable of reducing the existing material to the required size;
(4) Equipped with at least an 2.4-meter cutting width;
(5) Equipped with standard automatic depth controls adjustable in increments of
13 millimeters;
(6) Equipped with independent asphalt application nozzles capable of being turned off
individually and verified open and working from within the operator cabin; and
(7) Equipped with an asphalt and water application control system including full width spray
bars and positive displacement pumps automatically interlocked to the machine speed.
(b) In addition to the above, when using foamed asphalt furnish a road reclaimer that is:

(1) Equipped with an exterior test nozzle to verify proper foaming action;
(2) Equipped with individual expansion chambers for each nozzle where asphalt binder and
water is injected under pressure through individual orifices for atomization and foam
expansion;

Section 306 – Full Depth Reclamation with Asphalt 238

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(3) Equipped with an internal electric heat cleaning system to self-clean foaming nozzles;
(4) Equipped with maximum nozzle spacing of 6 inches 150 millimeters; and
(5) Equipped with a compressor capable of providing at least 310 kilopascals of pressure.
Use the reclaimer to pulverize the existing roadway material in-place until 100 percent passes the
50-millimeter sieve. Reprocess or remove larger particles and dispose of them according to
Subsection 203.05.

306.08 Applying Cement or Fly Ash. Do not apply cement or fly ash when conditions allow for
excessive loss to blowing. Use a metered mechanical spreader to uniformly apply cement or fly ash
on the roadway surface. Use canvas (or similar) skirts around the spreader box to minimize dust.

306.09 Applying Asphalt.

(a) Requirements for emulsified and foamed asphalt. Apply emulsified or foamed asphalt
when the surface and air temperatures in the shade are at least 10 ºC. Do not begin applying
emulsified asphalt during periods of fog, rain, or when temperatures below 1.7 °C are anticipated
within 48 hours.

Automatically adjust the asphalt and water flow based the reclaimer speed and recycled material
mass for the approved mix design. Maintain the asphalt temperature within the range
recommended by the supplier.

Complete pulverizing and mixing operations in continuous one lane-width segments up to

0.8 kilometers in length. Mix the pulverized roadway material with emulsified asphalt binder,
other additives, and the necessary mixing water for optimum dispersion. If two passes are used,
shape and compact the reclaimed material with a steel drum roller after the first pass to provide
depth control for the second pass of the reclaimer. Add the required amount of emulsified or
foamed asphalt during the final pass of the reclaimer.

Verify that the emulsified or foamed asphalt is evenly dispersed and coating the pulverized
material. Dig test pits within the mix at least every 0.4 kilometers and observe the distribution of
the emulsified or foamed asphalt in each pit.

(b) Additional requirements for foamed asphalt. Do not use foamed asphalt with an
application temperature below 160 °C.

Do not apply foamed asphalt on previously treated foamed asphalt areas.

306.10 Compacting and Finishing. Compact and finish each segment before beginning mixing
operations on the next segment. Maintain the moisture content of the mixture within 2 percent of
optimum.

Compact the processed material uniformly to at least 97 percent of the maximum wet density as
determined from the control strip. If materials change, reestablish the maximum wet density
according to Subsection 306.05(b). Determine the in-place density according to AASHTO T 310.

Use at least three rollers: primary, secondary, and finish rollers sized and configured to achieve the
required compaction and finish. Operate rollers according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Compact the processed material full width by rolling the material between the reclaimer wheel paths

Section 306 – Full Depth Reclamation with Asphalt 239

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

first then from the sides to the center, parallel to the centerline of the road. Along curbs, headers,
walls, and places not accessible to the roller, compact the material with approved tampers or
compactors.

Shape and grade the mixture to the correct lines, grades, and cross-section. Finish the compacted
surface according to Subsection 301.06 to produce a surface that is smooth, dense, and free of
compaction planes, ridges, or loose material. Clean the compacted surface of loose material, dirt, or
other deleterious substances by approved methods. Do not leave uncompleted segments at the end of
the work day.

306.11 Construction Joints.

(a) Longitudinal joints. Make longitudinal joints coincide with each change in cross-slope,
regardless of the overlap width. Provide a minimum longitudinal overlap of 6 inches
(150 millimeters).

(b) Transverse joints. After full depth reclamation operations stop, ensure continuity across
transverse joints by cutting back into the completed work for a distance recommended by the
manufacturer of the reclaimer.

306.12 Curing and Maintenance.

(a) Emulsified asphalt. Keep traffic and equipment off the stabilized base for at least one hour
after completing compaction. Do not allow traffic and construction equipment on the stabilized
base until it is sufficiently stable to withstand marring and permanent deformation.

(b) Foamed asphalt. Before opening the stabilized base to traffic and after completing
compaction, moisten the surface and roll with a pneumatic-tire roller to create a tight and closed
surface. Continue to keep the surface moist until placement of the next course or final surface.

If required, place a fog seal on the surface of the stabilized base after final compaction according to
Section 406.

Route hauling and other construction equipment uniformly over the full width of the recycled surface
to minimize non-uniform compaction.

Maintain the emulsified asphalt stabilized layer to the correct line, grade, and cross section until
placement of the next course or final riding surface. If the stabilized layer loses stability, density, or
finish before placement of the next course, reprocess and recompact as necessary to restore the strength
of the damaged material.

Overlay the stabilized base material within 14 days after compacting.

306.13 Acceptance. See Table 306.3 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.
Construction of full depth reclamation with asphalt will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.04.

Crushed aggregate will be evaluated under Subsection 106.03.

Cement or fly ash will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Section 306 – Full Depth Reclamation with Asphalt 240

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Emulsified and foamed asphalt will be evaluated under Subsections 106.03, 106.04, and Table 306.1.

Blotter material will be evaluated under Subsection 106.03.

Measurement

306.14 Measure the Section 306 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Measure crushed aggregate under Section 302.

Measure removal and disposal of unsuitable material under Sections 203 and 204.

Measure fog seal under Section 406.

Payment

306.15 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 306 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 306 – Full Depth Reclamation with Asphalt 241

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 306.3
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Source
Emulsified Measured and Quality − Subsection 1 per Asphalt Yes Min of −
asphalt tested for 702.02 type & supplier 30 days
conformance source before
(106.04) of material production
Asphalt " " − Subsection " " " " −
binder 702.01
(foamed) &
Table
306.2
Mix Design
Full depth Measured and All − Subsection 1 per Existing Yes Min of −
reclamation tested for 306.03 submitted roadway 30 days
(FDR) with conformance & mix design before
asphalt (106.04) FLH T 522 production
mixture

Section 306 – Full Depth Reclamation with Asphalt 242

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 306.3 (continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production Startup (control strip)
Asphalt Measured and Binder − Subsection 1 Temperature No Upon −
binder tested for temperature 306.09 min gauge(3) completing
(foamed) conformance test
(106.04)
Half-life & − FLH " Test nozzle " " −
expansion ratio T 522 & on reclaimer
Table 306.2
FDR with Measured and Gradation − AASHTO 3 Behind No " Minus 2-inch
asphalt tested for T 27 min reclaimer (50-mm)
material conformance before sieve
(106.04) compaction requirement
only
Moisture-density − AASHTO 1 " " " −
(wet density)(1) T 180 min
Method D
Moisture – AASHTO 3 In-place " “ −
content T 255 min after
(in-place) compaction
Density − AASHTO " In-place " " Report
T 310 after wet density
compaction
Visual Homogeneous − Subsection Subsection Behind " " −
inspection mixing 306.05(b) 306.05(b) reclaimer
(106.02) before
compaction

Section 306 – Full Depth Reclamation with Asphalt 243

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 306.3 (continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production
FDR Measured and Moisture- − AASHTO 1 per Behind No Before −
asphalt tested for density T 180, change in reclaimer using in
material conformance (wet density)(1) Method D material before work
(106.04) compaction
Density − AASHTO 1 per In-place No End of Report
T 310 1700 m2 after shift wet
compaction density
Process Gradation − AASHTO Min 1 per Behind No Upon −
control T 27 3000 m2 reclaimer completion
(153.03) before of test
compaction
Moisture − AASHTO 1 per " No " −
content T 255 lane kilometer
Homogeneous − Subsection Min 1 per " No " −
mixing 306.05(b) 3000 m2
Binder − Calculation Min 1 per − No " −
content (yield rate) tank load
of mix
Indirect − AASHTO 1 per " No 4 −
tensile T 283 12,540 m2 days
strength(2)

Section 306 – Full Depth Reclamation with Asphalt 244

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 306.3 (continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Asphalt Process Binder − Subsection 1 per Temperature No Upon −
binder control temperature 306.09 tank load gauge(3) completing
(foamed) (153.03) test
Half-life & − FLH " Test nozzle " " −
expansion T 522 & on reclaimer
ratio Table 306.2
Final Product
Finished Measured and Surface – Subsection Determined Completed No Before −
FDR with tested for tolerance 301.06 by the FDR surface Placement
asphalt conformance & grade Engineer of next
material (106.04) layer or as
requested
(1) At least five points per proctor.
(2) Immediately after collecting sample, transport to field materials laboratory and compact for indirect tensile strength testing.
(3) Measure asphalt binder temperature with a calibrated thermometer.

Section 306 – Full Depth Reclamation with Asphalt 245

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 307. – RESERVED

Section 307 – Reserved 246

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 308. — LATERITE WEARING COURSE

Description

308.01 The Contractor has the option to use laterite (murram) materials rather than
crushed stone or gravel as wearing course material. In the event he/she makes that
decision, this supplemental specification shall apply.

This item shall consist of furnishing and placing of laterite material for the wearing
course on the prepared subgrade specified in accordance with the lines and grades
shown in the drawings.

Construction Requirements

308.02 General Laterite shall be of uniform quality, containing no hard or flinty pieces in
sufficient quantity to prevent construction of a smooth pavement surface free of pits or
pockets. Laterite shall show no tendency to air-slake and shall undergo no chemical
change when exposed to weather; it shall contain not more than three percent roots, leaf
old, of other organic matter

308.03 Execution Construction equipment list for all major equipment used for
transporting, spreading and finishing shall be submitted by the Contractor prior to
construction.

308.04 Preparation of Sub grade Prior to constructing the Laterite wearing course, the
previously constructed sub grade course shall be cleaned of foreign substances. Surface
of the sub grade course shall be inspected for adequate compaction and surface
tolerances; perform proof rolling or other means acceptable to the supervising engineer to
verify adequate compaction.

Ruts or soft, yielding spots that may appear in the sub grade areas having inadequate
compaction, and deviations of the surface from the requirements in the applicable section
shall be corrected. Correction shall be performed by loosening the affected areas,
removing unsatisfactory material, adding approved material, and by reshaping and re-
compacting to line and grade to the specified density requirements, as directed.

308.05 Grade Control Finished and completed wearing course shall conform to lines,
grades, cross sections, and dimensions as indicated. Lines and grades shall be
maintained by means of line and grade stakes placed at the worksite.

The aggregate surface course shall be laid to the designed level and transverse slopes
shown on the Plans. The allowable tolerances shall be as specified hereunder:

Section 308 – Laterite Wearing Course 247

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Permitted variation from design thickness of layer + 15 mm-5

Permitted variation from design level of surface + 15 mm-5
Permitted surface irregularity measured by 3-m straight-edge 5 mm
Permitted variation from design crossfall or camber + 0.2%
Permitted variation from design longitudinal grade over 25 m
+ 0.1%
in length

308.05 Furnishing Water Provisions shall be made by the Contractor for furnishing
water at the site of the work by equipment of such capacity and design as will ensure
application of the approved amounts for each of the construction operations in the
following paragraphs.

308.06 Placing and Spreading Transporting of Laterite over finished sub grade course
will be permitted only when approved. Rutting shall be repaired as described in the
paragraph entitled, “Preparation of Sub grade.” Laterite shall be transported in approved
vehicles over the previously placed course to the areas under construction, and shall be
dumped at the end of the spread Laterite. Laterite shall be spread uniformly on the sub
grade by means of shovels, forks, bulldozers, or other approved equipment. Loose
thickness of the layer shall be such that the compaction requirements will be obtained and
the compacted thickness will conform to the thickness of the layer as indicated in the
drawings. Compacted thickness of a single layer of Laterite wearing course shall not
exceed 150 millimeters. When more than one layer is required, the first layer shall be
constructed to not less than 50 millimeter compacted thickness. Prior to the spreading of
any material for the upper layer, the lower layer shall have passed all required
compaction tests to the satisfaction of the Supervising Engineer. Surface cross section
of the lower layer shall be approximately parallel to the finished line and grade. Portions
of a layer that become segregated in spreading shall be corrected, or if necessary,
replaced with satisfactory material.

Surface of each layer of wearing course shall be compacted to the line and grade
indicated.

308.07 Proof Rolling Unless otherwise directed by supervising engineer; Proof rolling
shall consist of the application of 30 coverages with a heavy pneumatic-tired roller
having 4 more tires, each loaded to a minimum of 30,000 pounds 15,000 kilogram
and inflated to a minimum of 150 pounds per square inch 1050 kilopascal. Proof rolling
shall be applied to the top lift of the layer where the sub base course is laid and to each
layer of the course, if laid in two layers, shall be maintained at the percentage directed
from the start of compaction to the completion of proof rolling. Materials in the sub
base course indicated as unsatisfactory by the proof rolling shall be replaced with
satisfactory materials and re-compacted, as directed.

308.08 Edges of Base Course Approved material shall be placed along edges of the
wearing course in such quantity as will compact to the thickness of the wearing course
being constructed or, when the wearing course is being constructed in two or more
layers, to the thickness of each layer of the course. In each operation, at least a 300
millimeter width of the shoulder to be rolled and compacted simultaneously with the
rolling and compacting of each layer of the wearing course shall be allowed.

Section 308 – Laterite Wearing Course 248

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

308.09 Smoothness Test The finished wearing course surface shall indicate no
deviations in excess of 9.5 millimeter when tested with a 10-foot (3 meter) straightedge
applied parallel with, and at right angles to, centerline of the paved area. Deviations
exceeding 9.5 millimeter shall be corrected by scarifying to a depth of 100 millimeter,
removing or adding Laterite as may be required, reshaping, watering, and compacting,
until approved. When the wearing course is constructed in more than one layer, the
smoothness requirements shall apply to the top layer.

308.10 Maintenance Laterite wearing course shall be maintained to meet all

requirements specified herein until completion and final acceptance of the work by
blading, power brooms, or other equipment, as directed by the Supervising Engineer.

308.11 Quality Control During Construction Before wearing course construction is

started, the Contractor shall spread and compact trial sections as directed by the
Supervising Engineer. The purpose of the trial sections is to check the suitability of the
materials and the efficiency of the equipment and construction method which is proposed
to be used by the Contractor. Therefore, the Contractor must use the same material,
equipment and procedures that he proposes to use for the main work. One trial section
of about 500 sq. meters shall be made for this type of material and/or construction
equipment/procedure proposed for use.

After final compaction of each trial section, the Contractor shall carry out such field
density tests (FDT) and other tests required as directed by the Engineer.

If the trial section shows that the proposed materials, equipment or procedures in
the Supervising Engineer’s opinion are not suitable for the wearing course, the material
shall be removed at the Contractor’s expense, and a new trial section shall be constructed.

If the basic conditions regarding the type of material or procedure change during the
execution of the work, new trial sections shall be constructed.

The fraction passing the 0.075 min sieve shall have a liquid limit not greater than
35 and plasticity index not greater than 18 as determined by AASHTO T 89 and T 90,
respectively.

The CBR minimum value shall be 30, obtained at the maximum dry density as
determined by AASHTO T 180, Method D.

Test results from samples shall be submitted by the Contractor not less than 15 days
before material is required in the work. Final approval shall be required prior to
delivery of any material.

The Contractor’s testing service shall report in writing all test results the same day that
tests are made.

Results of density in-place tests shall be considered satisfactory if the average of any
three consecutive density tests which may be selected is in each instance equal to or
greater than the specified density, and if not more than one density test in three has a
value more than two percentage points below the specified density (ASTM D 1556 Sand
Cone Method or ASTM D6938).

Section 308 – Laterite Wearing Course 249

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

308.12 Extra Payment for Transportation. This item will remunerate the transport of
lateritic materials on distances averaging more than 5 km.

Measurement

308.13. Laterite wearing course specified in the Bill of Quantities will be measured in
cubic meters of Laterite in place, furnished and compacted in accordance with the lines and
grades indicated on the drawings and accepted.

Transportation measurement will be the average distance calculated on the basis of the actual
quantities executed according to construction draings in several road sections, with a
approximation of 0/10 km.

Payment

308.14. The accepted quantities measured as provided in, shall be paid for at the unit price
per cubic meter of Laterite wearing course which price and payment shall be full
compensation for all materials, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete the item.

Payment for transportation will be by the cubic meter times kilometer or in units shown in the
BOQ

Section 308 – Laterite Wearing Course 250

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 308.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Product Characteristic Limits Test Method Sampling Frequency
Laterite Preparation of Samples AASHTO T 87 As required by Engineer
Liquid limit of Soils ASTM D 4318 As required by Engineer
Plastic limit of Soils ASTM D 4318 As required by Engineer
Plasticity index of Soils ASTM D 4318 As required by Engineer
Moisture-Density-Relationship AASHTO T 180, Method B or D As required by Engineer
Gradation AASHTO T 88 As required by Engineer
25 mm (% passing) 0-10
0.075 (% passing) 10-30

Note 1: Test results from samples shall be submitted by the Contractor not less than 15 days before material is required in the work.

Note 2: Final approval shall be required prior to delivery of any material

Section 308 – Laterite Wearing Course 251

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 309. — EMULSIFIED ASPHALT-TREATED BASE COURSE

Description

309.01 This work consists of constructing an emulsified asphalt-treated base course on a prepared
surface.

Base aggregate grading is designated according to Table 703.2.

Material

309.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Base course aggregate 703.05

Emulsified asphalt 702.02
Water 725.01(c)

Construction Requirements

309.03 General. Prepare the surface on which the emulsified asphalt-treated aggregate base course is
placed according to Section 204 or 303 as applicable.

Submit at least 14 days before incorporating the aggregate into the work:

(a) The proposed target values within the gradation ranges shown in Table 703.2 for the required
gradation; and

(b) A representative 150-kilogram aggregate sample.

End placement and resubmit new target values if the calculated mean value for any tested sieve differs
from the target value by more than the allowable deviation for that sieve.

309.04 Mixing and Spreading. Use a stationary pugmill with weighing, volumetric, or other gauging
equipment capable of controlling the material entering the mixer. Interlock the controls for the
aggregate feed with the emulsified asphalt and water controls to ensure uniform introduction of
material into the mixer.

Determine the optimum moisture content of the mixture according to AASHTO T 180, Method D. Add
aggregate and water to the mixer; then add 2 percent emulsified asphalt by mass of aggregate. Adjust
the total liquid content (emulsified asphalt and water) to within 1 percent of the optimum moisture
content at the time of compaction. Mix until particles are uniformly coated.

Place the treated aggregate after mixing. Spread the mixture on the prepared surface in a uniform layer.
Shape the mixture to the required line, grade, and cross-section. Route hauling equipment uniformly
over the full width of the surface to minimize rutting or uneven compaction.

309.05 Compacting. Compact the mixture according to Subsection 301.05.

309.06 Surface Tolerance. Finish the surface according to Subsection 301.06.

Section 309 – Emulsified Asphalt-Treated Base Course 252

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

309.07 Maintenance. Maintain the emulsified asphalt-treated aggregate base course according to
Subsection 301.07.

309.08 Acceptance. See Table 309.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements; including the
category for quality characteristics.

Emulsified asphalt will be evaluated under Subsection 106.03.

Aggregate gradation, SE/P75, SEP, and fractured faces will be evaluated under Subsection 106.05.

(a) Aggregate gradation. The upper and lower specification limits are equal to the calculated
mean of all test results plus or minus the allowable deviations shown in Table 703.2, except as
follows:

(1) If the calculated mean value for any tested sieve exceeds the maximum gradation value
shown in Table 703.2, the upper specification is equal to the maximum gradation value plus
the allowable deviation, and the lower specification is equal to the maximum gradation value
minus the allowable deviation.
(2) If the calculated mean value for any tested sieve is less than the minimum gradation value
shown in Table 703.2, the upper specification is equal to the minimum gradation value plus
the allowable deviation and the lower specification is equal to the minimum gradation value
minus the allowable deviation.
(b) SEP. See Table 309.1, Note 2. The lower specification limit is 1.000.

(c) Fractured faces. The lower specification limit is 50 percent.

Other aggregate quality properties will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Construction of emulsified asphalt-treated base course will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.04.

Measurement

309.09 Measure the Section 309 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring emulsified asphalt-treated aggregate base by the cubic meter, measure in the hauling
vehicle.

When measuring emulsified asphalt-treated aggregate base by the square meter, measure the length
horizontally along the centerline of the roadway. Measure the width horizontally to include the top of
emulsified asphalt-treated aggregate base width and allowable widening.

Payment

309.10 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement adjusted
according to Subsection 106.05 for the Section 309 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will
be full compensation for the work prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 309 – Emulsified Asphalt-Treated Base Course 253

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 309.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Aggregate Source
Aggregate Measured and LA abrasion − AASHTO 1 per Source of Yes Before Not required
quality tested for (coarse) T 96 rock type material using when using
(703.05) conformance & not less in work Government-
(106.04 & 105) than 5 per provided
material source(1) sources
Sodium sulfate − AASHTO " " " " "
soundness T 104
Aggregate base, Process Gradation − AASHTO 2 per Crusher No 24 "
Grading control T 11 & T27 day per stockpile belt hours
C, D, & E (153.03) (minimum)
(703.05) Fractured faces − ASTM " " " " "
D5821

Section 309 – Emulsified Asphalt-Treated Base Course 254

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 309.1 (continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production
Aggregate base, Measured and Moisture- − AASHTO 1 per Stockpile or Yes Before −
Grading C, D, & E tested for density T 180, type & Production using in
conformance (max density) Method D (3) source output work
(106.04) of material
Emulsified Statistical Gradation AASHTO 1 per In-place, Yes 4 −
asphalt-treated (106.05) ⅜ inch I T 30 900 metric tons after hours
aggregate base, (9.5 mm) compaction
Grading
C, D & E No. 4 I
(703.05) (4.75 mm)
No. 40 II
(425 µm)
No. 200 −
(75 µm)
Fractured I ASTM " " " −
faces D5821
Sand AASHTO T 176, " Belt feed " " −
equivalent Alternate before
Method No. 2, adding
Reference emulsified
Method asphalt
SEP I See Note (2) − No − −
Emulsified Measured and Density − AASHTO 1 per In-place, No Before −
asphalt-treated tested for T 310 or 450 metric tons after placing next
aggregate base, conformance other approved but not less than compaction layer
Grading C, D, & E (106.04) procedures 1 per layer

Section 309 – Emulsified Asphalt-Treated Base Course 255

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 309.1 (continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Final Product
Finished Measured and Surface – Subsection Determined Completed No Before −
emulsified tested for tolerance 301.06 by the base surface placement of
asphalt-treated conformance & grade Engineer next layer or
aggregate base (106.04) as requested
(1) Submit at least five reports, but not less than one report per rock type for each source. Submit reports dated within one year of intended use and include
rock type and sample location. Obtain samples representative of aggregates being furnished.
(2) SEP (SE/P75 Index) is a measure of a material’s ability to perform based on the quality and quantity of fines present. Quality is represented by the sand
equivalent (SE) and quantity is represented by the percent passing the 75 µm sieve (P (75)). SEP is computed as follows:
For SE ≥ 29, SEP = SE/(P(75) + 25) and for SE < 29, SEP = (SE + 4)/(SE + P (75)).
Where: SE = Plastic fines in graded aggregates and soils by using the sand equivalent test. See AASHTO T 176, Alternate Method No.2, Reference
Method.
P (75) = Material finer than the 75 µm sieve in mineral aggregates by washing. See AASHTO T 11.
(3) At least five points per proctor.

Section 309 – Emulsified Asphalt-Treated Base Course 256

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 310. — COLD IN-PLACE RECYCLED

ASPHALT BASE COURSE

Description

310.01 This work consists of milling an existing asphalt pavement, mixing the milled material with
emulsified asphalt and lime, relaying the material in a one-pass operation, and compacting the material
to produce a recycled asphalt base.

Cold in-place recycled asphalt base course compaction is designated type A or B according to
Subsection 310.09(b).

Emulsified asphalt grade is designated according to AASHTO M 140 or AASHTO M 208.

Material

310.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsections:

Emulsified asphalt 702.02

Fog seal 406
Lime 725.03(c)
Water 725.01(c)

Construction Requirements

310.03 Composition of Mix (JMF). Collect representative samples of the existing pavement to be
milled. Replace removed pavement with asphalt concrete conforming to Subsection 403.02(b) or
approved cold patch material.

Design a mix according to FLH T 524 and the Table 310.1 mix design parameters. Submit the JMF
and the following for approval 30 days before production:

(a) Optimum emulsified asphalt binder content based on total mass of mixture;

(b) Source and grade of emulsified asphalt binder;

(c) Optimum moisture content for dispersion and compaction based on total mass of mixture;

(d) Lime content;

(e) Maximum density for the mixture;

(f) Bulk specific gravity for the mixture;

(g) Results of tests and applicable charts and graphs;

(h) 135-kilogram sample of pavement, if requested;

(i) Three, 4 liter samples of emulsified asphalt binder, if requested; and

Section 310 – Cold In-Place Recycled Asphalt Base Course 257

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(j) 7 kilogram sample of lime, if requested.

Begin production only after the mix design is approved. Submit a new mix design if there is a change
in a material source.

Table 310.1
Cold In-Place Recycled Asphalt Base Course Mix Design Parameter
Material or Property Requirement
(1)
Indirect tensile strength, AASHTO T 283
(1) Tensile strength dry 480 kPa minimum
(2) Tensile strength ratio (TSR) 70 percent minimum
Raveling test, ASTM D7196, 4 hour cure at 10 °C,
50% humidity(2)
Average mass loss 5 percent maximum
(1) Follow the modified AASHTO T 283 procedures as indicated in FLH T 524.
(2) Use the listed testing conditions for the raveling test, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

310.04 General. See Subsection 304.03.

Clear, grub, and remove vegetation and debris within 600 millimeters of the pavement to be recycled
according to Section 201. Clean the pavement and edge of pavement of loose material, dirt,
vegetation, and other deleterious substances.

310.05 Equipment. Furnish a self-propelled recycling train with the following major units:

(a) Pavement milling machine. Provide the following:

(1) Automatic depth controls to maintain the cutting depth to within plus or minus ¼ inch
(6 millimeters);
(2) Positive means cross slope elevation control;
(3) Capability of milling the existing asphalt pavement material to the required depth in a single
path; and
(4) 3.8 meters minimum cutter width.
(b) Crushing unit. Capable of screening and crushing material to the required size before mixing
with emulsified asphalt.

(c) Pugmill and proportioning equipment. Provide the following:

(1) Capable of continuously mixing the milled material with emulsified asphalt, water, lime,
and other additives to produce a uniform and homogenous mixture;
(2) Belt scale for continuous weighing of milled and sized material and an interlocked
computer controlled liquid metering device capable of automatically adjusting the flow of
asphalt emulsion to the weight of milled material coming into the mixer;
(3) Proportioning equipment capable of applying emulsified asphalt and water to within plus or
minus 0.2 percent of the required amount by mass of milled material;

Section 310 – Cold In-Place Recycled Asphalt Base Course 258

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(4) Proportioning equipment with a digital meter for monitoring the flow rate and total milled
material, emulsified asphalt, and water applied; and
(5) Capable of placing the mixture in a windrow without segregation.
(d) Paver. Provide a paver conforming to Subsection 402.05 that is capable of picking up the entire
windrow and feeding it into the paver hopper. Do not heat the screed.

(e) Rollers. Provide double-drum steel wheel and pneumatic-tire rollers in sufficient quantity and
size to obtain the required density. Provide pneumatic-tire rollers weighing a minimum 27 metric
tons.

310.06 Weather Limitations. Do not begin work when fog, showers, rain, frost, temperatures below 2
°C are anticipated within 24 hours.

Place cold in-place recycled asphalt base on a dry, unfrozen surface when the air temperature in the
shade and the road surface temperature are 10 °C and rising.

310.07 Production Start-Up Procedures.

(a) Preparatory phase meeting. Conduct a pre-recycling preparatory phase meeting at least 7
days before the start of recycling operations according to Subsection 153.04(a).

(b) Control strip. Provide 7 days notice before beginning production.

Construct the control strip on the project at an approved location. Recycle a 450-meter long
control strip, one-lane wide, and at the designated lift thickness. Use the construction procedures
intended for the entire project. Cease production after construction of the control strip until the
recycled base layer and the control strip are evaluated and verified for acceptance.

Acquire three random samples of milled material from the control strip after the material has
passed through the crushing unit but before emulsified asphalt is added for Type A compaction.
Verify that 100 percent passes the 37.5-millimeter sieve. Take density readings behind each
roller pass to determine the roller pattern necessary to achieve the maximum in-place density
(break point of compaction curve) according to ASTM D2950. Use the bulk density value from
the mix design as a benchmark for evaluating the maximum in-place density achieved.

Repeat the control strip process until an acceptable control strip is produced. See Subsection
106.01 for the disposition of material in unacceptable control strips. Accepted control strips may
remain in place and will be measured as a part of the completed base course.

Full production may begin when a control strip is verified. Provide the Engineer with the
maximum in-place density achieved (Type A compaction), application rates of the emulsified
asphalt, water, and other additives used on the accepted control strip.

Use these start-up procedures when changing construction procedures, when resuming production
after a termination of production due to unsatisfactory quality according to Subsection 106.04, or the
beginning of a new construction season.

310.08 Pavement Recycling and Mixing. Mill the existing pavement to the required depth and
width. Reduce oversize particles to a maximum size of 37.5 millimeters.

Section 310 – Cold In-Place Recycled Asphalt Base Course 259

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

If lime is required at the milling head or in the pugmill, incorporate lime slurry to within plus or minus
10 percent of the approved application rate. Produce the lime slurry using quicklime or hydrated lime
and water in a slurry production unit equipped with scales and meters accurate to within 0.5 percent by
mass. Agitate the transport and feed tanks to provide a consistent and pumpable lime slurry.

Combine milled material with emulsified asphalt, water, and lime at the approved application rates to
produce a homogenous and uniformly-coated mixture. Maintain the emulsified asphalt temperature
within the range recommended by the supplier.

Do not disturb underlying material. Synchronize the recycling rate to allow for continuous operation
of recycling train equipment.

Continuously monitor and evaluate the milling, mixing, and placing operations to assure optimum
quality of the recycled asphalt base course. Adjust application rates in coordination with the
Engineer based upon material variations.

310.09 Spreading, Compacting, and Finishing.

(a) Spreading. Spread, and finish the recycled mix to the required line, grade, and elevation.

(b) Compacting. Begin compaction within 30 minutes of spreading. Use pneumatic-tire rollers
until no displacement is observed. Use steel-wheel rollers, either in static or low-amplitude
vibratory mode, to achieve final density and eliminate pneumatic-tire roller marks. Do not park or
idle rollers on uncompacted material. Compact using the designated type:

(1) Type A compaction. Use roller patterns established during the control strip. Compact the
recycled mix to obtain a minimum density of 97 percent of the control strip density. Measure
in-place density according to ASTM D2950. If an area fails to meet required density, rework
and recompact the area.
If applications rates of the emulsified asphalt from the approved mix design are changed by
more than ±0.2 percent by mass of milled material, or if other material conditions distinctly
change, reestablish roller pattern according to Subsection 310.07(b).
(2) Type B compaction. Compact the recycled mix using the following equipment,
sequence, and number of roller passes:
(a) 4 to 6 roller passes with a double drum, vibratory roller having a minimum mass of 5
metric tons and equipped with frequency and amplitude controls.
(b) 4 to 6 roller passes with a pneumatic-tire roller having a minimum mass of
910 kilograms per wheel and a contact pressure of 550 kilopascals.
(c) 2 to 4 roller passes with a static steel-wheel roller with a minimum pressure of 1730
kilopascals.
Compact the material with approved tampers or compactors along curbs, headers, walls, and
places not accessible to the roller.
(c) Finishing. Produce a surface that is smooth, dense, and free of ruts, ridges, and loose material.
Measure pavement surface according to Subsection 403.11, except defective areas are deviations
between the surface and the bottom of the straightedge in excess of 10 millimeters, measured
between any two contacts of the straightedge, or at the end of the straightedge.

Section 310 – Cold In-Place Recycled Asphalt Base Course 260

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(d) Fog seal. Place a fog seal on the surface of the recycled asphalt base. Use emulsified asphalt
diluted to 50 percent by volume with water and apply it at a rate of 0.25 to 0.70 liters per square
meter. Place blotter according to Section 411, if necessary.

310.10 Construction Joints.

(a) Longitudinal joints. Make longitudinal joints coincide with each change in cross-slope.
Provide a minimum longitudinal overlap of 100 millimeters.

(b) Transverse joints. At the beginning of each day’s recycling operations or after extended work
stoppages, ensure continuity across transverse joints by cutting back into the completed work for a
distance recommended by the manufacturer of the cold recycling equipment.

310.11 Curing and Maintenance. Keep traffic and construction equipment off of the recycled asphalt
base for at least 2 hours after completing compaction and until it is sufficiently stable to withstand
raveling, marring, and permanent deformation. Route hauling and other construction equipment
uniformly over the full width of the recycled asphalt base to minimize non-uniform compaction.

Maintain the recycled asphalt base to the correct line, grade, and cross section. Provide additional
rolling with a steel wheel roller to recompact and maintain a dense surface. Use a power broom to
remove loose particles. If the recycled asphalt base loses stability, density, or finish, reprocess and
recompact as necessary to restore the strength of the damaged material.

Place the next course or final surface when the moisture content of the recycled asphalt base is
reduced to 2½ percent or less according to AASHTO T 255, but within 14 days after recycling,
regardless of moisture content.

310.12 Acceptance. See Table 310.2 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Construction of the cold in-place recycled asphalt base course will be evaluated under Subsections
106.02 and 106.04. Type A compaction will be evaluated under Subsection 106.04.

Emulsified asphalt binder will be evaluated under Subsections 106.03 and 106.04.

Lime will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Blotter material will be evaluated under Subsection 106.03.

Pavement smoothness will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement
310.13 Measure the Section 310 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Measure fog seal under Section 406.

Payment
310.14 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 310 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 310 – Cold In-Place Recycled Asphalt Base Course 261

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 310.2
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Source
Asphalt Measured and Quality – AASHTO 1 per Asphalt Yes Min 30 –
binder tested for M 140, type and supplier days
conformance M 208, & source before
(106.04) 702.02 of material production
Design
Emulsified Measured and All – Subsection 1 per Existing Yes Min 30 For
asphalt mix tested for 310.03 & submitted roadway days Type A
design conformance FLH T 524 mix design before compaction
(106.04) production only
Production Startup (control strip)
Emulsified Measured and Gradation – AASHTO 3 Before No Upon –
asphalt tested for T 27 min emulsion completing
mixture conformance addition test
(106.04)
Bulk specific – FLH T 524 1 Loose mix " ” For
gravity min in windrow Type A
(density) compaction
only
Density – ASTM Subsection In-place " " "
D2950 & 310.07(b) after
Subsection compaction
310.07(b)
Depth of cut – – 3 Both ends " " –
min of milling
drum

Section 310 – Cold In-Place Recycled Asphalt Base Course 262

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 310.2 (continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production
Emulsified Measured and Bulk specific – FLH 1 per Loose mix No Upon For Type A
asphalt tested for gravity T 524 change in in windrow completion compaction only
material conformance (density) material of test
(106.04) Density – ASTM 1 per In-place after " End of "
D2950 & 1700 m2 compaction shift
Subsection
310.07(b)
Depth of cut – – 1 per Both ends of " " –
150 m milling drum
Process Gradation – AASHTO Min 1 per Before No Upon –
control T 27 3000 m2 emulsion completion
(153.03) addition of test
Indirect – AASHTO 1 per " " 4 "
tensile T 283 3000 m2 days
strength(1) (as modified
by
FLH T 524)
Emulsified " Application – Calculation Min 1 per – " " –
asphalt rates of yield rate tank load
material (Subsection
310.08)

Section 310 – Cold In-Place Recycled Asphalt Base Course 263

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 310.2 (continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Finished Surface
Cold Measured and Surface – Straightedge Continuously, Finished No 24 –
recycled tested for tolerance measurement, after recycled base hours
asphalt conformance Subsection compaction surface
base (106.04) 310.09(c)
(1) Transport samples immediately to field materials laboratory for indirect tensile strength compaction. Compact within 1 hour of sampling.

Section 310 – Cold In-Place Recycled Asphalt Base Course 264

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 311. — STABILIZED AGGREGATE SURFACE COURSE

Description
311.01 This work consists of constructing a stabilized aggregate surface course with either imported or
in-place aggregate.

Aggregate stabilization is designated as imported aggregate course or in-place aggregate course.

Aggregate gradation is designated according to Table 703.3.

Material

311.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Calcium chloride flakes 725.02(b)

Surface course aggregate (imported) 703.05
Water 725.01(c)

Construction Requirements

311.03 Proportioning. Determine the proportioning amounts of aggregate, calcium chloride flakes,
and water required. Sample the imported aggregate or aggregate course before beginning stabilization
operations. Determine the maximum density and optimum moisture content according AASHTO T
180, Method D. The Engineer will provide the target calcium chloride content by weight of the
material at 95 percent of the maximum density. Set target water content at the time of mixing between
2 percent below optimum and optimum moisture content.

311.04 General. After a representative quantity of imported aggregate is produced, submit proposed
target values for the appropriate sieve sizes to the Engineer. Set target values for the aggregate within
the gradation ranges shown in Table 703.3. List the percent passing for sieve sizes shown in Table
703.3.

Store calcium chloride flakes in closed, weatherproof containers. Begin application or mixing
operations only when the ambient air temperature is 4 °C or above, and is not expected to fall below
4 °C within 48 hours. Construct stabilized aggregate course when the underlying layer is dry and
unfrozen.

(a) Imported aggregate course. Prepare the underlying surface according to Subsection 303.05.

(b) In-place aggregate course. Prepare the surface according to Subsection 303.06.

311.05 Mixing and Placing.

(a) In-place mixing. When imported aggregates are used, spread aggregate on the prepared surface
in a uniform layer to the specified width.

For an imported or in-place aggregate course; maintain the amounts of calcium chloride and water
content to within the following tolerances:

(1) Calcium chloride ±0.2 percent by total dry mass

Section 311 – Stablized Aggregated Surface Course 265

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(2) Water ±0.5 percent by total dry mass

Do not spread calcium chloride flakes in windy conditions that will result in loss of calcium
chloride or dusting. Do not spread more calcium chloride flakes than can be incorporated within
one hour.

Spread calcium chloride flakes uniformly across the prepared aggregate surface. Use distributor or
rotary mixing equipment capable of metering and applying calcium chloride flakes and water
uniformly across the full width of the surface to be mixed. For distribution equipment, verify the
application rate by performing weight yield test panels for the first load of each distributor truck.
For rotary mixing equipment, verify the application rate by calculating yields.

Mix the calcium chloride flakes into the aggregate course with rotary mixing equipment capable of
uniformly mixing the material full depth in one pass.

Shape the aggregate course to the required cross section after mixing is complete. Route hauling
equipment uniformly over the full width of the aggregate surface to minimize rutting or uneven
compaction.

(b) Pugmill mixing. Aggregates, calcium chloride flakes, and water may be mixed using a
stationary pugmill with weighing or metering equipment capable of controlling the material
entering the mixer. Interlock the metering controls for the aggregate feed with those of the calcium
chloride flakes and water to ensure uniform introduction of material into the mixer. Maintain the
amounts of aggregate, calcium chloride flakes, and water (based on the total dry mass) to within the
following tolerances:

(1) Aggregate ±2.0 percent by total dry mass

(2) Calcium chloride ±0.2 percent by total dry mass
(3) Water ±0.5 percent by total dry mass
Haul and spread the material on the prepared surface in a uniform layer immediately after
mixing. Maintain the moisture content from optimum to 2 percent below optimum while placing
and spreading the mixture. Shape the aggregate course to the required cross section. Route
hauling equipment uniformly over the full width of the surface to minimize rutting or uneven
compaction.

311.06 Compacting and Finishing. Compact the mixture according to Subsection 301.05.

Finish the aggregate course according to Subsection 301.06 and produce a surface free of loose
material.

311.07 Acceptance. See Table 311.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements; including the
acceptance quality characteristic category.

Calcium chloride flakes will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Surface course aggregate (imported) will be evaluated for gradation, fractured faces, liquid limit, and
plasticity index under Subsection 106.05. Other aggregate quality properties will be evaluated under
Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Section 311 – Stablized Aggregated Surface Course 266

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(a) Aggregate gradation. The upper and lower specification limits are equal to the calculated
mean of all test results plus or minus the allowable deviations shown in Table 703.3, except as
follows:

(1) If the calculated mean value for any tested sieve exceeds the maximum gradation value
shown in Table 703.3, the upper specification is equal to the maximum gradation value plus
the allowable deviation, and the lower specification is equal to the maximum gradation
value minus the allowable deviation.
(2) If the calculated mean value for any tested sieve is less than the minimum gradation
value shown in Table 703.3, the upper specification is equal to the minimum gradation
value plus the allowable deviation and the lower specification is equal to the minimum
gradation value minus the allowable deviation.
(b) Fractured faces. When aggregate is produced from a gravel source, use the specification
limit shown in Subsection 703.05(a)(5).

(c) Liquid limit index. The specification limit is shown in Subsection 703.05(c)(2).

(d) Plasticity liquid limit. The specification limit is shown in Subsection 703.05(c)(3).

Construction of aggregate stabilization courses will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Reconditioning of the aggregate course for in-place aggregate will be evaluated under Section 303.

Preparation of the surface on which the treated imported aggregate course is placed will be evaluated
under Section 303.

Measurement

311.08 Measure the Section 311 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring surface course aggregate stabilization by the square yard (square meter), measure the
length horizontally along the centerline of the roadway. Measure width horizontally to include the top
of subgrade width and allowable widening.

Payment

311.09 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement adjusted
according to Subsection 106.05 for the Section 311 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will
be full compensation for the work prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 311 – Stablized Aggregated Surface Course 267

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 311.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Aggregate Source (Imported Aggregate Only)
Imported Measured and LA abrasion − AASHTO 1 per Source Yes Before Not required
aggregate tested for (coarse) T 96 type & not of material using in when using
source quality conformance less than work Government-
(703.05(a)) (106.04 & 105) 5 per source provided
of material(2) sources

Sodium sulfate − AASHTO " " " " "

soundness loss T 104
(course & fine)
Imported Process Gradation − AASHTO 2 per Crusher belt No 24 "
aggregate control T 27 & T 11 day per hours
(703.05) (153.03) stockpile,
min
Fractured faces − ASTM " " " " "
D5821
Liquid limit − AASHTO " Crusher belt " " −
T 89 or after
processing
Plasticity index − AASHTO " " " " "
T 90
Proportioning
Proportioning Measured and Moisture- − AASHTO 1 per Processed Yes Before Report
(311.03) tested for density T 180, mixture or material using Proportion
conformance Method D(1) change in before in work of aggregate,
(106.04) material incorporating calcium
in work chloride, &
water

Section 311 – Stablized Aggregated Surface Course 268

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 311.1 (continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production
In-place Measured and Moisture- − AASHTO 1 per Processed Yes Before using When
aggregate tested for density T 180, 760 meters material before in work incorporating
(311.03) conformance (proportioning) Method D(1) or a minimum incorporating existing
(106.04) of 3 samples in work aggregate
Imported Statistical Gradation AASHTO 1 per Processed Yes 4 When using
aggregate (106.05) No. 4 (4.75 mm) I T 27 & T 11 900 tons aggregate before hours imported
(703.05) stabilizing aggregate
No. 40 (425 μm) I
No. 200 (75 μm) II
Other specified II
sieves
Liquid limit II AASHTO " " " " −
T 89
Fractured faces II ASTM " " " " "
D5821
Plasticity index II AASHTO " " " " "
T 90

Section 311 – Stablized Aggregated Surface Course 269

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 311.1 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Surface course Measured and Density − AASHTO 1 per In place, No End of −
aggregate tested for & T 310 450 tons after shift
stabilization conformance moisture or or 2500 m2 compaction
(106.04) content other approved
procedures
Finished Surface
Finished Measured and Surface − Subsection Determined Finished No As −
surface course tested for tolerance 301.06 by the Engineer surface requested
aggregate conformance & grade course
stabilization (106.04)
(1) Minimum of 5 points per proctor.
(2) Furnish at least five reports, but not less than one report per rock type for each source. Reports must be dated within 1 year of intended use. Obtain samples
representative of aggregates being furnished. Include rock type and sample location on test reports.

Section 311 – Stablized Aggregated Surface Course 270

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 312. — DUST PALLIATIVE

Description

312.01 This work consists of furnishing and applying one or more applications of dust palliative on a
prepared surface. The application method is designated according to Subsection 312.04.

Material

312.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Calcium chloride, magnesium chloride, and lignosulfonate 725.02

Water 725.01(c)

Construction Requirements

312.03 General. Furnish equipment for spreading and processing dust palliative. Make the equipment
available for inspection and approval before use. Do not apply dust palliative when raining, rain is
anticipated within 24 hours of application, or when the ground is frozen. Apply when the ambient air
temperature is 4 °C or above.

Protect structures and trees from splatter or marring. Use multiple applications at a reduced rate if
necessary to prevent runoff. Prevent discharge of dust palliative into any water body.

312.04 Surface Preparation and Application.

(a) Method 1 – single application. Blade and shape the roadbed. Leave 1 to 2 inches (25 to
50 millimeters) of loose material on the surface. Water the loose material so it is visibly moist.
Thoroughly mix the moist loose material.

Apply water, calcium chloride, magnesium chloride, or lignosulfonate liquid at a rate of 1.00 to
2.25 liters per square meter as approved by the Engineer. Apply calcium chloride flakes at the rate
of 0.5 to 1.0 kilograms per square meter as approved by the Engineer. Process the dust palliative
uniformly throughout the loose material. Moisten the mixture as necessary and compact by
operating rollers over the full width of each layer until visual displacement ceases.

(b) Method 2 – two applications of calcium chloride or magnesium chloride liquid.

(1) First application. Scarify, blade, and shape the roadbed. Leave 75 millimeters of loose
material on the surface. Water the loose material so it is visibly moist. Thoroughly mix the
moist loose material.
Apply calcium chloride or magnesium chloride liquid solutions with a distributor at a rate of
2.25 to 4.50 liters per square meter as approved by the Engineer. Use a tractor rotary tiller, or
other approved mixing device, immediately behind the distributor to incorporate the water
solution into the full width of loose material. Shape the surface to line and grade and compact
according to Subsection 204.11(a).
Allow at least one week of curing time between the first and second applications.

Section 312 – Dust Palliative 271

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(2) Second application. Apply calcium chloride or magnesium chloride liquid to the finished
surface at a maximum rate of 0.9 liters per square meter as approved by the Engineer.
312.05 Opening to Traffic. Keep traffic off the treated surface until the dust palliative has penetrated
and cured to prevent excessive pickup under traffic.

312.06 Acceptance. Dust palliative material (calcium chloride liquid, calcium chloride flake,
magnesium chloride liquid, and lignosulfonate liquid) will be evaluated under Subsection 106.03.
Provide a commercial certification that includes the date, identification number (truck or trailer), net
mass, and brand name with each shipment. For liquid dust palliatives provide the net volume and
specific gravity at 15 °C, percent solids by mass, and pH. For solid dust palliatives provide the
concentration of the product.

Application of dust palliative will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

312.07 Measure the Section 312 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

312.08 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 312 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 312 – Dust Palliative 272

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 313. — AGGREGATE-TOPSOIL COURSE

Description

313.01 This work consists of furnishing and placing an aggregate, topsoil, and seed mixture on a
prepared shoulder or other surface.

Material

313.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Aggregate for aggregate-topsoil course 703.13

Seed 713.04
Topsoil 713.01
Water 725.01(c)

Construction Requirements

313.03 Preparing Surface. Complete the adjoining pavement before placing an aggregate-topsoil
mixture on the shoulder. Scarify the area where the mixture is to be placed to a depth of 75 millimeters.
Reduce clods and sod to a maximum size of 100 millimeters.

313.04 Mixing, Placing, and Compacting. Furnish a mixture of 50±10 percent aggregate and
50±10 percent topsoil by volume with sufficient water for compaction.

Mix the components into a uniform mixture. Spread the mixture on the prepared surface in a uniform
layer. Shape the mixture to the line, grade, and cross-section. Remove clods and stones greater than 50
millimeters in diameter. Before compaction, dry seed the mixture surface at a rate of 85 kilograms per
hectare according to Section 625.

Uniformly compact the mixture to ensure it does not exhibit heaving, pumping, rutting, or shearing.
After compaction, dry seed the surface again at a rate of 85 kilograms per hectare.

313.05 Acceptance. Aggregate for aggregate-topsoil will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.03.

Seed and topsoil will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Construction of aggregate-topsoil course will be evaluated under Subsection 106.02.

Measurement

313.06 Measure the Section 313 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring aggregate-topsoil course by the cubic meter, measure in the hauling vehicle.

Section 313 – Aggregate-Topsoil Course 273

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Payment

313.07 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 313 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 313 – Aggregate-Topsoil Course 274

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 314. – STOCKPILED AGGREGATES

Description

314.01 This work consists of furnishing and placing material in a stockpile for future use by the
Government.

Aggregate gradation is designated according to the applicable tables of Section 703.

Material

314.02 Conform to the following Section:

Aggregate 703

Construction Requirements

314.03 General. Conform to the gradation and quality requirements specified in the Section
identified for the material.

After a representative quantity of aggregate is produced, submit proposed target values for the
appropriate sieve sizes along with a representative sample size as specified in the Section identified
for the material.

Set target values within the gradation ranges shown in the applicable table for the required grading.

314.04 Stockpile Site. The Government will acquire the permits and rights to stockpile aggregate from
sources identified in the contract if the material is stockpiled for future use.

Prepare a plan of operation. Do not perform work within a Government-provided source until a plan of
operation for the development of the source is accepted.

Obtain Engineer approval before preparing sites. Prepare sites as necessary to accommodate the
quantity of material to be stockpiled in a manner that prevents contamination of the stockpiles as well
as off-site contamination from erosion or sediment transport.

Prepare new sites as follows:

(a) Clear and grub according to Section 201;

(b) Grade, shape, and compact the site to a uniform cross-section that drains in a non-erosive
manner; and

(c) Place, compact, and maintain a minimum 150-millimeter layer of crushed aggregate over the
stockpile site and access roads for stabilization.

Obtain Engineer approval before stockpiling aggregates.

314.05 Stockpile. Build aggregate stockpiles in layers not to exceed 900 millimeters in thickness.
Make the side slopes of each layer no flatter than 1V:1.5H. Spread aggregates with trucks or other

Section 314 – Stockpiled Aggregates 275

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

approved pneumatic-tire equipment. Complete each layer before depositing aggregates on the next
layer. Do not allow aggregates from the layer being built to run down over lower layers. Do not drop
aggregates from a bucket or spout in one location to form a cone-shaped pile. Do not push aggregates
into piles. Make the stockpiles neat and regular in shape.

Use plank runways or other suitable methods to avoid tracking dirt or other foreign matter onto the
stockpiled material when operating trucks on stockpiles.

Space stockpiles far enough apart or install partitions to prevent the mixing of aggregate gradations.

Protect stockpiles for future use with an approved cover.

314.06 Acceptance. See the table for sampling, testing, and the acceptance requirements; including
the category for quality characteristics specified in the Section identified for the material. The point
of sampling and testing for aggregate stockpiled for future use is in the stockpile.

Subbase, base, surface course, chip seal aggregate gradations, and surface course plasticity index will
be evaluated under Subsection 106.05. Other aggregate quality properties will be evaluated under
Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Preparation of stockpile sites and construction of stockpiles will be evaluated under Subsections
106.02 and 106.04.

Clearing will be evaluated under Section 201.

Measurement

314.07 Measure the Section 314 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

314.08 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement adjusted
according to Subsection 106.05 for the pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full
compensation for the work prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 314 – Stockpiled Aggregates 276

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

DIVISION 400
ASPHALT PAVEMENTS AND
SURFACE TREATMENTS

Section 400 – Asphalt Pavements and Surface Treatments 277

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 401. — RESERVED

Section 401 – Reserved 278

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 402. — ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT BY MARSHALL MIX

DESIGN METHOD

Description

402.01 This work consists of constructing one or more courses of asphalt concrete pavement using hot
or warm mix asphalt (HMA or WMA).

HMA and WMA asphalt concrete pavement class is designated according to Table 402.1.

Pavement roughness type is designated according to Subsection 402.16. If no roughness type is

designated, use Type IV.

Asphalt binder is designated according to AASHTO M 320.

Antistrip additive type is designated according to Subsection 702.05. When no type is designated,
use type 3 (lime).

Material

402.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Antistrip additive 702.05

Asphalt binder 702.01
Asphalt concrete aggregate 703.07
Mineral filler 725.05

Construction Requirements

402.03 Composition of Mix (JMF). Provide asphalt concrete mixes of aggregate, asphalt binder,
recycled asphalt pavement (RAP), and additives that meet the applicable aggregate gradation in
Table 703.4 and design parameters (a), (c), and (d) or (b), (c), and (d) in Table 402.1 for the mix
class shown in the bid schedule.

Apply asphalt concrete mix design requirements for HMA to the development of the WMA mix
design. Provide modifications to the process required for WMA technology. Submit modifications to
the asphalt concrete mix design process according to AASHTO R 35, WMA Appendix for approval
by the Engineer.

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 279
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 402.1
Asphalt Concrete Mix Requirements
Class of Mix
Design Parameters
A B C
(a) Marshall (AASHTO T 245)
Percent air voids (1) 3.0 - 5.0 3.0 - 5.0 3.0 - 5.0
Compaction, number of
75 50 50
blows each end of test specimen
Stability, kN min. 8.89 6.67 4.44
Flow, 0.25 mm 8 – 14 8 – 16 8 – 20
Voids in mineral aggregate,
See Table 402.2
minimum, %
(b) Moisture Susceptibility (AASHTO T 283) (2)
Tensile strength ratio, min. 0.80 0.80 0.80
(c) Dust to binder ratio(3) 0.8 – 1.6 0.8 – 1.6 0.8 – 1.6
(1) The percent of air voids is based on AASHTO T 166, AASHTO T 209, and AASHTO
T 269. Maximum specific gravity (density) is based on AASHTO T 209.
(2) Use 100-millimeter diameter specimens. AASHTO T 283 requires a freeze-thaw cycle.
(3) Dust to binder ratio is the percent of material including lime, bag-house fines, and other
mineral matter added to the mixture. Calculate the ratio using the effective asphalt content
calculated by mass of mix.

Table 402.2
Voids in Mineral Aggregate (VMA)
Marshall Mix Design
Voids in Mineral Aggregate,
Sieve Size (1)
Minimum, Percent (2)(3)
Marshall
4.75 mm 18.0
9.5 mm 16.0
12.5 mm 15.0
19 mm 14.0
25 mm 13.0
(1) The largest sieve size listed in the applicable specification upon which any material is
permitted to be retained.
(2) VMA to be determined according to AASHTO R 35.
(3) When mineral filler or hydrated lime is used, include in the calculation for compliance with
the VMA.

(a) RAP. Limit the amount of RAP by mass in the JMF to 20 percent or as directed by the
Engineer

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 280
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Baghouse fines. If used, document how baghouse fines are reintroduced and measured. Submit
target values for the percent of baghouse fines reintroduced to the JMF if they are a separate
stockpile.

(c) Submission. Submit written JMFs and associated material with approved forms for verification
at least 30 days before the control strip placement. Include a signed statement prepared by the
testing laboratory that certifies the proposed JMF meets the requirements and can be compacted in
the field during production. For each proposed JMF, submit the following:

(1) Aggregate and mineral filler.

(a) Target values:
(1) Target value for percent passing each sieve size for the aggregate blend; and
(2) Designate target values within the gradation band specified for the nominal
maximum size aggregate grading shown in Table 703.5.
(b) Source and percentage of each stockpile to be used.
(c) Average gradation of each stockpile.
(d) Representative samples from each stockpile. Use split samples of material taken at the
same time samples are taken for testing by the Contractor’s laboratory.
(1) 270 kilograms of aggregates proportioned by each stockpile according to the JMF;
and
(2) 4.5 kilograms of mineral filler if proposed for the JMF.
(e) Results of aggregate quality tests performed within 1 year of use. For aggregate
quality tests, see Subsection 703.07.
(2) Asphalt binder.
(a) Target asphalt binder content;
(b) Five 4-liter samples of the asphalt binder;
(c) Test results from the manufacturer according to AASHTO M 320 for the asphalt
binder including a temperature-viscosity curve; and
(d) Mixing temperature range and minimum compaction temperature for the asphalt
binder.
(3) Antistrip additives. If part of the JMF:
(a) 1 pint (0.5 liter) of liquid antistrip additive or 0.9 kilograms of cement or lime antistrip
additive;
(b) Name of product;
(c) Manufacturer;
(4) RAP. If part of the JMF:

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 281
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(a) Source and percentage of RAP;

(b) Gradation of the RAP;
(c) Effective specific gravities of each stockpile;
(d) Percent asphalt binder in RAP by total mass according to AASHTO T 308; and
(e) 45-kilogram representative sample of each RAP stockpile.
(5) WMA technology and additive information.
(a) 4-liter WMA additive sample with methodology for incorporating it in the asphalt
concrete mix design process;
(b) WMA manufacturer’s usage recommendations including additive target rates;
(c) Documentation of past WMA technology field applications including project type,
project owner, tonnage placed, asphalt concrete mix design, mixture volumetrics, and
performance;
(d) Laboratory mixing and compacting temperature;
(e) Asphalt binder performance grade test data over the range of WMA additive
percentages proposed for use, if applicable;
(f) Compatibility of WMA additive with asphalt binder and anti-stripping agent; and
(g) Temperature range for field asphalt concrete mix production, delivery, lay-down and
compaction.

(d) Verification. The verification process starts when required documentation and materials have
been received. When the JMF is verified, begin asphalt concrete mix production for the control
strip.

(1) Aggregate gradations. The Contractor’s aggregate gradation is verified if the Engineer’s
gradation on a combined asphalt concrete mix using the Contractor’s aggregate and RAP
stockpile percentage recommendations is within the Contractor’s target value gradation plus
or minus the following tolerance for each sieve:
Sieve Size Tolerance, % (±)
1 inch (25 mm) 5.0
¾ inch (19 mm) 5.0
½ inch (12.5 mm) 5.0
⅜ inch (9.5 mm) 4.0
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 4.0
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 4.0
No. 30 (600 µm) 3.0
No. 50 (300 µm) 3.0
No. 200 (75 µm) 2.0

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 282
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(2) RAP asphalt binder content and gradation. The Contractor’s RAP asphalt binder
content results are verified if the Engineer’s result for each stockpile is within ± 0.75 percent
by total mass using AASHTO T 308. Submit the RAP dry gradation, burned gradation,
asphalt content, and specific gravity information on approved form.
(3) Bulk specific gravity of aggregate (Gsb). The Contractor’s coarse and fine Gsb is verified
if the Engineer’s results are within 0.013 for AASHTO T 85 and 0.030 for AASHTO T 84.
(4) Marshall stability and flow value. The Contractor’s Marshall stability and flow values
are verified if the Engineer’s results meet the requirements in Table 402.1.
(5) Air voids (Va). The Contractor’s Va result is verified if the Engineer’s result at the same
design asphalt binder content is between 3.0 and 5.0 percent.
(6) Tensile strength ratio (TSR). The Contractor’s TSR result is verified if the Engineer’s
result is above the minimum specification limit in Table 402.1
(e) Changes and resubmissions. If a JMF is rejected or any source of material is changed, submit
a new JMF for verification. Up to 30 days may be required to evaluate a change after receipt of
required documentation and material. Approved changes in target values will not be applied
retroactively for payment.

The Engineer will deduct JMF evaluation costs resulting from the following:

(1) Contractor-requested changes to the approved JMF;

(2) Contractor requests for more than one JMF evaluation; and
(3) Additional testing necessary due to the failure of a submitted JMF.
402.04 Mixing Plant. Use mixing plants conforming to AASHTO M 156.

(a) Drum dryer-mixer plants.

(1) Bins. Provide a separate bin in the cold aggregate feeder for each individual aggregate
stockpile in the asphalt concrete mix. Use bins of sufficient size to keep the plant in
continuous operation and of proper design to prevent overflow of material from one bin to
another.
(2) Stockpiling procedures. Separate aggregate into at least three stockpiles with different
gradations.
(b) Batch plants.

(1) Hot aggregate bin. Provide a bin with three or more separate compartments for storage
of the screened aggregate fractions to be combined for the asphalt concrete mix. Make the
partitions between the compartments tight and of sufficient height to prevent spillage of
aggregate from one compartment into another.
(2) Load cells. Calibrated load cells may be used in batch plants instead of scales.
(3) RAP. Modify batch plants so RAP is introduced into the asphalt concrete mix after

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 283
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

bypassing the dryer. Design the cold feed bin, conveyor system, and special bin adjacent to
the weigh hopper, if used, to avoid segregation and sticking of the recycled asphalt pavement
material. Heat aggregate to a temperature that will transfer sufficient heat to the recycled
asphalt pavement material to produce an asphalt concrete mix of uniform temperature within
the range specified in the approved JMF.
(c) WMA plant modifications.

(1) Modify the mixing plant as required by the manufacturer to introduce the WMA
technology. Interlock the WMA additive delivery system with the automated proportioning
system;
(2) Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for incorporating additives and WMA
technologies into the asphalt concrete mix. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations
regarding delivery and storage of additives; and
(3) Modify the plant burner and drum flights to operate at lower production temperatures.
402.05 Equipment.

(a) Pavers. Furnish pavers that are:

(1) Self-contained, power-propelled units with adjustable vibratory screeds with full-width
screw augers;
(2) Heated for the full width of the screed;
(3) Capable of spreading and finishing courses of asphalt concrete mix in widths at least
12 inches (300 millimeters) more than the width of one lane;
(4) Equipped with a receiving hopper having sufficient capacity to ensure a uniform spreading
operation;
(5) Equipped with automatic feed controls, which are properly adjusted to maintain a uniform
depth of material ahead of the screed;
(6) Operable at forward speeds consistent with satisfactory asphalt concrete mix lay down;
(7) Capable of producing a smooth finished surface without segregating, tearing, shoving, or
gouging;
(8) Equipped with automatic screed controls with sensors capable of sensing grade from an
outside reference line, sensing the transverse slope of the screed, and providing the automatic
signals that operate the screed to maintain grade and transverse slope; and
(9) Equipped with a screed mounted safety edge device capable of:
(a) Maintaining contact with the road shoulder surface;
(b) Allowing automatic transition to cross roads, driveways, and obstructions; and
(c) Constraining and reducing the volume of the asphalt concrete material head to
increase the density of the extruded profile.

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 284
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Do not use conventional single plate strike off.

(b) Material transfer vehicle (MTV). When required, furnish an MTV with the following:

(1) A loading system with the ability to receive mixtures from the hauling equipment;
(2) A minimum storage capacity of 11.8 tons with a remixing system in the MTV storage bin;
(3) A discharge conveyor to deliver the mixture to the paver hopper; and
(4) A mass not exceeding the maximum legal loadings on structures.
Pick-up machines, hopper inserts, and material transfer devices are not considered MTVs

402.06 Surface Preparation Clean the existing surface of loose material, dirt, or other deleterious
substances by approved methods. Apply an asphalt tack coat to contact surfaces of pavements, curbs,
gutters, manholes, and other structures according to Section 412.

402.07 Weather Limitations. Place asphalt concrete mix on a dry, unfrozen surface when the air
temperature in the shade is above 1.7 °C and rising. For HMA, conform to Table 402.3.

Table 402.3
Asphalt Concrete Mix Placement Temperature
Compacted Lift
<< 50 mm 50-75 mm > 3 Inches
Thickness →
Road Surface
Minimum Lay-Down Temperature(1)
Temperature
°C
°C
(2) (2) (2)
< 1.7
(2) (2)
1.7 – 4.3 138
(2)
4.4 – 9.9 141 135
10.0 – 15.5 146 138 132
15.6 – 21.1 141 135 129
21.2 – 26.6 138 132 129
26.7 – 32.2 132 129 127
≥ 90 32.2 129 127 124
(1) Do not heat the asphalt concrete mix above the temperature specified in the approved
asphalt concrete mix design.
(2) Do not pave.

402.08 Asphalt Preparation. Uniformly heat the asphalt binder to provide a continuous supply of
heated asphalt binder from storage to the mixer. Do not heat asphalt binder above 185°C.

If a liquid heat stable antistrip additive is used, meter it into the asphalt binder transfer lines at a bulk
terminal or mixing plant. Inject the additive for at least 80 percent of the transfer or mixing time to
obtain uniformity.

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 285
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

402.09 Aggregate Preparation. When lime is used as an anti-strip, adjust the aggregate moisture to
at least 4 percent by mass of aggregate. Mix the lime uniformly with the aggregate before
introducing the aggregate into the dryer or dryer drum. Use calibrated weighing or metering devices
to measure the amount of lime added to the aggregate.

For batch plants, heat, dry, and deliver aggregate for pugmill mixing at a temperature sufficient to
produce an asphalt concrete mix temperature within the approved range. Adjust flames used for
drying and heating to prevent damage to and contamination of the aggregate. Additional plant
adjustments may be required to provide dry aggregate at the reduced mixing temperatures of WMA.

Control plant operations so the moisture content of the asphalt concrete mix behind the paver is 0.5
percent or less according to AASHTO T 329.

Before starting asphalt concrete mix production, obtain approval of synchronized metering and
weighing devices used to introduce a constant rate of lime and water.

Add lime to the aggregate by one of the following methods:

(a) Method A. Add lime to the combined cold feed aggregate using an enclosed in-line cold feed
mechanical pugmill mixer. Use a twin-shaft, continuous mixing pugmill with adjustable mixing
paddles. Adjust the retention time of the mixture in the pugmill so no unmixed lime is visible
after the lime and aggregate exit the pugmill.

(b) Method B. Add lime to the produced aggregates during stockpiling using a pugmill.
Distribute the lime per the stockpile ratios stated in the asphalt concrete mix design.

A minimum moisture content of two percent by dry weight for coarse aggregate and 4 percent by
dry weight for fine aggregate is required at the time the aggregates and lime are mixed. Marinate
treated aggregate in stockpiles from 24 hours to 60 days before using in asphalt concrete mix. Do
not use aggregate marinated longer than 60 days.

(c) Method C. Add lime to the combined cold feed aggregate by introducing the lime between
aggregate layers as the aggregate flows from the cold feed bins. Mix the lime and aggregate on the
conveyor belt by placing at least of six paddles over the conveyor belt. Make the paddles protrude
into the aggregate flow and direct the aggregate to fold over itself causing the material to migrate
from one side of the conveyor belt to the other. Space the paddles to provide complete mixing.
Provide a water spray over the conveyor belt as necessary to control dust and to maintain minimum
moisture content.

402.10 Mixing. Measure the aggregate and asphalt into the mixer according to the JMF. Mix until
particles are completely and uniformly coated with asphalt according to AASHTO M 156. Maintain
the discharge temperature according to the JMF.

402.11 Hauling. Use vehicles with tight, clean, and smooth metal beds for hauling asphalt concrete
mixes.

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 286
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Coat the beds with an approved material to prevent the asphalt concrete mix from adhering to the beds.
Do not use petroleum derivatives or other coating material that contaminates or alters the
characteristics of the mix. Drain the bed before loading.

Equip each truck with a canvas cover or other suitable material of sufficient size to protect the asphalt
concrete mix from the weather. When necessary to maintain temperature, use insulated truck beds and
securely fastened covers. Provide access ports or holes for checking temperature of asphalt concrete
mix in the truck.

402.12 Production Start-Up Procedures.

(a) Preparatory phase meeting. Conduct a pre-paving preparatory phase meeting at least 3 days
before the start of paving operations according to Subsection 153.04(a). In addition, be prepared to
discuss the following:

(1) Calibration certification for the Hveem or Marshall compactor; and

(2) Asphalt and aggregate correction factors according to AASHTO T 308 and AASHTO T
30. If RAP is included as part of the JMF, provide the asphalt and aggregate correction
factors according to AASHTO T 30 and the FLH Addendum to AASHTO T.
(b) Control strip. Provide 7 days notice before beginning production of an asphalt concrete mix.

On the first day of production, produce sufficient asphalt concrete mix to construct a 300-meter
long control strip, one-lane wide, and at the designated lift thickness. Construct the control strip on
the project at an approved location.

Construct the control strip using asphalt concrete mix production, lay-down, and compaction
procedures intended for the entire mix. Cease production after construction of the control strip until
the asphalt concrete mix and the control strip are evaluated for acceptance.

(1) Mixture. Take and test at least three control strip asphalt concrete mix samples and
evaluate according to Subsection 402.17. The asphalt concrete mix is acceptable if all test
results are within specification limits for gradation and asphalt content and the calculated pay
factor for gradation and asphalt content is 0.90 or greater.
(2) Compaction. Take nuclear density gauge readings behind each roller pass to determine
the roller pattern necessary to achieve required density.
Take nuclear gauge density readings and cut core samples at least five locations within the
control strip. Test cores according to Subsection 402.17. Density is acceptable if all tests are
above the specification limit or the calculated pay factor is 0.90 or greater. Furnish the
Engineer with documented nuclear gauge readings and correlations of the readings to the core
specific gravities at completion of control strip.
Repeat the control strip process until an acceptable control strip is produced. See Subsection 106.01
for the disposition of material in unacceptable control strips. Accepted control strips may remain in
place and will be accepted and measured as a part of the completed pavement. Tests used for the
control strip will not be included in the evaluation for payment according to Subsection 106.05.
When a control strip is verified and accepted, full production may begin.

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 287
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Use these start-up procedures when producing material from a different plant or when resuming
production after a termination of production due to unsatisfactory quality according to Subsection
106.05.

402.13 Placing and Finishing. Do not use mixes produced from different plants unless the mixes are
produced according to the same JMF, use material from the same sources, and are approved. Construct
control strips according to Subsection 402.12 for each plant from which production is intended.

Place HMA at a temperature conforming to Table 402.3. Place WMA at temperatures conforming to
Subsection 402.03. Measure temperature of the asphalt concrete mix in the hauling vehicle just before
dumping into the spreader or measure it in the windrow immediately before pickup.

Place the asphalt concrete mix with a paver conforming to Subsection 402.05. Control horizontal
alignment using a reference line. Automatically control the grade and slope from reference lines, a ski
and slope control device, or dual skis. Use skis having a minimum length of 6 meters.

In areas where mechanical spreading and finishing is impractical, place and finish the asphalt concrete
mix with alternate equipment to produce a uniform surface closely matching the surface obtained when
using a mechanical paver.

Offset the longitudinal joint of one layer at least 150 millimeters from the joint in the layer
immediately below. Make the longitudinal joint in the top layer along the striped centerline of two-lane
roadways or at the lane lines of roadways with more than two lanes.

402.14 Compacting. Furnish at least three rollers, with at least one being a pneumatic-tire roller.
Furnish one roller each for breakdown, intermediate, and finish rolling. Size the rollers to achieve the
required results. Operate rollers according to the recommendation of the manufacturer. Do not use
diesel fuel as a release agent with any roller used to compact asphalt concrete mix.

Monitor the compaction process with nuclear density gauges calibrated to the control strip core density
test results and compact according to Subsection 402.17(c).

Take nuclear gauge density readings and cut and test core samples according to Table 402.8.

Compact the asphalt concrete mix with alternate equipment to obtain the required compaction along
forms, curbs, headers, walls, and other places inaccessible to rollers.

402.15 Joints, Trimming Edges, and Cleanup. Complete pavement construction of adjacent traffic
lanes to the same elevation within 24 hours. If elevation differences exceeding 75 millimeters between
adjacent lanes are left overnight, sign with "Uneven Lanes" warning signs and provide a 1V:3H fillet.

Make transverse joints vertical to the depth of the new pavement at connections to existing pavements
and previously placed lifts. Form transverse joints by cutting back the previous run to expose the full-
depth course.

Apply an asphalt tack coat to the edge of both transverse and longitudinal joints according to Section
412.

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 288
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Place the asphalt concrete mix as continuously as possible. Do not pass rollers over any unprotected
edge of a freshly laid asphalt concrete mix.

Dispose of material trimmed from the edges and other discarded asphalt concrete mix according to
Subsection 211.02(a)(2).

402.16 Pavement Roughness. Measure the profile of the pavement surface according to the
designated pavement roughness type. In addition, construct pavement surfaces to meet the
requirements of Subsection 402.16(e).

(a) Profile measurement. The Engineer will use profile measurements to determine the Mean
Roughness Index (MRI) values for the traveled way using the current version of Profile Viewer
and Analysis (ProVAL) software. The Engineer will also determine areas of localized roughness.
The MRI and areas of localized roughness will be used to determine payment for the designated
pavement roughness type and pavement areas requiring surface corrections.

Conform to the following:

(1) Equipment. Provide an ASTM E950, Class 1, inertial profiling system conforming to
AASHTO M 328 and certified according to AASHTO R 56. Provide copies of the system
certifications at least 21 days before profiling begins. Display a current decal on the
equipment indicating the expiration date of the certifications.
The Engineer may perform verification testing, equipment validation, or both, as follows:
(a) Verification testing. Verification testing will consist of the Engineer profiling a
section of pavement and comparing the results against the Contractor’s results for the
same section of pavement. Comparison runs will be made within 21 days of each other.
The Contractor’s results will be considered verified if the Engineer’s International Ride
Index (IRI) for each wheel path differs from the Contractor’s IRI for the same wheel path
by no more than 10 percent of their mean. Do not use equipment that fails verification.
(b) Equipment validation. Equipment validation will consist of determining a cross
correlation value on at least one section of pavement having a minimum length of 161
meters. The Contractor’s profiler and the Engineer’s profiler will be cross correlated on
the same day. Coordinate and schedule the equipment validation date at least 14 days in
advance of the validation date. The Engineer will determine the location of the cross
correlation segment(s). The Contractor’s equipment will be considered validated if the
cross correlation value is greater than or equal to 0.90. Do not use equipment that fails
validation.
(2) Personnel. Provide the following:
(a) A profile system operator certified according to AASHTO R 56. Submit copies of the
operator’s certifications at least 21 days before profiling begins.
(b) Flaggers, pilot car operations, or other temporary traffic control according to Section
635 as required.

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 289
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(3) Measuring. The Engineer will identify the beginning and ending points of the profile
measurements. Measure the pavement profile in both wheel paths using a sensor path spacing
of 1650 – 1800 millimeters and centered in the traveled way of the lane. Operate the inertial
profiler according to AASHTO R 57 and the manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not apply
filters when collecting profile data. Filtering will be applied during profile analysis in
ProVAL. Collect profile data (elevation and distance) at a maximum interval of 50
millimeters. Provide a lead-in distance of at least 45 meters after reaching the testing speed.
Use the profiler’s automatic start/stop activation when collecting data.
The Engineer will identify excluded areas. Cattle guards, bridges not being overlaid, and
turning lanes, passing lanes, side roads, and ramps less than 300 meters in length will be
excluded from profile measurement, the calculation of MRI, and the determination of
localized roughness. Use event markers to mark the beginning and ending location of areas to
be excluded from profile measurement. Measure excluded areas with a straightedge
according to Subsection 402.16(e).
Coordinate profiling operations with the Engineer. Export each profile (elevation, distance
data, header, and marker information) in ppf (pavement profile format) to a CD or DVD and
submit after profiling. Do not submit non-continuous data files.
Use the following naming convention for electronic file submissions:
(a) For Type I and Type II pavement roughness:
[Project Name (or abbreviation)] _ [beginning station_to_ending station] _ [Initial or
Final],
e.g. Beaver_Cr_Rd_25+50_to_387+35_Initial.ppf.
(b) For Type III pavement roughness:
[Project Name (or abbreviation)] _ [beginning station_to_ending station],
e.g. Beaver_Cr_Rd_25+50_to_387+35.ppf.
(4) Evaluation. The Engineer will review and analyze profile measurements. The MRI will
be calculated from profile measurements using ProVAL.
Using ProVAL, a high pass filter length of 90 meters and a low pass filter of 250 millimeters
will be applied to the profiles. Individual MRI values are determined by averaging the IRI
value from each wheel path. Fixed interval MRI values are reported as an average of the
individual MRI values over the fixed interval length. An overall MRI value will be
determined by averaging the individual MRI values, excluding segments less than 7.62
meters for Type I and II pavement roughness or 528 feet (161 meters) for Type III pavement
roughness.
Areas of localized roughness will be identified by using ProVAL’s continuous MRI function
with a segment length of 7.62 meters. This will yield an average MRI value and a length for
each area of localized roughness which exceeds the localized roughness threshold value of
every possible 7.62- meter segment. Areas for which the continuous report exceeds the
threshold MRI value for the specified roughness type will be considered a defective area
requiring correction. When corrections are not allowed, a reduction in payment will be

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 290
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

applied according to Subsection 402.16(f). No deduction will be made for areas of localized
roughness identified within 3.81 meters of the beginning or end of a profile section or within
3.81 meters of any excluded areas. Measure these areas with a straightedge according to
Subsection 402.16(e).
Correct areas of localized roughness according to Subsection 402.16(g).
(b) Type I pavement roughness. Measure the profile of the initial pavement surface before
construction activities disturb the existing pavement surface. The initial pavement surface is
defined as the existing pavement surface before construction actives begin. The localized
roughness threshold computed to the nearest whole number for Type I pavement roughness is
equal to the following:

Localized Roughness Threshold = Initial Overall MRI + 1.881(S25)

where:
Initial Overall MRI = MRI obtained before construction activities begin.
S25 = sample standard deviation of the 7.62 meters fixed interval MRI values.
Do not proceed with work that will disturb the initial pavement surface until the Engineer’s
analysis is complete.

Measure the profile of the final pavement surface before placing a surface treatment and within
21 days of completing roadway paving. The original overall surface MRI will be used in
conjunction with the final overall MRI to determine an overall percent improvement for the
entire traveled way.

The overall percent improvement in MRI will be determined to one decimal place for the
traveled way according to the following formula:

% Improvement = [(Initial Overall MRI – Final Overall MRI) / Initial Overall MRI] × 100

Table 402.4 will be used to determine the final pay factor (PFrough) for the traveled way to two
decimal places. When the percent improvement is less than 25.0 percent and the final overall
MRI value is less than or equal to 1.105 meters per kilometer, Type III-A from Table 402.6 will
be used to determine the final PFrough.

Correct areas of localized roughness according to Subsection 402.16(g). If any pavement has an
overall negative percent improvement, place a minimum 25-millimeter overlay over the entire
paved surface.

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 291
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 402.4
Type I Pavement Roughness Pay Factors
Type I-A Type I-B
Percent Improvement Percent Improvement Pay Factor
(%) (%) (PFrough)
Greater than 50.0 Greater than 45.0 PF = 1.05
47.6 to 50.0 44.0 to 45.0 PF = 1.04
45.1 to 47.5 43.0 to 43.9 PF = 1.03
43.6 to 45.0 41.6 to 42.9 PF = 1.02
42.1 to 43.5 40.1 to 41.5 PF = 1.01
25.0 to 42.0 20.0 to 40.0 PF = 1.00
24.0 to 24.9 19.0 to 19.9 PF = 0.99
23.0 to 23.9 18.0 to 18.9 PF = 0.98
22.0 to 22.9 17.0 to 17.9 PF = 0.97
21.0 to 21.9 16.0 to 16.9 PF = 0.96
20.0 to 20.9 15.0 to 15.9 PF = 0.95
19.0 to 19.9 14.0 to 14.9 PF = 0.94
18.0 to 18.9 13.0 to 13.9 PF = 0.93
17.0 to 17.9 12.0 to 12.9 PF = 0.92
16.0 to 16.9 11.0 to 11.9 PF = 0.91
15.0 to 15.9 10.0 to 10.9 PF = 0.90
14.0 to 14.9 9.0 to 9.9 PF = 0.89
13.0 to 13.9 8.0 to 8.9 PF = 0.88
12.0 to 12.9 7.0 to 7.9 PF = 0.87
11.0 to 11.9 6.0 to 6.9 PF = 0.86
10.0 to 10.9 5.0 to 5.9 PF = 0.85
5.0 to 9.9 4.0 to 4.9 PF = 0.80
0.0 to 4.9 0.0 to 3.9 PF = 0.70
Correct
Negative % Improvement Negative % Improvement
And overlay

(c) Type II pavement roughness. Measure the profile of the initial pavement surface before
construction activities disturb the pavement surface. The initial pavement surface is defined as
the original existing pavement surface before construction actives begin. The localized roughness
threshold computed to the nearest whole number for Type II pavement roughness is equal to the
following:

Localized Roughness Threshold = Initial Overall MRI + 1.282(S25)

where:
Initial Overall MRI = MRI obtained before construction activities begin.

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 292
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(S25) = sample standard deviation of the 7.62-meter fixed interval MRI values.
Do not proceed with work that will disturb the initial pavement surface until the Engineer’s
analysis is complete.

Measure the profile of the final pavement surface before placing a surface treatment and within
21 days of completing roadway paving. The original overall surface MRI will be used in
conjunction with the final overall MRI to determine an overall percent improvement for the
entire traveled way.

The overall percent improvement in MRI will be determined to one decimal place for the
traveled way according to the following formula:

% Improvement = [(Initial Overall MRI – Final Overall MRI) / Initial Overall MRI] × 100

Table 402.5 will be used to determine the final PFrough for the traveled way to two decimal places.
When the percent improvement is less than 49.0 percent and the final overall MRI value is less
than or equal to 1.105 meters per kilometer, Type III-A from Table 402.6 will be used to
determine the final PFrough.

Correct areas of localized roughness according to Subsection 402.16(g). If any pavement has less
than a 10.0 percent improvement, place a minimum 25-millimeter overlay over the entire paved
surface.

Table 402.5
Type II Pavement Roughness Pay Factors
Type II-A Type II-B
Percent Improvement Percent Improvement Pay Factor
(%) (%) (PFrough)
Greater than 60.0 Greater than 50.0 PF = 1.05
58.6 to 60.0 49.0 to 50.0 PF = 1.04
57.6 to 58.5 48.0 to 48.9 PF = 1.03
56.6 to 57.5 47.0 to 47.9 PF = 1.02
55.1 to 56.5 45.0 to 46.9 PF = 1.01
49.0 to 55.0 35.0 to 44.9 PF = 1.00
48.0 to 48.9 34.0 to 34.9 PF = 0.99
47.0 to 47.9 33.0 to 33.9 PF = 0.98
46.0 to 46.9 32.0 to 32.9 PF = 0.97
45.0 to 45.9 31.0 to 31.9 PF = 0.96
44.0 to 44.9 30.0 to 30.9 PF = 0.95
43.0 to 43.9 29.0 to 29.9 PF = 0.94
42.0 to 42.9 28.0 to 28.9 PF = 0.93
41.0 to 41.9 27.0 to 27.9 PF = 0.92
40.0 to 40.9 26.0 to 26.9 PF = 0.91

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 293
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 402.5
Type II Pavement Roughness Pay Factors (Continued)
Type II-A Type II-B
Percent Improvement Percent Improvement Pay Factor
(%) (%) (PFrough)
38.0 to 39.9 25.0 to 25.9 PF = 0.90
36.0 to 37.9 24.0 to 24.9 PF = 0.89
35.0 to 35.9 23.0 to 23.9 PF = 0.88
34.0 to 34.9 22.0 to 22.9 PF = 0.87
33.0 to 33.9 21.0 to 21.9 PF = 0.86
31.0 to 32.9 20.0 to 20.9 PF = 0.85
25.0 to 30.9 16.0 to 19.9 PF = 0.80
10.0 to 24.9 7.5 to 15.9 PF = 0.70
Less than 10.0 Less than 7.5 Correct & Overlay

(d) Type III pavement roughness. Measure the profile of the final pavement surface before
placing a surface treatment and within 21 days of completing roadway paving. Pay factors from
Table 402.6 will be used in conjunction with the long continuous histogram printout from
ProVAL’s Smoothness Assurance Analysis function and by utilizing a long continuous 161-
meter segment length for analysis. The final PFrough is equal to the sum of the products of the
individual pay factors indicated in Table 402.6 multiplied by the ratio of individual lane miles
(lane kilometers)to the overall project lane kilometersand by ProVAL’s corresponding histogram
percentages, divided by 100. The final PFrough will be determined to three decimal places.

If the final overall MRI for the entire traveled way is greater than the values shown in Table
402.6, correct the traveled way according to Subsection 402.16(g).

Table 402.6
Type III Pavement Roughness Pay Factors
Mean Roughness Index Mean Roughness Index
(MRI) (MRI) Pay Factor
Type III-A Type III-B (PFrough)
in/mi (m/km) in/mi (m/km)
Localized roughness threshold Localized roughness threshold
140 in/mi (2.210 m/km) 140 in/mi (2.210 m/km)
If MRI of entire roadway If MRI of entire roadway
is greater than is greater than REJECT
125 in/mi (1.973 m/km) 135 in/mi (2.131 m/km)
Greater than 95.0 (1.50) Greater than 110.0 (1.74) 0.700
95.0 to 90.0 (1.50 to 1.42) 110.0 to 105.0 (1.74 to 1.66) 0.800
90.0 to 85.0 (1.42 to 1.34) 105.0 to 100.0 (1.66 to 1.58) 0.850
85.0 to 80.0 (1.34 to 1.26) 100.0 to 95.0 (1.58 to 1.50) 0.900

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 294
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 402.6
Type III Pavement Roughness Pay Factors (Continued)
Mean Roughness Index Mean Roughness Index
(MRI) (MRI) Pay Factor
Type III-A Type III-B (PFrough)
in/mi (m/km) in/mi (m/km)
80.0 to 75.0 (1.26 to 1.18) 95.0 to 90.0 (1.50 to 1.42) 0.960
75.0 to 70.0 (1.18 to 1.10) 90.0 to 85.0 (1.42 to 1.34) 0.980
70.0 to 65.0 (1.10 to 1.02) 85.0 to 80.0 (1.34 to 1.26) 1.000
65.0 to 60.0 (1.02 to 0.94) 80.0 to 75.0 (1.26 to 1.18) 1.010
60.0 to 55.0 (0.94 to 0.86) 75.0 to 70.0 (1.18 to 1.10) 1.020
55.0 to 50.0 (0.86 to 0.78) 70.0 to 65.0 (1.10 to 1.02) 1.025
50.0 to 45.0 (0.78 to 0.70) 65.0 to 60.0 (1.02 to 0.94) 1.030
45.0 to 40.0 (0.70 to 0.62) 60.0 to 55.0 (0.94 to 0.86) 1.035
40.0 to 35.0 (0.62 to 0.54) 55.0 to 50.0 (0.86 to 0.78) 1.040
35.0 to 30.0 (0.54 to 0.46) 50.0 to 45.0 (0.78 to 0.70) 1.045
Less than 30.0 (0.46) Less than 45.0 (0.70) 1.050

(e) Type IV straightedge measurement. Use a 3.0 meters metal straightedge to measure at right
angles and parallel to the centerline. Defective areas are deviations between the surface and the
bottom of the straightedge in excess of 6 millimeters measured between two contacts of the
straightedge or deviations in excess of 6 millimeters measured at the end of the straightedge.
Correct defective areas according to Subsection 402.16(g).

(f) Localized roughness and straightedge measurement pay reduction. Each area of localized
roughness exceeding the threshold MRI specified for the designated pavement roughness type
will receive a reduction in payment according to Table 402.7.

Each defective area, as determined by a 3.0-meter metal straightedge, will receive a reduction in
payment according to Table 402.7.

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 295
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 402.7
Localized Roughness and Straightedge Measurement Pay Reductions
Type I Type II & IV Type III
Localized Localized
Deduction Deduction Roughness Limit Deduction
Roughness
per per MRI per
Limit
Occurrence Occurrence Occurrence
MRI,m/km
$200 $300 Computed MRI value 2.208 to 2.680 $300
per Subsection 2.681 to 2.838 $450
2.839 to 2.995 $600
402.16(b) for Type I 2.996 to 3.154 $750
3.155 to 3.311 $900
402.16(c) for Type II
3.312 to 3.469 $1,200
402.16(d) for Type III 3.470 to 3.626 $1,500
3.627 to 3.784 $2,000
> 3.785 $4,000

(g) Defective area correction. Obtain approval before starting any corrective work. Allow 7
days for review and approval of correction method proposal.

Correct defective areas by one of the following methods:

(1) Milling. Replace the defective area by milling a minimum of one half the pavement depth
and repaving with the approved asphalt concrete mix. Mill the defective area according to
Section 413.
(2) Saw cutting. Replace the defective area by saw cutting and removing the defective area
and repaving with the approved asphalt concrete mix. Saw cut and remove the defective area
according to Section 203.
(3) Grinding. Use a diamond blade machine to grind off the defective surface area. Provide
the manufacturer and model of the equipment to be used. Identify the beginning and ending
station of each grind location, the grinding depth, and lateral extent of grinding. Optimize the
endpoints of the areas where a grinder is to be applied using ProVAL’s Smoothness
Assurance function in conjunction with the grinding simulation function. Submit the type of
sealant to be placed after grinding is completed for approval. Place sealant according to
Section 409 or 410. Limit the grinding depth to 12.5 percent of the design pavement
thickness. If grinding in excess of this depth, provide a minimum 25-millimeter overlay.
(4) Other. Submit a proposal for approval for other correction methods not listed above.
After corrections are made, re-measure the pavement profile according to Subsection 402.16(a).
Data from the re-measurement will be analyzed to determine the MRI or percent improvement,
areas of localized roughness, and the final PFrough. If correction and re-measurement of the
surface is required, the maximum allowable pay factor under Subsection 402.19 is 1.00.
If corrections are not allowed, no adjustment will be made to the final PFrough or localized
roughness pay deductions.

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 296
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

402.17 Acceptance. See Table 402.8 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Aggregate quality properties will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Mineral filler, antistrip additives, and WMA additives will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.03.

Construction of the HMA or WMA pavement course will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.04.

Asphalt content, core density and aggregate gradation will be evaluated under Subsection 106.05.
Pavement roughness will be evaluated under Subsection 106.04. Asphalt binder will be evaluated
under Subsections 106.03 and 106.04. Evaluations will consider the following:

(a) Asphalt content. The upper and lower specification limits are the approved JMF target value
plus or minus 0.4 percent;

(b) Core density. The lower specification limit is 91.0 percent of the maximum specific gravity
(density) determined according to AASHTO T 166 and AASHTO T 209. The percent compaction
will be determined using the maximum specific gravity (AASHTO T 209) from at least one
production sample per day;

(c) Aggregate gradation. The upper and lower specification limits are the approved JMF target
values plus or minus the allowable deviations shown in Table 703.5;

(d) Pavement roughness. The evaluation for payment will be made after defective areas are
addressed. See Subsection 402.16(g).

Measurement

402.18 Measure the Section 402 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

402.19 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 402 pay items listed in the bid schedule; except for the asphalt concrete pavement, contract
price will be adjusted according to Subsections 106.05 and 402.16. Payment will be full
compensation for the work prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Payment for asphalt concrete pavement will be made at a price determined by multiplying the
contract price by the material pay factor. The material pay factor is calculated as follows:

PFmaterial = 1 + [(PFVolumetric – 1) + (PFPG – 1)]

where:
PFmaterial = Material pay factor.
PFVolumetric = Pay factor for asphalt concrete pavement. PFVolumetric is the lowest single pay
factor determined for asphalt content, density, or aggregate gradation.

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 297
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

PFPG = Pay factor for asphalt binder. The PFPG formula is as follows:
PFPG = (PF1 + PF2 + PF3 + ….PFn) / n
where:
PF# = For each sample, the lowest pay factor determined from any test in
Table 402.8. If the lowest pay factor for a sample is in reject, the
sample’s pay factor is zero.
n= Number of samples tested.

If either the pay factor for the asphalt binder (PFPG) or the pay factor for asphalt concrete pavement
(PFVolumetric) is below 0.75, the lot for asphalt concrete pavement is in reject.
When the contract specifies a pavement roughness Type I, II or III, a separate pay adjustment will be
made for pavement roughness calculated as follows:
Type I, II or III Pay Adjustment = (RF)(PFrough - 1.00)(L) – (LRPR)
where:
PFrough = Pay factor from Tables 402-4, 402-5, or 402-6.
L= Total project length in lane kilometers of traveled way as specified in the
contract.
LRPR = Localized roughness pay reduction from Table 402.7.
RF = Roughness factor: 24,800 Metric.

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 298
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 402.8
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Method Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Source
Asphalt Measured and Aggregate − Subsection 1 per Source of Yes Before Not required
concrete tested for quality 703.07 type & material producing when using
aggregate conformance source Government
(703.07) (106.04 and 105) of material provided
source
Asphalt binder Measured and Quality − AASHTO " Asphalt " " −
(702.01) tested for M 320 supplier
conformance or
(106.04) mixing plant
Asphalt Process Gradation − AASHTO 2 per Crusher belt No 24 Not required
concrete control T 11 day per (during hours when using
aggregate (153.03) & stockpile production) a pre-crushed
(703.07) T 27 commercial
source

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 299
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 402.8 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Mix Design
Asphalt Measured and Gradation − AASHTO 1 per Stockpiles Yes 30 days −
concrete tested for T 11 & T 27 submitted before
mixture conformance mix design paving
(106.04) RAP asphalt − AASHTO " " " " −
binder content T 308
RAP asphalt − AASHTO " " " " Dry
gradation T 30 gradation,
no binder
removed
Bulk specific − AASHTO " “ " " −
gravity of T 84 & T 85
aggregate
(coarse & fine)
VMA − AASHTO " − " " −
R 35
VFA − " " − " " −
Air voids − AASHTO “ − “ “ −
T 269

Marshall − AASHTO " − " "

stability T 245
& flow
Tensile − AASHTO " − " " −
strength ratio T 283

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 300
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 402.8 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production Startup (control strip)
Asphalt Statistical Gradation: AASHTO 3 Behind the Yes 6 −
concrete (106.05) T 30 min paver hours
pavement ½ in (12.5 mm) I before
compaction or
as directed by
Engineer
No. 4 (4.75 mm) I
No. 30 (600 μm) I
No. 200 (75μm) I
Other specified II
sieves
Asphalt I AASHTO " " " " −
content (1) T 308
Core density (2) I AASHTO 5 In-place Cores 24 Deliver
T 166 min after to hours cores to
compacting Engineer Engineer
after
determining
specific
gravity and
compaction

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 301
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 402.8 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production Startup (control strip)
Asphalt Measured and Maximum − AASHTO 3 Behind the Yes 24 −
concrete tested for specific gravity(4) T 209 min paver hours
pavement conformance before
(106.04) compaction or
as directed by
Engineer
Mix − − First load Hauling No Upon −
temperature & as vehicle completion
determined before of test
by the dumping,
Engineer windrow
thereafter before pickup
or as directed
by Engineer
Process Nuclear − ASTM 5 At core No 24 See
control density D2950 min location hours Subsection
(153.03) before coring 402.12

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 302
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 402.8 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production
Asphalt Statistical Gradation AASHTO 1 per Behind the Yes 6 −
concrete (106.05) T 30 650 metric ton) paver hours
pavement before
compaction
or as
directed by
Engineer
½ in (12.5 mm) I
No. 4 (4.75 mm) I
No. 30 (600 μm) I
No. 200 (75μm) I
Other specified II
sieves
Asphalt content (1) I AASHTO " " " " −
T 308
Core density (2) I AASHTO " In-place " 24 −
T 166 after hours
compacting

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 303
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 402.8 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production (continued)
Asphalt Measured and Maximum − AASHTO Minimum Behind Yes 24 hours −
concrete tested for specific T 209 1 per day the paver
pavement conformance gravity (3)(4) before
(106.04) compaction
or as
directed by
Engineer
Placement − − First load Hauling No Upon −
temperature and as vehicle completion
determined before of
by Engineer dumping, measurement
thereafter windrow
before
pickup, or as
directed by
Engineer
Asphalt Measured and Quality See Table AASHTO 1 per In line Two See remarks Tested by
binder tested for 402.8 M 320 1800 tons of between 1-quart Government
conformance mix tank & (1 liter)
(106.04) mixing plan samples
Asphalt Process Gradation − AASHTO Contractor Cold feed No 24 hours −
concrete control at plant T 11 & T 27 determined or hot bins
pavement (153.03) (as
applicable)

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 304
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 402.8 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production (continued)
Moisture − AASHTO Contractor Stockpile " " −
content of T 255 determined
aggregates
Nuclear density − ASTM 1 per In-place " " −
D2950 150 meters after
compacting

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 305
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 402.8 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Finished Roadway
Asphalt Measured and Type I − AASHTO See Left No Within 14 Original
concrete tested for pavement R 56 & R 57 Subsection and right days of surface
pavement conformance roughness, 402.16 wheel Notice to before
(106.04) before paths Proceed construction
construction
(Initial MRI)
Type I − " " " ” Within 21 −
pavement days after
roughness, completing
after paving
construction
(Final MRI)
Type II − " " " ” Within 14 Original
pavement days of surface
roughness, Notice to before
before Proceed construction
construction
(Initial MRI)
Type II − " " " ” Within 21 −
pavement days after
roughness, completing
after paving
construction
(Final MRI)

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 306
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 402.8 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)

Finished Roadway (continued)

Asphalt Measured and Type III − AASHTO See Left No Within 21 −
concrete tested for pavement R 56 & R 57 Subsection and right days after
pavement conformance roughness 402.16 wheel completing
(106.04) (Final MRI) paths paving
" Process Surface − Straightedge Contractor See " 24 hours −
control tolerance measurements determined Subsection
(153.03) Subsection 402.16(e)
402.16(e)
(1) Use AASHTO T 308, Method A. Calculate the asphalt binder content by weighing the sample before and after the burn using a calibrated external
balance.
(2) Cut two 150-millimeter diameter side by side cores. Remove them with a core retriever and fill and compact the core holes with asphalt concrete
mixture. Label the cores and protect them from damage due to handling and temperature. Submit one core for verification testing. Dry the other core to
constant mass at 52 ± 3 °C or vacuum dry it according to ASTM D7227 before performing the core density and measuring the thickness. Use 62.245
pounds per cubic foot (997.1 kilograms per cubic meter) to convert specific gravity to density.
(3) After production paving has begun, use the average maximum specific gravity value (AASHTO T 209) for each day to adjust the percent
compaction for the cores that represent that day’s paving.(4) Do not use the supplemental procedure for mixtures containing porous aggregate (dry
back method of AASHTO T 209).

Section 402 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement by Marshall Mix Design Method 307
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 403. — ASPHALT CONCRETE

Description

403.01 This work consists of constructing asphalt concrete pavement using a hot or warm mix asphalt
(HMA or WMA).

Asphalt concrete type is designated as Type I or II according to Subsection 403.02.

Construction Requirements

403.02 Composition of Mix (JMF). Conform to current state department of transportation material
specifications for asphalt concrete.

(a) Type I. Submit a JMF approved within the past 12 months for approval at least 30 days
before production. For each proposed JMF, submit a production certification conforming to state
department of transportation specifications and conforming to design parameter (a), (b), or (c) for
the type of mix submitted and conforming to design parameter (d) in Table 403.1.

Table 403.1
Asphalt Concrete Mix Requirements
Design Parameters Specification
(a) Marshall (AASHTO T 245)
Stability, kilonewtons minimum 2000 (8.9)
Flow, 0.25 millimeters 8 - 14
Percent air voids (1) 3.0 – 5.0
Compaction, number of blows each end of test specimen 75
(b) Moisture susceptibility (AASHTO T 283)
Tensile strength ratio minimum 0.80
(1) The percent of air voids are based on AASHTO T 166, AASHTO T 209 and AASHTO T 269.

(b) Type II. Provide a mix composed of crushed stone or gravel and asphalt binder mixed in an
approved plant. Use an aggregate gradation and asphalt binder of a quality conforming to those
normally used locally by either Federal or state agencies for the type of work being constructed.

Submit the strength, quality, and gradation specifications for the asphalt concrete mix. Include
copies of laboratory test reports that demonstrate aggregate, asphalt binder, additive, and mix
properties meet Federal, state or local government agency specifications.

For both Type I and II, submit the maximum specific gravity (density) of the mix as determined by
AASHTO T 209.

403.03 Production Start-Up Procedures. See Subsection 153.04(b).

403.04 Mixing Plant. See Subsection 402.04.

Section 403 – Asphalt Concrete 308

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

403.05 Surface Preparation. See Subsection 402.06.

403.06 Weather Limitations. See Subsection 402.07.

403.07 Hauling. See Subsection 402.11.

403.08 Placing and Finishing. Do not use mixes produced from different plants unless the mixes are
produced according to the same JMF, use material from the same sources, and are approved.

Place HMA at a temperature conforming to Table 402.3. Place WMA at temperatures conforming to
Subsection 402.03. Measure temperature of the asphalt concrete mix in the hauling vehicle just
before dumping into the spreader or measure it in the windrow immediately before pickup.

(a) Asphalt concrete for roadway construction. Place the mix with a paver conforming to
Subsection 402.05. Control horizontal alignment using a reference line. Automatically control the
grade and slope from reference lines, a ski and slope control device, or dual skis. Use skis having
a minimum length of 6 meters.

In areas where mechanical spreading and finishing is impractical; place and finish the asphalt
concrete mix according to Subsection 403.08(b).

Offset the longitudinal joint according to Subsection 402.13.

(b) Asphalt concrete for non-roadway uses. Spread and finish each course by hand raking,
screeding, or by other approved methods.

403.09 Compacting. Thoroughly and uniformly compact the asphalt surface by rolling. In places
inaccessible to rollers, use alternate equipment approved by the Engineer. Do not cause cracking,
shoving or undue displacement.

Monitor the compaction process with nuclear density gauges calibrate according to the ASTM
D2950 calibration section within 6 months before use. Check the standard and reference on each day
of use according to the ASTM D2950 standardization and reference check sections. Compact to at
least 91.0 percent of the maximum specific gravity (density) determined in Subsection 403.02.

Continue compaction until surface marks are eliminated and cracks are sealed.

403.10 Joints, Trimming Edges, and Cleanup. See Subsection 402.15.

403.11 Pavement Straightedge Measurement. Measure the pavement surface using a 10-foot (3-
meter) metal straightedge at right angles and parallel to the centerline. Defective areas are deviations
between the surface and the bottom of the straightedge in excess of ¼ inches (6 millimeters) measured
between any two contacts of the straightedge or deviations in excess of ¼ inches (6 millimeters)
measured at the end of the straightedge.

Correct defective areas according to Subsection 402.16(g)(1) through (4). Obtain approval for the
method of correction.

403.12 Acceptance. See Table 403.2 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Section 403 – Asphalt Concrete 309

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Asphalt concrete mix properties will be evaluated under Subsection 106.04.

Construction of asphalt concrete work will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Pavement straightedge measurement will be evaluated under Subsection 106.04

Measurement

403.13 Measure the Section 403 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

403.14 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 403 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 403 – Asphalt Concrete 310

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 403.2
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production
Asphalt Measured and Core AASHTO 1 per In-place after Yes 24 Deliver
concrete, tested for density (1) T 166 650 metric tons compacting hours cores to
Type I conformance Engineer
(403.02(a)) (106.04) after testing
is completed
Surface Straightedge Continuously, Finished No " −
tolerance measurement, after pavement
Subsection compaction surface
403.11
Placement − First load Hauling vehicle " Upon −
temperature and as before dumping, completion
determined by or windrow of
Engineer thereafter before pickup measurement
Process control Gradation AASHTO Contractor Cold feed or " 24 −
(153.03) at the plant T 11 & T 27 determined hot bins hours
(as applicable)
Moisture AASHTO " Stockpile " " −
content of T 255
aggregates
Nuclear ASTM 1 per In-place after " " −
density D2950 500 feet compacting
(150 meters)
Asphalt Measured and " " 3 per In-place after " " −
concrete, tested for 650 tons compacting
Type II conformance
(403.02(b)) (106.04)
(1) Dry cores to constant mass at 125 ± 5°F (52 ± 3 °C) or vacuum dry, ASTM D7227 before testing. For asphalt concrete Type 1, cut two 6-inch
(150-millimeter) diameter side by side cores. Remove them with a core retriever and fill and compact the core holes with asphalt concrete mixture. Label the
cores and protect them from damage due to handling and temperature. Submit one core for verification testing. Dry the other core to constant mass at 125 ±
5 °F (52 ± 3 °C) or vacuum dry it according to ASTM D7227 before performing the core density and measuring the thickness. Use 62.245 pounds per cubic
foot (997.1 kilograms per cubic meter) to convert specific gravity to density.

Section 403 – Asphalt Concrete 311

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 404. — RESERVED

Section 404 – Reserved 312

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 405. — OPEN-GRADED ASPHALT FRICTION COURSE

Description
405.01 This work consists of constructing an open-graded asphalt friction course (OGFC).

Gradation is designated according to Table 703.6.

Asphalt binder is designated according to AASHTO M 320.

Antistrip additive type is designated according to Subsection 702.05. Where no type is designated,
use type 3 (lime).

Material

405.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Antistrip additive 702.05

Asphalt binder 702.01
Mineral filler 725.05
Open-graded asphalt friction course aggregate 703.08

Construction Requirements

405.03 Composition of Mix (JMF). Provide OGFC mixes of aggregate and asphalt binder designed
according to ASTM D7064 or other approved methods that meet the applicable material requirements
and design parameters in Table 405.1. Fabricate gyratory compacted specimens 6 inches (150
millimeter) in diameter and 100 millimeters nominal height. The Cantabro abrasion test is not required.
Provide an application temperature range.

Table 405.1
OGFC Mix Requirements
Design Parameter Requirement
Air voids
18% minimum
ASTM D3203 or D6752
Draindown 0.3% maximum,
ASTM D6390 by mixture mass
Moisture susceptibility
AASHTO T 283, as modified by 80% minimum
ASTM D7064

(a) Submission. Submit a written JMF, mix design reports, applicable charts, and design data for
verification at least 30 days before production. Include a signed statement prepared by the testing
laboratory that certifies the proposed JMF meets requirements. For the proposed JMF, submit the
following:

Section 405 – Open-Graded Asphalt Friction Course 313

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(1) Aggregate and mineral filler.

(a) Target values:
(1) Target value for percent passing each specified sieve size for the aggregate blend;
and
(2) Set target values within the gradation ranges shown in Table 703.6 for the required
grading.
(b) Source and percentage of each stockpile to be used;
(c) Average gradation of each stockpile;
(d) Representative samples from each stockpile. Use split samples of material taken at the
same time samples are taken for testing by the Contractor’s laboratory.
(1) 90 kilograms of aggregates proportioned by each stockpile according to the JMF;
and
(2) 2 kilograms of mineral filler, if proposed for the JMF.
(e) Results of aggregate quality tests performed within 1 year of use. For aggregate
quality tests, see Subsection 703.07.
(2) Asphalt binder. See Subsection 402.03(c)(2).
(3) Antistrip additives. See Subsection 402.03(c)(3).
(b) Verification. The verification process starts when required documentation and material are
received. Do not begin OGFC production until the JMF is verified.

(1) Aggregate gradations. The Contractor’s aggregate gradation is verified if the Engineer’s
gradation on a combined OGFC mix using the Contractor’s aggregate stockpile percentage
recommendations is within the Contractor’s target value gradation plus or minus the
following tolerance for each sieve:
Sieve Size Tolerance, % (±)
4.75 mm 3.0
2.36 mm 3.0
75 µm 1.0
(2) Moisture susceptibility. The Contractor’s retained tensile strength result determined by
AASHTO T 283 as modified by ASTM D7064 is verified if the Engineer’s result is 80
percent minimum.
(c) Changes and resubmissions. If a JMF is rejected or any source of material is changed, submit
a new JMF for verification. Up to 14 days may be required to evaluate a change after receipt of
required documentation and material. Approved changes in target values will not be applied
retroactively for payment.

The Engineer will deduct JMF evaluation costs resulting from the following:

(1) Contractor-requested changes to the approved JMF and

(2) Additional testing necessary due to the failure of a submitted JMF.

Section 405 – Open-Graded Asphalt Friction Course 314

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

405.04 Mixing Plant. See Subsection 402.04.

405.05 Pavers. See Subsection 402.05(a).

405.06 Surface Preparation. See Subsection 402.06.

405.07 Weather Limitations. Place the OGFC mix on a dry asphalt surface when the air temperature
in the shade is above 13°C and the road surface temperature is above 16°C. Stop placement if either
temperature falls below these minimums.

405.08 Preparing and Mixing Material. Prepare, mix, and control material according to Subsections
402.08 through 402.10, except do not heat the aggregate introduced into the mixer above the optimum
mixing temperature established in the JMF.

405.09 Hauling, Placing, and Finishing. Haul, place, and finish the mix according to Subsections
421.11 and 402.13. Place the mix within the approved temperature range. Minimize asphalt binder
drainage by discharging the mix into the paver within 1.5 hours of loading the truck. When surge bins
are used, begin this 1.5-hour limit at the time the mix is deposited into the surge bin.

405.10 Compacting. Roll the OGFC mix before the mix temperature drops below 93 °C or the
temperature recommended by the asphalt binder manufacturer. Use a steel-wheeled roller for
compacting the mix. Do not shove, distort, or strip the mix beneath the roller. Roll the mix parallel to
the centerline, commencing at the outside edge and progressing towards the center. On superelevated
curves, begin the rolling on the low side and progress to the high side. Limit rolling to that necessary to
consolidate the OGFC and bond it to the underlying surface.

405.11 Joints and Cleanup. Use butt joints for longitudinal and transverse joints. Protect the
completed OGFC from traffic until it has sufficiently hardened to resist abrasion, pickup, and raveling.

Dispose of material trimmed from the edges and other discarded asphalt concrete mix according to
Subsection 211.02(a)(2).

405.12 Straightedge Measurement. See Subsection 403.11.

405.13 Acceptance. See Table 405.2 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Aggregate quality properties will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Mineral filler and antistrip additive will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Asphalt binder will be evaluated under Subsections 106.03 and 106.04.

Asphalt content and aggregate gradation will be evaluated under Subsection 106.05. Evaluations will
consider the following:

(a) Asphalt content. The upper and lower specification limits are the approved JMF target value
plus or minus 0.4 percent.

(b) Aggregate gradation. The upper and lower specification limits are the approved JMF target
values plus or minus the allowable deviations shown in Table 703.5.

Section 405 – Open-Graded Asphalt Friction Course 315

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Measurement

405.14 Measure the Section 405 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

405.15 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 405 pay items listed in the bid schedule except the OGFC contract price will be adjusted
according to Subsection 106.05. Payment will be full compensation for the work prescribed in this
Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Payment for OGFC will be made at a price determined by multiplying the contract price by the
material pay factor. The material pay factor is the lowest single pay factor determined for asphalt
content or any individual sieve of the aggregate gradation.

Section 405 – Open-Graded Asphalt Friction Course 316

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 405.2
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Source
OGFC aggregate Measured and Quality − Subsection 1 per Source of Yes Before Not required
(703.08) tested for 703.08 type and material production when using
conformance source of Government
(106.04) material provided source
Asphalt binder " Quality − AASHTO " Asphalt supplier " " −
(702.01) M 320 or
mixing plant
Mix Design
OGFC asphalt Measured and Gradation − AASHTO 1 per Stockpiles Yes 30 days −
concrete mixture tested for T 11 & T 27 submitted before
conformance mix design producing
(106.04) Air voids − ASTM " − " " −
D3203
or
D6752
Draindown − ASTM " − " " −
D6390

Tensile − AASHTO " − " " Complete

strength T 283 AASHTO T 283
ratio as modified by
ASTM D7064

Section 405 – Open-Graded Asphalt Friction Course 317

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 405.2 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production
OGFC Statistical Asphalt I AASHTO 1 per Point of Yes 24 −
(106.05) content T 308 300 ton discharge hours
of the
mixing unit
Gradation AASHTO " " " " −
at paver T 30
No. 4 I
(4.75 µm)
No. 200 I
(75 µm)
Other specified II
sieves
Measured and Placement − − First load Hauling No Upon −
tested for and and as vehicle completion
conformance compaction determined before of
(106.04) temperature by Engineer dumping, or measurement
thereafter windrow
before
pickup and
pavement
surface
during
rolling
Asphalt " Quality − Subsection 1 per In line Yes − Test by
binder 702.01 900 tons between Government
of mix tank
&
mixing plant

Section 405 – Open-Graded Asphalt Friction Course 318

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 405.2 (continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)

Production (continued)
OGFC Process control Gradation − AASHTO Contractor Cold feed or No 24 −
(153.03) at plant T 11 & T 27 determined hot bins hours
(as applicable)

Moisture − AASHTO " Stockpile " " −

content of T 255
aggregates
Finished Roadway
OGFC Measured and Surface − Straightedge Continuously, Finished No 24 −
tested for tolerance measurements, after pavement hours
conformance Subsection compaction surface
(106.04) 403.11

Section 405 – Open-Graded Asphalt Friction Course 319

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 406. — FOG SEAL

Description

406.01 This work consists of applying an emulsified asphalt fog seal.

Emulsified asphalt is designated according to AASHTO M 140 or AASHTO M 208.

Material

406.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Blotter 703.12
Emulsified asphalt 702.02
Water 725.01(c)

Construction Requirements

406.03 Equipment. Furnish an asphalt distributor with the following:

(a) Heater for uniformly heating the asphalt;

(b) Full circulation spray bar adjustable to 15-foot 4.5-meter width;

(c) Positive controls including tachometer, pressure gauge, volume measuring device, or
calibrated tank to uniformly deposit asphalt over the full width within 0.09 liters per square meter
of the required rate; and

(d) Thermometer for measuring asphalt temperature in the tank.

406.04 Surface Preparation.

(a) Clean the existing surface of loose material, dirt, and other deleterious substances before
placing the fog seal. Remove or protect raised pavement markers, pavement markings,
reflectorized tape, and other material that interferes with the work. Protect service entrances such
as manholes, valve boxes, and drop inlets. Protect concrete work, rock walls, and other objects
adjacent to the work.

(b) Dry the surface before placing the fog seal.

406.05 Weather Limitations. Apply fog seals only when the following apply:

(a) Ambient air temperature is above 10 °C;

(b) Surface temperature is above 10 °C;

(c) Weather is not foggy or rainy;

(d) Rain or temperatures below 4 °C are not anticipated for at least 24 hours after application;

(e) Sustained winds are less than or equal to 16 kilometers per hour; and

Section 406 – Fog Seal 320

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(f) Application is completed at least 2 hours before sunset.

406.06 Asphalt Application. Dilute the emulsion one part water to one part emulsified asphalt.

Apply the emulsion according to Subsection 407.09 at a rate of 0.4 to 0.7 liters per square meter as
approved by the Engineer.

At locations where the fog seal cannot be applied with an asphalt distributor spray bar, apply the fog
seal uniformly using a hand spray attachment or by another approved method.

Allow the fog seal to cure undisturbed for at least 2 hours or until the emulsified asphalt breaks and
is substantially tack free.

Cover unabsorbed asphalt with blotter to protect traffic or minimize rain damage. Remove excess
blotter after the asphalt is absorbed. Dispose of material according to Subsection 203.05(a) and (d).

406.07 Acceptance. See Table 406.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Emulsified asphalt will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03. Furnish a production
certification with each load of emulsified asphalt.

Construction of fog seals will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Blotter will be evaluated under Subsection 106.03.

Measurement

406.08 Measure the Section 406 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Measure fog seal including water added for dilution. Show a breakdown of total emulsion and water
added on the load invoices supplied to the Engineer for payment.

Payment

406.09 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 406 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 406 – Fog Seal 321

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 406.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material Type of Characteristi Categor Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
or Acceptance c y Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
Product (Subsection)
(Subsecti
on)
Production
Emulsifie Process Placement − − Min 1 per Distributor No Before −
d control temperature distributor truck incorporating
asphalt (153.03) truck into work
(702.02)

Section 406 – Fog Seal 322

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 407. — CHIP SEAL

Description

407.01 This work consists of applying a single or double course chip seal.

Chip seal types are designated according to Tables 407-1 and 407-2.

Asphalt binder is designated according to AASHTO M 320 and emulsified asphalt is designated
according to AASHTO M 140 or AASHTO M 208.

Material

407.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsections:

Asphalt binder 702.01

Blotter 703.12
Chip seal aggregate 703.09
Emulsified asphalt 702.02
Fog seal 406

Construction Requirements

407.03 Qualifications. Provide a superintendent and foreman with experience in placing chip seals.
Submit the following for approval at least 14 days before starting chip seal work:

(a) Names of personnel; and

(b) A résumé for each individual describing their experience on at least 5 chip seal projects of
similar complexity.

407.04 Composition. Submit the following for approval at least 14 days before placement:

(a) Aggregate samples. 35 kilograms from the material produced for the project, the gradation
range represented, and the proposed target value for each sieve size;

(b) Asphalt sample. 4-liter sample with a production certification conforming to Subsection
106.03(a);

(c) Spread rates. The proposed spread rate for the asphalt and aggregate; and

(d) Density. The density of the aggregate according to AASHTO T 19, shoveling procedure.

407.05 Equipment.

(a) Asphalt distributor. See Subsection 406.03. Maintain two-way radio communication with
the aggregate spreader.

(b) Sweeper. Furnish two sweepers conforming to Subsection 409.05(c).

(c) Pneumatic-tire rollers.

Section 407 – Chip Seal 323

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(1) Three rollers each with a minimum compacting width of 1.5 meters, or two rollers each
with a minimum compacting width of 2.0 meters; and
(2) Gross mass adjustable within the range of 3.6 to 6.4 kilograms per millimeter of
compaction width.
(d) Aggregate spreader. Controls to uniformly deposit aggregate over the full asphalt width.

407.06 Surface Preparation. See Subsection 406.04(a). Prepare the surface as follows:

(a) Newly asphalt patched areas. Fog seal according to Section 406.

(b) Existing asphalt surfaces including recycled asphalt pavements. Dry the surface.

(c) Aggregate base course surfaces.

(1) When using an emulsified asphalt, make the surface damp; or

(2) When using an asphalt binder, dry the surface.
407.07 Weather Limitations. Apply chip seals only when the following apply:

(a) Ambient air temperature is above 18 °C;

(b) Surface temperature in the shade is above 16 °C;

(c) Surface temperature in the sun is below 66 °C;

(d) Weather is not foggy or rainy;

(e) Rain or temperatures below 4 °C are not anticipated for at least 24 hours after application;

(f) Sustained winds are less than or equal to 16 kilometers per hour; and

(g) Application is completed at least 2 hours before sunset.

407.08 Production Start-Up Procedures. Conduct a pre-chip seal preparatory phase meeting
according to Subsection 153.04(a).

On the first day of each chip seal layer placement, construct up to three 60- to 150-meter control
strips that are one-lane wide according to Subsections 407.09 and 407.10. Coordinate the control
strip locations with the Engineer. Start the first control strip at the proposed application rates. Vary
the asphalt material or surface aggregate application rate for each control strip. Construct the control
strip using the material, lay-down procedures, and compaction procedures intended for the entire
project.

Repeat the control strip process until an acceptable control strip is produced. Cease production until
the material and the control strip are evaluated and accepted. The Engineer will indicate which strip
will serve as the approved project control strip.

Acceptable control strips may remain in place and will be accepted as a part of the completed
project. Correct unacceptable control strips.

Section 407 – Chip Seal 324

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Use these start-up procedures when changing construction procedures, when resuming production
after a termination of production due to unsatisfactory quality according to Subsection 106.04, or the
beginning of a new construction season.

407.09 Asphalt Application. Calibrate asphalt distributors before the start of project and when
directed by the Engineer. Calibrate the spray bar height, check nozzle angle, and verify longitudinal
and transverse application rates according to ASTM D2995.

Spread building paper on the pavement surface at the beginning and end of each asphalt application
so distributor flow is started and stopped on the paper.

Apply asphalt uniformly at the optimum application rate determined from the control strip. Do not
apply more asphalt than can immediately be covered with aggregate. Correct skipped areas or
deficiencies.

At the end of each day’s production, provide the Engineer with documentation of calibrations and
application rates.

Remove and dispose of material spills and associated debris at the end of each shift according to
Subsection 203.05(a) and (d).

407.10 Aggregate Application. When emulsified asphalt is used, verify the aggregate stockpile
moisture daily and use moist surfaced aggregate.

When asphalt binder is used, dry the aggregate. Precoat the aggregate uniformly with 2 to 3 percent
of residual asphalt by mass of aggregate. Maintain the flow qualities of the precoated aggregate to
allow uniform spreading with the aggregate spreader.

Calibrate aggregate spreaders before the start of project and as directed by the Engineer. Calibrate
the longitudinal and transverse spread rates.

Apply aggregate uniformly at the optimum application rate determined from the approved control
strip. Apply the aggregate immediately after the asphalt material is applied. Operate the aggregate
spreader so asphalt is covered with the aggregate before wheels pass over it. For part-width
construction, leave an uncovered 150-millimeter wide asphalt strip to permit an overlap of asphalt
material.

Cover excess asphalt with blotter to protect traffic.

Correct excesses and deficiencies by adding or removing aggregate to achieve a uniform texture
before the asphalt cures.

Operate rollers at a maximum speed of 8 kilometers per hour. Do not allow the aggregate to be
displaced by pickup or sticking of material to the tire surface. Roll the surface to uniformly and
thoroughly bond the aggregate over the full width. Complete rolling within 1 hour after asphalt is
applied to the surface. Perform 3 passes with the rollers. Do not allow traffic to travel over any
aggregate until completion of rolling.

At the end of each day’s production, provide the Engineer with documentation for calibrations and
application rates.

Section 407 – Chip Seal 325

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Use a pilot car according to Section 635 to limit traffic speeds to 15 kilometers per hour during the
first 45 minutes after rolling and to 30 kilometers per hour for the next 24 hours.

Sweep the surface when the air temperature is below 32 °C. Do not displace embedded material.
Complete vacuum sweeping by the morning after construction. Dispose of material according to
Subsection 203.05(a) and (d).

407.11 Placing and Finishing. Apply the asphalt and aggregate according to Subsections 407.09 and
407.10 and Table 407.1. The application rates in these Tables are for estimating purposes only.
Determine the exact rates based on approved control strips.

Table 407.1
Approximate Quantities of Material for Single Course Chip Seal
Type Nominal Aggregate Estimated Estimated Estimated
Maximum Gradation(1) Quantity of Quantity Quantity of
Size of Aggregate (2) of Emulsified
Aggregate kilograms/m2 Asphalt Asphalt
Binder liters/m2
liters/m2
1A 19 mm A 24 – 29 1.41 – 1.91 2.17 – 2.94
1B 12.5 mm B 16 – 18 1.15 – 1.56 1.77 – 2.40
1C 9.5 mm C 13 – 15 0.79 – 1.27 1.22 – 1.95
1D 4.75 m) D 10 – 13 0.65 – 0.85 1.22 – 1.95
(1) See Table 703.7 for aggregate gradations.
(2) Aggregate masses are for aggregates having a bulk specific gravity of 2.65, as determined by AASHTO T 84
and AASHTO T 85. Make proportionate corrections when the aggregate furnished has a bulk specific gravity
above 2.75 or below 2.55.

407.12 Double Course Chip Seal. Apply each asphalt and aggregate layer according to Subsections
407.09 and 407.10 and Table 407.2. Table 407.2 application rates are for estimating purposes only.
Determine the exact rates based on approved control strips.

When using emulsified asphalt, wait at least 24 hours between applications. When using asphalt
binder, no wait is required between applications. Lightly vacuum sweep the first layer to remove
loose material.

Section 407 – Chip Seal 326

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 407.2
Approximate Quantities of Material for Double Course Chip Seal
Type Nominal Aggregate Estimated Estimated Estimated
(Thickness) Maximum Gradation(1) Quantity of Quantity of Quantity of
Size of Aggregate (2) Asphalt Emulsified
Aggregate pounds/yd2 Binder Asphalt
(kilograms/m2) liters/m2 liters/m2
2A (22 mm)
1st Application 19 mm A 24 – 29 1.31 – 1.86 1.95 – 2.72
nd
2 Application 9.5 mm C 13 – 16 1.86 – 2.08 2.72 – 3.17
2B (19 mm)
1st Application 12.5 mm B 18 – 24 1.22 – 1.40 1.77 – 2.17
2nd Application 9.5 mm C 12 – 14 1.31 – 1.72 2.04 – 2.63
2C (12.5 mm)
1st Application 9.5 mm C 16 – 21 0.77 – 1.2 1.22 – 1.77
nd
2 Application 4.75 mm D 7 – 10 1.22 – 1.40 1.77 – 2.17
(1) See Table 703.7 for aggregate gradations.
(2) Aggregate masses are for aggregates having a bulk specific gravity of 2.65, as determined by AASHTO T 84
and AASHTO T 85. Make proportionate corrections when the aggregate furnished has a bulk specific gravity
above 2.75 or below 2.55.

407.13 Acceptance. See Table 407.3 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Emulsified asphalt and asphalt binder will be evaluated under Subsections 106.03 and 106.04.
Furnish a production certification with each load of emulsified asphalt or asphalt binder.

Chip seal aggregate gradation will be evaluated under Subsection 106.05.

The upper and lower specification limits are equal to the calculated mean of all test results plus or
minus the allowable deviations shown in Table 703.7, except as follows:

(a) If the calculated mean value for any tested sieve exceeds the maximum gradation value
shown in Table 703.7, the upper specification is equal to the maximum gradation value plus the
allowable deviation, and the lower specification is equal to the maximum gradation value minus
the allowable deviation.

(b) If the calculated mean value for any tested sieve is less than the minimum gradation value
shown in Table 703.7, the upper specification is equal to the minimum gradation value plus the
allowable deviation, and the lower specification is equal to the minimum gradation value minus
the allowable deviation.

Construction of asphalt chip seals will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

407.14 Measure the Section 407 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Section 407 – Chip Seal 327

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Payment

407.15 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 407 pay items listed in the bid schedule except the chip seal contract price will be adjusted
according to Subsection 106.05. Payment will be full compensation for the work prescribed in this
Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Payment for the chip seal will be made at a price determined by multiplying the contract price by the
material pay factor. The material pay factor is the lowest single pay factor determined for each
specified sieve of the aggregate gradation for each aggregate gradation furnished.

When two gradations are furnished for a double chip seal the material pay factor is weighted for the
amount of each aggregate gradation spread as a percent of the total. The material pay factor is
calculated as follows:

PFMaterial = PF1st[SR1st/(SR1st + SR2nd)] + PF2nd[SR2nd/(SR1st + SR2nd)]

where:
PFMaterial = Material pay factor.
PF1st = Pay factor for first aggregate gradation. PF1st is the lowest single pay factor
determined for each specified sieve.
PF2nd = Pay factor for second aggregate gradation. PF2nd is the lowest single pay
factor determined for each specified sieve.
SR1st = Spread rate for the first aggregate per square yard (square meter).
SR2nd = Spread rate for the second aggregate per square yard (square meter).

Section 407 – Chip Seal 328

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 407.3
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)(3)
Source
Chip seal Measured and Quality − Subsection 1 per Source of Yes Before −
aggregate (1) tested for 703.09 material type material producing
conformance
(106.04 & 105)
Process Gradation − AASHTO 2 per Crusher belt No 24 Not required
control T 11 & T 27 day per (during hours when using
(153.03) stockpile production) a pre-crushed
commercial
source
Blotter " " − Subsection " " " " −
703.12
Asphalt binder (2) Measured and Quality − Section 1 per Point of Yes Before Provide
or tested for 702 material shipment incorporating Engineer
emulsified conformance type or into work 2 1-quart
asphalt (2) (106.04) delivery (1-liter)
split
samples

Section 407 – Chip Seal 329

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 407.3 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection) (3)
Production
Chip seal Statistical(3) Gradation I AASHTO See Note (3) Production Yes 24 −
aggregate (1) (106.05) (See Table T 27 & T 11 belt or hours
703.7 for spreader
applicable discharge(4)
sieves
Process control Moisture on − Visual Contractor Stockpile No Before −
(153.03) surface of inspection determine or spreader incorporating
aggregates (409.10) discharge into work
Asphalt Measured and Quality − Section 1 per Tanker Yes − Provide
binder (2) tested for 702 tanker truck or Engineer
or conformance including Distributor 2 1-quart
emulsified (106.04) trailer (1-liter)
asphalt (2) split
samples
Process control Placement − − Min 1 per Distributor No Before −
(153.03) temperature distributor truck incorporating
truck into work
(1) Applies to each aggregate grade furnished.
(2) Applies to each asphalt material furnished.
(3) For plan quantities less than 33,000 square meters, material will be accepted according to Subsection 106.03. For plan quantities greater than 33,000 square
meters, material will be accepted according to Subsection 106.05.For plan quantities between 33,000 and 200,000 square meters, the sampling frequency will be
determined by dividing the plan quantity by eight. If plan quantity exceeds 200,000 square meters, the sampling frequency will be one every 25,000 square meters.
(4) Select one point of sampling that must remain throughout project or lot.

Section 407 – Chip Seal 330

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 408. — RESERVED

Section 408 – Reserved 331

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 409. — MICRO SURFACING

Description

409.01 This work consists of applying a polymer-modified micro surfacing mix on an existing
pavement surface.

Material

409.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Micro surfacing aggregate 703.10(b)

Mineral filler 725.05
Polymer modified emulsified asphalt for micro-surfacing 702.02(b)
Water 725.01(c)

Construction Requirements

409.03 Qualifications. See Subsection 407.03.

409.04 Composition of Mix (JMF). Submit a written JMF for micro surfacing which conforms to
ISSA A143 for approval at least 14 days before production. Include the following:

(a) Aggregate gradation values. Percent passing for each sieve size for the aggregate blend;

(b) Emulsified asphalt content. Residual asphalt content, as a percent by mass of dry aggregate;

(c) Polymer-modifier. Type and amount of polymer-modifier solids based on the residual
asphalt content;

(d) Aggregate samples. 35-kilogram sample of each aggregate;

(e) Polymer-modified emulsified asphalt sample. 4-liter sample with a production certification
conforming to Subsection 106.03(a); and

(f) Mineral filler samples. 10-pound (5 kilogram) sample of each proposed mineral filler.

409.05 Equipment.

(a) Mixing equipment. Conform to ISSA A143.

(b) Spreading equipment. Conform to ISSA A143 with the exception that augers within the
spreader box are not required.

(c) Sweeper.

(1) Self-propelled;
(2) Vertical broom pressure control; and
(3) Vacuum capability.

Section 409 – Micro Surfacing 332

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(d) Pneumatic-tire rollers.

(1) Self-propelled;
(2) 9-metric ton gross mass with a tire pressure of 350 kilopascals; and
(3) Water-spray system.
(e) Auxiliary equipment. Furnish hand squeegees, shovels, and other equipment necessary to
perform the work. Provide power brooms, air compressors, water flushing equipment, and hand
brooms to clean the pavement surface.

Other equipment of proven performance may be used in addition to or instead of this equipment
when approved by the Engineer.

409.06 Surface Preparation. See Subsection 406.04(a).

409.07 Weather Limitations. Apply only when the following apply:

(a) Ambient air temperature is above 7 °C;

(b) Surface temperature in the shade is above 7 °C;

(c) Weather is not foggy, rainy, or overcast;

(d) Rain or temperatures below 0 °C are not anticipated for at least 24 hours after application.

409.08 Calibration. Calibrate mixing equipment according to ISSA A143.

409.09 Production Start-Up Procedures. Conduct a pre-surfacing preparatory phase meeting

according to Subsection 153.04(a).

On the first day of placement, construct one 100-meter long control strip, one lane wide. Coordinate
location of the control strip with the Engineer. Construct the control strip using material, lay-down,
and rolling procedures intended for the entire project.

Cease production after construction of the control strip until the material and the control strip are
evaluated and accepted by the Engineer. Repeat the control strip process until an acceptable control
strip is produced.

Acceptable control strips may remain in place and will be accepted as a part of the completed surface
treatment. Correct unacceptable control strips.

Use these start-up procedures when changing construction procedures, when resuming production
after a termination of production due to unsatisfactory quality according to Subsection 106.04, or the
beginning of a new construction season.

409.10 Application. Fog the surface with water in front of the spreader.

Blend the additives with the aggregate. Pre-wet the aggregate in the pugmill before mixing with the
polymer-modified emulsified asphalt.

Mix the surfacing material a maximum of 4 minutes. Ensure the mix is of uniform consistency as it

Section 409 – Micro Surfacing 333

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

leaves the mixer and conforms to the approved JMF. Adjust mineral filler and polymer-modified
emulsified asphalt content during construction when approved by the Engineer to adjust for
variations in field conditions.

Clean the spreader box before the start of each work shift.

Carry sufficient mix in the spreader to completely cover the surface. Spread the mix with a spreader
box. In areas not accessible to the spreader use hand squeegees to work the mix.

Remove streaks and transverse ripples as defined by ISSA A143 from the finished surface.

Provide straight lines along curbs and shoulders and do not allow runoff onto these areas. Provide
straight and neat starting and ending joints by masking surfaces at the start, end, and other locations as
directed by the Engineer.

For transverse joints, use a butt joint. Use building paper placed over previously placed micro surfacing
or other suitable method to avoid double placement of micro surfacing. Remove ridges or bumps in the
finished surface.

For longitudinal joints, place joints on lane lines. Use half passes and odd-width passes only in turnouts
and parking areas. Do not use half passes for the last pass in any paved area. Overlap longitudinal
joints no more than 75 millimeters. Limit the elevation difference at joints to less than 6 millimeters.

Begin rolling after the mixture has cured to the point where it will not pick up on the roller tires. Roll
parking areas and turnouts with at least two full-coverage passes with the roller. Rolling the mainline
roadway is not required.

Allow treated areas to cure completely before opening to traffic. Cure is complete when clear water
can be pressed out of the placed mix with a piece of paper without discoloring the paper.

Remove and dispose of material spills and associated debris at the end of each shift according to
Subsection 203.05(a) and (d).

Two weeks to one month after completion of micro surfacing application, sweep the entire treated
surface. Dispose of swept material according to Subsection 203.05(a).

409.11 Acceptance. See Table 409.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Polymer-modified emulsified asphalt will be evaluated under Subsections 106.03 and 106.04.
Furnish a production certification with each load of polymer-modified emulsified asphalt.

Micro surfacing aggregate will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Mineral filler will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 an 106.03.

Construction of the micro surfacing will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

409.12 Measure the Section 409 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
for each day’s production.

Section 409 – Micro Surfacing 334

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Payment

409.13 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 409 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 409 – Micro Surfacing 335

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 409.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Source
Micro Measured and Quality − Subsection 1 per Source of Yes Before −
surfacing tested for 703.10 material material producing
aggregate for conformance type
surface (106.04 & 105)
mixture(1) Process Gradation − AASHTO 2 per Crusher No 24 Not required
control T 11 & T 27 day per belt hours when using
(153.03) stockpile (during a pre-crushed
production) commercial
source
Polymer- Measured and Quality − Subsection 1 per Point of Yes Before Provide
modified tested for 702.02 material shipment incorporating Engineer
emulsified conformance type or into work 2 1-quart
asphalt(2) (106.04) delivery (1-liter)
split samples

Section 409 – Micro Surfacing 336

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 409.1 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production
Micro Measured and Gradation − AASHTO 1 per Stockpile Yes 24 −
surfacing tested for (See T 27 & T 11 40,000 m2 hours
aggregate for conformance Table 703.8
surface (106.04) for applicable
mixture(1) sieves)
Polymer- Measured and Quality − Subsection 1 per Point of No − Provide
modified tested for 702.02(b) day shipment Engineer
emulsified conformance delivery 2 1-quart
asphalt(2) (106.04) (1-liter)
split
samples
Process Placement − − Min 1 per Distributor No Before −
control temperature distributor truck incorporating
(153.03) truck into work
(1) Applies to each aggregate grade furnished.
(2) Applies to each asphalt material furnished.

Section 409 – Micro Surfacing 337

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 410. — SLURRY SEAL

Description

410.01 This work consists of applying an emulsified asphalt slurry seal mix on a pavement
surface.

Material

410.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Emulsified asphalt 702.02

Mineral filler 725.05
Slurry seal aggregate 703.10(a)
Water 725.01(c)

Construction Requirements

410.03 Qualifications. See Subsection 407.03.

410.04 Composition of Mix (JMF). Submit a written JMF for asphalt slurry seal which conforms to
ISSA A105 for approval at least 30 days before production. Include the following:

(a) Aggregate gradation values. Percent passing for each sieve size for the aggregate blend;

(b) Emulsified asphalt content. Residual asphalt content, as a percent by mass of dry aggregate;

(c) Aggregate samples. 35-kilogram sample of each aggregate;

(d) Emulsified asphalt sample. 4-liter sample with a production certification conforming to
Subsection 106.03(a); and

(e) Mineral filler samples. 5-kilogram sample of each proposed mineral filler.

410.05 Equipment.

(a) Mixing equipment. Conform to the requirements of ISSA A105.

(b) Mechanical-type single squeegee spreader box.

(1) Attaches to the mixer;

(2) Flexible squeegee in contact with the pavement surface to prevent loss of material;
(3) Adjustable to ensure a uniform spread over varying grades and crowns;
(4) Adjustable in width with a flexible strike-off; and
(5) Augers for uniform flow to edges.
(c) Sweeper. See Subsection 409.05(c).

(d) Pneumatic-tire rollers. See Subsection 409.05(d).

Section 410 – Slurry Seal 338

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(e) Auxiliary equipment. See Subsection 409.05(e).

Other equipment of proven performance may be used in addition to or instead of this equipment
when approved by the Engineer.
410.06 Surface Preparation. See Subsection 406.04(a).
410.07 Weather Limitations. See Subsection 409.07.

410.08 Calibration. Calibrate each mixing unit according to ISSA A105 in the presence of the
Engineer.

410.09 Production Start-Up Procedures. See Subsection 409.09.

410.10 Application. Mix the material according to ISSA A105. Fog the surface with water in front
of the spreader.

Blend the additives with the aggregate. Pre-wet the aggregate in the pugmill before mixing with the
emulsified asphalt.

Mix the surfacing material a maximum of 4 minutes. Ensure the mix is of uniform consistency as it
leaves the mixer and conforms to the approved JMF. Adjust mineral filler and emulsified asphalt
content during construction when approved by the Engineer to adjust for variations in field
conditions.

Clean the spreader box before the start of each work shift.

Carry sufficient mix in the spreader to completely cover the surface. Spread the mix with a
mechanical-type single squeegee spreader box. In areas not accessible to the spreader box, use hand
squeegees to work the mix.

Remove streaks and transverse ripples as defined by ISSA A105 from the finished surface.

Provide straight lines along curbs and shoulders and do not allow runoff on these areas. Provide
straight and neat starting and ending joints by masking surfaces at the start, end, and other locations as
directed by the Engineer.

For transverse joints, use a butt joint. Use building paper placed over previously placed slurry seal or
other suitable method to avoid double placement of slurry seal. Remove ridges or bumps in the finished
surface.

For longitudinal joints, place joints on lane lines. Use half passes and odd-width passes only in turnouts
and parking areas. Do not use half passes for the last pass in any paved area. Overlap longitudinal
joints no more than 75 millimeters. Limit the elevation difference at joints to less than 6 millimeters.

Begin rolling after the mixture has cured to the point where it will not pick up on the roller tires. Roll
parking areas and turnouts with at least two full-coverage passes with the roller.

Allow treated areas to cure completely before opening to traffic. Cure is complete when clear water
can be pressed out of the mix with a piece of paper without discoloring the paper.

Section 410 – Slurry Seal 339

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Remove and dispose of material spills and associated debris at the end of each shift according to
Subsection 203.05(a) and (d).

Two weeks to one month after completion of slurry seal application. Sweep and pick up the loose
material from the entire treated surface. Dispose of swept material according to Subsection 203.05(a).

410.11 Acceptance. See Table 410.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Emulsified asphalt will be evaluated under Subsections 106.03 and 106.04. Furnish a production
certification with each load of emulsified asphalt.

Slurry seal aggregate will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Mineral filler will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 an 106.03.

Construction of the slurry seal will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

410.12 Measure the Section 410 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
for each day’s production.

Payment

410.13 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 410 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 410 – Slurry Seal 340

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 410.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Source
Aggregate for Measured and Quality − Subsection 1 per Source Yes Before −
surface tested for 703.10 material of producing
mixture (1) conformance type material
(106.04 & 105)
Process Gradation − AASHTO 2 per Crusher belt No 24 Not required
control T 11 & T 27 day per (during hours when using
(153.03) stockpile production) a pre-crushed
commercial
source
Emulsified Measured and Quality − Subsection 1 per Point of Yes Before Provide
asphalt(2) tested for 702.02 material Shipment or incorporating Engineer
conformance type delivery into work 2 1-quart
(106.04) (1-liter)
split
samples

Section 410 – Slurry Seal 341

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 410.1 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production
Aggregate Measured and Gradation. − AASHTO 1 per Stockpile Yes 24 −
for tested for (See Table T 27 & T 11 40,000 m2 hours
surface conformance 703.8
mixture (1) (106.04) for applicable
sieves)
Emulsified " Quality − Subsection 1 per day Point of Yes − Provide
asphalt (2) 702.02 shipment Engineer
delivery 2 1-quart
(1-liter)
split
samples
Process Placement − − Min 1 per Distributor No Before −
control temperature distributor truck incorporating
(153.03) truck into work
(1) Applies to each aggregate grade furnished.
(2) Applies to each asphalt material furnished.

Section 410 – Slurry Seal 342

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 411. — ASPHALT PRIME COAT

Description

411.01 This work consists of applying a emulsified asphalt prime coat.

Prime coat asphalt grade is designated according to AASHTO M 140 or AASHTO M 208 for
emulsified asphalts or Subsection 702.02(c) for penetrating emulsified asphalt.

Asphalt application is designated in Subsection 411.06. If no application method is designated, use

Method 1.

Material

411.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Blotter 703.12
Crushed aggregate 703.06
Emulsified Asphalt 702.02
Penetrating emulsified asphalt for prime coat 702.02(c)
Water 725.01(c)

Construction Requirements

411.03 Equipment. Use equipment conforming to Subsection 407.05.

411.04 Surface Preparation. Prepare the surface to be primed according to Subsection 301.06. When
required, use sweeping or other approved method to remove loose dust and fine material and lightly
spray the surface with water.

411.05 Weather Limitations. Apply prime coat only when the following apply:

(a) Surface is dry or slightly damp;

(b) Ambient air temperature is above 10 °C and rising;

(c) Surface temperature in the shade is above 10 °C and rising; and

(d) Weather is not foggy or rainy.

411.06 Asphalt Application. Apply emulsified asphalt according to Subsection 407.09.

(a) Method 1 (topical). Apply undiluted emulsified asphalt formulated as a penetrating prime coat
at a rate of 0.45 to 1.35 liters per square meter. Exact application rate will be approved by the
Engineer.

(b) Method 2 (inverted prime). Apply undiluted emulsified asphalt at a rate of 0.90 to 1.35 liters
per square meter. Immediately apply crushed aggregate at a uniform rate of 10.9 to 13.6 kilograms
per square meter using an aggregate spreader. Exact application rate will be approved by the
Engineer.

Section 411 – Asphalt Prime Coat 343

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Leave a 150-millimeter wide uncovered strip of asphalt to permit an overlap of asphalt material
during part-width construction.

Do not allow the wheels of the aggregate spreader to come in contact with the asphalt. Immediately
seat the aggregate using a roller. Operate rollers at a maximum speed of 8 kilometers per hour.

(c) Method 3 (processed). Scarify the surface to a depth of 50 to 75 millimeters before applying
the asphalt as a prime coat. Apply emulsified asphalt at an undiluted rate of 1.10 liters per square
meter per 25 millimeters of scarification depth. Immediately process, re-spread, and compact the
material. When required, dilute a slow-setting emulsified asphalt by adding water. Other methods
of incorporating asphalt into the aggregate may be used when approved by the Engineer.

411.07 Curing. Cure surfaces primed with emulsified asphalt for at least 24 hours before covering with
the next course.

411.08 Maintenance. Maintain the primed surface by keeping it free of corrugations, potholing, and
loose material until the next course is placed. Remove dirt or other deleterious material and repair
damaged areas.

Spread additional blotter to cover unabsorbed asphalt. Remove excess blotter after the asphalt is
absorbed.

411.09 Acceptance. Emulsified asphalt will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Crushed aggregate and blotter will be evaluated under Subsection 106.03.

Construction of the prime coat will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

411.10 Measure the Section 411 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring prime coat by the square meter, measure the length along the centerline of the
roadway. Include treated widen areas when measuring the width.

When measuring prime coat by the cubic meter volume, measure in the hauling vehicle. Do not
measure water added for dilution. Indicate a breakdown of total emulsion and water added on the
load invoices supplied to the Engineer.

Payment

411.11 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 411 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 411 – Asphalt Prime Coat 344

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 412. — ASPHALT TACK COAT

Description

412.01 This work consists of applying an emulsified asphalt tack coat.

Tack coat emulsified asphalt grade is designated according to AASHTO M 140 or AASHTO M 208.

Material

412.02 Conform to the following Subsection:

Emulsified asphalt 702.02

Construction Requirements

412.03 Equipment. Use equipment conforming to Subsection 407.05.

412.04 Surface Preparation. Clean the existing surface of loose material, dirt, or other deleterious
substances by approved methods. When the surface is concrete, remove excess joint and crack filler.

412.05 Weather Limitations. Apply asphalt tack only when the following apply:

(a) Surface is dry and unfrozen;

(b) Ambient air temperature is above 2 °C and rising; and

(c) Weather is not foggy or rainy.

412.06 Asphalt Application. When using slow-setting emulsified asphalt, dilute by adding an equal
amount of water to the emulsified asphalt.

Apply the asphalt tack coat according to Subsection 407.09 at a rate of 0.15 to 0.70 liters per square
meter.

Apply the asphalt tack coat uniformly and completely by fogging with a hand spray attachment or by
another approved method when application with a distributor spray bar is not practical.

Squeegee the excess asphalt from the surface. Allow the tacked surfaces to completely cure before
placing the covering course. Place the covering course within 4 hours of placing the asphalt tack coat.

412.07 Acceptance. Emulsified asphalt will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Construction of the tack coat will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Section 412 – Asphalt Tack Coat 345

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Measurement

412.08 Measure the Section 412 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Measure tack coat including water added for dilution. Indicate a breakdown of total emulsion and
water added on the load invoices supplied to the Engineer for payment.

Payment

412.09 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 412 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 412 – Asphalt Tack Coat 346

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 413. — ASPHALT PAVEMENT MILLING

Description

413.01 This work consists of removing asphalt pavement by a cold milling process.

Construction Requirements

413.02 Equipment.

(a) Milling machine.

(1) Self-propelled;

(2) Sufficient power, traction, and stability to accurately maintain depth of cut;

(3) Capable of removing the pavement thickness to provide profile and cross slope;

(4) Automatic system to control grade elevations by referencing from the existing pavement by
means of a ski or matching shoe or from an independent grade control;

(5) Automatic system to maintain cross slope;

(6) System to effectively limit dust and other particulate matter from escaping removal
operations;

(7) Loading system or adequate support equipment to completely recover milled material at
removal rate; and

(8) Cutting width equal to at least one third of the lane width.

(b) Sweeper. See Subsection 409.05(c).

413.03 Milling. Use a longitudinal reference to accurately guide the machine. References may include
a curb, edge of pavement, or string attached to the pavement surface. Mill in a longitudinal direction.

Mill the transverse slope to within 6 millimeters in 3 meters of the required slope. Transition from one
transverse slope to another at a uniform rate. Uniformly mill the entire roadway lane width so the
cross-section of the new surface forms a straight line.

Transition between different depths of cut at a uniform rate of 17 millimeters of depth per 10 meters.
At the beginning and end of the milling work, construct a smooth transition to the original surface at
this rate. Do not leave an exposed vertical edge perpendicular to the direction of travel. When the
pavement remains open to traffic, limit differences in elevation between adjacent lanes according to
Subsection 402.15.

Mill the surface to conform to Subsection 403.11.

Use a sweeper immediately behind the milling operations to remove and completely recover all loose
material. Minimize the escape of dust into the air by misting. Dispose of recovered milled material
according to Subsection 211.02(a)(2).

Section 413 – Asphalt Pavement Milling 347

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Before opening to traffic, patch defects in milled surface according to the Engineer.

413.04 Acceptance. Asphalt pavement milling will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Milled surface will be evaluated under Subsection 403.11.

Measurement
413.05 Measure the Section 413 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring asphalt pavement milling by square meter, measure the length horizontally along the
centerline of the roadway.

Payment
413.06 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 413 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 413 – Asphalt Pavement Milling 348

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 414. — ASPHALT PAVEMENT CRACK SEALING

AND FILLING

Description

414.01 This work consists of routing, cleaning, sealing, and filling cracks in asphalt pavement surfaces.

Material

414.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsection:

Asphalt concrete 403

Joint sealants and crack fillers (hot applied) 712.01(a)

Construction Requirements

414.03 Equipment. Furnish equipment with the following capabilities:

(a) Router. A power rotary impact router or vertical spindle router capable of creating a reservoir
to the required depth and width without damaging adjacent pavement.

(b) Air lance. A hot compressed air lance capable of providing clean, oil-free compressed air at a
volume of 2.8 cubic meters per minute, a pressure of 830 kilopascals, and a temperature of 1100
°C.

(c) Application wand. A wand attached to a heated hose attached to a heated material chamber
that maintains material temperature within manufacturer’s tolerances. Supply proper wand tips for
desired application.

(d) Heating kettle. An indirect-heating double boiler capable of constant and effective agitation.
Fill the space between the inner and outer shells with oil or other heat transfer medium. Provide an
accurate and calibrated thermometer with a range from 90 to 320 °C in 2 °C graduations located so
the material temperature can be safely checked.

(e) Squeegee or screed. A hand-held squeegee or screed of appropriate configuration for filling
cracks flush with the surface, underfilling cracks to recess below the surface, or overfilling cracks
to an overband shape.

(f) Compressor. A compressor capable of producing oil- and water-free air at a minimum rate of
2.8 cubic meters per minute with a minimum continuous line pressure of 860 kilopascals.

414.04 Routing. Rout, clean, and seal cracks in a continuous operation. Do not allow traffic to close or
damage routed cracks.

Rout 3- to 13-millimeter wide cracks to produce vertical, intact walls and a flat bottom with a reservoir
centered over the crack. Make the reservoir two to three times the width of the crack. Rout cracks to a
depth of 13 to 19 millimeters.

414.05 Cleaning. Prevent debris from entering waterways, travel lanes open to public traffic, or
areas designated not to be disturbed. Remove dirt, dust, and other deleterious material from the crack

Section 414 – Asphalt Pavement Crack Sealing and Filling 349

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

walls and cavity using a stream of air or other approved methods. Blow or brush dry material off the
pavement surface.
414.06 Sealing and Filling. Dry the crack surfaces with the hot air lance before sealing or filling. Do
not seal or fill cracks when the pavement surface temperature is below 2 °C and weather conditions are
rainy or foggy.

(a) Sealing (routed cracks or cracks averaging 6 to 25 millimeters wide). Submit a copy of and
adhere to the manufacturer’s recommendations for heating and applying the hot applied crack
material. Heat the material to pouring temperature in a heating kettle and continuously agitate the
material.

Discard sealant when:

(1) Heated above the safe heating temperature recommended by the manufacturer;
(2) Held at pouring temperature for more than 12 hours;
(3) Reheated more than once; or
(4) Not consistent or uniform in appearance.
Warm and dry the crack surfaces using a hot-compressed air lance if the pavement temperature is
lower than 10 °C or moisture is present. Keep the lance moving to prevent burning the pavement
surface. Place and finish the material within 5 minutes after heating the pavement surface with the
lance.

Use an application wand to place material in each crack from the bottom up. Insulate the wand to
maintain pouring temperature while placing material. Return the wand to the heating kettle
immediately after sealing each crack. Use a squeegee or screed to strike off the material.

(b) Filling (cracks averaging more than 25 millimeters wide). Fill each crack with an asphalt
mix according to Section 403. Use a squeegee, screed, or other suitable equipment to force the mix
into the crack. Fill each crack flush with the pavement surface and compact the asphalt mixture.

Do not allow traffic on sealed or filled cracks until the sealant or filler has cured or is treated with
debonding material recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.

414.07 Resealing Cracks. Reseal cracks exhibiting adhesion failure, damage, incomplete filling,
foreign objects in the sealant, or otherwise rejected by the Engineer.

414.08 Acceptance. Material for asphalt pavement crack sealing or filling will be evaluated under
Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Asphalt pavement crack sealing and filling will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

414.09 Measure the Section 414 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Section 414 – Asphalt Pavement Crack Sealing and Filling 350

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Payment

414.10 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 414 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 414 – Asphalt Pavement Crack Sealing and Filling 351

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 415. — PAVING GEOTEXTILES

Description

415.01 This work consists of installing paving geotextile and asphalt binder between pavement
layers to form a waterproofing and stress-relieving membrane within the pavement structure.

Material

415.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Asphalt binder 702.01

Blotter 703.12
Paving geotextile 714.01(b)

Construction Requirements

415.03 Submittals. Submit the following for approval at least 10 days before installing the paving
geotextile:

(a) A production certification for the geotextile according to Subsection 106.03(a). Include the
name of the manufacturer, product name, and style number;

(b) A 460- by 460-millimeter sample from beyond the first outer wrap of the roll. Label the
sample with the lot and batch number, date of sampling, project number, item number,
manufacturer, and product name;

(c) The manufacturer’s recommended asphalt binder application rate based on field conditions
and geotextile asphalt retention properties; and

(d) A plan of operations for installing the geotextile.

415.04 General. Identify, store, and handle geotextile according to ASTM D4873 and the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Limit exposure to ultraviolet radiation to less than 2 days.

415.05 Surface Preparation. Seal cracks according to Section 414. Clean the existing surface of
loose material, dirt, or other deleterious substances by approved methods.

415.06 Weather Limitations. Apply asphalt binder and paving geotextile only when the following
apply:

(a) Surface is dry and unfrozen; and

(b) Surface temperature is at least 13 °C and rising.

415.07 Asphalt Binder Application. Apply asphalt binder to the pavement surface according to
Subsection 407.09 at 140 to 165 °C.

Spray the asphalt binder 150 millimeters wider than the paving geotextile. Do not apply the asphalt

Section 415 – Pavement Geotextiles 352

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

binder further than the temporary traffic control zone for this work.

Use the same asphalt binder grade as required in the approved job mix formula.

415.08 Paving Geotextile Placement. Before the asphalt binder cools and loses tackiness, place the
paving geotextile smoothly, with minimal wrinkling, onto the binder. Use equipment especially
designed to hold the roll and lay down the paving geotextile. Provide uniform tension, and broom the
geotextile smooth during placement. Slit, lay flat, and tack wrinkles or folds higher than 25
millimeters. Cut to remove any folds that result in three or more layers of geotextile. Broom and roll
the paving geotextile to maximize fabric contact with the pavement surface.

Overlap the geotextile 150 millimeters at longitudinal joints to ensure full closure. Do not overlap
transverse joints. Butt adjacent geotextile ends together at transverse joints. Apply additional asphalt
binder to paving geotextile overlaps to ensure proper bonding of the double fabric layer.

If asphalt binder bleeds through the fabric, treat the affected areas with blotter.

Broom the excess blotter from the geotextile surface before placing the overlay. Do not turn
equipment on the geotextile. Repair damaged fabric before placing overlay.

Limit the lay-down temperature of the asphalt concrete overlay to a maximum of 150 °C.

415.09 Acceptance. Asphalt binder will be evaluated under Subsections 106.03 and 106.04.

Material for paving geotextiles will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03. Furnish a
production certification for the geotextile.

Installation of the paving geotextile will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Blotter will be evaluated under Section 411.

Sealing cracks will be evaluated under Section 414.

Measurement

415.10 Measure the Section 415 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Measure blotter under Section 411.

Payment

415.11 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 415 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 415 – Pavement Geotextiles 353

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 416. — RESERVED

Section 417. — RESERVED

Sections 416 and 417 – Reserved 354

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 418. — ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT PATCHING

Description

418.01 This work consists of repairing distressed areas of asphalt concrete pavement by removing
and patching the pavement and underlying materials as required.

Separation and stabilization geotextile is designated according to Table 714.1.

Material

418.02 Conform to the following Sections and Subsections:

Asphalt concrete 403

Asphalt tack coat 412
Crushed aggregate 703.06
Separation and stabilization geotextile and geotextile filter 714.01(a)
Stabilization geogrid 714.03

Construction Requirements

418.03 Asphalt Pavement, Base, and Subgrade Full Depth Patch, Type 1 (FDP-1).

(a) Patch areas. Extend the repair area 300 millimeters beyond the distressed area. If patch
limits are within 600 millimeters of the pavement edge, extend the patch limit to the pavement
edge. Make the minimum transverse dimension of the patch half of the travel lane width and the
minimum longitudinal dimension of the patch 900 millimeters.

(b) Pavement removal. Mill completely through the pavement or saw cut and remove the
pavement. When saw cutting, cut through the existing pavement and around the perimeter of the
patch area. Make saw cuts perpendicular to the roadway surface and at right angles to each other.
Remove the pavement, base and subgrade to the depth shown in the plans.

(c) Patching. When required, place geogrid or geotextile according to Section 207. Place and
compact crushed aggregate base according to Subsections 302.04 and 302.05. Asphalt millings
may be used for crushed aggregate base material. Apply a tack coat to the edges of the patch area
according to Section 412. Place and compact asphalt concrete pavement to ensure the patched
surface matches the same grade as the adjacent surface.

418.04 Asphalt Pavement Full Depth Patch, Type 2 (FDP-2).

(a) Patch areas. Extend the repair area 300 millimeters beyond the distressed area. If patch
limits are within 600 millimeters of the pavement edge, extend the patch limit to the pavement
edge. Make the minimum length and width of the patch 900 millimeters.

(b) Pavement removal. See Subsection 418.03(b), except remove the pavement to expose
subbase or subgrade as shown in the plans.

Section 418 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement Patching 355

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(c) Patching. Apply a tack coat to the edges of the patch area according to Section 412. Place
and compact asphalt concrete pavement so the patched surface matches the same grade as the
adjacent surface.

418.05 Asphalt Pavement Partial Depth Patch, Type 3.

(a) Patch areas. Patch areas will be designated by the Engineer.

(b) Pavement removal. Clean the patch area by sweeping or other acceptable methods.

(c) Patching. Apply a tack coat to asphalt concrete surfaces within the patch area according to
Section 412. Place the asphalt material either by hand, with a blade, or other approved method.
Compact the asphalt concrete pavement patch to match the grade of the adjacent surface.

418.06 Disposing of Waste. Dispose of debris and unsuitable and excess material according to
Subsection 203.05(a) and (d).

418.07 Acceptance. Construction of asphalt concrete pavement patching will be evaluated under
Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Separation and stabilization geotextiles and geogrid will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.03.

Asphalt concrete will be evaluated under Section 403.

Crushed aggregate will be evaluated under Section 302.

Asphalt tack coat will be evaluated under Section 412.

Measurement

418.08 Measure the Section 418 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Do not measure asphalt tack coat.

Payment

418.09 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract unit price per unit of measurement for the
Section 418 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 418 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement Patching 356

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

DIVISION 500
RIGID PAVEMENTS

Section 500 – Rigid Pavements 357

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 501. — MINOR CONCRETE PAVEMENT

Description

501.01 This work consists of constructing minor concrete pavement on a prepared surface.

Material

501.02 Conform to the following Section:

Minor concrete 601

Construction Requirements

501.03 Composition (Concrete Mix Design). See Subsection 601.03, except, conform to Table
501.1.

Table 501.1
Composition of Concrete
Water/Cement Slump Air Content Coarse 28-Day
Ratio (maximum), (minimum) Aggregate Compressive
(maximum) AASHTO Size Number Strength
T 119 AASHTO (minimum),
M 43(1) AASHTO
T 22
0.45 100 millimeters 5.0% 57 & 67 4000 psi
(fixed form) (28 MPa)
(1) Meet the processing requirements of AASHTO M 43, Table 1 – Standard Sizes of Processed
Aggregate.

501.04 Equipment. Conform to the following:

(a) Forms. Furnish straight, steel forms. For curved edges with radii less than 45 meters, furnish
flexible or curved forms. Provide forms conforming to the following:

(1) Height equal to the pavement thickness at the edge;

(2) 3-meter minimum length;
(3) Stabilizing devices to secure form to the prepared surface and to withstand paving
operations and pressure of concrete with no visible movement or settlement;
(4) Joint locks to join form lengths tightly together; and
(5) Clean and free of hardened concrete, dirt, distortion, and rust.
(b) Paving and finishing.

(1) Fixed form construction. Furnish equipment conforming to either of the following:
(a) Mechanical, self-propelled, finishing machines capable of consolidating and finishing

Section 501 – Minor Concrete Pavement 358

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

the concrete with minimal hand finishing. Coordinate the number of driving wheels,
power of the motor, and the machine's mass to prevent slippage. Do not use machines that
displace the fixed forms; or
(b) Manual finishing machines or roller screeds capable of consolidating and finishing the
concrete.
(2) Vibrators. Furnish internal immersed tube or multiple spud type vibrators for paving
more than 200-millimeters thick. Surface pan type vibrators are acceptable for full-width
concrete consolidation of slabs 200 millimeters or less in thickness. Operate the vibrators at
frequencies within 5,000 to 8,000 vibrations per minute. Attach vibrators to the spreader or
finishing machine or mount on a separate carriage that precedes the finishing machine. For
construction of irregular areas, use hand-held vibrators operated at a frequency recommended
by the manufacturer.
(c) Concrete saws. Furnish concrete saws that are capable of sawing new concrete for crack
control to the required depth and alignment. Equip saws with blade guards and devices to control
alignment and depth.

(d) Joint sealing. Furnish sealing equipment according to the sealant manufacturer’s
recommendations.

501.05 Production Start-Up Procedures. Conduct a pre-minor concrete pavement preparatory phase
meeting according to Subsection 153.04(a).

501.06 Surface Preparation and Setting Forms. Prepare the roadbed surface according to Section
301. Maintain the surface to avoid the development of loose and uncompacted material.

Set and align forms to the plan dimensions and elevations. Securely brace forms so they will not bulge
or warp during concrete placement. Apply form release agent or form oil to the inside form faces.
Align forms to the dimensions and elevations in the plans and assure there is no bulging or warping.

Check and correct roadbed surface deformations and rutting exceeding 13 millimeters and uniformly
dampen the surface before placing concrete.

501.07 Placing Concrete. At least 14 days before the start of concrete placement operations, arrange a
pre-paving conference. Coordinate attendance with the Engineer and applicable subcontractors. Submit
and be prepared to discuss the following:

(a) Proposed pour sequence and placement schedule;

(b) Approved concrete mix design;

(c) Contractor quality control plan;

(d) Equipment, batching, mixing, placing, and curing requirements;

(e) Subsections 106.03 and 106.04;

(f) Jointing plan, joint forming or sawing operations, rain protection plan, hot and cold weather
paving plan, and opening to traffic requirements; and

Section 501 – Minor Concrete Pavement 359

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(g) Traffic control plan.

For weather limitations, storing, handling, batching, and mixing material and delivering concrete,
conform to Subsections 552.04 through 552.08 and 552.10.

Deposit concrete between the forms to a uniform height. Consolidate concrete to remove voids and air
pockets. Do not move concrete horizontally with vibrators.

Strike off and place concrete with a form-riding paving machine or manual fixed form paving
equipment. In irregular areas where a paving machine is impractical, place concrete using templates,
screeds, or other methods approved by the Engineer.

Carry a slight excess of concrete in front of the leading edge of the template or screed. After strikeoff
and before bleed water appears on the surface, float to the required grade and cross-section. Finish the
concrete pavement to minus ¼ inch (6 millimeters) or plus 10 millimeters of the thickness required.

When concrete is placed adjoining a previously-constructed lane of pavement, do not operate

mechanical equipment on the existing lane until the lane has attained:

• a minimum flexural strength of 3.1 megapascals according to AASHTO T 23 and AASHTO

T 97; or
• a compressive strength of 21 megapascals according to AASHTO T 22 and AASHTO T 23.

When required, place reinforcing steel according to Section 554. If placing rebar before placing
concrete, position the rebar on acceptable supports. If placing rebar after placing concrete,
mechanically insert the rebar to the required depth. Reinforcing bars and steel supports are to be epoxy-
coated. Keep epoxy-coated reinforcing steel free of damage and distortion. Steel wire fabric and mats
are not required to be epoxy-coated.

When rain is threatening during paving operations, stop paving operations and protect the concrete
pavement from rain with plastic sheeting or other methods approved by the Engineer. Remove, replace,
or repair pavement damaged by rain or hail as directed by the Engineer at no cost to the Government.

501.08 Joints. Construct joints at locations and dimensions indicated on the plans. If jointing locations
are not indicated on the plans, submit a jointing plan according to Subsection 104.03. Indicate locations
of contraction, construction, and isolation joints.

Do not vary longitudinal joints more than 13 millimeters and transverse joints more than 6 millimeters
from true alignment. When curbs or medians are constructed integral with the pavement, construct
transverse joints continuous through the curb or median. Clean joints of deleterious material, including
concrete slurry, and protect the joints until sealed.

(a) Longitudinal joints. Construct longitudinal construction joints by using steel fixed forms and a
keyway along the joint.

Where required, place deformed steel tie bars perpendicular to the longitudinal joints with
mechanical equipment or rigidly secured chairs without damaging or disrupting the concrete.
Along longitudinal construction joints, tie bars may be bent at right angles against the form of the
first lane constructed and straightened into final position before placing concrete in the adjacent
lane. Repair or replace broken or damaged tie bars.

Section 501 – Minor Concrete Pavement 360

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Threaded hook bolts may be used instead of tie bars. Fasten hook bolts to the form of the
longitudinal construction joint.

Construct joints as follows:

(1) Formed joints. Form joints with an approved nonmetallic or removable device while the
concrete is plastic but set sufficiently to maintain the formed joint. When adjacent lanes are
constructed separately, form the sealant reservoir in the lane placed last.
(2) Sawed joints. After placing concrete, saw joints approximately 3 millimeters wide as
soon as equipment can be supported and before uncontrolled cracking occurs. Do not ravel
the joints while sawing. Saw longitudinal joints immediately after sawing transverse joints.
Protect the sawed concrete faces from drying during the curing period. Saw sealant reservoirs
no sooner than 72 hours after placing the concrete.
If necessary, continue sawing day and night, regardless of weather conditions.
Do not saw a joint if a crack occurs at or near the joint location before sawing. Discontinue
sawing when a crack develops ahead of the saw.
Remove and replace newly-placed concrete pavement where uncontrolled cracking occurs. Dowel
and tie replacement pavement to adjacent pavement as specified.

(b) Transverse contraction joints. When required, construct contraction joints according to (a)(1)
or (a)(2) above.

Where required, place dowel bars through and centered on traverse joints and in the middle of the
slab depth. Align and hold dowels parallel to the surface and centerline of the slab by a metal
assembly that remains in the pavement and is rigidly secured to the base or subgrade using stakes
or nails. Limit deviations from parallel to 6 millimeters in the length of the dowel bar. Assure
proper alignment of joint and dowel bar assemblies.

Coat each dowel bar with an approved bond breaker. Limit bond breaker coating thickness to 380
micrometers.

Concrete edges adjacent to the joint may be rounded or beveled to a radius no greater than 6
millimeters or as approved. Resaw or grind any joint having an insufficient opening. Where a joint
is larger than required, furnish a larger size joint seal as approved.

(c) Transverse construction joints. Construct transverse construction joints only at locations
specified, at the end of each work shift, or when concrete placement is interrupted for more than 30
minutes. If necessary, remove and dispose of the excess concrete to the last preceding joint.

When required, install dowel bars in transverse construction joints according to (b) above.

Use a metal or wooden bulkhead to form the joint, shaped to the pavement cross-section and
designed to permit the installation of dowel bars.

(d) Isolation joints. Form isolation joints around manholes, utility boxes, foundations, other fixed
objects, or as indicated on the plans. Place a 13-millimeter pre-formed joint filler continuously
around or along each structure that extends into or through the pavement before concrete is placed.

Section 501 – Minor Concrete Pavement 361

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

After the concrete hardens, recess the joint filler about 19 millimeters to allow a reservoir for
sealant.

When required, place steel wire fabric at the location and orientation specified. Use metal or plastic
chairs or other methods approved by the Engineer to support the steel wire fabric.

501.09 Surface Finishing. Protect the surface from rain damage.

After floating, check the surface of the fresh concrete with a 3-meter straightedge. Remove high areas
indicated by the straightedge. Lap each successive check with the straightedge 5 feet (1.5 meters) over
the previous check path.

Before the concrete has initially set, work the pavement edges on each side of isolation joints, formed
joints, transverse and longitudinal construction joints, and emergency construction joints to produce a 6
millimeters or less continuous radius and a smooth, dense mortar finish. Do not use mortar buildup to
round edges.

As soon as excess moisture has disappeared and while the concrete is still plastic enough to make a
granular surface possible, texture the surface to produce a skid resistant surface. Use the method
specified and conform to the following:

(a) Transverse tine finish. Drag two layers of moistened burlap along the pavement in the
direction of paving without tearing or marring the surface. Following the burlap drag, use a tining
comb to form grooves in the pavement surface. Space tines randomly 13 to 19 millimeters apart.
Produce grooves that are 1.6 to 5 millimeters wide and 3 to 5 millimeters deep. Tine perpendicular
to the centerline without tearing the concrete surface or loosening surface aggregate.

(b) Broom finish. Broom the surface with a steel or stiff-bristled fiber broom to produce
corrugations between 1.6 to 3 millimeters deep. Broom perpendicular to the centerline from edge to
edge with adjacent strokes slightly overlapped. Use the same type and manufacture of broom for all
paved surfaces to provide a consistent appearance.

(c) Exposed aggregate finish. Broom the surface. Use stiff brushes approved by the Engineer.
Exercise care to prevent marring of the surface and cracking or chipping of slab edges or joints. If
approved by the Engineer, apply a light spray of retardant to the unfinished surface to facilitate this
work.

Broom transversely across the pavement. Pull the loosened semi-stiff mortar off the pavement.
Remove the mortar from adjacent pavement. Broom parallel to the centerline. Continue this
operation until a sufficient amount of coarse aggregate is exposed. Other methods of aggregate
exposure will be permitted if satisfactory results are demonstrated.

After curing, wash the surface with water and brush to remove laitance and cement from the
exposed coarse aggregate.

501.10 Curing. Immediately after finishing and when marring will not occur; cure the surface and
exposed sides of concrete for at least 72 hours. Do not leave the concrete exposed for more than
30 minutes during the curing period. Cure using one of the following methods:

(a) Water method. Cure according to Subsection 552.15(b). Cover the entire surface of the
pavement and edges of the slab with water saturated mats. Extend the mats at least twice the

Section 501 – Minor Concrete Pavement 362

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

thickness of the pavement beyond the edges of the slab. Place the mats in complete contact with the
surface. Use weights or other approved methods to maintain contact; or

(b) Liquid membrane curing compound method. Cure according to Subsection 552.15(c).

Remove forms when the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage but no earlier than 12
hours after placing concrete. Protect the sides of the exposed slabs with a curing method equal to that
provided for the surface. Prevent erosion of the base course beneath the exposed pavement edges until
shoulders are constructed.

501.11 Sealing Joints. Saw cut and seal joints before the pavement is opened to construction or public
traffic.

Where sealant reservoirs are required, clean each sealant reservoir of foreign material including
membrane curing compound and concrete slurry. Blow dry joints with moisture free compressed air.
Do not apply sealing material unless the joint faces are clean and surface dry, and the joint is free of
incompressibles.

Use preformed joint seals, silicone sealant, or hot-poured sealant for isolation joints. Use silicone or
hot-poured sealants for longitudinal and transverse contraction joints.

(a) Silicone or hot-poured sealants. Install backer rod with a steel wheel to the depth required. Do
not stretch or twist the backer rod during installation. Limit the length of backer rod installed to that
which can be sealed during the same workday.

Place joint sealing material when the air temperature is over 4°C or as specified by the
manufacturer. Remove any excess or spilled material and clean the pavement surface. Do not use
sand or similar material to cover the seal. For sealants that are not self-leveling, tool the surface of
the sealant to the dimensions required in the plans.

(b) Preformed joint seals. Furnish the seal in one piece in the size specified for the joint opening.
Install seals with a lubricant adhesive covering both sides of the joint. Compress the seal to
between 20 and 50 percent of its nominal width or as specified by the manufacturer. Install the top
of the seal about 6 millimeters below the pavement surface.

Remove and replace seals that are damaged, twisted, improperly positioned, or stretched more than
3 percent.

501.12 Pavement Straightedge Measurement. Measure the pavement surface after the concrete has
cured. Use a 3-meter metal straightedge to measure at right angles and parallel to the centerline.
Defective areas are deviations between the surface and the bottom of the straightedge in excess of 6
millimeters, measured between any two contacts of the straightedge, or deviations in excess of 6
millimeters measured at the end of the straightedge.

Correct defective areas by diamond grinding, slab removal, or other methods approved by the
Engineer.

501.13 Opening to Traffic. Do not allow traffic on new concrete pavement earlier than 14 days after
concrete placement unless concrete tests indicate one of the following conditions is obtained:

(a) Flexural strength of 4 megapascals according to AASHTO T 97; or

Section 501 – Minor Concrete Pavement 363

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Compressive strength of 28 megapascals according to AASHTO T 22.

Do not allow traffic on the pavement when joint sealant is tacky and traffic debris would imbed into
the sealant.

501.14 Acceptance. See Table 501.2 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Material for minor concrete pavement will be evaluated under Section 601.

Construction of concrete pavement will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

The concrete mixture's slump, air content, density, temperature, and compressive strength will be
evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Pavement straight edge will be evaluated under Subsection 106.04.

Measurement

501.15 Measure the Section 501 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring concrete pavement by the square meter, measure the length horizontally along the
centerline of the roadway. Measure the width including allowable curve widening.

Payment

501.16 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 501 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 501 – Minor Concrete Pavement 364

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 501.2
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Source
Aggregate Measured and Quality − AASHTO 1 per Source of Yes 14 days −
(703.01 tested for M 80 material material before
& 703.02) conformance M6 type paving
(106.04 & 105) M 43
Mix Design
Concrete Measured and All − Subsection 1 per Source of Yes 14 days −
composition tested for 501.03 mix material before
(501.03) conformance design paving
(106.04 & 105)

Section 501 – Minor Concrete Pavement 365

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 501.2 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material Type of Characteris Catego Test Sampling Point of Split Reporti Remarks
or Acceptanc tic ry Methods Frequenc Sampling Sampl ng
Product e Specificatio y e Time
(Subsectio (Subsectio ns
n) n)
Production
Concrete Measured Density − AASHTO 1 per Point of No Upon −
and T 121 load (2) discharge completi
(3)
tested for ng
conformanc tests
e Air content − AASHTO " " " " −
(106.04) T 152 or T
196
Slump − AASHTO " " " " −
T 119
Temperature − Field " " " " −
measured
Compressiv − AASHTO 1 set per " See " Deliver
e T 23 & T 22 170 m2 Note verification
strength (1)(4) but not (4) cylinders to
less than the Engineer or
1 set per designated
day location in time for 28 day
break
Aggregate, Process Gradation − AASHTO 1 per Bin No Before −
coarse control T 11 & T 27 day min discharge, batching
and fine (153.03) conveyor
belt, or
stockpile
Moisture − AASHTO " " " " −
T 255

Concrete " Surface − Straightedge Subsectio Concrete " While −

tolerance measuremen n surface, concrete
ts 501.07 after is still
Subsection floating workable
501.07

Section 501 – Minor Concrete Pavement 366

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 501.2 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material Type of Characteri Categor Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reportin Remarks
or Acceptanc stic y Specification Frequency Samplin Sampl g
Product e s g e Time
(Subsectio (Subsectio
n) n)
Finished Roadway
Concrete Measured Surface − Straightedge Successivel Finished No 24 −
pavement and tolerance measurements y, pavement hours
(501.12) tested for Subsection after surface
conforman 501.12 concrete
ce has
(106.04) hardened
Pavement − AASHTO " " " " When
thickness T 148 directed
by
the
Engineer
(1) A single compressive strength test result is the average result from two 150 millimeter by 300 millimeter or three
100 millimeter by 200 millimeter cylinders cast from the same load and tested at 28 days.
(2) This frequency may be reduced by the Engineer if produced material proves to be consistent.
(3) Sample according to AASHTO R 60 except composite samples are not required.
(4) Make at least four 150 millimeter by 300 millimeter or six 100 millimeter by 200 millimeter compressive strength
test cylinders and carefully transport the cylinders to the project curing facility. Two or three cylinders will be used for
28-day compressive strength tests. The remaining cylinders will be used by the Engineer for verification testing or
other designated purposes.

Section 501 – Minor Concrete Pavement 367

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 502. — CONCRETE PAVEMENT RESTORATION

Description

502.01 This work consists of the restoring and repairing concrete pavement. Restoration and repair
of concrete pavement includes full depth patching, partial-depth patching, pavement jacking,
subsealing, surface grinding, crack and joint repair, and cleaning.

Material

502.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsections

Latex modifier 711.04

Minor concrete pavement 501
Nonshrink grout 725.13(b)
Polymer concrete and mortar 725.14
Reinforcing steel 709.01
502.03 Composition of Mix (Concrete Mix Design). Design the concrete mix according to
Subsection 501.03.

502.04 Equipment. Furnish equipment conforming to the following:

(a) Waterblaster. Furnish a high-pressure water jet machine with at least 17.5 megapascals
pressure and is capable of removing residual sealant, oil, or other foreign material in joints.

(b) Air compressors. Furnish air compressors with a minimum nozzle pressure of 700
kilopascals and capable of dislodging loose debris and drying joints and cracks.

(c) Grout plant. Furnish a grout plant which consists of a positive displacement cement injection
pump and a high-speed colloidal mill. Operate colloidal mill at speeds necessary to make a
homogeneous mixture.

Furnish an injection pump having a pressure capability of 1900 ± 170 kilopascals when pumping
a grout slurry mixed to a 12-second flow cone time and that continuously pumps at a minimum
rate of 6.0 liters per minute. The system may be modified by adding a recirculating hose and
valve at the discharge end of the pump.

Produce grout through a meter or scale capable of measuring the total day's consumption. Furnish
hoses and fittings to provide a positive seal during grout injection.

(d) Drills. Furnish drills that meet the following:

(1) Drills for pavement jacking. Furnish rock drills capable of drilling straight, minimum
1½ inch (38 millimeters) diameter holes through the concrete slab, steel reinforcement, and
base material. Furnish rock drills weighing less than 27 kilograms that are capable of drilling
with a downward pressure of less than 90 kilograms. Furnish an auger to open clogged holes
and existing pavement jacking holes.

Section 502 – Concrete Pavement Restoration 368

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(2) Drills for dowels and tie bars. Furnish drills capable of drilling specified hole diameters
for dowel bars or reinforcing steel tie bars. Drills for dowel bars must be capable of drilling
holes that meet the vertical and horizontal tolerance of ± 6 millimeters along the centerline of
the dowel with respect to a horizontal line that is perpendicular to the plane established
by the joint.
(e) Surface diamond grinder. Furnish power driven, self-propelled grinding equipment,
specifically designed to smooth and texture concrete pavement with diamond blades. Furnish
equipment that:
(1) Cuts or planes at least 900 millimeters in width;
(2) Does not encroach on traffic movement outside of the work area; and
(3) Grinds the surface without spalling.
(f) Hydroblaster. Provide hydroblasting equipment conforming to Subsection 560.05.
(g) Cold planing (milling) machine. Provide a milling machine, with a micromilling head that
does not exceed the bearing capacity of the concrete pavement and that conforms to Subsection
413.02(a).
(h) Slab stabilization testing. Furnish the following testing equipment:
(1) A 2-axle truck with dual rear wheels. Load the rear axle to 80 kilonewtons evenly
distributed between the 2 wheel paths;
(2) Static load measuring gauges consisting of 4 gauges on 2 gauge mounts, 2 gauges per
mount, capable of detecting slab movement under load; and
(3) A modified Benkelman beam or similar approved device.

502.05 Partial-Depth Patching (less than 100-millimeters in depth). This work consists of
patching spalls, potholes, corner breaks, or other surface distresses in concrete pavement.

(a) Patch material. Use a polymer concrete for patches less than or equal to 38 millimeters deep.
Use hydraulic cement concrete designed and approved according to Subsection 501.03 for
patches greater than 38 millimeters deep.

(b) Patch area preparation. Extend the limits of repair at least 100 millimeters outside the
deteriorated area. Saw vertically along the perimeter of the patch area, parallel to the existing
joint, and to a minimum depth of 38 millimeters. Near vertical edges from milling or grinding
machines are acceptable. Repair saw overcuts and nicks to adjacent pavement outside the
perimeter of the repair area with noncorrosive, non-shrink grout.

Break out concrete within the patch area to a minimum depth of 38 millimeters to expose sound
concrete. Sandblast exposed concrete faces clean of loose particles, oil, dust, traces of asphalt
concrete, and other contaminants before patching.

Remove non-concrete shoulders adjacent to the patch longitudinally to the depth of the patch and
to a maximum width of 300 millimeters to facilitate placing form work. Restore and compact
shoulders with material similar to the existing shoulder.

Dispose of the concrete according to Subsection 203.05.

Section 502 – Concrete Pavement Restoration 369

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(c) Placing concrete. Apply an epoxy resin adhesive according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Delay concrete placement until the epoxy becomes tacky.

Place and consolidate the concrete to eliminate voids at the interface of the patch and existing
concrete. Place and consolidate hydraulic cement concrete according to Subsection 501.07. Place
and consolidate polymer concrete according to climate conditions and methods recommended by
the manufacturer.

(d) Joints. If a repair area abuts a working joint, repair the joint similar to the existing joint to
maintain a working joint. Form a new joint to the same width as the existing joint. Use
compressible joint filler material as inserts to prevent intrusion of the repair material into the
joint. Seal the joint according to Subsection 502.08.

(e) Finishing and coloring concrete. Finish patches according to Subsection 501.09 to match
the plane and texture of the contiguous pavement. Cure hydraulic cement concrete according to
Subsection 501.10. Cure polymer concrete as recommended by the manufacturer.

When colored concrete is required, begin concrete pavement restoration work after colored test
panels submitted according to Subsection 501.03 are approved.

Remove sandblasting residue immediately before placing the epoxy resin adhesive.

502.06 Full Depth Patching (welded wire reinforced, jointed, plain doweled, or plain concrete
pavement). This work consists of removing existing concrete pavement the full depth and replacing
with new concrete. Begin pavement patch work after the concrete mix design has been approved
according to Subsection 501.03.

(a) Concrete removal. Saw cut slabs full depth leaving vertical edges at the limits of the patch.
Prevent adjacent concrete slabs from being damaged.

Remove the concrete by lifting the slab in one or more pieces without disturbing the underlying
surface. Clean out the area with hand tools. Dispose of the concrete according to Subsection
203.05. When required, excavate the underlying material to a maximum depth of 300 millimeters
and replace with aggregate base according to Section 302. Prevent adjacent concrete slabs from
being undermined.

Remove and replace adjacent slabs damaged by concrete removal. Repair spalls using partial-
depth patching methods according to Subsection 502.05.

Repair saw overcuts of repair areas and nicks to adjacent pavement outside the perimeter of the
repair area with nonshrink grout.

(b) Joints. Construct joints according to Subsection 501.08 and the following:

Install dowels, tie bars, or both into existing concrete pavement slabs as shown in the plans. Drill
dowel or tie bar holes into the face of the existing concrete at the required diameter, length, and
spacing using a drill according to Subsection 502.04(d)(2). Clean and dry the holes before
installing the dowels or tie bars. Use an epoxy resin to permanently anchor the dowel or tie bar
into the existing concrete. Place the epoxy resin starting from the back of the hole and use a
sufficient quantity to insure the epoxy material will be forced up and around the dowel or tie bar
after insertion. Place a thin, donut-shaped grout retention disk around the dowel or tie bar and up

Section 502 – Concrete Pavement Restoration 370

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

against the face of the existing concrete to prevent epoxy resin material from flowing out of the
hole.

Seal joints according to Subsection 501.11.

(c) Welded wire reinforcement. When required, provide 100 × 100 millimeters, M15 × M15
steel welded wire reinforcement for crack control. Support welded wire fabric on chairs or
bolsters.

(d) Concrete placement. Compact base and subgrade material within the patch area according to
Subsection 302.05. Construct side forms to overlap the ends of the existing slab. Securely fasten
side forms so they do not move when concrete is placed. To accommodate forms for the patch,
excavate the adjacent shoulders a maximum width of 300 millimeters. Place concrete according
to Subsection 501.07.

Cast each patch in one continuous full-depth operation. After removal of the forms, backfill,
compact, and return the excavated shoulder area to its previous condition.

(e) Finishing and coloring concrete. Finish patches according to Subsection 502.05(e).

502.07 Resealing Joints and Crack Repair. This work consists of repairing or resealing joints and
cracks in existing concrete pavement.

(a) Preparation of joints and cracks. Limit the length of joints and cracks prepared to that
which can be resealed within the same shift. Do not damage joints or previously repaired patches.

Remove existing sealant with a waterblaster, router, concrete saw, or other method approved by
the Engineer.

Remove old sealant from the crack faces to expose new, clean concrete. When the crack widths
vary and the crack faces are raveling and irregular, cut a crack reservoir to a depth of 19
millimeters.

Thoroughly clean the joint or crack of foreign material by sandblasting, waterblasting, or with a
mechanical wire brush. Repeat the process until a new, clean concrete face is exposed. Dry the
joint with compressed air.

Use sawing if other methods do not properly clean the joint. Limit sawing to exposing clean,
new, concrete faces in the joint with a maximum allowable cut of 3 millimeters on each face of
the joint.

(b) Backer rod. Install the backer rod to the required depth after the joints and cracks are clean
and dry. Do not stretch or twist the backer rod during installation. Limit the length of backer rod
installed to that which can be sealed during the same shift.

(c) Sealant application. Seal joints and cracks immediately after placing the backer rod. Apply
sealant at air and surface temperatures recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Comply with
installation recommendations provided by the sealant manufacturer. If the joint or crack becomes
contaminated or damp, remove the backer rod, clean and dry the joint or crack, and reinstall a
new backer rod before placing the sealant. For a non-self-leveling joint sealant, tool the sealant
immediately after application to provide firm contact with the joint faces and to form the required

Section 502 – Concrete Pavement Restoration 371

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

recess below the slab surface.

502.08 Pavement Jacking. This work consists of raising and supporting the concrete pavement to
the specified grade tolerances by drilling and injecting non-shrink hydraulic cement grout.

(a) Drilling holes. Determine a pattern for grout injection holes and submit for approval. Drill
vertical holes less than 50 millimeters in diameter.

(b) Jacking. Establish string lines from the pavement high points to monitor slab movement.
Lower an expanding rubber packer or hose into the holes. Provide a positive seal and connected
to the discharge hose on the grout plant. Do not allow the discharge end of the packer or hose to
extend below the bottom of the concrete pavement.

Allow pumping to raise the pavement to within 3 millimeters of the string line grade when
jacking continuously-reinforced concrete pavement. Allow pumping to raise the pavement to
within 6 millimeters of the transverse and longitudinal grades when jacking jointed pavement and
bridge approach slabs.

Continuous jacking pressures to 1.4 megapascals are permitted. Use pressures to 2.1 megapascals
only for short periods of 30 seconds or less. If the pavement is bonded to the subbase, brief
pressure rises of 10 seconds or less to 4.1 megapascals may be allowed. Stop pumping if grout
extrudes through cracks, joints, or shoulders. Discontinue pumping if back pressure in the hose
exceeds 4.1 megapascals.

(c) Overjacking. Grind pavement raised above the specified tolerances to grade. Remove and
replace the pavement according to Subsection 502.06 if the overjacking is greater than 25
millimeters.

(d) Cracks. Radial cracks from the grout injection holes will be considered caused by improper
injection technique. Remove and replace the slab or a portion of the slab with more than 3 meters
of new cracks according to Subsection 502.06. For slabs with less than 3 meters of new cracks,
seal cracks according to Subsection 502.07.

(e) Hole patching. After completing the jacking and the hole plugs are removed, fill drill holes
flush with the pavement surface with a nonshrink grout or epoxy mortar.

502.09 Undersealing and Slab Stabilization. This work consists of pumping a nonshrink grout
mixture through holes drilled in the pavement into voids underneath the slabs to stabilize and
underseal concrete pavement.

(a) Preliminary testing. Perform testing at night or when there is no evidence of slab lock-up
due to thermal expansion. Testing may be allowed to continue if the slabs are not interlocked or
under compression. Furnish testing equipment as provided in Subsection 502.04(h). Test each
designated slab using a static method as follows:

(1) Position one set of gauges with one gauge referenced to the corner of each slab on both
sides of the joint near the pavement edge;
(2) Set the gauges to zero with no load on the slab on either side of the joint;
(3) Move the test truck into position and stop with the center of the test axle 300 millimeters
behind the joint and the outside test wheel 300 millimeters from the pavement edge. Read the

Section 502 – Concrete Pavement Restoration 372

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

back gauge;
(4) Move the test truck across the joint to a similar position 300 millimeters forward from the
joint and stop. Read the forward gauge; and
(5) Repeat for each joint to be tested. Underseal slabs with a deflection of more than 0.08
millimeters.
(b) Drilling Holes. Drill holes using the required hole pattern. An altered hole pattern may be
approved based on field conditions. Drill vertical holes less than 50 millimeters in diameter to
provide a positive seal for the pumping nozzle. For the first undersealing, drill holes to a depth
that penetrates into unbound base or subgrade. Avoid penetrating the subgrade by more than 75
millimeters.

(c) Cleaning holes. After the holes are drilled and before pumping the underseal grout, clean the
hole with compressed air to remove debris and provide a passage for the grout.

(d) Pumping underseal grout. Pump nonshrink grout in each hole. Seal the nozzle of the
discharge hose in the hole to maintain the nonshrink grout pressure underneath the slab. Do not
allow the nozzle end to extend below the bottom of the concrete. Monitor slab lift according to
Subsection 502.08. Limit upward movement of the pavement to (3 millimeters.

Continue pumping into a hole until grout flows out other holes, joints, or cracks, or until the slab
begins to lift. Stop grouting if there is any lift in the slab or the adjacent shoulder.

During stabilization operations, limit continuous pumping pressures to 0.9 megapascals. Allow a
short pressure surge of up to 2 megapascals when starting to pump grout into the hole to ensure
grout penetrates the void structure. Do not plug other holes while grouting.

Grind pavement raised more than the 3 millimeters.

(e) Cracks. If cracks develop, complete the required repairs according to Subsection 502.07.

(f) Hole patching. See Subsection 502.08(e).

(g) Stability testing. Test for stability 24 hours after designated slabs have been undersealed
according to Subsection 502.09 (a). Complete a second underseal operation on slabs that
continues to show excess movement. Submit the number, depth and location of holes for the
second undersealing for approval. The Engineer may accept or direct replacement of slabs that
continues to show movement in excess of that specified after undersealing twice. Remove and
replace designated slabs according to Subsection 502.06.

502.10 Surface Diamond Grinding. This work consists of grinding existing concrete pavement to
eliminate joint or crack faults and providing positive lateral drainage. Uniformly transition auxiliary
or ramp lane grinding from the mainline edge to provide positive drainage and an acceptable riding
surface. Provide a grinding unit conforming to the requirements of Subsection 502.04(e).

Produce a pavement surface that is true to grade, smooth, and consisting of a longitudinal corduroy-
type texture. Produce grooves between 2 millimeters to 4 millimeters wide. Produce a surface area
between the grooves between 1.7 millimeters to 3.5 millimeters wide. Produce peak ridges
approximately 1.6 millimeters higher than the grooves. Adjust blade spacing to achieve the specified
texture. Establish a positive and immediate means for removal of grinding residue. Remove and

Section 502 – Concrete Pavement Restoration 373

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

dispose of solid residue from the pavement surfaces before it is blown by traffic action or wind. Do
not allow residue to flow into gutters or drainage facilities.

Test the ground pavement surfaces for pavement roughness according to Subsection 501.12. Limit
misalignment of surface planes on adjacent sides of the joints or cracks and between each grinding
pass to less than 1.6 millimeters. Produce a transverse slope of the pavement with no depressions or
slope misalignment greater than 6 millimeters in 3 meters tested perpendicular to the centerline.
Straightedge requirements do not apply across longitudinal joints or outside of ground areas.

502.11 Concrete Cleaning. This work consists of cleaning the existing concrete pavement surface
with a high pressure washing device approved by the Engineer. Remove dust, dirt, oil, and other
foreign material (including the existing crack sealant material) without causing damage to the surface
or exposing coarse aggregate.

Vacuum the concrete surface to remove and collect water and debris after the pavement cleaning.
Dispose of the water and debris at a site approved by the Engineer.

502.12 Opening to Traffic. Do not allow traffic on restored pavement until the concrete has a
compressive strength of 28 megapascals when tested according to AASHTO T 22 or until the grout
used for jacking or undersealing the pavement has attained 4 megapascals when tested with a 64
square millimeters probe according to AASHTO T 197. As an alternative method of determining the
compressive strength of the restored pavement; in situ compressive strength can be measured by
developing a strength-maturity relationship of the approved concrete mixture according to AASHTO
T 325. Submit the strength-maturity relationship for approval at least 14 days before production.
Provide a concrete maturity meter during the test placement and production that meets the following:

(a) Conforms to AASHTO T 325;

(b) Rugged, waterproof, and can withstand the construction environment;

(c) Able to operate without an external power source for at least 14 days;

(d) Able to collect and store temperature and maturity data for at least 14 days; and

(e) Able to determine equivalent maturity hours according to the Arrhenius function.

Do not allow traffic on sealed joints when the sealant is tacky and traffic debris embeds into the
sealant.
502.13 Acceptance. See Table 502.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Material for concrete pavement restoration will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.
Furnish a production certification for the hydraulic cement.

Construction (including batching, placing, finishing, and curing) of the concrete will be evaluated
under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

The concrete mixture's slump, air content, density, temperature, and compressive strength will be
evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Grout will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Section 502 – Concrete Pavement Restoration 374

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Concrete pavement restoration work (including partial-depth patching, pavement jacking, subsealing,
surface grinding, crack and joint repair, cleaning, and breaking and seating will be evaluated under
Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

502.14 Measure the Section 502 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring grout for pavement jacking and undersealing by the cubic meter, measure by
metering.

Measure aggregate base under Section 302.

Payment

502.15 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 502 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 502 – Concrete Pavement Restoration 375

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 502.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Source
Aggregate Measured and Quality − AASHTO 1 per Source of Yes 14 days −
(703.01 tested for M 80, M 6, material material before
& 703.02) conformance & M 43 type paving
(106.04 & 105)
Mix Design
Concrete Measured and All − Subsection 1 per Source of Yes 14 days −
composition tested for 501.03 mix material Before
(501.03) conformance design paving
(106.04 & 105)
Production
Concrete Measured and Density − AASHTO 1 per Point of No Upon −
tested for T 121 load (2) discharge (3) completing
conformance tests
(106.04) Air content − AASHTO " " " " −
T 152
or T 196
Slump − AASHTO " " " " −
T 119
Temperature − Field measured " " " " −

Section 502 – Concrete Pavement Restoration 376

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 502.1 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production (continued)
Concrete Measured and Compressive − AASHTO 1 set per Point of See Note " Deliver
tested for strength (1)(4) T 23 & T 22 170 m2 discharge (3) (4) verification
conformance but not cylinders
(106.04) less than to the
1 set per day Engineer
or
designated
location
with in
28 days
Aggregate, Process Gradation − AASHTO Min 1 per Bin No Before −
coarse and control T 11 & T 27 day discharge, batching
fine (153.03) conveyor
belt, or
stockpile
Moisture − AASHTO T 255 " " " " −
Concrete " Surface − Straightedge Subsection Concrete " While −
tolerance measurements 501.08 surface, concrete
Subsection after floating is still
501.12 workable

Section 502 – Concrete Pavement Restoration 377

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 502.1 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Finished Roadway
Concrete Measured and Surface − Straightedge Successively, Finished No 24 −
pavement tested for tolerance measurements after pavement hours
conformance Subsection concrete surface
(106.04) 501.12 has
hardened
(1) A single compressive strength test result is the average result from two 150 millimeter by 300 millimeter or three 4 inch by 8 inch (100
millimeter by 200 millimeter) cylinders cast from the same load and tested at 28 days.
(2) This frequency may be reduced by the Engineer if produced material proves to be consistent.
(3) Sample according to AASHTO R 60.
(4) Make at least four 150 millimeter by 300 millimeter or six 100 millimeter by 200 millimeter compressive strength test cylinders and
carefully transport the cylinders to the project curing facility. Two or three cylinders will be used for 28-day compressive strength tests. The
remaining cylinders will be used by the Engineer for verification testing or other designated purposes.

Section 502 – Concrete Pavement Restoration 378

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

DIVISION 550
BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

Section 550 – Bridge Construction 379

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 551. — DRIVEN PILES

Description

551.01 This work consists of furnishing and driving piles. This work also includes furnishing and
placing reinforcing steel and concrete in concrete-filled steel shell and concrete-filled pipe piles.

Material

551.02 Conform to the following Sections and Subsections:

Concrete piles 715.03

Grout 725.13
Paint 719
Pile shoes 715.08
Prestressing steel 709.02
Reinforcing steel 709.01
Sheet piles 715.07
Splices 715.09
Steel H-piles 715.06
Steel pipes 715.05
Steel shells 715.04
Structural concrete 552
Treated timber piles 715.02
Untreated timber piles 715.01

Construction Requirements

551.03 Qualifications. Submit the following for approval at least 30 days before driven pile
operations begin:

(a) Professional engineer. Name of the engineer and a résumé describing at least 3 years
experience in wave equation analyses to perform the wave equation analysis.

(b) Pile specialty consultant. When dynamic load testing is specified, provide the name of the
consultant and a résumé describing at least 3 years experience in:

(1) Dynamic load testing and analysis;

(2) Signal matching analysis; and
(3) Wave equation analysis including the initial wave equation analysis.
(c) Welders. Provide names and AWS certifications.

551.04 Submittal. At least 30 days before starting driven pile work, submit the following according to
Subsection 104.03:

(a) Start date and proposed driven pile construction sequence;

Section 551 – Driven Piles 380

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Wave equation analysis report. Include a wave equation analysis for the proposed pile
driving system, unless the use of the dynamic formula is specified to determine the nominal
driven pile capacity;

(c) Equipment and analysis. Furnish the following pile-driving equipment information:

(1) General. Project and structure identification, pile-driving Contractor or subcontractor,

and auxiliary methods of installation such as jetting or preboring and the type and use of the
equipment;
(2) Hammer. Manufacturer, model, type, serial number, rated energy ( _____ at _____
length of stroke), ram weight, and modifications;
(3) Capblock (hammer cushion). Material, thickness, area, modulus of elasticity (E), and
coefficient of restitution (e);
(4) Pile cap. Helmet weight, bonnet mass, anvil block mass, and drivehead mass;
(5) Pile cushion. Material, thickness, area, modulus of elasticity (E), and coefficient of
restitution (e);
(6) Pile. Pile type, length (in leads), mass per meter, wall thickness, taper, cross-sectional
area, design pile capacity, description of splice, and tip treatment description;
(7)Test pile details. Location, type, estimated tip elevation, minimum allowable embedment,
length, capacity, allowable compressive and tensile stresses;
(8) Subsurface conditions. Soil description, soil damping and quake parameters used in
analysis, anticipated driving difficulties (if any); and
(9) Bearing graph analysis results. Calculated maximum compressive and tensile stresses,
penetration resistance (blow counts), hammer stroke and energy transferred to the pile for a
range of nominal soil resistance values.
(d) Splices. Details for pile field splices.

(e) Pile shoes. Details for pile shoes.

551.05 Pile Driving Equipment. Furnish equipment conforming to the following requirements:

(a) Pile hammers.

(1) Gravity hammers. Gravity hammers may only be used to drive timber piles. Furnish a
hammer with a ram weighing between 900 and 1600 kilograms and limit the drop height to
3.7 meters. Select a ram mass greater than the combined mass of the drive head and pile.
Provide hammer guides to ensure concentric impact on the drive head;
(2) Open-end diesel hammers. Equip open-end (single acting) diesel hammers with a
device, such as rings on the ram to permit visual determination of hammer stroke. Submit a
chart from the hammer manufacturer equating stroke and blows per minute for the hammer to
be used. A speed versus stroke calibration may be used if approved;

Section 551 – Driven Piles 381

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(3) Closed-end diesel hammers. Submit a chart, calibrated to actual hammer performance
within 90 days of use, equating bounce chamber pressure to either equivalent energy or
stroke for the hammer to be used. Equip hammers with a dial gauge for measuring pressure in
the bounce chamber. Make the gauge readable from ground level. Calibrate the dial gauge to
allow for losses in the gauge hose. Verify the accuracy of the calibrated dial gauge during
driving operations by ensuring that cylinder lift occurs when bounce chamber pressure is
consistent with the maximum energy given in the hammer specifications. Do not use closed-
end diesel hammers that do not attain cylinder lift at the maximum energy-bounce chamber
pressure relationship given in the hammer specification;
(4) Air or steam hammers. Furnish plant and equipment for steam and air hammers with
sufficient capacity to maintain the volume and pressure specified by the hammer
manufacturer. Equip the hammer with accurate pressure gauges that are easily accessible. Use
a hammer with the mass of the striking parts equal to or greater than one third the combined
mass of the driving head and pile. Ensure the combined mass is at least 1250 kilograms;
Measure inlet pressures for double-acting and differential-acting air or stream hammers with
a needle gauge at the head of the hammer when driving test piles. If required, also measure
inlet pressures when driving production piles. A pressure versus speed calibration may be
developed for specific driving conditions at the project as an alternative to periodic
measurements with a needle gauge.
(5) Nonimpact hammers. Use nonimpact hammers, such as vibratory hammers when
specified. Use nonimpact hammers for installing production piles only after the pile tip
elevation or embedment length for safe support of the pile load is established by static or
dynamic load testing. Control the installation of production piles when using vibratory
hammers by power consumption, rate of penetration, specified tip elevation, or other
acceptable methods that ensure the required pile load capacity is obtained. Strike piles with
an impact hammer of suitable energy to verify the required pile capacity is obtained on at
least one of every ten piles; and
(6) Hydraulic hammers. Provide a power plant for hydraulic hammers with sufficient
capacity to maintain the volume and pressure, specified by the manufacturer, at the hammer
under working conditions. Equip the power plant and equipment with accurate pressure
gauges that are easily accessible to the Engineer.
(b) Approval of pile-driving equipment. Furnish pile-driving equipment that permits permanent
piles to be driven with reasonable effort and to the required depths and resistances without damage.

Approval of pile-driving equipment will be based on a wave equation analysis unless the contract
specifies the dynamic formula to determine the nominal driven pile capacity.

Use only the approved equipment represented in the wave equation analysis during pile-driving
operations. Approval of the pile-driving system is specific to the equipment submitted. If the
proposed equipment is modified or replaced, re-evaluate and resubmit the analysis and revised data
for approval before using. Approval of a pile hammer does not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for piles damaged due to driving stress.

(1) Wave equation. The required number of hammer blows indicated by the wave equation
at the nominal pile capacity is between 2 and 10 blows per 25 millimeters.

Section 551 – Driven Piles 382

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

In addition, do not allow the pile stresses resulting from the wave equation analysis to exceed
the values at which pile damage is impending. The point of impending damage is defined for
steel, concrete, and timber piles as follows.
(a) Steel piles. Limit the compressive driving stress to 90 percent of the yield strength of
the pile material.
(b) Concrete piles. Limit the tensile (TS) and compressive (CS) driving stresses to:
TS ≤ 3fc'1/2 + EPV for US Customary TS ≤ 0.25fc'1/2 + EPV for Metric
CS ≤ 0.85fc' - EPV for US Customary CS ≤ 0.85fc' - EPV for Metric
where:
fc’ = The 28-day design compressive strength of the concrete in pounds per
square inch (megapascals)
EPV = The effective prestress value in pounds per square inch (megapascals)
(c) Timber piles. Limit the compressive driving stress to:
σdr = φda(FCO) where:
σdr = limiting driving stress (ksi or kilonewtons)
φda = resistance factor, drivability analysis
FCO = base resistance of wood in compression parallel to the grain (ksi or
kilonewtons)
(2) Minimum hammer energy. The energy of the driving equipment submitted for approval,
as rated by the manufacturer, will be determined by a wave equation analysis.
(c) Driving appurtenances.

(1) Hammer cushion. Equip impact pile-driving equipment, except gravity hammers, with a
suitable thickness of hammer cushion material to prevent damage to the hammer or pile and
to ensure uniform driving behavior. Fabricate hammer cushions from durable, manufactured
material according to the hammer manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not use wood, wire
rope, or asbestos hammer cushions. Place a striker plate, as recommended by the hammer
manufacturer, on the hammer cushion to ensure uniform compression of the cushion material.
Inspect the hammer cushion in the presence of the Engineer when beginning pile driving at
each structure or after each 100 hours of pile driving, whichever is less. Replace the cushion
when its thickness is reduced by more than 25 percent of its original thickness;
(2) Pile drive head. Provide adequate drive heads for impact hammers. Provide appropriate
drive heads, mandrels, or other devices for special piles according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Align the drive head axially with the hammer and pile. Fit the drive head
around the pile head so that transfer of torsional forces is prevented during driving and proper
alignment of hammer and pile is maintained;
(3) Leads. Support piles in line and position with leads while driving. Construct pile driver
leads to allow freedom of movement of the hammer while maintaining axial alignment of the
hammer and the pile. Do not use swinging leads unless permitted in writing or specified in
the contract. When swinging leads are permitted fit swinging leads with a pile gate at the

Section 551 – Driven Piles 383

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

bottom of the leads and in the case of battered piles, fit with a horizontal brace between the
crane and the leads. Adequately embed leads in the ground or constrain the pile in a structural
frame (template) to maintain proper alignment. Provide leads of sufficient length that do not
require a follower, but will permit proper alignment of battered piles;
(4) Followers. Do not use followers unless approved. When followers are permitted, drive
the first pile in each bent or substructure unit and every tenth pile thereafter, full length
without a follower, to verify that adequate pile embedment is being attained to develop the
required nominal capacity. Provide a follower of such material and dimensions that will
permit the piles to be driven to the required penetration. Hold and maintain follower and pile
in proper alignment during driving;
(5) Jetting. Do not use jetting unless approved. Provide jetting equipment with sufficient
capacity to deliver a consistent pressure equivalent to at least 700 kilopascals at 19-millimeter
jet nozzles. Jet so as not to affect the lateral stability of the final in-place pile. Remove jet
pipes when the pile tip is at least 1.5 meters above the prescribed tip elevation, and drive the
pile to the required nominal capacity with an impact hammer. Control, treat if necessary, and
dispose of jet water in an approved manner;
(6) Pile cushion. For concrete piles, use a new pile cushion to protect the head of each pile.
Cut the pile cushion at least 100-millimeter thick and to match the cross-section of the pile
top. Replace the pile cushion if it is compressed more than one-half its original thickness or it
begins to burn. For steel and timber piles, protect each pile with an approved driving cap.
Enclose timber piles with approved collars or bands to prevent splitting or brooming. Replace
caps when damaged. Do not reuse cushions or caps; and
(7) Pile shoes. When specified, provide shoes to protect the pile-tip from damage during
driving. Fabricate shoes to snugly fit the pile tip. For concrete piles, attach the shoe to the pile
using dowels or other approved methods. For steel piles, design and fit the shoe to the steel
shape and weld the shoe to the pile so as not to stress the web or the flange. For timber piles,
carefully shape the tip to secure an even uniform bearing for the pile shoe. Treat holes, cuts,
or caps in treated timber piles with two-brush applications of creosote-coal tar solution
according to AWPA.
551.06 Pile Lengths. Furnish piles with sufficient length to obtain the required resistance and to extend
into the pile cap or footing as indicated on the plans. In addition, increase the length to provide fresh
heading and to provide for the Contractor's method of operation. When test piles are required, furnish
piles in the lengths determined by the test piles.

551.07 Test Piles. Install test piles when specified in the contract.

Place the piles designated as dynamic load test piles in a horizontal position and not in contact with
other piles. Drill holes for mounting instruments near the head of the pile. Mount the instruments after
the pile is in leads and take wave speed measurements. Provide at least a 1200- by 1200-millimeter
rigid platform with a 1050-millimeter safety rail that can be raised to the top of the pile.

Excavate the ground at the site of each test pile or production pile to the elevation of the bottom of the
footing before the pile is driven. Furnish test piles longer than the estimated length of production piles.
Drive test piles with the same equipment as the production piles.

Drive test piles to the required nominal capacity at the estimated tip elevation. Allow test piles that do
not attain the required nominal capacity at the estimated tip elevation to set up for 24 hours before re-

Section 551 – Driven Piles 384

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

driving. Warm the hammer before re-driving begins by applying at least 20 blows to another pile. If the
required nominal capacity is not attained on re-driving; drive a portion or the remaining test pile length
and repeat the set up and re-drive procedure as directed. Splice and continue driving until the required
nominal pile capacity is obtained.

Conform to the requirements for production piles when test piles are to be used in the completed
structure. Remove test piles not incorporated in the completed structure to at least 600 millimeters
below finished grade.

551.08 Driven Pile Capacity. Drive piles to the specified penetration and to the depth necessary to
obtain the required nominal pile capacity. Splice piles not obtaining the required nominal capacity at
the ordered length, and drive with an impact hammer until the required nominal pile capacity is
achieved.

Use the wave equation to determine nominal pile capacity of the in-place pile.

(a) Wave equation. Adequate penetration will be considered to be obtained when the specified
wave equation resistance criteria is achieved within 1.5 meters of the designated tip elevation.
Drive piles that do not achieve the specified resistance within these limits to a penetration
determined by the Engineer.

(b) Dynamic formula. Drive the piles to a penetration necessary to obtain the nominal pile
capacity according to the FHWA Gates Formula:

R ndr = 1.75 E d log10 (10N b ) − 100

(US Customary)
R ndr = 7 E d log10 (10N b ) − 550
(Metric)
where:
Rndr = Nominal pile resistance measured during pile driving in kips
(kilonewtons)
Ed =Developed hammer energy. This is the kinetic energy in the ram at
impact for a given blow. If ram velocity is not measured, it may be
assumed equal to the potential energy of the ram at the height of the
stroke, taken as the ram mass times the stroke (joules).
log10(10Nb) = Logarithm to the base 10 of the quantity 10 multiplied by N
Nb = Number of hammer blows per 25 millimeters at final penetration
Determine the in-place nominal capacity of jetted piles based on impact hammer blow counts
(dynamic formula) after the jet pipes have been removed. After the pile penetration length
necessary to produce the required nominal pile capacity has been determined by impact hammer
blow count, install the remaining piles in each group or in each substructure unit to similar depths
with similar methods. Confirm the required nominal pile capacity has been achieved by using the
dynamic formula.

551.09 Preboring. Use auguring, wet rotary drilling, or other approved methods of preboring.

Prebore the pile hole to natural ground in compacted embankments more than 1.5 meters deep.

Section 551 – Driven Piles 385

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

In natural ground, preboring may extend to the surface of the rock or hardpan for piles end-bearing on
rock or hardpan. Seat the pile into the end-bearing strata.

Stop preboring at least 1.5 meters above the estimated pile tip elevation and drive the pile with an
impact hammer to a penetration which achieves the required nominal pile capacity for piles not
end-bearing on rock or hardpan. Prebore holes smaller than the diameter or diagonal of the pile
cross-section while allowing penetration of the pile to the specified depth.

Increase the hole diameter to the least dimension adequate for pile installation if the subsurface
obstructions such as boulders or rock layers are encountered. Fill remaining void space around the pile
with sand or other approved material after driving is complete. Do not use a punch or a spud in lieu of
preboring.

Do not impair the capacity of existing piles or the safety or condition of adjacent structures. If
preboring disturbs the capacity of previously installed piles or structures, restore the required nominal
capacity of piles and structures by approved methods.

551.10 Preparation and Driving. Perform the work under Section 208. Make the heads of piles plane
and perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pile. Coordinate pile driving to prevent damage to
other parts of the completed work.

Drive pile heads to within 75 millimeters of plan location at cutoff elevation for bent caps supported by
piles and to within 150 millimeters of plan location from any piles capped below final grade. Locate
and drive piles at least 100 millimeters from any edge of the cap Drive piles so that the axial alignment
is within 20 millimeters per meter along the longitudinal axis of the required alignment. The Engineer
may stop driving to check the pile alignment. Check alignment before the last 1.5 meters are driven for
piles that cannot be internally inspected after installation. Do not pull laterally on piles or splice to
correct misalignment. Do not splice a properly aligned section on a misaligned pile.

Place individual piles in pile groups either starting from the center of the group and proceeding
outward in both directions or starting at the outside row and proceeding progressively across the group.

Correct piles driven improperly, driven out of proper location, misaligned, or driven below the
designated cutoff elevation in an approved manner. Replace piles damaged during handling or driving.
Obtain approval for the proposed methods of correcting or repairing deficiencies.

(a) Timber piles. Do not use piles with checks wider than 13 millimeters. Drive treated timber
piles within 6 months after treatment. Handle and care for pressure-treated piles according to
AWPA Standard M 4 Standard For The Care Of Preservative-Treated Wood Products.

(b) Steel piles. Furnish full-length, un-spliced piles for lengths up to 18 meters. If splices are
required in the first pile driven and it is anticipated that subsequent piles will also require splices,
place the splices in lower third of the pile. Splice lengths less than 3 meters are not permitted and
only 2 splices per pile are allowed.

Load, transport, unload, store, and handle steel piles so the metal is kept clean and free from
damage. Do not use piles that exceed the camber and sweep permitted by allowable mill tolerance.
Steel piles damaged during installation are considered unsatisfactory unless the bearing capacity is
proven to be 100 percent of the required nominal capacity by load tests and that conform to the
minimum tip elevation required by the contract. Perform tests on damaged piles at no cost to the
Government. If driving points are required, weld driving points to steel piles according to

Section 551 – Driven Piles 386

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

AASHTO/AWS Structural Welding Code - Steel D1.1 or Bridge Welding Code D1.5 (D1.5M) as
applicable.

(c) Precast and prestressed concrete piles. Support concrete piles during lifting or moving at the
points shown on the plans. Provide support at the quarter points if not specified. Furnish slings or
other equipment when raising or transporting concrete piles to avoid bending the pile or breaking
edges.

Reject concrete piles with reduced strength caused by external defects such as spalls, cracks, or
internal defects such as cavities revealed with non-destructive testing.

(d) Concrete-filled pipe or steel shell piles. Furnish and handle the steel shells or pipes according
to (b) above. Cutting shoes for shells or pipes may be inside or outside the shell. Use high-carbon
structural steel with a machined ledge for shell bearing or cast steel with a ledge designed for
attachment with a simple weld.

Drive pile shells or pipes for a substructure unit before placing concrete in the shells or pipes when
practical. Do not drive pile shells or pipes within 5 meters of any concrete-filled pile shell or pipe
until the concrete has cured for at least 7 days or 3 days if using high-early-strength concrete. Do
not drive any pile shell or pipe after it is filled with concrete.

Remove and replace shells that are determined to be unacceptable for use due to breaks, bends, or
kinks.

551.11 Splices. Align and connect pile sections so the axis of the spliced pile is straight.

(a) Steel piles. Use welders certified for structural welding.

Make surfaces to be welded smooth, uniform, and free from loose scale, slag, grease, or other
material that prevents proper welding. Steel may be oxygen cut. Carbon-arc gouging, chipping, or
grinding may be used for joint preparation.

Weld according to AASHTO/AWS Structural Welding Code - Steel D1.1 or Bridge Welding Code
D1.5 (D1.5M). Weld the entire pile cross-section using prequalified AWS groove weld butt joints.
Weld so there is no visual evidence of cracks, lack of fusion, undercutting, excessive piping,
porosity, or inadequate size. Do not use manufactured splices unless approved in writing or shown
in the plans. Manufactured splices may be used in place of full penetration groove butt welds if the
Contractor can prove they can develop the full strength of the pile in compression, tension and
bending.

(b) Concrete pile splices. Use dowels or other acceptable mechanical means to splice precast
concrete or precast prestressed concrete piles. Submit drawings of proposed splices for approval.

If dowels are used, cast the dowels into the tip end of the following pile with corresponding holes at
the butt end of the driven pile. Serrate the holes to provide a mechanical bond. Separate the ends of
the piles by at least 13 millimeters. Clean surfaces and dowel holes. Grout the dowels in place and
allow the grout to cure. Enclose the gap with forms and inject a bonding agent capable of
withstanding the impact and driving forces and having the same compressive strength as the pile.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations regarding the use and curing of grouting and bonding
products.

Section 551 – Driven Piles 387

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Attach manufactured splices to the concrete piles as recommended by the manufacturer. Ensure the
splice develops strengths in compression, tension, and bending equal to or exceeding the strength
of the pile being spliced.

(c) Concrete pile extensions.

(1) Precast concrete piles. Extend precast concrete piles by removing the concrete at the end
of the pile and leaving 40 diameters of reinforcement steel exposed. Remove the concrete to
produce a face perpendicular to the axis of the pile. Securely fasten reinforcement of the same
size as that used in the pile to the projecting reinforcing steel. Form the extension to prevent
leakage along the pile.
Immediately before placing concrete, wet the top of the pile thoroughly and cover with a thin
coating of neat cement, re-tempered mortar, or other suitable bonding material. Place
concrete of the same mix design and quality as that used in the pile. Keep forms in place for
not less than 7 days after the concrete has been placed. Cure and finish according to Section
552.
(2) Prestressed piles. Extend prestressed precast piles according to (b) above. Include
reinforcement bars in the pile head for splicing to the extension bars. Do not drive extended
prestressed precast piles.
(d) Timber piles. Do not splice timber piles.

551.12 Heaved Piles. Check for pile heave during the driving operation. Take level readings
immediately after each pile is driven and again after piles within a radius of 5 meters are driven. Re-
drive piles that heave more than 13 millimeters for end-bearing piles or 38 millimeters for friction
piles. Re-drive to the specified resistance or penetration.

551.13 Pile Load Tests. Pile load tests are not required unless specified.

(a) Dynamic load test. Furnish equipment and perform dynamic load tests according to ASTM
D4945 under the supervision of the Engineer.

Drive the pile to the depth at which the dynamic test equipment indicates that the required nominal
pile capacity is achieved. If necessary to maintain stresses in the pile below the values in
Subsection 551.03(b)(1), reduce the driving energy transmitted to the pile by using additional
cushions or reducing the energy output of the hammer. Realign the driving system if nonaxial
driving is indicated.

At least 24 hours after the initial driving, re-drive each dynamic load test pile with instrumentation
attached. Warm the hammer before re-driving by applying at least 20 blows to another pile. Re-
drive the dynamic load test pile for a maximum penetration of 75 millimeters, a maximum of
20 blows, or to practical driving refusal, whichever occurs first. Practical driving refusal is defined
as 15 blows per 25 millimeters for steel piles, 8 blows per 25 millimeters for concrete piles, and 5
blows per 25 millimeters for timber piles.

Verify the assumptions used in the initial wave equation analysis submitted according to
Subsection 551.03(b) using signal matching analysis. Analyze one blow from the original driving
and one blow from the re-driving for each pile tested.

Section 551 – Driven Piles 388

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Perform additional wave equation analyses with adjustments based on the signal matching analysis
results. Provide a graph showing blow count versus nominal capacity. Provide a blow count versus
stroke graph for the nominal capacity of open-ended diesel hammers. Provide the driving stresses,
transferred energy, and pile capacity as a function of depth for each dynamic load test.

Based on the results of the dynamic load testing, signal matching analyses, and wave equation
analyses, the order list and production driving criteria may be approved and the required cut-off
elevations provided, or additional test piles and load testing may be specified. This information will
be provided within 7 days after receipt of the order list and required test data for the test piles
driven.

(b) Static load tests. Perform static load tests according to ASTM D1143 using the quick load test
method except as modified herein. Submit drawings of the proposed loading apparatus for approval
according to the following:

(1) Have a professional engineer prepare the drawings;

(2) Furnish a loading system capable of applying 150 percent of the nominal pile capacity or
9000 kilonewtons, whichever is less; and
(3) Construct the apparatus to allow increments of load to be placed gradually without
causing vibration to the test pile.
Perform test at least 5 days after test pile was driven unless approved by the Engineer. Drive
tension piles at the location of permanent piles when feasible if tension (anchor) piles are required.
Do not use timber or tapered piles installed in permanent locations as tension piles. Take the test to
plunging failure or the capacity of the loading system, whichever occurs first.

The nominal bearing resistance is defined as 50 percent of the failure load. The failure load is
defined as follows:

• For piles 600 millimeters or less in diameter, length of side for square piles or diagonal
width, the load that produces a settlement at failure of the pile head equal to:
Sf = S + (3.8 + 0.008 D)

• For piles greater than 600 millimeters in diameter, length of side for square piles or diagonal
width:
D
Sf = S +
30
where:
Sf = Settlement at failure in millimeters
D = Pile diameter or diagonal width in millimeters
S = Elastic deformation of pile in millimeters
Determine top elevation of the test pile immediately after driving and again just before load testing to
check for heave. Wait at least 3 days between the driving of any anchor or load test piles and the
commencement of the load test. Before testing, re-drive or jack to the original elevation any pile that
heaves more than 6 millimeters.

Section 551 – Driven Piles 389

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

After completion of the load testing, remove or cut off any test or anchor piling not a part of the
finished structure at least 600 millimeters below either the bottom of footing or the finished ground
elevation.

Based on the results of the static load testing, the order list and production driving criteria may be
approved and the required cut-off elevations provided or additional load tests may be specified. This
information will be provided within 7 days after receipt of the order list and required test data for the
test piles driven.

551.14 Pile Cutoffs. Cut off the tops of permanent piles and pile casings at the required elevation. Cut
off the piles clean and straight parallel to the bottom face of the structural member in which they are
embedded. Dispose of cutoff lengths according to Subsection 203.05(a).

Treat the heads of treated timber piles which are not embedded in concrete by one of the following
methods:

(a) Reduce the moisture content of the wood to no more than 25 percent with no free moisture on
the surface. Brush apply one application of creosote-coal tar solution as required in AWPA
Standards.

Build up a protective cap by applying alternate layers of loosely woven fabric and hot asphalt or
tar, similar to membrane waterproofing, using three layers of asphalt or tar and two layers of
fabric. Use fabric at least 150 millimeters wider in each direction than the diameter of the pile.
Turn the fabric down over the pile and secure the edges by binding with two turns of 3-
millimeter galvanized wire. Apply a final layer of asphalt or tar to cover the wire. Neatly trim the
fabric below the wires.

(b) Cover the sawed surface with three applications of a hot mixture of 60 percent creosote and
40 percent roofing pitch, or thoroughly brush coat with three applications of hot creosote and
cover with hot roofing pitch. Place a covering of galvanized sheet metal over the coating and
bend down over the sides of each pile.

551.15 Unsatisfactory Piles. Correct unsatisfactory piles by an approved method. Methods of

correcting unsatisfactory piles may include one or more of the following:

(a) Use of the pile at a reduced capacity;

(b) Install additional piles;

(c) Repair damaged piles; and

(d) Replace damaged piles.

551.16 Placing Concrete in Steel Shell or Pipe Piles. Clean the inside of shells and pipes by
removing loose material after driving. Keep the shell or pipe substantially water tight. Remove water
before placing concrete or place the concrete using a tremie when water is present in the pile. Provide
suitable equipment for inspecting the entire inside surface of the driven shell or pipe just before placing
concrete.

(a) Reinforcing steel. Make the spacing between adjacent cage elements at least five times the
maximum size of aggregate in the concrete when reinforcing steel is required.

Section 551 – Driven Piles 390

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Securely tie concrete spacers or other approved spacers at fifth points around the perimeter of the
reinforcing steel cage. Install spacers at intervals not to exceed 3 meters measured along the length
of the cage.

Place the reinforcement cage into the driven shell or pipe when the concrete reaches the planned
bottom elevation of the reinforcement. Support the reinforcement so it remains within 2 inches
(50 millimeters) of the required vertical location. Support the cage from the top until the concrete
reaches the top of the pile.

(b) Concrete. Construct concrete according to Section 552. Place concrete in one continuous
operation from the bottom to the top of the pile. Consolidate the top 3 meters of the concrete pile
using approved vibratory equipment before the initial concrete set.

551.17 Acceptance. Pile material will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Furnish production certifications with each shipment of the following:

(a) Concrete piles;

(b) Sheet piles, steel H-piles, steel shells, and steel pipes; and

(c) Treated timber piles. Stamp each pile with an identification mark and date of inspection.

Driving piles and related work will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Concrete for steel shells or pipe piles will be evaluated under Section 552.

Reinforcing steel for steel shells or pipe piles will be evaluated under Section 554.

Measurement

551.18 Measure the Section 551 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring piles by the linear meter, measure the length of pile from the cutoff elevation to the
tip.

Measure splices required to drive piles deeper than the estimated tip elevation.

Payment

551.19 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 551 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 551 – Driven Piles 391

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 552. — STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

Description

552.01 This work consists of furnishing, placing, finishing, and curing concrete in bridges, culverts,
and other structures.

Structural concrete class is designated on the plans according to Table 552.1.

Material

552.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsections:

Coarse aggregate for concrete 703.02

Color coating 725.15
Concrete curing material and admixtures 711
Elastomeric bearing (pads) 717.10(a)
Epoxy resin adhesives 725.18
Fine aggregate for concrete 703.01
Hydraulic cement 701.01
Non-shrink grout 725.13(b)
Pozzolans 725.04
Preformed polychloroprene elastomeric joint seal for bridges 712.01(g)
Reinforcing fibers 725.17
Sealants, fillers, and seals 712.01
Water 725.01(a)

Construction Requirements

552.03 Composition (Concrete Mix Design). Design and produce concrete mixtures that conform to
Tables 552-1, 552-2, and 552-3 as required for the class specified. Determine design strength values
according to ACI 318 Chapter 5.

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 392

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 552.1
Composition of Concrete
Class Minimum Maximum Coarse Aggregate
of Compressive Strength W/C Ratio Size Number
Concrete @ 28 days, f’c, AASHTO M 43 (1)
MPa
A 31.0 0.45 5, 56, 57
A(AE) 31.0 0.45 5, 56, 57
C 31.0 0.45 7, 78
C(AE) 31.0 0.45 7, 78
D(AE)(2) 34.5 0.40 5, 56, 57
(3)
P (Prestressed) See plans - 6,7,67,68,78
(3)
P(AE) See plans - 6,7,67,68,78
S (Seal) - 0.54 5, 56, 57
(1) Meet the processing requirements of AASHTO M 43, Table 1 – Standard Sizes of Processed
Aggregate.
(2) The maximum water-soluble chloride ion (Cl-) content is 0.15 percent by mass of cement. Determine
the water-soluble chloride ion content of concrete made with mix ingredients at an age between 28 and
48 days according to ASTM C1218. Submit test results with the concrete mix design for approval.
(3) The maximum water-soluble chloride ion (Cl-) content is 0.06 percent by mass of cement. Determine
the water-soluble chloride ion content of concrete made with mix ingredients at an age between 28 and
48 days according to ASTM C1218. Submit test results with the concrete mix design for approval.

Table 552.2
Air Content for Air Entrained Concrete(1)
Nominal Maximum Minimum Maximum
Aggregate Size(2) Air Content (3) (%) Air Content (3) (%)
37.5 mm 4.0 7.0
25 mm 4.5 7.5
19 mm) 4.5 7.5
12.5 mm 5.5 8.5
(1) The minimum air content values in the table may be reduced by up to 1.0 percent for concrete
with f’c greater than 34.5 megapascals.
(2) Meet the requirements of AASHTO M 43, Table 1 – Standard Sizes of Processed Aggregate.
(3) For P(AE) concrete, reduce the as-delivered minimum air content by 1.0 percent and use a
maximum air content of 6.0 percent.

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 393

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 552.3
Cementitious Material Requirements for Concrete
Maximum Percent of Total
Cementitious Materials Cementitious Materials by
Mass
Fly ash or other pozzolans conforming to AASHTO M 295 25
Slag conforming to AASHTO M 302 50
Silica fume conforming to
10
AASHTO M 307
Total fly ash or other pozzolans, slag, and silica fume 50 (1)
Total fly ash or other pozzolans and silica fume 35 (1)
(1) Limit fly ash or other pozzolans to no more than 25 percent of the total mass of cementitious material and
limit silica fume to no more than 10 percent of the total mass of cementitious material.

Submit concrete mix designs on FHWA Form 1608.

Verify mixture design with trial mixes prepared according to ACI 318 from proposed sources or with
previous concrete production data for the mixture design submitted from proposed sources. Submit
written concrete mix designs for approval at least 36 days before production. Include the following in
each mix design submittal:

(a) Project identification;

(b) Name and address of Contractor and concrete producer;

(c) Mix design designation;

(d) Class of concrete and intended use;

(e) Material proportions;

(f) Name and location of material sources for aggregate, cement, admixtures, and water;

(g) Type of cement and other cementitious materials if used. Fly ash, ground granulated
blast-furnace slag, or silica fume may partially replace cement in any mix. Follow the cement
replacement limits in Table 552.3;

(h) Cement content in kilograms per cubic meter of concrete;

(i) The saturated surface dry batch mass of the coarse and fine aggregate in kilograms per cubic
meter of concrete;

(j) Water content in kilograms per cubic meter of concrete;

(k) Water/cementitious material ratio. The water/cementitious material ratio for modified concrete
is the ratio of the mass of water to the combined masses of hydraulic cement and cement substitute;

(l) Dosage of admixtures. Provide a qualified person from the admixture manufacturer to help
establish the proper dosage when requested by the Engineer. Do not mix chemical admixtures
together in a mix unless they are compatible. Furnish supporting documentation of compatibility
from the manufacturers.

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 394

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(1) Air-entraining admixtures. Entrained air may be obtained with either air entraining
hydraulic cement or air entraining admixture.
(2) Set accelerating admixtures. Do not use chloride accelerators. Do not use set
accelerating admixtures in prestressed concrete applications.
(3) Hydration stabilizing admixtures. Hydration stabilizing admixtures may be used to
extend the allowable delivery time for concrete. Base the dosage on the time needed to delay
the initial set of the concrete for delivery and discharge on the job. Include the design
discharge time limit in the dosage submittal. The maximum allowable design discharge time
is 3.50 hours;
(m) Fine and coarse aggregate quality;

(n) Sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregate;

(o) Absorption of fine and coarse aggregate;

(p) Bulk specific gravity (dry and saturated surface dry) of fine and coarse aggregate;

(q) Dry rodded density of coarse aggregate in kilograms per cubic meter;

(r) Fineness modulus (FM) of fine aggregate;

(s) Material certifications for cementitious materials, admixtures, and aggregate;

(t) Target values for concrete slump with and without high-range water reducers;

(u) Target values for concrete air content. Include the proposed range of air content for concrete to
be incorporated into the work. Describe the methods by which air content will be monitored and
controlled;

(v) Concrete density;

(w) Specified design strength (f’c) and required average strength (f’cr) for the concrete mixture at 28
days as determined by the process described in ACI 318 Chapter 5. This process and associated
calculations are outlined on FHWA Form 1608, pages 4 and 5. Pending 28-day strength results, a
mix design may be approved on the basis that 7-day compressive strength results meet or exceed
85 percent of the required average strength (f’cr) at 28 days;

(x) Compressive strengths test results at 7 and 28 days according to Table 552.9, note 3; and

(y) Material samples if requested.

Do not begin production until the mix design is approved by the Engineer.

Furnish a new mix design for approval if there is a change in a source of material or when the fineness
modulus of the fine aggregate changes by more than 0.20.

552.04 Storage and Handling of Material. Store and handle material in a manner that prevents
segregation, contamination, or other harmful effects. Do not use cement and fly ash containing

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 395

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

evidence of moisture contamination. Store and handle aggregate in a manner that ensures uniform
moisture content at the time of batching.

552.05 Measuring Material. Batch the concrete according to the approved mix design and the
following tolerances:

(a) Cement ±1 percent

(b) Water ±1 percent

(c) Aggregate ±2 percent

(d) Additive ±3 percent

552.06 Batching Plant, Mixers, and Agitators. Use a batching plant, mixer, and agitator conforming
to AASHTO M 157.

552.07 Mixing. Mix the concrete in a central-mix plant or in truck mixers. Operate equipment within
manufacturer’s recommended capacity. Produce concrete of uniform consistency.

(a) Central-mix plant. Dispense liquid admixtures through a controlled flowmeter. Use dispensers
with sufficient capacity to measure, at one time, the full quantity of admixture required for each
batch. If more than one admixture is used, dispense each with separate equipment.

Charge the coarse aggregate, one third of the water, and all air entraining admixture into the mixer
first, then add remainder of the material.

Mix for at least 50 seconds. Begin mixing time after all cement and aggregate are in the drum. Add
the remaining water during the first quarter of the mixing time. Add 4 seconds to the mixing time if
timing starts the instant the skip reaches its maximum raised position. Transfer time in multiple-
drum mixers is included in mixing time. Mixing time ends when the discharge chute opens.

Remove the contents of an individual mixer before a succeeding batch is charged into the drum.

(b) Truck mixer. Do not use mixers with any section of the blades worn 1 inch (25 millimeters) or
more below the original manufactured height. Do not use mixers and agitators with accumulated
hard concrete or mortar in the mixing drum.

Add admixtures to the mix water before or during mixing.

Charge the batch into the drum so a portion of the mixing water enters before the cement.

Mix each batch of concrete according to AASHTO M 157.

552.08 Delivery. Produce and deliver concrete to permit a continuous placement with no concrete
achieving initial set before the remaining concrete being placed adjacent to it. Deliver, handle, and
place concrete in such a manner as to minimize rehandling of the concrete and prevent any damage to
the structure.

Do not place concrete that has developed an initial set. Do not re-temper concrete by adding water.

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 396

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

If a hydration stabilizing admixture is approved for use in the concrete mix, deliver and place the
concrete within the approved design discharge time limit. Limit the slump loss to no more than 50
millimeters during the stabilization period. An approved and compatible hydration activator may be
used at the discharge site to ensure proper placement and testing.

(a) Truck mixer/agitator. Use the agitating speed for rotation after mixing. When a truck mixer or
truck agitator is used to transport concrete that is completely mixed in a stationary central
construction mixer, mix during transportation at manufacturer’s recommended agitating speed. Do
not exceed 100 total revolutions at mixing speed, including both initial mixing and remixing.

If the concrete has not obtained an initial set, water and admixtures in the approved mix design may
be added one time at the project to obtain the required slump or air content. Limit the total of water
in the mix so as not to exceed the maximum water/cementitious material ratio of the approved mix
design. Remix the concrete and added water or admixtures with 30 revolutions at mixing speed.
After the initial introduction of mixing water to cement or cement to aggregates, complete the
remixing within the time specified in Table 552.4. After the beginning of the addition of the
cement, complete the discharge of the concrete within the time specified in Table 552.5.

Table 552.4
Concrete Remixing and Discharge Time Limits
Remixing Discharge
Cement Type (1) Admixtures Time Limit Time Limit
(hour) (hour)
Type I, IA, II, IIA, V, or approved
None 0.75 1.00
blended hydraulic cement
AASHTO
Type I, IA, II, IIA, V, or approved
M 194, 1.25 1.50
blended hydraulic cement
type B, D, or G
Approved design
Type I, IA, II, IIA, V, or approved Hydration discharge
3.00
blended hydraulic cement stabilizer time limit,
3.50 maximum
Type III None 0.50 0.75
AASHTO
Type III M 194, 1.00 1.25
type B, D, or G
(1) AASHTO M 85 or AASHTO M 240, as applicable.

(b) Non-agitating equipment. Non-agitating equipment may be used to deliver concrete if the
concrete discharge is completed within 20 minutes from the beginning of the addition of the
cement to the mixing drum. Use equipment with smooth, mortar tight, metal containers capable of
discharging the concrete at a controlled rate without segregation. Provide covers when needed for
protection.

552.09 Quality Control of Mix. Submit and follow a quality control plan according to Sections 153
and 154 as applicable and the following:

(a) Mixing. Designate a certified concrete technician at the mixing plant to be responsible for the
mixing operations and quality control including:

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 397

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(1) Proper storage and handling of components of the mix;

(2) Proper maintenance and cleanliness of plant, trucks, and other equipment;
(3) Sampling and testing according to Table 552.9;
(4) Adjusting the mix proportions to maintain the required water/cementitious ratio;
(5) Computing batch masses for each day's production;
(6) Checking of the plant's calibration; and
(7) Completing batch tickets. Include the following:
(a) Concrete supplier;
(b) Ticket serial number;
(c) Date and truck number;
(d) Contractor;
(e) Structure or location of placement;
(f) Mix-design and concrete class;
(g) Component quantities and concrete total volume;
(h) Moisture corrections for aggregate moisture;
(i) Total water in mix at plant;
(j) Time of batching and time at which discharge must be completed;
(k) Maximum water that may be added to the mix at the project; and
(l) If a hydration stabilizing admixture is used, the slump at the plant after adding the
stabilizer.
Provide equipment necessary for the above tests and controls. Furnish copies of work sheets for
Subsections 522.09(a)(3), (4), (5), and (7) as they are completed.

(b) Delivery and sampling. Designate at least one certified concrete technician at the project to be
responsible for concrete delivery, discharge, and sampling including:

(1) Verifying adjustments to the mix comply with the specifications before discharge;
(2) Completing the batch ticket for each load by, recording the apparent water/cementitious
ratio and the time;
(3) Sampling and testing according to Table 552.9; and
(4) If hydration stabilizing admixture is used, determining the slump before placement. Do
not use concrete with a slump loss of more than 50 millimeters as compared to the slump
recorded at the batch plant.
552.10 Temperature and Weather Conditions. Maintain the temperature of the concrete mixture just
before placement between 10 and 32 °C, except for bridge decks between 10 and 27 °C.

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 398

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(a) Cold weather. Cold weather is defined as a period when for more than 3 consecutive days the
following conditions exist:

(1) average of the highest and the lowest temperatures occurring during the period from
midnight to midnight is less than 5°C; and
(2) air temperature is not greater than 10 °C for more than one-half of any 24-hour period.
When cold weather is reasonably expected or has occurred within 7 days of anticipated concrete
placement; submit a detailed plan for the producing, transporting, placing, protecting, curing, and
temperature monitoring of concrete during cold weather. ACI 306 may be used for guidance in
developing the plan. Include procedures for accommodating abrupt changes in weather conditions.
Do not commence placement until the plan is accepted. Allow at least 3 day for review and
approval of the plan.

Have material and equipment required for protection available at the project before commencing
cold weather concreting.

Remove from the surfaces, including reinforcement and subgrade, against which the concrete is to
be placed. Heat surfaces that come into contact with fresh concrete to at least 2°C and maintain the
temperature of these surfaces at 2°C or above during concrete placement.

Place heaters and direct ducts so as not to cause concrete drying or fire hazards. Vent exhaust flue
gases from combustion heating units to the outside of any enclosures. Heat the concrete
components in a manner that is not detrimental to the mix. Do not heat cement or permit the
cement to come into contact with aggregates that are hotter than 40 °C. Do not heat aggregates with
a direct flame or on sheet metal over fire. Do not heat fine aggregate by direct steam. Do not add
salts to prevent freezing.

Protect concrete for at least 72 hours according to Table 552.5. Protect concrete exposed in the
final construction for at least 7 days according to Table 552.5.

Furnish and place continuously recording surface temperature measuring devices that are accurate
within ±1°C.

At the end of the protection period, allow the concrete to cool gradually over 24 hours at a rate not
to exceed the maximum values shown in Table 552.5. Remove protection when the concrete
surface temperature is within 15°C of the ambient air temperature.

Table 552.5
Cold Weather Concrete Surface Temperatures
Minimum section size
<300 mm 300 – 900 mm 900 – 1800 mm (>1800 mm
dimension
Minimum temperature of
concrete during 13 °C 10 °C 7 °C 5 °C
protection period
Maximum allowable
temperature drop in any
28 °C 22 °C 17 °C 11 °C
24-hour period after end
of protection

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 399

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Hot weather. Hot weather is defined as any time during the concrete placement when the
ambient temperature at the work site is above 35°C.

Cool surfaces that come in contact with the mix to below 35°C by covering with wet burlap or
cotton mats, fog spraying with water, covering with protective housing, or by other approved
methods.

During placement, maintain concrete temperature by using any combination of the following:

(1) Shade the material storage areas or production equipment;

(2) Cool aggregate by sprinkling; and
(3) Cool aggregate and water by refrigeration or replacing a portion or all of the mix water
with flaked or crushed ice to the extent that the ice completely melts during mixing of the
concrete.
(c) Evaporation. When placing concrete in bridge decks or other exposed slabs, limit expected
evaporation rate to less than 0.5 kilograms per square meter per hour as determined by Figure
552.1.

When necessary, take one or more of the following actions:

(1) Construct windbreaks or enclosures to effectively reduce the wind velocity throughout the
area of placement;
(2) Use fog sprayers upwind of the placement operation to effectively increase the relative
humidity; and
(3) Reduce the temperature of the concrete according to (b) above.
(d) Rain. Protect the concrete from rain during and after placement.

552.11 Handling and Placing Concrete. Perform the work under Section 208, except for work under
Section 258 which will be performed under Section 209. Construct reinforcing steel, structural steel,
bearing devices, joint material, and miscellaneous items according to the appropriate Sections.

(a) General. Design and construct falsework and forms according to Section 562. Remove mortar,
debris, and foreign material from the forms and reinforcing steel. Do not place concrete until the
forms, embedded material, and the adequacy of the foundation material have been inspected.
Thoroughly moisten the forms and subgrade immediately before concrete is placed against them.
Use an approved form release agent to produce a minimum of staining, air holes, and hydration
discoloration.

Handle, place, and consolidate concrete by methods that do not cause segregation and will result in
dense homogeneous concrete that is free of voids and rock pockets. Do not displace reinforcing
steel or other material that is to be embedded in the concrete during concrete placement. Do not
retemper concrete by adding water to the mix. Use temporary form spreader devices until concrete
placement precludes their need.

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 400

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

To use this chart:

1. Enter with air
temperature, move
up to relative
humidity.
2. Move right to
concrete
temperature.
3. Move down to
wind velocity.
4. Move left, read
approximate rate of
evaporation.

Figure 552.1
Evaporation Rate of Surface Moisture
Note: Example shown by dashed lines is for an air temperature of 18°C, relative humidity of
45 percent, concrete temperature of 18°C, and a wind velocity of 15 miles (24 kilometers) per hour.
This results in a rate of evaporation of 0.63 kilograms per square meter per hour.

Place concrete continuously without interruption between planned construction or expansion joints.
Control the delivery rate, placing sequence, and construction methods to ensure fresh concrete is
always placed and consolidated against previously placed pre-initial set concrete. Do not allow
time between the placement of successive batches to exceed 30 minutes.

Do not damage previously placed concrete or break the bond between the concrete and reinforcing
steel. Keep workers off fresh concrete. Do not support platforms for workers and equipment
directly on reinforcing steel. Once the concrete is set, do not disturb the forms or reinforcing bars
that project from the concrete until it is of sufficient strength to resist damage.

(b) Sequence of placement.

(1) Substructures. Do not place loads on finished bents, piers, or abutments until concrete
cylinder tests from the same concrete cured under the same conditions as the substructure
element indicate that the concrete has at least 80 percent of its required 28-day compressive

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 401

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

strength.
(2) Vertical members. For vertical members less than 4.5 meters in height, allow the
concrete to set for at least 30 minutes before placing integral horizontal members. For vertical
members over 4.5 meters in height, allow at least 12 hours. Do not transfer loads from
horizontal members until the concrete has reached the specified strength and has been in
place at least 7 days.
Do not mount friction collars or falsework brackets on vertical members until the concrete
has cured for at least 7 days or has reached specified strength.
(3) Superstructures. Place concrete in the superstructure only after the substructure forms
are stripped to allow inspection of the supporting concrete.
For concrete placed in T-beams or deck girders with depths greater than 1200 millimeters,
allow 5 days cure time for the stem concrete before placement of the top or deck slab.
For box girders, place the bottom slab and stems in one or separate placements. Do not place
the top slab until the stems have 5 days cure time.
(4) Arches. Place concrete for arches in alternate lateral sections to minimize shrinkage
stresses. Take into account deflections of the arch centering. Place other sections
symmetrically with respect to the center of the bridge span. Where wide barrel arches require
a longitudinal joint, place concrete on each side of such joint independently of the centering
to avoid relative settlements. Bond the sections together with suitable keys or dowels.
(5) Box culverts. Place the box culvert base slab and allow 24 hours before the remainder of
the culvert is constructed.
(6) Precast elements. Place and consolidate concrete so that shrinkage cracks are not
produced in the member.
(c) Placing methods. Use equipment of sufficient capacity that is designed and operated to prevent
mix segregation and mortar loss. Do not use equipment that causes vibrations that could damage
the freshly-placed concrete. Do not use equipment with aluminum parts that come in contact with
the concrete. Remove set or dried mortar from inside surfaces of placing equipment.

Place concrete as near as possible to its final position. Consolidate concrete in horizontal layers
greater than 18 inches (450 millimeters) thick. Do not exceed the vibrator capacity to consolidate
and merge the new layer with the previous layer. Do not place concrete at a rate that exceeds the
design loading of the forms.

Do not drop unconfined concrete more than 1.5 meters. Concrete may be confined by using a tube
fitted with a hopper head or other approved device that prevents mix segregation and mortar
spattering. This does not apply to cast-in-place piling or drilled shaft when concrete placement is
completed before initial set occurs in the bottom of the piling.

Operate concrete pumps so that a continuous stream of concrete without air pockets is delivered at
the tube discharge.

(d) Consolidation. Provide sufficient hand-held internal concrete vibrators or mechanical vibrator
gangs suitable for the conditions of concrete placement. Use vibrators conforming to Table 552.6.
Provide rubber-coated vibrators when epoxy-coated reinforcement is used.

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 402

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Provide a spare vibrator at the site in case of breakdown. Use external form vibrators only when the
forms have been designed for external vibration and when internal vibration is not possible.

Table 552.6
Hand Held Vibratory Requirements
Head Diameter Frequency Radius of Action
(vibrations/minute)
20 to 40 mm 9,000 to 15,000 75 to 150 mm
30 to 65 mm 8,500 to 12,500 130 to 250 mm
50 to 90 mm 8,000 to 12,000 180 to 350 mm

Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibration immediately after placement. Manipulate vibrators to

thoroughly work the concrete around reinforcement, embedded fixtures, corners, and angles in the
forms. Do not cause segregation. Do not consolidate concrete placed underwater. Supplement
vibration with spading, as necessary, to ensure smooth surfaces and dense concrete along form
surfaces, in corners, and at locations impossible to reach with the vibrators.

Vibrate the concrete at the point of deposit and at uniformly spaced points not farther apart than 1.5
times the radius over which the vibration is visibly effective. Insert vibrators so that the affected
vibrated areas overlap. Do not use vibrators to move concrete. Insert vibrators vertically and slowly
withdraw from the concrete. Vibrate with sufficient duration and intensity to thoroughly
consolidate the concrete but not to cause segregation. Do not vibrate at any one point long enough
to cause localized areas of grout to form. Do not vibrate reinforcement.

(e) Underwater placement. Underwater placement of concrete is permitted only for concrete
mixtures designed for underwater placement according to Subsection 552.03. Use tremies, concrete
pumps, or other approved methods for placement.

(1) Tremies. Use watertight tremies, with a sufficient to ensure that aggregate-induced
blockages will not occur Use multiple tremies as required. Make tremies capable of being
rapidly lowered to retard or stop the flow of concrete.
Seal the discharge end and fill the tremie tube with concrete at the start of concrete
placement. Keep the tremie tube full of concrete to the bottom during placement. If water
enters the tube, withdraw the tremie and reseal the discharge end. Maintain continuous
concrete flow until the placement is completed.
(2) Concrete pumps. Use pumps with a device at the end of the discharge tube to seal out
water while the tube is first being filled with concrete. When concrete flow is started, keep
the end of the discharge tube full of concrete and below the surface of the deposited concrete
until placement has been completed.
Place underwater concrete continuously from start to finish in a dense mass. Place each succeeding
layer of concrete before the preceding layer has taken initial set using more than one tremie or
pump if necessary. Keep the concrete surface as horizontal as practical. Do not disturb after
placement. Maintain still water at the point of deposit.

Dewater after test specimens cured under similar conditions indicate that the concrete has sufficient
strength to resist the expected loads. Remove laitance or other unsatisfactory material from the
exposed concrete.

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 403

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(f) Concrete railings and parapets. Use smooth, tight-fitting, rigid forms. Neatly miter corners.
Place concrete railings and parapets after the falsework for the supporting span is released. Remove
forms without damaging the concrete. Finish corners to be true, clean-cut, and without cracks,
spalls, or other defects.

Cast precast railing members in mortar-tight forms. Remove precast members from molds as soon
as the concrete has sufficient strength to be self-supporting. Protect edges and corners from
chipping, cracking, and other damage. Cure according to Subsection 552.15(b). The curing period
may be shortened when approved, by using moist heat, type III portland cement, or water reducing
agents.

552.12 Construction Joints. Provide construction joints at locations shown on the plans. Obtain
approval for additional construction joints.

Extend reinforcing steel uninterrupted through construction joints. Embed lap splices or mechanical
splices within the concrete. Do not use dowels. At horizontal construction joints, place gauge strips
inside the forms along exposed faces to produce straight joint lines.

When the joint is between fresh and newly hardened concrete, rough float the first placement to
thoroughly consolidate the surface and leave the surface in a roughened condition. Clean the joint
surface of laitance, curing compound, and other foreign material. Use an abrasive blast or other
approved method to expose the aggregate on the joint surface. Re-tighten forms where the joint
overlaps the first placement. Immediately before placing new concrete, flush the joint surface with
water and allow it to dry to a surface dry condition.

When the joint is between existing concrete and a new placement, abrasive blast clean or use other
approved methods to remove laitance and foreign material, to expose clean aggregate, and to roughen
the joint surface. Before concrete placement, apply approved bonding products to the joint surface
according to the manufacturer’s recommendation.

552.13 Expansion and Contraction Joints.

(a) Open joints. Form open joints with a wooden strip, metal plate, or other approved material.
Remove the joint forming material without chipping or breaking the corners of the concrete. Do not
extend reinforcement across an open joint.

(b) Filled joints. Cut pre-molded expansion joint filler to the shape and size of the surface being
jointed. Secure the joint filler on one surface of the joint using galvanized nails or other acceptable
means. Splice according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. After form removal, remove and
neatly cut concrete or mortar that has sealed across the joint. Fill joint gaps ⅛ inch (3 millimeters)
or wider with approved filler. Place necessary dowels, load transfer devices, and other devices as
shown on the plans or as directed.

(c) Steel joints. Fabricate plates, angles, or other structural shapes accurately to conform to the
concrete surface. Set joint opening to conform to the ambient temperature at the time of concrete
placement. Securely fasten the joints to keep them in correct position. Maintain an unobstructed
joint opening during concrete placement.

(d) Compression joint seals. Use one-piece compression joint seals for transverse joints and the
longest practical length for longitudinal joints. Clean and dry joints and remove spalls and
irregularities. Apply a lubricant adhesive as a covering film to both sides of the seal immediately

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 404

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

before installation. Compress the seal and place it in the joint as recommended by the
manufacturer. Make sure the seal is in full contact with the joint walls throughout its length.

Remove and discard seals that are twisted, curled, nicked or improperly formed. Remove and
reinstall joint seals that elongate more than 5 percent of their original length when compressed.
Remove excess lubricant-adhesive before it dries.

(e) Elastomeric expansion joint seal. Install the joint according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations and according to the plans.

552.14 Finishing Plastic Concrete. Strike off concrete surfaces that are not placed against forms.
Float finish the concrete surface. Remove laitance or thin grout. Carefully tool non-chamfered edges
with an edger. Leave edges of joint filler exposed.

Protect the surface from rain damage.

Provide at least two non-sagging and non-vibrating work bridges capable of supporting the workers
and equipment during placement, finishing, and curing operations. Place the work bridges at a
reasonable height above the concrete surface to not impede worker performance and not touch the
finished or fresh concrete surface.

(a) Striking off and floating. For bridge decks or top slabs of structures serving as finished
pavements, use an approved power driven finishing machine equipped with a screed that oscillates
in a transverse direction. Use hand-finishing methods for irregular areas when approved.

Strike off surfaces. Do not support rails within the limits of the concrete placement without
approval.

Set rails or headers on non-yielding supports so the finishing equipment operates without
interruption over entire surface being finished. Extend rails beyond both ends of the scheduled
concrete placement a sufficient distance to enable finishing machine to finish the concrete being
placed.

Set rails the entire length of continuous girder structures before placing deck concrete in any spans.

Adjust rails, headers, and strike-off equipment to the required profile and cross-section allowing for
anticipated settlement, camber, and deflection of falsework.

Before beginning delivery and placement of concrete, operate the finishing machine over the entire
area to be finished to check for excessive rail deflections, deck thickness, reinforcing steel cover,
and to verify proper operation of equipment. Make necessary corrections before concrete
placement begins.

After placing the concrete, operate finishing machine over the concrete as needed to obtain the
required profile and cross-section. Keep a slight roll of excess concrete in front of the cutting edge
of the screed at all times. Maintain this excess of concrete to the end of the pour or form and then
remove and waste it. Adjust rails or headers as necessary to correct for unanticipated settlement or
deflection.

Remove rail supports embedded in the concrete to at least 50 millimeters below the finished
surface. Clean the voids of dust and debris using compressed air or other means. Apply approved

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 405

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

bonding material in the voids. Fill the voids with fresh concrete of the same type and property as
previously placed. Finish the surface with a float, roller or other approved device as necessary to
remove local irregularities.

Remove excess water, laitance, or foreign material brought to the surface using a squeegee or
straightedge drawn from the center of the slab towards either edge. Do not apply water to the
surface of the concrete during finishing operations.

(b) Straightedging. Check slab and sidewalk surfaces. Check the entire surface parallel to the
centerline of the bridge with a 3-meter metal straightedge. Overlap the straightedge at least half the
length of the previous straightedge placement.

Correct deviations in excess of 3 millimeters from the testing edge of the straightedge. For deck
surfaces that are to receive an overlay, correct deviations in excess of 6 millimeters.

(c) Texturing. Finish after floating or at a time when finishing operations will not displace
aggregate. Produce a skid-resistant surface texture on driving surfaces by grooving. Use one of the
following or a combination finishes for other surfaces as required.

(1) Grooved finish. Use a float having a single row of fins or an approved machine designed
specifically for sawing grooves in concrete pavements. Space fins 13 to 20 millimeters on
centers. Make the grooves 2 to 5 millimeters wide and 3 to 5 millimeters deep. Groove
perpendicular to the centerline without tearing the concrete surface or loosening surface
aggregate.
If grooves are sawn, cut the grooves approximately 6 millimeters wide at a spacing of 13 to
25 millimeters.
On bridge decks, discontinue grooving 300 millimeters from curb face and provide a
longitudinal troweled finish on the surface of gutters.
(2) Sidewalk finish. Strike off the surface using a strike board and then float the surface. Use
an edging tool on edges and expansion joints. Broom the surface using a broom with stiff
bristles, broom perpendicular to the centerline from edge to edge with adjacent strokes
slightly overlapped. Produce regular corrugations not over 3 millimeters in depth without
tearing the concrete. Correct porous spots, irregularities, depressions, small pockets, and
rough spots while the concrete is plastic. Groove contraction joints at the required interval
using an approved grooving tool.
(3) Troweled and brushed finish. Use a steel trowel to produce a slick, smooth surface free
of bleed water. Brush the surface with a fine brush using parallel strokes.
(4) Exposed aggregate finish. Strike off the surface using a strike board and then float the
surface. Use an edging tool on transverse and longitudinal joints that are against forms or
existing pavement. Do not edge transverse joints in a continuous lane pour or longitudinal
joints in a continuous dual lane pour.
Broom the surface as soon as the concrete hardens sufficiently to prevent particles of gravel
from being dislodged. Use stiff brushes approved by the Engineer. Exercise care to prevent
marring of the surface and cracking or chipping of slab edges or joints. Apply a light spray of
retardant to the unfinished surface to facilitate this work if approved.
First, broom transversely across the pavement. Pull the loosened semi-stiff mortar entirely off

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 406

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

the pavement. Remove the mortar from adjacent pavements. Then broom parallel to the
pavement centerline. Continue this operation until a sufficient amount of coarse aggregate is
exposed. Other methods of aggregate exposure, such as using a water spray attachment on a
special exposed aggregate broom, will be permitted if satisfactory results are demonstrated.
After curing according to Subsection 552.15(b) or (c), wash the surface with water and brush
to remove laitance and cement from the exposed coarse aggregate.
(d) Surface underneath bearings. Finish bearing surfaces to within ⅛ inch (5 millimeters) of plan
elevation.

When a masonry plate is to be set:

(1) directly on the concrete or on filler material less than 5 millimeters thick, finish the surface
with a float to an elevation slightly above plan elevation. Grind the surface as necessary to
provide a full and even bearing after the concrete has set.
(2) on filler material between 6 to 13 millimeters thick, finish the surface with a steel trowel.
Finish or grind the surface so that it does not vary from a straightedge in any direction by more
than 6 millimeters.
(3) on filler material greater than 13 millimeters thick or when an elastomeric bearing pad is to
be used, finish the surface to a plane surface free of ridges.
When required under a masonry plate or elastomeric bearing pad, use nonshrink grout. Proprietary
products may be used with approval..

(e) Surface underneath waterproofing membrane deck seal. Finish to a smooth surface, free of
ridges and other projections.

552.15 Curing Concrete. Begin curing immediately after the free surface water has evaporated and
the finishing is complete. If the surface of the concrete begins to dry before the selected cure method
can be implemented, keep concrete surface moist using a fog spray without damaging the surface.

Keep surfaces to be rubbed moist after forms are removed. Cure immediately following the first rub.

Cure the top surfaces of bridge decks using the liquid membrane curing compound method combined
with the water method. Apply liquid membrane curing compound immediately after finishing. Apply
the water cure within 4 hours after finishing.

Cure concrete uninterrupted for at least 7 days. If pozzolans in excess of 10 percent by mass of the
hydraulic cement is used in the mix, cure uninterrupted for at least 10 days.

(a) Forms in-place method. For formed surfaces, leave the forms in-place without loosening. If
forms are removed during the curing period to facilitate rubbing, only strip forms from those areas
able to be rubbed during the same shift. During rubbing, keep the surface of the exposed concrete
moist. After the rubbing is complete, continue curing process using the water method for the
remainder of the curing period.

(b) Water method. Keep the concrete surface continuously wet by ponding, spraying, or covering
with material that is kept continuously and thoroughly wet. Covering material may consist of
cotton mats, multiple layers of burlap, or other approved material that does not discolor or
otherwise damage the concrete.

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 407

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Cover the covering material with a waterproof sheet material that prevents moisture loss from the
concrete. Use the widest sheets practical. Lap adjacent sheets at least 150 millimeters, and tightly
seal seams with pressure sensitive tape, mastic, glue, or other approved methods. Secure material
so that wind does not displace it. Immediately repair sheets that are broken or damaged.

(c) Liquid membrane curing compound method. Do not use the liquid membrane method on
surfaces to receive a rubbed finish. Use on construction joint surfaces is permitted only if the
compound is removed by sandblasting before placement of concrete against the joint.

Use type 2, white-pigmented, liquid membrane only on the top surfaces of bridge decks or on
surfaces not exposed to view in the completed work. Use type 1-D clear curing compounds on
other surfaces and any colored concrete.

Mix membrane curing solutions containing pigments before use. Continue to agitate during
application. Use equipment capable of producing a fine spray. Apply the curing compound at a
minimum rate of 0.25 liters per square meter in one or two uniform applications. If the solution is
applied in 2 applications, follow the first application with the second application within 30 minutes,
and apply at right angles to the first application.

Immediately apply a new coat over the damaged areas if the membrane is damaged by rain or other
means during the curing period.

552.16 Finishing Formed Concrete Surfaces. Remove and replace or repair, as approved, rock
pockets or honeycombed concrete. Finish sound, formed concrete surfaces as follows:

(a) Class 1 – Ordinary surface finish. Finish the following surfaces with a Class 1, ordinary
surface finish:

(1) Under surfaces of slab spans, box girders, filled spandrel arch spans, and the roadway
deck slab between superstructure girders;
(2) Inside vertical surface or T-girders of superstructures; and
(3) Surfaces to be buried and culvert surfaces above finished ground that are not visible from
the traveled way or a walkway.
Begin finishing as soon as the forms are removed. Remove fins and irregular projections from
surfaces that are exposed or will be waterproofed. Remove bulges and offsets with carborundum
stones or discs. Remove localized, poorly-bonded rock pockets or honeycombed concrete, and
replace with sound concrete or packed mortar in an approved manner.

Clean and point form tie cavities, holes, broken corners and edges, and other defects. Saturate the
area with water. Finish the area with mortar that is less than 1-hour old. After the mortar is set, rub
it (if required) and continue curing. Match exposed surfaces to surrounding concrete.

Carefully tool and remove free mortar and concrete from construction and expansion joints. Leave
joint filler exposed for its full length with clean, true edges.

Rub or grind bearing surfaces on piers and abutments to the specified elevation and slope.

If the final finished surface is not true and uniform, rub it according to Subsection 552.16(b).

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 408

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Class 2 – Rubbed finish. Finish the following surfaces with a Class 2, rubbed finish:

(1) Surfaces of bridge superstructures except those surfaces designated to receive a Class 1 or
other finish;
(2) Surfaces of bridge piers, piles, columns and abutments, and retaining walls above finished
ground and to at least 300 millimeters below finished ground;
(3) Surfaces of open spandrel arch rings, spandrel columns and abutment towers;
(4) Surfaces of pedestrian undercrossings except floors and surfaces to be covered with earth;
(5) Surfaces above finished ground of culvert headwalls and endwalls when visible from the
traveled way or walkway;
(6) Inside surfaces of culvert barrels higher than 1200 millimeter that are visible from the
traveled way. Finish for a distance inside the barrel at least equal to the height of the culvert;
and
(7) Surfaces of railings.
Complete a Class 1 finish according to Subsection 552.16(a). Saturate the concrete surface with
water. Rub the surface with a medium coarse carborundum stone using a small amount of mortar
on its face. Use mortar composed of cement and fine sand mixed in the same proportions as the
concrete being finished. Continue rubbing until form marks, projections, and irregularities are
removed and a uniform surface is obtained. Leave the paste produced by this rubbing in place.

After other work which could affect the surface is complete; rub with a fine carborundum stone,
and water until the entire surface has a smooth texture and uniform color. After the surface has
dried; rub it with burlap to remove loose powder. Leave the surface without unsound patches,
paste, powder, and objectionable marks.

(c) Class 3 – Tooled finish. Do not use mortar blocks or wires to set reinforcing steel near the
formed surface of areas to receive a tooled finish. Complete a Class 1 finish according to
Subsection 552.16(a). Let the concrete set for at least 14 days or longer if necessary to prevent the
aggregate particles from being picked out of the surface. Use air tools such as a bush hammer, pick,
or crandall. Chip away the surface mortar, and break the aggregate particles to expose a grouping
of broken aggregate particles in a matrix of mortar. Produce a tooled finish on a small test area for
approval before proceeding. Adjust the work procedures to produce a satisfactory finish and use
those same procedures to finish the designated area.

(d) Class 4 – Sandblasted finish. Complete a Class 1 finish according to Subsection 552.16(a).
Let the concrete cure for at least 14 days. Protect adjacent surfaces that are not to be sandblasted.
Sandblast a small test area for approval before proceeding. Use hard, sharp sand to produce an even
fine-grained surface in which the mortar is cut away leaving the aggregate exposed. Do not remove
mortar beyond one-third the diameter of the coarse aggregate.

(e) Class 5 – Wire brushed or scrubbed finish. Complete a Class 1 finish according to
Subsection 552.16(a). Begin as soon as the forms are removed. Scrub the surface with stiff wire or
fiber brushes using a solution of muriatic acid. Mix the solution in the proportion of 1 part acid to 4
parts water. Scrub until the cement film or surface is completely removed and the aggregate
particles are exposed. Leave an evenly pebbled texture having the appearance of fine granite to

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 409

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

coarse conglomerate depending upon the size and grading of aggregate. Wash the entire surface
with water containing a small amount of ammonia.

(f) Class 6 – Color finish. Build a sufficient number of 600-millimeter by 1200-millimeter

concrete color sample panels to obtain a color acceptable to the Engineer. Protect the approved
color sample panel. Color designated surfaces to match the color of the approved sample.

Complete a Class 1 finish according to Subsection 552.16(a). Do not apply the color finish until
concrete placement for the structure is complete. Remove dust, foreign matter, form oil, grease, and
curing compound with a 5 percent solution of trisodium phosphate and then rinse the concrete
surface with clean water.

Use paper, cloth, or other means to protect surfaces not to be color finished. Apply the finish to a
dry concrete surface when the surface temperature is 4°C or higher and the air temperature in the
shade is anticipated to be 4°C or higher during the 24 hours following application.

Apply the color finish according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Spray, brush, or roll on
the first coat of penetrating sealer and color base. Spray, brush, or roll on the finish coat after the
first coat has thoroughly dried. Apply finish to provide a uniform, permanent color, without runs
and sags to the surfaces.

Clean concrete areas not intended to be covered by the finish using an approved method.

552.17 Concrete Anchorage Devices. Use chemical, grouted, or cast-in-place concrete anchorage
devices for attaching equipment or fixtures to concrete.

Furnish the following for approval:

(a) Concrete anchorage device sample;

(b) Manufacturer’s installation instructions; and

(c) Material data and certifications.

Fabricate metal parts of the anchorage devices from stainless steel or from steel protected with a
corrosion resistant metallic coating that does not react chemically with concrete. Supply anchorage
devices complete with hardware.

For chemical or grouted anchors, conduct a system approval test on one anchor on the project, not to be
incorporated in the work. Conduct a static load test according to ASTM E488. Demonstrate that the
anchorage device can withstand a sustained direct tension test load not less than the values shown in
Table 552.7 for a period of at least 48 hours with movement not to exceed 1 millimeter. Also
demonstrate that when loaded to failure, the anchor device demonstrates a ductile failure of the anchor
steel, not a failure of the chemical, grout, or concrete.

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 410

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 552.7
Sustained Load Test Values
Anchorage Device Tension Test
Stud Size Load
M20 24 kN
M16 18.3 kN
M12 12.7 kN
M8 7.1 kN

Install concrete anchorage devices as recommended by the device manufacturer and so that the
attached equipment or fixtures bear firmly against the concrete. Torque installed nuts to the values
specified in Table 552.8 unless otherwise specified in the manufacturer’s instructions. Set bearing
anchor bolts according to the requirements of Section 564.

In the presence of the Engineer, proof load a random sample of at least 10 percent of the anchors to
90 percent of the yield stress of the steel. If any anchor fails, reset the failed anchor and proof load the
reset anchor and 100 percent of remaining anchors. The proof load may be applied by torqueing
against a load indicator washer, applying a direct tension load to the anchor, or another method
approved by the Engineer. After proof loading, release the load on the anchor and retighten the nuts to
the torque specified in Table 552.8 or according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Table 552.8
Torque for Anchorage Devices
Anchorage Device
Torque
Stud Diameter
M20 180 N•m
M16 130 N•m
M12 80 N•m
M8 30 N•m

552.18 Loads on New Concrete Structures. Do not allow traffic on concrete bridge decks until deck
concrete has attained the design compressive strength and has been in place 14 days or longer.
Construction loads less than 1800 kilograms may be placed on the deck 7 days after the concrete is
placed and the concrete in the entire span has attained a compressive strength of at least 70 percent of
the specified design strength

For precast concrete multi-beam sections, do not allow vehicles on any span until the grout has attained
a strength of 21 megapascals and tie rods have been tightened.

For post-tensioned concrete structures, do not allow vehicles over 2000 kilograms on any span until the
prestressing steel for that span is tensioned, grouted, and cured, the grout has obtained a strength of 21
megapascals, and the tie rods are tightened. Vehicles weighing less than 2000 kilograms may be
permitted on a span provided the mass of the vehicle was included in the falsework design.

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 411

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

552.19 Concrete Repair. For concrete repairs, remove existing or new defective concrete according
to Subsection 203.04(b) and (c). After removal of deteriorated or unsound concrete, shotblast
exposed structural steel, reinforcing steel, and concrete surfaces which will be in contact with repair
material until free of rust and foreign material. Clean the sound concrete surface by flushing with
clean water from a high pressure water jet or compressed air. Remove and replace deteriorated
reinforcing steel. Before placing repair concrete, thoroughly flushing with clean water under pressure
or compressed air. If compressed air is used, provide a filter in airline to ensure that the air is oil-free.
If there is an interval of more than 24 hours between cleaning of the sound concrete surfaces that
have been contaminated by substances detrimental to good bonding, clean by abrasive shot blasting
and pressurized water flushing or remove the concrete.

For vertical and overhead concrete repairs, and those horizontal repairs to areas less than 130
millimeters in depth, use a non-shrink grout patching compound placed according to the
manufacturer’s recommendations.

For other repairs patches greater than 130 millimeters in depth, apply a bonding coat of a 2-component
epoxy resin binder to the surfaces of the sound existing concrete immediately before placing new
concrete against it. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations for the epoxy resin binder. Repair
areas using Class A(AE) concrete.

552.20 Acceptance. See Table 552.9 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements and the
quality characteristic category.

Material for concrete will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03. Furnish production
certifications for the cementitious material.

The concrete mixture's slump, air content, density, and temperature will be evaluated under
Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Concrete compressive strength will be evaluated under Subsection 106.05. The lower specification
limit is the minimum required compressive strength at 28 days (fc’) specified in the contract. Remove
and replace concrete represented by cylinders having a compressive strength less than 90 percent of the
minimum 28-day strength (f’c).

Construction (including batching, placing, finishing, and curing concrete) of concrete structures will be
evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Falsework and forms will be evaluated under Section 562.

Measurement

552.21 Measure the Section 552 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring structural concrete by the cubic meter, measure in the structure.

Payment

552.22 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 552 pay items listed in the bid schedule except the structural concrete contract price will be

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 412

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

adjusted according to Subsection 106.05. Payment will be full compensation for the work prescribed in
this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Payment for structural concrete will be made at a price determined by multiplying the contract price by
the compressive strength pay factor.

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 413

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 552.9
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristi Categor Test Sampling Point of Split Reportin Remarks
Product Acceptance c y Methods Frequenc Sampling Sample g
(Subsection(Subsection) Specificatio y Time
) ns
Source
Aggregate Measured and Quality − Subsection 1 per Source of Yes Before −
(703.02) tested for 703.01 & material material producing
conformance 703.02 type
(106.04 & 105)
Design
Concrete " All − Subsection 1 per " If " −
composition 552.03 mix requested
design
Production
Produced Measured and Gradation − AASHTO 1 per Flowing Yes Before −
aggregate tested for T 27 & T 11 day aggregate batching
(fine & conformance stream
coarse) (106.04) (bin, belt,
discharge
conveyor belt,
or stockpile)
Fineness − AASHTO − " " " −
modulus T 27
Moisture test − AASHTO − " " " −
T 255

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 414

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 552.9 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characterist Catego Test Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance ic ry Methods Frequency Samplin Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection) Specification g
s
Production (continued)
Concrete Measured and Density − AASHTO 1 per Point of No Upon −
(552.09(b))(1) tested for T 121 load after discharg Completing
conformance at least e tests
(106.04) 0.2 m3
is
discharged(4)
Air content − AASHTO " " No " −
T 152 or
AASHTO
T 196
Slump − AASHTO " " No " −
T 119
Temperature − AASHTO " " No " −
T 309
Concrete Statistical Compressive II AASHTO 1 set per Dischar Yes 28 Deliver
(552.09(b))(1) (106.05) strength(2)(3) T 23 & T 22 25 m3 ge days verificatio
(28-day) but not less stream n
than 1 per at cylinders
day and point of to
not less than placing the
5 sets total Engineer
or
designated
laboratory
for
scheduled
testing
(1) Sample according to AASHTO R 60 except composite samples are not required.
(2) Cast at least 4 compressive strength test cylinders for 150-millimeter by 300-millimeter specimens or 6 compressive strength
cylinders for 100-millimeter by 200-millimeter and carefully transport the cylinders to the job site curing facility.
(3) A single compressive strength test result is the average result from two 150-millimeter by 300-millimeter or three
100-millimeter by 200-millimeter cylinders cast from the same load.
(4) If 3 successive samples are tested and compliance to the specifications is indicated, screening tests may be reduced to an
approved frequency. Resume initial testing frequency if a test shows a failing temperature, air content, slump, or when directed.
(5) If the point of placement is different from the point of discharge, correlate the discharge tests with the placement tests to
document the changes.

Section 552 – Structural Concrete 415

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 553. — PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

Description

553.01 This work consists of prestressing precast or cast-in-place concrete by furnishing, placing, and
tensioning prestressing steel. This work also includes installing precast, prestressed members except
piling.

Material

553.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsections:

Anchorage devices 722.01

Elastomeric bearing (pads) 717.10(a)
Grout for post-tensioned structures 725.13(c)
Prestressing steel 709.02
Reinforcing steel 709.01
Structural concrete 552

Construction Requirements

553.03 Qualifications. Submit the following for approval at least 30 days before prestressed
concrete operations begin:

(a) Professional Engineer. Name of the engineer with appropriate certifications; and is not
directly employed by the precast concrete manufacturing plant;

(b) Precast Concrete Manufacturing Plant and Quality Control Manager. Name and
appropriate certifications;

(c) Grouting Supervisor. Name and a résumé describing experience on projects of similar
complexity and

(d) Grouting Personnel. Names and a résumé describing their experience on projects of similar
complexity.

553.04 Method Approval. Perform prestressing by either pretensioning or post-tensioning methods. If

a method is proposed that is not in the contract, submit detailed drawings of the method, material, and
equipment proposed for approval at least 30 days before starting prestressing. Include the following:

(a) Method and sequence of stressing;

(b) Complete specifications, details, and test results for the prestressing steel and anchoring
devices;

(c) Anchoring stresses;

(d) Arrangement of the prestressing steel in the members;

(e) Tendon elongation calculations for jacking procedures to be used;

Section 553 – Prestressed Concrete 416

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(f) Number, spacing, and method of draping pretensioned strands;

(g) Other substantiating calculations for the prestressing method;

(h) Type of tendon ducts for post-tensioning;

(i) Pressure grouting material and equipment for post-tensioning;

(j) Samples of wire or strand; and

(k) Additions or re-arrangement of reinforcing steel and changes in concrete dimensions.

For on-site casting, submit drawings showing anticipated leveling or alterations to the site. After
completion of casting, clear the site of equipment and rubbish, and restore it to an acceptable condition.

553.05 Prestressing Steel. Use prestressing steel that is bright and free of corrosion, dirt, grease, wax,
scale, rust, oil, or other foreign material that may prevent bond between the steel and the concrete. Do
not use prestressing steel that has sustained physical damage or is pitted.

One splice per strand is permitted when single strand jacking is used. When multi-strand jacking is
used, splice all the strands or no more than 10 percent of the strands. Use strands having similar
properties, from the same source, and having the same "twist" or "lay". Locate splices outside the
casting bed and between members.

Do not weld or ground welding equipment on forms or other steel in the member after the prestressing
steel is installed.

Failure of one wire in a 7-wire prestressing strand is acceptable if 85 percent of the required tension
load is attained before failure and if the failed strand does not constitute more than 2 percent of the total
area of strands in an individual beam or girder.

Extend bars using couplers which, when assembled, have a tensile strength not less than the tensile
strength of the bars.

Protect prestressing steel against physical damage, rust, or corrosion. Do not use damaged prestressing
steel.

Package prestressing steel to protect it from physical damage and corrosion during shipping and
storage. Place a corrosion inhibitor in the package. Use a corrosion inhibitor that has no deleterious
effect on the steel, concrete, or bond strength of steel to concrete. Replace or restore damaged
packaging.

Mark the shipping package with a statement that the package contains high-strength prestressing steel
and a warning to use care in handling. Identify the type, kind, and amount of corrosion inhibitor used,
including the date when placed, safety regulations, and instructions for use. Assign a lot number and
tag for identification purposes to wire, strand, anchorage assemblies, or bars shipped to the site.

553.06 Concrete. Construct prestressed concrete according to Section 552. Construct reinforcing
steel according to Section 554.

Section 553 – Prestressed Concrete 417

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Make at least one set release strength test cylinders according to AASHTO T 23 in addition to those
required to determine the 28-day compressive strength. Cure the release strength test cylinders with the
concrete member they represent.

Rough cast the top surface of members against which concrete will be cast. Finish surfaces to be
covered with a waterproofing membrane deck seal to a smooth surface free of ridges and other
projections.

Cure the girder in a saturated atmosphere of at least 90 percent relative humidity. Cure time may be
shortened by heating the outside of impervious forms with radiant heat, convection heat, conducted
steam, or hot air.

Apply radiant heat by means of pipes circulating steam, hot oil, hot water, or electric heating elements.
Inspect casting beds to ensure uniform heat application. Use a suitable enclosure to contain the heat.
Minimize moisture loss by covering exposed concrete surfaces with plastic sheeting or liquid
membrane curing compound according to Subsection 552.15. Sandblast curing compound from
surfaces to which concrete will be bonded.

Envelop the entire surface with saturated steam. Completely enclose the casting bed with a suitable
type of housing, tightly constructed to prevent the escape of steam and exclude outside air. Use steam
at 100 percent relative humidity. Do not apply the steam directly to the concrete.

With hot air, the Engineer will approve the method to envelop and maintain the girder in a saturated
atmosphere. Do not allow dry heat to touch the girder surface.

With heat curing methods:

(a) Keep unformed girder surfaces in a saturated atmosphere throughout the curing time.

(b) Embed a thermocouple, linked with a thermometer accurate to ±3 °C, 150 to 200 millimeters
from the top or bottom of the girder on its centerline and near its midpoint.

(c) Monitor with a recording sensor, accurate to ±3 °C), arranged and calibrated to continuously
record, date, and identify concrete temperature throughout the heating cycle.

(d) Make the temperature record available to the Engineer.

(e) Heat concrete to no more than 38 °C during the first 2 hours after placing concrete, and increase
the temperature no more than 22°C per hour to a maximum of 71°C.

(f) Cool concrete, after curing is complete, no more than 22°C per hour until a temperature 11°C
above the temperature of the air to which the concrete will be exposed has been reached.

(g) Keep the temperature of the concrete above 15 C until the girder reaches release strength.

Cure precast, prestressed members to the release compressive strength. This is when the average
strength of 2 representative test cylinders is greater than the minimum required strength and the
individual strength of any one cylinder is no more than 5 percent below the required strength.

553.07 Tensioning. Use hydraulic jacks to tension prestressing steel. Use a pressure gauge or load cell
for measuring jacking force.

Section 553 – Prestressed Concrete 418

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Calibrate measuring devices at least once every 6 months or if they appear to be giving erratic results.
Calibrate the jack and gauge as a unit with the cylinder extension in the approximate position that it
will be at final jacking force. Keep a certified calibration chart with each gauge.

If a pressure gauge is used, do not gauge loads less than ¼ nor more than ¾ of the total graduated
capacity of the gauge, unless calibration data clearly establishes consistent accuracy over a wider
range. Use a pressure gauge with an accurate reading dial at least 150 millimeters in diameter.

Measure the force induced in the prestressing steel using calibrated jacking gauges, load cells, or a
calibrated dynamometer. Take elongation measurements of the prestressing steel. Determine the
required elongation from average load-elongation curves for the prestressing tendons used.

For pre-tensioned members, if there is a discrepancy between the gauge pressure and elongation of
more than 5 percent in tendons over 15 meters in length or 7 percent in tendons of 15 meters or less in
length determine the source of error before proceeding. Do not allow discrepancies in post-tensioned
members to exceed 7 percent.

If the jacking system is equipped with an automatic release valve that closes when the required
prestressing force is reached, strand elongation measurements are only required for the first and last
tendon tensioned and for at least 10 percent of the remaining tendons.

If a load cell is used, do not use the lower 10 percent of the manufacturer’s rated capacity of the load
cell to determine the jacking force.

Do not exceed a temporary tensile stress of 80 percent of the specified minimum ultimate tensile
strength of the prestressing steel. Anchor prestressing steel at an initial stress that will result in the
retention of a working stress after all losses of not less than those required.

For pretensioned members, do not allow the initial release stress after seating, and before other losses,
to exceed 70 percent of the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength of the prestressing steel for
stress-relieved strands and 75 percent for low-relaxation strands. For post-tensioned members, do not
allow the initial release stress after seating to exceed 70 percent of the specified minimum ultimate
tensile strength of the prestressing steel.

553.08 Pretensioned Members. Cast pretensioned members to the tolerances shown in Table 553.1.

(a) Prestressing steel. Protect prestressing steel placed in the stressing bed from contamination and
corrosion if the stressing bed is to be exposed to weather for more than 36 hours before encasement
in concrete.

Free strands of kinks or twists. Accurately hold prestressing steel in position and tension according
to Subsection 553.06. Do not allow strands to unwind more than one turn. Keep a record of the
jacking force and elongation measurements after the strands are tensioned to 20 percent of final
jacking force.

Tension prestressing steel to the required stress. Include in elongation computations strand
anchorage slippage, splice slippage, in place horizontal movement of the structural member during
prestressing operations, and prestressing steel temperature changes between the time of tensioning
and the time when the concrete takes its initial set. Computations must be prepared by a
professional engineer.

Section 553 – Prestressed Concrete 419

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Maintain the prestress bed forms, strands, and reinforcement bar temperature within 14 °C of the
temperature of the concrete to be placed in the forms. Support strands with rollers at points of
direction change when strands are tensioned in a draped position. Use free-running rollers with
minimal friction. Initially, when strands are tensioned and then pulled into the draped position,
tension to no more than the required tension minus the increased tension due to forcing the strand
to a draped profile. If the load in a draped strand at the dead end, as determined by elongation
measurements, is less than 95 percent of the jack load, tension the strand from both ends of the bed.
Make the load, as computed from the sum of elongations produced by jacking at both ends, agree
within 5 percent of the jack load.

Within 3 hours before placing concrete, check the tension on the prestressing strands. The method
and equipment for checking the loss of prestress will be approved by the Engineer. If strands are
tensioned individually, check each strand for loss of prestress. Retension to the original computed
jacking stress for strands that show a loss of prestress in excess of 3 percent. If strands are
tensioned in a group, check the entire group for total loss of prestress. Release and retension the
entire group if the total prestress shows a loss in excess of 3 percent or if any individual strand
appears significantly different from the rest of the strands in the group.

(b) Releasing steel. Release the prestress load to the concrete after the concrete has attained its
required release compressive strength. Do not expose the concrete to temperatures below freezing
for at least 7 days after casting. Cut or release strands such that lateral eccentricity of the prestress
force is minimized. Cut off prestressing steel flush with the end of the member except as noted on
the plans.

(c) Debonding strands. Use solid or split plastic sheathing with a minimum thickness of
0.8 millimeters to debond strands. Before placing concrete, use tape to thoroughly seal split and
solid sheathing including ends to prevent the migration of concrete mortar along the strand.

553.09 Storing, Transporting, and Erecting. Do not ship prestressed concrete members until
concrete cylinder tests, manufactured of the same concrete and cured under the same conditions as the
members, indicate that the concrete in each member has attained the minimum required design strength
and is at least 7-days-old except decked Bulb-T sections must be at least 10 days old.

Before transporting prestressed concrete members, provide written certification from a professional
engineer conforming to the qualifications of Subsection 553.03, that the members were fabricated and
visually inspected according to contract requirements and meet minimum quality requirements.

Store, transport, and erect precast, prestressed girders, slab units, and box units in the upright position
with the points of support and directions of the reactions, with respect to the member, approximately
the same as when the member is in its final position. Prevent cracking or damage during storage,
hoisting, and handling of the precast units. Replace units damaged by improper storage or handling.

553.10 Post-Tensioned Members. Construct post-tensioned members to the tolerances shown in

Table 553.1. Construct supporting falsework so that the superstructure is free to lift off the falsework
and shorten during post-tensioning. Detail formwork left inside box girders to support the roadway slab
to offer minimum resistance to girder shortening due to shrinkage and post-tensioning.

(a) Ducts. Use mortar-tight ducts that are sufficiently-rigid to maintain their shape and alignment
during concrete placement and grout installation. Use ducts conforming to the following minimum
wall thicknesses:

Section 553 – Prestressed Concrete 420

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(1) Metal duct, 65 millimeter diameter: 0.55 millimeter

(2) Metal duct, >65 millimeter diameter: 0.70 millimeter
(3) High density polyethylene (HPDE): 2.0 millimeter
(4) High density polypropylene (HDPP): 2.0 millimeter
(5) Metal duct with bar tendons preassembled 0.25millimeter
with duct

For tendons composed of single prestressing bars, provide ducts with a minimum internal duct
diameter of at least 6 millimeters larger than the outside diameter of the prestressing bar. For
multiple wire, bar, or strand tendons, provide a duct nominal internal cross-sectional area of at least
2.25 times the net area of the prestressing steel. When tendons are to be placed by the pull through
method, provide a duct nominal internal cross-sectional area of at least 2.5 times the net area of the
prestressing steel.

Make positive joints between duct sections. Do not make angles at the joints. Use waterproof tape
at the joints. Bend ducts without crimping or flattening. Use ferrous metal or polyethylene
couplings to connect ducts to anchoring devices.

Protect ducts against crushing, excessive bending, dirt contamination, and corrosive elements
during transport, storage, and handling of ducts.

In case of duct damage, seal duct with tape, or splice a duct coupler over the damaged section to
form a seal that prevents cement paste from entering the duct during the placement of concrete and
to prevent leakage during grouting operations.

Provide ducts and anchorage assemblies with inlets for the injection of grout into the duct after
prestressing according to the PTI Guide Specification for Grouting of Post-Tensioned Structures.

Provide ducts with outlets to allow the escape of air, water, grout, and bleed water according to the
PTI Guide Specification for Grouting of Post-Tensioned Structures.

Provide inlets and outlets with an inner diameter of at least 19 millimeters for strand tendons and of
at least13 millimeters for single bar tendons. Extend the length of outlets a sufficient distance out of
the concrete member to allow for the proper closing of the outlets.

Place inlets and outlets, at a minimum, in the following locations:

• The anchorage area of the tendon;

• All high points of the duct, when the vertical distance between the highest and lowest point
is more than 600 millimeters;
• Place an inlet at or near the lowest point of the tendon;
• Place a free draining outlet at low points of the duct;
• At major changes in the cross-section of the duct, such as couplers and anchorages; and
• An outlet at a distance less than 900 millimeter downstream from high point outlets.
Show inlet and outlet locations on drawings.

Section 553 – Prestressed Concrete 421

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Provide positive mechanical shut-off valves for inlets and outlets. Provide inlets and outlets with
valves, caps, or other devices capable of withstanding the grouting pressure.

Securely fasten ducts in place to prevent movement. Maintain distances from the forms by stays,
blocks, ties, hangers, or other approved supports. Use precast mortar blocks of approved shape and
dimensions. Separate layers of ducts by mortar blocks.

Space duct supports according to the PTI Guide Specification for Grouting of Post-Tensioned
Structures. Cover the ends of ducts to prevent the entry of water or debris.

Connect inlets and outlets to the duct with metallic or plastic structural fasteners. Do not use
components that react with the concrete, cause corrosion of the prestressing steel, or contain water
soluble chlorides.

(b) Placing concrete. Where the end of a post-tensioned assembly will not be covered by concrete,
recess the anchoring devices so that the ends of the prestressing steel and all parts of the anchoring
devices are at least 50 millimeters inside the end surface of the members.

Before placing concrete, demonstrate that ducts are unobstructed. Immediately after concrete
placement, blow out the metal conduit with compressed, oil-free air to break-up and remove mortar
in the conduit before it hardens. Approximately 24 hours after the concrete placement, flush the
metal conduits with water containing lime (calcium oxide) or slaked lime (calcium hydroxide) in
the amount of 12 grams per liter. Blow the water out with compressed, oil-free air.

For post-tensioned members that are to be steam cured, do not install prestressing steel until curing
is complete.

(c) Anchorages and distribution. Give at least 10 days advanced notice before installing end
fittings or heading wires.

When wires are used, provide an edge distance for any hole for prestressing wire through a
stressing washer, unthreaded bearing ring, or plate of at least 6 millimeters from the root of any
threads or the edge of any ring, plate, or washer.

Anchor post-tensioned prestressing steel at the ends by means of permanent type anchoring devices
capable of developing not less than 95 percent of the ultimate tensile strength of the prestressing
steel. If the anchoring device is sufficiently large and is used in conjunction with a steel grillage
embedded in the concrete that effectively distributes the anchor load to the concrete, the steel
distribution plates or assemblies may be omitted.

Enclose loop tendon anchorages in ducts for their entire length.

(d) Prestressing steel. Use a corrosion inhibitor to protect prestressing steel installed in ducts
before placing and curing of the concrete. Use a corrosion inhibitor that does not adversely affect
the steel, concrete, or bond strength of the steel to concrete.

If prestressing steel is installed in the ducts within 10 days after concrete curing, stressing, and
grouting are completed, no corrosion inhibitor is required.

(e) Post-tensioning. Wait at least 10 days after the last concrete has been placed in the member or
until tests on concrete cylinders indicate that the concrete has attained the minimum compressive

Section 553 – Prestressed Concrete 422

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

strength. Demonstrate that the prestressing steel is free and unbonded in the duct. Straighten wires
if necessary to produce equal stress in all wires, wire groups, or parallel lay tendons that are
stressed simultaneously. Remove side forms for girders before post-tensioning.

Record gauge pressures and prestressing steel elongation at all times while tensioning prestressing
steel and submit records.

Determine the friction loss in the prestressing process (i.e., the difference between tension at the
jack and minimum tension in the prestressing steel) according to the AASHTO Load and
Resistance Factor Design Bridge Design Specifications.

Use suitable shims or other approved devices to attain the specified anchor set loss.

(f) Grouting. Provide Class A, B, C, or D grout as specified and prestressing steel that is free of
dirt, loose rust, grease, or other deleterious substances. Bond post-tensioned prestressing steel to the
concrete by filling the void space between the duct and tendon with grout according to the PTI
Guide Specification for Grouting of Post-Tensioned Structures.

Perform grouting operations using staff with grouting experience on projects of a similar type and
magnitude. Perform grouting operations under the immediate supervision of an individual skilled in
various aspects of grouting and who is certified by the American Segmental Bridge Institute
(ASBI) Grouting Certification program. Furnish the name of the grouting operations supervisor and
proof of their ASBI certification and grouting experience before beginning grouting operations.

Make available on-site before beginning grouting operations, the required testing equipment for
checking grout workability (flow-cone), temperatures, and other specified tests.

Use grouting equipment capable of continuous operation with little variation of pressure, which
also includes a system for recirculating the grout while actual grouting is not in progress. Use
grouting equipment capable of maintaining a pressure on completely grouted ducts and fitted with
a valve that can be locked off without loss of pressure in the duct.

Provide written certification that ingredients used in the grout meet the ASTM requirements
contained in the PTI Guide Specification for Grouting of Post-Tensioned Structures. This includes,
but is not limited to, the following:

(1) Cement mill test reports;

(2) Mineral additives test reports;
(3) Chemical admixtures reports; and
(4) Test reports for any other ingredients used in the grout.
For prepackaged grouts, provide the manufacturer’s current certified mill test reports for the
product.

Do not use compressed air to aid in the pumping of grout.

Provide grout pumps of a positive displacement type, capable of providing a continuous flow of
grout, and capable of maintaining an outlet pressure of at least 1 megapascal and with a pressure
gauge having a full-scale reading of not more than 20 megapascals.

Section 553 – Prestressed Concrete 423

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Grout only when the efflux time of a grout sample immediately after mixing is between 11 and
30 seconds according to ASTM C939.When hot weather conditions may cause quick setting of the
grout, cool the grout by approved methods, as necessary, to prevent blockages during pumping
operations. When freezing weather conditions are possible during and following placement of
grout, protect the grout from damage by freezing according to the PTI Guide Specification for
Grouting of Post-Tensioned Structures.

Provide a supply of potable water and standby flushing equipment capable of developing a
pumping pressure of 1.7 megapascals and of sufficient capacity to flush out any partially-grouted
ducts.

Clean ducts of material that would impair bonding of the grout or interfere with grouting
procedures. Blow out each duct with compressed, oil-free air. Check inlets and outlets for their
capacity to accept injection of grout by blowing compressed, oil-free air through the system and
proving each inlet and outlet in turn.

Pass grout through a screen with 3 millimeters maximum clear openings before entering the grout
pump. Open grout vents before the start of grouting. Completely fill the duct by injecting grout
from the lowest end of the tendon in an uphill direction. Pump grout continuously through the duct
and waste at the outlet until no visible slugs of water or air are ejected, and the efflux time of
ejected grout is between 11 and 30 seconds. Maintain a continuous, one-way flow of grout within a
grouting stage.

Close outlets in a similar manner one after the other in the direction of the flow. For outlets placed
a short distance downstream from a high point, close that outlet before its associated high point
outlet. Increase the grouting pressure at the injection end to at least 0.7 megapascals and hold for at
least 10 seconds. Do not remove or open valves and caps until the grout has set.

Abrasive blast clean the concrete surface of recessed anchorage assemblies. Fill anchor recesses
with concrete conforming to the requirements for the structure and finish flush.

Remove ends of vents 25 millimeters below the roadway surface after grouting has been
completed. Permanently seal recess areas.

Do not release the falsework under the bottom slab supporting the superstructure until at least 48
hours after grouting of the post-tension prestressing steel or until the grout strength is obtained.

Section 553 – Prestressed Concrete 424

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 553.1
Prestressed Concrete Member Tolerances
Description Tolerance
(1)
Precast Girders With Cast-In-Place Deck
Length ±6 mm/10 m, ±25 mm max.
Width (overall) +10 mm, -6 mm
Depth (overall) +13 mm, -6 mm
Depth (flanges) -6 mm
Width (web) +10 mm, -5 mm
(2)
Sweep 3 mm/3 m
Variation from end squareness or skew ±5 mm/10 m, ±25 mm max.
Camber variation from design camber ±3 mm/3 m
±13 mm, max. ≤25 m length
±25 mm, max. >25 m length
Position of strands:
Individual ±6 mm
Bundled ±13 mm
Position from design location of deflection points for ±500 mm
deflected strands
Position of plates other than bearing plates ±25 mm
Position of bearing plates ±15 mm
Tipping and flushness of plates ±6 mm
Tipping and flushness of bearing plates ±5 mm
Position of inserts for structural connections ±13 mm
Position of handling devices:
Parallel to length ±150 mm
Transverse to length ±25 mm
Position of stirrups:
Longitudinal spacing ±50 mm
Projection above top ±19 mm
(3)
Local smoothness ±6 mm in 3 m any surface

Section 553 – Prestressed Concrete 425

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 553.1 (Continued)

Prestressed Concrete Member Tolerances
Description Tolerance
(4)
Precast Girders Used In Multi-Beam Decks
Length ±19 mm
Width (overall) ±6 mm
Depth (overall) ±6 mm
Depth (top flange) ±13 mm
Depth (bottom flange) +15 mm, 5 mm
Width (web) ±10 mm
Sweep (5)
12 m member length ±6 mm
12 to 18 m member length ±10 mm
Greater than 18 m member length ±13 mm
Variation from end squareness or skew ±10 mm/m
Horizontal ±13 mm max.
Vertical ±13 mm
Camber variation from design camber ±3 mm/3 m, ±13 mm max.
Differential camber between adjacent members
±6 mm/3 m, ±20 mm max.
of the same design
Position of Strands:
Individual ±6 mm
Bundled ±6 mm
Position from design location of deflection points ±500 mm
for deflected strands
Position of plates other than bearing plates ±25 mm
Tipping and flushness of plates ±6 mm
Position of inserts for structural connections ±15 mm
Position of handling devices:
Parallel to length ±150 mm
Transverse to length ±25 mm

Section 553 – Prestressed Concrete 426

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 553.1 (Continued)

Prestressed Concrete Member Tolerances
Description Tolerance
Precast Girders Used In Multi-Beam Decks
Position of stirrups:
Longitudinal spacing 25 mm
Projection above top +6 mm, -20 mm
Tipping of beam seat bearing area ±5 mm
Position of dowel tubes ±15 mm
Position of tie rod tubes:
Parallel to length ±13 mm
Vertical ±10 mm
Position of slab void:
End of void to center of tie hole ±13 mm
Adjacent to end block ±25 mm
Local smoothness (6) ±6 mm in 3 m any surface
Post-Tension Members
Position of post tensioning ducts ±5 mm
Position of tendon anchorage bearing plates ±5 mm
(1) AASHTO I Beams and Bulb-T Girders.
(2) Variation from straight line parallel to centerline of member.
(3) Does not apply to top surface left rough to receive a topping or to visually concealed surfaces.
(4) Box beams, slabs, decked bulb tee, and multi-stem girders.
(5) Variation from straight line parallel to centerline of member.
(6) Does not apply to top surface left rough to receive a topping or to visually-concealed surfaces.

553.11 Painting Steel. Use a wire brush or abrasive blast to remove dirt and residue not firmly bonded
to the metal or concrete surfaces. Clean and paint the exposed ends of the prestress steel, post-tension
anchor head assemblies, and a 25-millimeter strip of adjoining concrete.

Mix zinc-rich paint conforming to FSS TT-P-641. Work the paint into voids in the prestressing
tendons. Apply one thick coat to surfaces that will be covered with concrete. Apply 2 coats to surfaces
not covered with concrete.

553.12 Acceptance. See Tables 552-9 and 553-2 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Prestressing steel, reinforcing steel, anchor devices, elastomeric bearings, and material for concrete and
grout will be evaluated under Subsection 106.03. Furnish production certifications for hydraulic
cement, prestressing steel, and reinforcing steel.

Grouting will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04. Sampling and testing requirements
will be according to the PTI Guide Specification for Grouting of Post-Tensioned Structures.

Concrete for precast, prestressed concrete members will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02,
106.03, and 106.04.

Concrete for post-tensioned, cast-in-place concrete members will be evaluated under Section 552.

Section 553 – Prestressed Concrete 427

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Construction of precast, prestressed concrete members and post-tensioned, cast-in-place concrete

members will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Reinforcing steel will be evaluated under Section 554.

Falsework and forms will be evaluated under Section 562.

Measurement

553.13 Measure the Section 553 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Do not measure reinforcing steel and concrete for precast, prestressed concrete structural members.

Measure the concrete for post-tensioned, cast-in-place concrete structures under Section 552.

Measure the reinforcing steel for post-tensioned, cast-in-place concrete structures under Section 554.

Measure prestressed piling under Section 551.

Payment

553.14 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 553 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 553 – Prestressed Concrete 428

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 553.2
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reportin Remark
or Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample g s
Product (Subsection) Time
(Subsecti
on)
Prestresse Measured and Compressive − AASHTO 1 per Discharge Yes Upon −
d tested for strength T 23 & T 22 25 m³ (2) stream at completin
concrete conformance point of g
(106.04) placing(1) tests
Grout " − − PTI Guide Each Each No " −
Specification mixture source
for
Grouting of
Post-
Tensioned
Structures
(1) Sample according to AASHTO R 60 except composite samples are not required.
(2) In addition to the test cylinders required to determine 28-day strength, cast 2 release cylinders for each concrete member. Cure
the release-strength cylinders with the concrete member that they represent.

Section 553 – Prestressed Concrete 429

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 554. — REINFORCING STEEL

Description

554.01 This work consists of furnishing and placing reinforcing steel.

Material

554.02 Conform to the following Subsection:

Reinforcing steel 709.01

Construction Requirements

554.03 Order Lists. On reinforcing steel order lists, use the same respective bar marks for labeling as
shown on the plans. Submit order lists and bending diagrams for approval. Approval does not relieve
the Contractor of responsibility for the accuracy of the lists and diagrams. Do not order material until
the lists and diagrams are accepted.

Do not fabricate vertical reinforcement in columns, walls, piers, and shafts until footing elevations are
established in the field.

554.04 Identification. Ship bar reinforcement in standard bundles, tagged and marked according to
CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.

554.05 Bending. Fabricate reinforcing bars according to ACI SP 66. Cold bend reinforcing bars that
require bending. Limit the overall height or drop bending tolerance of deck truss bars to plus
0 millimeter or minus 6 millimeters. Do not bend bars partially embedded in concrete except as shown
on the plans or otherwise permitted.

Provide standard hooks conforming to ACI SP 66.

554.06 Protection of Material. Store reinforcing steel above the ground on platforms, skids, or other
supports. Protect from physical damage, rust, and other surface deterioration.

Use reinforcing steel only when the surface is clean and the minimum dimensions, cross-sectional area,
and tensile properties conform to the physical requirements for the size and grade of steel specified.

Do not use reinforcing steel that is cracked, laminated, or is covered with dirt, rust, loose scale, paint,
grease, oil, or other deleterious material.

554.07 Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel. Support coated bars on padded contact areas. Pad bundled
bands. Lift with a strong back, multiple supports, or a platform bridge. Prevent bar-to-bar abrasion. Do
not drop or drag bundles.

Before placement, inspect bars for coating damage. Replace and do not use bars with a total damaged
area in any 12-inch (300-millimeter) length that exceeds 5 percent of the surface area of that length of
the bar.

Section 554 – Reinforcing Steel 430

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Clean other damaged coatings by removing surface contaminants and the damaged coating. Roughen
the area around the damage and remove rust by blast cleaning or power tool cleaning. Use a
prequalified AASHTO M 284 patching/repair material to patch defects in the coating that are
discernible to the unaided eye. Overlap the patching material onto the original coating for 50
millimeters or as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide a minimum 200-micrometer dry film
thickness on the patched areas.

Take necessary steps to minimize damage to the coating of installed bars. Clean and patch damage to
coatings noted after installation as described above. Promptly treat the bar according to the resin
manufacturer’s recommendations and before detrimental oxidation occurs.

Coat mechanical splices after splice installation according to AASHTO M 284 for patching damaged
epoxy coatings.

554.08 Placing and Fastening. Place, fasten, and support the bars according to the CRSI Manual of
Standard Practice. Coat chairs, tie wires, and other devices used to support, position, or fasten epoxy-
coated reinforcement with a dielectric material.

Use precast concrete blocks or metal supports. Attach concrete block supports to the supported bar
with wire cast in the center of each block. Use Class 1 (plastic protected) or Class 2, Type B (stainless
steel protected) metal supports in contact with exposed concrete surfaces. Use stainless steel
conforming to ASTM A493, type 430.

Space slab bar supports no more than 1200 millimeters apart transversely or longitudinally. Do not use
bar supports either directly or indirectly to support runways for concrete buggies or other similar
construction loads. Replace damaged supports.

Place bars within 38 millimeters of the plan location. Do not cumulate spacing variations. Do not allow
the average of any two adjacent spaces to exceed the required spacing. Place reinforcing steel in deck
slabs within 6 millimeters of the vertical plan location. Using a template, check the clear cover over
deck reinforcing steel before placing deck concrete.

Provide 50 millimeters clear cover for reinforcement. The tolerance on minimum concrete cover is
minus 10 millimeter). For concrete surfaces cast against the ground provide a minimum 75 millimeters
of clear cover over reinforcement.

Tie reinforcing at all intersections around the perimeter of each mat and at not more than
600-millimeter centers or at every intersection, whichever is greater. Tie bridge deck reinforcing bars at
not more than 300 millimeter or every intersection, whichever is greater.

Tie bundle bars together at intervals not exceeding 1.8 meters. Do not bundle bars unless the location
and splice details are specified.

Do not place concrete in any member until the reinforcing steel placement is approved.

554.09 Splices. Splicing, except as shown on the plans, is not permitted without approval. Provide lap
lengths shown on the plans. Splice reinforcing bars only where shown on the plans or accepted
drawings.

Make lapped splices by placing the reinforcing bars in contact and wiring them together so as to
maintain the alignment and position of the bars.

Section 554 – Reinforcing Steel 431

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

If welding of reinforcing steel is permitted, use welders with current certifications and make the welds
conform to AWS Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel, D 1.4. Do not weld reinforcing steel if
the chemical composition of the steel exceeds the percentages in Table 554.1.

Table 554.1
Reinforcing Steel Components
Chemical Composition Percent

Carbon (C) 0.30

Manganese (MA) 1.50

Carbon Equivalent (C.E.) 0.55

Mechanical couplers may be used instead of welding if approved. Use couplers with a strength that is
at least 125 percent of the required yield strength of the reinforcing steel. Do not exceed
0.25 millimeters total slip of the reinforcing bar within the splice sleeve when loading in tension to
30.0 kips per square inch (207 megapascals) and relaxing to 20 megapascals for bar sizes up to No. 43
as measured between gage points clear of the splice sleeve.

If welded wire fabric is shipped in rolls, straighten into flat sheets before placing. Splice sheets of mesh
or bar mat reinforcement by overlapping not less than 1-mesh width plus 50 millimeters. Securely
fasten at the ends and edges.

554.10 Acceptance. Reinforcing steel and epoxy coating material will be evaluated under Subsections
106.02 and 106.03. Furnish a production certification with each shipment of reinforcing steel.

Placement of reinforcing steel will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

554.11 Measure the Section 554 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Measure reinforcing steel excluding laps added for the Contractor's convenience.

Payment

554.12 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 554 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 554 – Reinforcing Steel 432

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 555. — STEEL STRUCTURES

Description

555.01 This work consists of constructing steel structures and the steel structure portions of composite
structures. It includes furnishing, fabricating, and erecting structural steel and incidental metal
construction.

Material

555.02 Conform to the following Sections and Subsections:

Bearing devices 564

Bolts and nuts 717.01(d)
Castings 717.04
Galvanized coatings 717.07
High-strength bolts, nuts, and washers 717.01(e)
Painting 563
Pins and rollers 717.03
Preformed polychloroprene elastomeric joint seal for bridges 712.01(g)
Sheet lead 717.08
Steel forgings 717.02
Steel grid floors 717.09
Steel pipe 717.06
Structural steel 717.01
Temporary works 562
Welded stud shear connectors 717.05

Construction Requirements

555.03 Drawings and Diagrams. Submit drawings according to Subsection 104.03.

(a) Fabrication drawings. Show complete detailed dimensions and sizes of component parts of
the structure and details of miscellaneous parts.

Show the direction of plate rolling where specific orientation of plates is required. Show plate
girder flanges and webs cut from plates so the long dimension of the girder parallels the rolling
direction.

Identify the type and grade of each piece that is to be made of steel other than AASHTO M 270,
grade 250 steel.

Show assembly marks that are cross-referenced to the original pieces of mill steel and their
certified mill test reports.

Shop-welded splice locations shown on the drawings are subject to approval. Locate shop-welded
splices to avoid points of maximum tensile or fatigue stress. Locate splices in webs at least 300
millimeters from shop splices, flange butt joints, or stiffeners. Additional nondestructive tests may
be required on shop-welded splices.

Section 555 – Steel Structures 433

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Erection drawings. Fully illustrate the proposed method of erection. Show details of falsework
bents, bracing, guys, dead-men, lifting devices, and bridge member attachments. Show the erection
sequence, crane and barge locations, crane capacities, lifting point locations, and bridge member
masses. Show complete details for anticipated phases and erection conditions. If required by the
Engineer during drawing review, provide calculations showing that allowable stresses are not
exceeded and that member capacities and final geometry are correct. See Section 562 for additional
requirements.

(c) Camber diagram. Show the camber at each truss or arch rib panel point, at field splice
locations, and at the specified span length fractions of continuous beams and girders or rigid
frames. Show calculated cambers to be used in preassembly of the structure as required in
Subsection 555.14.

(d) Transportation drawings. Show support points, tie-downs, temporary stiffening trusses or
beams, and other details needed to support and brace the member. Provide calculation sheets
showing self-weight plus dynamic load allowance stresses induced by the loading and
transportation procedure. Use dynamic load allowance stresses of at least 100 percent of the dead
load stress. Do not allow fatigue stresses to exceed the constant-amplitude fatigue threshold for the
appropriate categories. Verify computed girder stresses satisfy the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications.

Ship and store members in the same orientation as the completed structure unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.

555.04 Fabrication Notice. Give written notice at least 21 days before beginning fabrication work.
Do not manufacture material before notification and drawings are approved.

555.05 Inspection. Structural steel may be inspected at the fabrication site according to Subsection
106.06.

Ultrasonically inspect girder flanges before fabrication according to ASTM A578 and the following:

(a) Inspect after flanges are stripped from the master plate;

(b) Use supplementary requirement S2.1 for acceptance standards; and

(c) Inspect flanges in the plant or warehouse where the flanges are stripped.

Furnish copies of mill orders at the time orders are placed with the manufacturer. Furnish certified mill
test reports and production certifications before the start of fabrication using material covered by these
reports. Furnish a production certification from the manufacturer according to Subsection 106.03.

Include on certified mill test reports the chemical analyses and physical test results for each heat of
steel used in the work and for steels with specified impact values, include the results of Charpy
V-notch impact tests. Confirm on the test report that the material was so produced when fine-grain
practice is specified.

Furnish production certifications instead of mill test reports for material that is not normally supplied
with mill test reports and for items such as fills, minor gusset plates, and similar material when
quantities are small and the material is taken from stock.

Section 555 – Steel Structures 434

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

555.06 Material Storage. Store structural material above the ground on platforms, skids, or other
supports. Keep material without dirt, grease, and other foreign matter. Protection from corrosion and
stray electrical currents.

555.07 Fabrication. Fabricate structural steel in a fabricating plant that is certified under the AISC
Quality Certification Program. Furnish and fabricate fracture critical elements according to AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Design Specifications and Clause 12 of the AASHTO/AWS Bridge Welding Code D1.5
(D1.5M).

Remove mill scale and foreign material from exterior surfaces of exterior girders of unpainted
weathering steel by blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. Then dry the
surface and apply at least three uniform applications of water mist at 24 hour intervals to ensure
uniform weathering.

Do not heat curved steel girders.

Do not drill, cut, or weld portions of structural members unless shown in the plans or approved in
writing.

(a) Steel identification. Use a system of assembly-marking of individual pieces and cutting
instructions (generally by cross referencing of the assembly-marks shown on the drawings with the
corresponding item covered on the mill purchase order). Provide information to the shop that
maintains the identity of the original piece.

Identify material furnished from stock by heat number and mill test report.

During fabrication and before assembling members, show the specification of each piece of steel
(other thanGrade 250 steel). Mark steel using steel die stamping or firmly attaching a substantial
tag to any piece of steel which will be subject to fabricating operations which might obliterate paint
marking prior to assembling into members. These fabrication operations include blast cleaning,
galvanizing, heating for forming, or painting.

Use low-stress type steel die stamps. Avoid impressions near edges of tensile-stressed plate
members. Do not use die stamps on fracture-critical members.

Furnish an affidavit certifying the identification of steel has been maintained throughout the
fabrication operation.

(b) Plates.

(1) Rolling direction. Cut and fabricate steel plates for main members and splice plates for
flanges and main tension members, so that the primary direction of rolling is parallel to the
direction of the principal tensile and compressive stresses.
(2) Plate cut edges.
(a) Edge planing. Remove sheared edges on plates thicker than 15 millimeters to a depth
of 6 millimeters beyond the original sheared edge or beyond any re-entrant cut produced
by shearing. Fillet re-entrant cuts before cutting.
(1) Oxygen cutting. Perform oxygen cutting according to AASHTO/AWS Bridge
Welding Code D1.5 (D1.5M).

Section 555 – Steel Structures 435

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(2) Visual inspection and repair of plate cut edges. Visually inspect and repair plate
cut edges. Conform to AASHTO/AWS Bridge Welding Code D1.5 (D1.5M).
(b) Flange plates. Furnish flange plates with either oxygen-cut edges that have ground
corners chamfered at least 1.6 millimeters or furnish universal mill plates.
(c) Web plates. Use oxygen cutting to provide the prescribed camber in web plates of
built-up beams and girders, box girders, and box arches. Cut sufficient extra camber into
the webs to provide for camber losses due to welding and cutting.
(d) Truss members. Prepare longitudinal edges of plates in welded sections of truss web
and chord members by oxygen cutting. Use grinding to chamfer the edges of the corners
of plates at least 1.6 millimeters when plates are not joined by welding.
(e) Stiffeners and connection plates. Sheared edges may be used on plate thicknesses up
to 19 millimeters for stiffeners and connection plates welded transverse to girder webs
and flanges. Universal mill plate may be used for plate thicknesses up to 25 millimeters.
Furnish other stiffeners and connection plates with oxygen-cut edges.
(f) Lateral gusset plates. Bolted lateral gusset plates may be furnished with sheared edges
provided the thickness is less than or equal to 19 millimeters. Oxygen cut, parallel to lines
of stress, gusset plates and other connections welded parallel to lines of stress in tension
members where the plate thickness exceeds 10 millimeters.
(g) Splice plates and gusset plates. Furnish with oxygen-cut edges.
(h) Bent plates. Furnish un-welded, load-carrying, rolled steel plates.
Bend plates at right angles to the direction of rolling, except cold-bent ribs for
orthotropic-deck bridges may be bent in the direction of rolling.
Before bending, round the plate corners to a radius of 1.6 millimeters throughout the
portion of the plate where the bending occurs.
(1) Cold bending. Do not cold-bend fracture-critical steels and fracture-critical
members.
For other steels and members, cold bend according to Table 555.1 so that no plate
cracking occurs. Allow for springback of Grades 690 and 690W steels equal to about
three times that for Grade 250 steel. Use a lower die span of at least 16 times the plate
thickness for break press forming.
(2) Hot bending. If a radius shorter than the minimum specified for cold bending is
required; hot bend the plates at a temperature less than 650 °C, except for Grades
485W, 690 and 690W. When steel plates are heated to temperatures greater than
595 °C for Grade 690 and 690W or greater than 565 °C for Grade 485W; re-quench
and temper according to the producing mill's standard practice and test to verify
restoration of specified properties. Do not heat Grade HPS 485W to a temperature
greater than 595 °C. Re-quenching and tempering is not required for Grade
HPS 485W steel heated to this limit.

Section 555 – Steel Structures 436

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 555.1
Minimum Cold-Bending Radii(1)
Grade, Thickness, (t)
kips per square inch (t≤20 mm) 20 mm < t ≤ 25 mm 25 mm < t ≤ 50 mm t > 50 mm
(megapascals)
250 1.5t 1.5t 1.5t 2.0t
345, 345S,
1.5t 1.5t 2.0t 2.5t
345W, or HPS 345W
HPS 485W 1.5t 1.5t 2.5t 3.0t
690 1.75t 2.25t 4.5t 5.5t
690W 1.75t 2.25t 4.5t 5.5t
(1) Values shown are for the concave face of the metal bent perpendicular to the direction of final rolling. If
the bend is parallel to the direction of final rolling, multiply the minimum radii shown by 1.5 (i.e. 1.5t
perpendicular to rolling equates to 2.25t parallel to rolling).

(c) Stiffener fit. Fabricate (mill, grind, or weld) girder end bearing stiffeners and concentrated load
bearing stiffeners to provide full bearing on the flanges to which the load is transmitted or received.
Fabricate intermediate stiffeners to provide a tight fit against the compression flange.

(d) Abutting joints. Mill or saw cut abutting joints in truss and column compression members to
obtain a square joint and uniform bearing. Other joints not required to be faced may have openings
up to ⅜ inch (10 millimeters).

(e) Bearing surface facing. Finish bearing surfaces according to ANSI B46.1, Surface Roughness,
Waviness and Lay, Part I, according to Table 555.2.

Table 555.2
ANSI Surface Roughness Values
Surface
Bearing Surface Roughness Value
µm
Steel slabs 50
Heavy plates in contact in shoes to be welded (25
Milled ends of compression members, milled or
13
ground ends of stiffeners and fillers
Bridge rollers and rockers 6
Pins and pin holes 3
Sliding bearings 3

Machine sliding bearings with a surface roughness greater than 2 micrometers according to ANSI
60 so the lay of the cut is parallel to the direction of movement.

Fabricate bearing parts to provide uniform even contact with the adjacent bearing surface. Limit the
maximum gap between bearing surfaces to 1 millimeter. Machine the base plate sliding surfaces if
the plane and true base and sole plates exceed the surface roughness value of Table 555.2.

Section 555 – Steel Structures 437

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Do not machine surfaces of fabricated assemblies until heat treatment and fabrication on the
assembly is complete.

(f) Straightening material. Straighten plates, angles, other shapes, and built-up members using
methods that do not fracture or damage the metal when approved by the Engineer.

Use mechanical means or a limited amount of localized heat when approved by the Engineer. Do
not exceed the temperatures shown in Table 555.3 and control the heat application with
temperature-indicating crayons, liquids, or bimetal thermometers. Remove external forces from the
material to be straightened except for the mechanical stress designed to be used in conjunction with
the heat.

Table 555.3
Maximum Straightening Temperatures
Material to be Straightened Maximum Temperature
Grade HPS 690W 595 °C
Grade 690W 590 °C
Other Steels 650 °C

555.08 Annealing and Stress Relieving. Normalize and anneal (full annealing) according to ASTM
A941. Maintain uniform temperatures throughout the furnace during the heating and cooling so the
temperature at no two points on the member differs by more than 55 °C.

Record each furnace charge, identify the pieces in the charge, and show the temperatures and schedule
used. Provide proper instruments including recording pyrometers for determining member
temperatures at any time. Provide records of the treatment operation for approval.

Do not anneal or normalize HPS 690W or HPS 485W steel members without approval. See Table
555.3 for the maximum stress relieving holding temperature for these grades.

Stress relieve members (such as bridge shoes, pedestals, or other parts that are built-up by welding
sections of plate together) according to Subsection 4.4 of AASHTO/AWS Bridge Welding Code D1.5
(D1.5M).

555.09 Bolt Holes. Punch or drill bolt holes. If required below, either subpunch or subdrill holes
5 millimeters smaller than the nominal bolt diameter and after assembling ream or drill full size.

(a) Punched holes. Unless subpunching and reaming is required by Subsection 555.09(h); punch
material forming parts of a member with no more than 5 metal thicknesses if the material thickness
is no greater than:

(1) 19 millimeters for structural steel;

(2) 15 millimeters for high-strength steel; or
(3) 13 millimeters for quenched and tempered alloy steel.
Punch holes 1.6 millimeters larger than the nominal bolt diameter. Ream holes that require
enlarging to admit bolts. Produce clean cut holes without torn or ragged edges.

Section 555 – Steel Structures 438

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Reamed or drilled holes. Subdrill and ream or drill holes full-size where there are more than
five thicknesses or where any of the main material is thicker than Subsection 555.09(a)(1) thru (3).

Assemble and securely hold together connecting parts that are being reamed or drilled and match-
mark before disassembling. Where practical, use twist drills, twist reamers, or roto-broach cutters
directed by mechanical means. Ream or drill cylindrical holes 1.6 millimeters larger than the
nominal bolt diameter that are perpendicular to the member. Remove burrs on the outside surfaces.

(c) Accuracy of holes. Drilled or reamed holes may be up to 0.8 millimeter larger than the true
decimal equivalent of the nominal diameter of the drill or reamer. Punched holes may be slightly
conical. Slotted holes produced by flame-cutting or a combination of drilling, or punching and
flame cutting may be up to 0.8 millimeter larger than the nominal width. Grind flame cut surfaces
smooth to a maximum surface roughness of ANSI 25 micrometers.

(d) Accuracy of hole group before reaming. Punch, subpunch, or subdrill holes to allow a
cylindrical pin 5 millimeters smaller in diameter than the nominal size of the punched hole can be
inserted in holes after assembling (before reaming). In addition, produce at least 75 percent of the
contiguous holes in the same plane such that a cylindrical pin 3 millimeters smaller in diameter
than the nominal size of the punched hole can be inserted perpendicular to the face of the member
without drifting.

(e) Accuracy of hole group after reaming. Use dimensioned steel templates with hardened steel
bushings in the holes. Use connection centerlines when locating templates from the milled or
scribed ends of members. Produce at least 85 percent of the holes in any contiguous group of holes
with a maximum offset of 0.8 millimeter between adjacent thicknesses of metal after reaming or
drilling.

(f) Numerically-controlled drilled field connections. Drill or punch full-sized bolt holes in
unassembled pieces and connections using numerically-controlled drilling or punching equipment.

(g) Holes for ribbed bolts, turned bolts, or other approved bearing-type bolts. Provide finished
holes with a driving fit.

(h) Preparation of field connections. Drill full size holes through all thicknesses of material
assembled in proper position for field connections and field splices. Do not punch full-size holes in
longitudinal main load-carrying members, transverse floor beams, or any components designated as
fracture critical members. Other options include the following:

(1) Main members of trusses, arches, continuous beam spans, bents, towers (each face),
plate girders, and rigid frame connections and splice holes. Subpunch or subdrill and ream
while assembled, or drill full size to a steel template.
(2) Rolled beam stringers continuous over floor beams or cross frames. Drill full-size holes
for field splices unassembled to a steel template.
(3) Floor beam and stringer field end connection holes. Subpunch and ream while
assembled, or drill full size to a steel template.
(4) Cross frames, lateral bracing components, and the corresponding holes in connection
plates between girders and cross frames or lateral components. Punch full-size holes.

Section 555 – Steel Structures 439

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Locate, position, and firmly bolt the template in place when reaming or drilling full size
field-connection holes through a steel template. Use duplicates of templates used for reaming
matching members or the opposite faces of a single member. Locate templates used for connections
on like parts or members so that the parts or members are duplicates and require no match-marking.

555.10 Pins and Rollers.

(a) Fabricating pins and rollers. Fabricate straight and smooth pins and rollers without flaws.

Forge and anneal pins and rollers or use cold-finished carbon steel shafting for diameters less than
230 millimeters. Slowly cool forged pins to a temperature below the critical range to prevent
damage from rapid cooling. Bore a hole in the pin not less than 50 millimeters in diameter full-
length along the pin axis before annealing.

(b) Boring pin holes. Do not exceed the pin diameter by more than 0.50 millimeters for pins 130
millimeters or less in diameter or exceed by more than 0.8 millimeter for larger pins when boring
pin holes. Bore pin holes smooth, straight, at right angles with the axis of the member, and parallel
with each other. Produce the final surface using a finishing cut.

Produce a maximum variation in the distance outside-to-outside of end holes in tension members
and inside-to-inside of end holes in compression members of 0.8 millimeter from that specified.
Bore pin holes in built-up members after the member is assembled.

(c) Threads for bolts and pins. Confirm to M Profile ANSI B1.13M with a tolerance Class 6G for
external threads and 6H for internal threads). Provide six threads per 25 millimeters for pin ends
with a diameter of 35 millimeters or greater.

555.11 Eyebars. Provide eyebars that are straight and without twists. Limit the inclination of any bar
to the plane of the truss to a 0.5 percent slope.

Locate pin holes on the centerline of the eyebar. Securely clamp eyebars that are to be placed side-by-
side in the structure in the order they are to be placed on the pin. Bore the pin holes to the finished
diameter from both ends or flame cut the pin holes at least 50 millimeters smaller than the finished pin
diameter.

Simultaneously cut the edges of eyebars that lie between the transverse centerline of their pin holes
with two mechanically-operated torches abreast of each other guided by a substantial template to
prevent distortion of the plates.

Use low-stress type steel die stamps to match-mark eyebars for shipment and erection. Locate stamps
on the visible edge each member when the bars are nested in place on the structure.

555.12 Assembly - Bolting. Clean metal contact surfaces. Assemble, securely pin, and draw together
member parts. Drill, ream, and bolt the assembly. If necessary, take assembly apart to remove burrs
and shavings produced by the operation.

Assemble the members without twists, bends, and other deformation. Drift only enough to bring the
parts into position without enlarging holes or distorting metal.

Section 555 – Steel Structures 440

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

555.13 Welded Connections. Conform to AASHTO/AWS Bridge Welding Code D1.5 (D1.5M).
Install shear connector studs according to Chapter 7. Perform preproduction testing according to
Subsection 7.7.1 and inspect installed studs according to Subsection 7.8.

555.14 Preassembly of Field Connections. Submit method and details of preassembly for approval.

Preassemble field connections of truss, arch, continuous beam, plate girder, bent, tower, and rigid
frame main members. Use preassembly methods and details consistent with approved erection
procedures and camber diagrams.

Assemble girders and beams in their cambered (no load) condition. When members are assembled with
webs vertical, support the members at intervals of 6 meters, or two-tenths of the span length, whichever
is less. When the webs are horizontal, support intervals may be increased provided there is no
noticeable deflection between points of support.

Assemble trusses in full dead-load position unless the design of the structure provides for secondary
stresses created by the fully cambered assembly. Start assembly from any location in the structure and
proceed in one or both directions. Support trusses at each panel point. Preassemble at least
three contiguous panels. For successive assemblies, include at least one section or panel of the previous
assembly plus two or more sections or panels added at the advancing end. For structures longer than 45
meters, make each assembly at least 45 meters long.

Verify the geometry of the completed structure or unit. Verify or prepare field splices.

(a) Bolted connections. Where applicable, assemble major components with milled ends of
compression members in full bearing. While assembled, ream subsized holes to the specified size.

(b) Check assembly/numerically-controlled drilling. Make a check assembly for each major
structural type of each project based on proposed order of erection, joints in bearings, special
complex points, or similar considerations. Assemble at least three contiguous shop sections. For
trusses, assemble members in at least three contiguous panels, but not less than the number of
panels associated with three contiguous chord lengths (such as the length between field splices).
Other shop assemblies are not required.

Obtain approval of each assembly before reaming holes or dismantling the assembly. Inaccurate
camber, alignment, hole alignment, milled joint fit, or other problems may require additional check
assemblies.

(c) Field-welded connections. Do not field weld connections unless specifically shown on the
drawings. Verify the fit of members (including the proper space between abutting flanges) with the
segment preassembled.

(d) Match marking. Match mark connecting parts preassembled in the shop to ensure proper fit in
the field. Provide a diagram showing match-marks.

555.15 Connections Using Unfinished, Turned, or Ribbed Bolts. Use bolts conforming to ASTM
A307, grade A with single self-locking nuts or double nuts. Use beveled washers where bearing faces
have a slope more than 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis.

Section 555 – Steel Structures 441

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(a) Turned bolts. Furnish hex headed bolts of the nominal size specified with a body surface ANSI
roughness less than 125 micro-inches (3 micrometers). Ream holes to provide for a light driving fit.
Keep bolt threads entirely outside of the holes. Provide a washer under the hexagonal nut.

(b) Ribbed bolts. Furnish round headed bolts conforming to ANSI B18.5 (ANSI B18.5.2.2M or
B18.5.2.3M) with continuous longitudinal ribs. Provide a body diameter measured on a circle
through the points of the ribs 2 millimeters greater than the nominal diameter specified for the
bolts. Furnish hexagonal nuts that are either recessed or have a washer of suitable thickness.

Ream holes to provide for a driving fit. Ream the hole and provide an oversized replacement bolt if
the ribs compress or deform allowing the bolt to twist before drawing tight.

555.16 Connections Using High-Strength Bolts.

(a) Bolted parts. Use only steel material within the grip of the bolt with no compressible material
such as gaskets or insulation. Fabricate steel parts to fit solidly together after bolts are stressed.
Remove burrs that prevent solid seating. Limit the slope between the bolted surface and the plane
normal to the bolt axis to 1:20.

(b) Surface conditions. Clean dirt, foreign material, and scale (except tight mill scale) from joint
surfaces at the time of assembly. Remove paint (including inadvertent overspray) from areas within
the bolt pattern. In non-coated joints, exclude or remove paint closer than 25 millimeters or one
bolt diameter, whichever is larger, from the edge of holes.

(c) Installation. Use fasteners of the same lot number for each connection. Protect fasteners from
dirt and moisture. Only remove the fasteners from protected storage that are to be installed and
tensioned during a work shift. Return unused fasteners to protected storage at the end of the shift.
Do not remove as-delivered lubricant from fasteners. Discard and replace fasteners for slip-critical
connections that accumulate rust or dirt before installing.

Provide a Skidmore-Wilhelm calibrator or other acceptable bolt tension measuring device. Use the
measuring device to perform the rotational-capacity test and to confirm the following:

• Table 555.4 requirement for the complete fastener assembly;

• Calibration of the wrenches, if applicable; and
• Understanding and proper use of the tightening method.

Section 555 – Steel Structures 442

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 555.4
Minimum Fastener Tension(1)
Nominal Bolt Diameter ASTM A325 ASTM A490
(Nominal Bolt Diameter and Thread Pitch) kilonewtons kilonewtons
M12 × 1.75 49 61
M16 × 2 91 114
M20 × 2.5 142 179
M22 × 2.5 176 221
M24 × 3 205 257
M27 × 3 267 334
M30 × 3.5 326 408
M36 × 4 475 595
(1) Equal to 70 percent of the specified minimum tensile strength of bolts (as specified for tests of
full size ASTM A325 and A490 bolts with UNC threads (metric coarse thread series, ANSI
B1.13M) loaded in axial tension) rounded to the nearest 1 kilonewton.

For short grip bolts, perform the calibrated wrench verification test using a direct tension indicator
with solid plates. Check the direct tension indicator with a longer grip bolt in the tension measuring
device before testing short grip bolts. Conform to Subsection 555.16(c)(3) through (6) as applicable
for confirming testing frequency, number of tests, and test procedure. Provide documentation of
annual testing by an approved testing agency confirming the accuracy of the tension measuring
device. Install fasteners with specified washers in properly aligned holes. Tension using any of the
methods in Subsection 555.16(c)(3) through (6) to the minimum tension specified in Table 555.4.

When it is impractical to turn the nut, tension the fastener by turning the bolt while preventing the
nut from rotating when approved by the Engineer. Provide adequate capacity and sufficient air to
tension each bolt in about 10 seconds if impact wrenches are used.

Do not reuse ASTM A490 fasteners and galvanized ASTM A325 fasteners. If approved, non-
galvanized ASTM A325 bolts may be re-used once. Touching up or re-torqueing previously
tensioned bolts (which may have been loosened by the tensioning of adjacent bolts) will not be
considered reuse provided the tensioning continues from the initial position and does not require
greater rotation than that shown in Table 555.5.

Section 555 – Steel Structures 443

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 555.5(1)
Nut Rotation from the Snug-Tight Condition(2)
Bolt Length Geometry of Outer Faces of Bolted Parts
Measured from
Underside of Head Both One Face Normal to Both Faces Sloped
to End of Bolt Faces Bolt Axis and Not More Than
Normal to Other Face Sloped 1:20 from Normal
Bolt Axis Not More than 1:20 to Bolt Axis
(Bevel Washer Not Used) (Bevel Washers Not Used)
Up to and including 1
⁄3 turn 1
⁄2 turn 2
⁄3 turn
4 diameters
Over 4 diameters but not 1
⁄2 turn 2
⁄3 turn 5
⁄6 turn
exceeding 8 diameters
Over 8 diameters but not 2
⁄3 turn 5
⁄6 turn 1 turn
exceeding 12 diameter(3)
(1) Applicable only to connections where all material within the grip of the bolt is steel.
(2) Nut rotation is relative to bolt, regardless of the element (nut or bolt) being turned.
The tolerance is minus 0, +30° for bolts installed by ½ turn or less.
The tolerance is minus 0, +45° for bolts installed by 2⁄3 turn or more.
(3) Determine the required rotation by actual tests in a suitable tension device simulating the actual
conditions.

(1) Rotational-capacity tests. Use washers even if not required in the actual installation.
Perform job-site rotational-capacity tests for fastener assemblies according to A 325 and the
following:
(a) Tighten the fastener to a snug-tight condition according to Subsection 555.16(c)(3).
Use the bolt tension measuring device to tighten the fastener two times the required turns
shown in Table 555.5 if impact wrenches are used.
(b) Verify the maximum recorded tension is at least 1.15 times the minimum fastener
tension shown in Table 555.4. Record the tension and torque.
(c) Verify the measured torque at the maximum recorded tension does not exceed the
value obtained by the following equation:
TorqueUS Customary = 0.25PD TorqueMetric = 0.34PD
where:

Torque = Measured torque in foot-pounds (newton-meters)

P = Maximum recorded tension in pounds (newtons)

D = Nominal bolt diameter in feet (meters)
(2) Washers. Conform to ASTM F436. Use a hardened beveled washer where the outer face
of the bolted parts has a slope greater than 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt
axis.
Use hardened square or rectangular beveled washers for American Standard Beams and
Channels.

Section 555 – Steel Structures 444

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

If necessary, clip washers on one side to within 7⁄8 times the bolt diameter measured from the
washer center.
Hardened washers are not required for connections using ASTM A325 and ASTM A490
bolts except under the following conditions:
(a) Use a hardened washer under the turned element when the tensioning is done by the
calibrated wrench method.
(b) Use a hardened washer under both the head and the nut when A 490 bolts are installed
in material having a specified yield point less than 275 megapascals.
(c) Use a hardened washer conforming to ASTM F436 where ASTM A325 bolts of any
diameter or ASTM A490 bolts equal to or less than M24 diameter are installed in
oversize or short-slotted holes in an outer ply.
(d) Use 8-millimeter minimum thickness hardened washers conforming to ASTM F436
under both the head and the nut instead of standard thickness hardened washers where
ASTM A490 bolts larger than M24 diameter are installed in oversize or short slotted
holes in an outer ply. Do not use multiple hardened washers with a combined thickness
equal to or greater than 8 millimeters to satisfy this requirement.
(e) Use a 8-millimeter minimum thickness plate washer or continuous bar where ASTM
A325 bolts of any diameter or ASTM A490 bolts equal to or less than M24 diameter are
installed in a long-slotted hole in an outer ply. Provide a structural grade steel bar or plate
washer (that need not be hardened) with standard holes and of sufficient size to cover the
slot.
(f) Use a 8-millimeter minimum thickness hardened washer conforming to ASTM F436
under both the head and the nut in lieu of washers or bars of structural grade material
where ASTM A490 bolts larger than M24 diameter are installed in long-slotted holes in
an outer ply. Do not use multiple hardened washers with a combined thickness equal to or
greater than 8 millimeters to satisfy this requirement.
Alternate design fasteners that provide a bearing circle on the head or nut of at least the
diameter of an ASTM F436 hardened washer may be used without washers.
(3) Turn-of-nut installation method. Install bolts in connection holes and pull the plies to
firm contact throughout the connection. Tighten bolts snug-tight beginning with the most
rigid part of the connection and proceeding to the free edges. Verify that plies are in firm
contact throughout the connection.
Apply the rotation shown in Table 555.5 beginning with bolts in most rigid part of the
connection and proceeding to the free edges. Do not allow rotation of the fastener part not
turned by the wrench.
Use a bolt tension-measuring device at the start of work to verify that the tension on at least
3 fastener assemblies for each bolt diameter, length, and grade is at least 5 percent greater
than the tension shown in Table 555.4. Periodically test other fastener assemblies when
required by the Engineer.
(4) Calibrated wrench installation method. Install bolts with hardened washers under the
turned element and pull the plies to firm contact throughout the connection. Tighten bolts

Section 555 – Steel Structures 445

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

snug-tight beginning with the most rigid part of the connection and proceeding to the free
edges.
Set a calibrated wrench to deliver the torque required to produce a bolt tension at least
5 percent greater than the tension shown in Table 555.4. Use the calibrated wrench to tension
bolts beginning with the most rigid part of the connection and proceeding to the free edges.
Touch up previously tensioned bolts until bolts are tensioned to the prescribed amount.
Use a bolt tension-measuring devise at least once each shift to verify the tension on the
fastener assemblies installed. Test at least 3 fastener assemblies of each bolt diameter, length,
and grade installed in that shift. Recalibrate a wrench when the prescribed tension is not
achieved or when a significant difference is noted in the surface condition of the bolts,
threads, nuts, or washers. When tightening from a snug-tight condition, verify that the wrench
adjustment selected by the calibration does not produce a nut or bolt head rotation greater
than permitted in Table 555.5. Torque nuts in the tightening direction when measuring the
torque using manual torque wrenches.
(5) Direct tension indicator (DTI) installation method. Use DTIs conforming to ASTM
F959 and installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Position the DTI under
the stationary element or place a hardened washer between the DTI and the turned element.
Install bolts with DTIs and required hardened washers and pull the plies to firm contact
throughout the connection while holding the stationary element against rotation. Remove and
replace all DTIs where the number of spaces in which a 0.125 millimeters feeler gage is
refused in the DTI exceeds the number listed in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications table..
For uncoated DTIs used under a stationary or turned element and for coated (galvanized,
painted, or epoxy-coated) DTIs used under a stationary element, further tension the bolts until
the number of refusals of the 0.125 millimeters feeler gage is equal to or greater than the
number listed in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications table. Remove and
replace bolts that are tensioned so that no visible gap in any space remains. For coated DTIs
used under a turned element, further tension the bolts until all spaces verify that the 0.125
millimeters feeler gage shows refusal in all spaces.
Verify the tension in a calibrated bolt-tension measuring device. Use a special flat insert in
place of the normal bolt head holding insert. Perform three verification tests for each
combination of fastener assembly rotational-capacity lot, DTI lot, and DTI position relative to
the turned element (bolt head or nut) to be used on the project. Install the fastener assembly in
the tension-measuring device with the DTI located in the same position as in the work.
Restrain the element intended to be stationary (bolt or nut) from rotation. Conduct
verification tests in two stages according to AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications table.
(6) Alternate design bolt installation method. When approved, furnish alternate fasteners
that meet the materials, manufacturing, and chemical composition requirements of ASTM
A325 or ASTM A490 and:
(a) meet the mechanical property requirements of the same specification in full-size tests,
and
(b) have body diameter and bearing areas under the head and nut; or their equivalent, not
less than those provided by a bolt and nut of the same nominal dimension.

Section 555 – Steel Structures 446

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Install alternate design bolts in connection holes according to the manufacturer’s

recommendations and pull the plies to firm contact throughout the connection. Tighten bolts
snug-tight without yielding or fracturing the control or indicator element of the fastener.
Further tension fasteners beginning with bolts in most rigid part of the connection and
proceeding to the free edges. Proper tensioning of the bolts may require more than a single
cycle of systematic partial tensioning. Replace individual fastener assemblies if yielding or
fracture occurs before the final tensioning cycle.
Verify the tension according to Subsection 555.16(c)(3), (4), or (5).
(7) Inspection. Inspect the tensioned fasteners in the presence of the Engineer. Replace or re-
tension loose or relaxed fasteners. Cutting with a torch is not permitted for removal of
fasteners.
(a) Non-threaded fasteners. Ping each fastener with a hammer to test for soundness.
(b) Threaded fasteners. Use an inspection torque wrench to verify tensioning unless
alternate fasteners or DTI devices are used allowing verification by other methods.
Calibrate the inspection torque wrench at least once each inspection day. Individually
place three fastener assemblies of the same grade, size, and condition as those under
inspection in a device calibrated to measure bolt tension. Use a washer under the part
turned in tightening each bolt if washers are used on the structure. Use the same material
that abuts the part turned in the tension measuring device as used on the structure if
washers are not used on the structure. In the calibration device, tighten each bolt by any
convenient means to the specified tension. Apply the inspecting wrench to the tightened
bolt to determine the torque required to turn the nut or head 5 degrees, approximately 25
millimeters at a 300-millimeter radius, in the tightening direction. Use the average of the
torque required for all three bolts as the job-inspection torque.
Randomly select 10 percent (at least two) of the tensioned bolts on the structure in each
connection represented by the test bolts. Apply the job-inspection torque to each selected
bolt with the inspecting wrench turned in the tensioning direction. If this torque turns no
bolt head or nut, the fastener is properly tensioned. If the torque turns one or more bolt
heads or nuts, apply the job-inspection torque to all bolts in the connection. Re-torque and
re-inspect fasteners whose head or nut turns.
555.17 Welding. Conform to AASHTO/AWS Bridge Welding Code D1.5 (D1.5M) for welding,
welder qualifications, prequalification of weld details, and inspection of welds. For tubular
connections, conform to AWS Structural Welding Code – Steel, D1.1 Section 2, Part D.

Do not weld or tack brackets, clips, shipping devices, or other non-required material to any member
unless shown on the drawings.

555.18 Erection. Conform to Section 562 for falsework and forms. Use steel erectors certified under
the AISC Quality Certification Program.

(a) Handling and storing material. Place stored material on skids above ground. Keep material
clean and properly drained. Place and shore girders and beams upright. Support long members,
such as columns and chords, on skids placed close enough together to prevent deflection damage.

Section 555 – Steel Structures 447

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Bearings and anchorages. Furnish and install bridge bearings according to Section 564. Verify
substructure concrete built under a previous contract was properly constructed before ordering
material for the superstructure.

(c) Erection procedures.

(1) Conformance to drawings. Erect according to approved drawings. Submit revised

drawings and verification of stresses and geometry for modifications to or deviations from
the approved erection procedure for approval.
(2) Erection stresses. Allow for erection stresses locked in the structure as a result of
erection methods or equipment that differ from those previously approved. Provide additional
material necessary to keep both temporary and final stresses within the allowable limits used
in the design.
Provide temporary bracing or stiffening devices to accommodate handling stresses in
individual members or segments.
(3) Maintaining alignment and camber. Support structural segments to produce the proper
alignment and camber in the completed structure. Install cross frames and diagonal bracing
during erection to provide stability and ensure correct geometry. Provide temporary bracing
at any stage of erection.
(d) Field assembly. Clean bearing surfaces and permanent contact surfaces. Assemble material as
shown on the drawings and match-marks. Do not hammer, damage, or distort members.

Assemble splices and field connections with at least half the holes filled with fitting-up bolts and
cylindrical erection pins before installing and tightening the balance of the high-strength bolts. Use
fitting-up bolts that are the same high-strength bolts used in the installation or other bolts of the
same nominal diameter. Use cylindrical erection pins with a diameter 0.8 millimeter larger than the
bolts. Fill at least a quarter of the holes with fitting-up bolts and at least another quarter with
erection pins. Place pins in the corner holes of the splice plates. Fill at least three-fourths of the
holes of splices and connections carrying traffic.

Systematically remove fitting-up bolts and cylindrical erection pins and replace them with
tightened high-strength bolts. Start from the most rigid part of connection and proceed to the free
edges.

Release temporary erection supports at a splice or connection only after bolts are installed and
tightened. Show special assembly and support situations on the erection drawings.

(e) Pin connections. Use pilot and driving nuts when driving pins. Drive pins so that the members
fully bear on the pins. Screw pin nuts tight and burr the threads at the face of the nut with a pointed
tool.

(f) Misfits. Correct minor misfits using small amounts of reaming, cutting, grinding, and chipping.
Remove and replace members misfit due to shop fabrication error or deformation during handling
or transporting.

555.19 Acceptance. Material (except bearing devices and painting) for steel structures will be
evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03. Furnish production certifications for each shipment of
structural steel, steel forgings, and high-strength bolts, nuts, and washers.

Section 555 – Steel Structures 448

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Construction of steel structures will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Bearing devices will be evaluated under Section 564.

Painting will be evaluated under Section 563.

Measurement

555.20 Measure the Section 555 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Measure structural steel computed according to AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications.
Include metal items incidental to the structure and specified in the contract.

When measurement is by contract quantity, changes in quantities resulting from alternative details
proposed by the Contractor and accepted as a part of the drawings are not subject to adjustment
according to Subsection 109.05.

Payment

555.21 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 555 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 555 – Steel Structures 449

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 556. — BRIDGE RAILING

Description

556.01 This work consists of furnishing, erecting, removing, and resetting bridge railing.

Bridge railing is designated as concrete, steel, aluminum, or timber according to the predominant
material contained in the railing.

Material

556.02 Conform to the following Sections and Subsections:

Aluminum alloy for bridge rail 717.12

Aluminum bolt heads and nuts 717.13
Aluminum welding wire 717.14
Box beam rail 710.06(b)
Painting 563
Reinforcing steel 709.01
Steel structures 555
Structural concrete 552
Timber structures 557

Construction Requirements

556.03 General. Accurately place anchor bolts to provide correct and true alignment of the railing. Set
anchor bolts so that they project not more than 10 millimeters beyond the nut when tightened. Chamfer
or round by grinding or filing sharp exposed metal edges.

Do not erect railing until centering or falsework for the supporting span is removed. Construct bridge
railing so that it does not follow any unevenness in the curb, sidewalk, or wall that supports the railing.
Install railing to present a smooth and uniform appearance in its final position. Set posts vertical.

556.04 Concrete Railing. See Section 552.

556.05 Steel Railing. See Section 555.

556.06 Aluminum Railing. See Section 555 except as amended by the following:

(a) Cutting. Material that is 13 millimeters thick or less may be cut by shearing, sawing, or
milling. Saw or mill material that is over 13 millimeters thick. Do not flame cut. Make cut edges
true, smooth, and without excessive burrs or ragged breaks. Fillet reentrant cuts by drilling before
cutting.

(b) Bending. Material may be heated to a maximum 200 °C for a period not to exceed 30 minutes
to facilitate bending.

Section 556 – Bridge Railing 450

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(c) Rivet and bolt holes. Drill rivet and bolt holes to finished size, or subpunch smaller than the
nominal diameter of the fastener and ream to size. Subpunch to a diameter that is smaller than that
of the finished hole by at least one quarter the thickness of the piece. Make the finished diameter of
holes not more than 7 percent greater than the nominal diameter of the fastener except:

(1) Fabricate slotted bolt holes as required; and

(2) Fabricate anchor bolt holes up to 25 percent larger, not to exceed 13 millimeters larger
than the nominal bolt diameter.
(d) Welding. Weld according to AWS Structural Aluminum Welding Code, D1.2.

(e) Contact with other material. Protect aluminum alloys that contact other material as follows:

(1) Aluminum alloys in contact with other metals. Coat the contacting surfaces with
dielectric aluminum-impregnated caulking compound or place a synthetic rubber gasket
between the surfaces.
(2) Aluminum alloys in contact with stone or concrete.
(a) Where a bond is not required. Coat the contacting surfaces with
aluminum-impregnated caulking compound or with heavy bituminous paint pigmented
with aluminum powder or paste.
(b) Where a bond is required. Coat the contacting aluminum surface with zinc-chromate
paint. Allow paint to dry before installation.
(3) Aluminum alloys in contact with wood. Coat the contacting wood surface with three coats
of paint according to Section 563 and coat the contacting aluminum surface with aluminum-
impregnated caulking compound.
556.07 Timber Railing. See Section 557.

556.08 Remove and Reset Bridge Railing. Remove and store the existing bridge railings and
appurtenances. Replace railings, supports, and hardware damaged during removal, storage, or resetting.

556.09 Painting. Where required by the contract, paint according to Section 563.

556.10 Acceptance. Material (except concrete, painting, reinforcing steel, structural steel, and timber)
for bridge railings will be evaluated under Section 106.03. Furnish a production certification with each
shipment of bridge railing.

Concrete will be evaluated under Section 552 except compressive strength will be evaluated under
Subsection 106.04.

Painting will be evaluated under Section 563.

Reinforcing steel will be evaluated under Section 554.
Structural steel will be evaluated under Section 555.
Timber will be evaluated under Section 557.
Construction of bridge railings will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Section 556 – Bridge Railing 451

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Measurement
556.11 Measure the Section 556 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment
556.12 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 556 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 556 – Bridge Railing 452

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 557. — TIMBER STRUCTURES

Description

557.01 This work consists of fabricating, treating, erecting, and painting structural timber. This work
also includes required lumber and hardware.

Material

557.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsections:

Galvanized coatings (drains) 717.07

Hardware 716.02
Painting 563
Structural carbon steel (drains) 717.01(a)
Structural glued laminated timber 716.04
Treated structural timber and lumber 716.03
Untreated structural timber and lumber 716.01

Construction Requirements

557.03 Qualifications. Provide welders conforming to AASHTO/AWS Bridge Welding Code

D1.5M/1.5.

557.04 General. Excavate and backfill according to Section 208.

Use slings or other devices to protect the corners of heavy timbers and banded packages of lighter
timber.

Cut and form lumber and timber so joints have even bearing over their entire contact surface. Do not
use shims in making joints. Close all joints. Drive nail and spike heads flush with the wood surface.

Use the same end, face, and edge of the timber member for all layout dimensions. Bore holes from
mating faces.

557.05 Material Storage. Store material in an area cleared of weeds, rubbish, or other objectionable
material. Elevate material at least 200 millimeters above the ground. Provide sufficient support to
prevent sagging.

Open-stack untreated material to shed water. Allow for free air circulation by stacking material in
layers on stickers that extend across the full width of the stack. Align stickers vertically and space them
at regular intervals.

Close-stack treated material to shed water.

Protect material from the elements. Use sheeting such as water-resistant paper or opaque polyethylene
film if material is be covered. Do not use impervious membranes such as polyethylene film during dry
weather. Slit or puncture individual wrappings full length on the lower side to permit water drainage.

Section 557 – Timber Structures 453

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Store and protect glued laminated timber according to the AITC 111, Recommended Practice for
Protection of Structural Glued Laminated Timber During Transit, Storage, and Erection.

557.06 Holes for Drift Pins, Dowels, Bolts, and Lag Screws. Bore holes before preservative
treatment.

Bore holes for round drift pins and dowels to a diameter 1.6 millimeter less than the diameter of the pin
or dowel. Bore holes for square drift pins and dowels to a diameter equal to the side dimension of the
pin or dowel.

Bore holes for galvanized bolts to a diameter 1.6 millimeter larger than the diameter of the bolt.

Bore holes for lag screws according to Subsection 7.3.1. of the AITC Timber Construction Manual.

557.07 Treating Timber. Indicate the preservative used, penetration in millimeters, retention in
kilograms per cubic meter (assay method).

Cut, frame, and bore timbers before treatment when practical. Do not cut or bore timber below the
high-water mark in coastal waters.

Handle treated timber according to the AWPA published Consumer Information Sheet. Do not drip or
spill preservative into the aquatic environment or onto the ground. Handle treated timbers to prevent
damage to their surfaces. Do not use cant dogs, hooks, or pike poles.

Field treat cuts or abrasions with preservative. Dip, soak, spray, or apply three brush coats of the same
preservative according to AWPA M4.

Impregnate holes bored after treatment with the same preservative using tools suitable for proper
application. Plug unused holes with the same treated timber.

557.08 Hardware. Galvanize hardware and fasteners including nails, spikes, bolts, washers, and
timber connectors. Do not galvanize malleable iron or cast-iron hardware.

Use washers under bolt heads and nuts in contact with wood. Use malleable iron washers with a
diameter approximately three times the bolt diameter. Use cast-iron washers when the timber is in
contact with the ground. Use square washers only when specified.

Cut off excess bolt lengths of more than 25 millimeters. After final tightening, check or burr bolts with
a pointing tool to prevent loosening of the nuts.

557.09 Countersinking. Countersink screws, bolts, and nuts where required. Treat countersunk
recesses with an approved preservative before filling except in railings. Fill the recess with hot pitch or
other approved filler after bolts, screws, and nuts are in place.

557.10 Framing. Do not slab or trim treated piles when fitting sway or sash braces. Securely fasten
braces to smaller piles using treated blocks to fill the gaps.

557.11 Framing Bents. Firmly and evenly bed mud blocks to solid bearing. Tamp in place.

Section 557 – Timber Structures 454

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

When concrete is cast, set dowels for anchoring sills and posts to project at least 6 inches
(150 millimeters) above the tops of the pedestals. Finish concrete pedestals supporting framed bents so
that sills or posts bear evenly on the pedestals.

Make sills bear evenly and true on mud blocks, piles, or pedestals. Bolt sills into place with drift bolts
that extend into the mud blocks or piles for at least 150 millimeters. Where possible, remove material
in contact with sills for circulation of air around the sills.

557.12 Bent Caps. Make timber caps bear evenly and uniformly over the tops of aligned supporting
posts or piles. Secure caps with drift bolts extending at least 230 millimeters into the approximate
center of each post or pile.

557.13 Bracing. Bolt the ends of bracing through the pile, post, cap, or sill. Brace intermediate
intersections with posts or piles with bolts and spikes with wire, or boat spikes as required. Use
galvanized spikes in addition to bolts.

Make bracing bear firmly against the pile or cap to which it is bolted. Provide and place shims as
necessary to prevent bending of the bracing more than 25 millimeters out of true when bracing bolts
are tightened.

Where the space between the bracing and cap or pile is:

(a) Less than 25 millimeters, shims are not needed;

(b) 38±13 millimeters, place two ogee washers with their narrow faces together or other approved
washers on each bolt that passes through the space; or
(c) Over 50 millimeters, use wooden shims of the proper thickness.
Fabricate the wooden shims from the same treated wood used in the structure or white oak. Do not use
built-up wooden shims. Make wooden shims from a single piece of lumber with the width not less than
100 millimeters and the length not less than the width of the bracing measured along the cap or pile.
Do not adze, trim, or cut any treated member to avoid the use of shims.

557.14 Stringers. Size stringers at bearings. Position stringers so knots near edges are in the top
portion of the stringer.

Outside stringers may have butt joints with ends cut on a taper. Lap interior stringers so both stringer
ends have full length bearing on a floor beam or cap. Stagger joints where stringers are two panels in
length. Separate lapped ends of untreated stringers by at least 13 millimeters for air circulation. Use
drift bolts to securely fasten the lapped ends.

Place cross-bridging at the center of each span. Cut cross-bridging members to provide full bearing on
the stinger sides at each end. Securely toenail the cross-bridging with at least two nails in each end. If
blocking is used, make it fit snugly and securely.

557.15 Plank Floors. Use plank that is surfaced on four sides (S4S).

Single-ply timber floors consist of a single thickness of planks supported on stringers. Grade plank
thickness so no two adjacent planks vary in thickness by more than 3 millimeters. Lay the planks heart
side down with 6 millimeters space between them for dry, seasoned material and with no joint space
for unseasoned material. Spike each plank securely to each stringer.

Section 557 – Timber Structures 455

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Two-ply timber floors consist of two layers of flooring supported on stringers. Treat the lower layer
according to Subsection 557.04. Lay the top layer either diagonally or parallel to the roadway
centerline. Stagger joints at least 900 millimeters. Securely fasten each top layer member to the lower
layer. Where the top layer is placed parallel to the centerline of the roadway, use special care to
securely fasten the ends of the flooring. Bevel the ends of top layer members at each end of the
structure.

557.16 Transversely Nail Laminated Decks. Use 50-millimeter nominal thickness laminations,
surface one edge hit or miss 3 millimeters scant (S1E-H or M 3-millimeters scant), and one side hit or
miss millimeters scant (S1S-H or M 3-millimeters scant).

Place the laminations on edge and at right angles to the centerline of roadway. Attach each piece to the
preceding piece using galvanized spikes of sufficient length to pass through two pieces and at least
halfway through the third piece. Drive spikes at each end and at approximately 450-millimeter intervals
alternately diving near the top and bottom edges.

Where timber stringers are used, use spikes to toenail every other piece to every other stringer. When
steel stringers are used, securely attach the pieces using approved galvanized metal clips.

Use pieces of sufficient length to bear on at least four stringers. Do not splice pieces between stringers.
Space end joints on any one stringer no closer than every third piece. Space end joints in adjoining
pieces no closer than every second stringer.

557.17 Glue Laminated Panel Decks. When handling and transporting, avoid bending panels,
especially transverse to the laminated pieces. When lifting a panel, support it at a sufficient number of
points. Do not drag or skid panels. Protect the panel edges from damage.

When dowels are used between panels, use a template or drilling jig to properly space dowel holes.
Drill holes the same diameter as the dowel and 6 millimeters deeper than one half the dowel length.
Slightly taper or round dowel tips and lubricate dowels to facilitate the connection process.

Start the tips of the dowels partially and equally in the holes of the panels to be joined. Draw the panels
together, keeping the edges parallel, until the panels abut tightly. Securely fasten each panel to each
stringer.

557.18 Wheel Guards and Railings. Surface (S4S) wheel guards, rails, and posts. Place wheel guards
in not less than 3.7-meter lengths. Squarely butt-joint rails at posts.

557.19 Trusses. Avoid irregularities in alignment. In horizontal projection, fabricate chords straight
and true from end-to-end. In vertical projection, fabricate chords to a smooth, corded curve through
panel points conforming to the correct camber. Make bearing surfaces fit accurately. Do not make
uneven or rough cuts at the points of bearing.

557.20 Painting. Paint according to Section 563 when specified.

557.21 Acceptance. Material for timber structures will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.03. Furnish a production certification with each shipment of structural timber and lumber.
Construction of timber structures will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.
Painting will be evaluated under Section 563.

Section 557 – Timber Structures 456

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Measurement

557.22 Measure the Section 557 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring untreated and treated structural timber and lumber by the thousand board feet
measure, measure in the structure.

Compute the quantities from nominal dimensions and actual lengths except for transversely nail
laminated decks and glue laminated panel decks. Measure transversely nail laminated decks and glue
laminated panel decks in place after dressing.

Measure timber piles under Section 551.

Measure timber bridge rail under Section 556.

Payment

557.23 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 557 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 557 – Timber Structures 457

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 558. — DAMPPROOFING

Description

558.01 This work consists of dampproofing concrete or masonry surfaces.

Material

558.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Asphalt 702.03(b)
Primer 702.03(a)

Construction Requirements

558.03 Dampproofing. Cure the concrete or masonry surface according to Subsection 552.15 except
do not use liquid membrane curing compound. Allow concrete surface to dry at least 10 days after
completion of curing.

Apply dampproofing to a dry, clean, reasonably smooth surface that is free of dust and loose material.
Apply dampproofing in dry weather when the air and surface temperatures are 7 °C or higher.

Apply primer to the surface and allow it to dry. Apply 2 coats of asphalt at the rate of approximately
1.25 kilograms per square meter of surface per coat. Apply prime coat and asphalt coats uniformly,
fully covering the surface, and thoroughly work them into the surface. Make the total of the final
2 asphalt coats approximately 2.4 millimeters thick. Allow asphalt coats to harden before allowing
contact with water or backfill material.

558.04 Acceptance. Material for dampproofing will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.03.

Applying dampproofing will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

558.05 Measure the Section 558 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

558.06 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 558 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 558 – Dampproofing 458

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 559. — WATERPROOFING

Description

559.01 This work consists of waterproofing concrete surfaces. Waterproofing consists of in-place
membrane or preformed membrane systems.

Material

559.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Asphalt 702.03(b)
Asphalt roll roofing 702.03(e)
Mastic 702.03(d)
Primer 702.03(a)
Sealants, fillers, and seals 712.01
Waterproofing fabric 702.03(c)

Construction Requirements

559.03 General. Store waterproof fabric in a dry and protected place. Do not store rolls standing on
end.

Ensure the concrete surface is free of projections or depressions that might cause puncture of the
membrane. Clean the concrete surface of dust and loose material. Do not place membranes on wet
concrete. Do not place membrane on new concrete until at least 10 days after completion of the
concrete curing process as defined in Subsection 552.15. Apply waterproofing in dry weather when
the temperature is above 2 °C and rising.

Apply primer and membrane beginning at the lowest point of the work.

559.04 In-place Membrane System. Stir asphalt frequently as it is heated to a temperature between
150 and 175 °C.

Apply hot asphalt at a rate not less than 5 liters per square meter on finished horizontal surface and not
less than 6 liters per square meter on vertical surface.

Ensure placed fabric is mopped by end of shift.

Prevent water from getting between the waterproofing and the waterproofed surface at the edges and at
openings in the membrane for drains and pipes.

Provide flashing at curbs and against girders, spandrel walls, and other area with separate sheets that
lap the main membrane at least 300 millimeters. Seal flashing with either a metal counter-flashing or
by embedding the upper edges of the flashing in a groove joint filler.

Provide horizontal and vertical expansion joints with sheet copper or lead in a "U" or "V" form. Fill the
joint with hot joint filler after the membrane has been placed. Carry the membrane continuously across
expansion joints. For joints that are essentially open joints, but are not designed to provide for
expansion, pack the joint with oakum and fill with hot-poured joint filler before placing the membrane.

Section 559 – Waterproofing 459

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

At the ends of a structure, carry the membrane down the fill face of the abutment and provide for
movement.

Install materials as follows:

(a) Apply a coat of primer and allow to dry;

(b) Mop a coat of hot asphalt slightly wider than half the width of waterproof fabric and cover the
entire area of concrete;

(c) Immediately roll a starter strip of half-width waterproof fabric into the asphalt. Press the
waterproof fabric into place to rid it of air bubbles and to conform it closely to the surface;

(d) Mop hot asphalt over the top of the starter strip to completely conceal the weave and an
adjoining section of concrete surface slightly wider than half the fabric width;

(e) Immediately roll a full-width strip of fabric into the fresh asphalt, pressing it into place as
before;

(f) Mop this second strip and an adjoining section of concrete surface slightly wider than half the
fabric width;

(g) Place a third strip of fabric so as to lap the first strip by not less than 100 millimeters. Continue
this process of lapping each strip of fabric at least 100 millimeters over the strip placed before the
last strip until the entire surface is covered with 2 layers of fabric. Lap the ends at least
300 millimeters. Do not allow the fabric to touch an un-mopped surface; and

(h) Mop the entire surface with hot asphalt after all waterproof fabric has been placed.

Ensure laps are sealed.

Repair or replace waterproofing that leaks. Use patches extending at least 300 millimeters beyond the
outermost damaged portion, and extend the second ply at least 75 millimeters beyond the first.

Apply protective covering or install backfill to prevent damage.

559.05 Preformed Membrane System. Preformed membrane systems consist of a primer applied to
the prepared surface, a single layer of adhering preformed membrane sheet, and a protective cover.

(a) Prime installation. Install an oil-resistant construction adhesive-backed paper mask to concrete
surfaces that will later be covered by expansion dams or headers before applying the primer. Place
the membrane seal and asphalt concrete overlay continuously over masked areas and subsequently
cut at or near the expansion joint after the overlay is in place.

Thoroughly mix and continuously agitate primer during application. Apply the neoprene-based
primer in one coat at a rate of approximately 7 square meters per liter. Apply resin or solvent-based
primer in one coat at a rate of approximately 3 square meters per liter. Apply primer by spray or
squeegee to the entire area to be sealed. Install membrane sheets on neoprene-based primers within
36 hours, resin-based primers within 8 hours, and solvent-based primers within 24 hours of placing
the primer. If time is exceeded, re-apply the primer before placing the membrane sheeting.

Section 559 – Waterproofing 460

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Membrane installation. Place the membrane sheet either by hand methods or by mechanical
applicators. Place in a manner as to shingle the sheets in the direction that water will drain.

• Install a 300-millimeter minimum width strip along the juncture of deck and base of barrier
railing or curb face at the low side of the deck with the sheet extending up the face
75 millimeters;
• Starting at the gutter line, lay sheets longitudinally and side lapped with adjacent sheets by
not less than 60 millimeters and end lapped by not less than 150 millimeters; and
• Place a 300-millimeter minimum width strip at the juncture of deck and base of curb or
railing at the high side of the deck extending up the face 75 millimeters.

After laying the membrane sheets, roll the surface with hand rollers or other apparatus as necessary
to develop a firm and uniform bond with the primed concrete surfaces. Use procedures that
minimize wrinkles and air bubbles.

Patch tears, cuts, or narrow overlaps using a satisfactory adhesive and by placing sections of
membrane sheet over the defective area such that the patch extends at least 150 millimeters beyond
the defect. On modified bitumen sheets with a permanent polyester film, use a propane torch to
melt the polyester film on the section to be patched, then place the patch over the heated surface.
Press or roll patches firmly onto the surface.

At open joints, at deck bleeder pipes, and at other locations as needed, cut the membrane sheet and
turn into the joint or bleeder as the sheet is being laid.

(1) For rubberized asphalt sheets and modified bitumen sheets, apply mastic as a bead along the
exposed edge of the membrane sheet that extends up the barrier railing or curb face and that
ends in the high-side gutter after the sheets have been installed.
(2) For preformed membrane material applied on surfaces other than bridge decks, conform to
the requirements for application on bridge decks and the following:
(a) Place membrane vertically with each successive sheet lapped to the preceding by at least
75 millimeters. Lap horizontal splices by at least 150 millimeters.
(b) Place a troweled bead of manufacturer’s recommended mastic or sealing tape along
exposed edges of the installed membrane.
(c) Flash projecting pipe, conduits, sleeves, or other facilities passing through the
preformed membrane waterproofing. Use prefabricated or field-fabricated boots, fitted
coverings, or other devices as necessary to provide watertight construction.
559.06 Alternate Membrane Systems. Submit for approval waterproofing membrane systems.
Construct Alternate Membrane Systems according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and as
approved by the Engineer.

559.07 Protective Covering for Membrane Systems. Install a protective covering immediately after
waterproofing to prevent damage to the membrane system from sunlight, weather, traffic, or
construction operations.

For waterproofed surfaces against which backfill will be placed, Cover membrane systems with
3 millimeters thick hardboard or other material approved by the Engineer when backfilling.

Section 559 – Waterproofing 461

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

559.08 Overlay Placement. Limit traffic on the membrane to necessary construction equipment and
emergency vehicles only. For roadway surfaces of bridge decks, place a protective layer of asphalt
concrete pavement as specified.

Place a hot asphalt concrete overlay within 48 hours after placing the membrane.

Do not windrow asphalt concrete on the membrane ahead of the paving machine. Do not use an
asphalt concrete pickup machine. Do not turn equipment on the membrane to avoid membrane
movement and damage. Avoid abrupt starts and stops.

Broom any excess blotter from the membrane surface before placing the overlay. Repair damaged
areas on the membrane before commencing overlay placement. Apply a light tack coat according to
Section 412 before placing the overlay.

Limit the lay-down temperature of the mix to a maximum of 150 ºC.

559.09 Acceptance. Material for waterproofing will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.03.

Applying of waterproofing will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

559.10 Measure the Section 559 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

559.11 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement, for the
Section 559 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 559 – Waterproofing 462

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 560. — REMOVAL OF CONCRETE BY

HYDRODEMOLITION

Description

560.01 This work consists of removing concrete with high pressure water jets.

Material

560.02 Conform to the following Subsection:

Water 725.01(c)

Construction Requirements

560.03 Submittal. Submit the following for approval by the Engineer:

(a) Sequence and schedule of work;

(b) Concrete removal procedures; and

(c) List of equipment to be used.

560.04 General. Furnish water required to operate the hydrodemolition equipment.

Protect adjacent property from dislodged concrete during operations. Construct debris shields to
prevent debris and wastewater from entering waterways, travel lanes open to public traffic, or areas
designated not to be disturbed.

Use filtering methods to ensure wastewater is free of concrete particles and sediment.

Dispose of wastewater and debris off the project according to Subsection 203.05.

560.05 Equipment. Furnish a self-propelled and completely programmable hydrodemolition system

designed for concrete removal as specified. Furnish a vacuum system equipped with:
• fugitive dust control devices capable of removing wet debris and water in the same pass; and

• a pressurized washing system capable of cleaning the concrete surface during the vacuum
operation to dislodge any debris and slurry.

Calibrate equipment to specific project parameters before beginning hydrodemolition production

work. If hydrodemolition equipment cannot be calibrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer, remove
equipment and provide another hydrodemolition system. Adjust equipment at the beginning of each
day on an area of representative concrete designated by the Engineer before commencing operations.
Verify settings will remove concrete as specified. Adjust settings as necessary to achieve the desired
removal of concrete. Recalibrate during the work if parameters change such as degree of concrete
deterioration or the concrete strength changes.

Section 560 – Removal of Concrete by Hydrodemolition 463

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Record the following settings and notify the Engineer:

(a) Water pressure gauge;

(b) Water usage in gallons per minute (liters per minute);
(c) Machine staging control (step) – feet per minute (meters per minute) forward travel;
(d) Nozzle size;
(e) Nozzle speed (revolutions per minute);
(f) Transverse nozzle travel speed. Only applicable if hydrodemolition nozzle is not fixed and
moves transversely on a track between stops before staging to the next step. Report transverse
nozzle travel speed in meters per second; and
(g) Effective pass width of hydrodemolition unit. Effective pass width is defined as the width
of hydrodemolition that has uniform pressure, water, and dwell time per machine staging
control (step). Report effective width in meters.
560.06 Concrete Removal. Remove concrete as follows:

(a) Shallow concrete removal for deck scarification. If a hydrodemolition machine is used
for concrete scarification in preparation for a deck overlay, clean the deck by an approved
method of water blasting with 335 kilopascals minimum pressure until sound concrete is
exposed. Scarify to the depth specified in the plans. If no depth is specified, remove a
minimum of 6 millimeters of material.

(b) Concrete cover removal. For planned removal of concrete or removal of unsound or
deteriorated concrete, remove concrete to the depth specified in the contract or down to sound
concrete. Provide at least 25 millimeters below the bottom of the exposed reinforcing steel.
When removing unsound concrete be careful to remove only to the depth that sound concrete
is encountered provided it meets the at least 25 millimeters below the bottom of the
reinforcing steel. Do not damage remaining sound concrete or reinforcing steel. When the
bond between existing concrete and reinforcing steel is destroyed, remove the concrete
adjacent to the reinforcing steel to a depth that permits new concrete to bond to the reinforcing
steel.

Remove loose and unsound concrete resulting from the hydrodemolition operations below the
minimum depth.

Verify concrete removal as necessary or at least every 9 meters along the cutting path.

In areas inaccessible to the hydrodemolition equipment, use approved hand-held water blasting
equipment or power-driven hand tools such as jack hammers, mechanical chipping tools, or chipping
hammers. Do use jack hammers heavier than nominal 14 kilogram class and chipping hammers
heavier than 7 kilogram class. Operate mechanically driven tools at a maximum angle of 45 degrees
from the concrete surface.

If necessary, use hand tools such as hammers and chisels to remove the final particles of concrete to
achieve the required depth. Leave a rough surface after the concrete is removed.

Section 560 – Removal of Concrete by Hydrodemolition 464

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Immediately remove residue, water, dust, and concrete to prevent rebonding to the surface or
reinforcing steel.

560.07 Reinforcing Steel. Do not cut or damage reinforcing steel designated to remain. Use methods
acceptable to the Engineer to repair or replace reinforcing steel damaged by operations.

Inspect the reinforcement with the Engineer after the concrete has been removed. Replace any
reinforcing steel by tying new reinforcing steel to the existing reinforcing steel when more than 10
percent of its section is lost. If the deteriorated portion of the reinforcing steel is closer to the edge of
the patch than the overlap distance designated in the plans, extend the limits of the patch to provide
the required overlap distance with acceptable reinforcing steel. Provide a minimum 50-millimeter
clearance between the ends of new reinforcing steel and the existing slab face. Match the number,
type, and spacing of the new reinforcement steel to the existing reinforcing steel.

560.08 Surface Preparation. Before placing new concrete, clean the concrete surface and exposed
reinforcing steel of rust, loose and rebounded material, and other contaminants that may inhibit
bonding with new concrete. If compressed air is used, provide a filter in the air line to ensure that the
air delivered is oil-free. Protect the steel and surface from contamination until the new concrete is
placed.

560.09 Acceptance. Removal of concrete by hydrodemolition will be evaluated under Subsection

106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

560.10 Measure the Section 560 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

560.11 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 560 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 560 – Removal of Concrete by Hydrodemolition 465

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 561. — STRUCTURAL CONCRETE INJECTION AND

CRACK REPAIR

Description

561.01 This work consists of repairing cracks in concrete structures by injecting epoxy into the
cracks.

Material

561.02 Conform to the following Subsection:

Epoxy resin adhesives 725.18

Polymer concrete and mortar 725.14

Construction Requirements

561.03 Crack Preparation. Notify the Engineer at least 14 days before beginning work. The
Engineer will identify work areas and mark the cracks to be repaired.

Submit the following for approval 14 days before beginning work:

(a) Personnel qualifications;

(b) The manufacturer’s recommended materials; and

(c) Describe the materials to be used including the properties of each material and the
specifications to which the materials comply.

An injection procedure for performing the work.

Remove dirt, laitance, and other debris from the exterior and interior of the crack. Apply a temporary
surface seal material to the face of the crack. Use a surface seal material with sufficient strength and
adhesion to confine the injected epoxy material until cured.

Provide openings (entry ports) in the surface seal along the crack. Make the distance between entry
ports at least the thickness of the concrete member being repaired.

561.04 Injection Procedure. Use a two-component epoxy system. Maintain the component mix
ratio within 5 percent by volume as prescribed by the manufacturer. Do not use solvents to thin the
epoxy.

Use positive inline displacement type equipment to meter, mix, and inject the epoxy at pressures not
to exceed 1380 kilopascals) Begin injecting epoxy at the lowest entry port. Continue the injection at
the first port until epoxy flows from the next highest port. Plug the first port and inject epoxy into the
second port until epoxy flows from the next highest port. Continue this sequence until the entire
crack is filled.

Perform the following tests for each injection unit at the beginning and at the end of each day the
unit is used.

Section 561 – Structural Concrete Injection and Crack Repair 466

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(a) Ratio check test. Disconnect the mixing head of the injection equipment. Pump the two
adhesive components through a ratio check device having two independent valved nozzles
capable of controlling the flow rate and back pressure by opening or closing the valves. Use a
pressure gauge capable of sensing back pressure behind each valve. Adjust the discharge pressure
to 1380 kilopascals for both epoxy components. Simultaneously discharge both epoxy
components into separate calibrated containers. Compare the discharged amounts to determine
the mix ratio.

After the test is completed at 1380 kilopascals discharge pressure, repeat the procedures for 0
kilopascals discharge pressure.

(b) Pressure check test. Disconnect the mixing head of the injection equipment. Attach the two
adhesive component delivery lines to a pressure check device having two independent valved
nozzles capable of controlling the flow rate and pressure by opening or closing the valves. Use a
pressure gauge capable of sensing the pressure build-up behind each valve. Close the valves on
the pressure-check device and operate the equipment until the gauge pressure on each line reads
1380 kilopascals. Stop the pumps and check that the gauge pressure does not drop below
1310 kilopascals within 3 minutes.

(c) Records. Maintain and make available complete and accurate records of the ratio and
pressure check tests. Additional ratio and pressure check tests may be required.

561.05 Coring. Take one 50-millimenter diameter test core according to AASHTO T 24 for every 15
meters of repaired crack at designated locations. The crack repair is acceptable when the epoxy
bonding has penetrated at least 90 percent of the crack volume within the core sample.

When a test core is unacceptable, redo that 15-meter crack segment or the segment that the core
represents and resample. Repeat this procedure until acceptable crack repair is achieved.

561.06 Finishing. Remove the surface seal and fill sample core holes with polymer concrete and
mortar. Finish the face of the crack, the entry ports, and the core holes flush with the adjacent surface
and finish the surface to match the adjacent concrete.

561.07 Traffic Control. Provide traffic control beginning with the application of epoxy paste
surface seal and continue for 6 hours after completion of the crack injection work or until the
injected epoxy resin has reached a compressive strength of at least 10 megapascals, whichever is
less.

Provide traffic control to slow traffic to a maximum speed of 25 kilometers per hour.

Unless otherwise shown, for bridge deck repair, stage traffic so that the edge of the nearest travel
lane is no closer than the center of the adjacent girder.

561.08 Acceptance. See Table 561.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Material for structural concrete injection and crack repair will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02
and 106.03.

Structural concrete injection and crack repair work will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.04.

Section 561 – Structural Concrete Injection and Crack Repair 467

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Measurement

561.09 Measure the Section 561 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

561.10 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 561 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 561 – Structural Concrete Injection and Crack Repair 468

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 561.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material Type of Characteristi Categor Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
or Acceptance c y Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
Product (Subsection)
(Subsectio
n)
Daily Start-up & Shutdown Testing
Epoxy Process Mix ratio − Subsection Daily Injection No Subsection
resin control 561.04(a) Before unit 561.04(c)
adhesive (153.03) starting
work and
after
ending work
Pressure − Subsection " " " "
check 561.04(b)
Production
Epoxy Measured and Penetration − Subsection One core In-place No Upon
resin tested for of material 561.05 for every after completion
adhesive conformance into crack 15 meters epoxy of test
(106.04 of repaired resin
crack length injection
completed

Section 561 – Structural Concrete Injection and Crack Repair 469

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 562. — TEMPORARY WORKS

Description

562.01 This work consists of the design, construction, inspection, maintenance and removal of
temporary works for the construction and repair of permanent structures. Temporary works includes
temporary facilities used in construction that do not become part of the permanent structure.

Material

562.02 Select material consistent with the safety and quality required by the design assumptions.

Furnish factory fabricated components of vertical shoring towers according to FHWA-RD-93-033

Certification Program for Bridge Temporary Works.

Design Requirements

562.03 Design. Design and construct safe and adequate temporary works that will support loads
imposed and provide the necessary rigidity to produce the lines and grades shown on the plans for the
final structure. Design temporary works according to the AASHTO Load and Resistance Factor Design
(LRFD) Bridge Design Specifications or AASHTO Guide Design Specifications for Bridge Temporary
Works. Ensure the design load on manufactured devices is within the load rating recommended by the
manufacturer.

Design falsework and forms that support deck slabs and overhangs on girder bridges to ensure no
differential settlement between the girders and the deck forms during placement of deck concrete.

Limit the calculated deflections of falsework and formwork members for cast-in-place concrete
structures as follows:

(a) Falsework member vertical deflection: 1⁄360 of the span under the dead load of the concrete
only, regardless of the fact that deflection may be compensated for by camber strips;

(b) Formwork (other than sheathing): 1⁄360 of the span under the dead load of the concrete only
or the lateral pressure of fluid concrete only; and

(c) Formwork (sheathing): 3 millimeters or 1⁄270 of the center-to-center distance between studs,
joists, form stiffeners, form fasteners, or wales.

Design falsework and forms for concrete supported on steel structures to ensure loads are applied to
girder webs within 150 millimeters of a flange or stiffener. Distribute the loads in a manner that does
not produce local distortion of the web. Brace or tie exterior girders, upon which overhanging bridge
deck falsework brackets are hung, to the adjacent interior girders as necessary to prevent rotation of
exterior girders or overstressing the exterior girder web.

Submit foundation design calculations and other relevant foundation design data for approval.

Do not use deck overhang form brackets that require holes to be cast or drilled into the bridge girders.

Section 562 – Temporary Works 470

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Do not apply loads to existing, new, or partially completed structures in excess of the load carrying
capacity of any part of the structure as determined according to AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications.

Do not use permanent or stay-in-place deck forms unless specified.

562.04 Drawings. Submit drawings according to Subsection 104.03. Furnish design calculations and
supporting data in sufficient detail to permit a structural and safety review of the proposed design.
Show information to allow the design of components to be checked independently. Provide catalog or
equivalent data indicating a manufactured device’s recommended safe load capacity.

Indicate the proposed sequence, rate of placement, direction of placement, and location of construction
joints when concrete placement is involved. Show anticipated total settlements and deflections of the
falsework and forms. Include falsework footing settlements, joint take-up, and deflection of beams or
girders.

Submit the erection procedure and temporary support system for steel girder erection. Include
calculations in sufficient detail to substantiate that the girder geometry is correct. Provide supporting
calculations showing the falsework design accommodates the erection procedure without over stressing
the structural steel and produces the required final structural geometry, intended continuity, and
structural action.

Do not start construction of any temporary work for which drawings are required until the Engineer has
approved the drawings.

Construction Requirements

562.05 Foundations. Determine the allowable bearing capacity of the foundation material on which
the supports for temporary works will rest. Perform load tests to verify proposed bearing capacity
values that are in doubt, marginal or in other high risk situations.

Specified foundation support values for the permanent structure may be used in the design of falsework
foundations provided foundations are at the same elevation and on the same soil as those of the
permanent structure. If temporary works are to be supported on temporary fill, construct the fill
according to Section 204 and verify the bearing capacity of the placed material.

Do not locate the edge of footings closer than 300 millimeters from the intersection of the bench and
the top of the slope. Do not locate the edge of the footings closer than 48 inches (1200 millimeters) or
the depth of excavation, whichever is greater from the edge of excavation, unless shoring adequately
supports the footing excavation.

Provide adequate site drainage and erosion control protection to ensure the integrity of the foundation
material for the temporary works supports.

If piles are used, capacities may be estimated and later confirmed during construction using standard
procedures based on the driving characteristics of the pile. Use the dynamic formula according to
Section 551 to determine ultimate pile capacity in the absence of more sophisticated methods of
determining pile capacity. The Contractor may use load tests to confirm the estimated capacities.
Perform load tests to verify proposed bearing capacity values that are in doubt, marginal, or in other
high risk situations.

Section 562 – Temporary Works 471

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

562.06 Construction. Construct temporary works according to the approved drawings and the
AASHTO Construction Handbook for Bridge Temporary Works. Use material and workmanship
consistent with that assumed in the design of the temporary works.

Do not weld or use driven devices to fasten temporary works to any portion of the permanent structure
unless shown on the approved drawings.

Furnish and place form panels for exposed surfaces in uniform widths of not less than 900 millimeters
and in uniform lengths of not less than 1.8 meters except where the width of the member formed is less
than 900 millimeters. Arrange panels in symmetrical patterns conforming to the general lines of the
structure. Place panels for vertical surfaces with the long dimension horizontal and with horizontal
joints level and continuous. Place panels with the long dimension parallel to the footing for walls with
sloping footings and that do not abut other walls. Align form panels on each side of the panel joint by
means of supports or fasteners common to both panels.

Devices may be cast into the concrete for later use in supporting forms or for lifting precast members.
Do not use driven devices for fastening forms or form supports to concrete. Use form ties consisting of
form bolts, clamps, or other devices necessary to prevent spreading of the forms during concrete
placement. Do not use form ties consisting of twisted wire loops.

Make the angle points for chords in wall stems fall at vertical rustication joints when architectural
treatment is required. Form exposed curved surfaces to follow the shape of the curve except on
retaining walls that follow a horizontal curve. The wall stems may be a series of short chords if all of
the following apply:

(a) Chords within the panel are the same length;

(b) Chords do not vary from a true curve by more than 13 millimeters at any point; and

(c) All panel points are on the true curve.

Provide tell-tales with surveyed measurements, or other acceptable means, for accurate measurement
of falsework settlement. Do not use the ground surface near falsework supports as a reference
elevation. Record settlement to the nearest 3 millimeters during concrete placement.

Discontinue concrete placement and take corrective action if settlement or deflections occur that
deviate more than 10 millimeters from those shown on the falsework drawings. If satisfactory
corrective action is not taken before initial set, remove unacceptable concrete.

562.07 Maintenance and Inspection. Inspect and maintain temporary works in an acceptable
condition. Clearly mark the capacity on each manufactured component according to FHWA-RD-93-
033 Certification Program for Bridge Temporary Works.

Perform an in-depth inspection of the temporary works in the presence of the Engineer not more than
24 hours before beginning each concrete placement, or before allowing people to enter a cofferdam or
excavation support structure. Perform inspections and provide certifications according to FHWA-RD-
93-033 Certification Program for Bridge Temporary Works. Submit written results of the inspections
before:

(a) Placing concrete;

Section 562 – Temporary Works 472

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Allowing people to enter a cofferdam or excavation support structure; or

(c) Loading temporary works.

Inspect other temporary works at least once a month to ensure they are functioning properly. Use a
registered professional engineer to inspect cofferdams, shoring, support of excavation structures, and
support systems for load tests before loading.

Include a certification that the system meets the requirements.

562.08 Removal. Remove temporary works except as follows:

(a) Portions of driven falsework piles that are more than 300 millimeters below subgrade within
roadbeds, 600 millimeters below the original ground or finished grade outside of roadbeds, or 600
millimeters below the established limits of any navigation channel;

(b) Footing forms where their removal would damage the structural integrity of the cofferdams or
other work; and

(c) Forms from enclosed cells where access is not provided.

Remove temporary works as to permit the structure to uniformly and gradually take the stresses due to
its own dead-load.

Remove temporary works upon completion of the work unless permitted to remain. Do not disturb or
damage the finished work. Remove debris and restore the area to its original or planned condition. The
removed temporary works remain the property of the Contractor.

After the concrete has been in place for 24 hours, removal of railing and barrier forms and forms that
do not support the dead load of concrete members is permitted. Do not remove forms until the concrete
has reached at least 3.5 megapascals strength and in a manner that produces no damage to the surface.
Cure concrete according to Subsection 552.15 when forms are removed less than 7 days after concrete
placement.

Do not remove forms supporting the dead load of concrete members until the concrete has reached
90 percent of the design compressive strength and has been in place for at least 7 days.

Do not remove falsework supporting any span of a simple span bridge until the concrete, excluding
concrete above the bridge deck, has reached 90 percent of the design compressive strength and has
been in-place at least 10 days.

Do not remove falsework supporting any span of a continuous or rigid frame bridge until the concrete
in that span and in the adjacent portions of each adjoining span for a length equal to at least one-half
the length of the span where the falsework is to be released meets the requirements for simple span
bridges.

Do not release falsework for post-tensioned portions of structures until the prestressing steel has been
tensioned.

Remove falsework for arch bridges uniformly and gradually. Begin at the crown and work toward the
springing points. Remove falsework for adjacent arch spans simultaneously.

Section 562 – Temporary Works 473

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Install a reshoring system if falsework supporting the sides of girder stems with slopes steeper than
1V:1H are removed before placing deck slab concrete. Design the reshoring system with lateral
supports, which resist rotational forces acting on the stem, including those caused by the placement of
deck slab concrete. Install the lateral supports immediately after each form panel is removed and before
release of supports for the adjacent form panel.

562.09 Acceptance. Temporary works will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02, 106.03, and
106.04.

Measurement and Payment

562.10 Do not measure temporary works for payment. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 562 – Temporary Works 474

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 563. — PAINTING

Description

563.01 This work consists of removing paints and applying protective paints to metal, wood or
concrete surfaces to control corrosion and deterioration.

Material

563.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsection:

Paint 719
Water 725.01(a)

Construction Requirements

563.03 Qualifications. Provide the following:

(a) Painting Contractors certified .

(b) Competent personnel according to SSPC-QP 2 with the following:

(1) SSPC Competent Person Certificate;

(2) Certificate of completion of 29 CFR 1926.62 Lead in Construction training;
(3) Minimum of 2 years industrial field painting experience; and
(4) Minimum of 90 days of field supervisory or management experience in paint removal
projects.
563.04 Submittals. Submit a written plan for approval at least 14 days before beginning work that
details the measures to be used for protecting the environment, public, adjacent property, and
workers. Include the following:

(a) Manufacturer’s material safety data sheets and product data sheets for cleaning and painting
products.

(b) A detailed containment plan for removed material, cleaning products and paint.

Design and construct safe containment structures that will support the loads imposed. Do not apply
loads to the existing structure in excess of the load carrying capacity of any part of the structure.
Include details of attachment. Make connections that do not require welding or drilling holes in the
existing structure. Make connections with clamps or other approved devices. Submit working
drawings and construction details according to Subsection 104.03.

(c) A detailed disposal plan for removed material, used cleaning products, and paint debris.

(d) Specific safety measures to protect workers from site hazards including falls, fumes, fires, or
explosions.

(e) Emergency spill procedures.

Section 563 – Painting 475

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(f) Certifications and experience according to Subsection 563.03

563.05 Protection of Public, Property, and Workers. Comply with SSPC-PA Guide 10 − Guide to
Safety and Health Requirements for Industrial Painting Projects..

If a hazardous material containing lead or chromium is removed, comply with the following:

(a) SSPC Guide 6 – Guide for Containing Surface Preparation Debris Generated During Paint
Removal Operations;

(b) SSPC Guide 7 – Guide to the Disposal of Lead-Contaminated Surface Preparation Debris;

Collect and dispose of material including waste water that is used in preparing, cleaning, or painting
according to Subsection 107.01.

563.06 Protection of the Work. Use tarps, screens, paper, cloth, or other suitable means to protect
adjacent surfaces that are not to be painted. Prevent contamination of freshly painted surfaces by dust,
oil, grease, or other harmful or deleterious material.

563.07 General. Perform work according to the accepted plan in Subsection 563.04. Stop work and
take corrective action if the measures fail to perform as intended.

(a) Surface preparation. Notify the Engineer at least 7 days before beginning operations.
Perform the following:

(1) Remove dirt, dust, and other contaminants from the surface using methods recommended
by the paint manufacture; and
(2) Clean the surface to the specified cleanliness level.
(b) Paint. Conform to the following:

(1) Storing and handling. Use safe handling practices conforming to the manufacturer’s safety
and product data sheet. Store paint in original unopened containers with labels intact and in
weather-tight spaces where temperature is maintained between 4 and 38 °C. Do not open paint
containers until required for application that day. Do not use paint from a punctured container
or from a container with its lid seal broken. Do not use paint with an expired shelf life.
Mix paint according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Mix paint with mechanical
mixers for sufficient time to thoroughly blend the pigment and solvent together. Continue the
mixing during application. Do not thin paint that is formulated ready for application. Strain
paint after mixing except where application equipment is provided with strainers. Use strainers
of a size to remove only skins and undesirable matter but not to remove the pigment. Where a
skin has formed in the container, cut the skin loose from the sides of the container and remove
and discard it. If the volume of the skin is visually estimated to be more than 2 percent of the
remaining paint, discard the paint.
(2) Application. Thoroughly dry the surface to be painted. Apply paint according to the
manufacturer’s recommendations. If no information is provided, apply paint when:
• The surface temperature is between 10 and 40 ºC;

Section 563 – Painting 476

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

• The surface temperature is 3 ºC or more above the dew point according to

ASTM D4230; and
• The humidity is 85 percent or less, unless specified otherwise on the manufacturer’s
product data sheet.
Provide a controlled environment to meet requirements when necessary.

Apply paint by brush, spray, roller, or any combination permitted by the manufacturer’s
product data sheet.
(a) Brushes. Use brushes with sufficient bristle body and length to spread the paint in a
uniform film. Use round, oval shaped brushes, or flat brushes no wider than 4½ inches
(120 millimeters). Evenly spread and thoroughly brush out the paint as it is applied.
(b) Sprayers. Use airless or conventional spray equipment with suitable traps, filters, or
separators to exclude oil and water from the compressed air. Use compressed air that does
not show black or wet spots when tested according to ASTM D4285. Use the spray gun tip
sizes and pressures recommended by the manufacturer.
(c) Rollers. Select rollers and covers suitable for the surface and paint to be applied. Use
rollers only on flat, even surfaces. Do not use rollers that leave a stippled texture in the
paint film.
Use sheepskin daubers, bottle brushes, or other acceptable methods to paint surfaces that are
inaccessible for painting by regular means.
Paint in a neat and workmanlike manner that does not produce excessive paint build-up, runs,
sags, skips, holidays, or thin areas in the paint film. Correct thin areas, skips, holidays, and
other deficiencies before the next application of paint.
Tint succeeding applications of paint to contrast with the paint being covered. Obtain color
approval for the finish coat before application.
Paint surfaces that will be inaccessible after erection with the full number of undercoats
required before erection. After erection, thoroughly clean areas where the undercoating is
damaged or deteriorated, and spot coat these with the specified undercoats to the required
thickness before applying the final coat.
Measure the wet film thickness during application and adjust the application rate to obtain the
required dry film thickness.
(3) Curing. Cure each coat of paint according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
563.08 Structural Iron and Steel.

(a) Surface preparation.

(1) New surfaces or surfaces with existing paint removed. Remove dirt, mill scale, rust,
and other foreign material from exposed surfaces by blast cleaning to near white metal
according to SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2 – Near-White Blast Cleaning. Prepare surfaces
inaccessible to near-white metal blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP 11 – Power Tool
Cleaning to Bare Metal.

Section 563 – Painting 477

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Use compressed air without oil or moisture when tested according to ASTM D4285. Do not
use unwashed sand or abrasives that contain salts, dirt, oil, or other foreign matter. Protect
machinery, sealed bearings, journals, motors, and moving parts against entry of abrasive dust.
Blast clean with clean dry slag, mineral grit, steel shot, or steel grit. Use a suitable gradation
to produce a dense, uniform anchor pattern. Produce an anchor profile height of 1 to 2 mils
(25 to 50 micrometers), but not less than that recommended by the paint system
manufacturer’s product data sheet. Measure anchor profile height according to
ASTM D4417, method C.
Remove dirt, dust, and other debris from the surface by vacuuming or other approved
methods. Apply primer to bare metal surfaces within three days of cleaning. Repeat the blast
cleaning if the cleaned surfaces rust or become contaminated before painting.
(2) Surfaces with existing sound paint. Do not remove sound paint unless specified. Protect
adjacent areas of work from damage.
Clean visible oil, grease, and road tar according to SSPC SP 1 – Solvent Cleaning.
Prepare surfaces according to:
(a) NACE WJ-1/SSPC-SP WJ-1 Waterjet Cleaning of Metals – Clean to Bare Substrate
(WJ-1); or
(b) SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4 – Brush-Off Blast Cleaning.
Prepare surfaces inaccessible to water jetting or brush-off blasting according to SSPC-SP
15 - Commercial Grade Power Tool Cleaning.
(3) Surface with unsound paint. Perform spot abrasive blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP
6 – Commercial Blast Cleaning. Provide a sharp angular surface profile by an abrasive
blasting procedure. Produce a minimum profile of 5 micrometers or the paint manufacturer’s
recommendation, whichever is greater.
Extend the prepared area at least 50 millimeters into adjacent tightly adhering, intact coating.
Feather edges of tightly adherent existing paint to produce a smooth appearance when
repainting the surface.
Repeat solvent and surface cleaning if surfaces rust or become contaminated before painting.
Before painting, clean surfaces and staging areas with a vacuum or other approved methods.
(b) Paint application. Apply each coat to the wet film thickness as recommended by the paint
manufacturer to obtain the specified dry film thickness. Verify the application rate of each coat
with a wet film paint thickness gauge immediately after applying paint to the surface. Confirm
the application rate by measuring the dry film thickness after the solvent has evaporated from the
surface.

(1) New surfaces or surfaces with existing paint removed. Furnish a paint system shown in
Table 563.1.

Section 563 – Painting 478

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 563.1
Structural Iron and Steel Painting Systems for
New Surfaces or Surfaces with Existing Paint Removed

Paint System
Primer Intermediate Finish
(1)
1 Aggressive Zinc-Rich Epoxy-Polyamide Aliphatic
Environments paint (SSPC–Paint 22) polyurethane
(Salt) (SSPC–Paint 50 – 75 µm dry (SSPC–Paint 36)
20) 50 – 75 µm dry
65 – 90 µm dry
2 (1) Aggressive Zinc-Rich Zinc-Rich Moisture-cured
Environments Moisture-cured Moisture-cured polyurethane
(Salt) polyurethane polyurethane (SSPC–Paint 38)
(SSPC–Paint (SSPC–Paint 40) 50 – 75 µm dry
40) 50 – 75 µm dry
50 – 75 µm dry
3 (2) Less Latex primer Latex Latex
Aggressive (SSPC–Paint (SSPC–Paint 24) (SSPC–Paint 24)
Environments 23) 50 – 75 µm dry 50 – 75 µm dry
(No Salt) 50 – 75 µm dry
(1) Systems 1 or 2 are for the corrosion protection of iron and steel in aggressively corrosive
atmospheric environments such as marine, industrial, high humidity, or structures exposed to deicing
salts.
(2) System 3 is for use in those environments free from high concentrations of salts or pollutants that
cause aggressive corrosion environments.

(2) Surfaces with existing sound paint. Furnish a paint system shown in Table 563.2.

Section 563 – Painting 479

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 563.2
Structural Iron and Steel Painting Systems for
Surfaces with Existing Sound Paint

Paint System
Primer (1) Intermediate Finish
4 (2) Aggressive Moisture-cured Moisture-cured Moisture-cured
Environments Polyurethane Polyurethane Aliphatic
(Salt) (SSPC–Paint 40 (SSPC–Paint 41) Polyurethane
or 41) 50 – 75 µm dry (SSPC–Paint 38)
50 – 75 µm dry or Aliphatic
Polyurethane
(SSPC-Paint 36)
50 – 75 µm dry
5 (2) Aggressive Epoxy- Epoxy-Polyamide Epoxy-Polyamide
Environments Polyamide (SSPC–Paint 22) (SSPC–Paint 22)
(Salt) (SSPC–Paint 75 – 100 µm dry 75 – 100 µm dry
22)
75 – 100 µm
dry
6 (3) Less Aggressive Zinc Oxide, Alkyd Silicone Alkyd
Environments Alkyd, (SSPC–Paint 104) (SSPC–Paint 21,
(No Salt) Linseed Oil 50 – 75 µm dry Type II)
Primer 50 – 75 µm dry
(SSPC–Paint
25,
Type II)
50 – 75 µm dry
(1) Use primer only on areas where paint is removed to bare metal. Otherwise apply only
Intermediate and Top Coats.
(2) Systems 4 or 5 are for the corrosion protection of iron and steel in aggressively corrosive
atmospheric environments such as marine, industrial, high humidity, or structures exposed to deicing
salts.
(3) System 6 is for use in those environments without high concentrations of salts or pollutants that
cause aggressive corrosion environments.

Verify the compatibility of the proposed system with the existing system as follows:

(a) Select a test area of at least 3 square meters in a condition representative of the
condition of the structure. Perform the specified level of surface preparation, and apply
the proposed system to the existing topcoat and to the existing primer. Perform tests
according to ASTM D5064. Observe for lifting, bleeding, blistering, wrinkling, cracking,
flaking, or other evidence of incompatibility.
(b) Verify that no indication of incompatibility exists at least 14 days after the application
of each product. Perform adhesion tests according to ASTM D4541 self-aligning system.
Notify the Engineer if failure is due to adhesion (between coating and substrate or
between applied coats) or cohesion (failure within a coating layer). If failure occurs,
choose a more compatible paint system and repeat the compatibility process.

Section 563 – Painting 480

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

The dry paint thickness on steel structures will be determined using a Type 2 (electronic) film thickness
gauge according to SSPC-PA 2 – Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages, an
ultrasonic coating thickness gage according to SSPC - PA 9 Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness
on Cementitious Substrates, or by using destructive methods according to ASTM D4138. If destructive
methods are used, repair test locations in an approved manner.

563.09 Lumber and Timber. Dry timber to a moisture content of 15 percent or less.

Remove cracked or peeled paint, loose chalky paint, dirt, and other foreign material on previously
painted timber. Use wire brushing, scraping, or other approved methods.

On timber treated with water borne preservative, wash and brush away visible salt crystals on the wood
surface. Allow wood to dry before painting.

Remove dust or other foreign material from the surface just before painting.

Furnish a paint system shown in Table 563.3.

The primer may be applied before erection. Fill cracks, checks, nail holes, or other depressions flush
with the surface using approved putty after the primer dries and the timber is in place. Evenly spread
and thoroughly work the paint into corners and recesses. Allow the full thickness of the applied coat of
paint to dry before applying the next coat.

Section 563 – Painting 481

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 563.3
Paint Systems for Other Structural Materials
Paint System
Substrate
Primer Intermediate Finish
Lumber & Timber Exterior Alkyd/Oil Exterior Latex (MPI 5) Exterior Latex (MPI 5)
(Dressed Surface) Wood Primer or Alkyd/Oil (MPI 6) or Alkyd/Oil (MPI 6)
(MPI 5) Wood Primer Wood Primer
60 – 70 µm dry 35 – 50 µm dry 35 – 50 µm dry
Lumber & Timber Exterior Latex (MPI 5) Exterior Latex (MPI 5) Exterior Latex (MPI 5)
(Rough Surface) or Alkyd/Oil (MPI 6) or Alkyd/Oil (MPI 6) or Alkyd/Oil (MPI 6)
Wood Primer Wood Primer Wood Primer
35 – 50 µm dry 35 – 50 µm dry 35 – 50 µm dry
Masonry Block Exterior Latex Exterior Latex Exterior Latex
Masonry Block Primer Flat (MPI 10) or Flat (MPI 10) or
(MPI 4) Semi-Gloss (MPI 11) Semi-Gloss (MPI 11)
60 – 70 µm dry 35 – 50 µm dry 35 – 50 µm dry
Concrete Epoxy Single Coat Low Gloss (MPI 108) or Semi-Gloss (MPI 177)
80 – 100 µm dry.
Aluminum Metal Primer Light Industrial Coating, Light Industrial
(MPI 95) Exterior, Water-Based Coating,
35 – 50 µm dry (MPI 161, 163, or 164) Exterior, Water-Based
35 – 50 µm dry (MPI 161, 163, or 164)
35 – 50 µm dry
Other Metals Metal primer (1) Exterior Latex (MPI 5) Exterior Latex (MPI 5)
35 – 50 µm dry or Alkyd/Oil (MPI 6) or Alkyd/Oil (MPI 6)
Wood Primer Wood Primer
35 – 50 µm dry 35 – 50 µm dry
(1) For galvanized surfaces, use a vinyl wash primer (SSPC–Paint 27), 0.3 to 0.5 mil (8 to 13
micrometers) dry thickness.

563.10 Masonry Block and Concrete Structures. Remove laitance, dust, or other deleterious
material from the concrete surface. Give the cleaned surface a light abrasive sweep to remove mortar
wash or other contaminants. Remove residue and dust by vacuuming or other approved methods.

Furnish a paint system shown in Table 563.3.

Evenly spread and thoroughly work the paint into corners and recesses. Allow the full thickness of the
applied coat of paint to dry before applying the next coat.

563.11 Other Metals. Furnish the paint system shown in Table 563.3.

(a) Aluminum. Prepare aluminum surfaces to be painted according to ASTM D1730. Use the type
of treatment and method of preparation appropriate to the condition of the surface and paint to be
applied.

(b) Galvanized surfaces. Prepare galvanized surfaces to be painted according to ASTM D6386.
Use the method of preparation appropriate to the condition of the surface to be painted (newly
galvanized, partially weathered, or weathered galvanized steel).

563.12 Acceptance. Paint material will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03. Sample
paint according to ASTM D3925. Test paint properties according to FED-STD 141D, Paint, Varnish,

Section 563 – Painting 482

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Lacquer And Related Materials: Methods Of Inspection, Sampling And Testing if required.

Surface preparation will be evaluated under Subsection 106.02.

Painting application will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

563.13 Measure the Section 563 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

563.14 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 563 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 563 – Painting 483

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 564. — BEARING DEVICES

Description

564.01 This work consists of furnishing and installing bridge bearings.

Bearing devices are designated as elastomeric, rocker, roller, and sliding plate.

Material
564.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsections:

Bearings (elastomeric, plain or laminated) 717.10(a)

Bolts and nuts (threaded anchor bolts) 717.01(d)
Galvanized coatings 717.07
Nonshrink grout 725.13(b)
Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) surfaces for bearings 717.11
Steel Structures (rocker, roller, and sliding bearings) 555

Construction Requirements

564.03 General.

(a) Drawings. Submit drawings according to Subsection 104.03 and Section 18 of the AASHTO
Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) Bridge Construction Specification. Show details of
bearings including material proposed for use. Do not begin fabrication until drawings are approved
by the Engineer.

(b) Fabrication. Fabricate bearings according to Section 18 of AASHTO LRFD Bridge

Construction Specification. Finish bearing components surfaces in contact with each other or with
concrete, but not embedded in concrete according to Subsection 555.07(e).

Preassemble bearing assemblies and check for proper completeness and geometry. Galvanize steel
bearing components and anchor bolts. Do not galvanize stainless steel bearing components or
anchor bolts.

(c) Packaging, handling, and storage. Clearly identify each bearing component and mark on its
top the location and orientation in the structure before shipping. Securely bolt, strap, or otherwise
fasten bearings to prevent relative movement.

Package bearings to prevent damage during shipping handling, or storage.

Do not dismantle bearing assemblies on-site unless necessary for inspection or installation.
Dismantle under the direct supervision or with the approval of the manufacturer.

Furnish a listing of all individual bearing numbers.

Store bearing devices to prevent damage from weather or other hazards.

(d) Construction and installation. Clean bearings of deleterious substances. Install and set
bearings to the dimensions shown on the drawings or prescribed by the manufacturer. Adjust

Section 564 – Bearing Devices 484

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

bearings according to the manufacturer’s instructions to compensate for installation temperature

and future movements.

Set bearings level, at the elevation, and position shown on the drawings. Provide full and even
bearing on all external bearing contact surfaces. Notify the Engineer if bearing surfaces are at
improper elevations, not level, or if bearings cannot be set properly. Submit a written proposal to
modify the installation for approval.

Bed metallic bearing assemblies on concrete with an approved filler or fabric material when not
embedded in concrete.

Set elastomeric bearing pads directly on properly prepared concrete surfaces without bedding
material.

Machine bearing surfaces seated directly on steel to provide a level and planar bearing surface.

564.04 Elastomeric Bearings. Fabricate, comply with testing and acceptance criteria, and mark
elastomeric bearings according to AASHTO M 251. Test and accept bearings specified by hardness
and designed according to Method A of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications according to
Appendix X1 of AASHTO M 251 instead of Section 8 full size bearing test.

Place bearings on a level surface. Correct any misalignment in the support to form a level surface. Do
not weld steel girders or base plates to the exterior plates of the bearing unless there is more than
38 millimeters of steel between the weld and elastomer. Do not expose the elastomer or elastomer bond
to instantaneous temperatures greater than 200 °C.

564.05 Rocker, Roller, and Sliding Plate Bearings. Fabricate and finish rocker, roller, and sliding
plate bearings according to Section 555. Remove burrs, rough and sharp edges, and other flaws. Stress
relieve rocker, roller, and other bearings that are built up by welding sections of plate together before
boring, straightening, or final machining.

Thoroughly coat contact surfaces with oil and graphite before placing roller bearings. Install rocker,
roller, and sliding bearings vertically at the specified mean temperature after release of falsework and
after any shortening due to prestressing forces. Account for any variation from mean temperature of the
supported span at time of installation and any other anticipated changes in length of the supported span.

Ensure the superstructure has full and free movement at movable bearings. Position cylindrical
bearings so their axes of rotation align and coincide with the axis of rotation of the superstructure.

564.06 Masonry, Sole, and Shim Plates for Bearings. Provide metal plates conforming to AASHTO
M 270, Grade 36 (Grade 250).

Fabricate and finish steel according to Section 555. Form holes in bearing plates by drilling, punching,
or controlled oxygen cutting. Remove burrs by grinding.

Set bearing plates in a level position and provide a uniform bearing over the bearing contact area.
When plates are embedded in concrete, make provisions to keep them in correct position as the
concrete is placed.

564.07 Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Surfaces for Bearings. Furnish PTFE material that is
factory-bonded, mechanically connected, or recessed into the backup material.

Section 564 – Bearing Devices 485

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Bond or mechanically attach the fabric containing PTFE fibers to a rigid substrate. Use a fabric capable
of carrying unit loads of 70 megapascals without cold flow. Use a fabric-substrate bond capable of
withstanding, a shear force equal to 10 percent of the perpendicular or normal application loading plus
any other bearing shear forces without delamination.

Use approved test methods and procedures according to Section 18 of AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Construction Specification. Perform at least one material test on the materials used in the sliding
surface for each lot of bearings. If required by the contract, test complete bearings for complete bearing
friction. If the test facility does not permit testing of completed bearings; manufacture extra bearings
and prepare samples of at least 450-kilonewton capacity at normal working stresses by sectioning the
bearing.

Measure the coefficient of friction between two mating surfaces. Provide test results showing the static
and dynamic coefficients of friction meet the requirements for the design coefficient of friction
specified in the contract or by the manufacturer for approved material.

564.08 Anchor Bolts. Furnish threaded anchor bolts.

Adjust bolt locations for superstructure temperature and anticipated lengthening of bottom chord or
bottom flange due to dead load after setting as required. Do not restrict free movement of the
superstructure at movable bearings.

Preset anchor bolts before concrete placement or install anchor bolts in drilled holes after concrete
placement. Drill holes 25 millimeters in diameter greater than the bolt if nonshrink cement grout is
used to secure the bolts. Follow adhesive manufacturer’s recommendations for hole-diameter if an
approved chemical adhesive is used to secure the bolts.

564.09 Bedding of Masonry Plates. Clean the contact surfaces of the concrete and steel before
placing the bedding material and installing bearings or masonry plates. If bedding is specified, place
filler or fabric as bedding material under masonry plates and install it to provide full bearing on contact
areas. If bedding material is not specified, comply with Subsection 18.10.2 of AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Construction Specifications as directed by the Engineer.

564.10 Acceptance. Bearing devices will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03. Furnish a
production certification with each shipment of bearing devices.

Bearing device installation will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

564.11 Measure the Section 564 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

564.12 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 564 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 564 – Bearing Devices 486

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 565. — DRILLED SHAFTS

Description

565.01 This work consists of furnishing and constructing reinforced concrete drilled shaft foundations.

Material

565.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsections:

Neat hydraulic cement grout 725.13(a)(2)

Reinforcing steel 709.01
Slurry 725.16
Structural carbon steel (Casings) 717.01(a)
Structural concrete 552
Water 725.01(a)

Construction Requirements

565.03 Qualifications. Provide a crosshole sonic logging engineer, on-site supervisors, and
installation personnel with experience installing and testing drilled shafts. Submit the following for
approval at least 30 days before starting work:

(a) Names of personnel; and

(b) A résumé for each individual describing their experience on at least 5 drilled shaft projects of
similar complexity over the past 5 years. Include project names, locations and contact information
for project owners.

565.04 Construction Plan. At least 30 days before starting drilled shaft work, submit the following
according to Subsection 104.03:

(a) Proposed drilled shaft construction schedule and sequence. Schedule shaft installation to
avoid interconnection or damage to shafts in which placed concrete has not achieved final set.

(b) Proposed drilling, hole cleaning/preparation, and reinforcement/concrete placement

equipment and procedures for the ground conditions expected to be encountered. Provide specific
shaft drilling and concreting procedures to mitigate problems associated with ground water,
surface water bodies, or both. Demonstrate an understanding of the subsurface conditions at the
site by referencing available subsurface data provided in the contract boring logs. Indicate
procedures to minimize disturbance to the construction site or any overlaying or adjacent
structure or services. Discuss potential drilling difficulties and indicate methods and tooling that
will be used to remove obstructions from the excavation.

(c) Proposed drilled shaft excavation and construction methods used to ensure shaft stability
during construction and reinforcement/concrete placement. Include proposed shaft drilling
procedures for maintaining required horizontal and vertical shaft alignment and a disposal plan
for excavated material. If shaft casing is required, provide casing dimensions and detailed
procedures for permanent casing installation or temporary casing installation and removal.

Section 565 – Drilled Shafts 487

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(d) Proposed methods for mixing, testing, circulating, using, maintaining, and disposing of
slurry, if used. Provide a detailed slurry mix design and its suitability to the subsurface
conditions.

(e) Details of reinforcement placement including bracing, centering, centralizers, and lifting and
support methods.

(f) Proposed structural concrete mix design according to Subsection 565.08.

(g) Concrete placement methods including proposed operational procedures for free fall, tremie,
or pumping methods.

(h) The method used to form an emergency horizontal construction joint during concrete
placement.

Specific guidance on installation of and construction plan requirements for drilled shafts can be
found in FHWA-NHI-10-016 Drilled Shafts: Construction Procedures and LRFD Design Methods.

565.05 Trial Drilled Shafts. When trial drilled shafts are required, perform the work according to the
applicable requirements of Subsection 565.06.

Before drilling holes for production shafts, demonstrate that the proposed methods and equipment are
adequate by drilling a trial drilled shaft adjacent to the production shafts at a location approved by the
Engineer. Make the center-to-center spacing between the trial shaft and production shafts at least 3
shaft diameters or 2 bell diameters, whichever is larger.

Construct the trial drilled shaft to the same size and to the tip elevation of the deepest production shaft
shown on the plans. When bells are specified for production shafts, include a bell in the final trial shaft
to verify the feasibility of belling in the specified bearing stratum.

Install casing if caving occurs or the hole deforms sufficient to encroach upon the planned placement
of the reinforcement cage with specified minimum concrete cover. Seat the casing to prevent caving
and to allow dewatering of the hole when required. Remove material from inside the hole. Keep casing
in place at least 4 hours while attempting to remove all water in the hole. Record the rate of
groundwater seepage into the hole. After this 4 hour period, fill the hole with saturated sand while the
casing is removed to simulate the concreting operation and casing removal for the production drilled
shafts.

Concrete or reinforcing steel is not required in the trial drilled shaft.

Modify methods and equipment if the trial drilled shaft does not meet performance requirements as
determined by the Engineer. Submit a new installation plan and drill a new trial shaft for approval.

565.06 Shaft Drilling.

(a) Drilling. Use a geologist or an engineer to maintain a boring log of materials excavated from
the drilled shaft. Include the following information:

• Description and approximate top and bottom elevation of each type of soil or rock
material encountered and the date and time the soil or rock material was encountered;
• Elevation and approximate rate of any seepage or groundwater encountered;

Section 565 – Drilled Shafts 488

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

• Equipment used to drill the shaft, time required to complete the shaft, bit changes,
breakdowns, and other drilling difficulties encountered; and
• Remarks.
Drill holes according to the approved installation plan. Excavate structural footings supported on
drilled shafts and construct fills before initiating shaft drilling.

Provide equipment and tooling with the capability to drill shafts of the specified diameter and
lengths 20 percent longer than those specified. Position the drilled shaft within 75 millimeters of
the required position in a horizontal plane at the top-of-shaft elevation. Do not allow the
constructed alignment of a vertical shaft to vary from the required alignment by more than
6 millimeters per 300 millimeters of hole depth.

Use the uncased dry construction method where groundwater level and soil conditions are suitable
to construct the shaft in a relatively dry-stable excavation and may be visually inspected before
placing concrete. Use casing, wet construction method, or both for shafts that do not meet the
requirements for the dry construction method.

(1) Dry method. This method consists of drilling the shaft, removing accumulated water and
loose material from the excavation, placing the reinforcing cage, and concreting the shaft in a
relatively dry excavation.
The dry construction method can only be used when the excavation meets the following:
(a) Less than 300 millimeters of water accumulates above the base of the hole during a 1-
hour period when no pumping is permitted;
(b) The sides and bottom of the hole remain stable without detrimental caving, sloughing,
or swelling over a 4-hour period immediately following completion of the excavation or
over-reaming when approved by Engineer; and
(c) Loose material and water can be satisfactorily removed before inspection and before
reinforcement and concrete placement.
(2) Wet method. This method consists of using water or slurry to maintain shaft stability
while advancing the excavation to final depth, placing the reinforcing cage, and concreting
the shaft. In addition, perform the following:
(a) Desanding and cleaning drilling slurry;
(b) Final cleaning of the excavation using a bailing bucket, air lift, submersible pump, or
other approved devices; and
(c) Placing shaft concrete with a tremie or concrete pump, beginning at the shaft bottom;
Maintain the drilled hole to the specified nominal diameter before placing reinforcement elements
and concrete. Increase the hole diameter at least 13 millimeters to a maximum of 75 millimeters
when approved by the Engineer if ground softening, swelling or slurry cake buildup occurs. Case
the hole, use a slurry during drilling, or both if the drilled hole continues to degrade and encroach
upon the planned placement of the reinforcement cage with specified minimum concrete cover.

Extend exterior casings from above the waterline to a subsurface elevation to protect against water
action during placement and curing of the concrete when drilled shafts are located in open waters.

Section 565 – Drilled Shafts 489

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Install the exterior casing in a manner that will provide a positive seal at the bottom of the casing to
prevent piping of water or entry of other material from the shaft excavation behind the casing.

Remove drill cuttings, other loose debris, or both from the bottom of the hole upon completion of
drilling. Clean the drilled hole leaving no more than 13 millimeters of sediment on the bottom of
the hole. Reduce the depth of accumulated water to 75 millimeters or less before placing concrete
in shafts constructed using the dry method.

Do not drill additional shafts, allow wheel loads, vibration-inducing equipment, or other
construction activities within 4.5 meters or 3 shaft diameters, whichever is greater, of a newly
constructed shaft for at least 20 hours.

Fill rejected drill holes with lean concrete.

(b) Slurry. Premix slurry with potable water according to the slurry manufacturer’s instructions to
allow for hydration before introduction into the shaft excavation. Use slurry tanks of adequate
capacity for slurry circulation, storage, and treatment. Do not use excavated slurry pits or the shaft
excavation to mix the slurry. Do not add slurry component directly into the shaft excavation.

Provide desanding equipment to limit slurry sand content as specified in Tables 565-1 and 565-2, at
any point within the shaft. Verify sand content immediately before placing concrete. Desanding is
not required for setting temporary casings, sign posts, or lighting mast foundations.

Maintain the level of slurry in the excavation at least 1.5 meters above the highest expected
adjacent piezometric water pressure head for mineral slurry, or 3 meters above the highest expected
piezometric water pressure head for polymer or water slurry.

Stop drilling and take corrective measures when there is a sudden loss of slurry from the hole.
Prevent the slurry from setting up in the shaft. Discontinue the use of slurry and use an approved
alternative method if the slurry construction method fails to produce the desired results.

Maintain density, viscosity, and pH of the mineral or polymer slurry throughout shaft excavation
and concrete placement according to Tables 565-1 and 565-2. Take slurry samples using an
approved sampling tool. Extract slurry samples from the base of the shaft and 3 meters up from the
base of the shaft. Perform 4 sets of tests during the first 8 hours of slurry use. The testing frequency
may be decreased to one test set for every 4 hours of slurry use when results are acceptable and
consistent.

Section 565 – Drilled Shafts 490

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 565.1
Acceptable Range of Values for Mineral Slurry
Property In Hole at Method
Time of Test
Concreting
Density Density balance
kilograms per cubic meter) 1025 - 115) API 13B-1, Section 1
Viscosity Marsh Funnel
seconds per liter 30 – 53 AP 13B-1, Section 2.2
pH 8 – 11 pH paper or meter
Sand Content, percent 4.0 max API 13B-1, Section 5
Density values shown are for fresh water. Increase density values 23 kilograms per cubic meter
for saltwater. Perform tests when slurry temperature is above 4.5 °C.

Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations and Table 565.2 test requirements for polymer
slurry. Submit the name and telephone number of the manufacturer’s representative to the
Engineer.

Table 565.2
Acceptable Range of Values for Polymer Slurry
Property In Hole at Method
Time of Test
Concreting
Density Density balance
kilograms per cubic meter 1025 max API 13B-1, Section 1
Viscosity Marsh Funnel
seconds per liter 34 – 143 AP 13B-1, Section 2.2
pH 8 – 11 pH paper or meter
Sand Content, percent 1.0 max API 13B-1, Section 5
Density values shown are for fresh water. Increase density values 23 kilograms per cubic meter
for saltwater. Perform tests when slurry temperature is above 4.5 °C.

Correct slurry when sample do not meet the requirements of Tables 565-1 or 565-2. Do not place
concrete until the results of the re-sampling and retesting are approved.

(c) Casings. Install temporary casing to prevent sloughing of the top of the shaft excavation, unless
it can be satisfactorily demonstrated to the Engineer that surface casing is not required. Install
temporary casing regardless of excavation method when sidewall conditions warrant additional
stabilization or mitigation of excessive groundwater infiltration.

Use smooth, clean, watertight, steel casings of sufficient strength to withstand handling, installation
stresses, concrete placement, and surrounding earth pressures. Casing diameters are outside
diameters when noted in the plans. The diameter of a permanent casing is subject to American

Section 565 – Drilled Shafts 491

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Petroleum Institute tolerances applicable to regular steel pipe. Make the outside diameter of the
casing no less than the specified size of the shaft.

Install casings to produce a positive seal at the bottom of the shaft to prevent piping of water or
other material into or out of the excavated hole. Stabilize the excavation with slurry, backfill, or
other methods approved by the Engineer if it becomes necessary to remove a casing. Maintain an
adequate head of water or slurry inside the casing to prevent piping or sloughing of material at the
bottom of the hole when drilling below the water table.

Subsurface casings are to be considered temporary unless designated as permanent casing. Remove
temporary casing concurrent with concrete placement. Maintain the concrete within the casing so
fluid trapped behind the casing is displaced upward and discharged at the ground surface without
contaminating or displacing the shaft concrete.

Temporary casings that have become bound or fouled during shaft construction and cannot be
practically removed are considered to be a defect in the drilled shaft. Correct defective shafts using
methods approved by the Engineer. Corrective action may consist of, but is not limited to, the
following:

(1) Removing the shaft concrete and extending the shaft deeper to compensate for loss of
frictional capacity in the cased zone;
(2) Providing straddle shafts to compensate for capacity loss; or
(3) Providing a replacement shaft.
Cut permanent casing off at the required elevation and leave in place

565.07 Reinforcing Steel and Crosshole Sonic Logging (CSL) Access Tubes Placement. Perform
reinforcing steel work according to Section 554. Securely wire together contact reinforcing steel lap
splices. Tie and support the reinforcing steel so it remains within the required tolerances. Securely tie
concrete spacers or other approved spacing devices at fifth points around the cage perimeter and space
at intervals not to exceed 3 meters along the length of the cage. Use spacers of approved material at
least equal in quality and durability to the shaft concrete.

Install steel CSL access tubes for each drilled shaft at locations specified and according to ASTM
D6760. Extend access tubes at least 600 millimeters above shaft top and a maximum of
75 millimeters above shaft bottom. Use schedule 40 mild steel standard black pipe conforming to
ASTM A53, any grade, Type E, F or S, 38 millimeters nominal diameter for CSL access tubes.
Provide a watertight end plug at the lower end of the pipe and make joints watertight. Fill the CSL
access tubes with potable water before placing concrete in the drilled shaft. Temporarily cap the top
of the tubes to prevent debris or concrete from entering the tubes.

Place the reinforcing steel cage as a unit immediately after the drilled hole is inspected, accepted, and
before concrete placement. Remove cage when directed by the Engineer for re-inspection if concrete is
not placed immediately. Handle reinforcing cages in a manner to avoid distortion or racking of the
steel.

Provide positive support at the top for the reinforcing steel cage during concrete placement. Maintain
the top of the reinforcing steel cage no more than 150 millimeters above and no more than
75 millimeters below the required elevation. Make acceptable corrections if the reinforcing steel cage

Section 565 – Drilled Shafts 492

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

is not maintained within tolerances. Do not construct additional shafts until the method of reinforcing
steel cage support has been approved.

Do not proceed with installation of subsequent shafts until CSL testing has been completed on the
first drilled shaft and the results have been approved in writing by the Engineer. Approval to proceed
with the construction of subsequent shafts, before receiving approval of the first shaft will be based
on observations of workmanship during construction of the first shaft and the following:

(a) The Contractor's conformance with the approved shaft installation plan. The Contractor's
daily reports and inspector's daily logs of excavation, rebar, and concrete placement; and

(b) The concrete placement logs and volume curves.

The Engineer will provide written notification to proceed with subsequent shaft construction within
24 hours after completion of the first shaft. If the Engineer determines the first shaft to be of
questionable quality, discontinue all shaft construction until the CSL test results of the first shaft are
received and reviewed and the shaft accepted in writing by the Engineer.

After the first drilled shaft has been accepted, do not change construction methods, equipment, or
materials used to construct subsequent shafts, unless otherwise approved.

565.08 Concrete for Drilled Shafts. Use a removable form or other approved means to form the shaft
to at least 600 millimeters below finished ground when the top of shaft is above ground. Forms may be
removed provided the requirements in Subsection 562.07 are complied with and the shaft concrete has
not been exposed to saltwater or moving water for 7 days. Strip the forms without damaging the
concrete.

Remove the top portion of the drilled shaft concrete before continuing with column construction when
it is determined the concrete has been affected by underwater placement.

Place concrete immediately after excavation is complete and the reinforcing steel cage with CSL
access tubes is in place.

Furnish concrete conforming to Section 552, except:

• Use Class A structural concrete having a slump of 180±25 millimeters for shafts constructed
without drilling fluid;

• Class A structural concrete having a slump of 200±25 millimeters for shafts constructed with
drilling fluid; and

• Seal concrete for under water placement.

Do not use seal concrete above the freeze-thaw or wet-dry zone of the hole. Place underwater concrete
according to Subsection 552.11(e), except as modified in this Section. The method of underwater
placement is subject to Engineer approval.

Adjust approved admixtures for project conditions to ensure that the concrete has the minimum
required slump for at least 2 hours. Submit trial mix and slump loss test results for concrete at ambient
temperatures appropriate for site conditions.

Section 565 – Drilled Shafts 493

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Place each load of concrete within 2 hours of batching. Longer placement time may be permitted if the
concrete mix maintains the minimum required slump for longer than 2 hours. Do not retemper concrete
that has developed its initial set.

Place concrete in one continuous operation from bottom to top of the shaft.

Continue placing concrete after the shaft excavation is full and until acceptable quality concrete is
evident at the top of shaft. Consolidate the top 3 meters of the shaft concrete using acceptable vibratory
equipment before initial concrete set. Finish the top of the shaft to within +25 millimeters to -75
millimeters of the required elevation. Do not consolidate shaft concrete until water or slurry above the
finish concrete level has been removed.

Place concrete using the following methods:

(a) Free-fall. Use free-fall placement only in dry holes. Ensure the concrete falls directly to the
shaft base without contacting either the rebar cage or shaft sidewall.

Drop chutes may be used to direct placement of free-fall concrete. Drop chutes consist of a smooth
tube of either one-piece construction or sections that can be added and removed. Support the drop
chute so that the maximum height of free-fall of the concrete measured from the bottom of the
chute is 8 meters. Reduce the height of free-fall or rate of concrete flow into the excavation if
concrete placement causes the shaft excavation to cave or slough, strikes the rebar cage or sidewall.
Use tremie or pumping to place the concrete if placement cannot be satisfactorily accomplished by
free-fall placement.

(b) Tremies. Use tremies for concrete placement in either wet or dry holes. A tremie consists of a
hopper and tube of sufficient length, mass, and diameter to discharge concrete at the shaft base. Do
not use tremies that contain aluminum parts that will come in contact with the concrete. Furnish a
tremie tube with clean and smooth inside and outside surfaces and sufficient wall thickness to
prevent crimping or sharp bends. Provide tubes with an inside diameter at least 6 times the
maximum size of aggregate used in the concrete mix, but not less than 250 millimeters. Use a
watertight tremie according to Subsection 552.11(e) for wet holes. Construct the discharge end of
the tremie to permit free radial flow of concrete during placement. Place the tremie discharge at the
shaft base elevation. Place the concrete in a continuous flow. Keep the tremie discharge immersed
at least 3 meters below the surface of the fluid concrete. Maintain a positive head of concrete in the
tremie at all times. If the tremie discharge is removed from the fluid concrete column and
discharges concrete above the rising concrete surface into displaced water; remove the reinforcing
cage and concrete, complete necessary sidewall removal as directed, and reconstruct the shaft.

(c) Pumps. Use pumped concrete placement in either wet or dry holes. Use a 100-millimeters
minimum diameter discharge tube with watertight joints. Place the discharge tube at the shaft base
elevation.

Use a sealed discharge tube according to Subsection 552.11(e) for wet holes. If a plug is used,
remove it from the hole or use a plug made from approved material that will prevent a defect in the
shaft if not removed.

Place the concrete in a continuous flow. Keep the pump discharge tube immersed at least
1.5 meters below the surface of the fluid concrete. Remove the reinforcing cage and concrete if the

Section 565 – Drilled Shafts 494

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

discharge tube is removed from the fluid concrete column and discharges concrete into displaced
water. Complete necessary sidewall removal as directed by the Engineer, and reconstruct the shaft.

565.09 Integrity Testing.

(a) Testing. Perform integrity testing on all production drilled shafts according to ASTM D6760.
Test drilled shafts between 2 days and 21 days after concrete placement. Furnish drilled shaft
bottom and tip elevations, access tube lengths, surveyed tube positions, and date of concrete
placement before testing to the CSL subcontractor and the Engineer. Perform tests between all
tube pairings in the shaft, including adjacent perimeter access tubes and diagonally between
tubes.

If any access tube is not acceptable for testing (e.g. tube is not plumb, tube does not retain water,
tube is obstructed, tube-concrete debonding has occurred); drill a plumb core hole to the
appropriate depth and install a fully-grouted replacement tube or propose an alternative integrity
test method that is acceptable to the Engineer.

Tremie fill access tubes with neat cement grout after integrity testing, inspection and data
analysis are completed and accepted by the Engineer.

(b) Test results and reporting. Submit preliminary results for each shaft tested before CSL test
personnel leave the site. Submit a detailed CSL report to the Engineer within 5 days of testing.
Allow 5 days for the Engineer to conduct a review of the data before continuing construction on the
tested shaft and before issuing the final written report. Include the following in the CSL report:

(1) Project identification and dates of CSL testing;

(2) Table and a schematic showing shafts tested with identification of tube coordinates and
collar elevation;
(3) Names of personnel that performed the CSL tests and interpretations and their affiliations;
(4) Type of equipment used for testing;
(5) Data logs and waterfall diagrams;
(6) X-Y plots of first arrival times, amplitude, and velocity versus shaft depth; and
(7) Interpretations, analyses, and results.
Identify and provide detailed discussion of each anomalous zone detected by the CSL. Anomalous
zones are areas where velocity reduction exceeds 20 percent of the average velocity of properly
placed and cured shaft concrete at the time of testing. Collect and process additional data sufficient
to construct three-dimensional color-coded tomographic-images with two-dimensional cross-
sections between tubes within anomalous zones.

565.10 Acceptance.

(a) Materials for drilled shafts will be evaluated as follows:

(1) Slurries will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

(2) Concrete will be evaluated under Section 552. Concrete, tremie placed or pumped, will be
sampled at point of discharge into the tremie or concrete pump hopper.

Section 565 – Drilled Shafts 495

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(3) Reinforcing steel will be evaluated under Section 554.

(b) Construction of drilled shafts will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02, 106.03, and 106.04
as follows:

(1) Drilled shafts exhibiting velocity reductions less than or equal to 20 percent of the average
velocity of properly placed and cured shaft concrete at the time of testing are acceptable.

(2) Where velocity reductions exceed 20 percent of the average velocity of properly placed and
cured shaft concrete at the time of testing, furnish additional imaging and other data required in
Subsection 565.09(b) to enable further evaluation of the shaft. Drill at least two core-holes to
intercept the anomalous zone and obtain core samples from the suspect area when required by
the Engineer. The Engineer will evaluate the crosshole sonic logging data, the tomographic
imaging data, and the retrieved core data and make a determination as to the presence of
substantive defects.

Remove and replace rejected shafts or propose alternatives according to Subsection 106.01. Submit
design modifications to drilled shafts or load transfer mechanisms, foundation elements, and
drawings according to Subsection 104.03(b)(2). Do not begin remedial work until drawings have
been approved by the Engineer.

Measurement

565.11 Measure the Section 565 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Measure drilled shafts from the plan top elevation to the approved tip. Do not measure portions of
shafts extending deeper than approved.

Do not measure concrete or reinforcing steel.

Measure trial drilled shafts, determined to be satisfactory, from the approved tip elevation to the
ground surface at the center of the shaft.

Payment

565.12 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 565 pay items listed in the bid schedule except the drilled shaft contract price will be adjusted
according to Subsection 106.05. Payment will be full compensation for the work prescribed in this
Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Payment for drilled shafts will be made at a price determined by multiplying the contract price by the
structural concrete compressive strength pay factor.

Section 565 – Drilled Shafts 496

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 566. — SHOTCRETE

Description

566.01 This work consists of constructing one or more courses of shotcrete on a prepared surface.

Shotcrete aggregate grading is designated according to Table 703.11.

Material

566.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Air-entraining admixture (wet mix only) 711.02

Anchorage devices 722.01
Chemical admixtures (wet mix only) 711.03
Concrete coloring agents 711.05
Curing material 711.01
Hydraulic cement 701.01
Penetrating stain 719.08
Pozzolans 725.04
Reinforcing fibers 725.17
Reinforcing steel 709.01
Shotcrete aggregate 703.16
Steel welded wire reinforcement 709.01(h)
Water 725.01(a)
Welded deformed steel wire fabric 709.01(j)

Construction Requirements

566.03 Qualifications. Submit the following for approval at least 30 days before shotcrete
operations begin:

(a) Foreman. Name and a résumé describing experience in shotcrete construction on at least
5 projects of similar complexity.

(b) Nozzle Operator. Name and a résumé describing experience in shotcrete construction and of
having completed at least one similar application as a nozzle operator on a project of similar
complexity.

566.04 Composition (Shotcrete Mix Design). Design and produce shotcrete mixtures that conform to
Table 566.1 and ACI 506.02, Specification for Shotcrete.

Verify mix design with trial mixes prepared from the same source proposed for use. Submit the
following for approval at least 30 days before placing shotcrete:

(a) Proposed shotcrete mix design with mix proportions and aggregate grading. When applicable,
include air content, dosage, and type of admixture.

(b) Representative samples of shotcrete material, if requested by the Engineer. Results of shotcrete
preconstruction testing demonstrating compliance with Table 566.1.

Section 566 – Shotcrete 497

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(c) Proposed method for applying shotcrete.

(d) Other information necessary to verify compliance with ACI 506.2.

(e) Shotcrete materials certifications.

(f) Fiber samples, if used.

(g) Description of proposed equipment for mixing and applying shotcrete. Include the
manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, literature, performance and test data. In addition,
conform to the equipment requirements in ACI 506 and include the following:

(1) Water supply system. For dry mix, provide a job site water storage tank. Provide a
positive displacement pump with a regulating valve that is accurately controlled to provide
water at the required pressure and volume.
(2) Mixing. Use equipment capable of handling and applying shotcrete containing the
specified maximum size aggregate and admixtures. Provide an air hose and blow pipe to clear
dust and rebound during shotcrete application.
566.05 Hydration Stabilizing Admixtures. When hydration stabilizing admixtures are used, include
the admixtures in the shotcrete mix design. Base dosage on the time needed to delay the initial set of
the shotcrete for delivery and discharge on the job. Include the design discharge time limit in the
dosage submittal. The maximum allowable design discharge time is 3.5 hours.

Use an approved and compatible hydration activator at the discharge site to ensure proper placement
and testing.

Determine dosage required to stabilize shotcrete using job site material and field trial mixtures. The
extended-set admixture will control the hydration of cement minerals and gypsum.

When requested, provide the service of a qualified person from the admixture manufacturer to assist in
establishing the proper dose of extended-set admixture and to make dosage adjustments required to
meet changing job site conditions.

Section 566 – Shotcrete 498

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 566.1(8)
Composition and Properties Requirements of Shotcrete Mixtures
Type of Minimum Maximum Air Minimum Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum
Shotcrete Cement Water- Content 28-Day Boiling Permeable Mean Core Water-Soluble
Process Content Cementitious Compressive Absorption Void Grade(2) (5) (7) Chloride Ion (Cl-)
(kg/m3) Materials Strength, f’c (2)((4)
Volume(2) (4) Content
Ratio (MPa) (2) (3) (%) (%) (% by Mass of
Cement)(2) (6) (7)
Wet 390 0.50 – 28 9 17 2.5 0.15
Grading A
7 %(1)
Wet (AE) 39) 0.45 28 9 17 2.5 0.15
Grading B
(1)
6%
Dry 390 0.40 – 28 9 17 2.5 0.15
(1) Sample according to ASTM C1385/C1385M. Measure air content on composite samples that have been acquired from material delivered to
the shotcrete machine before pumping according to AASHTO T 152 or AASHTO T 196. A tolerance of ± 1.5 percent is allowed. A minimum in-
place shotcrete air content of 4 percent is required after shooting.
(2) Prepare and cure test panels according to Subsection 566.06(a)(1). Drill 3-inch (75-millimeters) diameter cores according to Subsection
566.06(a)(2).
(3) Conduct and report compressive strength tests according to Subsection 566.06(a)(3). Calculate mean compressive core strength as the average
strength of at least three individual cores, taken from the same nonreinforced test panel. Every arithmetic average of any three consecutive mean
core strengths must equal or exceed 0.85 f’c with no individual core less than 0.75 f’c.
(4) Perform and report coating quality tests according to Subsection 566.06(a)(3). No individual test may be greater than the maximum specified.
(5) When shotcrete is applied over reinforcement, conduct and report core grading according to Subsection 566.06(a)(3). Calculate mean core
grade as the average of at least three individual core grades, taken from the same reinforced test panel. The mean core grade must not be greater
than the maximum mean core grade with no individual core grade greater than 3.
(6) When shotcrete is applied over reinforcement, perform and report water-soluble chloride ion (Cl-) content testing according to Subsection
566.06(a)(3). No individual test may be greater than the maximum specified.
(7) Perform during preconstruction testing only.
(8) Produce a mix with a cement to aggregate ratio, based on dry loose volumes, of not less than 1V:3.5H for the construction and repair of
concrete structures and for encasing steel members, and not less than 1V:5H for lining ditches and channels and for paving slopes. Use a water
content as low as practical so that mix is sufficiently wet to adhere properly and sufficiently dry so that it will not sag or fall from vertical or
inclined surfaces or separate in horizontal work.

Section 566 – Shotcrete 499

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

566.06 Preconstruction Testing.

(a) Field trials. Conduct preconstruction shotcrete field trials before starting shotcrete production.

(1) Test panels. Prepare and cure test panels according to ASTM C1140. Construct steel or
wood test panel forms containing no reinforcement with a minimum width and length of
600 millimeters)and a minimum depth of 150 millimeters with either square or sloped sides.
When shotcrete is to be applied over reinforcement, construct additional steel or wood test
panel forms containing reinforcement with a minimum width and length of 750 millimeters
and a minimum depth of 75 millimeters with either square or sloped sides. Use reinforcement
of the same size and spacing required for the project.
Shoot test panels using the personnel, material, equipment, operating pressures, and mix
designs proposed for the project. Produce test panels for each proposed mix proportion, each
anticipated shooting orientation, and each proposed nozzle operator.
As soon after shooting as is safe to prevent damage, cover and tightly wrap the panels with
material conforming to ASTM C171 or store the panels in a moist room conforming to
AASHTO M 201.
(2) Coring. At least 14 days after shooting, drill at least three 75 millimeters diameter cores
from each test panel according to AASHTO T 24. Moisture condition the cores in sealed plastic
bags or nonabsorbent containers according to AASHTO T 24, Section 7.3. Deliver Government
cores to the laboratory designated by the Engineer.
(3) Testing. At least 14 days but no later than 28 days after shooting, perform and report
coating quality tests including density, boiling absorption and volume of permeable voids
according to ASTM C642. Test at least three samples from each nonreinforced test panel.
Samples may consist of cores or pieces of cores or test panels that are without observable
cracks, fissures or shattered edges.
Before compressive strength testing, saw or tool the ends of the cores to eliminate projections
and to achieve perpendicularity to the longitudinal axis. At 28 days after shooting, conduct and
report compressive strength tests according to AASHTO T 24. Test at least three cores from
each nonreinforced test panel.
When shotcrete is applied over reinforcement, visually grade at least three cores from each
reinforced test panel according to ACI 506.2, Section 1.7, at least 14 days but no later than 28
days after shooting. Between 28 and 48 days, determine the maximum water-soluble chloride-
ion concentration on at least 3 different test panel samples according to ASTM C1218.
(4) Mix design approval. Submit the test data and results as well as a visual description of
each core to the Engineer. Include details concerning presence of voids, sand pockets,
lamination, and other inadequacies. Approval of the nozzle operator and mix design will be
based on preconstruction field trials and test results. The test results must meet the requirements
of Table 566.1 including the following:
(a) Compressive strength tests. Calculate the mean compressive core strength of at least
three individual, 75-millimeter diameter cores, taken from the same test panel. The mean of
any three consecutive core strengths must equal or exceed 0.85 f’c with no individual core
less than 0.75 f’c.

Section 566 – Shotcrete 500

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Coating quality tests. Calculate density, boiling absorption, and volume of permeable
voids for each test sample. No individual test may be greater than the maximum permissible
values shown in Table 566.1.
(c) Core grading tests. Calculate the mean core grade from at least three individual core
grades. The mean core grade must not be greater than the maximum permissible value
shown in Table 566.1 with no individual core grade greater than 3. When a prequalification
test panel is rejected by the Engineer, a second panel may be shot. If the nozzle operator’s
second mean core grade is greater than 2.5, that nozzle operator is not permitted to shoot
shotcrete on the project. Core grading is performed during preconstruction testing only as a
way of prequalifying nozzle operators.
(d) Water-soluble chloride ion concentration tests. Calculate the water-soluble chloride ion
concentration for each test sample. No individual test may be greater than the maximum
permissible values shown in Table 566.1. Water-soluble chloride ion analysis is performed
during preconstruction testing only as a way of ensuring corrosion protection of the
reinforcement.
(b) Submissions. Submit field quality control test reports with the test data and results. Include the
following information in the reports:

(1) Date and time of test panel shooting including panel dimensions, size and spacing of
reinforcement, when used, and type of curing;
(2) Test panel identification including panel number, shooting orientation, mix proportions and
nozzle operator;
(3) Date, time, method of panel coring, number of test samples obtained from each panel and
sample preparation methods;
(4) Test sample identification by panel number, sample number and sample dimensions; and
(5) Date, time and types of tests performed.
566.07 Shotcrete Construction. Produce shotcrete according to ACI 506.2 and the following:

(a) Surface preparation. When shotcrete is to be placed over existing concrete or rock, remove
loose or deteriorated material from the existing surface by chipping with pneumatic or hand tools.
Cut shoulders approximately 25 millimeters deep along the perimeter of repair areas on existing
concrete.

Remove curing compound on previously-placed shotcrete surfaces by sandblasting or other

approved method. Maintain prepared surfaces in a clean and dry condition. Install approved depth
gauges to indicate the thickness of the shotcrete layers. Install depth gauges on 6-foot (1.8-meter)
centers longitudinally and transversely with no less than two gauges per increment of surface area
to receive the shotcrete.

Moisten surfaces. When applying shotcrete to previously-placed shotcrete or concrete, provide a

saturated surface dry condition. Soak surfaces with water 2 to 24 hours before application.
Immediately before shotcreting, blow the surfaces free of water.

When applying shotcrete to soil, thoroughly compact the soil to provide a firm foundation. Ensure
the soil does not have free surface water before placing shotcrete.

Section 566 – Shotcrete 501

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Reinforcing. Install reinforcing steel, when required, according to the plans and Section 554.
Support the reinforcing steel to ensure it will not be displaced from impact of the shotcrete during
application. For repair work, support the reinforcing steel by anchor studs or bolts installed in the
existing masonry or rock. Space anchors at no more than 300 millimeters on overhead surfaces,
450 millimeters on vertical surfaces, and 900 millimeters on top horizontal surfaces. Use at least
three anchors in each individual patch area. Unless otherwise indicated in plans, reinforce areas
where shotcrete thickness exceeds 38 millimeters with a single layer of either 2 × 2 – W1.2 × W1.2
or 3 × 3 – W1.5 × W1.5 (50 × 50 – MW8 × W8 or 75 × 75 – MW10 × W10) welded wire fabric.
Place fabric parallel to the proposed finished surface. Support fabric at least 13 millimeters from
any rock or previously placed concrete or shotcrete surface. Provide a minimum 25 millimeters
cover over any steel items including anchors, reinforcing bars and wire fabric.

(c) Temperature and weather conditions. Conduct cold and hot weather shotcreting operations
according to Subsection 552.10. Do not perform shotcrete operations during high winds and heavy
rains. Maintain the temperature of the shotcrete mix between 10 and 30 °C. Do not place shotcrete
against frozen surfaces. Place shotcrete when the surface and ambient temperature is at least 5 °C
and rising.

(d) Shotcrete application. Use the same nozzle operator that created acceptable test panels.

(1) Apply shotcrete within 45 minutes of adding cement to the mixture unless an approved
hydration stabilizer is used. If a hydration stabilizer is approved, deliver and place the
shotcrete within the approved design discharge time limit up to 3.5 hours maximum.
(2) Limit the layer thickness of each shotcrete application to 50 millimeters. Thicker
applications may be approved if the Contractor can demonstrate that no sloughing or sagging
is occurring. If additional thickness is required, broom or scarify the applied surface and
allow the layer to harden. Provide a saturated surface dry condition to the surface before
applying an additional layer.
(3) Remove laitance, loose material, and rebound. Promptly remove rebound from the work
area.
(4) Taper construction joints to a thin edge over a distance of at least 300 millimeters. Wet
the joint surface before placing additional shotcrete on the joint. Do not use square
construction joints.
(5) Finish shotcrete as directed by the Engineer.
566.08 Curing Shotcrete. Cure the surface according to Subsection 552.15. For intermediate shotcrete
surfaces or if a stained or finished final surface is required, cure the shotcrete according to Subsection
552.15(b). If no stained or finished surface is required, apply curing compound to the final exposed
shotcrete surface according to Subsection 552.15(c). Maintain shotcrete at a temperature above 5 °C
until shotcrete has achieved a minimum compressive strength of 5.2 megapascals.

566.09 Penetrating Stain. Apply according to the manufacturer’s instructions if penetrating stain is
used.

566.10 Production Report. Prepare and submit a written report within 24 hours of shotcrete
production and application for each shift. Include the following information:

Section 566 – Shotcrete 502

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(a) Quantity and location of shotcrete applied including photos of areas where shotcrete was
placed;

(b) Observations of success or problems of equipment operation, application, final product

condition, and any other relevant issues during production and application;

(c) Batch numbers if applicable;

(d) Name of nozzle operator; and

(e) Names and signature of person performing the observation.

566.11 Acceptance. See Table 566.2 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements and the
quality characteristic category.

Material for shotcrete will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03. Furnish a production
certification for the hydraulic cement.

The shotcrete placement system will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

The shotcrete mixtures air content, density, density, boiling absorption, and permeable void volume
will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04. Compressive strength will be evaluated under
Subsection 106.05. See Table 566.1 for requirements.

Measurement

566.12 Measure the Section 566 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring shotcrete by the cubic meter, measure in place.

Payment

566.13 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 566 pay items listed in the bid schedule except the shotcrete contract price will be adjusted
according to Subsection 106.05. Payment will be full compensation for the work prescribed in this
Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Payment for shotcrete will be made at a price determined by multiplying the contract price by the
compressive strength pay factor.

Section 566 – Shotcrete 503

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 566.2
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sample Point of Split Reporting
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Source
Aggregate Measured and Quality – Subsection 1 per Source of Yes Before
quality tested for 703.16 material type material producing
(703.16) conformance
(106.04 & 105)
Mix Design
Shotcrete Measured and All – Subsection 1 per " Yes Before
composition tested for 566.04 mix design producing
conformance
(106.04)
Production
Aggregate Measured and Gradation(1) – AASHTO 1 per day Flowing aggregate Yes, Before
(fine & coarse) tested for T 27 & T 11 stream when batching
conformance (bin, belt, discharge requested
(106.04) conveyor belt,
or stockpile)
Moisture test – AASHTO " " " "
T 255

Section 566 – Shotcrete 504

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 566.2 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sample Point of Split Reporting
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Shotcrete Measured and Boiling – ASTM 1 set per Production See Note See Note
tested for absorption C642 75 m3 test panels(4) (5) (6)
conformance & permeable but not less
(106.04) void volume (2) than 1 per job
Density – AASHTO 1 per load (3) Truck mixer – Upon
T 121 or agitator (3) completing
tests

Air content(2) – AASHTO " " – "

T 152 or
T 196
Statistical Compressive II AASHTO 1 set per Production See Note See Note
(106.05) strength(2) T 24 25 m3 test panels(4) (5) (7)
but not less
than 1 per day
(1) Gradation requirements are shown in Table 703.11.
(2) Mixture properties requirements are shown in Table 566.1.
(3) Sample according to ASTM C1385. See Table 552.9, note 4 for allowable reductions in sampling and testing frequencies.
(4) Prepare and cure nonreinforced test panels according to ASTM C1140 for mixture properties testing. Construct steel or wood test panel forms
to a minimum width and length of 600 millimeter and a minimum depth of 150 millimeter with either square or sloped sides.
(5) Core 75-millimeter diameter samples at least 14 days after the field trial and moisture condition in sealed plastic bags or nonabsorbent
containers according to AASHTO T 24, Section 7.3. As directed by the Engineer, deliver Government cores to the designated laboratory for
testing.
(6) Test at least three samples from each nonreinforced test panel at least 14 but no later than 28 days after casting. Samples may consist of cores
or pieces of cores as detailed in Subsection 566.06(a)(3).
(7) Test at least three, 75-millimeters diameter moisture conditioned cores from each nonreinforced test panel 28 days after casting.

Section 566 – Shotcrete 505

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 567. — MICROPILES

Description

567.01 This work consists of furnishing and installing micropiles.

Material

567.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Centralizers and spacers 722.02(e)
Chemical admixtures 711.03
Hydraulic cement 701.01(a)
Neat hydraulic cement grout 725.13(a)(1)
Reinforcing bars 709.01(b)
Steel pipes 715.05(a)
Water 725.01(a)

Construction Requirements

567.03 Qualifications. Provide a professional engineer, on-site supervisors, and installation

personnel with experience installing and testing micropiles. Submit the following for approval at
least 30 days before starting work:

(a) Names of personnel; and

(b) A résumé for each individual describing their experience on at least 5 micropile projects of
similar complexity over the past 5 years. Include project names, locations and contact
information for project owners.

567.04 Submittals. At least 30 days before starting micropile work, submit the following according to
Subsection 104.03:

(a) Start date:

(b) Micropile construction sequence;

(c) Micropile types, sizes, spacings, depths, installation angles, and ultimate strengths for range of
material to be encountered;

(d) Tendons, full moment splices permanent casing, and additional hardware with manufacturer
data sheets, specifications, catalog cuts, and mill certificates;

(e) Manufacturer recommendations for tendon and hardware storage, handling, assembly, and
working temperature ranges. Hollow bar micropiles are not acceptable unless specified or approved
by the Engineer;

(f) Grout type, mix design, mixing equipment, placement procedures, and 7-day and 28-day grout
compressive strengths test results;

Section 567 – Micropiles 506

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(g) Grouting pressure, volume, and location, if post grouting system is used;

(h)Procedures and material for repairing corrosion protection coatings in the field;

(i) Drilling methods and equipment;

(j) Alternative drilling and grouting methods including grout additives;

(k) Additional material needed to achieve required bond capacities such as grout socks;

(l) Methods to ensure borehole stability during excavation and grout placement;

(m) Micropile testing methods and equipment including type and capacity of reaction load system,
drawings, and supporting calculations for structural components of the micropile load test
apparatus; and

(n) Identification number and calibration test certification for each jack, pressure gauge, and
electronic load cell. Clearly indicate the serial number of each component of the testing assembly
on calibration graphs. Submit results from calibration tests conducted by an independent testing
laboratory within the previous 60 days.

Begin construction only after the submittals have been approved. Obtain approval from the Engineer
before modifying the approved submittal.

567.05 Installation. Stage micropile installation to avoid interconnection or damage to piles with
uncured grout.

Before drilling holes for constructing production micropiles, install pre-production micropiles for
verification load tests. Install verification and production micropiles as follows:

(a) Drilling. Provide equipment capable of drilling soil, boulder colluvium and alluvium, and
bedrock to anticipated depths. Drill micropile holes to the required diameter and length according
to Table 567.1 and the construction schedule and sequence.

If an obstruction prevents the advancement of the pile, abandon the hole and fill the hole with
grout. Drill a new hole at a location approved by the Engineer. Remove drill cuttings and other
loose debris from the hole.

(b) Casing, reinforcing bar, and splicing. Place reinforcing bars with centralizers according to
Table 567.1. Use centralizers sized to within 13 millimeters of the drill hole diameter.

Construct micropile splices to the required design strength. Align casing joints and reinforcing
bar splices to avoid eccentricity or angles at splices. Locate threaded pipe casing joints at least
two casing outer diameters from bar splices. When multiple bars are used, stagger the bar splices
by at least 300 millimeters. If specified or approved, weld according to Subsection 551.11(a).

(c) Grouting. Use a positive displacement grout pump according to Subsection 256.07(b)(1).
Use a neat hydraulic cement grout in one continuous operation. Mix admixtures according to the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not use compressed air to directly pressurize the grout.

Section 567 – Micropiles 507

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Grout the micropile the same day the micropile hole is drilled. Inject grout from the lowest point
of the drill hole until clean, pure grout flows from the top of the micropile. Grout may be pumped
through tremie tubes, hollow stem augers, or drill rods. Ensure complete continuity of the grout
column during all phases of grouting and casing extraction. Control the grout pressures and grout
takes to prevent excessive heave in cohesive soils or fractured formations. Grout the entire pile to
the design cut-off level.

After grouting is complete, fill the grout tube with grout if it will remain in the hole. Allow grout
within the micropiles to attain the minimum design strength before loading.

Observe site conditions in the vicinity of the micropile construction on a daily basis and suspend
operations and notify the Engineer if:

(1) Ground heave, subsidence, or grout leakage is observed;

(2) Micropile structure is adversely affected; or
(3) Adjacent structures are damaged from drilling or grouting.
Table 567.1
Micropile Construction Tolerances
Micropile Attribute Allowable Variance
Center of micropile 75 millimeters
from indicated
plan location or pile spacing
Pile-hole alignment ±2% of design alignment
Top elevation Zero to 25 millimeters
above the design vertical elevation
Center of reinforcing steel <20 millimeters
from pile center

567.06 Testing and Stressing.

(a) Testing equipment. See Subsection 256.08(a).

(b) Stressing. Place stressing equipment over the micropile so that the jack, bearing plates, load
cells, and stressing assembly are axially aligned with the micropile and the micropile is centered
within the equipment. Do not apply loads greater 80 percent of the structural capacity of the
micropile.

Place the reference pressure gauge in series with the pressure gauge and jack so they need not be
unloaded and repositioned during a test. Raise the load from one increment to another. Hold the
load for the required time beginning immediately after the load is applied and record the micropile
top movement to the nearest 0.025 millimeters with respect to an independent fixed reference point.
Repump the jack as necessary to maintain a constant load. Monitor the load with a pressure gauge.
If the load measured by the pressure gauge and the load measured by the reference pressure gauge
differ by more than 10 percent, recalibrate the jack, pressure gauge, and reference pressure gauge.

(1) Verification tests. The Engineer will designate locations for sacrificial micropiles for
verification tests. Test according to Tables 567-2 and 567-4.

Section 567 – Micropiles 508

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 567.2
Verification Test Load Schedule
Cycle Load Hold Time (Minutes)
1 AL 2.5
0.15 DL 2.5
0.30 DL 2.5
0.45 DL 2.5
2 AL 1
0.15 DL 1
0.45 DL 1
0.60 DL 2.5
0.75 DL 2.5
0.90 DL 2.5
1.00 DL 2.5
AL 1
4 0.15 DL 1
1.00 DL 1
1.15 DL 2.5
1.30 DL (Load-hold test) 60*
1.45 DL 2.5
AL 1
5 0.15 DL 1
1.45 DL 1
1.60 DL 1
1.75 DL 2.5
1.90 DL 2.5
2.00 DL
10
(Maximum test load)
1.50 DL 5
1.00 DL 5
0.50 DL 5
AL 5
AL = Alignment load (no greater than 10 percent of DL (0.10 DL) applied to the
pile before setting the movement recording devices. Zero dial gauges after the first
setting of AL).
DL = Unfactored design load.
* Hold the load to within 2 percent and measure and record pile top movement at
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 20, 30, 50, and 60 minutes.

Section 567 – Micropiles 509

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

A verification test is acceptable based on one of the following results:

(a) Total vertical movement does not exceed 9.5 millimeters under DL. If an AL is used,
then the allowable movement will be reduced by multiplying by a factor of (DL-AL)/DL;
(b) Deflection rate is linear or decreasing and does not exceed 1 millimeter/log cycle time
from 1 to 10 minutes or 2 millimeters/log cycle time from 6 to 60 minutes under 1.30
times the DL; or
(c) Slope of the load versus deflection (at end of increment) curve does not exceed 0.065
millimeters per Newton at each test load increment.
If the micropile verification is unacceptable, test another to establish the cause and make
design or construction modifications. These modifications may include installing replacement
test micropiles, modifying the installation methods, increasing the bond length, regrouting
with pre-placed re-grout tubes, or changing the micropile type. Submit modifications
requiring changes to the structure and retest the new system as directed by the Engineer.
Submit micropile geometry, construction, testing details, and verification test results for
approval before installing production micropiles.
Remove verification test micropiles to an elevation below existing ground level.
If construction methods or foundation material change, perform additional verification tests.
(2) Proof tests. The Engineer will designate production micropiles for proof testing. Test
according to Tables 567-3 and 567-4.

Section 567 – Micropiles 510

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 567.3
Proof Test Load Schedule
Minimum Hold
Load
Time (Minutes)
AL 2.5
0.15 DL 2.5
0.30 DL 2.5
0.45 DL 2.5
0.60 DL 2.5
0.75 DL 2.5
0.90 DL 2.5
1.00 DL 2.5
1.15 DL 2.5
1.30 DL (Load-hold test) 10*
1.45 DL 2.5
1.60 DL (Maximum test load) 2.5
1.30 DL 4
1.00 DL 4
0.75 DL 4
0.50 DL 4
0.25 DL 4
AL 4
AL = See alignment load note in Table 567.2.
DL = Unfactored design load.
* Hold the load to within 2 percent and measure and record pile top movement at
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 10 minutes. If the movement measured between 1 and 10
minutes exceeds 1 millimete), continue holding the load and measure and record
pile movement at 20, 30, 50, and 60 minutes.

567.07 Test Results and Reporting. Provide preliminary results for each micropile tested to the
Engineer before testing personnel leave the site. Submit detailed verification and proof test load and
deflection data in a tabular format. Submit a graph that plots total micropile top movement versus
load, the A-line, and the B-line. The A-line is defined as 0.8 multiplied by the theoretical free test
length elastic elongation. The B-line is defined as the theoretical free test length elastic elongation
plus 0.50 multiplied by the theoretical bond length elastic elongation. Allow 5 days for the Engineer
to conduct a review of the data and approve micropile installation.

567.08 Acceptance. See Table 567.4 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Material for micropiles will be evaluated under Subsection 106.03. Furnish production certifications
for the structural steel and casing.

Reinforcing bars will be evaluated under Section 554.

Construction of micropiles will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Installed micropiles will be evaluated based on the following proof test results:

Section 567 – Micropiles 511

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(a) Total vertical movement does not exceed(13 millimeter) under the unfactored design load
(DL). If an alignment load (AL) is used, then the allowable movement will be reduced by
multiplying by a factor of (DL-AL)/DL;

(b) Deflection rate is linear or decreasing and does not exceed 1 millimeter/log cycle time from 1
to 10 minutes or 2 millimeters/log cycle time from 6 to 60 minutes under 1.30 times the
unfactored design load (1.30 DL); or

(c) Slope of the load versus deflection (at end of increment) curve does not exceed 0.065
millimeters per Newton) under the maximum test load (1.60 DL.)

If a proof-tested micropile is unacceptable, proof test another micropile in the immediate vicinity.
Establish the cause and make design or construction modifications for future piles. Submit
modification requiring changes to the structure for approval.

Measurement

567.09. Measure the Section 567 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Do not measure failed proof or verification tests or additional tests to verify alternative micropile
installation methods proposed by the Contractor.

When production micropiles are measured by the linear meter; measure from the plan top elevation
to the approved tip elevation.

Payment

567.10. The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 567 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 567 – Micropiles 512

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 567.4
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material Type of Characterist Categor Test Sampling Point of Split Reportin Remar
or Acceptanc ic y Methods Frequenc Samplin Sampl g ks
Product e Specificatio y g e Time
(Subsectio (Subsectio ns
n) n)
Mix Design
Grout Measured Compressive – ASTM 1 per Source Yes Before −
(725.13) and strength C942 mix of producin
tested for design material g
conforman
ce
(106.04)
Production
Grout Measured Density – AASHTO 1 per Mixer No 24 −
(725.13) and T 133 5 piles hours
tested for Upon
conforman ASTM Point of completio
ce Flow – " " −
C939 discharge n
(106.04) of test
Compressive – ASTM 1 set of Grout " “ −
strength C942 3 plant
samples(1)
Verificatio Measured Performance – Subsection All Installatio No 5 days −
n and 567.06(b)(1) n
test tested for
micropile conforman
ce
(106.04)
Proof " Performance – Subsection 1 in 20 " " " −
test 567.06(b)(2)
micropile
(1) From each grout plant per day of operation, or per 5 micropiles, whichever occurs more frequently.

Section 567 – Micropiles 513

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 568. — HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE

Description

568.01 This work consists of furnishing, placing, finishing, and curing high performance concrete in
bridge decks, approach slabs, and other structural elements.

High performance concrete is designated Class HPC.

In addition to the Section 552 structural concrete properties, HPC conforms to performance
characteristics for the following:

(a) Maximum chloride permeability. Total charge in coulombs passed over a specified period
of time according to AASHTO T 277 as modified in Table 568.2.

(b) Drying shrinkage. Drying shrinkage in microstrains according to ASTM C157 as modified
in Table 568.2.

Material

568.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Air-entraining admixtures 711.02

Chemical admixtures 711.03
Coarse aggregate for concrete 703.02
Color coating 725.15
Concrete coloring agents 711.05
Curing material 711.01
Fine aggregate for concrete 703.01
Hydraulic cement 701.01
Pozzolans 725.04
Reinforcing fibers 725.17
Water 725.01(a)

Construction Requirements

568.03 Qualifications. Provide an on-site supervisor with experience completing of at least two
HPC projects of similar complexity within the last 3 years.

568.04 Composition (Concrete Mix Design). Design and produce concrete mixtures that conform to
the following:

(a) Tables 552-3 and 568-1 and

(b) ACI 318 Chapter 5 for determining required average compressive strength (f’cr).

Submit HPC mix designs on FHWA Form 1608.

Section 568 – High Performance Concrete 514

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Verify mix designs with trial mixes prepared according to ACI 318 from proposed sources or with
previous concrete production data for the mixture design submitted from proposed sources. Verify the
performance characteristics and plastic properties in Table 568.1. Submit written concrete mix designs
for approval at least 36 days before production. Include the items listed in Subsection 552.03 in each
mix design submittal.

Begin production only after the mix design is approved.

Furnish a new mix design for approval if there is a change in a source of material source or when the
fineness modulus of the fine aggregate changes by more than 0.20.

568.05 Strength-Maturity Relationship. For the approved mix design and anticipated weather,
develop a strength-maturity relationship according to AASHTO T 325. Submit the relationship for
approval at least 14 days before production. Develop a new relationship if changes in the mix
constituents, hydration stabilizer dosage, or weather affect the relationship.

Provide a concrete maturity meter for the test section and production that:

(a) Conforms to AASHTO T 325;

(b) Is rugged, waterproof, and able to withstand the construction environment;

(c) Operates without an external power source for at least 14 days;

(d) Collects and stores temperature and maturity data for at least 14 days; and

(e) Determines equivalent maturity hours according to the Arrhenius function.

Section 568 – High Performance Concrete 515

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 568.1
Performance Characteristics and Plastic Properties of HPC
Property Specification
Chloride permeability,
1,500 coulombs
AASHTO T 277
maximum at 28 days
as modified in Table 568.2
Drying shrinkage, ASTM C157 500 microstrains
as modified in Table 568.2 maximum
Compressive strength,
34.5 MPa minimum at 28 days
AASHTO T 22
Water/cement ratio 0.45 maximum
Aggregate size (19 millimetersnominal maximum
Total cementitious content(1) 307 to 502 kilograms per cubic meter
Slump(2), AASHTO T 119 50 to 200 millimeters
Air content(3),
AASHTO T 152 or See Subsection 552.03
AASHTO T 196
Sulfate resistance AASHTO M 240, type IP(MS) or
IS(<70)(MS)
(use type II cement(4)(5)
per AASHTO M 85)
Water-soluble chloride ion content, 0.15 percent by mass of cement maximum
ASTM C1218(6) for reinforced concrete
0.06 percent by mass of cement maximum
for prestressed concrete
(1) The total cementitious content includes portland cement and all pozzolans added to the
concrete mixture, such as ground granulated blast furnace slag, fly ash, and silica fume.
(2) Slump can be adjusted using a high range water reducer (superplasticizer) as long as the
maximum water/cementitious ratio is not exceeded. Include the water contained in the aggregates
above the amount of absorbed water in the calculation of the water/cementitious ratio.
(3) If the plastic air content is low when the concrete arrives on-site, additional air entraining agent
may be added to the concrete and mixed provided that 300 revolutions of the mixer has not been
exceeded.
(4) For seawater exposure, other portland cement types are permitted if the tricalcium aluminate
(C3A) content is 10 percent or less and the water/cement ratio is 0.40 or less.
(5) Other cement types are permitted if the C3A content is less than 8 percent.
(6) Determine the water-soluble chloride ion content contributed from the ingredients including
water, aggregates, cementitious material, and admixtures between ages 28 and 42 days.

568.06 Test Section. For bridge decks, approach slabs, and other flatwork, construct a 3-meter by 3-
meter by 200-millimeter test section. For other structural elements, construct a 1-meter by 1-meter by
1-meter test section. Use the approved concrete mix design and the same methods of handling,
placing, monitoring, finishing, curing, and cleaning as intended for production placement. Sample
and test for Table 568.1 conformance.

Use the strength-maturity relationship developed for the approved mix design to determine in-place
concrete compressive strength. Verify that the test section concrete has a similar time temperature
relationship.

Section 568 – High Performance Concrete 516

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Begin production only after the test section is evaluated and accepted.

568.07 Storing and Handling Material. See Subsection 552.04.

568.08 Measuring Material. See Subsection 552.05.

568.09 Batching Plant, Mixers, and Agitators. See Subsection 552.06.

568.10 Mixing. See Subsection 552.07. When required, add reinforcing fibers to the concrete
mixture following manufacturer’s recommendations. Mix until uniformly distributed in the concrete
mixture. Gradually add fibers to the concrete mixture.

(a) Central-mix plant. See Subsection 552.07(a).

(b) Truck mixer. See Subsection 552.07(b).

568.11 Delivering. See Subsection 552.08, except do not use nonagitating equipment.

If reinforcing fibers reduce the workability, do not add additional water to concrete mixture. If
approved by the Engineer, add a water reducing admixture conforming to AASHTO M 194 or a high
range water reducing admixture.

568.12 Quality Control of Mix. See Subsection 552.09.

(a) Mixing. See Subsection 552.09(a).

(b) Delivering and sampling. See Subsection 552.09(b), except as modified in Table 568.2.

568.13 Temperature and Weather Conditions. Before placement, maintain the temperature of the
concrete between 50 and 80 °F (10 and 27 °C).

Install maturity meter probes and monitor concrete temperatures according to AASHTO T 325.
Monitor the temperature differential from the center of the concrete mass to its surface. Provide
internal cooling, external heating, or insulation to insure the temperature differential does not exceed
35 °F (20 °C) during placing, curing, cooling, form stripping, and after curing ends.

During curing, maintain the temperature of the concrete mass interior below 60 °C and temperature of
the outer most surfaces above 7 °C.

(a) Cold weather. See Subsection 552.10(a), except as follows:

(1) Place concrete for flatwork only when the ambient air temperature is 7 °C and rising.
Place concrete for other structural elements only when the ambient air temperature is 2 °C
and rising.
(2) Protect concrete until the concrete maturity data indicates that minimum compressive
strength is achieved.
(3) At the end of the protection period, start the cooling process when the average wind speed is
less than 16 kilometers per hour as measured 1 meter from the concrete surface.
(b) Hot weather. See Subsection 552.10(b), except as follows:

Section 568 – High Performance Concrete 517

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(1) Place concrete when the ambient air temperature is less than 30 °C.;
(2) Do not remove curing material until the concrete maturity data indicates that minimum
compressive strength is achieved and the moist curing period is complete; and
(3) Do not remove curing material until the calculated evaporation rate is less than 0.74
kilograms per square meter per hour as determined by Figure 552.1.
(c) Evaporation. Do not place concrete if the predicted evaporation rate, determined without
fogging and other protective measures, is greater than 0.74 kilograms per square meter per hour
as determined by Figure 552.1. For wind speed, use an anemometer with full scale accuracy to
within 4 percent and for relative humidity, use a psychrometer or hygrometer with full scale
accuracy to within 2 percent. Measure wind speed and relative humidity 600 millimeters above
the concrete surface.

Before placing, install and demonstrate fogging equipment for approval and identify personnel to
operate the equipment.

While placing, finishing, and curing surfaces; take care to prevent crusting and plastic shrinkage
cracking. Do not allow the surface of the freshly placed concrete to dry. Use fogging, windbreaks
and other protective measures, as necessary, to limit the expected evaporation rate to less than 0.5
kilogram per square meter per hour as determined by Figure 552.1.

Use pressure sprayers or atomizers to maintain a moist surface. Do not apply moisture under
pressure directly to the concrete surface. Do not allow water to accumulate to cause a flow or
wash on the concrete surface. Continue fogging the concrete surface until finishing operations are
complete and the surface is covered. Do not wait until final set to cover the concrete surface.

(d) Rain. See Subsection 552.10(d).

568.14 Handling and Placing Concrete. See Subsection 552.11.

568.15 Construction Joints. See Subsection 552.12.

568.16 Expansion and Contraction Joints. See Subsection 552.13.

568.17 Finishing Plastic Concrete. See Subsection 552.14.

568.18 Concrete Curing. Begin curing within 4 hours after the concrete achieves final set.

(a) Flatwork curing. Use the water method according to Subsection 552.15(b). Apply soaker
hoses or other approved methods to keep the coverings saturated. Keep the concrete saturated
and covered for the entire curing period.

(b) Structural elements. Use a combination of the water method according to Subsection
552.15(b) and the forms in-place method according to Subsection 552.15(a). If forms are stripped
or loosened before the end of the curing period, complete the remainder of the curing using the
water method.

During hot and cold weather, cure until the in-place concrete compressive strength reaches the
minimum shown in Table 568.1 at measured locations according to AASHTO T 325. At other times,
cure until the in-place compressive strength reaches 80 percent of the minimum shown in Table

Section 568 – High Performance Concrete 518

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

568.1. Cure flatwork at least 14 days and structural elements at least 10 days.

If directed by the Engineer after curing, clean staining or efflorescence to provide a uniform color to
the concrete surface.

568.19 Texturing Driving Surfaces. After curing, produce a skid-resistant surface by saw cutting
grooves according to Subsection 552.14(c)(1).

568.20 Acceptance. See Table 568.2 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements and the
quality characteristic category.

Material for HPC will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03. Furnish production
certifications for the cementitious material.

The concrete mixture’s slump, air content, density, and temperature will be evaluated under
Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Concrete compressive strength will be evaluated under Subsection 106.05. The lower specification
limit is the minimum required compressive strength at 28 days (fc’) shown in Table 568.1. Remove
and replace concrete represented by cylinders having a compressive strength less than 90 percent of
the minimum 28-day compressive strength (fc’).

Maximum chloride permeability will be evaluated under Subsection 106.05. The upper specification
limit is the maximum specified chloride permeability value at 28 days shown in Table 568.1.

Drying shrinkage will be evaluated under Subsection 106.04. The upper specification limit is the
maximum shown in Table 568.1. If the concrete mixture contains 7.5 liters per cubic meter of an
approved shrinkage reducing admixture, drying shrinkage testing is not required and drying
shrinkage will be evaluated under Subsection 106.03.

Construction (including batching, placing, finishing, and curing concrete) of HPC structures will be
evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Falsework and forms will be evaluated under Section 562.

Measurement

568.21 Measure the Section 568 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring HPC by the cubic meter, measure in the structure.

Payment

568.22 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 568 pay items listed in the bid schedule except the HPC contract price will be adjusted
according to Subsection 106.05. Payment will be full compensation for the work prescribed in this
Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Payment for HPC will be made at a price determined by multiplying the contract price by the lower
of the two pay factors determined for compressive strength or chloride permeability.

Section 568 – High Performance Concrete 519

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 568.2
Sampling and Testing Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Source
Aggregate Measured and Quality − Subsection 1 per Source of Yes Before −
tested for 703.01 & material material producing
conformance 703.02 type
(106.04) including
ASR
requirements
Mix Design
Concrete Measured and All − Subsection 1 per " Yes " −
composition tested for 568.04 mix
conformance design
(106.04)
Production Startup (test section)
HPC Measured and Maximum (2)
− AASHTO 1 set per Discharge Yes Upon −
tested for chloride T 277 test stream completing
conformance permeability placement at point of tests
(106.04) (1) placement
Compressive − AASHTO " " " " −
strength(3) T 23 & 22
Drying(4)(5) − ASTM " " " " −
shrinkage C157

Section 568 – High Performance Concrete 520

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 568.2
Sampling and Testing Requirements (Continued)
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production
Produced Measured and Gradation − AASHTO 1 per Flowing Yes Before −
aggregate tested for T 27 & T 11 day aggregate batching
(fine & coarse) conformance stream (bin,
(106.04) belt, discharge
conveyor belt,
or stockpile)
Fineness − AASHTO − " " " −
modulus T 27
Moisture test - AASHTO - -
T-255

Section 568 – High Performance Concrete 521

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 568.2
Sampling and Testing Requirements (Continued)
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Production
HPC Measured and Density − AASHTO 1 per Point of No Upon −
tested for T 121 load discharge completing
conformance tests
(106.04) Air content − AASHTO " " No " −
T 152 or
AASHTO
T 196
Slump(6) − AASHTO " " No " −
T 119
Temperature − Field " " No " −
measured
Drying(4)(5) − ASTM 1 set per " " " −
shrinkage C157 57 m3
HPC Statistical Maximum II AASHTO 1 set per Discharge Yes Upon −
(106.05) chloride T 277 23 m3 stream at completing
permeability(2) but not less point of tests
than 1 per placement
day
Compressive II AASHTO " " " " −
strength(7) T 23 & T 22

Section 568 – High Performance Concrete 522

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 568.2 (Continued)

Sampling and Testing Requirements
(1) Sample according to AASHTO R 60, except composite samples are not required.
(2) Cast at least three, 100-millimeter by 200-millimeter maximum chloride permeability cylinders per set and carefully transport the cylinders to the job site curing
facility. Cure the cylinders for 7 days according to AASHTO M 201. Then cure at 38 °C ± 5 °C in saturated lime water until AASHTO T 277 sample conditioning
begins. Have the testing done at 28 days in an independent laboratory that is qualified to perform the testing and is approved by the Engineer. The set test result is
the average of the measurements on three cylinders cast from the same load. If pigment is used in the concrete mixture, sample concrete at the batch plant before
and after adding pigment. Test at least three specimens with and without pigment. Determine the average difference between the pigmented and nonpigmented test
results. Adjust production test result by the average difference. Report both initial and adjusted test results.
(3) Cast at least eighteen, 100-millimeter by 200-millimeter compressive strength cylinders per set and carefully transport the cylinders to the job site curing
facility. Have the testing done at 1, 3, 7, 14, and 28 days in an independent laboratory that is qualified to perform the testing and is approved by the Engineer. A
single compressive strength test result is the average result from 3 cylinders cast from the same load.
(4) Drying shrinkage testing is not required if the concrete mixture contains 7.5 liters per cubic mete) of an approved shrinkage reducing admixture.
(5) If testing is required, use 75-millimeter × 75-millimeter × 275-millimeter prisms for drying shrinkage specimens. Cast at least 3 drying shrinkage prisms per set
and carefully transport the prisms to the job site curing facility. Moist the prisms for the duration of the specified moist curing period for HPC elements. Have the
testing done in an independent laboratory that is qualified to perform the testing and is approved by the Engineer. The zero measurement for percent drying
shrinkage is the initial measurement taken at demolding of the specimens at 23 ½ ± ½ hours after introduction of mixing water to the concrete mixture. Measure
percent drying shrinkage at the end of specified moist curing period for the structural elements, 1 day, 4 days, 7 days, 14 days, 28 days, and 56 days after the end of
the specified field moist curing period. Drying shrinkage 28 days after the termination of moist curing (28 days drying) cannot exceed 60 percent of the maximum
specified value. The set drying shrinkage test result is the average result from 3 prisms cast from the same load.
(6) If fibers are used at an addition rate greater than 0.3 percent by volume, measure slump at the batch plant before the addition of fibers.
(7) Cast at least six, 100-millimeter by 200-millimeter compressive strength cylinders per set and carefully transport the cylinders to the job site curing facility.
Test three cylinders at 28 days. Remainder of cylinders to be used as designated by the Engineer.

Section 568 – High Performance Concrete 523

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 569. — CONCRETE OVERLAYS FOR BRIDGE DECKS

Description

569.01 This work consists of furnishing, placing, finishing, and concrete in bridge deck overlays
including the preparation of existing deck surfaces.

Concrete overlay class is designated HPC(O) or LMC.

Material

569.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Air-entraining admixtures 711.02

Chemical admixtures 711.03
Coarse aggregate for concrete 703.02
Concrete coloring agents 711.05
Fine aggregate for concrete 703.01
Hydraulic cement 701.01
Latex emulsion admixture 711.04
Pozzolans 725.04
Reinforcing fibers 725.17(b)
Water 725.01(a)

Construction Requirements

569.03 Qualifications. Provide an on-site supervisor with experience completing of at least 2

overlay projects with the specific overlay class within the last 3 years.

569.04 Composition (Concrete Mix Design). Design and produce concrete overlay mixtures that
conform to following:

(a) Table 569.1 for the class specified and

(b) ACI 318 Chapter 5 for determining required average compressive strength (f’cr).

Section 569 – Concrete Overlays for Bridge Decks 524

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 569.1
Composition of Concrete
Property Performance Characteristics
Total Maximum Slump Air Course Maximum Maximum Average Minimum
Cementitious Water to inches Content Aggregate Chloride Dry Bond Compressive
Concrete
Material Cementitious (mm) percent Size Permeability Shrinkage(5) Strength at 14 Strength
Overlay
Content(1) Material Number AASHTO ASTM Days AASHTO
Class
(kg/m3) Ratio(3) AASHTO T 277 C157 ASTM T 22
M43 (4) coulombs microstrains C1583 megapascals
megapascals
HPC(O) 335 to 502 0.45 2 to 8 Table #7, #78, #8 1,500 500 1.03 31
(50 to 200) 552.2
LMC(2) 335 to 502 0.45 2 to 8 3.0 to 10.0 #7, #78, #8 1,500 − 1.03 28
(50 to 200)
(1) The total cementitious material content includes portland cement and all pozzolans added to the concrete mixture such as ground granulated blast furnace
slag, fly ash, and silica fume. Meet the requirements of Table 552.3.
(2) Add 15 liters of latex emulsion per 43 kilograms of cement.
(3) Include the water contained in the aggregates above the amount of absorbed water in the calculation of the water to cementitious material ratio.
(4) Meet the processing requirements of AASHTO M 43, Table 1 – Standard Sizes of Processed Aggregate. Do not use gravel or alkali-silica reactive
aggregates.
(5) Dry shrinkage testing is not required if the concrete mixture contains 7.5 liters per cubic meter of an approved shrinkage reducing admixture.

Section 569 – Concrete Overlays for Bridge Decks 525

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Submit concrete overlay mix designs on approved forms.

Verify the mix designs with trial mixes prepared according to ACI 318 from proposed sources or with
previous concrete production data for the mixture submitted from proposed sources. Verify the
performance characteristics in Table 569.1. Submit written concrete mix designs for approval at least
36 days before production. Include the items listed in Subsection 552.03(a) through (y) in each mix
design submittal.

Furnish a new mix design for approval if a source of material changes or if the fine aggregate fineness
modulus changes by more than 0.20.
569.05 Strength Maturity Relationship. See Subsection 568.05.

569.06 Surface Preparation. Remove asphalt, asphalt membranes, and concrete overlays without
damaging the concrete bridge deck. Use micro milling to remove existing overlays. Sound the bridge
deck according to ASTM D4580 to identify unsound concrete in deck. Do not perform any surface
preparation within 1.8 meters of a new overlay until 48 hours after its placement. Submit a repair
plan for approval by the Engineer that includes the following:

(a) Concrete repairs. Determine the depth of concrete cover over the existing reinforcement
using a covermeter or ground penetrating radar. Remove unsound concrete according to
Subsections 203.04(b) and 203.04 (c). Prepare and repair concrete according to Subsection
552.11.

Remove at least 25 millimeters of concrete around exposed or unbounded reinforcement.

Remove and replace deteriorated reinforcement.

Within 24 hours before placing repair concrete, clean exposed concrete surfaces, reinforcement,
and structural steel of rust and foreign material by abrasive shot blasting and pressurized water
flushing.

In repair areas larger than 0.19 square meters with exposed reinforcement, install pre-packaged
zinc sacrificial anodes on the reinforcement according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

(1) In areas larger than 0.19 square meters and smaller than 0.37 square meters, install a pair
of anodes on the reinforcement. Install the anodes at opposite sides of the repair and within
150 millimeters of the edge of the repair.
(2) In areas 0.37 square meters and larger, install an additional pair of anodes for each
incremental 0.37-square meter increase in the repair area.
Use a concrete mixture conforming to Table 552.1 Class C(AE) concrete to fill the repair area. In
repair areas not containing anodes, an approved high strength concrete patching compound
placed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations may be used. Fill repair areas level
with the surface of the surrounding concrete deck.

Cure repair areas according to Subsection 552.15(b) until the concrete obtains a compressive
strength of 21 megapascals.

(b) Surface Profiling. Provide a minimum profile of 1.6 millimeters and a maximum of 6
millimeters on the substrate concrete to bond with the concrete. Use hydrodemolition according
to Section 560 or a rotary micro mill.

Section 569 – Concrete Overlays for Bridge Decks 526

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

After surface profiling has been approved by the Engineer, shotblast the surface of the substrate
within 36 hours of expected overlay placement. Upon completion of shotblasting, clean the
substrate by pressure washing with using a potable water source with a minimum water pressure
of 55 megapascals. Remove by pressure washing concrete laitances, oils, and fuels, and other
foreign and loose materials detrimental to achieving a sufficient bond. Capture blast cleaning
material and debris and properly dispose of it off site. Capture debris from pressure washing and
properly dispose of it off site. Cover the prepared surface with polyethylene sheeting to prevent
contamination.

(c) Saturation. Thoroughly water-soak the clean concrete surface for at least 24 hours before
placing the overlay concrete. Do not use burlap. Remove puddles of standing water using a
vacuum or other approved equipment. Do not use a blower or compressed air to remove water.

569.07 Test Section. Prepare the substrate concrete surface using the same methods intended for the
overlay placement. Construct a 3-meter by 3-meter test section on the substrate concrete at the same
thickness as the overlay. Use the approved concrete mix design and the same methods of handling,
placing, finishing, and curing intended for actual placement. Sample and test for Table 569.1
conformance.

Demonstrate the maturity meter operation. Use the strength-maturity relationship developed for the
approved mix design to determine in-place compressive strength. Verify that the test section concrete
has a similar time temperature relationship. Demonstrate methods for conforming to the Subsection
569.14 temperature requirements.
Demonstrate methods for cleaning staining or efflorescence to provide uniform color on the concrete
surface.

Begin production only after the test panel is evaluated and accepted.

569.08 Storage and Handling of Material. See Subsection 552.04.

Protect latex emulsion from freezing and prolonged exposure to temperatures in excess of 29 °C).
Store containers of latex admixture at the bridge site for a period not to exceed 10 days.

569.09 Measuring Material. See Subsection 552.05.

569.10 Batching Plant, Mixers, and Agitators. See Subsection 552.06 and the following:

(a) Class HPC(O). Furnish ready-mixed concrete produced and delivered according to
AASHTO M 157.

(b) Class LMC. Furnish proportioning and mixing equipment with an integral mobile unit with
continuous mixing capability. Furnish a mixer with the following capabilities:

(1) Capable of producing at least 4.6 cubic meter of concrete without recharging;
(2) Equipped with a cement metering device and recording meter accurate within a tolerance
of -1 to +3 percent and with a ticket printout device to record the cement quantity added to
the mix;
(3) Equipped with a latex tank with a standpipe marked in liters) and a latex metering device
accurate within a tolerance of -1 to +2 percent;

Section 569 – Concrete Overlays for Bridge Decks 527

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(4) Equipped with a water flow control and flow indicator accurate within a tolerance of
2 percent in the range of expected use that is readily adjustable to provide for minor
variations in aggregate moisture content;
(5) Equipped with controls to regulate the quantity of other components required to produce
the specified mix; and
(6) Capable of discharging the mixture through a conventional chute directly in front of the
finishing machine.
Calibrate LMC equipment with material for the approved mix design within 6 months of the
placement date. Keep the equipment maintained, calibrated, clean, and free of partially dried or
hardened material.
569.11 Mixing. See Subsection 552.07 and the following:

Add fibers to the concrete mixture following the manufacturer’s recommendations. Add fibers to the
concrete mixture gradually to ensure the fibers are uniformly distributed throughout the concrete
mixture.

(a) Class HPC(O) central-mix plant. See Subsection 552.07(a).

(b) Class HPC(O) truck mixer. See Subsection 552.07(b).

569.12 Delivery. See Subsection 552.08, except do not use nonagitating equipment.

(a) Class HPC(O). If fibers reduce workability, do not add additional water to the concrete
mixture. Adjust workability using admixtures from the approved mix design.

If the air content is low when the concrete arrives on-site, add air entraining agent and mix.

(b) Class LMC. Deliver concrete through the conventional chute of an integral mobile volumetric
mixer directly in front of the finishing machine.

569.13 Quality Control of Mix. See Subsection 552.09 and the following:

(a) Mixing. See Subsection 552.09(a).

(b) Delivery and sampling during actual placement. See Subsection 552.09(b), except as
modified in Table 569.2.

569.14 Temperature and Weather Conditions. Before placement, maintain the temperature of the
overlay concrete mixture between 7 and 27 ºC.

Install maturity meter probes and monitor concrete temperatures according to AASHTO T 325.
Monitor the temperature differential from the center of the concrete mass to the surface. Provide
internal cooling, external heating, or insulation to ensure the temperature differential does not exceed
20 ºC during placing, curing, and immediately after curing ends.

Using the strength-maturity relationship developed for the approved concrete mixture determine in-
place concrete compressive strength of the overlay. Measure concrete temperature and calculate in-
place maturity.

Section 569 – Concrete Overlays for Bridge Decks 528

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(a) Cold weather. See Subsection 568.13(a).

(b) Hot weather. See Subsection 568.13(b).

(c) Evaporation. See Subsection 568.13(c).

(d) Rain. See Subsection 552.10(d).

569.15 Handling and Placing Concrete. See Subsection 552.11.

(a) General. See Subsection 552.11(a).

(b) Placing methods. See Subsection 552.11(c) and the following:

(1) Class HPC(O). Do not broom mortar from the concrete from the front edge of the
placement.

(2) Class LMC. Immediately ahead of placing overlay mixture, broom a thin coat of the
concrete overlay mixture and scrub it into the surface as a grout-bond coat at the front edge of
the placement. Work evenly over the surface in front of the front edge of the placement.

(c) Consolidation. See Subsection 552.11(d).

Furnish a self-propelled finishing machine capable of forward and reverse movement under
positive control. Ensure the length of the screed is sufficient to extend at least 6 inches (150
millimeters) beyond the edge of both ends of the section being placed. Provide finishing machine
capable of consolidating the concrete by vibration and of raising all screeds to clear the concrete
for traveling in reverse. Provide either a rotating roller type or an oscillating screed type finishing
machine.
Furnish rotating roller-type machines with one or more rollers, augers, and 1,500 to 2,500
vibrations per minute (25 to 42 hertz) vibratory pans.
Furnish oscillating screed-type machines with vibrators on the screeds whose frequency of
vibration can be varied between 3,000 and 15,000 vibrations per minute (50 to 250 hertz). Use
metal screed with a bottom face of not less than 100 millimeters wide.

Use handheld vibrators at the concrete edges and adjacent to expansion joints.

569.16 Construction Joints. See Subsection 552.12 and the following:

Form the vertical edge at construction joints by bulkhead or saw cut. Make construction joints straight
and vertical.

569.17 Expansion and Contraction Joints. See Subsection 552.13.

569.18 Finishing Plastic Concrete. See Subsection 552.14 and the following:

Use a self-propelled rotating cylinder machine, either single or double roller that is capable of
forward or reverse movement under positive control. Equip the machine with an oscillating screed
and any other devices required to continuously spread, consolidate, and finish the plastic concrete.
Ensure the screed extends the full width of the deck.

Section 569 – Concrete Overlays for Bridge Decks 529

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(a) Striking off and floating. See Subsection 552.14(a). Produce a longitudinal trowelled finish
along the gutter line for a 12 inch (300 millimeter) width from the curb face.

(b) Straightedging. See Subsection 552.14(b).

Proceed at a constant rate so final finishing is complete before a plastic film forms on the concrete
surface. Install a construction dam or bulkhead in case of major delay. During minor delays of 1 hour
or less, protect the end of the placement from drying with layers of wet burlap.

569.19 Concrete Curing. Prevent plastic shrinkage cracking and crusting of the surface. Use the wet
method of curing according to Subsection 552.15(b). Use washed burlap and apply soaker hoses or
other approved methods to keep the coverings saturated at all times.

Install maturity meter probes and monitor concreter temperatures according to AASHTO T 325.
Maintain the concrete temperature of the outer most surfaces above 7 °C. Monitor the temperature
differential from the center of the concrete mass to its surface. Using the strength-maturity
relationship developed for the approved concrete mixture, determine the in-place concrete
compressive strength of the concrete.

(a) Class HPC(O). Wet cure the concrete for at least 14 days. Provide internal cooling, external
heating, or insulation to ensure the temperature differential does not exceed 20 °C. Cure until the
in-place concrete compressive strength of the overlay concrete reaches at least 80 percent of the
minimum compressive strength shown in Table 569.1.

(b) Class LMC. Wet cure the concrete for at least 48 hours and until the maturity meter reading
exceeds 48 maturity hours. Then air cure the concrete for an additional 48 hours and until the
maturity meter reading exceeds 96 maturity hours.

569.20 Texturing. After curing, visually inspect the overlay for cracking or other damage and
inspect for delamination. Perform bond test. Remove and replace any delaminated or unbounded
portions of the overlay or portions damaged by rain for freezing. Clean staining or efflorescence to
provide a uniform color to the concrete overlay surface.

After the Table 569.1 bond strength is obtained, groove surface according to Subsection
552.14(c)(1).

Continuously remove slurry and other residue from the overlay by vacuum pickup or other approved
methods. Properly dispose of slurry and other residue off site.

569.21 Acceptance. See Table 569.2 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements and the
quality characteristic category.

Material for concrete repair will be evaluated under Subsection 106.03.

Material for overlay concrete will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03. Furnish
production certifications for the cementitious material.

The overlay concrete mixture’s slump, air content, density, and temperature will be evaluated under
Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Overlay concrete compressive strength will be evaluated under Subsection 106.05. The lower

Section 569 – Concrete Overlays for Bridge Decks 530

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

specification limit is the minimum required compressive strength at 28 days (fc’) shown in Table
569.1. Remove and replace concrete represented by cylinders having a compressive strength less
than 90 percent of fc’.

Maximum chloride permeability will be evaluated under Subsection 106.05. The upper specification
limit is the maximum specified chloride permeability value shown in Table 569.1. A single chloride
permeability test result is the average result from 2 samples cast from the same load and tested.

Concrete drying shrinkage for Class HPC(O) will be evaluated under Subsection 106.04. The upper
specification limit is the maximum shown in Table 569.1. If the concrete mixture contains 1.5
gallons per cubic yard (7.5 liters per cubic meter) of an approved shrinkage reducing admixture,
drying shrinkage testing is not required and drying shrinkage will be evaluated under Subsection
106.03.

Bond strength of the overlay will be evaluated under Subsection 106.05. The lower specification
limit is the minimum required bond strength at 14 days shown in Table 569.1.

Measurement

569.22 Measure the Section 569 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

569.23 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 569 pay items listed in the bid schedule except the overlay concrete contract price will be
adjusted according to Subsection 106.05. Payment will be full compensation for the work prescribed
in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.
Payment for overlay concrete will be made at a price determined by multiplying the contract price by
the lower of the three pay factors determined for compressive strength, chloride permeability, or
bond strength.

Section 569 – Concrete Overlays for Bridge Decks 531

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 569.2
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)

Source
Aggregate Measured and Quality − Subsections 1 per Source Yes, Minimum Reports
tested for 703.01 and material of material when 36 days must be
conformance 703.02 type requested before dated
(106.04) production within
1 year of
intended
use
Mix Design
Concrete Measured and All − Subsection 1 per Source Yes, Minimum −
composition tested for 569.04 mix of material when 36 days
conformance design requested before
(106.04 & 105) production
Concrete Production Startup (test panel)
HPC(O) Measured and Maximum − AASHTO 1 set Discharge Yes, Upon −
tested for chloride T 277 per test stream at when completing
conformance permeability(1) placement point of requested tests
(106.04) placement(1)
Compressive − AASHTO " " " " −
strength(2) T 23 & 22
Drying − ASTM " " " " −
shrinkage(4) (5) C157
Tensile bond − ASTM 5 cores In-place " " −
strength C1583 per test after
placement curing is
complete

Section 569 – Concrete Overlays for Bridge Decks 532

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 569.2 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
LMC Measured and Maximum(1) − AASHTO 1 set Discharge Yes Upon −
tested for chloride T 277 per test stream at completing
conformance permeability placement point of tests
(106.04) placement
Compressive − AASHTO " " " " −
strength(3) T 23 & 22
Tensile bond − ASTM 5 cores In-place " " −
strength(9) C1583 per test after
placement curing is
complete
HPC(O) " Density(6) − AASHTO 1 per Point of No Upon −
and T 121 load discharge completing
LMC tests
Air content(6) − AASHTO No −
T 152
or " " "
AASHTO
T 196
Slump(6)(7) − AASHTO No −
" " "
T 119
Temperature − Field measured " " No " −

Section 569 – Concrete Overlays for Bridge Decks 533

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 569.2 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Aggregate Measured and Gradation − AASHTO 1 per Flowing Yes Before −
(fine & coarse) tested for T 27 & T 11 day aggregate batching
conformance stream
(106.04) (bin, belt,
Discharge
Conveyor
belt, or
stockpile)
Fineness − AASHTO − " " " −
modulus T 27
Moisture test − AASHTO − " " " −
T 255
Production
HPC(O) Measured and Drying − ASTM Min 1 per Point of No Upon −
tested for shrinkage(4) (5) C157 280 m2 discharge completing
conformance tests
(106.04)
HPC(O) Statistical Maximum II AASHTO 1 set per Discharge Yes Upon −
& LMC (106.05) chloride T 277 23 m3 stream completing
permeability(1) but not at point tests
less than of
1 per day placement
Compressive II AASHTO " " " " −
strength(8) T 23 & T 22
Tensile bond II ASTM 1 set per In-place No " −
strength(9) C1583 280 m2 after curing
of overlay is complete
but not
less than
1 per day

Section 569 – Concrete Overlays for Bridge Decks 534

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 569.2 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
HPC(O) Measured and Density(6) − AASHTO 1 per Point of No Upon −
and tested for T 121 load discharge completing
LMC conformance tests
(106.04) Air content(6) − AASHTO " " No " −
T 152
or
AASHTO
T 196
Slump(6) (7) − AASHTO " " " " −
T 119
Temperature − Field " " " " −
measured
Aggregate Measured and Gradation − AASHTO 1 per Flowing Yes, Before −
(fine & coarse) tested for T 27 & T 11 day aggregate when batching
conformance stream requested
(106.04) (bin, belt,
discharge
conveyor
belt, or
stockpile)
Fineness − AASHTO − " " " −
modulus T 27
Moisture test − AASHTO − " " " −
T 255

Section 569 – Concrete Overlays for Bridge Decks 535

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 569.2 (Continued)

Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
(1) Cast at least three, 100-millimeter by 200-millimeter maximum chloride permeability cylinders per set and carefully transport the cylinders to the job site
curing facility. Cure the HPC(O) cylinders for 7 days and the LMC cylinders for 3 days according to AASHTO M 201. Then cure the HPC(O) cylinders at 38
°C ± 5 °C in saturated lime water until AASHTO T 277 sample conditioning begins and air dry the LMC cylinders at 23 °C ± 2 °C at 40 to 60 percent relative
humidity. Test for chloride permeability at 28 days by measuring the total charge passed, in coulombs, over a specified period of time according to AASHTO
T 277. The test result is the average of the measurements on three cylinders cast from the same load. If pigment is used in the concrete mixture, sample concrete
at the batch plant before and after adding pigment. Test at least three specimens with and without pigment. Determine the average difference between the
pigmented and non-pigmented test results. Adjust production test results by the average difference. Report both initial and adjusted test results.
(2) For HPC(O), cast at least fifteen, 4-inch × 8-inch (100-millimeter × 200-millimeter) compressive strength cylinders per set and carefully transport the
cylinders to the job site curing facility. Test three cylinders each at 1, 3, 7, 14 and 28 days. A single compressive strength test result is the average result from 3
cylinders cast from the same load.
(3) For LMC, cast at least eighteen, 100-millimeter × 200-millimeter compressive strength cylinders per set and carefully transport the cylinders to the job site
curing facility. Test three cylinders each at 1, 2, 4, 7, 14 and 28 days. A single compressive strength test result is the average result from 3 cylinders cast from
the same load.
(4) Drying shrinkage testing is not required if the concrete mixture contains 7.5 liters per cubic meter of an approved shrinkage reducing admixture.
(5) If testing is required, use 75-millimeter × 75-millimeter × 275-millimeter prisms for drying shrinkage specimens. Cast at least 3 drying shrinkage prisms per
set and carefully transport the prisms to the job site curing facility. Moist cure the prisms for the duration of the specified moist curing period for HPC(O)
elements. Measure for shrinkage in microstrains determined according to ASTM C157. The zero measurement is the initial measurement taken at demolding of
the specimens at 23½ ± ½ hours after introduction of mixing water to the concrete mixture. Determine percent drying shrinkage by measuring at the end of
specified moist curing period for the structural elements, 1 day, 4 days, 7 days, 14 days, 28 days, and 56 days after the end of the specified field moist curing
period. Drying shrinkage 28 days after the termination of moist curing (28 days drying) cannot exceed 60 percent of the maximum specified value shown in
Table 569.1. The set drying shrinkage test result is the average result from 3 prisms cast from the same load.
(6) For LMC, measure density, slump, and plastic air content 5 minutes after discharge from the mixer chute. Cover wheelbarrow or other receptacle used to
hold sample with a sheet of plastic to prevent evaporation during the 5 minutes before sampling.
(7) If fibers are used at an addition rate greater than 0.3 percent by volume, measure slump at the batch plant before adding fibers.
(8) Cast at least six, 100-millimeter by 200-millimeter compressive strength cylinders per set and carefully transport the cylinders to the job site curing facility.
Test three cylinders at 28 days. Remainder of cylinders to be used as designated by the Engineer.
(9) At random locations determined by the Engineer, core 50-millimete diameter specimens through the overlay and 12-millimete into the substrate concrete.
Cure the specimens in situ for the same length of time as the overlay. Test the specimens in situ by attaching a loading disk with fast setting, high strength
epoxy. Measure the tensile pull off bond strength in megapascals according to ASTM C1583. The average bond strength is the average of the results from three
test specimens adjusted as follows: For tests where failure occurs in the substrate concrete at a depth of 6 millimeters or greater for more than 50 percent of the
specimen, use 150 pounds per square inch (1 megapascal) for that specimen test result in the calculation of the average of the three test specimens. When two of
the three test results have been adjusted, the average bond strength results shall be the greater of 1 megapascal or the calculated value.

Section 569 – Concrete Overlays for Bridge Decks 536

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

DIVISION 600
DRAINAGE STRUCTURES AND
INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION

Section 600 – Drainage Structures and Incidental Construction 537

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 601. — MINOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES

Description

601.01 This work consists of constructing minor concrete structures.

Material

601.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Air-entraining admixtures 711.02

Chemical admixtures 711.03
Coarse aggregate for concrete 703.02
Color coating 725.15
Concrete coloring agents 711.05
Curing material 711.01
Fine aggregate for concrete 703.01
Hydraulic cement 701.01
Pozzolans 725.04
Reinforcing fibers 725.17
Reinforcing steel 709.01
Sealants, fillers, and seals 712.01
Water 725.01(a)

Construction Requirements

601.03 Composition (Concrete Mix Design). Conform to Table 601.1. Before batching concrete,
submit the proposed concrete proportions for approval on Form FHWA 1606 Minor Concrete Mix
Design Trial Batch Summary or other approved form. As a minimum, submit the following at least 30
days before production:

(a) Type and sources of material;

(b) Material certification for material;

(c) Saturated surface dry mass of the fine and coarse aggregate per cubic yard (cubic meter) of
concrete;

(d) Gradation of fine and coarse aggregate;

(e) Mass of mixing water per cubic meter of concrete;

(f) Mass of cement per cubic meter of concrete. Fly ash, ground iron blast-furnace slag, or silica
fume (micro-silica) may be substituted for cement according to Table 552.3;

(g) Entrained air content of plastic concrete in percent by volume;

(h) Maximum slump of plastic concrete in millimeters; and

Section 601 – Minor Concrete Structures 538

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(i) When colored concrete is required, submit preliminary samples of the colored concrete. Prepare
a 1-meter by 1-meter by 100-millimeter panel for each acceptable mix that is to be colored. Finish
and cure the panels in the same manner as the concrete will be finished and cured on the project.

Table 601.1
Composition of Minor Concrete
Property Specification
Cement content 362 kilograms per cubic meter
minimum
Water/cement ratio 0.49 maximum
Slump 125 millimeters
maximum
Air content 4 % minimum
Size of coarse aggregate AASHTO M 43
with 100% passing the
37.5-millimeter sieve
28-day compressive 25 megapascal
strength minimum

601.04 General. Excavate and backfill according to Section 209. When concrete is cracked, spalling,
or scaling, remove concrete to the nearest joint.

Design and construct forms that are free of bulge and warp and allow for removal without injuring the
concrete. Design the forms for a lateral pressure equal to that exerted by a fluid weighing 2400
kilograms per cubic meter.

Use wood, metal, or other suitable material for forms. Keep forms clean and coat with a form release
agent or form oil before placing concrete.

Place and fasten reinforcing steel according to Subsection 554.08.

601.05 Placing Concrete. Conform to Subsection 552.10. Moisten the forms and foundation
immediately before placing concrete. Discharge concrete within the time limit shown in Table 552.4.

Place concrete to avoid segregation of material. Consolidate with vibrators according to Subsection
552.11(d). Do not use aluminum pipe for transporting or placing concrete. Do not exceed 30 minutes
between deliveries of batches for a single pour on a structure.

Do not apply water to plastic concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

601.06 Curing Concrete. Cure concrete at least 7 days. If high early strength cement is used, cure
concrete at least 3 days. Cure according to Subsection 552.15. Finish exposed concrete surfaces
according to Subsection 552.16, as applicable.

601.07 Acceptance. Material for minor concrete structures including concrete, reinforcing steel, and
structural steel for minor structures will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Excavation and backfill will be evaluated under Section 209.

Section 601 – Minor Concrete Structures 539

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Construction of minor concrete structures will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

601.08 Measure the Section 601 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When concrete is measured by the cubic meter, measure in the structure.

Payment

601.09 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 601 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Payment for concrete lump sum bid item will be prorated based on the progress of the work under this
Section.

Section 601 – Minor Concrete Structures 540

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 602. — CULVERTS AND DRAINS

Description

602.01 This work consists of constructing culverts, drains, and precast concrete box culverts.

Material

602.02 Conform to the following Sections and Subsections:

Asphalt mastic 702.04

Concrete pipe 706
Gaskets for concrete pipe 706.08
Gaskets for ductile iron pipe 707.18
Gaskets for metal pipe 707.17
Gaskets for plastic pipe 708.08
Lean concrete backfill 614
Metal pipe 707
Mortar 712.02
Plastic pipe 708
Precast concrete units and accessories 725.09
Precast reinforced concrete box sections 706.07
Sealants, fillers, and seals 712.01
Supplemental concrete pipe ties 706.09

Construction Requirements

602.03 General. Furnish culvert pipe with a wall thickness not less than that shown on the plans or
determined from the fill-height tables included in the plans. Use the same material and coating on
contiguous pipe sections and special sections such as elbows and branch connections. For culvert
extensions, furnish the same material as the existing culvert unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

The plans show the size, length, and approximate location of culverts. Determine final location, skew,
length, elevations, and grade according to Section 152. Do not order culvert material until the Engineer
has accepted the final structure size, length, and alignment.

Construct cast-in-place concrete box culverts according to Section 552. For precast concrete box
culverts, submit design drawings and details with supporting calculations according to Subsection
104.03.

Excavate and backfill according to Section 209.

Place elongated pipes with the minor axis within 5 degrees of vertical.

Construct a piping plug unless the culvert inlet is protected with a full-height headwall, slope paving,
or an embankment consisting of AASHTO M 145 classification A-6 or A-7 material. Construct the
piping plug with A-6, A-7, or other approved material with a permeability not exceeding 0.004 inches
per second (0.1 millimeters per second).

Section 602 – Culverts and Drains 541

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

602.04 Laying Concrete Pipe and Precast Concrete Box Culverts. Start at the lower end and lay the
bell or groove end upgrade. Fully join sections with leak-resistant seals using one of the following
methods:

(a) Mortared joints. Clean the lower portion of the receiving end of the pipe. Plaster the inside
with sufficient joint mortar to bring the inner surfaces of the abutting pipe sections flush and even.
Fit the sections as close as the construction of the culvert permits. Fill and seal joints with mortar
inside and out. Use the mortar within 30 minutes after mixing. Clean excess mortar from the inside
of the joint.

Cure mortar outside of joints by covering with polyethylene sheeting or spraying with a curing
compound. Backfill while mortar is plastic or, if mortar sets before backfilling, wait at least 24
hours before backfilling.

(b) Gasket joints. Conform to ASTM C990 or ASTM C443 and the following:

Protect the joint ends from mud, silt, gravel, or other foreign material. Lay the pipe sections with
gaskets attached. Remove, clean, relubricate, and reseat gaskets disturbed or contaminated.

Align the pipe sections. Force the joints home using the pipe manufacturer’s recommended
procedure. Do not drive or ram by hand or machinery. Block the last section of each day's run to
prevent creep.

Install supplemental concrete pipe ties on the last downstream pipe-to-pipe joint and at the downstream
pipe-to-end section joint, if present.

602.05 Laying Metal Pipe. Position the pipe with a longitudinal joint so the joint is opposite the
invert. Fully join pipe sections with leak-resistant seals according to AASHTO M 36 or AASHTO M
196. Use one of the following joints:

(a) Gasket, bell and spigot joints. Use on slopes of 10 percent or less and lay the pipe with the
bell end up slope.

(b) Coupling bands with gaskets. Limit the use of coupling bands with projections (dimples) to
attaching prefabricated flared end sections.

When aluminum alloys come in contact with other metals, coat the contacting surfaces with asphalt
mastic or a preapproved impregnated caulking compound.

602.06 Laying Plastic Pipe. Lay plastic pipe according to the pipe manufacturer’s recommendation.

Fully join pipe sections with leak-resistant seals using gasket, bell and spigot joints according to
ASTM D3212.

602.07 Laying Slotted Drain Pipe. Fully join pipe sections with leak-resistant seals using coupling
bands and gaskets. Cover the slots with roofing paper or other approved covering during backfilling
and paving to keep material out of the pipe. Backfill with a lean concrete backfill.

602.08 Acceptance. Material for culverts, drains, and precast concrete box culverts furnished will be
evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Section 602 – Culverts and Drains 542

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Installation of culverts, drains and precast concrete box culverts will be evaluated under Subsections
106.02 and 106.04.

Excavation and backfill will be evaluated under Section 209.

Measurement

602.09 Measure the Section 602 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring pipe and box culverts by the linear meter, measure along the invert.

Measure end sections, elbows, and branch connections by the each. If there is no pay item for elbows
or branch connections, measure them as additional pipe length along the invert.

Measure pipe anchor assemblies under Section 606.

Payment

602.10 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 602 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 602 – Culverts and Drains 543

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 603. — STRUCTURAL PLATE STRUCTURES

Description

603.01 This work consists of constructing structural plate pipes, arches, pipe arches, boxes, and
underpasses.

Material

603.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Aluminum-alloy structural plate structures 707.06

Asphalt-coated structural plate structures 707.07
Steel structural plate structures 707.05

Construction Requirements

603.03 General. Excavate and backfill according to Section 209.

603.04 Erecting. Furnish steel, aluminum alloy, asphalt coated steel, or asphalt-coated aluminum alloy
structural plate structures.

Submit a copy of manufacturer’s assembly instructions before assembly. Show the position of each
plate and assembly order.

Assemble the structural plates according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Exercise care in the use of
drift pins and pry bars to prevent damage to the structural plate and its coating. Clear sand, gravel, and
other foreign material from the corrugations within lapped sections of the plates. Ensure plates have a
proper fit-up.

Where aluminum alloys come in contact with other types of metal, coat the contacting surfaces
according to Subsection 602.05.

Torque steel bolts on steel plates to at least 135 newton-meters and a maximum of 400 newton-meters.

Torque steel bolts and aluminum bolts on 2.5-millimeter thick aluminum plates to at least 90 foot-
pounds (120 newton-meters) and a maximum of 155 newton-meters.

Torque steel bolts and aluminum bolts on 2.5-millimeter thick and heavier aluminum plates to at least
155 newton-meters and a maximum of 180 newton-meters.

For long-span structures:

(a) Tighten the longitudinal seams when the plates are assembled unless the plates are held in shape
by cables, struts, or backfill. Properly align plates circumferentially to avoid permanent distortion
from the design shape. Before backfilling, do not exceed 2 percent variation from the design shape.

(b) Do not distort the shape of the structure by operating equipment over or near it.

(c) Provide suitable survey control on the structure to check structure movement.

Section 603 – Structural Plate Structures 544

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(d) Check and control the deflection movements of the structure during the entire backfilling
operation. Do not exceed the manufacturer’s recommended limits.

(e) Provide a manufacturer’s representative to monitor the erecting and backfilling of the structure.

603.05 Acceptance. Material for structural plate structures will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02
and 106.03.

Installation of structural plate structures will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Excavation and backfill will be evaluated under Section 209.

Measurement

603.06 Measure the Section 603 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

603.07 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 603 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 603 – Structural Plate Structures 545

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 604. — MANHOLES, INLETS, AND CATCH BASINS

Description

604.01 This work consists of constructing, adjusting, shifting, or modifying manholes, inlets, and catch
basins.

Material

604.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsections:

Concrete 601
Concrete building brick 725.06
Concrete masonry units 725.07
Corrugated metal units 725.11
Frames, grates, covers, and ladder rungs 725.10
Gaskets for concrete pipe 706.08
Gaskets for metal pipe 707.17
Mortar 712.02
Neat hydraulic cement grout 725.13(a)(2)
Reinforced concrete manhole sections 725.09(a)
Reinforcing steel 709.01
Sealants, fillers, and seals 712.01

Construction Requirements

604.03 General. Excavate and backfill according to Section 209.

Separate catch basins and inlets from adjacent concrete structures with at least ½-inch (13-millimeter)
thick preformed expansion joint.

604.04 Concrete Construction. Construct concrete units according to Section 601. Concrete units
may be cast-in-place or precast. Finish surfaces according to Subsection 552.16(a) or (b) as applicable.

Finish the flow line in manholes, inlets, and catch basins to match the pipe flow line.

Assemble precast concrete manhole sections with flexible gaskets or fillers in the tongue and groove
joints. Handle the precast units carefully after the gasket has been attached to avoid damaging the
gasket or contaminating the joint. Attain the proper alignment before the joints are forced home.
Ensure gasket is uniformly seated. Apply mastic joint filler according to manufacturer’s
recommendations if mastic is used.

Set metal frames in a full mortar bed.

Space ladder rungs uniformly on 300-millimeters centers and align vertically. Grout ladder rungs into
precast concrete walls.

604.05 Concrete Masonry Unit Construction. Construct concrete for footings according to Section
601. Construct masonry block plumb. Stagger vertical joints and set block with the cells vertical.
Moisten blocks before using in work. Butter bearing members and vertical joints full of mortar. Bond

Section 604 – Manholes, Inlets, and Catch Basins 546

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

block with mortar on sides. Construct joints straight, level, plumb, flush, and 6 to 13 millimeters thick.
Backfill the structure after the masonry block joints have moist cured for 7 days.

604.06 Metal Construction. Fabricate metal drop inlets from the same material and thickness as
adjoining metal pipes. Connect metal inlets to adjoining metal pipes according to Subsection 602.05.

604.07 Grade Adjustment of Structures. Adjust metal frames and grates to grade before placing the
surface course.

Remove and clean the frames, covers, and grates. Trim the walls down to solid material. Reconstruct
the walls with the same material as existing and reset the cleaned frames at the required elevation.

When the existing casting and supporting walls are in good condition, an approved device may be used
to adjust the manhole casting cover to the correct grade.

Clean each structure of foreign material.

604.08 Shifting and Modifying Structures. Shift structures using methods to ensure structural
integrity. Reshape the channel flow line in manholes, inlets, and catch basins as necessary to match the
pipe flow line.

Set and reassemble structures according to the applicable requirements of Subsections 604.04 through
604.07. Furnish and install gaskets, seals, and other accessories according to the applicable
requirements of Subsections 604.04 through 604.06. Grout or use a preformed joint seal to make joints
and openings leak resistant. Finish mortar joints with a bead on the outside and a smooth finish on the
inside.

When modifying a concrete structure, do not cut the concrete and reinforcing steel in a manner that
loosen the reinforcement in the wall. Cut the reinforcing steel flush with the opening wall face. Grout
joints and openings cut in the wall.

Seal openings no longer required in the structure.

When an existing structure is abandoned, seal pipes entering the structure with a tight fitting plug of
concrete at least 150 millimeters thick or water tight masonry at least 200 millimeters thick. Ensure the
structure does not entrap water. Obliterate the top of the structure to an elevation at least 900
millimeters below finished grade and backfill according to Section 209.

604.09 Acceptance. Precast concrete units will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Material for metal, concrete brick, concrete masonry, and cast-in-place concrete (except concrete) units
will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03. Concrete for cast-in-place concrete units will
be evaluated under Section 601.

Construction of metal, concrete brick, concrete masonry, and cast-in-place concrete units will be
evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Installation of precast concrete units will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Shifting, modifying, and adjusting units will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Section 604 – Manholes, Inlets, and Catch Basins 547

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Excavation and backfill will be evaluated under Section 209.

Measurement

604.10 Measure the Section 604 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When manholes are measured by the linear meter, measure from finished grade to the flow line surface
of the manhole.

Do not measure metal frames and grates when included as part of the original inlet, manhole, or catch
basin construction.

Payment

604.11 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 604 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 604 – Manholes, Inlets, and Catch Basins 548

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 605. — UNDERDRAINS, SHEET DRAINS, AND

PAVEMENT EDGE DRAINS

Description

605.01 This work consists of furnishing and installing underdrains, infiltration trench, sheet drains, and
pavement edge drains.

Geotextile filter is designated according to Table 714.1.

Material

605.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsections:

Aluminum-alloy corrugated pipe 707.03

Asphalt-coated pipe 707.04
Geocomposite drain 714.02
Geotextile 714.01
Granular backfill 703.03
Metallic-coated corrugated steel pipe 707.02
Perforated concrete pipe 706.03
Plastic pipe 708
Sand 703.14
Structural backfill 704.04

Construction Requirements

605.03 General. Elevate and protect sheets, panels, or rolls of geotextile filter and geocomposite with a
waterproof and ultraviolet resistant cover if stored outdoors. Limit geotextile filter and geocomposite
exposure to less than 10 days when using for a permanent installation.

The Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s product data, shop drawing, including technical
specifications, installation and maintenance procedures for the Engineer’s approval prior to
construction.

Use the same material and coating on contiguous drain sections, extensions, elbows, branch
connections, and other special sections.

Drain material, size, and approximate location are shown on the plans. Determine the final location and
length in the field.

Do not install drain material until the Engineer has accepted the final location and length.

Excavate and backfill according to Section 209.

If geotextile filter or geocomposite is used, smooth the trench surfaces by removing projections that
may damage the geotextile filter or geocomposite. Replace geotextile filter or geocomposite damaged
during installation.

Section 605 – Underdrains, Sheet Drains, Pavement Edge Drains 549

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Do not allow soil or other foreign material to enter the drain systems. Plug the upgrade end of
installations.

Furnish nonperforated pipe for outlet pipe. Install outlet pipe according to Section 602. Immediately
place and secure a screen made of 1.4 millimeter diameter galvanized wire having approximately 13 by
13 millimeter mesh openings over the outlet ends of exposed pipes and weep holes.

605.04 Placing Underdrain. Join pipe sections securely with coupling fittings or bands. Join PVC and
acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) pipe using either a flexible elastomeric seal or solvent cement.
Join polyethylene pipe with snap-on, screw-on, or wrap around coupling bands as recommended by the
manufacturer.

Backfill and compact trenches within the limits of the roadbed according to Section 209 except use
granular backfill material. Trenches for geocomposite underdrains within the limits of the roadbed may
also be backfilled with sand and compacted.

When underdrain is placed in ditch lines, prevent infiltration of surface water by placing material
conforming to AASHTO M 145, A-4, A-5, A-6, or A-7 in the top 12 inches (300 millimeter) of the
trench.

(a) Standard underdrain. Place the long dimension of the geotextile filter parallel to the
centerline of the trench. Position the geotextile filter, without stretching, in contact with the trench
surface. Overlap the joints at least 600 millimeter with the upstream geotextile filter placed over the
downstream geotextile filter.

Place collector pipe with the perforations facing downward.

Place granular backfill to a height of 300 millimeter above the top of the collector pipe and
compact. Do not displace the collector pipe. Place and compact the remainder of the granular
backfill material according to Section 209.

Fold the geotextile filter over the top of the granular backfill with a minimum overlap of 300
millimeter.

(b) Geocomposite underdrain. Extend the geotextile filter from the bottom of the drainage core
around the collector pipe.

Construct splices and install outlet fittings according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Prevent infiltration of soil into the geocomposite core.

Place the assembled geocomposite in the trench with the face of the geocomposite against the
inflow side of the trench. If the trench wall is irregular, smooth the trench wall or place a layer of
granular backfill between the geocomposite and the trench wall. Temporarily support the drain
against the trench wall while backfilling.

When the trench is less than 450 millimeter wide, backfill the trench using sand. Backfilling and
compacting in layers is not required. Compact the sand by vibrating or tamping with a mechanical
tamper.

Section 605 – Underdrains, Sheet Drains, Pavement Edge Drains 550

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

When the trench is 450 millimeter wide or more, place granular backfill or sand to a height of 300
millimeter above the top of the collector pipe and compact. Place and compact the remainder of the
granular backfill material or sand according to Section 209.

For pipe drain installations draining directly to daylight, cover the outlet end of the pipe with a
removable screen made of 1.4 millimeter diameter galvanized wires having approximate 13- by
13-millimeter mesh openings.

605.05 Placing Geocomposite Sheet Drain. Do not place sheet drain against a mortar course less than
4 days old.

When a geocomposite is used in conjunction with a waterproof membrane, install drainage panels
compatible with the membrane using methods recommended by the membrane manufacturer.
Assemble and place the geocomposite drain against the surface to be backfilled according to the
manufacturer’s recommendations.

Splice geocomposite drains so the flow across the edges is continuous. Overlap the geotextile filter at
least 75 millimeter in the direction of water flow. For vertical splices, overlap the geotextile filter in the
direction backfill proceeds.

Connect the drainage core to the collector pipe or weep holes so the flow is continuous through the
system. Extend the geotextile filter from the bottom of the drainage core around the collector pipe.

Backfill with structural backfill and compact according to Subsections 209.09 and 209.10.

605.06 Placing Geocomposite Pavement Edge Drain. Assemble the geocomposite pavement edge
drain and outlet material according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and place it in the trench. If
the trench wall is irregular, smooth the trench wall or place a layer of sand between the geocomposite
and the trench wall. Temporarily support the drain against the trench wall while backfilling.

When the trench is less than 450 millimeter wide, backfill the trench using sand. Backfilling and
compacting in layers is not required. Compact the sand by vibrating or tamping with a mechanical
tamper.

When the trench is 450 millimeter wide or more, place and compact granular backfill or sand
according to Section 209.

605.07 Acceptance. See Table 605.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Material (except granular backfill) for underdrains, sheet drains, and edge drains will be evaluated
under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Granular backfill will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Excavation and backfill will be evaluated under Sections 208 and 209.

Geotextile filter will be evaluated under Section 207.

Geocomposites will be evaluated under Subsection 106.03(a). Furnish a production certification

including the name of the manufacturer, product name, style number, chemical composition of the core

Section 605 – Underdrains, Sheet Drains, Pavement Edge Drains 551

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

and encapsulating geotextile filaments or yarns, and other pertinent information to fully describe the
geocomposite drain.

Outlet pipes will be evaluated under Section 602.

Installation of underdrains, sheet drains, and edge drains will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02
and 106.04.

Measurement

605.08 Measure the Section 605 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measurement is for a system, do not measure geotextile filters, geocomposites, collector pipes,
backfill, and outlet pipes that are part of the system.

When measuring granular backfill and sand by the cubic yard (cubic meter), measure in place.

Payment

605.09 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 605 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 605 – Underdrains, Sheet Drains, Pavement Edge Drains 552

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 605.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency of Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection) Sampling
Source
Granular Measured and Quality − Subsection 1 per Source of Yes Before Not required
backfill tested for 703.03 aggregate type material using when using
(703.03) conformance and in work Government-
(106.04) source of provided
material source
Production
Granular Measured and Gradation − AASHTO 1 per Production Yes 4 −
backfill tested for T 27 460 m3 output hours
(703.03) conformance & or stockpile
(106.04) T 11

Section 605 – Underdrains, Sheet Drains, Pavement Edge Drains 553

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 606. — CORRUGATED METAL SPILLWAYS

Description

606.01 This work consists of furnishing and installing corrugated metal spillways.

Material

606.02 Conform to the following Section:

Culverts and drains 602

Construction Requirements

606.03 Placing Corrugated Metal Spillways. Spillway, inlet, outlet, and connector dimensions and
proportions may vary to permit the use of manufacturer’s standard jigs and templates.

Install spillway inlet assemblies as shown on the plans and consolidate the earth backfill by tamping.

Lay spillway outlet pipe according to Section 602. Anchor the spillway as shown on the plans.

606.04 Acceptance. Pipes, anchor assemblies, hardware, and other material furnished to fabricate
metal spillways will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Excavation and backfill will be evaluated under Section 209.

Construction of spillways will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

606.05 Measure the Section 606 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Measure downdrain and outlet pipes under Section 602.

Payment

606.06 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 606 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 606 – Corrugated Metal Spillways 554

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 607. — CLEANING, RELAYING, AND

REPAIRING EXISTING DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

Description

607.01 This work consists of cleaning, relaying, and repairing existing drainage and appurtenant
structures.

Construction Requirements

607.02 General. Dispose of removed material according to Subsection 203.05.

607.03 Cleaning Drainage Structures in Place. Remove foreign material within the structure and
accessories by approved methods.

Remove debris, vegetation, and earthen material that impedes inlet and outlet channel flow to the
structure. Obtain approval from the Engineer before removing trees.

Regrade inlet and outlet channels at structures to provide positive drainage. Reshape inlet to direct flow
into the structure entrance.

607.04 Relaying or Stockpiling Salvaged Pipe. Relay removed and cleaned pipe according to Section
602.

Salvage and stockpile pipe according to Subsection 203.03.

Replace damaged pipe and install according to Section 602. Dispose of damaged pipe according to
Subsection 203.05(a).

607.05 Repairing Drainage Structures. Remove debris from structures designated to be repaired.
Repair leaks and structural damage and replace missing or broken metalwork according to Sections
602 and 603.

607.06 Acceptance. Cleaning and repairing existing drainage structures will be evaluated under
Subsection 106.02.

Relaying pipe will be evaluated under Section 602.

Measurement

607.07 Measure the Section 607 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

607.08 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 607 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 607 – Cleaning, Relaying, and Repairing Existing Drainage Structures 555
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 608. — PAVED WATERWAYS

Description

608.01 This work consists of constructing paved waterways not contiguous to the traveled way.

Paved waterways are designated as follows:

Type 1 – Grouted rubble

Type 2 – Mortared rubble
Type 3 – Concrete and rubble
Type 4 – Concrete
Type 5 – Asphalt

Material

608.02 Conform to the following Sections and Subsections:

Asphalt concrete 403

Bedding material 704.02
Minor concrete 601
Mortar 712.02
Neat hydraulic cement grout 725.13(a)(2)
Reinforcing steel 709.01
Rock for masonry structures (rubble) 705.03
Sand 703.14

Construction Requirements

608.03 General. Excavate and backfill according to Section 209. Place and compact the bedding
material with at least three passes of a lightweight mechanical tamper, roller, or vibratory system.

608.04 Grouted Rubble Paved Waterway (Type 1). Clean and wet the rubble to near saturation. Set
rubble in a broken pattern with no continuous joint across the waterway or parallel to the flow line.
Place rubble into the mortar bed with the flat faces up and the longest dimension at right angles to the
flow line. Make the joints 25 to 50 millimeters wide.

Ram each piece of rubble until it is firm and true to the surface in grade, alignment, and cross-section.
Remove and relay rubble having an irregular or uneven surface.

Fill the joints with sand to within 100 millimeters of the surface. Pour and broom grout into the joints
until the grout is 13 millimeters below the surface of the rubble. Clean excess grout from the rubble
surface.

608.05 Mortared Rubble Paved Waterway (Type 2). Clean and wet the rubble to near saturation. Set
rubble in a broken pattern with no continuous joint across the waterway or parallel to the flow line.
Place rubble into the mortar bed with the flat face up and the longest dimension parallel to the flow
line. Make joints 25 to 50 millimeters wide.

Section 608 – Paved Waterways 556

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Ram each piece of rubble until it is firm and true to the surface in grade, alignment, and cross-section.
Remove and relay rubble having an irregular or uneven surface.

Fill joints to within 13 millimeters below the surface of the rubble. Clean excess mortar from the
rubble surface.

608.06 Concrete and Rubble Paved Waterway (Type 3). Perform concrete work according to
Section 601. Secure the reinforcing steel within the middle third of the depth of the concrete foundation
when required.

Clean and wet the rubble to near saturation. Embed rubble into the concrete foundation in a broken
pattern with no continuous joint across the waterway or parallel to the flow line.

Make the joints 25 to 50 millimeters wide. Fill the joints with mortar to 1 inch (25 millimeters) below
the surface of the rubble. Clean excess mortar from the rubble surface.

608.07 Concrete Paved Waterway (Type 4). Perform the work according to Section 601.

608.08 Asphalt Paved Waterway (Type 5). Perform the work according to Section 403. Clean and
seal the cracks according to Section 414 before overlaying existing asphalt paved waterway.

608.09 Acceptance. See Table 608.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Material for grout and mortar will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03. Mortar will be
evaluated under Subsection 106.04.

Bedding material and sand will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Construction of paved waterways will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Excavation and backfill will be evaluated under Section 209.

Asphalt concrete will be evaluated under Section 403.

Concrete will be evaluated under Section 601.

Rubble will be evaluated under Section 620.

Measurement
608.10 Measure the Section 608 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring the area, measure the width horizontally to include the total width. Measure the
length parallel to the flow line.

When measuring pavement waterway lengths, measure from the front face of the curb along the flow
line of the paved waterway.

Section 608 – Paved Waterways 557

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Payment

608.11 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 608 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 608 – Paved Waterways 558

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 608.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material Type of Characteris Catego Test Samplin Point Split Reporti Remarks
or Acceptanc tic ry Methods g of Sampl ng
Product e Specificatio Frequen Samplin e Time
(Subsectio (Subsectio ns cy g
n) n)
Source
Bedding Measured Gradation − Subsection 1 per Source Yes Before Not
material and 704.02 soil type of using in required
(704.02) tested for and material work when using
conforman source of Governme
ce material nt-
(106.04) provided
source
Liquid limit − AASHTO " " " " "
R 58 & T 89
Method A
Sand " Gradation & − AASHTO " " " " "
(703.14) deleterious M6
substances
Production
Bedding Measured Gradation − AASHTO 1 per Producti Yes 4 "
material and T 27 & T 11 500 m3 on hours
(704.02) tested for output or
conforman stockpile
ce Liquid limit − AASHTO " " " " "
(106.04) R 58 & T 89
Method A
Sand " Gradation − AASHTO " " " " "
(703.14) T 27 & T 11

Section 608 – Paved Waterways 559

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 609. — CURB AND GUTTER

Description

609.01 This work consists of constructing or resetting of curb, combination curb and gutter, or
wheelstops.

Material

609.02 Conform to the following Sections and Subsections:

Asphalt concrete 403

Bedding material 704.02
Concrete coloring agents 711.05
Minor concrete 601
Mortar 712.02
Reinforcing steel 709.01
Rock for masonry structures (stone curbing) 705.03
Sealants, fillers, and seals 712.01

Construction Requirements

609.03 General. Excavate and backfill according to Section 209. Place and compact the bedding
material. Compact the bedding material with at least three passes of a lightweight mechanical tamper,
roller, or vibratory system.

609.04 Stone and Precast Concrete Curb. Do not use stone with visible drill marks on the exposed
faces.

Conform to the dimensions of stone curb specified and the following:

(a) Type 1. Saw or point the top surface of vertical stone curb to an approximate true plane with no
depression or projection on that surface of over 6 millimeters. Pitch the front and back arris lines
straight and true. Limit projections or depressions on the back surface to not exceed a batter of 25
millimeters horizontal to 75 millimeters vertical.

Saw, point, or smooth quarry split the front exposed face of the vertical stone curb and form to an
approximately true plane. Limit projections or depressions on the remaining face distance to
25 millimeters or less from the plane of the exposed face.

Square the ends of vertical stone curb with the top back and face and finish so when the sections
are placed end to end, shows no space more than 13 millimeters in the joint for the full width of the
top surface and for the entire exposed front face. The remainder of the end may break back no more
than 100 millimeters from the plane of the joint. Cut the joints of circular or curved stone curb on
radial lines.

The minimum length of any segment of vertical stone curb is 1200 millimeters, but the length may
vary where a depressed or modified section of curb is required for driveways, crossings, or
closures.

Section 609 – Curb and Gutter 560

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Type 2. Conform to the requirements of type 1 stone curb for slope stone curb except as
follows:

The maximum allowable projection or depression on a horizontal top surface is limited to

13 millimeters. On other exposed faces, the maximum allowable projection or depression is limited
to 25 millimeters.

For unexposed surfaces, the maximum allowable projection or depression from a true plane on a
600-millimeters length is 75 millimeters.

The maximum allowable space showing on exposed faces between adjacent segments of slope
stone curb is 19 millimeters. The minimum length of any segment of slope stone curb is
600-millimeters.

Clean the curb material thoroughly and wet it just before setting. Set the curb in bedding material so
the face and top lines are to line and grade. Make the joints 13 to 25 millimeters wide and fill the joints
with mortar.
Complete the first 8 meters of curb to demonstrate the ability to build a curb conforming to these
requirements. Do not continue construction until the 8-meter test section is approved.

Where a concrete pavement is constructed contiguous to the curb, construct the joints in the curb
directly in line with the pavement expansion joints.

Make the curb joint 19 millimeters wide and fill it with expansion joint filler of the same nominal
thickness as the pavement joint. Fill voids between the joint filler and the curb with mortar.

609.05 Concrete Curb or Curb and Gutter. Perform work according to Section 601. The curb or
curb and gutter may be cast-in-place or slip-formed.

(a) Cast-in-place. Use forms that extend for the full depth of the concrete. Use curved forms for
curb with a radius of 90 meters or less.

(1) Contraction joints. Construct curb in sections of uniform 3-meter lengths. Construct
contraction joints 3 millimeters wide. Use metal divider plates. When the curb is constructed
adjacent to or on concrete pavement, match the contraction joints in the pavement.
(2) Expansion joints. Form expansion joints at intervals of 18 meters using a ¾-inch
(19-millimeters) thick preformed expansion joint filler. Where the curb is constructed
adjacent to or on rigid pavement, match the expansion joints in the pavement.
Finish the concrete smooth and even with a wood float. Broom finish parallel to the curb line
according to Subsection 552.14(c)(2). When an exposed aggregate finish is required, finish
according to Subsection 552.14(c)(4). Leave forms in place for 24 hours or until the concrete has
set sufficiently so the forms can be removed without harming the curb.

(b) Slip-formed. Use a self-propelled automatic curb machine or a paver with curb attachments.
Use a machine that is heavy enough to obtain consolidation without the machine riding above the
foundation.

Adjust the concrete aggregate gradation, if necessary, to produce a curb or curb and gutter that has
well defined web marks of water on the surface. Remove and replace sections with craters larger

Section 609 – Curb and Gutter 561

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

than 3⁄16 inch (5 millimeters) or other sections determined to be damaged or defective. Repairing
surface craters and other defective sections by plastering is not permitted.

After the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit sawing without damage, saw contraction
joints according to Subsection 609.05(a)(1) Construct expansion joints according to Subsection
609.05 (a)(2).

609.06 Asphalt Concrete Curb. Where curb is constructed on a pavement, place a tack coat according
to Section 412 on the area under the curb.

Construct asphalt concrete curb according to Section 403. Use a self-propelled automatic curb machine
or a paver with curb attachments that is heavy enough to compact a curb without riding above the
foundation. Make the curb uniform in texture, shape, and density. Curb may be constructed by other
means only in short sections or sections with short radii.

609.07 Resetting Stone or Precast Concrete Curb. Carefully remove, clean, and store the curb. Cut
or fit the curb as necessary for installation. Replace lost, damaged, or destroyed curb. Reset the curb
according to Subsection 609.04.

609.08 Wheelstops. Pin the wheelstops in place with two (900-millimeter sections of No. 6 (19M)
reinforcing steel or 19-millimeter steel rods. Reset wheelstops in the same manner.

609.09 Acceptance. See Table 609.1 for sampling, testing, acceptance requirements.

Material for mortar will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03. Mortar will be evaluated
under Subsection 106.04.

Precast units (curb and wheel stops) will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Bedding material will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Stone for stone curbing will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Construction of curb and gutter, and wheelstops will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.04.

Excavation and backfill will be evaluated under Section 209.

Asphalt concrete will be evaluated under Section 403.

Concrete will be evaluated under Section 601.

Measurement

609.10 Measure the Section 609 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring for curb or curb and gutter, make no deduction in length for drainage structures
installed in the curb section or for driveway and handicap access ramp openings where the gutter is
continuous across the opening.

Section 609 – Curb and Gutter 562

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Payment

609.11 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 609 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 609 – Curb and Gutter 563

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 609.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Source
Bedding Measured and Gradation − Subsection 1 per Source of Yes Before Not required
material tested for 704.02 soil type material using in when using
(704.02) conformance and source work Government-
(106.04) of material provided
source
Liquid limit − AASHTO " " " " "
R 58 & T 89,
Method A
Production
Bedding Measured and Gradation − AASHTO 1 per Production Yes 4 −
material tested for T 27 & T 11 500 m3 output hours
(704.02) conformance or
(106.04) stockpile
Liquid limit − AASHTO " " " " −
R 58 & T 89,
Method A

Section 609 – Curb and Gutter 564

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 610. — HORIZONTAL DRAINS

Description

610.01 This work consists of constructing horizontal drains, including collector systems.

Material

610.02 Conform to the following Subsection:

Horizontal drains 708.05(d)

Construction Requirements

610.03 Qualifications. Provide on-site supervisors and installation personnel with experience
installing and testing horizontal drains. Submit the following for approval at least 30 days before
starting work:

(a) Names of personnel; and

(b) A résumé for each individual describing their experience on at least 5 horizontal drain projects
of similar complexity over the past 5 years. Include project names, locations and contact
information for project owners.

610.04 General. Verify location, elevation, spacing, and orientation of the horizontal drains
installation.

Furnish pipe and fittings with a minimum outside diameter of 38 millimeters, or as specified. Furnish
slotted pipe with three rows of slots cut circumferentially in the pipe 120 degrees apart. Make the width
of the slots 0.25 millimeters, with the total slot opening area equal 0.0003 square meters per meter of
pipe. Material for couplings, cleanouts, elbows, and other fixtures required for collection of water are
to be compatible with the installed drain pipe.

The locations for installing horizontal drains as shown on the plans are approximate. The exact
locations will be determined by the Engineer. Pipe drains that begin more than 300 millimeters or
terminate more than 1.1 meters per 30 meters installed pipe from their planned locations, damaged in
construction, or are improperly installed, will be rejected by the Engineer.

610.05 Drilling Holes. Drill holes with rotary equipment capable of drilling 75- to 150-millimeter
diameter holes up to 180 meters to designated lines and grades through soil and rock formations. Keep
a log of material types, production rates, and estimated water flows encountered during drilling. Install
horizontal drains at a minimum upward angle of 3±2 degrees along the entire drain alignment, or as
directed by the Engineer. During drilling operations, determine the elevation of the drilled hole at 30-
meter intervals and at the upper end of the completed horizontal drain hole by inserting tubes or pipes
and measuring liquid levels, or by other approved means.

Dispose of drilling water and water encountered during drilling according to National and local
regulations.

Section 610 – Horizontal Drains 565

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

610.06 Installing Horizontal Drain. Tightly plug the entrance end of the slotted pipe with a rounded
or pointed extension that does not extend more than 150 millimeters beyond the end of the pipe. Insert
the pipe inside the drill rod and then retract the drill rod so the drilled hole is cased with the slotted pipe
for the full drilled depth. Connect additional pipe as necessary to form a continuous tube.

Use un-slotted pipe for the last 6 meters at the outlet end. Seal the space between the drilled hole and
the un-slotted pipe for at least 3 meters at the outlet end with an approved impermeable material. Do
not seal the space between the drilled hole and the slotted pipe.

610.07 Installing Outlet Drains and Collector Systems. Attach outlet drain pipe to the ends of
horizontal drains by means of a tee or street ell. Install a collector system of the type, kind, and size as
shown in the plans.

For pipe drain installations draining directly to daylight, cover the outlet end of the pipe with a
removable screen made of 1.4-millimete) diameter galvanized wires having approximate 13- by
13-millimeter mesh openings.

610.08 Acceptance. Material furnished for horizontal drains will be evaluated under Subsections
106.02 and 106.03.

Construction of horizontal drains will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

610.09 Measure the Section 610 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

610.10 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 610 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 610 – Horizontal Drains 566

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 611. — WATER SYSTEMS

Description

611.01 This work consists of constructing or reconstructing water systems.

This work shall include the relocation, replacement, and adjustment of waterline and its
appurtenances

Material

611.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Bedding material 704.02

Seamless copper water tube and fittings 707.16
Smooth wall polyethylene (PE) pipe 708.01
(for water distribution systems)
Smooth wall polyvinyl chloride pipe 708.05
(for water distribution systems)
Steel pipe 717.06

Construction Requirements

611.03 General. Conform to the standards of APWA, the AWWA, International Building Code, and
local/agency plumbing and safety codes.

Submit at the preconstruction conference, a certified cost breakdown by individual items when water
systems are paid the lump sum item for use in making progress payments and price adjustments.

Obtain permits, arrange for inspections, and pay fees necessary to obtain water service.

Excavate according to Section 209. Bed the pipe according to Subsection 209.08(b).

Coordinate service interruptions with the user or owner of the waterline. Contractor shall determine
where valves are located prior to any excavation so that the water line can be isolated if in the event the
water line is damaged during construction. Provide temporary waterlines to ensure a water supply is
maintained. Connection work may be required during times other than normal working hours. Do not
stop work on a connection until it is completed.

Dispose of disinfectant for water lines according to Subsection 107.01. Do not dispose of disinfectant
in a manner that could enter a body of water.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of all waterline leaks or breakage that may occur
during the construction of the drainage culvert replacement and until the project is officially accepted
by the Government. All repairs shall be made immediately after discovery of leaks or breakages and
shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Government and the owner of the water line.

611.04 Backfilling. Backfill according to Subsection 209.09, except hand-place the backfill to a depth
of 300 millimeters above the top of the pipe. Remove rocks and hard lumps from the hand-placed
layer.

Section 611 – Water Systems 567

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

611.05 Acceptance. Material for water systems will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.03.

Installation of water systems will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Excavation and backfill will be evaluated under Section 209.

Measurement

611.06 Measure the Section 611 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring waterlines and encasement pipes, measure along the flow line including the length
through tees, bends, valves, or other fixtures.

Payment

611.07 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 611 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Payment for lump sum pay items will be prorated based on the total work completed.

Section 611 – Water Systems 568

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 612. — SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS

Description

612.01 This work consists of constructing gravity sanitary sewer systems. This work shall also
include the relocation and permanent adjustment of sewer system appurtenances.

Material

612.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsections.

Bedding material 704.02

Cast iron soil pipe and fittings 707.15
Concrete water and waste water structures 725.09(e)
Plastic pipe 708

Construction Requirements

612.03 General. Furnish either cast iron or plastic sanitary sewer lines. Furnish material and
workmanship conforming to the standards of the AWWA, International Building Code, and local
plumbing and safety codes.

Submit at the preconstruction conference, a certified cost breakdown by individual items when sanitary
sewer systems are paid the lump sum item for use in making progress payments and price adjustments.

Obtain permits, arrange for inspections, and pay fees necessary to obtain sewerage service.

Excavate according to Section 209. Bed the pipe according to Subsection 209.08(b).

Coordinate service interruptions with the user or owner of the sewerline. Provide temporary sewerlines
to ensure a sewer supply is maintained. Connection work may be required during times other than
normal working hours. Do not stop work on a connection until it is completed.

Dispose of disinfectant for sewer lines according to Subsection 107.01. Do not dispose of disinfectant
in a manner that could enter a body of water.

612.04 Laying Sewer Lines. Inspect each joint and clean the pipe and bell before placing in the trench.
Lay the sewer line from the lower end with the spigot ends pointing in the direction of flow. Fully
support each length between joints and check for line and grade before placing the next length.

Check the gasket for proper positioning and shove sewer pipe into proper position where premolded
watertight gaskets are used.

Position the pipe and fill the joint completely with joint sealer when poured joints are used. Allow the
sealer to cool completely before removing the runner.

612.05 Backfilling. Backfill according to Subsection 611.04. Flush the lines with water to ensure they
are unobstructed after backfilling.

Section 612 – Sanitary Sewer Systems 569

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

612.06 Acceptance. Material for sanitary sewer systems will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02
and 106.03.

Installation of sanitary sewer systems will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Excavation will be evaluated under Section 209.

Backfilling will be evaluated under Subsection 611.04.

Measurement

612.07 Measure the Section 612 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring sewer lines, measure along the flow line including the length through valves, ells,
tees, valve boxes, reducers, manholes, or other fixtures. Where two different sizes enter or exit a
manhole, measure each size to the center of the manhole.

Payment

612.08 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 612 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Payment for lump sum pay items will be prorated based on the total work completed.

Section 612 – Sanitary Sewer Systems 570

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 613. — SIMULATED STONE MASONRY SURFACE

Description

613.01 This work consists of using concrete, color/stain, and grout to simulate the texture and color of
native stone masonry in the stone pattern shown on the plans. It consists of the following:

(a) Designing and furnishing textured form liners;

(b) Installing form liners;

(c) Applying a surface finish (color/stain application) that duplicates the unique coloring and
mottled appearance of stone masonry; and

(d) Preparing a simulated stone masonry test wall and demonstrating the surface finish before
beginning production work.

Material

613.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Neat hydraulic cement grout 725.13(a)(2)

Penetrating stain 719.08
Preformed expansion joint filler 712.01(b)

Construction Requirements

613.03 Form Liner Fabrication. Take an impression of the stone shape, texture, and mortar joints
from a designated location. Design form liners from the impressions according to the stone pattern
shown on the plans. Submit detailed drawings of the form liner for approval according to Subsection
104.03.

613.04 Test Wall. Before production work on the simulated stone masonry, construct a 900 millimeter
high, by 600-millimeter wide, by 3-meter-long test wall according to Section 552 and these
specifications.

Cast the test wall on site, using the same forming methods, procedures, form liner, texture
configuration, expansion joint, concrete mixture, and color/stain application proposed for the
production work. Demonstrate the quality and consistency of joint treatment, end treatment, top
embossing methods, back treatment, and color/stain application on the test wall. If a test wall is
unacceptable, construct a new test wall.

Begin production structural concrete work only after the test wall is approved. Begin production
color/stain application only after the color/stain application on the test wall is approved. Dispose of the
test wall after use.

613.05 Form Liner Installation. Furnish a form liner that attaches easily to the forming system.
Install the form liner so it does not compress more than 6 millimeters during the concrete pour.

Section 613 – Simulated Stone Masonry Surface 571

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Attach the form liners to the form. Attach adjacent form liners to each other with less than a 3
millimeter seam. Do not repeat the form liner pattern between expansion joints or within 6 meter
intervals, whichever is greater.

Form expansion joints at the intervals shown on the plans. Blend the butt joints into the pattern and the
final concrete surface.

Coordinate the forms with wall ties. Place form tie holes in the high point of rustication or in the mortar
joint.

Clean off build-up before reusing form liners. Visually inspect each liner for blemishes and tears.
Repair the liner before installation.

613.06 Top Surface. Emboss the plastic concrete in the exposed top surface by stamping, tooling,
troweling, hand shaping, or a combination thereof, to simulate the stone masonry texture and mortared
joints. Match the side pattern of the formed mortared joints. Immediately after the free surface water
evaporates and the finish embossing is complete, cure the concrete for 7 days according to Subsection
552.15(b). Do not use liquid membrane curing compounds.

613.07 Form Liner Removal. Within 24 hours after placing concrete, remove or break free the form
liners without causing concrete surface deterioration or weakness in the substratum. Remove form tie
material to a depth of at least 25 millimeters below the concrete face without spalling and damaging the
concrete.

Cure the concrete for 7 days according to Subsection 552.15(b). Do not use liquid membrane curing
compounds.

613.08 Preparation of Concrete Surface. Finish exposed formed concrete surfaces according to
Subsection 552.16(b). Finish so that vertical seams, horizontal seams, and butt joint marks are not
visible. Minimize grinding and chipping to avoid exposing aggregate.

Provide a completed surface free of blemishes, discolorations, surface voids, and conspicuous form
marks. Make the finished texture and patterns continuous without visual disruption.

613.09 Color/Stain Application. Age concrete, including patches, at least 30 days. Clean the surface
of latency, dirt, dust, grease, and any foreign material by approved methods.

Remove efflorescence with a pressure water wash. Use a fan nozzle held perpendicular to the surface at
a distance between 600 to 900 millimeter. Use a minimum 20 megapascals pressure at a rate of 12 to
16 liters per minute. Do not sand blast surfaces that receive color/stain.

Correct surface irregularities created by the surface cleaning.

Maintain the concrete temperature between 4 and 30 °C when applying color/stain and for 48 hours
after applying color/stain.

Color/stain exposed concrete surfaces. Use a color/stain application suitable to obtain the appearance of
the native stone masonry. Use at least 3 colors/stains.

When required at boundaries between two color tones or between surfaces receiving color at different
times, take care and provide protection to avoid over-spray and color overlap.

Section 613 – Simulated Stone Masonry Surface 572

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Apply grout of a natural cement color to each form joint. Use sufficient grout so the over-spray of the
color/stain is not visible. Give the form pattern grout joint the appearance of mortared joints in
completed masonry.

Recoat areas inconsistent with the approved test wall.

Treat expansion joints with caulk/grout to blend with the appearance of the adjacent stone or mortar
joint.

613.10 Acceptance. Material for simulated stone masonry surface treatment will be evaluated under
Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Installation of form liners will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Application of color/stain to exposed concrete surfaces will be evaluated under Subsection 106.02.

Construction of the simulated stone masonry test wall will be evaluated under Subsection 106.02.

Measurement

613.11 Measure the Section 613 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

613.12 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 613 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 613 – Simulated Stone Masonry Surface 573

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 614. — LEAN CONCRETE BACKFILL

Description

614.01 This work consists of constructing lean concrete backfill or flowable fill.

Material

614.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Aggregate for lean concrete backfill 703.15

Fly ash 725.04(a)
Hydraulic cement 701.01
Water 725.01(a)

Construction Requirements

614.03 Composition of Mix. Design a well-graded, flowable, self-leveling, mix conforming to

Table 703.10. Verify the mix design with trial batches prepared from the same sources proposed for the
mix. Submit the following for approval at least 21 days before production:

(a) Type and sources of aggregates;

(b) Type and source of cement;

(c) Mix proportions;

(d) Type of cement and fly ash (if used in the mix);

(e) Commercial certifications for cement, fly ash, admixtures, and aggregate;

(f) Target values for water/cement ratio and slump; and

(g) Compressive strength at 7 days of 0.52 to 1.8 megapascals maximum.

614.04 General. Perform the work described under Section 209.

Do not place lean concrete backfill in contact with aluminum or aluminum-coated structures.

Do not use lean concrete backfill above the top of subgrade.

614.05 Mixing and Placing Lean Concrete Backfill. Mix lean concrete backfill by pugmill, rotary
drum, or other approved mixer to obtain a uniform mix.

Place lean concrete backfill in a uniform manner that prevents voids in, or segregation of, the backfill.

When backfilling around culverts and other structures, place lean concrete backfill in a manner that
does not float or shift the structure. Bring the backfill up evenly on all sides of the structure.

When placing lean concrete backfill at or below an atmospheric temperature of 2°C, perform the work
under Subsection 552.10(a).

Section 614 – Lean Concrete Backfill 574

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Wait at least 4 hours before backfilling over lean concrete backfill.

614.06 Acceptance. Material for lean concrete backfill will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02
and 106.03.

Lean concrete backfilling will be evaluated under Subsection 106.02.

Measurement

614.07 Measure the Section 614 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring lean concrete backfill by the cubic meter, measure in the hauling vehicle.

Payment

614.08 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 614 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 614 – Lean Concrete Backfill 575

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 615. — SIDEWALKS, PADS,

AND PAVED MEDIANS

Description

615.01 This work consists of constructing sidewalks, pads, and paved medians.

Sidewalks, pads, and paved medians are designated as concrete, asphalt, concrete paving unit, or
paving brick.

Material

615.02 Conform to the following Sections and Subsections:

Asphalt concrete 403

Bedding material 704.02
Elastomeric joint sealant 712.01(a)(4)
Minor concrete 601
Paving brick 725.08
Precast concrete units and accessories 725.09(c) or (f)
Preformed expansion joint filler for concrete 712.01(b)(1)
Reinforcing steel 709.01

Construction Requirements

615.03 General. Excavate and backfill according to Section 209. Place bedding material in layers not
exceeding 4 inches (100 millimeters) in compacted thickness. Compact each layer with at least three
passes of a lightweight mechanical tamper, roller, or vibratory system.

615.04 Concrete Sidewalks, Pads, and Medians. Perform the work according to Section 601. Use
forms extending the full depth of concrete.

(a) Joints. Construct joints perpendicular to the outside slab edges and other joints. Match the
joints in adjacent curb or pavement. Tool and remove free mortar and concrete from joints.

(1) Expansion joints. Construct at intervals not exceeding 6 meters. Use 19-millimeter thick
preformed expansion joint filler for the full depth of the joints. If joints are sealed, use
elastomeric joint sealant.
(2) Contraction joints. Construct at intervals not exceeding 3 meters. Form joints with a
jointing tool or saw joints to a depth of ¼ to ⅓ the thickness of the concrete and about
3 millimeters wide.
(3) Construction joints. Form construction joints around all appurtenances such as
manholes, utility poles, buildings, and bridges. Use 13-millimeter thick preformed expansion
joint filler to full depth of the joints. If joints are sealed, use elastomeric joint sealant.

Section 615 – Sidewalks, Pads, and Paved Medians 576

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Finishes. Provide a sidewalk finish. Edge slab edges and joints with a ¼-inch (6-millimeter)
radius edging tool.

(1) Sidewalk finish. See Subsection 552.14(c)(2).

(2) Exposed aggregate finish. See Subsection 552.14(c)(4).
Cure the concrete according to Subsection 552.15. Protect the work from pedestrian traffic for 72
hours.

615.05 Asphalt Concrete Sidewalks, Pads, and Medians. Perform the work according to Section
403.

615.06 Concrete Paving Unit and Paving Brick Sidewalks, Drive Pads, and Medians. Lay units or
bricks in successive courses on a prepared surface. Lay each course to grade. Relay courses that
deviate from a straight line by more than 55 millimeters in 9 meters.

Sweep and inspect the surface before the bed sets. Remove and replace imperfect units or bricks.

Chock the joints flush with a dry mixture of 4 parts sand and 1 part cement by mass and carefully water
the surface to saturate the joint filler.

615.07 Acceptance. See Table 615.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Paving brick, concrete paving units, and joint filler and sealant will be evaluated under Subsections
106.02 and 106.03.

Bedding material will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Construction of sidewalks, pads, and medians will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Excavation and backfill will be evaluated under Section 209.

Asphalt concrete will be evaluated under Section 403.

Concrete will be evaluated under Section 601.

Measurement

615.08 Measure the Section 615 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

615.09 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 615 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 615 – Sidewalks, Pads, and Paved Medians 577

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 615.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Source
Bedding Measured and Gradation − Subsection 1 per Source of Yes Before Not required
material tested for 704.02 soil type material using in when using
(704.02) conformance and work Government-
(106.04) source of provided
material source
Liquid limit − AASHTO " " " " "
R 58 & T 89,
Method A
Production
Bedding Measured and Gradation – AASHTO 1 per Production Yes 4 –
material tested for T 27 & T 11 500 m3 output or hours
(704.02) conformance stockpile
(106.04) Liquid limit – AASHTO " " " “ –
R 58 & T 89,
Method A

Section 615 – Sidewalks, Pads, and Paved Medians 578

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 616. — SLOPE PAVING

Description

616.01 This work consists of constructing concrete, masonry block, rubble, or cellular concrete block
slope paving.

Reinforced geotextile is designated according to Tables 714-5 and 714-6.

Material

616.02 Conform to the following Sections and Subsections:

Bedding material 704.02

Concrete masonry units 725.07
Minor concrete 601
Mortar 712.02
Nonshrink grout 725.13(b)
Paving brick 725.08
Reinforcement geotextile 714.04
Solid concrete interlocking paving units 725.09(f)
Stone masonry (rubble) 620
Topsoil 713.01
Welded deformed steel wire fabric 709.01(j)

Construction Requirements

616.03 General. Excavate and backfill according to Section 209. Place and compact bedding material
with at least three passes of a lightweight mechanical tamper, roller, or vibratory system.

616.04 Reinforcement Geotextile. When required, place reinforcement geotextile according to

Subsection 207.05. Bury the ends of the reinforcement geotextile for anchorage. Pin the strips at 1.5-
meters intervals to hold the reinforcement geotextile lap in place until slope paving is placed.

616.05 Concrete Slope Paving. Construct toe walls. Place welded steel wire fabric at the center of the
slab. Run the wire fabric continuously through the joints. Lap adjacent runs of wire fabric by at least
150 millimeters.

Perform concrete work according to Section 601. Place slabs starting at the bottom of the slope.
Construct horizontal joints parallel to the bottom of the slope and the vertical joints perpendicular to
the horizontal joints. Construct cold joints without filler.

Finish the surface according to Subsection 552.14(c)(2). Use a 6-millimeter radius edging tool on slab
edges and joints.

616.06 Masonry Block or Rubble Slope Paving. Begin placing masonry block or rubble at the
bottom of the slope. Place paving material on the bedding material with the flat face up and the longest
dimension parallel to the bottom of the slope. Ram the masonry block or rubble into place.

Section 616 – Slope Pavings 579

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Apply sufficient mortar on the exposed side to produce masonry block joints up to 13 millimeters wide
and rubble joints up to 25 millimeters wide. Ram the masonry block or rubble into place, so the mortar
is within 13 millimeters of the surface. Do not allow mortar to protrude above the surface. Clean
mortar stain from the surface.

616.07 Cellular Concrete Block Slope Paving. Begin placing blocks in a trench on firm foundation or
against a suitable anchorage at the bottom of the slope. Lay each block on the slope and bed it firmly
against adjoining blocks. Use grout to fill misaligned joints or breaks at slope changes. Do not grout
individual blocks to each other.

Spread topsoil loosely over the cellular block slope paving, partially filling the cell openings. When
required, establish turf according to Section 625.

616.08 Acceptance. See Table 616.1 for sampling, testing, and acceptance requirements.

Cellular concrete blocks, concrete masonry blocks, mortar, and welded steel wire fabric will be
evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Bedding material will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Slope paving construction will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Reinforcement geotextile will be evaluated under Section 207.

Excavation and backfill will be evaluated under Section 209.

Concrete will be evaluated under Section 601.

Rubble will be evaluated under Section 620.

Topsoil will be evaluated under Section 624.

Turf establishment will be evaluated under Section 625.

Measurement

616.09 Measure the Section 616 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

616.10 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 616 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 616 – Slope Pavings 580

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 616.1
Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Requirements
Material or Type of Characteristic Category Test Methods Sampling Point of Split Reporting Remarks
Product Acceptance Specifications Frequency Sampling Sample Time
(Subsection) (Subsection)
Material Source
Bedding Measured and Gradation − Subsection 1 per Source of Yes Before Not required
material tested for 704.02 soil type material using in when using
(704.02) conformance and work Government
(106.04) source of provided
material source
Liquid limit − AASHTO " " " " "
R 58 & T 89,
Method A
Slope Paving Production
Bedding Measured and Gradation – AASHTO 1 per Production Yes 4 –
material tested for T 27 & T 11 450 m3 output or hours
(704.02) conformance stockpile
(106.04) Liquid limit – AASHTO " " " " –
R 58 & T 89,
Method A

Section 616 – Slope Pavings 581

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 617. — GUARDRAIL

Description

617.01 This work consists of installing guardrail systems and modifying, removing and resetting, and
raising existing guardrail systems.

(a) Guardrail systems are designated as follows:

CRG — Curved radius W-beam guardrail

G1 — Cable guardrail
G2 — W-beam (weak post)
G3 — Box beam
G4 — Blocked-out W-beam standard barrier
G9 — Blocked-out thrie beam standard barrier
MB4 — Blocked-out W-beam median barrier
SBLG — Steel-backed log rail
SBTA — Steel-backed timber (SBT) guardrail/timber posts and block-out
SBTB — SBT guardrail/timber posts and no block-out
(b) Steel guardrail types are designated as follows:

I — Zinc-coated, 550 grams per square meter

II — Zinc-coated, 1100 grams per square meter
III — Painted rails
IV — Corrosion resistant (weathering) steel
(c) Steel guardrail classes are designated as follows:
A — Metal thickness — 2.67 millimeters (12-guage)
B — Metal thickness — 3.43 millimeters (10-guage)
(d) Terminals consist of posts, railing, hardware, and anchorage assembly necessary to construct
the type of terminal specified. Terminal types are designated as follows:

Flared — Straight or parabolic flared W beam terminal

G4-BAT — Back slope anchor terminal
G4-CRT — Cable releasing terminal
SBT-BAT — Back slope anchor terminal
SBT-FAT — Flared SBT anchor terminal
SBT-Tangent — Tangent SBT terminal
Tangent — Tangent W beam terminal

Material

617.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsections:

Guardrail blocks 710.08

Guardrail hardware 710.10
Guardrail nuts, bolts, and cables 710.09
Guardrail posts 710.07

Section 617 – Guardrail 582

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Minor concrete 601

Rail elements 710.06

Construction Requirements
617.03 General. Furnish guardrail systems and terminals that are crashworthy. When flared or tangent
terminals are required, submit drawings from the manufacturer for the terminals according to
Subsection 104.03.

Place concrete according to Section 601.

Perform welding according to Subsection 555.17.

617.04 Post Installation. Treat field cuts for wood posts with two coats of preservative specified in
Subsection 710.07. Do not place field cuts in contact with the ground.

Install the posts plumb and at the location, spacing, and elevation specified, or as directed by the
Engineer.

When the pavement surface is within 900 millimeter of the guardrail face, install posts before placing
the pavement surface. Protect posts from traffic by attaching the rail elements or by a method approved
by the Engineer.

Posts may be installed by either drilling or driving. Ensure posts installed by drilling have sufficiently
sized holes to permit thorough compaction of backfill material around the post. Backfill in compacted
layers not exceeding 300 millimeters. Replace posts damaged during driving operations.

When a post cannot be placed at its normal location due to an impenetrable object an additional
blockout may be added. If the post cannot be offset, follow the post in rock detail or use the long span
detail as shown in the plans or as approved by the Engineer. Do not change the post lengths or spacings
in terminal sections.

When it is not possible to maintain a 600-millimeter minimum distance between the back of the
guardrail post and the top of a 1V:2H or steeper slope, increase the standard post length by
300 millimeters.

617.05 Rail Element Installation. Do not modify specified hole diameters or slot dimensions.

(a) Steel rail. Shop bend curved guardrail with a radius of 45 meters or less.

Install rail elements in a smooth continuous line with the laps in the direction of traffic flow. Use
bolts that extend at least 6 millimeters, but not more than 25 millimeters beyond the nuts.

Paint scrapes on galvanized surfaces that expose the base metal with 2 coats of zinc-oxide paint.

(b) Steel-backed timber and log rail. Treat field cuts with 2 coats of preservative.

617.06 Terminal Sections. Do not connect the guardrail to cast-in-place anchors until the concrete has
cured 7 days. Install end anchor cables without slack.

617.07 Connection to Structure. Install posts, railing, hardware, and anchorage assembly necessary to
construct the type of connection to structure specified.

Section 617 – Guardrail 583

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

617.08 Guardrail Construction Exposed to Traffic. When a roadway is open to traffic during
construction, guardrail installations shall be completed within 5 working days from the day the
structure, pavement, shoulder, or whichever is the controlling item of work, is sufficiently completed to
allow guardrail installation. In areas where guardrail construction is not restricted by other
construction, removal of any existing guardrail and construction of new guardrail shall be completed
with 48 hours of starting work.

At the end of each day, securely bolt a rounded end section to the exposed end of the guardrail.

Schedule guardrail installation so work is finished before work suspension or other extended periods
of time.

617.09 Removing and Resetting Guardrail. Remove and store the existing rail elements, posts, and
appurtenances. Remove and dispose of posts that are set in concrete. Replace guardrail, posts, and
hardware damaged during removal, storage, or resetting. Backfill holes resulting from the removal of
guardrail posts and anchors with material approved by the Engineer. Dispose of material not used in
resetting guardrail according to Section 203.

617.10 Raising Guardrail. Remove the existing rail elements and appurtenances. Replace and reset
posts as needed. Replace rail elements, posts, and hardware damaged during the removal and raising.
Dispose of damaged material according to Section 203.

617.11 Acceptance. Material for guardrail will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Construction of guardrail will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Welding will be evaluated under Section 555.

Measurement

617.12 Measure the Section 617 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Measure transition sections from G9 rail to G4 rail as G9 rail.

Measure removing and resetting guardrail and raising guardrail including reset terminal sections.

Measure replacement posts (except replacement posts for posts damaged by construction operations)
used in the removing and resetting, or raising guardrail.

Payment

617.13 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 617 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 617 – Guardrail 584

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 618. — CONCRETE BARRIERS AND PRECAST

GUARDWALLS

Description

618.01 This work consists of constructing and resetting concrete barrier and precast guardwall systems.

Material

618.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsections:

Backer rod 712.01(f)

Guardrail hardware 710.10
Joint sealants 712.01(a)
Precast concrete barrier 725.09(b)
Preformed expansion joint filler 712.01(b)
Reinforcing steel 709.01
Structural concrete 552

Construction Requirements

618.03 General. Excavate and backfill according to Section 209.

Construct barriers and guardwalls that are crashworthy.

Furnish concrete Class A(AE) conforming to Section 552.

618.04 Concrete Barriers. Concrete barriers may be cast-in-place, slip-formed, or precast according
to Section 552. Finish the sides and top according to Subsection 552.16(a).

(a) Cast-in-place. Tool or saw cut contraction joints 6 millimeters wide and 50 millimeters deep 6-
meter intervals. Saw cut after the concrete has set sufficiently, but before shrinkage cracking
occurs. Decrease the depth of the saw cut at the edge adjacent to the pavement to prevent pavement
damage.

Place 19-millimeter preformed expansion joint filler in construction joints. Cut the joint filler to fit
the cross-sectional area at structures and barrier construction joints. Tool construction joint edges.
Seal joints according to Subsection 501.11.

(b) Slip-formed. Do not contact extruded concrete surface as it leaves the slip-form machine
except to remove offsets and fins by light troweling.

Make adjustments in the operation to correct any condition causing surface blemishes larger than
13 millimeters. Do not use water on the completed barrier to correct imperfections.

(c) Precast. Precast barriers in section lengths. Prepare the barrier foundation so it does not vary
over 6 millimeters when a 3-meter straightedge is laid along the centerline of the barrier. Align the
joints and connect adjacent sections.

Section 618 – Concrete Barriers and Precast Guardwalls 585

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Use cast-in-place barrier where transitions, split barriers, or gaps shorter than 3 meter require it. At
each joint between precast and cast-in-place barrier, provide hardware in the cast-in-place section to tie
its end to the abutting precast section.

618.05 Precast Concrete Guardwall.

(a) Fabrication. A full-size sample of the guardwall will be provided at a specified location.
Fabricate the guardwall to match the sample's shape, color, texture, and the following:

(1) Fabricate in a facility certified by the National Precast Concrete Association (NPCA) and
according to the NPCA 's Manual of Quality Control for Precast and Prestressed Concrete
Plants;
(2) Formulate the facing mixes, backing mixes, and structural concrete backup to produce
concrete mix designs of similar aggregate-cement ratios to minimize differences in shrinkage
factors and coefficients of thermal expansion and contraction. Formulate a concrete mixture
according to Subsection 552.03 to match the approved sample;
(3) Use epoxy-coated reinforcing steel at locations where the reinforcing steel is less than
50 millimeters from the exposed surface;
(4) Cast the sections straight and true;
(5) Cast the facing mixes at least 25 millimeters thick. Ensure a good bond between facing
and backup mixes; and
(6) Provide lifting devices with removable caps for each precast segment.
(b) Test section. Demonstrate the ability to match the sample by fabricating a 3-meter full-scale
guardwall test section and delivering it to the location of the sample for comparison. If the test
section is not approved, fabricate another test section according to (a) above. Do not construct
additional guardwall before the sample is approved. Approved test sections may be used in the
guardwall construction.

(c) Installation. Produce guardwall sections to match the approved test section. Repair or replace
damaged sections. Prepare the foundation by compacting the bedding material with at least 3
passes of a vibratory roller until there is no visible evidence of further consolidation. Place the
sections using backer rods and joint sealant in the section joints to match the false joints.

At 30-meter intervals and at low points in the guardwall, excavate outlet ditches and backfill with
150 millimeters of aggregate conforming to Subsection 703.12.

618.06 Terminal Sections. Where concrete barrier or precast guardwall is being constructed next to
roadway lanes open to traffic; connect an approved temporary terminal section, crash cushion, or
impact attenuator to the barrier or guardwall at the end of each shift.

618.07 Resetting. Reset concrete barrier, precast guardwall, and terminal sections according to
Subsections 618.03 and 618.06. Store concrete barrier and precast guardwall sections in an approved
location if not reset immediately.

Section 618 – Concrete Barriers and Precast Guardwalls 586

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

618.08 Acceptance. Material for concrete barrier and precast guardwall (except concrete and
reinforcing steel) will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Construction of concrete barriers and precast guardwalls will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02
and 106.04.

Concrete barrier and precast guardwall appearance will be evaluated under Subsection 106.02.

Concrete will be evaluated under Section 552.

Reinforcing steel will be evaluated under Section 554.

Measurement

618.09 Measure the Section 618 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Measure concrete barrier and precast guardwall excluding terminal sections.

Measure reset concrete barrier and precast guardwall in their relocated position including terminal
sections.

Payment

618.10 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 618 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 618 – Concrete Barriers and Precast Guardwalls 587

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 619. — FENCES, GATES, CATTLE GUARDS

AND BOLLARD POSTS

Description

619.01 This work consists of constructing fences, gates, cattle guards, and bollard posts and removing
and resetting fence.

Material

619.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsections:

Barbed wire 710.01

Chain link fence 710.03
Fence gates 710.05
Fence posts and bollards 710.04
Minor concrete 601
Neat hydraulic cement grout 725.13(a)(2)
Precast concrete units and accessories 725.09(g)
Reinforcing steel 709.01
Temporary plastic fence 710.11
Woven wire 710.02

Construction Requirements

619.03 Fences and Gates.

(a) General. Clear along the fence line. Remove and dispose of trees, brush, logs, upturned stumps,
roots of downed trees, rubbish, and debris according to Subsection 201.06. Clear a 3-meter width
for chain link fence and a 900-millimeter width for wire fence.

Grubbing is not required except where short and abrupt changes in the ground contour require
removal of stumps to properly grade the fence line. Remove or cut stumps according to Subsection
201.04(b).

Perform clearing and leveling with minimum disturbance to the terrain outside the fence line.

Schedule the fence installation, provide temporary fence, or other adequate means to prevent
livestock from entering the project right-of-way, easements, or adjoining properties.

At bridges, cattle underpasses, and culverts, connect new fence to structure to permit free passage
of livestock under or through the structure.

(b) Chain link fence and gates.

(1) Posts. Space posts at not more than 3-meter intervals. Measure the post spacing interval
horizontally. Set posts vertically.
Set posts in concrete according to Section 601.

Section 619 – Fences, Gates, Cattle Guards, and Bollard Posts 588
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Where solid rock is encountered without overburden, drill line post holes at least
350 millimeters deep. Drill end, corner, gate, and pull posts at least 500 millimeters deep in
the solid rock. Make the hole width or diameter at least 25 millimeters greater than the post
width or diameter. Cut the post to the required length before installation or drill the hole deep
enough to set the post at the required height. Set and plumb the post and fill the hole with
grout. Thoroughly work the neat hydraulic cement grout into the hole to eliminate voids.
Crown the grout to drain water away from the post.
Where solid rock is covered with soil or loose rock overburden, set posts to the plan depth or
to the minimum depth into the solid rock as specified above, whichever is less. When solid
rock is encountered before the plan depth, grout the portion of the post in solid rock and
backfill the post hole from the solid rock to the top of the ground with concrete.
Provide end, gate, corner, and pull posts with adjacent brace posts as shown on the plans. A
change in the fence alignment of 20 degrees or more is considered a corner.
(2) Top rail. Install top rails through the loop caps of the line posts, forming a continuous
brace from end-to-end of each stretch of fence. Join lengths of top rail with sleeve-type
couplings. Securely fasten top rails to terminal posts by pressed steel fittings or other
appropriate means.
(3) Tension wire. Attach tension wire to end, gate, corner, or pull posts by bands and clamps.
Either thread the top tension wire through the line post loop caps or hold in open slots in a
manner to limit vertical movement. Tie or attach the bottom tension wire to the bottom of the
line posts by ties or clamps in a manner that prevents vertical movement. Apply sufficient
tension to avoid excess sag between posts. On the top tension wire, provide one turnbuckle or
ratchet take-up in each run of fence.
(4) Fence fabric. For fences placed on the right-of-way, place fence fabric on the post face
away from the highway. On curved alignment, place the fence fabric on the post face on the
outside of the curve. For residential fences and fences off the right-of-way, place fence fabric
on the post face designated by the Engineer.
Place the fabric approximately 25 millimeters above the ground and on a straight line
between posts. Excavate high points of the ground to maintain grade. Do not fill in
depressions without prior approval.
Stretch the fabric taut and securely fasten the fabric to the posts. Do not stretch using a motor
vehicle. Use stretcher bars and fabric bands to fasten to end, gate, corner, and pull posts or
weave the fabric into the fastening loops of roll-formed posts.
Fasten fabric to line posts using wire ties, metal bands, or other approved method. Fasten the
top and bottom edge of the fabric with tie wires or hog rings to the top rail or tension wires,
as applicable.
Join rolls of fabric by weaving a single strand into the ends of the rolls to form a continuous
mesh.
(5) Gates. Fasten fabric to the end bars of the gate frame by stretcher bars and fabric bands.
Fasten fabric to the top and bottom bars of the gate frame by tie wires similar to the method
specified for fence fabric or by other approved standard methods.

Section 619 – Fences, Gates, Cattle Guards, and Bollard Posts 589
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Thoroughly clean welded connections on gate frames where the smelter coating has been
burned with a wire brush. Remove traces of the welding flux and loose or cracked smelter.
Paint the cleaned areas with two coats of zinc-oxide paint.
Provide a concrete footing for the drop-bar locking device on double metal gates. Make a
hole to receive the locking bar to the depth specified by the manufacturer of the locking
device.
Hinge each single gate to prevent removal of the gate without tools. Set the gate in an
approximately horizontal plane. Set the gate so it swings freely inward and outward and
fastens securely in its latch holder, or in the case of double gates, in its latch holder and gate
stops. Set double gates on their respective hinge pintles to provide a common horizontal
plane in which each single gate swings. Set gates to swing open at least 90 degrees in each
direction.
(c) Wire fences and gates.

(1) Posts. Excavate holes for posts, footings, and anchors as shown. Space posts at intervals
shown for the type of fence being installed. Measure post spacing interval parallel to the
existing ground slope. Set posts in a vertical position. Backfill post holes in 150-millimeter
lifts. Tamp and compact each lift.
Wood posts may be driven in place if the method of driving does not damage the post. Metal
posts may be driven. Set metal corner, gate, end, and pull posts in concrete.
Where solid rock is encountered without overburden, drill line post holes at least
350 millimeters deep and end, corner, gate, and pull posts at least 500 millimeters deep in the
solid rock. Make the hole width or diameter at least 25 millimeters greater than the post width
or diameter. Cut the post to the required length before installation or drill the hole deep
enough to set the post at the required height. Set and plumb the post and fill the hole with
grout. Thoroughly work the grout into the hole to eliminate voids. Crown the grout to drain
water away from the post. Metal posts set in this manner do not require anchor plates and
concrete footings.
Where solid rock is covered with soil or loose rock overburden, set posts to the plan depth or
to the minimum depth into the solid rock as specified above, whichever is less. When the
depth of overburden is greater than 300 millimeters, use an anchor plate on steel line posts
and backfill steel end, corner, gate, and pull posts with concrete from the solid rock to top of
the ground. When the depth of overburden is 300 millimeters or less, anchor plates and
concrete backfill are not required. Grout the portion of the post in solid rock.
Install corner posts at changes in alignment of 30 degrees or more. Where new fence joins an
existing fence, set end or corner posts, as necessary, and attach in a manner satisfactory to the
Engineer.
(2) Braces. Limit fence runs to no more than 200 meters between adjacent corner braces, gate
braces, end braces, or line braces. Install line braces at uniform intervals so the distance
between any two braces is 200 meters or less. Construct braces before placing the fence
fabric and wires on posts.
(a) Metal braces. Provide corner posts and pull posts with two braces, one each direction
from the post in the main fence line. Provide end posts and gate posts with one brace in
the line of the fence. Attach metal braces to the metal end, corner, pull, and gate posts and

Section 619 – Fences, Gates, Cattle Guards, and Bollard Posts 590
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

set in concrete as shown in the plans.

(b) Wood braces. Tap the posts to receive the braces. Anchor the brace to the post with
three 16d nails or a 10 by 100-millimeters dowel. Install brace wires as shown and twist
together until the entire assembly is taut and firm. Lightly notch the posts to position the
brace wire. Drive three staples at each notch to secure wire.
(3) Barbed wire and woven wire. Place barbed wire and woven wire on the side of the post
facing away from the highway. On curved alignment, place the barbed wire and the woven
wire on the post face on the outside of the curve. Tightly stretch and fasten barbed wire and
woven wire to the posts.
Apply tension according to the manufacturer’s recommendations using a mechanical stretcher
or other device designed for such use. Evenly distribute the pull over the longitudinal wires in
the woven wire so not more than 50 percent of the original depth of the tension curves is
removed. Do not use a motor vehicle to stretch the wire.
Splicing of barbed wire and woven wire between posts is permitted provided not more than
two splices, spaced at least 15 meters apart, occur in any one run of fence. Use wrap or
telephone type splices for the longitudinal woven wire and barbed wire with each end
wrapped around the other wire for not less than six complete turns.
(4) Fastening barbed wire and woven wire. End the woven wire and barbed wire at each
end, corner, gate, and pull post. Wrap each line of barbed wire and each longitudinal wire of
the woven wire around the post and then itself with at least four turns. Where wood posts are
used, staple the wires tightly to the posts.
At line posts, fasten the woven wire to the post at top and bottom and at intermediate points
not exceeding 300 millimeters apart. Fasten each strand of barbed wire to each line post. Use
wire ties or clamps to fasten the wires to metal posts. Securely splice tie wires to the fence on
both sides of the post so there are two loops behind the post and one loop in front. On wood
line posts, drive U-shaped staples diagonally across the wood grain so that both points do not
enter between the same grain. In depressions where wire uplift occurs, drive staples with
points slightly upward. On level ground and over knolls, slope the points slightly downward.
Drive the staples just short of actual contact with the wires to permit free longitudinal
movement of those lines and to prevent damage to the protective coating.
At grade depressions, alignment angles, and other locations where stresses tending to pull
posts from the ground or out of alignment are created, snub or guy the wire fence. Attach the
guy wire to each strand of barbed wire and to the top and bottom wires of woven wire in a
manner to maintain the entire fence in its normal shape. Attach the guy wire to a deadman
anchor buried not less than 600 millimeters in the ground or to an approved anchor at a point
that best serves to resist the pull of the wire fence. If necessary to guy the fence in solid rock,
grout the guy wire in a hole 50 millimeters in diameter and 250 millimeters deep. Deadman
may also be fastened to posts. Place the deadman anchors at locations as directed.
Where required, install vertical cinch stays as shown on Construction Drawings. Twist the
wire to permit weaving into the horizontal fence wires to provide rigid spacing. Weave
barbed wires and the top, middle, and bottom wire of the woven wire, as applicable, into the
cinch stay.
Where existing fence intersects the new fence, cut the existing fence material or, splice in
kind, new material as necessary, and fasten each longitudinal wire of the woven wire and

Section 619 – Fences, Gates, Cattle Guards, and Bollard Posts 591
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

each strand of the barbed wire to a new end post in line with or immediately adjacent to the
new fence line.
(5) Gate.
(a) Wire gates. Construct wire gates of the same material as the fence and as shown.
Provide a taut and well-aligned closure of the opening, capable of being readily opened
and closed by hand.
(b) Metal gates. Install metal gates and fittings to gate posts previously set. Firmly attach
the fittings to the posts and gates. Hinge each single gate to prevent removal of the gate
without tools. Set the gate in an approximately horizontal plane. Set the gate so it swings
freely inward and outward and fastens securely in its latch holder, or in the case of double
gates, in its latch holder and gate stops. Set double gates and their respective pintles to
provide a common horizontal plane in which each single gate swings. Set gates to swing
open at least 90 degrees in each direction.
For double gates, provide a drop-bar locking device with a concrete footing
300 millimeters in diameter and 300 millimeters deep. Crown the top of the footing and
make a hole to receive the locking bar. Make the diameter and depth of the hole in the
footing as specified by the manufacturer of the locking device.
(c) Wood gates. Install wood gates similar to metal gates and as shown in the plans.
619.04 Grounding Fences. Where an electric line crosses the fence line, ground the fence. Drive an
2.4-meter long, 13-millimeter minimum diameter galvanized or copper coated steel rod into the ground
under the fence directly below the point of crossing. Drive the rod vertically until the top is
150 millimeters below the ground surface. Connect the grounding rod to each fence element with a
6-millimeter diameter solid copper conductor or equivalent. Either braze the connections or fasten with
noncorrosive clamps.

Where an electric line runs parallel or nearly parallel to and above the fence, ground the fence at each
end or gate post or at intervals not exceeding 500 meters.

Where vertical penetration of the grounding rod cannot be accomplished, use an equivalent horizontal
grounding system.

619.05 Remove and Reset Fence. Remove existing fence and reset to approximately the same
condition as the original fence. Salvage material in the existing fence and incorporate the material into
the reset fence. When posts are set in concrete, remove concrete from old post and reset in new
concrete. Replace fence material damaged beyond reuse. Firmly reset posts on new alignment. Space
posts and attach the horizontal members or wires to posts the same as the original fence. Furnish and
use new material to fasten members or wires to posts.

619.06 Temporary Fence. When necessary, construct temporary fence to keep traffic such as
pedestrian, livestock, and vehicular off the project. Maintain the temporary fence during construction
of the project or until the fence is directed to be removed. Dispose of temporary fence according to
Subsection 203.05(a).

619.07 Cattle Guards.

(a) Excavating and backfilling. Perform the work described under Section 209. Excavate
foundation to depth with sufficient space for proper installation of formwork.

Section 619 – Fences, Gates, Cattle Guards, and Bollard Posts 592
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

When the cattle guard is to be installed on new embankment, complete and compact the
embankment according to Section 204 before excavating for footing.

(b) Concrete foundation. Concrete cattle guard foundations may be cast-in-place or precast.
Construct cast-in-place concrete foundations according to Section 601. Set cattle guard units in the
foundation concrete before it hardens.

Finish stringer bearings to allow full bearing under each stringer. Firmly seat cattle guard on the
concrete to prevent rocking.

(c) Cattle guard. Fabricate cattle guard according to Section 555. Assemble and place guards as
shown on the plans. Securely fasten the cattle guard to the foundation. Fasten the metal wings as
shown on the plans. Connect fences and gates as shown in the plans. Weld according to
AASHTO/AWS Bridge Welding Code D1.5 (D1.5M).

Standard manufactured cattle guards may be used if approved. Furnish cattle guards with M-18
loading rating according to AASHTO. Provide suitable cleanouts and drainage. Submit drawings
according to Subsection 104.03.

(d) Painting. Paint according to Section 563. Apply one shop coat to metal parts. Apply two
additional coats in either the shop or in the field.

619.08 Bollards. Drill holes for bollards. Set posts plumb, backfill with approved material, and
compact.

619.09 Acceptance. Material for fences, gates, cattle guards, and bollards will be evaluated under
Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Construction and erection of fences, gates, cattle guards, and bollards will be evaluated under
Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Excavation and backfill for cattle guards will be evaluated under Section 209.

Structural steel work for cattle guards will be evaluated under Section 555.

Painting of cattle guards will be evaluated under Section 563.

Concrete work for cattle guards will be evaluated under Section 601.

Measurement
619.10 Measure the Section 619 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

619.11 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 619 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 619 – Fences, Gates, Cattle Guards, and Bollard Posts 593
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 620. — STONE MASONRY

Description

620.01 This work consists of constructing or rehabilitating stone masonry structures and the stone
masonry portions of composite structures.

Masonry class is designated as follows:

(a) Dimensioned masonry. Stones are cut in two or more dimensions and laid in a broken-course
pattern in mortar.

(b) Class A masonry. Stones are shaped, dressed to within ¼ inch (6 millimeters) of true line, and
laid in mortar.

(c) Class B masonry. Stones are shaped, dressed to within ¾ inch (19 millimeters) of true line, and
laid in mortar.

(d) Rubble masonry. Stones vary in size and shape, are roughly dressed, and laid in random
courses in mortar.

Material
620.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsections:

Minor concrete 601

Mortar 712.02
Neat hydraulic cement grout 725.13(a)(2)
Preformed expansion joint fillers 712.01(b)
Reinforcing steel 709.01
Rock for masonry structures 705.03

Construction Requirements

620.03 General. Submit stone samples representing the range of colors and sizes to be used 14 days
before beginning work.

Keep an adequate inventory of stone on the site to provide a variety of stones. Mix new stone with
existing stone to produce a uniform pattern and color.

Perform excavation and embankment according to Section 209.

620.04 Dressing rock. Remove thin or weak portions of rock. Dress face rock bed and joint lines to a
maximum variation from true line as follows:

• Dimensioned masonry Reasonably true

• Class A masonry 6 mm
• Class B masonry 19 mm

Section 620 – Stone Masonry 594

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

• Rubble masonry 38 mm
(a) Bed surfaces. Dress face rock bed surfaces normal to the face to a depth of 75 millimeters.
Beyond that point, do not exceed 25 millimeters in 300 millimeters the departure from normal for
dimensioned masonry or 50 millimeters in 300 millimeters for other classes.

(b) Joint surfaces. For dimensioned masonry, dress face rock joint surfaces normal to the bed
surface. For other classes of masonry, dress face rock joint surfaces to form an angle with the bed
surface of not less than 45 degrees.

Dress face rock joint surfaces normal to the face to a depth of 50 millimeters. Beyond that point, do
not exceed 25 millimeters in 300 millimeters departure from normal.

Do not round corners at the meeting of the bed and joint lines in excess of the following radii:

(1) Dimensioned masonry No rounding

(2) Class A masonry No rounding
(3) Class B masonry 25 mm
(4) Rubble masonry 38 mm)(c)
Arch ring rock joint surfaces. Dress ring rock joint surfaces radial to the arch or normal to
the front face to a depth of 75 millimeters). Beyond that point, the departure from the radial
or normal may not exceed 19 millimeters in 300 millimeters.
Dress the back surface adjacent to the arch barrel concrete parallel to the front face and normal to
the intrados to a depth of 150 millimeters. When concrete is placed after the masonry is
constructed, vary adjacent ring stones at least 150 millimeters in depth.

(d) Finish for exposed faces. Remove drill or quarry marks from exposed faces. Pitch face stones
to the line along beds and joints. Finish the exposed faces as specified in the contract. The
following abbreviations are used to represent the type of surface or dressing specified:

(1) Fine pointed (F.P.). Make point depressions approximately 10 millimeters apart. Limit
surface variations to 3 millimeters or less from the pitch line.
(2) Medium pointed (M.P.). Make point depressions approximately 15 millimeters apart.
Limit surface variations to 6 millimeters or less from the pitch line.
(3) Coarse pointed (C.P.). Make point depressions approximately 29 millimeters apart.
Limit surface variations to 10 millimeters or less from the pitch line.
(4) Split or seam face (S.). Provide a smooth appearance, without tool marks, with no
depressions below the pitch line, and no projection exceeding 19 millimeters beyond the pitch
line.
(5) Rock faced (R.F.). Provide an irregular projecting surface without tool marks, concave
surfaces below the pitch line, and projections beyond the specified pitch line. For example,
the specification "38 R.F" means no projections 38 millimeters beyond the pitch line. Where
a "variable rock face" is specified, uniformly distribute stones of the same height of
projection.
620.05 Placing Stone. Do not place stone masonry when the ambient temperature is below 0 °C.

Section 620 – Stone Masonry 595

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Clean stones and moisten before placing. Use hand tools to clean the exposed faces of the stones of
mortar when removing and resetting stone masonry. Clean and moisten the bed. Clean the bearing
surface and moisten before spreading the mortar bed on footings.

Level the cross beds for vertical walls. Lay beds for battered walls from level to normal to the batter
line of the face of the wall.

Place stone to provide a consistent pattern and color. Lay stones with the longest face horizontal and
the exposed face parallel to the masonry face.

Construct masonry joints to the thicknesses shown in Table 620.1 for face stones. Construct ring stone
joints on the faces and soffits between 6 millimeters and 38 millimeters thick, but make the bed of each
course of a uniform thickness throughout. Construct head joints vertically in dimensioned masonry.
Construct head joints in other masonry classes at angles with the vertical from 0 to 45 degrees.

Maintain completed masonry at a temperature above 4 °Cfor 24 hours after construction.

Remove stones loosened after the mortar has taken initial set, clean off the mortar, and relay the stone
with fresh mortar.

Table 620.1
Masonry Joint Thicknesses
Class Bed Joint Head Joints
Dimensioned 10 - 25 millimeters 19 - 25 millimeters
Class A 13 - 50 millimeters 13 - 38 millimeters
Class B 13 - 50 millimeters 13 - 50 millimeters
Rubble 13 - 64 millimeters 13 - 64 millimeters

620.06 Pointing.

(a) Pointing new joints. Crown the joint mortar slightly on top surfaces to provide drainage.

Where raked joints are required, squarely rake mortar in exposed face joints and beds to the
required depth. Slightly rake the mortar where weather joints are required. Do not leave the mortar
flush with the stone faces.

Clean stone faces of mortar stains while the mortar is fresh. After the mortar sets, clean stone faces
again using wire brushes and acid. Protect masonry during hot or dry weather by keeping it moist
for at least 3 days after the work is completed.

(b) Repointing joints. Remove loose mortar from joints using a small mason’s chisel, small
pneumatically-power chisel, or other raking tool approved by the Engineer. Do not use power saws
or grinders. Demonstrate proficiency if power equipment is used before removing mortar from the
structure. Remove mortar to a depth of 2½ times the width of the joint. Remove dirt or vegetation
with a wire brush or other approved tools. Clean joint of loose fragments and dust with pressurized
air or water.

Section 620 – Stone Masonry 596

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Construct a 900-millimeter test section of joint along the structure for approval before continuing
with work. Approved test section may be incorporated into the work. Moisten adjacent stone before
filling the joint. Do not place mortar to a depth greater than 2½ times the joint width. Place mortar
in layers of approximately 6 millimeters for joints deeper than 3 millimeters. Add successive layers
once mortar has reached thumb-print hardness. Tool the final layer to match the approved joint
appearance.

Clean excess mortar and stain from stone masonry using a bristle brush after the mortar has dried
but before the initial set. Do not use chemicals for cleaning. Protect masonry during hot or dry
weather by keeping it moist for at least 3 days after the work is completed.

620.07 Constructing Walls. Construct an L–shaped test section of wall at least 1.5 meters high and
2.4 meters long; showing examples of face wall, top wall, method of turning corners, and method of
forming joints. Do not construct masonry other than the foundation masonry before the test section is
approved.

Set face stones to produce the effect demonstrated in the approved test section. Do not extend bed
joints in an unbroken line through more than 5 stones and head joints through more than 2 stones.
Bond each face stone with all contiguous face stones at least 150 millimeters longitudinally and
50 millimeters vertically. Do not allow the corners of four stones to be adjacent to each other.

Do not bunch small stones or stones of the same size, color, or texture. Construct walls using stones
decrease in size from the bottom to the top. Use large, stones in corners.

(a) Headers. Distribute headers uniformly throughout the walls of structures to form at least
20 percent of the faces.

(b) Backing. Construct the backing out of large stones. Bond the individual stones composing the
backing and heart with the stones in the face wall and with each other. Fill openings and interstices
in the backing with mortar or with spalls surrounded by mortar.

(c) Coping. Finish with coping when shown on the plans. When copings are not required, finish
the top of the wall with stones wide enough to cover the top of the wall from 0.5 to 1.5 meters in
length, and of random heights, with a minimum height of 150 millimeters. Lay stones in a manner
that the cap course is an integral part of the wall. Pitch the top of the capstones to align in both
vertical and horizontal planes.

(d) Parapet walls. Use stones squared and pitched to line and with heads dressed in the ends of
parapet walls and in exposed angles and corners. Interlock spreaders with as many headers as
possible. Extend headers through the entire wall thickness. Interlock both the headers and stretchers
in the two faces of the wall. Use headers and stretchers to comprise a majority of the wall volume.
Fill openings and interstices with mortar or with spalls surrounded by mortar.

(e) Weep holes. Place weep holes at the lowest points where free outlets can be obtained. Space
holes no more than 3 meters apart.

620.08 Facing for Concrete.

(a) Stone placed before concrete. Make the back of the masonry uneven. Pack voids in the back
of the masonry with grout.

Section 620 – Stone Masonry 597

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Use 13M reinforcing steel bent into an elongated letter S to anchor the stone. Embed each anchor in
a mortar bed to within 50 millimeters from the face of the stones. Project the other ±250
millimeters into the concrete backing. Space the anchors 450 millimeter apart both horizontally and
vertically.

Clean the back masonry surface of dirt, loose material, and mortar drippings after the mortar has
attained sufficient strength. Wash surfaces with pressurized water before placing concrete.

(b) Concrete placed before stone. Set galvanized metal anchor slots flush with the projected face
of concrete. Set the slots vertically at maximum horizontal spacings of 600 millimeters. Use foam
filled slots to prevent filling with concrete.

Fit the metal anchors in the slots at a maximum vertical spacing of 600 millimeters. Extend the
anchors to within 50 millimeters of the face of the stones.

If the shape of the concrete face is unsuitable for the use of metal slots, use 3.8-millimeter
galvanized iron wire ties at a rate of 7 ties for each square meter of exposed surface.

Keep the concrete face continuously wet for 2 hours preceding the placing of the stone and fill
interstices with mortar or with spalls surrounded by mortar.

620.09 Constructing Arches. Submit drawings for falsework according to Section 562. Stratify arch
ring stones parallel to the radial joint and stratify other stones parallel to the beds.

Lay out a full-size template of the arch ring showing face dimensions of each ring stone and thickness
of joints. Do not shape or dress ring stones until falsework drawings have been approved. Do not place
ring stones until all ring stones have been shaped and dressed.

Construct arch centering according to the drawings. Provide suitable wedges for adjusting the elevation
of the forms.

Set arch ring stones and hold in place with wedges until the joints are packed with mortar. If required,
support centering with jacks to prevent settlement during masonry placement. Lower the centering
gradually and symmetrically to avoid overstresses in the arch. Ensure the arch is self-supporting before
installing coping or other features.

Strike the centers of filled spandrel arches before constructing the spandrel walls to avoid jamming of
the expansion joints. Place the backfill so the ring is uniformly and symmetrically loaded.

620.10 Guardwall. Use rubble masonry. Construct cast-in-place or precast concrete corewalls
according to Section 601. Use concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of
25 megapascals.

Construct 8-meter test section of guardwall. Do not construct additional guardwall until the test section
is approved.

Construct the guardwall true and uniform along its length with no stone projecting more than
38 millimeters beyond the face of the guardwall. Construct masonry beds and joints for face stones to
the thicknesses shown in Table 620.1. Rake the joints and beds to a depth of 50 millimeters on the front
and top sides and to a depth of 38 millimeters on the back.

Section 620 – Stone Masonry 598

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Use a one-piece capstone for the full width of the guardwall for at least 25 percent of the total length.
Use a two-piece capstone with the joint within 100 millimeters of the guardwall center for the
remaining length.

Place stones (including the capstones) randomly to avoid a pattern. Lay stones to reflect the width of
the expansion joints. Do not leave a gap or a mortar edge at the expansion joint. Use various size stones
to coin or key the corners of the guardwall.

620.11 Acceptance. Construction or rehabilitation of stone masonry structures will be evaluated under
Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Rock for masonry structures will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Material for mortar will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03. Mortar placement will be
evaluated under Subsection 106.02.

Concrete will be evaluated under Section 601.

Excavation and backfill will be evaluated under Section 209.

Measurement

620.12 Measure the Section 620 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring stone masonry by the cubic meter, measure in the structure.

Do not measure test wall sections not incorporated in the work.

When measuring stone masonry guardwall, measure along the gutterline including terminal sections.

When measuring remove and reset stone masonry by the cubic meter, measure in the structure after
resetting.

When measuring repointing of stone masonry, measure along the centerline of joint.

Payment

620.13 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 620 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 620 – Stone Masonry 599

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 621. — MONUMENTS AND MARKERS

Description

621.01 This work consists of constructing and reestablishing monuments and markers.

Material

621.02 Conform to the following Section and Subsections:

Minor concrete 601

Reinforcing steel 709.01
Treated structural timber and lumber 716.03
Untreated structural timber and lumber 716.01

Construction Requirements

621.03 Monuments and Markers. Reestablish or locate permanent points according to Subsection
107.01 and Section 152. Excavate and backfill according to Section 209. Monuments may be cast-in-
place or precast according to Section 601. Set each monument and marker vertically at the required
location and elevation such that the monument remains stable horizontally and vertically. Unless
shown otherwise on the plans, install markers or monuments that are commercially available and
typical for the area and application. Mark the monuments with durable markings that identify the
monument uniquely and unambiguously.

621.04 Kilometer Stones. Kilometer stones will be placed as indicated by the Engineer on the left side
of the roadway in the direction as per the road formal name. Inscriptions will be raised and will use
retro-reflecting paints. Colors will have to be previously agreed upon by the Engineer. Foundations
bodies of the stones will be at a min. 50-cm depth. The section of the stone out of the ground will have
3 layers of paint.

The origin of the kilometer count will be fixed by the Engineer. Contractor is responsible for accurately
surveying the centerline distance in order to locate the stone markers.

621.05 Acceptance. Material (except concrete for monuments and markers) will be evaluated under
Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Construction of monuments and markers will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Location of permanent points will be evaluated under Sections 107 and 152.

Structural excavation and backfill will be evaluated under Section 209.

Concrete will be evaluated under Section 601.

Measurement

621.06 Measure the Section 621 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

Section 621 – Monuments and Markers 600

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

621.07 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 621 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 621 – Monuments and Markers 601

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 622. — RENTAL EQUIPMENT

Description

622.01 This work consists of furnishing and operating equipment for construction work ordered by the
Engineer and not otherwise provided for under the contract.

Construction Requirements

622.02 Rental Equipment. The Engineer will order in writing rental equipment for use on the project.
Submit the model number and serial number for each piece of equipment before use. Make equipment
available for inspection and approval before use.

Furnish and operate equipment with such auxiliary attachments and oilers as are usually needed for
efficient operation of the equipment. Keep the equipment in good repair and capable of operating
90 percent of the working time.

Obtain approval of the length of workday and workweek before beginning work. Keep daily records of
the number of unit-hours of operation. Submit the records along with certified copies of the payroll.

622.03 Acceptance. Rental equipment work will be evaluated under Subsection 106.02.

Measurement

622.04 Measure the Section 622 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Measure time for moving equipment between project work sites. Do not measure nonoperable
equipment or equipment dependent upon another piece of nonoperable equipment.

Payment

622.05 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 622 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 622 – Rental Equipment 602

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 623. — GENERAL LABOR

Description

623.01 This work consists of furnishing workers and hand tools for construction work ordered by the
Engineer and not otherwise provided for under the contract.

Construction Requirements

623.02 Workers and Equipment. Furnish competent workers and appropriate hand tools for the
work.

Obtain approval of the length of workday and workweek before beginning work. Keep daily records of
the number of hours worked. Submit the records along with certified copies of the payroll.

623.03 Acceptance. General labor work will be evaluated under Subsection 106.02.

Measurement

623.04 Measure the Section 623 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Do not measure time for workers transportation to and from the project site.

Payment

623.05 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 623 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 623 – General Labor 603

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 624. — TOPSOIL

Description

624.01 This work consists of furnishing and placing topsoil and placing conserved topsoil.

Material

624.02 Conform to the following Subsection:

Topsoil 713.01

Construction Requirements

624.03 Preparing Areas. Shape slopes and disturbed areas to be covered with topsoil. Disk or scarify
slopes 1V:3H or flatter to a depth of 100 millimeters perpendicular to the natural flow of water.

624.04 Placing Topsoil. Provide at least 7 days notice before the start of topsoil placement. Do not
place topsoil when the ground or topsoil is frozen, excessively wet, or otherwise in a condition
detrimental to the work. Use conserved topsoil before furnishing topsoil. Keep the roadway surfaces
clean during hauling and spreading operations.

Spread topsoil to a depth that, after settlement, provides the required depth. Break clods and lumps
with harrows, disks, or other appropriate equipment to provide a uniform textured soil. Remove and
dispose of clods and stones larger than 50 millimeters, stumps, roots, and other litter according to
Subsection 203.05.

Construct longitudinal depressions at least 50 millimeters deep perpendicular to the natural flow of
water without overly compacting the topsoil surface.

624.05 Acceptance. Material for furnished topsoil will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.03.

Material for conserved topsoil will be evaluated under Subsection 106.02.

Placing furnished and conserved topsoil material will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.04.

Measurement

624.06 Measure the Section 624 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring furnishing and placing topsoil by the cubic meter, measure in the hauling vehicle or
by the acre (hectare) on the ground surface.

When measuring placing conserved topsoil by the cubic meter, measure in the hauling vehicle or by
the acre (hectare) on the ground surface.

Section 624 – Topsoil 604

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Payment

624.07 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 624 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 624 – Topsoil 605

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 625. — TURF ESTABLISHMENT

Description

625.01 This work consists of soil preparation, watering, fertilizing, seeding, and mulching. This
work shall also include the spreading of conserved topsoil as per subsection 204.05 to areas where
screened topsoil is required or as directed by the Engineer.

Seeding and mulching methods are designated as dry or hydraulic.

Material

625.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Agricultural limestone 713.02

Fertilizer 713.03
Mulch 713.05
Seed 713.04
Tackifiers 713.11
Water 725.01(b)

Construction Requirements

625.03 General. Apply turf establishment to finished slopes and ditches within 14 days after
completion of construction on a portion of the site when approved by the Engineer. Do not seed during
windy weather or when the ground is excessively wet, extremely dry, cloddy, hard pan, or not friable.

625.04 Preparing Seedbed. Grade the seeding area to line and grade. Remove weeds, sticks, stones
50 millimeters in diameter and larger, and other debris detrimental to application, growth, or
maintenance of the turf.

Apply limestone and grub proofing if specified.

Cultivate the seeding area to a minimum depth of 100 millimeters and prepare a firm but friable
seedbed before seeding. Do not cultivate aggregate-topsoil courses that were previously dry seeded
under Section 313.

625.05 Watering. Moisten seeding areas before seeding and maintain the moisture until turf is
established or final acceptance.

625.06 Fertilizing. Apply fertilizer by the following methods:

(a) Dry method. Incorporate the fertilizer into the upper portion of the seedbed before seeding.

(b) Hydraulic method. Add fertilizer to the slurry and mix before adding seed. Apply the seed and
fertilizer in one application.

625.07 Seeding. Apply seed by the following methods:

Section 625 – Turf Establishment 606

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(a) Dry method. Apply the seed with approved power driven seeders, drills, or other mechanical
equipment. Hand-operated seeding methods are satisfactory on areas inaccessible to mechanical
equipment.

(b) Hydraulic method. Use hydraulic-type equipment capable of providing a uniform application
using water as the carrying agent. Add a tracer material consisting of either wood or grass cellulose
fiber mulch to the water. Apply the tracer material at a rate of 450 kilograms per hectare to provide
visible evidence of uniform application. Add the seed to the water slurry no more than 30 minutes
before application. Seed by hand areas inaccessible to seeding equipment.

625.08 Mulching. If wood chips are used, do not import without approval from the Engineer. Apply
mulch within 48 hours after seeding by the following methods:

(a) Dry method. Spread mulch material, except wood and grass cellulose fibers, by a mulch
spreader utilizing forced air to blow the mulch material onto the seeded area. Apply straw mulch at
a rate of 3600 kilograms per hectare. Anchor the mulch material with an approved tackifier or
approved mechanical method. Do not mark or deface structures, pavements, utilities, or plant
growth with tackifier.

(b) Hydraulic method. Apply mulch in a separate application from the seed using hydraulic-type
equipment according to Subsection 625.07(b).

Apply wood fiber or grass straw cellulose fiber mulch at a rate of 1700 kilograms per hectare.

Apply bonded fiber matrix hydraulic mulch at a minimum rate of 3400 kilograms per hectare.
Apply so no hole in the matrix is greater than 1 millimeter. Apply so that no gaps exist between the
matrix and the soil.

Mulch by hand areas inaccessible to mulching equipment.

625.09 Protecting and Caring for Seeded Areas. Protect and care for seeded areas including
watering when needed. Repair or apply supplemental applications of seed, mulch, fertilizer, and water
as many times as needed until turf is established or final acceptance.

625.10 Acceptance. Seed will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02, 106.03, and 713.04.

Mulch, fertilizer, and other turf establishment material will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.03.

Turf establishment work will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

625.11 Measure the Section 625 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring turf establishment and supplemental applications by the hectare, measure on the
ground surface.

When measuring water by volume or mass, measure in the hauling vehicle or by metering.

Section 625 – Turf Establishment 607

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Payment

625.12 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 625 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 625 – Turf Establishment 608

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 626. — PLANTS, TREES, SHRUBS, VINES,

AND GROUNDCOVERS

Description
626.01 This work consists of furnishing and planting trees, shrubs, vines, groundcovers, and other
plants.

Material
626.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Fertilizer 713.03
Miscellaneous planting material 713.08
Mulch 713.05
Plant material 713.06
Topsoil 713.01
Water 725.01(b)
Construction Requirements
626.03 General. Do not plant when the soil is saturated, extremely dry, cloddy, hard pan, not friable,
or is otherwise unsatisfactory for planting.

Furnish stock with a live and fibrous root system. Do not provide container-grown stock that is
pot-bound, has a top system out of proportion (larger) than the size of the container, has rooting
media that does not hold together when plant is removed from the container, or has roots growing out
of the container.

Tag each plant or groups of plants with a weatherproof tag showing species name and date of
delivery.

Install plants received on site within 7 days.

626.04 Delivery. Notify the Engineer 30 days before delivery of material to permit the Engineer the
opportunity to select material at the source. Submit commercial certifications and complete written
information concerning the source of supply for plant material at least 14 days before delivery of plants
to the project.

626.05 Protection and Temporary Storage. Package plants to provide protection against weather
and breakage during transit. Tie and cover plants to prevent wind damage and dehydration when
transporting by open vehicle. Pack and ventilate plants to prevent sweating when transporting by
closed vehicle. Keep bare root plants below 2 °C during transport.

Keep growing media moist. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from damage. Replace
damaged plants including plants with cracked or crushed root balls.

Protect plants not scheduled for immediate planting as follows:

(a) Keep bare root plants below 2 °C;

Section 626 – Plants, Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Groundcovers 609

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Cover the earth balls of balled and burlapped plants with mulch or other suitable material
and keep moist;

(c) Protect container-grown plants from over-exposure to sunlight and keep moist; and

(d) Protect plants from animals and insects.

626.06 Excavation for Plant Pits and Beds. At least 14 days before planting, submit planting
locations and methods of planting for approval. Mark planting locations with stakes or flagging.
Remove sod, weeds, roots, and other unsuitable material from the planting site. Excavate plant pits as
follows:

(a) Width of excavation.

(1) For root spread or ball diameters up to 1200 millimeter, dig the pits circular in outline to
the root spread plus 600 millimeter.
(2) For root spreads or ball diameters over 1200 millimeter, excavate 1.5 times the root
spread.
(b) Depth of excavation. Dig the pits to a depth that permits at least 150 millimeters of backfill
under the roots or balls or dig the pits to the following depths, whichever is deeper:

(1) Deciduous trees.

(a) Under 38 millimete caliper. 600 mm deep
(b) Over 38 millimeters caliper. 900 mm deep
(2) Deciduous and evergreen shrubs.
(a) Under 0.5 meters height. 300 mm deep
(b) Over 0.5 meters height. 600 mm deep
(3) Evergreen trees.
(a) Under 1.5 meters height. 200 mm plus ball height
(b) Over 1.5 meter) height. 300 mm plus ball height
(4) Vines and groundcovers. Double the size of the pot.
Loosen soil at the sidewalls and bottom of the plant pit to a depth of 150 millimeters before setting
the plant.

Do not leave planting holes open overnight.

626.07 Setting Plants. Do not plant material until inspected and approved by the Engineer. Plants not
conforming to specifications, arriving on site in an unsatisfactory condition, or showing sign of
improper handling will be rejected. Immediately remove and dispose of rejected plants off site and
replace with approved nursery stock.

Prepare a backfill mixture of 4 parts topsoil, loam, or selected soil to one part peat moss. Place backfill
mixture in the bottom of the plant pit. Set plants approximately plumb and at the same level or slightly

Section 626 – Plants, Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Groundcovers 610

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

lower than the depth at which they were grown in the nursery or collected in the field. Set plants as
follows:

(a) Bare root stock. Place bare rooted plants in the center of the plant pit with the roots properly
spread in a natural position. Work backfill mixture around and over the roots, tamp as hole is being
filled, and water thoroughly.

(b) Balled and burlapped stock. Handle and move plants by the ball. Place balled and burlapped
plants in the prepared pits on tamped backfill mixture. Score the root ball to a depth of
25 millimeters along the entire side equally on 4 sides. Backfill around the plant ball to half the
depth of the ball. Tamp and thoroughly water. Cut the burlap and remove it from the upper half of
the ball or loosen the burlap and fold it back. If wire baskets are used cut the wire from the upper
half of the basket. Backfill the remainder of the plant with backfill mixture.

(c) Container-grown stock. Remove the container just before planting. Place plants in the
prepared pits on tamped backfill mixture. Backfill the remainder of the plant with backfill mixture
and tamp.

626.08 Fertilizing. Fertilize using either of the following methods:

(a) Mix the fertilizer with the backfill mixture when it is prepared.

(b) Spread the fertilizer uniformly around the pit area of individual plants or over shrub beds.
Cultivate the fertilizer into the top 50 millimeters of the backfill mixture.

626.09 Watering. Construct 100-millimeters deep water basins around trees and 75-millimeter deep
water basins around shrubs. Make the diameter of the basin equal to that of the plant pit.

Water plants during and immediately after planting and throughout the plant establishment period.
Saturate the soil around each plant at each watering.

626.10 Guying and Staking. When guying and staking is specified, guy deciduous trees just below the
first lateral branch and guy evergreen trees half way up the height of the tree. Do not leave the guys
and stakes on a tree for more than one growing season.

626.11 Pruning. Prune before or immediately after planting to preserve the natural character of each
plant. Use experienced personnel to perform the pruning. Use accepted horticultural practice. Paint cuts
over ¾ inch (19 millimeters) in diameter with tree wound dressing.

626.12 Mulching. Remove weeds and other live vegetation from pit and water basin areas around
individual plants and from entire shrub beds. If wood chips are used, do not import without approval
from the Engineer. Place mulch within 24 hours after planting.

626.13 Plant Establishment Period. The plant establishment period is a one-year period beginning
at the completion of the project. Employ necessary means to preserve the plants in a healthy growing
condition during the plant establishment period. Water, weed, prune, adjust guys and stakes, and
protect from animals, insects and disease during the plant establishment period. At the end of the
plant establishment period, remove guys and stakes.

626.14 Acceptance. Plant material (including plants, fertilizer, mulch, and topsoil) will be evaluated
under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Section 626 – Plants, Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Groundcovers 611

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Planting of trees, shrubs, vines, groundcovers and other plants will be evaluated under Subsections
106.02 and 106.04 and as follows:

An inspection of the plant material will be made about 15 days before the end of the plant
establishment period to identify dead, dying, or diseased plants for removal and replacement. During
the following planting season, remove and replace identified plants according to this Section. A final
inspection of all plant material within 15 days after completion of all replacement planting will be the
basis for final acceptance.

Measurement

626.15 Measure the Section 626 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

626.16 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 626 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Progress payments for plants will be paid as follows:

(a) 75 percent of the pay item amount will be paid following initial planting.

(b) The remaining 25 percent of the pay item amount price will be paid after the final inspection.

Section 626 – Plants, Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Groundcovers 612

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 627. — SOD

Description

627.01 This work consists of furnishing and placing living sod of perennial turf-forming grasses.

Material

627.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Agricultural limestone 713.02

Fertilizer 713.03
Pegs for sod 713.10
Sod 713.09
Water 725.01(b)

Construction Requirements

627.03 General. Move and lay sod during dry weather and on dry, unfrozen ground.

Avoid erosion when watering.

627.04 Delivery. Provide at least 3 days notice before cutting sod. The Engineer will approve the sod
in its original position before cutting. Do not deliver sod until the soil is prepared.

627.05 Preparing the Soil. Clear and grade the surface. Cultivate, disk, harrow, or otherwise loosen
the grade to a depth of at least 100 millimeters. Finish the surface to a smoothness comparable to hand
raking. Remove surface stones not passing a 25-millimeter sieve, sticks, stumps, and other surface
debris interferes with sod placement or subsequent growth.

Place topsoil according to Section 624.

Apply fertilizer and agricultural limestone uniformly over the sodding area. Mechanical spreaders or
blower equipment may be used. Disk or till the fertilizer and limestone into the soil to a depth of
100 millimeters.

Moisten the prepared soil.

627.06 Placing Sod. Place sod within 24 hours after cutting or within 5 days after cutting when the sod
is stored in moist stacks, grass-to-grass and roots-to-roots. Protect sod against drying and from
freezing.

(a) Solid sod. Place sod perpendicular to drainage flows. Place sections of solid sod edge to edge
with staggered joints. Plug openings with sod or fill openings with acceptable loamy seeded
topsoil. Roll or tamp sod to eliminate air pockets and provide an even surface. On slopes 1V:2H or
steeper and in channels, peg sod on 600-millimeter centers after rolling or tamping. Drive pegs
flush with the sod bed surface.

Section 627 – Sod 613

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Strip sod. Lay strip sod in shallow trenches in parallel rows. Firmly roll or tamp until the
surface of the sod is level with or below the adjacent soil. Seed the soil between the strips of sod
according to Section 625. Rake or drag the seeded areas to cover the seed.

(c) Spot sod. Place sod blocks. Roll or tamp the blocks into the soil until the sod surfaces are
slightly below the surrounding ground surface.

Blend final grades with existing adjacent areas. Leave the entire area drainable and without abrupt
changes in slope.

627.07 Maintaining Sodded Areas. Water sod to a depth of 100 millimeters after placing and keep
moist.

Protect newly sodded areas using methods approved by the Engineer. Do not allow wheeled vehicles
on newly sodded areas.

Mow sodded areas and repair or replace sodded areas that are damaged or fail to show a uniform
growth of grass. Maintain sodded areas and replace nonliving sod until final acceptance of the project.

627.08 Acceptance. Material, for sodding, including lime and fertilizer will be evaluated under
Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Sod placement will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Topsoil will be evaluated under Section 624.

Measurement

627.09 Measure the Section 627 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Do not measure non-sodded areas adjacent to strip and spot sodding.

Measure topsoil under Section 624.

Measure water and seeding under Section 625.

Payment

627.10 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 627 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 627 – Sod 614

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 628. — RESERVED

Section 628 – Reserved 615

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 629. — ROLLED EROSION CONTROL PRODUCTS

AND CELLULAR CONFINEMENT SYSTEMS

Description

629.01 This work consists of constructing temporary and permanent installations to control
erosion and enhance vegetation establishment and survivability on slopes and channels. This
work includes installing rolled erosion control products (RECP) and cellular confinement systems.

RECP are designated according to Subsections 713.17, 713.18, and the following:

(a) Mulch control netting. A planar woven natural fiber or extruded geosynthetic mesh used as
a temporary degradable RECP to anchor loose fiber mulches.

(b) Open weave textile. A temporary degradable RECP composed of processed natural or
polymer yarns woven into a matrix, used to provide erosion control and facilitate vegetation
establishment.

(c) Erosion control blanket. A temporary degradable RECP composed of processed natural or
polymer fibers mechanically, structurally or chemically bound together to form a continuous
matrix to provide erosion control and facilitate vegetation establishment.

(d) Turf reinforcement mat. A permanent non-degradable RECP designed for critical
hydraulic applications where design discharges exert velocities and shear stresses that exceed
the limits of mature, natural vegetation. Turf reinforcement mats provide sufficient thickness,
strength, and void space to permit soil filling and retention and the development of vegetation
within the matrix. Turf reinforcement mats are typically used in hydraulic application, such as
high flow ditches and channels, steep slopes, stream banks, and shorelines, where erosive forces
may exceed the limits of natural, unreinforced vegetation or in areas where limited vegetation
establishment is anticipated. Turf reinforcement mats may be supplemented with degradable
components to provide immediate and permanent erosion protection and vegetation
reinforcement on geotechnically stable slopes.

Cellular confinement system cell depths are designated according to Table 713.2.

Material

629.02 Conform to the following Sections and Subsections:

Cellular confinement systems 713.07

Temporary RECP 713.17
Topsoil 624
Turf establishment 625
Turf reinforcement mat 713.18

Section 629 – Rolled Erosion Control Products and Cellular Confinement Systems 616
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Construction Requirements

629.03 General. Make the soil surface stable, firm, and free of rocks and other obstructions. Install
RECP and cellular confinement systems according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and to the
following minimum guidelines. Apply turf establishment according to Section 625.

In areas to be mowed soon after installation, use temporary RECP consisting of rapidly degrading
netting with a functional longevity of 3 months or less.

629.04 Mulch Control Netting (RECP, Types 1.A, 2.A, and 3.A). Apply mulch according to
Subsection 625.08(a). Immediately after mulching, install mulch control netting according to
Subsection 629.05.

629.05 Erosion Control Blanket, Open Weave Textile, and Turf Reinforcement Mat (RECP,
Types 1.B, 1.C, 1.D, 2.B, 2.C, 2.D, 3.B, 4, 5.A, 5.B, and 5.C). Unless soil in- filling is required,
complete turf establishment work before installing RECP.

If soil in-filling is required, first install RECP. Then apply seed and lightly brush or rake 6 to
19 millimeters of topsoil into the voids in the RECP filling the full product thickness.

Use staples that are at least 150 millimeters long to secure the RECP. Longer staples may be
necessary in sandy, loose, or wet soils.

Unroll the RECP parallel to the primary direction of flow and place it in direct contact with soil surface.
Do not stretch or allow RECP to bridge over surface inconsistencies. Overlap edges of adjacent RECP
by 50 to 100 millimeters. Use a sufficient number of staples to prevent seam separation. Overlap roll
ends of joining RECP 50 to 150 millimeters in the direction of flow.

(a) Slope installations. At the top of slope, anchor the RECP by one of the following methods:

(1) Staples. Install the RECP 900 millimeters over the shoulder of the slope onto flat final
grade. Secure with a single row of staples on 300-millimeter centers.
(2) Anchor trench. Construct a 150- by 150-millimeter trench. Extend the upslope
terminal end of the RECP 900 millimeters past the trench. Use staples on 12-inch
(300-millimeter) centers to fasten the RECP into the trench. Backfill the trench and compact
the soil. Secure the terminal end with a single row of staples on 300 millimeters centers
and cover the end with soil. Apply turf establishment.
(3) Check slot. Install two rows of staples 100 millimeters apart on 100-millimeter centers
across the top edge of the RECP. Drive staple heads flush with soil surface.
Securely fasten RECP to the soil by installing staples at a minimum rate of 1.3 per square meter.

(b) Channel installations. At the beginning of the channel, construct a full width anchor
trench according to Subsection 629.05(a)(2). Construct additional anchor trenches or check slots
at intervals along the channel reach and at the channel end according to Subsection 629.05(a)(2)
or (a)(3) and the manufacturer’s installation guidelines.

Securely fasten RECP to the soil by installing staples at a minimum rate of 2 per square meter.
Significantly higher anchor rates may be necessary in sandy, loose, or wet soils and in severe

Section 629 – Rolled Erosion Control Products and Cellular Confinement Systems 617
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

applications.

Repair damaged areas immediately by restoring soil to finished grade, re-applying turf establishment,
and replacing the RECP.

629.06 Cellular Confinement Systems. Excavate to the depth of the cellular confinement system and
smooth and compact the slope. Install the top of the system flush or lower than the adjacent slope.
Expand the geocell down the slope. Connect adjacent geocell sections with hog rings or staples in
every other cell.

Anchor the system with wooden stakes across the top at every other cell. Repeat the anchoring
pattern in every tenth row and in the bottom row. Drive stakes to a minimum embedment of 12
inches (300 millimeters) below the base of the cellular confinement layer.

Backfill the system with topsoil. Hand-compact the topsoil within each cell and apply turf
establishment.

629.07 Acceptance. RECP and cellular confinement system material will be evaluated under
Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Installation of RECP and cellular confinement systems will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.04.

Topsoil will be evaluated under Section 624.

Turf establishment will be evaluated under Section 625.

Measurement

629.08 Measure the Section 629 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

Measure topsoil under Section 624.

Measure turf establishment under Section 625.

Payment

629.09 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 629 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 629 – Rolled Erosion Control Products and Cellular Confinement Systems 618
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

DIVISION 630
SAFETY AND SIGNALLING

Section 630 – Safety and Signalling 619

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 630. — RESERVED

Section 631. — RESERVED

Section 632. — RESERVED

Sections 630, 631, and 632 – Reserved 620

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 633. — PERMANENT TRAFFIC CONTROL

Description

633.01 This work consists of installing and removing and resetting permanent traffic control devices.

Sign panels are designated as plywood, steel, aluminum, plastic, fiberglass reinforced plastic, or
extruded aluminum.

Sign posts are designated as wood, aluminum, galvanized steel, or corrosion resistant steel.

Kilometric mileage stones are of precast concrete

Material

633.02 Conform to the Signs and Marking Manual and the following Section and Subsections:

Delineator and object marker retroreflectors 718.08

Hardware 718.06
Legends and borders 718.07
Minor concrete 601
Object marker and delineator posts 718.05
Panels 718.03
Retroreflective sheeting 718.01
Sign posts 718.04

Construction Requirements

633.03 General. Furnish and install permanent traffic control devices according to the Signs and
Marking Manual and permanent traffic control plans. Provide traffic control devices that are
crashworthy.

Sign locations may be changed to fit field conditions as approved by the Engineer. Determine sign
support lengths at time of staking.

633.04 Sign Posts. Install sign posts plumb and according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Drive sign posts with a suitable driving head or set posts in drilled or punched holes.

Excavate, construct, and backfill concrete footings according to Section 601.

633.05 Sign Panels.

(a) Fabrication.

(1) Panels. Cut panels to dimension shown and place holes before applying retroreflective
material. Do not field drill holes in panels.
Clean and degrease the face of the metal panels using methods recommended by the
retroreflective sheeting manufacturer before applying retroreflective sheeting.

Section 633 – Permanent Traffic Control 621

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Wipe plastic panels clean with a slightly dampened cloth before applying retroreflective
sheeting.
Abrade, clean, and degrease the face of the plywood panels using methods recommended by
the retroreflective sheeting manufacturer before applying reflective sheeting. Treat plywood
panel edges with sealant.
Join extruded aluminum panel sections with panel nuts, bolts, and washers to achieve the
desired sign size. Use 150-millimeter and 300-millimeter plate heights to achieve the sign panel
vertical dimensions in increments of 150 millimeters. Do not include more than one 150-
millimeter plate per sign.
Use retroreflective sheeting as specified and according to ASTM D4956. For roadside signs,
use Type III, IV, VIII, IX, or XI prismatic retroreflective sheeting. Use fluorescent yellow
sheeting for warning signs. Use fluorescent yellow-green sheeting for pedestrian, bicycle, and
school crossing signs.
For multilane or overhead guide signs, use Type III or IV prismatic retroreflective sheeting for
the background and Type IX or XI retroreflective sheeting for the legend.
For parking lot and non-roadway signs, Types I and II retroreflective sheeting may be used.
(2) Legends and Borders. Form letters, numerals, and other units to provide a continuous
stroke width with smooth edges. Make the surface flat and free of warp, blisters, wrinkles,
burrs, and splinters. Do not fabricate letters, numerals, arrows, symbols, or borders using a red
screen ink process.
Conform to one of the following techniques:
(a) Type L-1 (screen process). Apply letters, numerals, arrows, symbols, borders, and other
features on the sign background by direct or reverse screen process. Apply messages and
borders of a color darker than the sign background by the direct process. Apply messages
and borders of a color lighter than the sign background by the reverse screen process.
Apply screen inks recommended by the ink manufacturer for use on the various types of
retroreflective sheeting. Apply ink that has the same durability and color as specified for
that type of retroreflective sheeting. Apply black screen ink until opaque on retroreflective
sheeting.
Perform the screening in a manner to ensure a uniform color and tone, with sharply defined
edges of legends and borders. Do not allow running, streaking, or sagging.
Air dry or bake the signs after screening according to manufacturer’s recommendations to
provide a smooth hard finish.
(b) Type L-2 (transparent films). Apply letters, numerals, arrows, symbols, borders, and
other features on the sign background with colored transparent films. Select durable,
electronically cuttable films coated with a transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive protected
by a removable liner. Use transparent films recommended by the manufacturer within the
color requirements specified for the retroreflective sheeting.
(c) Type L-3 (direct applied characters). Cut letters, numerals, arrows, symbols, borders,
and other features from black opaque or retroreflective sheeting of the color specified.
Apply characters to the sign background according to the retroreflective sheeting

Section 633 – Permanent Traffic Control 622

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

manufacturer’s instructions. Use the same sheeting manufacturer for both the sign legend,
border, and background.
Package sign panels in protective material and transport in a vertical position.

(b) Installation. Mount sign panels with the legend horizontal.

Use oversized bolt heads and neoprene or nylon washers for fastening plastic sign panels. Use
antitheft fasteners where possible. Paint bolt heads, screw heads, and washers that are exposed on
the sign face. Match the color of the paint to the color of the sheeting at the point where the fitting
is exposed.

Turn sign panels 3 degrees away from the road in the direction of travel to reduce specular glare
(mirror reflection).

Cover the sign face with an opaque material if a sign message is not applicable. Maintain the
covering in good condition until the message becomes applicable. Do not use adhesive tape on the
sign face.

633.06 Delineators and Object Markers. Attach delineators and object markers to posts according to
the manufacturer’s recommendation or as specified.

633.07 Removing and Resetting Permanent Traffic Control Devices. Remove and store existing
traffic control devices to be reset as necessary. Replace traffic control devices damaged during
removal, storage, and resetting.

633.08 Acceptance. Material for permanent traffic control devices will be evaluated under Subsections
106.02 and 106.03.

Installation of permanent traffic control devices will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and
106.04.

Excavation and backfill will be evaluated under Section 209.

Concrete will be evaluated under Section 601.

Measurement

633.09 Measure the Section 633 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When measuring sign panels by the square meter, measure front face. Measure each sign panel in a
multiple configuration.

When measuring sign systems by the square meter, measure front face of each sign panel.

When measuring sign systems by the each, measure each system as one regardless of the number of
sign panels.

A sign system includes the supports.

Section 633 – Permanent Traffic Control 623

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

When measuring removing and resetting permanent traffic control device, measures after they are
reset. Measure removing and resetting of sign systems as described above.

Payment

633.10 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 633 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 633 – Permanent Traffic Control 624

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 634. — PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKINGS

Description

634.01 This work consists of applying paint, markings, and markers on completed pavement.

Pavement markings are designated as follows:

Type A – Solventborne traffic paint with Type 1 glass beads;

Type B – Waterborne traffic paint with Type 1 glass beads;
Type C – High-build waterborne traffic paint with Types 1 and 3 glass beads;
Type D – Epoxy markings with Type 1 glass beads;
Type E – Epoxy markings with Type 1 and Type 3 glass beads;
Type H – Thermoplastic markings with type 1 glass beads;
Type I – Thermoplastic markings with Type 1 and Type 3 glass beads;
Type J – Preformed pavement marking tape; or
Type K – Nonreflectorized markings.
2U – Continous or discontinuous white painted strip 0.12m wide
3U – Continous or discontinuous white painted strip 0.18m wide
Raised pavement markers are designated as follows:
Type “CR” — “Clear & Red” reflective markers
Type “YY” — Two-way “Yellow” reflective markers

Material

634.02 Conform to the Signs and Marking Manual and the following Subsections:

Epoxy markings 718.11

Epoxy resin adhesives 718.17
Glass beads 718.14
Pavement markers 718.15
Preformed pavement marking tape 718.13
Solventborne traffic paint 718.09
Thermoplastic markings 718.12
Waterborne traffic paint 718.10

Construction Requirements

634.03 General. Where existing and final pavement marking locations are identical, stake the limits of
existing pavement markings before beginning pavement work.

Submit manufacturer’s product data sheet at least 7 days before applying pavement markings. A field
demonstration may be required to verify the adequacy of the material.

Section 634 – Permanent Pavement Markings 625

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Ship marking material in suitable containers plainly marked with the following information as
appropriate for the material being furnished:

(a) Manufacturer’s name and address;

(b) Name of product;

(c) Lot/batch numbers;

(d) Color;

(e) Net mass and volume of contents;

(f) Date of manufacture;

(g) Date of expiration;

(h) Statement of contents (if mixing of components is required);

(i) Mixing proportions and instructions; and

(j) Safety information.

Establish marking patterns or locations according to the Signs and Marking Manual, plans, or state
requirements. In curve widening areas, establish the edge line markings at the limits of the traveled
way and the centerline markings equal distance between the edge lines.

Arrows, letters, stop lines and other pre-cut symbols shall be as shown on the drawings or as directed
by the Project Engineer.

Remove loose particles, dirt, tar, grease, and other deleterious material from the surface to be marked.
Where markings are placed on rigid pavement less than 1 year old, clean the pavement of laitance and
curing compounds.

Remove temporary pavement markings the same day permanent pavement markings are applied.
Remove temporary and conflicting pavement makings according to Subsection 635.13 before applying
permanent pavement markings.

Obtain approval before applying markings. Apply markings to a clean, dry surface, and according to
the manufacturer’s recommendations. Produce markings that are clean-cut and uniform in appearance
by day and night.

Current state approved pavement marking material may be used, when approved by the Engineer.
Submit proof of compliance with state specifications.

Apply glass beads immediately following paint or markings application to ensure adhesion.

Protect markings from traffic until dried to a no-tracking condition. Remove tracking marks, spilled
marking material, markings in unauthorized areas, and defective markings.

Section 634 – Permanent Pavement Markings 626

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

634.04 Solventborne Traffic Paint (Type A). Apply paint when pavement and air temperatures are at
2 °Cand rising. Do not heat the paint above 49 °C Spray paint at a 0.38 millimeters minimum wet film
thickness or at a rate of 2.6 square meters per liter.

Apply Type 1 glass beads on the paint at a rate of 0.72 to 0.96 kilograms per liter of paint.

On new asphalt pavements or new asphalt surface treatments, apply two applications of paint and glass
beads. Apply second application after first application is track free.

634.05 Waterborne Traffic Paint (Type B and C). Apply paint when pavement and air temperatures
are 10 °C and rising.

(a) Type B. Do not heat the paint above 49 °C. Spray paint at a 0.38 millimeters minimum wet film
thickness or at a rate of 2.6 square meters per liter.

Apply Type 1 glass beads on the paint at a rate of 0.72 to 0.96 kilograms per liter of paint.

On new asphalt pavements or new asphalt surface treatments, apply two coats.

(b) Type C. Spray paint at 0.63 millimeters minimum wet film thickness or at a rate of 1.7 square
meters per liter.

Use two bead dispensers. Apply Type 3 glass beads on the paint at a rate of 0.72 to 0.960 kilograms
per liter followed by Type 1 glass beads on the paint at a rate of 0.72 to 0.96 kilograms per liter of
paint.

634.06 Epoxy Markings (Types D and E). Apply epoxy when pavement and air temperatures are 2
°C and rising. Heat components as specified by the manufacturer. Apply at a 0.63 millimeters
minimum dry film thickness or at a rate of 1.7 square meters per liter.

(a) Type D. Apply Type 1 glass beads on the epoxy at a rate of 0.72 to 0.96 kilograms per liter of
epoxy.

(b) Type E. Use two bead dispensers. Apply Type 3 glass beads on the epoxy at a rate of 0.72 to
0.96 kilograms per liter of epoxy followed by Type 1 glass beads on the epoxy at a rate of 0.72 to
0.96 kilograms per liter of epoxy.

634.07 Thermoplastic Markings (Type H and I). Apply thermoplastic when pavement and air
temperatures are 10 °C)and rising. Heat thermoplastic as specified by the manufacturer.

Apply an epoxy resin primer/sealer according to the thermoplastic manufacturer’s recommendations

when placing markings on:

• rigid pavements; or
• asphalt pavements more than two years old, oxidized, or have exposed aggregates.

Allow the primer/sealer to dry.

For edge lines, apply thermoplastic at 1.5 millimeters dry film thickness. For other lines, apply
thermoplastic at 2.3 millimeters dry film thickness.

Section 634 – Permanent Pavement Markings 627

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(a) Type H. Apply Type 1 glass beads on the thermoplastic at a rate recommended by the
manufacturer.

(b) Type I. Use two bead dispensers. Apply Type 3 glass beads on the thermoplastic followed by
Type 1 glass beads on the thermoplastic at rates recommended by the manufacturer.

634.08 Preformed Pavement Marking Tape (Type J). Install to form a durable, weather resistant
bond to the pavement. Apply preformed markings according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Use preformed marking tape containing retroreflective beads.

634.09 Nonreflectorized Markings (Type K). Apply solvent borne or waterborne traffic paint
without glass beads.

634.10 Pavement Markers. Install raised or recessed pavement markers when the pavement and air
temperatures are 10 °C and rising. Apply pavement markers with an adhesive as recommended by the
manufacturer when the pavement is dry. Space the markers according to the MUTCD and plans.

634.11 Acceptance. Material for permanent pavement markings will be evaluated under Subsections
106.02 and 106.03.

Construction of permanent pavement markings will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Measurement

634.12 Measure the Section 634 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

When pavement markings are measured by the linear meter, measure the length of line applied along
the centerline of each line applied regardless of color. Measure broken or dotted pavement lines from
end to end of the line including gaps. Measure solid pavement lines from end to end of each continuous
line. Measure line quantities based on a 100-millimeter wide line. For line widths greater than 100
millimeters, adjust the measured length of line in the ratio of the required width to 100 millimeters.

When pavement markings are measured by the square meter, measure the number of square meter of
line, symbol or letter marking based on the marking area shown in the plans. If not shown, measure the
area of each marking in place to the nearest square meter.

Payment

634.13 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 634 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 634 – Permanent Pavement Markings 628

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 635. — TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL

Description

635.01 This work consists of furnishing, installing, maintaining, relocating, and removing temporary
traffic control devices and services as ordered for the control and protection of public traffic through
the project.

Advance warning arrow board, barricade, and warning light types are designated in the MUTCD.

Material

635.02 Conform to the MUTCD and the following Sections and Subsections:

Concrete barrier (temporary) 618

Guardrail (temporary) 617
Retroreflective sheeting 718.01
Retroreflectors 718.08(b)
Sign panels 633.05
Sign posts 633.04
Temporary plastic fence 710.11
Temporary pavement markings 718.16

Construction Requirements

635.03 Qualifications. Provide flaggers certified by the Proper Institution, or other acceptable
organization. Use pilot car operators conforming to the qualifications of a flagger.

635.04 General. Furnish, install, and maintain temporary traffic control devices adjacent to and within
the project as required by the MUTCD, traffic control plan, and Section 156. Install and maintain
traffic control devices as follows:

(a) Furnish and install traffic control devices before the start of construction operations;

(b) Install only those traffic control devices needed for each stage or phase;

(c) Relocate temporary traffic control devices as necessary;

(d) Remove devices that no longer apply to the existing conditions;

(e) Immediately replace any device that is lost, stolen, destroyed, or inoperative;

(f) Keep temporary traffic control devices clean;

(g) Furnish and maintain traffic control devices that meet the "acceptable" standard described in
ATSSA, Quality Standards for Work Zone Traffic Control Devices. Amend the ATSSA standards
as follows:

(1) Repair or remove and replace "marginal" devices within 48 hours; and
(2) Repair or remove and replace "unacceptable" devices immediately;

Section 635 – Temporary Traffic Control 629

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(h) Remove temporary traffic control devices upon contract completion or when approved; and

(i) Furnish crashworthy temporary traffic control devices.

635.05 Barricades. Use barricades of the type and size specified or according to the MUTCD. Use
Type III, IV, IX, or XI retroreflective sheeting.

635.06 Cones and Tubular Markers. Use cones or tubular markers of the height specified or
according to the MUTCD. Use Type III or VI retroreflective sheeting.

635.07 Construction Signs. Use Type III, IV, VIII, IX, or XI prismatic retroreflective sheeting. Use
fluorescent sheeting for orange signs. For roll-up signs, use florescent Type VI retroreflective sheeting.
Remove or completely cover unnecessary signs. Use metal, plywood, or other acceptable material to
cover signs. Do not use adhesives glues, tapes, or mechanical fasteners that mar the face of the panel of
the sign to be covered.

Install posts according to Section 633. Portable sign supports may be used instead of sign posts when
approved by the Engineer.

635.08 Drums. Use plastic drums that are at least 900 millimeters high and at least 18 inches (450
millimeters) in diameter. Use Type III or VI retroreflective sheeting.

635.09 Flaggers. Use flaggers certified according to Subsection 635.03. Use Type III, IV, VIII, IX, or
XI retroreflective sheeting on flagger paddles. Do not use flags.

635.10 Pilot Cars. Use pilot car operators certified according to Subsection 635.03. Mount a "PILOT
CAR FOLLOW ME" sign on the rear and a high-intensity, rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe light
on the roof of the pilot car.

635.11 Temporary Barriers. Use temporary barriers that are crashworthy and are new or used
provided they are not badly damaged. Lifting holes no larger than 100 millimeters or lifting loops are
permitted.

Mount white or yellow retroreflectors, as applicable, to the top or side of the barrier on 8-meter centers.
Mount the retroreflectors at a uniform height at least 600 millimeters above the road surface. Flexible
barrier delineators or barrier delineation tape may be used instead of retroreflectors when approved by
the Engineer.

635.12 Temporary Guardrail. Construct temporary guardrail according to Section 617.

Mount white or yellow retroreflectors, as applicable, to the top or side of the guardrail on 25-foot (8-
meter) centers. Mount the retroreflectors at a uniform height at least 600 millimeters above the road
surface.

635.13 Temporary Pavement Markings and Delineation. Before opening a pavement surface to
traffic, remove conflicting pavement markings by sandblasting or other methods that do not damage
the surface or texture of the pavement. Make the removal pattern uneven to not perpetuate the outline
of the removed pavement markings. Lightly coat sandblasted or removal areas on asphalt surfaces with
emulsified asphalt.

Place and maintain temporary pavement markings that are neat, crack free, true, straight, and unbroken.

Section 635 – Temporary Traffic Control 630

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

If temporary signs and pavement markers are substituted for temporary pavement markings, install
temporary signs and pavement markers according to the MUTCD and plans.

For temporary pavement markings, use preformed retroreflective tape, traffic paint, or pavement
markers as follows:

(a) Preformed retroreflective tape. Apply according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Remove
loose preformed retroreflective tape before placing additional pavement layers.

(b) Pavement markers. Do not use pavement markers during seasonal suspensions. When chip
seals, slurry seals, or tack coats are used after marker placement, protect the markers with an
approved protective cover, and remove it after the asphalt material is sprayed.

(c) Traffic paint. Do not apply traffic paint to the final surface. Apply traffic paint as the
temporary pavement marking if no work will be performed on the project for at least
30 consecutive days. Apply traffic paint at a 0.38-millimeter minimum wet film thickness or at a
rate of 2.6 square meters per liter. Immediately apply Type 1 glass beads on the paint at a minimum
rate of 0.7 kilograms per liter of paint.

Remove temporary pavement markers before placing additional pavement layers or permanent
pavement markings. Remove temporary markings after 14 days and apply permanent pavement
markings unless approved by the Engineer.

635.14 Vertical Panels. Use vertical panels that are at least 600 millimeters in height and 200 to 300
millimeters wide. Use Type III, IV, VIII, IX, or XI retroreflective sheeting.

635.15 Warning Lights. Use warning lights of the types shown in the plans or according to the
MUTCD. Install warning lights with a minimum mounting height of 750 millimeter to the bottom of
the lens. Secure lights to the top of the traffic control device they are supplementing. Use batteries
recommended by the light manufacturer. Mount large batteries below windshield height and preferably
on the ground. Replace batteries when they no longer provide satisfactory performance.

Use Type C Steady-Burn warning lights for delineation on barricades or drums. Use Type A Low-
Intensity Flashing warning lights on the first 2 barricades or drums in the merging or shifting taper
series. Use Type B high-Intensity Flashing warning lights on the first two advance warning signs. Type
A and Type C warning lights are intended to warn road users during nighttime hours, while Type B
warning lights are intended to warn road users during both daylight and nighttime hours.

635.16 Shadow Vehicle. Use a 9000-kilogram ± 450 kilogram shadow vehicle equipped with a truck-
mounted attenuator (crash cushion) attached to the rear of the vehicle, exterior flashing yellow dome
light, and an arrow board.

Use the shadow vehicle to provide physical protection to workers from traffic approaching from the
rear during moving operations.

Use the following procedures to close a lane of traffic. Alternate procedures may be used if approved
by the Engineer.

(a) Move the shadow vehicle to a point approximately 60 meters from the first advance warning
sign for the lane closure and stop on the shoulder;

Section 635 – Temporary Traffic Control 631

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Activate the flashing lights and flashing arrow board. Begin the arrow board in the caution
mode and after approximately 2 minutes display the correct flashing pass arrow;

(c) Move the shadow vehicle (now acting as a protection vehicle) along the shoulder to the first
sign location, stopping approximately 30 meters before the sign location in a blocking position;

(d) Place the first sign then proceed to the next advance sign location. Repeat step (c) for the
second sign and install that sign. Repeat this procedure until advance warning signs are installed;

(e) After installing the advanced warning signs for the lane closure, move the shadow vehicle into
the lane that is to be closed to a position 30 meters before the closing taper location. Install the
channelizing devices for the taper in the shielded lane; then

(f) Move the shadow vehicle off the roadway and past the taper on the shoulder and remain in
position until the flashing arrow board for the closure (if one is to be provided) is placed and
operating. Move the shadow vehicle with the workers as they proceed to set up the remaining
devices as additional protection.

635.17 Pavement Patch. Use an asphalt mix according to Section 403 or commercial available cold
asphalt mix to repair potholes and rough spots in the traveled way before reopening travel lanes to
traffic. If cold asphalt mix is used, remove and replace with hot asphalt mix before placing succeeding
hot asphalt lifts.

635.18 Temporary Crash Cushions. Use a crashworthy temporary crash cushion according to
manufacturer’s recommendations.

635.19 Temporary Signal System. Use a temporary signal system according to MUTCD Parts 4 and
6.

Provide the names and telephone numbers of at least two emergency contacts who can be reached
24 hours a day, and who are available to arrive on site within 4 hours of notification to repair or
replace malfunctioning temporary signal equipment. In addition, provide for emergency flaggers
who can be reached 24 hours a day, and who are available to perform traffic control operations
within the timeframes specified below until the temporary signal system is operable.

If the traffic signal malfunctions during construction operations, immediately begin traffic control
operations using flaggers until the system is returned to normal signal operation. Complete traffic
signal repairs within 6 hours of the malfunction.

If the traffic signal malfunctions during a period when no construction activity is taking place, begin
traffic control operations using flaggers as soon as possible, but no later than 2 hours after the initial
notification. Continue temporary flagging operations until the system is returned to normal signal
operation. Complete traffic signal repairs within 12 hours of notification.

No payment will be made for the use of flaggers in place of a malfunctioning or inoperable
temporary signal system.

635.20 Temporary Fence. Use temporary fence according to Section 619.

635.21 Temporary Rumble Strip. Use transverse or longitudinal rumble strips according to the
MUTCD Part 6 to alert drivers of an approaching flagger station or work area.

Section 635 – Temporary Traffic Control 632

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

635.22 Steel Plates. Use 25-millimeter or thicker steel plates capable of safely carrying traffic. Secure
the plates to the pavement to prevent any movement.

635.23 Acceptance. Material for temporary traffic control devices will be evaluated under Subsections
106.02 and 106.03. Vehicles for pilot cars and shadow vehicles will be evaluated under Subsection
106.02.

Placement of temporary traffic control devices will be evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Temporary traffic control services will be evaluated under Subsection 106.02.

Measurement

635.24 Measure the Section 635 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable when ordered by the Engineer and installed.

When measuring temporary traffic control pay items, measure only one time even if relocated or
replaced, except for pay items paid by the hour.

Measure barricades by the linear meter of width.

When measuring construction signs by the square meter, measure front face sign panel. Do not
measure posts and temporary supports.

When there is a pay item for moving temporary barriers, do not measure movement of temporary
barriers for work access or the convenience of the Contractor.

When measuring temporary pavement markings, measure only one application of pavement markings
per lift. When temporary pavement markings are measured by the linear foot or mile (meter or
kilometer), measure the number of linear meters or kilometers of lines applied along the centerline of
each 100-millimeter wide line applied regardless of color. Measure solid lines from end to end of each
continuous line. Measure broken lines from end to end including gaps. For line widths greater than 100
millimeters, adjust the measured length of line in the ratio of the required width to 100 millimeters.
When temporary pavement markings are measured by the square meter, measure the number of square
meters of symbols or letter markings based on the marking area shown in the plans or, if not shown, the
area of each marking measured in place to the nearest square meter.

When measuring temporary pavement markers, measure only one application of pavement markings
per lift, even if replaced. Measure temporary pavement markers used at the option of the Contractor
instead of temporary pavement markings as equivalent temporary pavement markings and not as
temporary pavement markers.

When measuring pavement marking removal, measure the actual line removed. Do not measure gaps.

When measuring temporary crash cushions, measure each entire crash cushion configuration.

When there is a pay item for moving temporary crash cushion, do not measure movement of temporary
crash cushion for work access or the convenience of the Contractor.

Measure replacement barrels or cartridges for crash cushions for the barrels or cartridges damaged by
public traffic.

Section 635 – Temporary Traffic Control 633

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Payment

635.25 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 635 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Progress payments for temporary traffic control devices will be paid as follows:

(a) 50 percent of the pay item amount will be paid upon installation.

(b) An additional 25 percent of the pay item amount will be paid following completion of
50 percent of the contract amount.

(c) Payment of the remaining portion of the pay item amount will be paid when the temporary
traffic control devices are removed from the project.

Progress payments for pay items paid for by the hour will be paid at 100 percent of the pay item
amount when ordered by the Engineer and furnished.

Section 635 – Temporary Traffic Control 634

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 636. — TRAFFIC SIGNAL, TRAFFIC COUNTER, LIGHTING,

AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Description

636.01 This work consists of installing, modifying, relocating, or removing traffic signals, traffic
counter, flashing beacons, highway lighting, sign illumination, communication conduits, and electrical
systems or provisions for future systems.

Material

636.02 Conform to the following Subsections:

Backer rod 712.01(f)

Electrical material 721.01
Joint sealant and crack fillers 712.01(a)
Lighting material 721.02
Underground concrete utility structures 725.09(d)

Construction Requirements

636.03 Regulations and Codes. Furnish material and workmanship conforming to the standards of the
National Electrical Code, local safety code, UL, and the National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA).

Obtain permits, arrange for inspections, and pay fees necessary to obtain electrical service.

Furnish luminaires with crashworthy supports.

Notify the Engineer, local traffic enforcement agency, utility companies or railroad company at least 7
days before any operational shutdown to coordinate connections or disconnections to an existing utility
or system.

636.04 General. Submit at the preconstruction conference, a certified cost breakdown by individual
items when systems are paid the lump sum item for use in making progress payments and price
adjustments.

Submit a list of proposed equipment and material 15 days before installation. Include the
manufacturer’s name, size, and identification number of each item. Supplement the list with scale
drawings, catalog cuts, and wiring diagrams showing locations and details of equipment and wiring.

The Engineer will approve the exact locations of the systems.

Remove structures and obstructions according to Section 203. Salvage material acceptable for reuse in
the work. Excavate and backfill according to Section 209. Construct concrete according to Section 601.

Where roadways are to remain open to traffic and existing systems will be modified, maintain the
existing systems in operation until final connection to the modified circuit to minimize traffic
disruptions.

Section 636 – Traffic Signal, Traffic Counter, Lighting, and Electrical Systems 635
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

636.05 Conduit. Cut conduit so the ends are smooth. Connect conduit sections with couplings to butt
the ends of both conduits squarely against each other inside the couplings. Provide a metal expansion
and deflection fitting where conduit crosses a structural expansion joint.

Install conduits continuous between outlets with at least couplings to permit pulling conductors. End
conduit with bell fittings or bushings. Furnish pull wires for conduits designated for future cable
installation.

Remove and replace crushed, deformed, or damaged conduit. Maintain conduits clean and dry and
protect ends of conduit with plugs, caps, or fittings.

Size pull boxes to provide for termination of the conduit and connection of the conductors.

636.06 Traffic Signal and Lighting Systems. Furnish systems according to the requirements of the
contract.

Design the control unit to energize the lighting circuit upon failure of any component of its circuit.
Furnish a control with an "on" level adjustable between 11 and 54 lux. Operate luminaires with a series
circuit distribution system at a potential not exceeding 2400 volts.

Control lights and luminaires by photocell controls. For current less than or equal to 10 amperes,
furnish a photocell switch. For current greater than 10 amperes, furnish a photocell switch operating
a magnetic relay for switching the lighting circuit.

636.07 Traffic Counter. Locate and install traffic counters as shown in the plans.

Mount and orient the cabinet to provide an unobstructed, direct line of sight to the roadways that
contain count station and vehicle detection equipment when cabinet door is opened. Install traffic
counter and communications devices inside cabinet.

Identify and label loop wires inside each pull box in which the loop wires enter. Maintain consistent
wiring identification and labeling when entering the cabinet and with connection to the traffic
counter. Use water resistant material for wiring identification and labeling. Obtain approval for loop
wire assignments at all locations.

Before powering-on equipment within the cabinet provide a copy of the following:

(a) Voltages for power supplies to include but not limited to electrical meter, solar panel,
batteries, and communications devices, and

(b) Telephone number and/or IP address for all communication devices.

636.08 Traffic Loop. Do not install loops when the pavement is wet. Saw cut, wire, and seal for loop
wires on the same day. Do not allow vehicular traffic to pass over an open saw cut unless protected.

Saw clean, smooth, well-defined, 8-millimeter wide and 45-millimeter deep cuts without damaging the
adjacent pavement. Overlap saw cuts to provide full depth at corners. Saw cut the lead-in to the pull
box as close as possible to the edge of pavement. Thoroughly clean the cut of foreign material by
sandblasting, waterblasting, or with a mechanical wire brush. Repeat the process until a new, clean
concrete face is exposed. Dry the joint with compressed air.

Section 636 – Traffic Signal, Traffic Counter, Lighting, and Electrical Systems 636
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Install the loop wire in one continuous length at the bottom of the cut. Install without kinks, curls, or
other damage to the wire or its insulation. Replace any damaged wires. Hold the loop wire in place
with 600-millimeter long backer rods.

Where the loop wire crosses a crack or joint, use a plastic sleeve that extends 100 millimeters on each
side of the crack or joint. Provide extra loop wire in the sleeve for joint expansion and contraction.

Twist the loop lead-in wires 16.5 turns per meter from the loop to the pull box. Color code the wires of
each loop for identification of separate loops. Coil 900 millimeters of lead-in pair slack in the pull box
for each loop.

Before applying sealant, test the loop and lead-in for continuity and resistance by applying a 1000-volt
megohmmeter between each end of the loop lead-in and the nearest reliable electrical ground. If no
available ground exists, establish a ground for the measurement. Record the location and
megohmmeter readings and submit readings and test equipment data. Replace the loop if the
megohmmeter reading is less than 10 megohms or the inductance is less than 60 microhenries or more
than 100 microhenries.

Apply sealant to the saw cuts with the backer rods in place. Apply the sealant in a manner that does not
produce air bubbles. Remove excess sealant and finish level with the pavement. Follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for sufficient time for the sealant to harden before allowing traffic to cross
the loops.

Repeat the resistance and continuity test after sealant is applied. Report the second test for comparison
with the first test report.

636.09 Testing and Demonstration Period. Before energizing any portion of the system, demonstrate
that the conductor system is clear and free of short circuits, open circuits, and unintentional grounds.
Repair or replace faulty circuits.

After energizing the system, demonstrate that all electrical components work properly. Repair or
replace faulty electrical components.

After completing electrical component tests, conduct a demonstration test for 30 continuous days.
Adjust and correct any deficiencies in the system during the 30-day demonstration period. If any part
of the system is replaced or repaired, retest that part of the system for an additional 30 days.

636.10 Warranties, Guarantees, and Instruction Sheets. When installations are permanent, deliver
manufacturer’s warranties, guarantees, instruction sheets, and parts lists at the final inspection.

636.11 Relocations. Use material equivalent to existing material, unless present codes require different
or improved material. Existing material may be salvaged and reused, provided material and installation
methods used meet the requirements of applicable codes and ordinances.

636.12 Acceptance. Material for traffic signal, traffic counter, lighting, and electrical systems will be
evaluated under Subsections 106.02 and 106.03.

Installation of traffic signal, traffic counter, lighting, and electrical systems will be evaluated under
Subsections 106.02 and 106.04.

Structural excavation and backfill will be evaluated under Section 209.

Section 636 – Traffic Signal, Traffic Counter, Lighting, and Electrical Systems 637
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Concrete will be evaluated under Section 601.

Measurement

636.13 Measure the Section 636 pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02
and the following as applicable:

For relocations, do not measure additional line or connections necessary to place the fixture at the new
location.

Payment

636.14 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the
Section 636 pay items listed in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Payment for lump sum pay items will be prorated based on the total work completed.

Section 636 – Traffic Signal, Traffic Counter, Lighting, and Electrical Systems 638
 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

DIVISION 700
MATERIAL

Section 700 – Material 639

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 701. — CEMENT

701.01 Hydraulic Cement. Do not mix cement brands or types.

(a) Portland cement. Conform to AASHTO M 85.

(b) Blended hydraulic cement. Conform to AASHTO M 240.

701.02 Masonry and Mortar Cement.

(a) Masonry cement. Conform to ASTM C91, Type N, S, or M

(b) Mortar cement. Conform to ASTM C1329, Type N, S, or M.

Section 701 – Cement 640

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 702. — ASPHALT MATERIAL

702.01 Asphalt Binder. Conform to AASHTO M 226 or AASHTO M320.

702.02 Emulsified Asphalt. Conform to AASHTO M 140 or AASHTO M 208.

(a) Polymer modified cationic emulsified asphalt for chip seals. Use a solid or latex polymer
added either to the asphalt binder or during the emulsification process. Conform to AASHTO M
316 with the following exceptions:

(1) Regardless of the type of polymer modification used, 50 mm/min

the minimum force ratio required is 0.3 per AASHTO T 300,
f2/f1, 4 °C
(2) Regardless of the type of polymer modification used, 50 mm/min
the minimum elastic recovery required is 50% per AASHTO T 301,
25 °C
(3) CRS-2P, penetration 25 °C, 100 g, 5 sec, AASHTO T 49 90 to 150
(4) CRS-2hP, penetration, 25 °C, 100 g, 5 sec, AASHTO T 49 50 to 90

(b) Polymer modified emulsified asphalt for micro-surfacing. Conform to ISSA A 143, except
use the AASHTO T 59, Section 6, Emulsified Asphalt Residue by Evaporation procedure to
determine percent residue.

(c) Penetrating emulsified asphalt for prime coat. Conform to Table 702.1. Follow AASHTO
T 59, except according to Table 702.1.

Table 702.1
Penetrating Emulsion for Prime Coat
Minimum Maximum
Requirements for Emulsion
Viscosity, Saybolt Furol at 50 °C, sec 15 150
Settlement, 24-hours, % − 1
Residue by evaporation, % 62 −
Requirements for Residue
Penetration, 25 °C, 100 g, 5 sec, AASHTO T 49 40 200
Solubility in trichloroethylene, %, AASHTO T 44 97.5 −

702.03 Material for Dampproofing and Waterproofing Concrete and Masonry Surfaces.

(a) Primer. Conform to ASTM D41 for asphalt membranes. Furnish a neoprene-based primer for
use with rubberized asphalt membrane. Furnish a resin- or solvent-based primer for use with the
modified bitumen membrane.

With preformed membrane sheet, use primers of a type recommended by the manufacturer.

(b) Asphalt. For mop coat, conform to ASTM D449, Type I or II.

Section 702 – Asphalt Material 641

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(c) Waterproofing fabric. Furnish asphalt saturated fabric conforming to ASTM D173.

If preformed membrane sheet is used, furnish either the rubberized asphalt type or the modified
bitumen type. The rubberized asphalt type consists of a rubberized asphalt sheet reinforced with a
polyethylene film or mesh. The modified bitumen sheet type consists of a polymer modified
bitumen sheet reinforced with a stitch-bonded polyester fabric or fiberglass mesh. Conform to
Table 702.2 or 702.3.

Table 702.2
Preformed Membrane Sheet for Surfaces Other Than Bridge Decks
Value
(1)
Property Test Rubberized Modified
Asphalt Type Bitumen Type
Tensile strength in ASTM
3.5 kN/m 3.5 kN/m
machine direction D882(1)
% Elongation at
ASTM 150% 25%
break in machine (1)
D882 at 23 °C at 23 °C
direction
Pliability ASTM
No cracks No cracks
D146(2)
Thickness,
1.52 mm 1.52 mm 1.52 mm
minimum
Softening point, ASTM
74 °C 99 °C
minimum D 36(2)
(1) Base ASTM D882 on Method A, 25 mm wide strip with 100 mm minimum initial grip
separation and 100 mm gage length at 50 mm per minute. Base acceptance criteria on an average
of five samples.
(2) Base ASTM D146 on a 180-degree bend over a 100 mm mandrel at -12 °C

Table 702.3
Preformed Membrane Sheet for Bridge Decks
Value
Property Test Rubberized Modified
Asphalt Type Bitumen Type
Tensile strength in ASTM
8.75 kN/m 7.0 kN/m
machine direction D882(1)
% Elongation at
ASTM 15% 10%
break in machine (1)
D882 at 23 °C at 23 °C
direction
Pliability ASTM
No cracks No cracks
D146(2)
Thickness, - 1.65 mm 1.65 mm
minimum
Softening point, ASTM
74 °C 99 °C
minimum D36(2)
(1) Base ASTM D882 on Method A, 25 millimeter wide strip with 100 millimeter) minimum initial
grip separation and 100 millimeter) gage length at 50 millimeters per minute. Base acceptance
criteria on an average of five samples.
(2) Base ASTM D146 on a 180-degree bend over a 100 millimeters mandrel at -12 °C.

Section 702 – Asphalt Material 642

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(d) Mastic. Furnish mastic consisting of a rubberized asphalt cold-applied joint sealant for use with
preformed rubberized sheets. Furnish mastic consisting of a blend of bituminous and synthetic
resins for use with modified bitumen sheet.

(e) Asphalt roll roofing. Conform to ASTM D6380, Class M, Type II.

702.04 Asphalt Mastic. Conform to AASHTO M 243.

702.05 Antistrip Additive. Conform to the following:

(a) Type 1. Furnish commercially produced, heat stable liquid products that when added to an
asphalt have the chemical and physical properties to prevent separation of the asphalt from
aggregates.

(b) Type 2. Furnish cement conforming to Subsection 701.01 or fly ash conforming to Subsection
725.04(a).

(c) Type 3. Furnish lime conforming to AASHTO M 303.

702.06 Mineral Fiber. Conform to the following:

(a) Fiber length 6-mm max. mean test value

The fiber length is determined according to the Bauer McNett fractionation.

(b) Fiber thickness 5-µm max. mean test value

The fiber diameter is determined by measuring at least 200 fibers in a phase contrast microscope.

(c) Shot content. Table 702.4

Table 702.4
Mineral Fiber Shot Content(1)
Nominal Maximum Size
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
250 µm 90+5
63 µm 70+10
(1) Shot content is a measure of non-fibrous material. The shot content is
determined on vibrating sieves. See ASTM C612 for additional information.

Section 702 – Asphalt Material 643

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 703. — AGGREGATE

703.01 Fine Aggregate for Concrete. Furnish sand conforming to AASHTO M 6, Class B, except as
amended or supplemented by the following:

(a) Material passing No. 200 (75µm) sieve, AASHTO T 11 3.0 percent max.

(b) Alkali-silica reactivity. Test the aggregate for alkali silica reaction and conform to one of the
following (1) through (5):

(1) Alkali-silica reactivity, ASTM C1260 ≤0.10 percent at 16 days after

casting
(2) Alkali-silica reactivity, ASTM C1260 0.11 percent to 0.20 percent
at 16 days after casting
And one of the following examinations:
(a) Petrographic examination of aggregates, Favorable report for use
ASTM C295, performed within one year
from time of submittal
(b) Petrographic examination of hardened concrete, Favorable report for use
ASTM C856, performed on ASTM C1260
specimens after test
(3) Alkali-silica reactivity with cementitious material, ≤0.10 percent at 16 days after
casting
ASTM C1567, performed on approved mix design
mass percent combinations. Do not us lithium
compounds as mitigation measures.
(4) Alkali silica reaction, ASTM C1293 <0.04 percent at 12 months
(5) Alkali-silica reaction with cementitious material, <0.04 percent at 24 months
ASTM C1293, performed on approved mix design
mass percent combinations
For lightweight fine aggregate, conform to AASHTO M 195.

703.02 Coarse Aggregate for Concrete. Conform to AASHTO M 80, Class A, except as amended or
supplemented by the following:

(a) Los Angeles abrasion, AASHTO T 96 40 percent max.

(b) Grading, AASHTO M 43 All sizes except numbers 8, 89, 9,

or 10
(c) Alkali-silica reactivity See Subsection 703.01(b)

For bridge decks or surface courses, do not use aggregates known to polish or carbonate aggregates
containing less than 25 percent by mass of insoluble residue as determined by ASTM D3042.

Section 703 – Aggregate 644

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

For lightweight coarse aggregate, conform to AASHTO M 195.

703.03 Granular Backfill. Furnish aggregate for the following installations.

(a) Underdrain pipe with geotextile. Furnish granular backfill conforming to AASHTO M 80,
Class E and AASHTO M 43, Size Number 3, 4, 5, 7, 57, or 67.

(b) Underdrain pipe without geotextile. Furnish granular backfill conforming to AASHTO M 6,
except the soundness test is not required.

703.04 Reserved.

703.05 Subbase, Base, and Surface Course Aggregate.

(a) General. Furnish hard, durable particles or fragments of crushed stone, crushed slag, or crushed
gravel conforming the following:

(1) Los Angeles abrasion, AASHTO T 96 50 percent max.

(2) Sodium sulfate soundness loss (5 cycles), 12 percent max.
AASHTO T 104
(3) Durability index (coarse), AASHTO T 210 35 min.
(4) Durability index (fine), AASHTO T 210 35 min.
(5) Fractured faces, ASTM D5821 50 percent min.
(6) Without organic matter and lumps or balls of clay
(b) Subbase or base aggregate. In addition to Subsection 703.05(a), conform to the following:

(1) Gradation Table 703.2

(2) Liquid limit, AASHTO T 89 25 max.

Table 703.2
Target Value Ranges for Subbase and Base Gradation
Sieve Size Percent by Mass Passing Designated Sieve (AASHTO T 27 and T 11)
Grading Designation
A (Subbase) B (Subbase) C (Base) D (Base) E (Base)
63 mm 100(1)
50 mm 97 – 100(1) 100(1) 100(1)
37.5 mm 97 – 100(1)
25 mm 65 – 79 (6) 80 – 100 (6) 100(1)
19 mm 64 – 94 (6) 86 – 100 (6) 100(1)
12.5 mm 45 – 59 (7)
9.5 mm 40 – 69 (6) 51 – 82 (6) 62 – 90 (6)
4.75 mm 28 – 42 (6) 40 – 60 (8) 31 – 54 (6) 36 – 64 (6) 36 – 74 (6)
425 µm 9 – 17 (4) 12 – 26 (4) 12 – 26 (4)
75 µm 4.0 – 8.0 (3) 4.0 – 12.0 (4) 4.0 –7.0 (3) 4.0 –7.0 (3) 4.0 –7.0 (3)
(1) Statistical procedures do not apply.
( ) The value in the parentheses is the allowable deviation (±) from the target values..

Section 703 – Aggregate 645

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(c) Surface course aggregate. In addition to (a) above, conform to the following:

(1) Gradation Table 703.3

(2) Liquid limit, AASHTO T 89, Method A 35 max.
(3) Plasticity index, AASHTO T 90 10±3
Do not furnish material that contains asbestos fibers.

Table 703.3
Target Value Ranges for Surface Course Gradations
Percent by
Sieve Size Mass Passing Designate Sieve
(AASHTO T 27 & AASHTO T 11)
25 mm 100(1)
12.5 mm 70 - 80 (5)
4.75 mm 40 - 50 (7)
2.0 mm 25 - 40 (6)
425 µm 15 - 25 (5)
75 µm 8.0 – 14.0 (4)
(1) Statistical procedures do not apply.
( ) The value in the parentheses is the allowable deviation (±) from the target
values.

703.06 Crushed Aggregate. Furnish hard, durable particles or fragments of crushed stone or gravel
conforming to the size and quality requirements for crushed aggregate material normally used locally
in the construction and maintenance of highways by Federal or State agencies. Furnish crushed
aggregate with a maximum size of 25 millimeters as determined by AASHTO T 27 and AASHTO T
11. Furnish crushed aggregate uniformly graded from coarse to fine and free of organic matter, lumps
or balls of clay, and other deleterious matter.

703.07 Asphalt Concrete Aggregate. Furnish hard, durable particles or fragments of crushed stone,
crushed slag, or crushed gravel conforming to the following:

(a) Los Angeles abrasion, AASHTO T 96 35 percent max.

(b) Sodium sulfate soundness loss, AASHTO T 104 (5 cycles):

(1) Coarse aggregate 12 percent max.

(2) Fine aggregate 12 percent max.
(c) Fractured faces, ASTM D5821 (one or more) 90 percent min.

(d) Fine aggregate angularity, AASHTO T 304 (Method A) 40.0 percent min.

Section 703 – Aggregate 646

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(e) Flat and elongated particles, ASTM D4791 (1:5 ratio, 10 percent max.
9.5 mm sieve, calculated by mass,
weighted average)

(f) Sand equivalent, AASHTO T 176, Alternative Method No. 2 45 min.

(g) Gradation. Size, grade and combine the aggregate fractions in mix proportions that result in a
composite blend conforming to the specified gradation. Nominal maximum size is one sieve size
greater than the first sieve to retain more than 10 percent of the combined aggregate. Test
according to AASHTO T 27 and AASHTO T 11. Volumetric asphalt concrete aggregate
gradation. See Table 703.4.

For the surface course, do not use aggregates known to polish or carbonate aggregates containing less
than 25 percent by mass of insoluble residue when tested according to ASTM D3042.

Section 703 – Aggregate 647

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 703.4
Asphalt Concrete Aggregate Gradation
Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size – Percent Passing
Sieve Grading Designation
Size 25 mm 19 mm 12.5 mm 9.5 mm 4.75 mm
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
50 mm
37.5 mm 100
25 mm 90 100 100
19 mm * 90 90 100 100
12.5 mm * * * 90 90 100 100
9.5 mm * * * * * 90 90 100 100
4.75 mm * * * * * * * 90 95 100
2.36 mm 19 45 23 49 28 58 32 67 70 80
1.18 mm * * * * * * * * * *
600 µm * * * * * * * * * *
300 µm * * * * * * * * * *
75 µm 1.0 7.0 2.0 8.0 2.0 10.0 2.0 10.0 4.0 10.0
* Contractor specified target values. See Table 703.5 for allowable deviations.

Section 703 – Aggregate 648

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 703.5
Allowable Deviation Based on Target Value
Percent by Mass Passing Allowable
Minimum Maximum Deviation
70.1 89.9 4
60.1 70.0 5
55.1 60.0 6
45.1 55.0 7
40.1 45.0 6
30.1 40.0 5
21.1 30.0 4
8.1 21.0 3
0 8.0 2

703.08 Open-Graded Asphalt Friction Course Aggregate. Furnish hard, durable particles or
fragments of crushed stone, crushed slag, or crushed gravel conforming to the following:

(a) Los Angeles abrasion, AASHTO T 96 35% maximum

(b) Sodium sulfate soundness loss, AASHTO T 104 (5 cycles): 12% maximum
Coarse aggregate

(c) Fractured faces, ASTM D5821 (2 or more) 75 percent min.

(d) Gradation Table 703.6

Table 703.6
Target Value Ranges for
Open Graded Friction Course Aggregate Gradation
Percent by Mass Passing
Designated Sieve
Sieve (AASHTO T 27 & T 11)
Size
Grading Designation
A B
12.5 mm --- 100
9.5 mm 100 95 – 100
4.75 mm* 30 – 45 50 – 70
2.36 mm* 5 – 15 5 – 15
75 µm* 2.0 – 5.0 2.0 – 5.0
* Contractor specified target values. See Table 703.5 for allowable
deviations.
703.09 Chip Seal Aggregate. Furnish hard durable particles or fragments of crushed gravel, crushed
stone, crushed slag, or lightweight aggregates. Use only one type of aggregate on the surface
treatment. Conform to the following:

(a) Gradation Table 703.7

(b) Clay lumps and friable particles, AASHTO T 112 1.0 percent max.

Section 703 – Aggregate 649

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(c) Flat and elongated particles, ASTM D4791 (1:3 ratio, 10 percent max.
⅜-in (9.5-mm) sieve, calculated by mass, weighted average)

(d) Fractured faces, ASTM D5821 (one or more) 90 percent min.

(e) Los Angeles abrasion, AASHTO T 96 40 percent max.

(f) Soundness of aggregate, AASHTO T 104 (loss after 5 cycles) 12 percent max.
using sodium sulfate

Table 703.7
Target Value Ranges for
Single and Double Course Chip Seal Aggregate Gradation
Percent by Mass Passing Designated Sieve
Sieve (AASHTO T 27 & AASHTO T 11)
Size Grading Designation
A B C D
37.5 mm
25 mm 100 (1)
19 mm 90-100 (3) 100 (1)
12.5 mm 0-35 (5) 90-100 (3) 100 (1)
9.5 mm 0-12 (3) 0-35 (5) 85-100 (3) 100 (1)
4.75 mm − 0-12 (3) 0-35 (5) 85-100 (3)
2.36 mm − − 0-8 (3) 0-23 (4)
75 µm 0.0-1.0 (0.5) 0.0-1.0 (0.5) 0.0-1.0 (0.5) 0.0-1.0 (0.5)
(1) Statistical procedures do not apply.
( ) The value in the parentheses is the allowable deviation (±) from the target values.

703.10 Slurry Seal and Micro Surfacing Aggregate. Furnish hard durable particles or fragments of
crushed gravel or crushed stone.

(a) Slurry seal aggregate. Conform to ISSA A105 and the following:

(1) Gradation Table 703.8

(2) Los Angeles abrasion, AASHTO T 96 (grading D) 35 percent max.
(3) Sand equivalent, AASHTO T 176, 45 min.
Alternate Method No. 2, Reference Method
(4) Soundness of aggregate using sodium sulfate, 15 percent max.
AASHTO T 104 (loss after 5 cycles)

(b) Micro surfacing aggregate. Conform to ISSA A143 and the following:

(1) Gradation Table 703.8

(2) Los Angeles abrasion, AASHTO T 96 (grading D) 30 percent max.

Section 703 – Aggregate 650

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(3) Sand equivalent AASHTO T 176, 65 min.

Alternate Method No. 2, Reference Method
(4) Soundness of aggregate using sodium sulfate, 15 percent max.
AASHTO T 104 (loss after 5 cycles)
Table 703.8
Micro Surfacing and Slurry Seal Aggregate
Gradation
Percent by Mass Passing Designated
Sieve Sieve (AASHTO T 27 & AASHTO T 11)
Size Grading Designation
I II III
9.5 mm − 100 100
4.75 mm 100 90-100 70-90
2.36 mm 90-100 65-90 45-70
1.18 mm 65-90 45-70 28-50
600 µm 40-65 30-50 19-34
300 µm 25-42 18-30 12-25
150 µm 15-30 10-21 7-18
75 µm 10.0-20.0 5.0-15.0 5.0-15.0

703.11 Reserved.

703.12 Blotter. Furnish sound durable particles of gravel or crushed stone conforming to the
following:

(a) Material passing ⅜-in (9.5-mm) sieve, 100 percent

AASHTO T 27

(b) Liquid limit, AASHTO T 89 25 max.

(c) Without organic matter and clay balls

703.13 Aggregate for Aggregate-Topsoil Course. Conform to the following:

(a) Gradation AASHTO M 43, size number 57

(b) Quality AASHTO M 80, Class E

703.14 Sand. Furnish clean material conforming to the following:

(a) Gradation AASHTO M 6

(b) Deleterious substances AASHTO M 6, Class B

703.15 Aggregate for Lean Concrete Backfill. Furnish hard, clean, durable, nonplastic, nonorganic,
nonreactive aggregate to meet the designated gradation in Table 703.10.

Section 703 – Aggregate 651

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 703.10
Aggregate for Lean Concrete Backfill
Percent by Mass Passing
Sieve
Designated Sieve
Size
(AASHTO T 27 & T 11)
25 mm 100
75 µm 0.0 – 10.0

703.16 Shotcrete Aggregate. Combine fine and coarse aggregates to meet the designated gradation in
Table 703.11.

Table 703.11
Shotcrete Gradation Limits for Combined Aggregates
Percent by Mass Passing Designated Sieve
Sieve (AASHTO T 27 & AASHTO T 11)
Size Grading Designation
A B
12.5 mm — 100
9.5 mm 100 90-100
.75 mm 95-100 70-85
2.36 mm 80-98 50-70
1.18 mm 50-85 35-55
600 µm 25-60 20-35
300 µm 10-30 8-20
150 µm 2.0-10.0 2.0-10.0

(a) Fine aggregate. Conform to AASHTO M 6, Class B, except as amended or supplemented by

the following:

(1) Material passing 75 µm sieve, AASHTO T 11 3.0 percent max.

(2) Sand equivalent value, AASHTO T 176, 75 min
Alternate Method No. 2, Reference Method
(3) Alkali-silica reactivity See Subsection 703.01(b)
(b) Coarse aggregate. Conform to AASHTO M 80, Class A, except as amended or supplemented
by the following:

(1) Los Angeles abrasion, AASHTO T 96 40 percent max.

(2) Alkali-silica reactivity See Subsection 703.01(b)
703.17 Granular Rock Backdrain. Furnish hard, durable rock conforming to the following:

(a) Los Angeles abrasion, AASHTO T 96 50 % maximum

(b) Apparent specific gravity, AASHTO T 85 2.50 min.

(c) Absorption, AASHTO T 85 4.0 percent max.

Section 703 – Aggregate 652

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(d) Coarse durability index, AASHTO T 210 50 min.

(e) Gradation Table 703.12

Table 703.12
Granular Rock Backdrain Gradation
Percent by Mass Passing
Sieve Size Designated Sieve
(AASHTO T 27 & AASHTO T 11)
150 mm 100
100 mm 0 – 25
75μm 0.0 – 5.0

Section 703 – Aggregate 653

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 704. — SOIL

704.01 Foundation Fill. Furnish a suitable material conforming to the following:

(a) Maximum particle size 2 in (50 mm)

(b) Soil classification, AASHTO M 145 A-1-a

(c) Material passing No. 200 sieve (75 µm), 6.0 percent max.
AASHTO T 27 and AASHTO T 11

704.02 Bedding Material. Furnish a suitable, well-graded, free draining material conforming to the
following:

(a) Maximum particle size 12.5 mm or half

the corrugation depth,
whichever is smaller

(b) Material passing 75 µm sieve, 10.0 percent max.

AASHTO T 27 and AASHTO T 11

704.03 Backfill Material. Furnish a suitable, well-graded, compactable material conforming to the
following:

(a) For structures and pipes other than plastic pipe:

(1) Maximum particle size 75 mm

(2) Soil classification, AASHTO M 145 A-1, A-2, or A-3
(b) For reinforced soil slopes and plastic pipe:

(1) Maximum particle size 37.5 mm

(2) Soil classification, AASHTO M 145 A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, or A-3
704.04 Structural Backfill. Furnish a suitable, free draining material conforming to the following:

(a) Maximum particle size 75 mm

(b) Material passing 75-µm 15.0 percent max.

sieve, AASHTO T 27 and AASHTO T 11

(c) Plasticity index, AASHTO T 90 6 max.

704.05 Topping. Furnish a suitable, granular material conforming to the following:

(a) Maximum particle size 75 mm

(b) Soil classification, AASHTO M 145 A-1 or A-2-4

Section 704 – Soil 654

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

704.06 Unclassified Borrow. Furnish a suitable material conforming to the following:

(a) Maximum particle size 600 mm

(b) Soil classification, AASHTO M 145 A-1, A-3, or A-2-4

704.07 Select Borrow. Furnish a suitable, well-graded material conforming to the following:

(a) Gradation Table 704.1

(b) Liquid limit, AASHTO T 89 30 max.

Table 704.1
Select Borrow Gradation
Percent by Mass Passing
Sieve Size Designated Sieve
(AASHTO T 27 & AASHTO T 11)
75 mm 100
(25 mm 70-100
(4.75 mm 30-70
(75 µm 0.0-5.0

704.08 Select Granular Backfill. Furnish suitable, sound, durable, granular material conforming to
the following:

(a) Quality requirements.

(1) Gradation Table 704.2

(2) Angle of internal friction on the portion passing 34° min.
the 2 mmsieve, AASHTO T 236
Note: Compact samples for AASHTO T 236 to 95 percent of the maximum density determined according to
AASHTO T 99, Method C or D and corrected for oversized material according to AASHTO T 99, Note 9.

(3) Sodium sulfate soundness loss (5 cycles), 15 percent max.

AASHTO T 104
(4) Plasticity index, AASHTO T 90 6 max.
(5) Los Angeles abrasion, AASHTO T 96 50 percent max.

Table 704.2
Select Granular Backfill Gradation
Percent by Mass Passing
Sieve Size Designated Sieve
(AASHTO T 27 & AASHTO T 11)
100 mm 100
(425 µm 0 – 60
(75 µm 0.0 – 15.0

(b) Electrochemical requirements for MSE walls with metallic reinforcements.

Section 704 – Soil 655

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(1) Resistivity, AASHTO T 288 3000 Ω centimeter min.

(2) pH, AASHTO T 289 5.0 to 10.0
(3) Sulfate content, AASHTO T 290 200 ppm max.
(4) Chloride content, AASHTO T 291 100 ppm max.
Note: Tests for sulfate and chloride content are not required when resistivity is greater than
5000 ohm centimeters.
(c) Electrochemical requirements for MSE walls with geosynthetic reinforcements.

pH, AASHTO T 289 5.0 to 10.0

Section 704 – Soil 656

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 705. — ROCK

705.01 Gabion and Revet Mattress Rock. Furnish angular stone from a rock quarry or cut that is
hard, durable, free of organic and spoil material, and resistant to weathering and water action. Do not
use crushed river rock or rock with rounded surfaces. Conform to the following:

(a) Coarse durability index, AASHTO T 210 50 min.

(b) Density of a filled basket 1600 kg/m3 min.

(c) Gradation. Furnish rock with breadth and thickness at least one-third its length.

(1) Baskets 1 foot (300 millimeters) or greater in the vertical dimension.

(a) Maximum dimension 200 mm
(b) Minimum dimension 100 mm
(2) Baskets less than 1 foot (300 millimeters) in the vertical dimension.
(a) Maximum dimension 150 mm
(b) Minimum dimension 75 mm
(d) Los Angeles abrasion, AASHTO T 96 50 percent max.

705.02 Riprap. Furnish hard, durable, angular rock that is resistant to weathering and water action
and free of organic or other unsuitable material. Angular rock is characterized by sharp, clean edges
at the intersections of relatively flat surfaces. Do not use shale, rock with shale seams, or other fissile
or fissured rock that may break into smaller pieces in the process of handling and placing. Conform
to the following:

(a) Apparent specific gravity, AASHTO T 85 2.40 min.

(b) Absorption, AASHTO T 85 4.0 percent max.

(c) Sodium sulfate soundness loss (5 cycles), AASHTO T 104 12 percent max.

(d) Los Angeles abrasion, AASHTO T 96 50 percent max.

(e) Rock particle intermediate dimension (width) and ⅓ longest dimension

minimum dimension (thickness) (length) min.

(f) Gradation, FLH T 521 Table 705.1

Section 705 – Rock 657

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 705.1
Gradation Requirements for Riprap, CU (SI) (1)
Percent of Rock Range of Intermediate Range of Rock Mass,(3)
Class Equal or Smaller Dimensions,(2) kilograms
by Count, DX millimeters
100 230-380 27-120
85 180-280 13-50
1
50 130-200 5-19
15 80-150 1-8
100 380-530 120-340
85 280-380 50-120
2
50 200-280 19-50
15 130-200 6-19
100 530-690 340-730
85 380-480 120-250
3
50 280-360 50-100
15 200-250 19-37
100 690-840 730-1300
85 480-580 250-450
4
50 360-430 100-180
15 230-300 27-64
100 840-990 1300-2200
85 580-710 450-820
5
50 430-510 180-290
15 280-380 50-120
100 990-1140 2200-3350
85 710-810 820-1200
6
50 510-580 290-450
15 330-430 82-180
100 1140-1370 3350-5800
85 810-970 1200-2000
7
50 580-710 450-820
15 380-510 120-290
100 1370-1680 5800-10,600
85 970-1190 2000-3850
8
50 710-890 820-1600
15 480-640 250-570
100 1680-1980 10,600-17,500
85 1190-1400 3850-6100
9
50 890-1040 1600-2550
15 560-760 390-1000
100 1980-2290 17,500-26,900
85 1400-1630 6100-9650
10
50 1040-1220 2550-4100
15 660-910 660-1700
(1) Gradation includes spalls and rock fragments to provide a stable, dense mass.
(2) The intermediate dimension is the longest straight-line distance across the rock that is
perpendicular to the rock’s longest axis on the rock face with the largest projection plane.
(3) Rock mass is based on a specific gravity of 2.65.

Section 705 – Rock 658

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

705.03 Rock for Masonry Structures. Conform to the size and shape specified. Furnish sound,
durable rock of the texture and color specified and has been proven satisfactory for the intended use.
Do not furnish rock containing reeds, rifts, seams, laminations, and minerals that may cause
discoloration or deterioration from weathering.

705.04 Rock for Special Rock Embankment. Furnish angular stone that is hard, durable, resistant to
abrasion and weathering, and that is free of weak cleavages that may cause the rock to disintegrate
during handling and placing.

(a) Mechanically-placed embankments. Furnish rock conforming to Table 705.2.

Table 705.2
Range of Mechanically-Placed Rock
Percent of Rock Range of Intermediate Range of Rock Mass,(2)
(1)
Fragments by Dimensions, pounds (kilograms)
Mass millimeters
50 Larger than 725 Greater than 900
50 250 to 725 40 to 900
(1) The intermediate dimension is the longest straight-line distance across the rock that is
perpendicular to the rock’s longest axis on the rock face with the largest projection plane.
(2) Rock mass is based on a specific gravity of 2.65.

(b) Hand-placed embankments. Furnish rock conforming to Table 705.3.

Table 705.3
Range of Hand-Placed Rock
Percent of Rock Range of Intermediate Range of Rock Mass,(2)
Fragments by Dimensions,(1) pounds (kilograms)
Mass millimeters
75 Larger than 350 Greater than 75
25 250 to 350 40 to 75
(1) The intermediate dimension is the longest straight-line distance across the rock that is
perpendicular to the rock’s longest axis on the rock face with the largest projection plane.
(2) Rock mass is based on a specific gravity of 2.65.

705.05 Rock for Buttresses.

(a) General. Furnish angular stone that is hard, durable, free of organic and spoil material, and
resistant to weathering and water action. Conform to the following:

(1) Rock breadth and thickness At least one-third of the rock

length
(2) Apparent specific gravity, AASHTO T 85 2.40 min.
(3) Absorption, AASHTO T 85 4.0 percent max.
(4) Coarse durability index, AASHTO T 210 52 min.

Section 705 – Rock 659

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Mechanically-placed buttresses. In addition to (a) above, furnish rock conforming to Table
705.2.

(c) Hand-placed buttresses. In addition to (a) above, furnish rock conforming to Table 705.3.

705.06 Rock for Rockeries. Furnish hard, angular, and durable rock that consists of a solid mass
without open fractures, foliation, or other planes of weakness that are generally cubical, tabular, or
rectangular in shape. Do not furnish crushed river rock or rock with rounded surfaces. Conform to the
following:

(a) Apparent specific gravity, AASHTO T 85 2.40 min.

(b) Absorption, AASHTO T 85 4.0 percent max.

(c) Los Angeles abrasion, AASHTO T 96 50 percent max.

(d) Coarse durability index, AASHTO T 210 52 min.

(e) Sodium sulfate soundness (5 cycles), AASHTO T 104 12 percent max.

(g) Size and shape.

(1) Rock length See plans

(2) Rock breadth and thickness At least one-third of rock
length.
(3) Rock dimension 460 mm)min.
(4) Cap rock mass 90 kg)min.

705.07 Rock Mulch. Furnish hard, durable native rock that is resistant to weathering and free of excess
moisture, muck, frozen lumps, roots, sod, or other deleterious material conforming to the following:

(a) Maximum particle size 150 mm

(b) Minimum particle size 50 mm

(c) Apparent specific gravity, AASHTO T 85 2.40 min.

(d) Absorption, AASHTO T 85 4.0 percent max.

(e) Sodium sulfate soundness loss (5 cycles), AASHTO T 104 12 percent max.

(f) Los Angeles abrasion, AASHTO T 96 50 percent max.

Section 705 – Rock 660

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 706. — CONCRETE PIPE

706.01 Non-Reinforced Concrete Pipe. Conform to AASHTO M 86 for the diameters and strength
classes specified.

706.02 Reinforced Concrete Pipe. Conform to AASHTO M 170 for the diameters and strength
classes specified. For precast reinforced concrete end sections, conform to cited specifications to the
extent they apply.

706.03 Perforated Concrete Pipe. Conform to AASHTO M 175, Type 1 or 2 and AASHTO M 86 for
the diameters and strength classes specified.

706.04 Reinforced Arch-Shaped Concrete Pipe. Conform to AASHTO M 206 for the diameters and
strength classes specified.

706.05 Reinforced Elliptically-Shaped Concrete Pipe. Conform to AASHTO M 207 for the
diameters, placement design (horizontal or vertical), and strength classes specified.

706.06 Reinforced D-Load Concrete Pipe. Conform to AASHTO M 242 for the diameters specified.

706.07 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections. Conform to ASTM C1577. Meet the design
requirements for AASHTO LRFD with HL-93 live loading. Clearly mark the following information
on the inner surface of each box section by indentation, waterproof paint or other approved means:

(a) Box span and rise;

(b) Date of manufacture;

(c) Name of manufacturer;

(d) Submittal number; and

(e) Date certified by manufacturer.

706.08 Gaskets for Concrete Pipe.

(a) Elastomeric seals. Conform to ASTM C1619, Class C.

(b) Resilient connectors. Conform to ASTM C923.

706.09 Supplemental Concrete Pipe Ties. Conform to ASTM A307 and galvanize tie hardware.

Section 707. — METAL PIPE

707.01 Ductile Iron Culvert Pipe. Conform to ASTM A716 for the sizes specified.

707.02 Metallic-Coated Corrugated Steel Pipe. Furnish pipe, special sections (such as elbows,
branch connections, and prefabricated flared end sections), and coupling bands conforming to
AASHTO M 36 and either AASHTO M 218, AASHTO M 274, or AASHTO M 289 for the
dimensions and thicknesses specified. Helical corrugated pipe, 300 mm diameter and larger, shall have

Section 707 – Metal Pipe 661

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

at least two annular corrugations at each end of each pipe length. Coupling bands shall have annular
corrugations and at least one annular corrugation that indexes into the inboard corrugations of each
pipe section joined.

Fabricate underdrain pipe from steel sheets with a minimum thickness of 1.32 millimeters. Use any
class of perforation specified in AASHTO M 36.

707.03 Aluminum-Alloy Corrugated Pipe. Furnish pipe, special sections (such as elbows, branch
connections, and prefabricated flared end sections), and coupling bands conforming to AASHTO M
196 for the dimensions and thicknesses specified.

Fabricate underdrain pipe from aluminum sheets with a minimum thickness of 1.22 millimeters. Use
any class of perforation.

707.04 Asphalt-Coated Pipe. Furnish pipe, special sections (such as elbows, branch connections, and
prefabricated flared end sections), and coupling bands conforming to Section 707 as applicable for the
kinds of pipes to be coated.

Coat the pipe with asphalt material conforming to AASHTO M 190 for the type of coating specified.
Coat special sections (such as elbows, branch connections, and end sections) and coupling bands
according to AASHTO M 190. Coat flared end sections with an asphalt coating conforming to
AASHTO M 190, Type A or a field applied asphalt mastic coating conforming to AASHTO M 243.

707.05 Steel Structural Plate Structures. Furnish structures and assembly fasteners for connecting
plates conforming to AASHTO M 167 for the sizes and types specified.

707.06 Aluminum-Alloy Structural Plate Structures. Furnish structures and assembly fasteners for
connecting plates conforming to AASHTO M 219 for the sizes and types specified.

707.07 Asphalt-Coated Structural Plate Structures. Furnish structures conforming to either

Subsection 707.05 or 707.06 as applicable. Coat with an asphalt coating conforming to AASHTO
M 190, Type A or a field applied asphalt mastic coating conforming to AASHTO M 243.

If the asphalt coating is applied to the plates before field erection, identify each plate's nominal metal
thickness by painting the data on the inside surface of the plates after coating. Other methods of plate
identification may be used if approved.

707.08 Polymer-Coated Steel Pipe. Furnish pipe, special sections (such as elbows and branch
connections), and coupling bands conforming to AASHTO M 245, Grade 250/250 and AASHTO M
246, Grade 250/250.

707.09 Reserved.

Section 707 – Metal Pipe 662

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

707.10 Slotted Drain Pipe. Furnish pipe conforming to AASHTO M 36 and either AASHTO M
218, AASHTO M 274, or AASHTO M 289 for the dimensions and thicknesses specified.
Fabricate the pipe with either angle slots or grate slots and as shown on the plans.

Furnish grate assemblies for the grate slot drain conforming to ASTM A1011, SS Grade 36. Galvanize
slot angles and grate slot assemblies according to Subsection 725.10.

707.11 Metallic-Coated Spiral Rib Pipe. Furnish pipe, special sections (such as elbows and branch
connections), and coupling bands conforming to AASHTO M 36, Type IR and IIR, AASHTO M 218,
AASHTO M 274, or AASHTO M 289 for the dimensions and thicknesses specified.

707.12 Aluminum-Alloy Spiral Rib Pipe. Furnish pipe, special sections (such as elbows and branch
connections), and coupling bands conforming to AASHTO M 196, Type IR and IIR for the dimensions
and thicknesses specified.

707.13 Concrete-Lined Corrugated Steel Pipe. Furnish pipe, special sections (such as elbows and
branch connections), and coupling bands conforming to Subsection 707.02 for the dimensions and
thicknesses specified. Fully line the pipe and special sections with concrete according to ASTM A849,
Class C.

707.14 Invert-Paved Corrugated Steel Pipe. Furnish pipe, special sections (such as elbows and
branch connections), and coupling bands conforming to Subsection 707.02 for the dimensions and
thicknesses specified. Pave the invert of the pipe and special sections with concrete or asphalt material
according to ASTM A849, Class C or P, as specified.

707.15 Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. Conform to ASTM A74, Class SV for the designated
sizes.

707.16 Seamless Copper Water Tube and Fittings. Conform to ASTM B88, Type L for the
designated sizes.

707.17 Gaskets for Metal Pipe.

(a) O-ring gaskets for flexible metal pipe. Conform to ASTM C1619, Class C.

(b) Continuous flat gaskets for flexible metal pipe with flat bands or bands with
projections.

(1) Conform to ASTM D1056.

(2) Gasket thickness: 13 mm greater than the
nominal depth of pipe corrugations
(c) Continuous flat gaskets for flexible metal pipe with corrugated bands.

(1) Conform to ASTM D1056.

(2) Gasket thickness: 10 mm
707.18 Gaskets for Ductile Iron Pipe. Conform to ASTM A746.

Section 707 – Metal Pipe 663

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 708. — PLASTIC PIPE

708.01 Smooth Wall Polyethylene Pipe. Furnish perforated and nonperforated 300- to
1050-millimeter diameter pipe conforming to ASTM F714 and minimum cell Class 335434C
according to ASTM D3350.

708.02 Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe.

(a) General use. Furnish perforated and nonperforated 300- to 900-millimeter diameter pipe
conforming to AASHTO M 294.

(b) Sanitary sewers. Furnish AASHTO M 294, Type S pipe.

(c) Water systems (100 millimeters and over). Furnish pipe conforming to the requirements of
ANSI/AWWA C906. Fabricate from high-density polyethylene PE3408 conforming to a minimum
cell Class 345464 C, D or E according to ASTM D3350.

708.03 Profile Wall (Ribbed) Polyethylene Pipe. Furnish perforated and nonperforated 450- to
1200-millimeter diameter pipe conforming to ASTM F894 and minimum cell Class 334433C or
335434C according to ASTM D3350.

708.04 Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Tubing. Furnish perforated and nonperforated 3- to

10-inch (75- to 250-millimeter) diameter tubing conforming to AASHTO M 252.

708.05 Smooth Wall Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe.

(a) General use. Furnish perforated and nonperforated 100- to 375-millimeter diameter pipe
conforming to AASHTO M 278 and minimum cell Class 12454 or 12364 according to ASTM
D1784.

(b) Sanitary sewers. Conform to ASTM D3034.

(c) Water systems.

(1) PVC pipe (100 millimeters and over). Furnish pipe and fittings conforming to the
requirements of ANSI/AWWA C900 or ANSI/AWWA C905, and listed by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. Furnish joints conforming to the requirements of ASTM D3139 and using
a restrained rubber gasket conforming to ASTM F477.
(2) PVC pipe (under 100 millimeters). Furnish pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D2241.
Select PVC 1120, PVC 1220, or PVC 2120 with a minimum wall thickness equal or greater
than a standard dimension ratio (SDR) of 21. Furnish pipes bearing the National Sanitation
Foundation Seal for use to transport potable water. Furnish joints conforming to the
requirements of ASTM D3139 using a restrained rubber gasket conforming to ASTM F477.
Furnish solvent cement for pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D2564.
(d) Horizontal drains. Furnish Schedule 80 pipe conforming to ASTM D1785. Select PVC
1120, PVC 1220, PVC 2112, PVC 2116, or PVC 2120. Furnish Schedule 80, solvent weld
fittings conforming to ASTM D2467.

Section 708 – Plastic Pipe 664

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

708.06 Profile Wall (Ribbed) Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe. Furnish perforated and nonperforated 4- to
48-inch (100- to 1200-millimeter) diameter pipe conforming to AASHTO M 304 and minimum cell
Class 12454C or 12364C according to ASTM D1784,. For sanitary sewer applications, conform to
ASTM F794 or ASTM F949.

708.07 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Pipe. Conform to ASTM D2680.

708.08 Gaskets for Plastic Pipe.

(a) Elastomeric seals. Conform to ASTM F477.

(b) Thermoplastic elastomeric seals. Conform to ASTM F913.

Section 708 – Plastic Pipe 665

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 709. — REINFORCING STEEL AND WIRE ROPE

709.01 Reinforcing Steel.

(a) General. Furnish the following information with each shipment of steel to the project:

(1) Name and location of the steel rolling mill;

(2) Manufacturing process;
(3) Heat numbers;
(4) Sizes;
(5) Specifications;
(6) Copies of mill test analyses for chemical and physical tests; and
(7) Consignee and destination of shipment.
(b) Reinforcing bars. Furnish deformed, Grade 420 bars conforming to AASHTO M 31 or
AASHTO M 322.
(c) Epoxy-coated reinforcing bars. Furnish bars conforming to Subsection 709.01(b). Conform to
AASHTO M 284.

Inspect the reinforcing bars after the near white blast cleaning. Reject bars with steel slivers or
scabs. Selective sorting and rejection at the fabricator's shop may avoid unnecessary delays and
subsequent rejection of bars during the precoating inspection at the coating applicator's shop.

Coat epoxy coated reinforcing steel in a plant certified by CRSI as a fusion bonded epoxy
applicator.

(d) Tie bars. Furnish deformed, Grade 420 bars conforming to AASHTO M 31.

(e) Hook bolts. Furnish plain, Grade 420 bars conforming to AASHTO M 31 with M14 rolled
threads or M16 cut threads. Furnish a threaded sleeve nut capable of sustaining a minimum axial
load of 67 kilonewtons.

(f) Dowel bars. Conform to AASHTO M 254, Type A or B. Use plain round bars, without burring
or other deformation restricting free movement in the concrete. Paint half the length of each dowel
bar with one coat of tar paint. When the paint dries and immediately before placing the dowels,
lubricate the painted end to prevent concrete from bonding to the painted end.

For expansion joints, furnish a dowel cap that snugly covers 50±6 millimeters of the dowel, has a
closed end, and has a suitable stop to hold the closed end 25 millimeters from the end of the dowel
bar.

Lubricants for Type B dowels may be medium setting emulsified asphalt or a flaked graphite.
Lubricants are not required for Type A coated dowel bars.

Furnish dowel assemblies that hold dowel bars within 6-millimeters tolerance vertically and
horizontally during concrete placement and permit unrestricted movement of the pavement slab.

Section 709 – Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope 666

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Use wire conforming to AASHTO M 32 for dowel assemblies. Coat dowel assemblies with the
same material as the dowel bar. Recoat or repair damaged coatings equivalent to the
manufacturer’s original coating.

(g) Deformed steel wire. Conform to AASHTO M 225.

(h) Steel welded wire reinforcement, plain, for concrete. Conform to AASHTO M 55.

(i) Cold-drawn steel wire. Conform to AASHTO M 32

(j) Welded deformed steel wire fabric. Conform to AASHTO M 221.

(k) Fabricated deformed steel bar or rod mats. Conform to AASHTO M 54.

(l) Low alloy steel deformed bars. Conform to ASTM A706.

709.02 Prestressing Steel.

(a) Fabricate from one of the following:

(1) Stress-relieved steel wire, AASHTO M 204, Type BA or WA;

(2) Uncoated seven-wire steel strand, AASHTO M 203, Grade 1860; or
(3) High-strength steel bars, AASHTO M 275, Type II
(b) Submit representative samples from prestressed members fabricated off site. In the case of wire
or strand, take the sample from the same master roll.

(1) Pretensioning method. Furnish a sample at least 1.8 meters long of each strand size from
each coil.
(2) Post-tensioning method. Furnish samples of the following lengths.
(a) For wires requiring a head, 5 meters.
(b) For wires not requiring a head, sufficient length to make up one parallel-lay cable 1.5
meters long consisting of the same number of wires as the cable to be furnished.
(c) For strands furnished with fittings, 1.5 meters between near ends of fittings.
(e) For bars to be furnished with threaded ends and nuts, 1.5 meters between threads at
ends.

Section 709 – Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope 667

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 710. — FENCE AND GUARDRAIL

710.01 Barbed Wire. Furnish galvanized wire or aluminum coated wire conforming to AASHTO M
280.

710.02 Woven Wire. Furnish galvanized fabric or aluminum coated fabric conforming to AASHTO M
279.

710.03 Chain Link Fence. Furnish fabric, posts, rails, ties, bands, bars, rods, and other fittings and
hardware conforming to AASHTO M 181.

Furnish 4.5-millimeter coiled spring steel tension wire conforming to ASTM A641 hard temper with a
Class 3 galvanized coating. Use the same coating on the tension wire as used on the rest of the chain
link fence.

710.04 Fence Posts and Bollards.

(a) Wood. Conform to AASHTO M 168.

Peel bark, except for red cedar posts and bracing, which do not require peeling. Trim knots flush
with the surface and season the wood.

For dimension lumber for fences, bollards, or gates, use timber that is sound, straight, and
reasonably without knots, splits, and shakes. Provide S4S finish.

(b) Concrete. Conform to Section 601.

(c) Steel. For line fence posts, conform to AASHTO M 281. For chain link fence, conform to
AASHTO M 181.

710.05 Fence Gates. For frame gates used with chain link fences, conform to AASHTO M 181. Use
the same chain link fabric in the gate and the fence.

710.06 Rail Elements.

(a) Metal beam rail. Furnish metal beam rail conforming to AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA A-Guide to
Standardized Highway Barrier Hardware.

(1) Galvanized steel. Furnish W-beam or thrie beam rail fabricated from corrugated sheet steel
conforming to AASHTO M 180 for the designated shape, class, type, and mass of coating
specified;
(2) Painted steel. Furnish W-beam or thrie beam rail conforming to AASHTO M 180 for the
designated shape, class, type, and mass of coating specified; or
(3) Corrosion resistant (weathering) steel. Furnish W-beam or thrie beam rail conforming to
AASHTO M 180, Type IV, Class B.
(b) Box beam rail. Furnish steel box beam rail conforming to AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA A Guide
to Standardized Highway Barrier Hardware.

Section 710 – Fence and Guardrail 668

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(c) Steel-backed timber rail. Furnish timber conforming to AASHTO M 168. Fabricate the timber
rail from dry, seasoned, and dressed rough sawn Douglas fir, southern pine, or other species having
a stress grade of at least 10 megapascals. Do not use refractory species such as larch or Rocky
Mountain Douglas fir. Treat according to AASHTO M 133.

Fabricate steel backing elements according to ASTM A242.

(d) Steel-backed log rail. Use logs that are seasoned, straight, and sound No. 1 Grade Western
Hemlock, Western Red Cedar, or Pine. Do not use logs that taper in excess of 50 millimeters
between the butt and tip ends of adjacent logs. Remove bark and at least 80 percent of the inner
bark. Do not use logs with peeler or incision marks on surfaces that will be visible. Do not use logs
with knot clusters, season checks, singular or any two opposite each other that exceed the thickness
of the member. Logs may contain sound, tight, well-spaced knots. Treat according to AASHTO M
133.

Fabricate steel backing elements according to ASTM A588.

710.07 Guardrail Posts. Furnish guardrail posts conforming to AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA A Guide to

Standardized Highway Barrier Hardware.

(a) Wood. Furnish posts that do not have a through check, shake, or end slit in the same plane as,
or a plane parallel to the bolt hole and extending from the top of the post to within 75 millimeters
or the bolt hole. Treat according to AASHTO M 133.

For steel-backed timber guardrail systems, furnish posts conforming to Subsection 710.06(c).

For steel-backed log rail systems, furnish posts conforming to Subsection 710.06(d).

(b) Steel. Furnish posts of the appropriate size shape according to ASTM A6. Zinc-coat the
embedded portion of weathering steel posts according to ASTM A123.

710.08 Guardrail Blocks.

(a) Wood. Furnish wood conforming to Subsection 710.07(a).

(b) Steel. Furnish steel conforming to Subsection 710.07(b).

(c) Plastic or composite. Furnish blocks that are crashworthy. Provide a new homogeneous block
with uniform texture that does not crack, chip, flake, peel, or splinter after fabrication.

710.09 Guardrail Nuts, Bolts, and Cables.

(a) Galvanized nuts and bolts. Furnish nuts conforming to ASTM A563 Grade A (ASTM A563
M Class 5). Furnish bolts conforming to ASTM A307 Grade A (ASTM A325M Class 4.6).

(b) Weathering nuts and bolts. Furnish nuts conforming to ASTM A563 Grade C3 ( ASTM
A563M Grade 8S3). Furnish bolts conforming to ASTM A325 Type 3 (ASTM A325M Type
8.8.3).

(c) Cable. Furnish cable conforming to AASHTO M 30 Type II, Class A.

Section 710 – Fence and Guardrail 669

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

710.10 Guardrail Hardware. Furnish hardware conforming to AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA A Guide to

Standardized Highway Barrier Hardware.

For angles, channels, wide flanges, and plates not contained in the above standard, conform to ASTM
A36 for non-weathering steel or ASTM A242 for weathering steel. For structural tubing for short steel
posts, conform to ASTM A500 or ASTM A513, Grade 1008.

Galvanize soil plates and structural tubing according to AASHTO M 111. Do not punch, drill, cut, or
weld the metal after galvanizing.

Manufacture reflector tabs from 4-millimeter aluminum or plastic. Use an adhesive that resists peeling
with a force of 0.89 kilograms per centimeter of width. Use mildew-resistant adhesive that has no
staining effect on retroreflective sheeting. Furnish retroreflective sheeting according to Subsection
718.01.

710.11 Temporary Plastic Fence. Furnish plastic noncorrosive fence fabricated from polyethylene
(HDPE) and UV stabilized for outdoor weathering. Conform to the following:

(a) Height 1200 mm min.

(b) Mesh openings 80 to 85 mm

(c) Color International orange

(d) Mass 0.25 kg/m min.

Section 710 – Fence and Guardrail 670

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 711. — CONCRETE CURING MATERIAL

AND ADMIXTURES

711.01 Curing Material. Conform to the following:

(a) Burlap cloth AASHTO M 182

(b) Waterproof paper ASTM C171

(c) Polyethylene film ASTM C171

(d) Liquid membrane forming compounds ASTM C309,

type 1-D or 2

711.02 Air-Entraining Admixtures. Conform to AASHTO M 154.

711.03 Chemical Admixtures. Furnish water-reducing, retarding, set-accelerating, and hydration

stabilizing admixtures, or combinations thereof, conforming to AASHTO M 194. For hydration
stabilizing admixtures, conform to AASHTO M 194, Type B or D.

711.04 Latex Emulsion. Furnish a homogeneous, nontoxic, film forming polymeric emulsion in water
with stabilizers added at the point of manufacture. Conform to the following:

(a) Color white

(b) Styrene butadiene polymer type stabilizer 68±4 percent styrene

32±4 percent butadiene

(c) Chlorides 0 percent

(d) Polymer particle size (0.15 to 0.25 µm average)

(e) Latex non-ionic surfactant

(f) Solids 46.5 to 49.0 percent

(g) Mass 1.00 to 1.02 kg/L @ 25 °C

(h) pH 9.0 to 13.0

(i) Shelf life 2 years min.

(j) Portland Cement Composition Polydimethyl siloxene

711.05 Concrete Coloring Agents. Conform to ASTM C979. Use only coloring agents composed of
synthetic or natural inorganic iron oxides.

Section 711 – Concrete Curing Material and Admixtures 671

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 712. — JOINT MATERIAL

712.01 Sealants, Fillers, and Seals. Conform to the following:

(a) Joint sealants and crack fillers.

(1) Joint and crack sealant, hot-applied, ASTM D 6690

AASHTO M 324, Type II or III
for concrete and asphalt concrete pavements
(2) Crack filler, hot-applied, for concrete ASTM D5078
and asphalt concrete pavements
(3) Proprietary asphalt-rubber products, furnish the following:
(a) Source and grade of asphalt binder;
(b) Total quantity of granulated rubber and mass as a percent of asphalt-rubber mixture;
(c) Granulated rubber types and quantity of each type (if blend);
(1) Mass as a percent of combined rubber; and
(2) Gradation of granulated rubber.
(d) Type of asphalt modifier, if any;
(e) Quantity of asphalt modifier and mass as a percent of asphalt binder;
(f) Other additives;
(g) Heating and application temperatures; and
(h) Manufacturer’s recommended application procedures.
(4) Elastomeric joint sealant ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P,
Class 25, use T1 or T2
(5) Flexible cellular joint filler ASTM D1056, Type 2, Class B
or C, Grade 3, 4, or 5
(b) Preformed expansion joint fillers. Furnish in a single piece for the depth and width required
for the joint.

(1) Preformed expansion joint filler AASHTO M 33

for concrete (bituminous type)
(2) Preformed sponge rubber expansion AASHTO M 153, Type I
joint filler for concrete paving and structural
construction
(3) Preformed cork expansion joint AASHTO M 153
filler for concrete paving and structural
construction.

Section 712 – Joint Material 672

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(4) Preformed expansion joint filler AASHTO M 213

for concrete paving and structural
construction (nonextruding and
resilient bituminous types)
(c) Preformed polychloroprene elastomeric joint seal for concrete pavements. Conform to
AASHTO M 220. Use a lubricant conforming to ASTM D2835, which was manufactured within
9 months of use.

(d) Silicone joint sealant for concrete pavement, cold-applied, non-sag. Conform to ASTM
D5893, Type NS.

(e) Silicone joint sealant for concrete pavement, cold-applied, self-leveling. Conform to ASTM
D5893, Type SL.

(f) Backer rod. Conform to ASTM D5249, Type 1. Use a compatible sealant as recommended by
the rod manufacture. For size of backer rod, conform to Table 712.1.

(g) Preformed polychloroprene elastomeric joint seal for bridges. Conform to AASHTO M
297. Use an adhesive lubricant conforming to ASTM D4070.

Table 712.1
Backer Rod Sizes
Joint Width After Preparation Rod Diameter
8 millimeters 10 millimeters
10 millimeters 13 millimeters
13 millimeters 15 millimeters
15 millimeters 19 millimeters
19 millimeters 25 millimeters
25 millimeters 32 millimeters
32 millimeters 38 millimeters
38 millimeters 50 millimeters

712.02 Mortar. Preblend or mix on site. Furnish and proportion mortar according to ASTM C270. Use
masonry cement mortar Type M or S.

Section 712 – Joint Material 673

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 713. — ROADSIDE IMPROVEMENT MATERIAL

713.01 Topsoil.

(a) Furnished topsoil. Furnish fertile, friable, free draining, sandy loam soil that is free of subsoil,
refuse, stumps, roots, brush, weeds, rocks larger than 25 millimeters, or other substances
detrimental to the development of vegetative growth. Demonstrate that the soil can sustain healthy
crops of grass, shrubs, or other plant growth. Conform to the following:

(1) Texture
(a) Organic matter, AASHTO T 267 3.0 to 10.0 percent
(b) Sand, AASHTO T 88 20 to 70 percent
(c) Silt, AASHTO T 88 10 to 60 percent
(d) Clay, AASHTO T 88 5 to 30 percent
(2) pH, AASHTO T 289 6.0 to 8.0
(b) Conserved topsoil. See Subsection 204.02(c).

713.02 Agricultural Limestone. Furnish calcic or dolomitic ground limestone conforming to the
standards of the Association of Official Analytical Chemists International, applicable Federal and state
regulations, and the following:

(a) Purity (calcium and magnesium) carbonates 75 percent min.

(b) Gradation Table 713.1

Table 713.1
Agricultural Limestone Gradation
Sieve Size Minimum Percent by Mass
Passing Designated Sieve
(AASHTO T 27)
2 mm 90
425 µm 50

Granulated slag or other approved natural sources of lime may be used provided the application rate is
adjusted to equal the total neutralizing power of the specified ground limestone.

713.03 Fertilizer. Furnish standard commercial grade dry formulated fertilizer conforming to the
standards of the Association of Official Analytical Chemists International, applicable Federal and state
regulations, and required minimum percentages of available nutrients.

Supply the fertilizer in new, clean, sealed, and properly labeled containers with name, mass, and
guaranteed analysis of contents clearly marked.

Liquid fertilizer containing the minimum percentage of available nutrients may be used.

Section 713 – Roadside Improvement Material 674

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

713.04 Seed. Do not use wet, moldy, or otherwise contaminated or damaged seed. Furnish each seed
type in separate sealed container. Clearly label each container with the following:

(a) Name and type of seed;

(b) Lot number;

(c) Net mass;

(d) Percent of purity, germination, and hard seed;

(e) Percent of maximum weed seed content;

(f) Seed origin;

(g) Noxious weeds present;

(h) Other crop seed;

(i) Inert matter;

(j) Name and address of seed distributor; and

(k) Mixture percent of each component.

Inoculate legume seed with approved cultures according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

713.05 Mulch.

(a) Straw. Furnish certified weed free straw from oats, wheat, rye, rice, or other grain crops that is
without mold or other objectionable material. Furnish straw in an air-dry condition suitable for
placing with mulch blower equipment.

(b) Wood fiber. Furnish processed wood fiber from wood chips conforming to the following:

(1) Colored with a green dye noninjurious to plant growth;

(2) Readily dispersible in water;
(3) Nontoxic to seed or other plant material;
(4) Free of growth or germination inhibiting substances;
(5) Without weed seed;
(6) Air dried to an equilibrium moisture content of 12±3 percent;
(7) Packaged in new labeled containers; and
(8) Packaged in a condition appropriate for mixing in a homogeneous slurry suitable for
application with power spray equipment
(c) Grass straw cellulose fiber. Furnish processed grass straw fiber conforming to the following:

(1) Colored with a green dye noninjurious to plant growth;

(2) Readily dispersible in water;

Section 713 – Roadside Improvement Material 675

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(3) Nontoxic to seed or other plant material;

(4) Free of growth or germination inhibiting substances;
(5) Free of weed seed;
(6) Air dried to a moisture content of 10±0.2 percent;
(7) Air dried to a uniform mass of ±5 percent;
(8) Packaged in new containers labeled with the manufacturer’s name and air-dry mass; and
(9) Packaged in a condition appropriate for mixing in a homogeneous slurry suitable for
application with power spray equipment.
(d) Peat moss. Furnish a granulated sphagnum peat moss conforming to the following:

(1) Sticks, stones, and mineral matter 0 percent

(2) Partially decomposed stems 75 percent min.
and leaves of sphagnum
(3) Color brown
(4) Textured from porous fibrous to spongy fibrous
(5) pH 3.5 to 7.5
(6) Air-dried
(e) Mature compost. Furnish partially decomposed organic material, such as leaves, grass, shrubs,
and yard trimmings, cured for 4 to 8 weeks. Maturity is indicated by temperature stability and soil-
like odor. Furnish friable, dark brown, weed-free, and pathogen-free mature compost conforming
to the following:

(1) Carbon/nitrogen ratio 25/1 to 35/1

(2) Carbon/phosphorus ratio 120/1 to 240/1
(3) pH 6.0 to 7.8
(4) Water content 40 percent max.
(5) Particle size
(a) Seeding and sodding 12 mm max.
(b) Erosion control 25 mm max.
(6) Organic material 50 percent min.
(7) Man-made inserts (plastic, glass, metal) 2 percent max.
(f) Straw for hydroseeding. Furnish clean agricultural straw milled to 25 millimeters or less in
length. Dry the fibers to 10 percent moisture for compaction. Bale in heat-sealed plastic bags.

(g) Bonded fiber matrix hydromulch. Furnish a mixture of fibers and bonding agent which, when
hydraulically applied and dried, produce a matrix conforming to the following:

(1) Does not dissolve or disperse when wetted;

Section 713 – Roadside Improvement Material 676

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(2) Holds at least 1000 grams of water per 100 grams of dry matrix;
(3) Has no germination or growth inhibiting factors;
(4) Forms no water insensitive crust;
(5) Contains material that is 100 percent biodegradable; and
(6) Is colored with a green dye noninjurious to plant growth.
(h) Recycled pulp fiber. Furnish cellulose fiber mulch products manufactured from natural
material diverted from the waste-stream of manufacturing processes or produced from recycled
material. These include newsprint, chipboard, corrugated cardboard, wood chips, and similar
material. Process the material to eliminate substances that inhibit seed germination and plant
growth. Add a colored dye that is non-injurious to plant growth and fades rapidly with exposure to
light. Supply fiber that readily blends with water, grass seed, fertilizer, and other additives to for a
slurry suitable for application with power spray equipment. Furnish a homogeneous mixture
conforming to the following:

(1) Synthetic, plastic, metal, or glass material 0 percent

(2) Weed seed 0 percent
(3) Moisture content 15 percent max.
(4) Ash content 7 percent max.
(5) Organic matter 90 percent min.
(6) Boron 250 ppm max.
(7) Water-holding capacity 800 to 1200 percent by
mass
(8) pH 4.0 to 8.5
(i) Wood chips. Provide wood chips from local sources including clearing. Limit size of chips to
no greater than 100 by 50 by 13 millimeters.
713.06 Plant Material. Conform to the American Standard for Nursery Stock.

(a) Quality of plant material. Furnish plants that are excellent representatives of their normal
species or varieties. Furnish nursery grown stock that has been transplanted or root-trimmed two or
more times according to the kind and size of plant. Furnish plants with a normally developed
branch system. Do not furnish plants with disfiguring knots, sun-scald, injuries, abrasions of the
bark, dead or dry wood, broken terminal growth, or other objectionable disfigurements.

Furnish trees with reasonably straight stems and well branched and symmetrical branches
according to their natural habits of growth.

(b) Plant names. For scientific and common plant names, conform to Standardized Plant Names
as adopted by the American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature. Legibly tag and
identify plants by name and size.

(c) Grading standards. Conform to American Standard for Nursery Stock as approved by ANSI.

Section 713 – Roadside Improvement Material 677

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(d) Nursery inspection and plant quarantine. Furnish plants that are without plant diseases and
insect pests.

Comply with nursery inspection and plant quarantine regulations of the states of origin and
destination including Federal regulations governing interstate movement of nursery stock. Provide
a valid copy of the certificate of inspection with each package, box, bale, or carload shipped or
otherwise delivered.

(e) Balled and burlapped (B&B) plants. Furnish plants from the original and undisturbed soil in
which the plants were grown. Dig B&B plants to retain as many fibrous roots as possible. Wrap,
transport, and handle the plants so the soil ball and small and fibrous roots remain intact.

713.07 Cellular Confinement Systems. Furnish a flexible honeycomb three-dimensional structure

fabricated from light stabilized polyethylene plastic. Conform to the following:

(a) Functional longevity 120 months min.

(b) Cell area 200 to 300 cm2

(c) Sheet thickness, ASTM D751 1.24 to 1.26 mm

(d) Density, ASTM D792 0.941 to 0.960 g/cm3

(e) Carbon black content, ASTM D1603 1.5 to 2.5 percent

(f) Environmental stress crack resistance, 2000 hours min.

ASTM D1693

(g) Conform to Table 713.2 for the depth specified.

Table 713.2
Cellular Confinement Systems
Property Specifications
Nominal 50 mm 75 mm 100 mm 150 mm 200 mm
cell depth
Cell joint 500 N min 700 N min. 1000 N min. 1400 N min. 2000 N min.
strength

713.08 Miscellaneous Planting Material.

(a) Stakes for bracing and anchoring. Conform to the American Lumber Standards. Fabricate
stakes for bracing and anchoring trees from rough cypress, cedar, locust, or other approved wood
essentially without knots, rot, crossgrain, or other defects that would impair the strength of the
stake. Furnish stakes with a minimum 50 by 50-millimeter square cross-section and adequate
length.

Furnish anchor stakes of the same size and quality as bracing stakes. The diameter and length of the
deadman is specified in the contract.

Section 713 – Roadside Improvement Material 678

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Hose. Furnish 25-millimeter diameter garden or steam hose (rubber and fabric) to be used with
wire for bracing and anchoring trees.

(c) Wire. Furnish 4-millimeter diameter soft annealed galvanized steel wire for bracing and
anchoring trees.

(d) Wrapping material. Furnish 100 millimeter wide rolls of waterproof paper (triple lamination
30-30-30) or 150-millimeter wide rolls of burlap for wrapping trees.

(e) Twine. Furnish 2-ply twine for trees 75 millimeters and less in diameter and 3-ply twine for
trees over 75 millimeters in diameter for tying wrapping material to the trees.

(f) Antidesiccant. If approved, furnish a commercially available antidesiccant emulsion to provide

a film over plant surfaces that is permeable enough to permit transpiration.

(g) Tree wound dressing. Furnish a commercially available product with asphalt base and
fungicide. Furnish material that is antiseptic, waterproof, adhesive, and elastic. Do not use material
that is harmful to living tree tissue such as kerosene, coal tar, or creosote.

713.09 Sod. Furnish living vigorous sod of the type of grass and thickness specified in the contract.
Furnish sod with a dense root system that is reasonably free of noxious weeds and grasses. Before
taking up the sod, cut the top growth to less than 75-millimeter height.

713.10 Pegs for Sod. Furnish square or round pegs of sound wood and conform to the following:

(a) Length 200 mm min.

(b) Approximate cross-sectional area 600 mm2

713.11 Tackifiers. Furnish a commercially available product containing no solvents or other diluting
agents toxic to plant life that is without growth or germination inhibiting factors, nonflammable,
nontoxic to aquatic organisms, and functional for at least 180 days.

(a) General purpose tackifier. Furnish one of the following:

(1) Plant based tackifier. Furnish a natural high molecular weight polysaccharide, a high
viscosity hydrocolloid that is miscible in water, and labeled as one of the following:
(a) Guar gum. A product derived from the ground endosperm of the guar plant,
Cyanmopsis tetragonolobus, treated with dispersing agents for easy mixing and dilutable
at the rate of 1.2 to 6 kilograms per 1000 liters of water.
(b) Psyllium. A product manufactured from the finely ground, mucilloid coating of
Plantago ovata or Plantago ispaghula seeds and able to dry and form a firm but rewettable
membrane.
(c) Starch. A product manufactured from a nonionic, water-soluble, granular material
derived from corn, potato, or other plant-based source.
(2) Polymeric emulsion blend tackifier. Furnish a prepackaged liquid or dry powder,
anionic formulation with a residual monomer content not exceeding 0.05 percent by mass and
labeled with one of the following as the primary active ingredient:

Section 713 – Roadside Improvement Material 679

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(a) Acrylic copolymers and polymers.

(b) Polymers of methacrylates and acrylates.
(c) Copolymers of sodium acrylates and acrylamides.
(d) Polyacrylamide and copolymer of acrylamide.
(e) Hydrocolloid polymers.
(b) Polymer stabilized fiber matrix tackifier. Furnish the following:

(1) A liquid formulation with polyacrylamide as the primary active ingredient with the
following requirements:
(a) Linear, anionic copolymer of acrylamide and sodium acrylate and
(b) Anionic with a residual monomer content that is at most 0.05 percent by mass.
(2) Formulated and labeled as one of the following:
(a) Water-in-oil emulsion. A product containing at least 3.1 kilograms per 10 liters pure
polyacrylamide that is at least 30 percent active or
(b) Liquid dispersed polyacrylamide. A product containing at least 5.3 kilograms per 10
liters pure polyacrylamide that is at least 35 percent active.
713.12 Fiber Rolls and Socks.

(a) Excelsior fiber rolls. Furnish fiber rolls of curled excelsior fiber rolled into a cylindrical
shape and encased in a tubular netting.

(b) Straw fiber rolls. Furnish straw fiber rolls that are manufactured from certified weed free
straw and wrapped in a tubular mesh.

(c) Coir rolls. Furnish coir fiber rolls that are 100 percent coconut fiber.

(d) Compost socks. Furnish tubular mesh filled with mature compost according to Subsection
713.05(e).

(e) Tubular mesh for fiber rolls. Provide tubular mesh with openings no larger than
10 millimeters. Mesh material is not required to be biodegradable, but must be removed at the
end of the project if it is not biodegradable. Provide tubular mesh diameter according to plans.
Fill according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

(f) Other fiber material. Use of recycled material that meet the requirements of the application
may be considered. Submit to the Engineer for approval.

713.13 Gravel Bags. Furnish woven fabric bags with a minimum water flow rating of 1.8 cubic
meters per minute per meter as tested by ASTM D4491. Fill the bags with clean coarse aggregate.

713.14 Sandbags. Use clean, silt free material for sand filler. Conform to the following:

(a) Bag material canvas, geotextile, or burlap

Section 713 – Roadside Improvement Material 680

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Volume per bag 0.01 m3 min.

713.15 Temporary Culvert Pipe. For temporary slope drains and temporary culvert pipes, furnish
culvert pipe fabricated from corrugated metal, plastic, or concrete for use in diverting water through or
around work areas. Provide for AASHTO loading M18 on temporary culvert pipe placed beneath the
traveled way.

713.16 Silt Fence.

(a) Geotextile. Refer to AASHTO M288, Table 7.

(b) Posts. Conforming to the following:

(1) Wood posts. Conform to the following:

(a) 38 millimeters by 38 millimeters by 1.2 meters minimum dimensions;
(b) Untreated fir, redwood, cedar, or pine, cut from sound timber with no loose or unsound
knots; and
(c) Pointed on end driven in ground.
(2) Steel posts. Conform to the following:
(a) 1200 millimeter minimum length;
(b) Cross section shape that can resist failure from lateral loads (T-shaped, U-shaped, or
L-shaped); and
(c) 1.1 kilograms per meter minimum mass.
(c) Silt fence reinforcement. Furnish a wire mesh consisting of 1.628-millimeter diameter steel
with mesh spacing of 150 millimeters by 150 millimeters or prefabricated polymeric mesh of
equivalent strength.

713.17 Temporary Rolled Erosion Control Products. Furnish temporary rolled erosion control
products conforming to Table 713.3 and the following.

(a) Type 1.A, ultra-short term mulch control netting. Furnish a mulch control netting consisting
of rapidly degrading photodegradable synthetic mesh or woven biodegradable natural fiber netting.

(b) Type 1.B, ultra-short term net-less erosion control blanket. Furnish an erosion control
blanket composed of processed rapidly degrading natural or polymer fibers mechanically
interlocked or chemically adhered together to form a continuous matrix.

(c) Type 1.C, ultra-short term single-net erosion control blanket and open weave textile.
Furnish one of the following materials: (1) an erosion control blanket composed of processed
degradable natural or polymer fibers mechanically-bound together by a single rapidly degrading,
synthetic or natural fiber netting to form a continuous matrix or (2) an open weave textile
composed of processed rapidly degrading natural or polymer yarns or twines woven into a
continuous matrix.

Section 713 – Roadside Improvement Material 681

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(d) Type 1.D, ultra-short term double-net erosion control blankets. Furnish an erosion control
blanket composed of processed natural or polymer fibers mechanically-bound between two rapidly
degrading, synthetic or natural fiber nettings to form a continuous matrix.

(e) Type 2.A, short-term mulch control netting. Furnish a mulch control netting consisting of
photodegradable synthetic mesh or woven biodegradable natural fiber.

(f) Type 2.B, short-term net-less erosion control blanket. Furnish an erosion control blanket
composed of processed degradable natural or polymer fibers mechanically-interlocked or
chemically-adhered together to form a continuous matrix.

(g) Type 2.C, short-term single-net erosion control blanket or open weave textile. Furnish one
of the following materials: (1) an erosion control blanket composed of processed degradable
natural or polymer fibers mechanically-bound together by a single degradable synthetic or natural
fiber netting to form a continuous matrix; or (2) an open weave textile composed of processed
degradable natural or polymer yarns or twines woven into a continuous matrix.

(h) Type 2.D, short-term double-net erosion control blankets. Furnish an erosion control
blanket composed of processed natural or polymer fibers mechanically bound between two natural
fiber or synthetic nettings to form a continuous matrix.

(i) Type 3.A, extended term mulch control netting. Furnish a mulch control netting consisting of
a slow degrading synthetic mesh or woven natural fiber.

(j) Type 3.B, extended term erosion control blanket or open weave textile. Furnish one of the
following materials: (1) an erosion control blanket composed of processed slow degrading natural
or polymer fibers mechanically-bound together between two slow degrading synthetic or natural
fiber nettings to form a continuous matrix; or (2) an open weave textile composed of processed
slow degrading natural or polymer yarns or twines woven into a continuous matrix.

(k) Type 4, long-term erosion control blanket or open weave textile. Furnish one of the
following materials: (1) an erosion control blanket composed of processed slow degrading natural
or polymer fibers mechanically-bound together between two slow degrading synthetic or natural
fiber nettings to form a continuous matrix; or (2) an open weave textile composed of processed
slow degrading natural or polymer yarns or twines woven into a continuous matrix.

Section 713 – Roadside Improvement Material 682

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 713.3
Temporary Rolled Erosion Control Products
Rolled Erosion Control Product Type
Property 1.A(1) 1.B 1.C 1.D 2.A (1) 2.B 2.C 2.D 3.A (1) 3.B 4 Test
Method
Typical N/A
functional
3 3 3 3 12 12 12 12 24 24 36
longevity(2)
(months)
Minimum ASTM
0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 1.09 0.36 1.45 1.82
tensile D6818
kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m
strength(3)
Maximum "C" ASTM
factor at D6459
maximum 0.10 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.10 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.10 0.25 0.25 or
gradient for at at at at at at at at at at at other
slope 1V:5H 1V:4H 1V:3H 1V:2H 1V:5H 1V:4H 1V:3H 1V:2H 1V:5H 1V:1½H 1V:1H qualified
applications(4) independent
test(7)
Minimum ASTM
shear D7207
stress for or other
12 Pa 24 Pa 72 Pa 84 Pa 12 Pa 24 Pa 72 Pa 84 Pa 12 Pa 96 Pa 108 Pa
channel qualified
applications(5)(6) independent
test(7)
(1) Obtain max "C" factor and allowable shear stress for mulch control nettings with the netting used in conjunction with pre-applied mulch material.
(2) Functional longevities are for guidance only. Actual functional longevities may vary based on site and climatic conditions.
(3) Use ASTM D6818.
(4) "C" factor calculated as ratio of soil loss from rolled erosion control product protected slope (tested at specified or greater gradient, v:h) to ratio of soil loss from
unprotected (control) plot in large-scale testing. These performance test values should be supported by periodic bench scale testing under similar test conditions and failure
criteria using Erosion Control Technology Council (ECTC) Test Method #2).
(5) Minimum shear stress the rolled erosion control product (un-vegetated) can sustain without physical damage or excess erosion (>12.7-millimeters soil loss) during a 30-
minute flow event in large-scale testing. These performance test values should be supported by periodic bench scale testing under similar test conditions and failure criteria
using ECTC Test Method #3.
(6) The permissible shear stress levels established for each performance category are based on historical experience with products characterized by Manning’s roughness
coefficients in the range of 0.01 to 0.05.
(7) Other large-scale test methods determined acceptable by the Engineer.

Section 713 – Roadside Improvement Material 683

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

713.18 Turf Reinforcement Mats. Furnish a rolled erosion control product composed of non-
degradable synthetic fibers, filament, nets, wire mesh, and other elements processed into a permanent,
three-dimensional matrix conforming to Table 713.4. See the Erosion Control Technology Council
website (ECTC.org) for commercially available products that may conform to these specifications.

Table 713.4
Turf Reinforcement Mats
Properties(1) Rolled Erosion Control Product Type Test Method
5.A 5.B 5.C
Minimum tensile ASTM D4595
1.82 kN/m 2.19 kN/m 2.55 kN/m
strength(2)(3)
UV stability 80 80 80 ASTM D4355
(minimum % tensile (500-hour exposure)
retention)
Minimum thickness(2) 6.35 mm 6.35 mm 6.35 mm ASTM D6525
Maximum gradient for 2V:1H 2V:1H 2V:1H
slope applications
Minimum shear stress for 288 Pa 384 Pa 480 Pa ASTM D6460
channel applications(4) or other qualified
independent test(5)
(1) For turf reinforcement mats containing degradable components, obtain property values on the non-degradable
portion of the matting alone.
(2) Minimum average roll values, machine direction only.
(3) Field conditions with high loading and high survivability requirements may warrant the use of turf
reinforcement mats with tensile strengths of 44 kilonewtons per mete) or greater.
(4) Minimum shear stress the turf reinforcement mat (fully vegetated) can sustain without physical damage or
excess erosion (>12.7-millimeters soil loss) during a 30-minute flow event in large-scale testing. These performance
test values should be supported by periodic bench scale testing under similar test conditions and failure criteria
using Erosion Control Technology Council Test Method #3.
(5) Other large-scale test methods determined acceptable by the Engineer.

713.19 Sediment Filter Bags. Furnish rot and mildew resistant bags composed of a non-woven
geotextile fabric conforming to Table 713.5 and the following:

(a) Minimum footprint 150 ft2 (14 m2)

(b) Sewn-in sleeve to fit minimum 100-millimeter pump discharge hose.

Secure discharge hose with a hose clamp.

Section 713 – Roadside Improvement Material

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 713.5
Sediment Filter Bag Geotextile Requirements
Property Test Units Requirement
Method
ASTM
Mass D3776 g/m 310
Minimum grab tensile strength D4632 N 1100
Tensile elongation at break D4632 % 50
Minimum puncture strength D4833 N 510
Minimum trapezoid tear strength D4533 N 445
Minimum sewn seam strength D4632 N 900
Mullen burst D3786 lb/in2 (kPa) 2400
Ultraviolet resistance D4355 % 70
Permittivity D4491 sec-1 1.2
Water flow rate D4491 m3/min./m 1.8

713.20 Prefabricated Filter Insert. Size inlet filter inserts to fit the catch basin or drop inlet and
provide a high-flow bypass. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations.

713.21 Floating Turbidity Curtains. Furnish curtains made of tightly woven nylon, plastic, or other
non-deteriorating material conforming to Table 713.6 and the following:

(a) Fabric overlap when more than 150 mm

one width of fabric is required

(b) Supporting flotation buoyancy 1.4 kPa min.

(c) Ballast chain (galvanized) 8 mm

(d) Dual galvanized wire rope load

lines with a heavy vinyl coating 8 mm diameter

Table 713.6
Floating Turbidity Curtain Material Requirements
Property Test Method Units Requirement
ASTM
Minimum grab tensile strength – machine direction D4632 N 1640)
Minimum grab tensile strength – cross D4632 N 1110
Machine direction
Trapezoid tear strength - machine direct D4533 N 445
Trapezoid tear strength –cross machine direction D4533 N 270
Mullen burst D3786 kPa 3300
Apparent opening size D4751 70
4% permittivity D4491 sec-1 0.28

Section 713 – Roadside Improvement Material

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 714. — GEOSYNTHETIC MATERIAL

714.01 Geotextile. Use long-chain synthetic polymers composed of at least 95 percent by mass of
polyolefins or polyesters to manufacture geotextile and the threads used in joining geotextile by
sewing. Form the geotextile, including selvedges, into a stable network such that the filaments or
yarns retain their dimensional stability relative to each other.

Property values, with the exception of apparent opening size (AOS), in these specifications represent
minimum average roll value (MARV) in the weakest principal direction (i.e., average test results of
any roll in a lot sampled for conformance or quality assurance testing must meet or exceed the
specified values). Values for AOS represent maximum average roll values.

Conform to the following physical requirements:

(a) Separation and stabilization geotextile and geotextile filter. Conform to Table 714.1.

Table 714.1
Separation and Stabilization Geotextile and Geotextile Filter Requirements (1)
Minimum Strength and Durability Properties
Strength Test Units Class 1 Class 2
Property Method
ASTM
Type of Geotextile Woven Nonwoven Woven Nonwoven
Elongation at break D4632 % <50 ≥50 <50 ≥50
Grab strength " N 1420 890 1110 710
Sewn seam strength " N 1290 800 980 620
Tear strength D4533 N 490 360 400 240
Puncture strength D6241 N 2760 1910 2220 1380
Ultraviolet stability D4355 % 50% retained strength after 500 hours of exposure
Hydraulic Properties
Hydraulic Test Units Type A Type B Type C Type D Type E
Property Method
ASTM
Minimum D4491 s-1 0.7 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.1
permittivity
Maximum D4751 mm 0.425 0.425 0.250 0.425 0.212
apparent
opening size
(AOS)
(1) Do not use woven slit film geotextile.

Section 714 – Geosynthetic Material 686

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Paving geotextile. Conform to Table 714.2.

Table 714.2
Paving Geotextile Requirements
Property Test Method Units Specifications

Type of Geotextile Nonwoven

Grab strength ASTM D4632 N 490

Elongation at break ASTM D4632 % ≥ 50
Asphalt retention ASTM D6140 L/m2 (1)

Mass per unit area ASTM D5261 g/m2 135 - 200

Melting point ASTM D276 ºC 150
(1) Asphalt required to saturate fabric only. Value supplied by manufacturer in material
certification. Value does not indicate the asphalt application rate required for construction.
Product asphalt retention property must meet the MARV value provided by the
manufacturer’s certification.

714.02 Geocomposite Drain. Furnish a prefabricated geocomposite composed of a drainage core

and a non-woven geotextile that permits in-flow from both sides. Geocomposites that only permit in-
flow from one side may only be used directly against a concrete surface. Furnish geotextile and
drainage core manufactured from long chain synthetic polymers composed at least 95 percent by mass
of polypropylene, polyester, polyamide, polyvinyl chloride, polyolefin, or polystyrene. Build the core
up in thickness by means of columns, cones, nubs, cusps, meshes, stiff filaments, or other
configurations. Fabricate the core in sheets, panels, or rolls of adequate strength to resist installation
stresses and long-term loading conditions.

Property values, with the exception of fungi resistance, in these specifications represent minimum
average roll value (MARV) in the weakest principal direction (i.e., average test results of any roll in
a lot sampled for conformance or quality assurance testing must meet or exceed the specified values).

Furnish a nonwoven encapsulating geotextile meeting requirements of Table 714.1. Firmly attach the
encapsulating geotextile to the core at the manufacturing plant, so that folding, wrinkling, or other
movement cannot occur during handling or after placement. Use a non-water-soluble adhesive, heat
sealing, or other methods recommended by the geotextile manufacturer. Do not use adhesive on areas
of the geotextile where flow is intended to occur.

If heat sealing is used, do not weaken the geotextile below the required strength values. Extend the
geotextile beyond the core length on all sides sufficiently to encapsulate the core and collector pipe.

Conform to Table 714.3.

Section 714 – Geosynthetic Material 687

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 714.3
Geocomposite Drain Requirements
Property Test Method Units Specifications
Sheet Strip Drain
Drain
Type 1 Type 1 Type 2
3
Transmissivity ASTM m /sec/m 0.0010 0.0031 0.0041
(flow rate) (1) D4716
Compressive ASTM kPa 690 340 340
strength at yield D1621
Applied normal ASTM kPa 100 10 10
(4)(5)(6)
compressive stress D4716
Hydraulic gradient ASTM dimensionless 1.0 0.1 0.1
(2)(3)(4)
D4716
Fungi resistance ASTM G21 − No visible growth
Geotextile See Table 714.1 − Nonwoven
(1) If core construction separates the flow channel into two or more discrete sections, only the flow rate on one
in-flow face is considered in determining the core's acceptability.
(2) (350 millimeter long specimen.
(3) 100-hour seating period.
(4) Rubber membrane between platens and geocomposite.

714.03 Stabilization Geogrid. Furnish biaxial geogrid manufactured using long-chain synthetic
polymers composed of at least 95 percent by mass of polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides.
Fabricate the geogrid into a stable network such that the ribs, filaments, or yarns retain their
dimensional stability relative to each other, including selvages.

Property values, with the exception of maximum opening size, represent minimum average roll
values (MARV) (i.e., average test results of any roll in a lot sampled for conformance or quality
assurance testing must meet or exceed the minimum specified values). The value for maximum
opening size represents maximum average roll value.

Section 714 – Geosynthetic Material 688

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Conform to Table 714.4.

Table 714.4
Stabilization Geogrid Requirements
Property Test Method Units Specifications(1)

Minimum opening size N/A(2) mm 13

Maximum opening size N/A(2) mm 75
Tensile strength at 2% ASTM D6637 kN/m 5.8
strain
Tensile strength at 5% ASTM D6637 kN/m 11.7
strain
Ultimate tensile strength ASTM D6637 kN/m 19.0
Junction strength GRI(3) GG2 N 110
Ultraviolet stability ASTM D4355 percent 50% retained strength after
(retained strength) 500 hours of exposure
(1) Strength values are in the weaker principal direction.
(2) Direct measure with caliper.
(3) Geosynthetic Research Institute.

714.04 Reinforcement Geotextile and Geogrid. Furnish reinforcement geotextile manufactured

using long-chain, synthetic polymers, composed at least 95 percent by mass of polyolefins or
polyesters. Form the geotextile, including selvedges, into a stable network such that the filaments or
yarns retain their dimensional stability relative to each other.

Furnish reinforcement geogrid manufactured as a regular network of integrally-connected

longitudinal and transverse polymer tensile elements with a geometry that permits significant
mechanical interlock with the backfill. Provide geogrid composed of fibers or ribs that are at least 95
percent by mass polypropylene, polyethylene, or polyester. The geogrid structure must remain
dimensionally stable under construction stresses and have a high resistance to damage during
construction, to ultraviolet degradation, and to chemical and biological degradation encountered in
the soil being reinforced.

Conform to Tables 714-5 and Table 714.6. Property values represent minimum average roll values
(MARV) (i.e., average test results of any roll in a lot sampled for conformance or quality assurance
testing must meet or exceed the minimum specified values).

The Nominal long-term strength (Tal) is based on:

Tal = Tult/RF

where RF = RFID × RFCR × RFD.

RFID, RFCR, and RFD values must be substantiated by evaluation of independent test results by
Highway Innovative Technology Evaluation Center (HITEC), AASHTO National Transportation
Product Evaluation Program (NTPEP), or an equivalent third party report. Provide a copy of the
report to the Engineer. Determine RFID, RFCR, and RFD according to the following:

Section 714 – Geosynthetic Material 689

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(a) RFID: Determine the reduction factor for installation damage from the results of full scale
construction damage tests conducted according to ASTM D5818. Conduct the tests with a soil
having the same maximum particle size, D50, and angularity as the soil to be used for
construction. Tests using coarser soils (same or larger maximum particle size and D50) may be an
acceptable substitution. The Engineer will make the final determination as to whether the test
data based on the substitute soil is acceptable. Interpolation of RFID will not be allowed, the
results for the coarser soils will be used. The Contractor may elect to perform a test using project
specific fill, placement, and compaction techniques and equipment to determine the RFID. Use a
default value of 3.0 if no installation damage testing has been conducted. The minimum value for
RFID is 1.1.

(b) RFCR. Determine the creep reduction factor according to one of the following two
approaches:

(1) conventional creep testing according to ASTM D5262; or

(2) a combination of stepped isothermal method (SIM) per ASTM D6992 and conventional
creep testing. Perform testing and determine creep reduction factors for a 75 year design life
according to the procedures in Appendix D of Publication No. FHWA-NHI-10-025, Design
and Construction of Mechanically Stabilized Earth Walls and Reinforced Soil Slopes –
Volume II. If testing has not been conducted, default values for RFCR are 2.5 for polyester
polymer, and 5.0 for polypropylene or polyethylene polymer.
(c) RFD. For polypropylene or polyethylene geosynthetics conforming to the requirements of
Table 714.5, a default reduction factor of 1.1 may be used for RFD. For polyester geosynthetics
conforming to the requirements listed in Table 714.5, a default reduction factor of 1.15 may be
used for RFD if the soil has a pH between 5 and 8; and a reduction factor of 1.3 may be used if
the soil pH is between 3 and 5 or between 8 and 9.

Table 714.5
Reinforcement Geotextile and Geogrid Polymer Requirements
Polymer Type Property Test Method Specifications
Polypropylene Ultraviolet stability ASTM Minimum 70% retained strength
and polyethylene D4355 after 500 hours of exposure
Polyester Ultraviolet stability " "
Polypropylene Thermo-oxidation ENV ISO 13438: 1999, Minimum 50% retained strength
and polyethylene resistance Method A after 28 days (polypropylene)
(polypropylene) or 56 days (polyethylene)
or Method B
(polyethylene)
Polyester Hydrolysis ASTM D4603 Minimum number average
resistance & GRI GG8 (1) molecular weight (Mn) of 25,000
GRI GG7 (1) Maximum carboxyl end group
(CEG) of 30
All polymers Mass per ASTM Minimum 270 g/m2
unit area D5261
Percent post Certification of Maximum 0%
consumer recycled material used
material by mass

Section 714 – Geosynthetic Material 690

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 714.6
Reinforcement Geotextile and Geogrid Strength Requirements
Property Test Units Specifications(1)(2)
Method Type I Type II Type III Type IV Type V Type VI
ASTM
Ultimate D4595 kN/m 29.2 43.8 58.4 73.0 87.6 116.8
strength (3) or
(Tult) D6637 (4)
Nominal kN/m 14.6 21.9 29.2 36.5 43.8 58.4
long-term
strength
(Tal)
(1) For reinforcement geotextile, also meet the Class 1 strength requirements in Table 714.1 and the ultraviolet
stability requirements in Table 714.5.
(2) The specified strength is in the principal direction of reinforcement, i.e. perpendicular to the wall or slope
face.
(3) Based on minimum average roll value (MARV).
(4) Test Method ASTM D4595 is for geotextile and ASTM D 6637 is for geogrid.

714.05 Geomembrane. Furnish geomembrane that consists of textured (roughened) surface

polyvinyl chloride, high density polyethylene, or linear low density polyethylene geomembrane with
a thickness of 0.72 to 0.80 millimeters. Glue or weld seams of the geomembrane to prevent leakage.
Conform to Table 714.7.

Table 714.7
Geomembrane Requirements
Type of Geomembrane Specifications
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) ASTM D7176(1)
High density polyethylene (HDPE) GRI(2) GM13
Linear low density polyethylene (LLDPE) GRI(2) GM17
(1) The minimum average asperity height is 0.25 millimeters. Of 10 readings, 8
of 10 must be greater than or equal to 0.18 millimeters, and the lowest individual
reading must be greater than or equal to 0.12 millimeters.
(2) Geosynthetic Research Institute.

Section 714 – Geosynthetic Material 691

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 715. — PILING

715.01 Untreated Timber Piles. Conform to AASHTO M 168. Fabricate the piles from the following
species (or group) for the sizes and dimensions specified in the contract:

(a) Douglas-fir;

(b) Larch;

(c) Red pine;

(d) Red oak; or

(e) Southern pine.

715.02 Treated Timber Piles. Conform to AASHTO M 133 and AASHTO M 168. Use Douglas-fir or
southern pine.

Use the pressure method procedure prescribed in AWPA. Apply the treatment to the piles after
millwork is completed.

Imprint legible symbols or legend on the end of piles identifying the name of the treating company and
type and year of treatment according to AWPA Standards M1 Standard for the Purchase of Treated
Wood Products and M6 Brands used on Forest Products.

715.03 Concrete Piles. Fabricate piles from Class A (AE) concrete according to Section 552. Conform
to Subsection 709.01 for reinforcing steel. Conform to Subsection 709.02 for prestressing
reinforcement steel.

Construct precast concrete piles according to Section 552. Construct prestressed concrete piles
according to Section 553. When lifting anchors are used, maintain at least a 25-millimeters clearance
from the pile reinforcing steel or prestressing steel.

Use metal, plywood, or dressed lumber forms that are watertight, rigid, and true to line. Use a
25-millimeter chamfer strip in corners of the forms.

Cast piles separately or, if alternate piles are cast in a tier, cast the intermediate piles at least 4 days
after the adjacent piles are poured. Separate piles cast in tiers with tar paper or other suitable separating
material. Place concrete in each tier in a continuous operation that prevents the formation of stone
pockets, honeycombs, or other defects. Leave forms in place for at least 24 hours.

Make piles straight so when a line is stretched from butt to tip on any face, the line is no more than
25 millimeters from the face of the pile at any point. Make the pile surface true, smooth, even, and
without honeycombs and voids.

Remove lifting anchors to a depth of at least 25 millimeters below the concrete surface and fill the
resulting hole with concrete. Finish each pile with a Class 1 ordinary surface finish according to
Subsection 552.16. Cure the piles according to Sections 552 and 553 as applicable.

Section 715 – Piling 692

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

If concrete test cylinders are made and tested according to Section 552, do not move piles until the tests
indicate a compressive strength of at least 80 percent of the design 28-day compressive strength. Do
not transport or drive piles until tests indicate the minimum design 28-day compressive strength is
attained.

If concrete test cylinders are not made, do not move piles until they have cured for at least 14 days at a
minimum temperature of 15 °C or 21 days at a minimum temperature of 4 °C. Do not transport or drive
piles until cured for at least 21 days at least 15 °C or 28 days at least 4 °C. When high-early-strength
cement is used, do not move, transport, or drive piles until cured for at least 7 days.

715.04 Steel Shells. Furnish either cylindrical or tapered pile shells of spiral welded, straight-seam
welded, or seamless tube steel material. Use only one type of pile shell throughout a structure.
Conform to the following minimum shell wall thicknesses:

• Outside cylinder diameter < 350 mm 6 mm

• Outside cylinder diameter ≥ 350 mm 10 mm
• Tapered or fluted 5 mm
(a) Shells driven without a mandrel. For tapered or step tapered cast-in-place concrete piles,
furnish shells having a minimum 300-millimeters diameter at cutoff and a minimum 200-
millimeters diameter tip. Furnish shells having a minimum nominal diameter of 270 millimeters for
constant diameter cast-in-place concrete piles.

Fabricate shells from not less than 5-millimeter plate stock conforming to ASTM A36. Shells may
be either spirally welded or longitudinally welded and may be either tapered or constant in section.
Seal the tips as noted on the drawings.

(b) Shells driven with a mandrel. Furnish shells of sufficient strength and thickness to withstand
driving without injury and to resist harmful distortion and buckling due to soil pressure after being
driven and the mandrel removed. Butt and tip dimensions are specified in the contract.

715.05 Steel Pipes. Conform to the following:

(a) Steel pipe to be filled with concrete ASTM A252, Grade 2 or 3

(b) Closure plates for closed end piles ASTM A572, ASTM A
588,
or ASTM A690 Grade 50

(c) Unfilled tubular steel piles for welded and ASTM A252, Grade 2 or 3
seamless steel pipe piles with chemical properties
conforming to ASTM A53, Grade B

715.06 Steel H-Piles. Furnish steel H-piles from rolled steel sections of the mass and shape specified.
Fabricate the H-piles from structural steel conforming to ASTM A572, ASTM A588, or ASTM A690,
Grade 50.

For copper-bearing structural steel, furnish steel with 0.20 to 0.35 percent copper.

Section 715 – Piling 693

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

715.07 Sheet Piles. Conform to AASHTO M 202 or ASTM A572 for steel sheet piles. Make the joints
watertight when the piles are in place.

715.08 Pile Shoes. For timber and steel piles, furnish prefabricated cast steel shoes or driving points
conforming to ASTM A27 Grade 65-35 or ASTM A148 Grade 90.

715.09 Splices. Manufacture splices from structural steel conforming to ASTM A572, ASTM A588, or
ASTM A690, Grade 50 for H or pipe piles.

Section 715 – Piling 694

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 716. — MATERIAL FOR TIMBER STRUCTURES

716.01 Untreated Structural Timber and Lumber. Conform to AASHTO M 168. Furnish an
inspection certification from an agency accredited by the American Lumber Standards Committee for
the species and grade. Mark all pieces with the inspection service, grade designation, species, and
inspector identity.

Season and dry structural timber and lumber before fabrication. Do not use material that is twisted,
curved, or otherwise distorted.

Do not use boxed-heart pieces of Douglas fir or redwood in outside stringers, floor beams, caps, posts,
sills, or rail posts. Boxed-heart pieces are defined as timber so sawed that, at any point in the length of
a sawed piece, the pith lies entirely inside the four faces.

716.02 Hardware. Machine bolts, drift bolts and dowels may be medium steel. Fabricate washers
from gray iron or malleable iron castings unless structural washers are specified.

Use a standard commercial type of cut or round nail. Use cut, round, or boat spikes as specified.

Galvanize hardware according to AASHTO M 232 or cadmium plate hardware according to AASHTO
M 299, class 12, type III.

Use ring or shear-plate timber connectors conforming to AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications for Highway Bridges Division II, article 16.2.6, Timber Connectors.

716.03 Treated Structural Timber and Lumber. Furnish wood according to Subsection 716.01.
Make dimensional cuts, holes, and incise wood before pressure treatment. Treat the wood according to
AWPA Standard U1 Use Specification for Treated Wood and T1 Processing and Treatment Standard.
Use the type of treatment shown in the plans.

Treat timber members according to the requirements of the current edition of Western Wood
Preservers Institute’s Best Management Practices for the Use of Treated Wood in Aquatic
Environments.

Treated timber members must have a quality mark approved by the American Lumber Standards
Committee for individual pieces or sealed pallets assuring that treatment conforms to the appropriate
AWPA standards.

716.04 Structural Glued Laminated Timber. Furnish structural glued laminated timber according to
AITC 117. Fabricate according to the combination and grade as indicated in the contract. Fabricate
structural glued laminated members according to ANSI/AITC A190.1, Structural Glued Laminated
Timber.

Manufacture members as industrial appearance grade for wet use conditions. Use adhesives
conforming to the requirements of ASTM D2559 and AITC 405. Use only single- or multiple-piece
laminations with bonded edge joints.

Straight or slightly cambered members which are to be loaded perpendicular to the wide face of the
laminates must be stamped "top" on the top at both ends of the beam.

Section 716 – Material for Timber Structures 695

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 717. — STRUCTURAL METAL

717.01 Structural Steel.

(a) Structural carbon steel. Conform to the following:

(1) Primary bridge members AASHTO M 270, Grade 36T

(250T)
(2) Fracture critical bridge members AASHTO M 270, Grade 36F
(250F)
(3) Other shapes, plates, and bars AASHTO M 270, Grade 36 (250)
(b) High-strength low-alloy structural (HSLA) steel. Conform to the following:

(1) Primary bridge members AASHTO M 270, Grade 50T,

50ST,
and welded members 50WT, or HPS 50WT (345T,
345ST,
345WT, or HPS 345WT)
(2) Fracture critical bridge members AASHTO M 270, Grade 50F,
50SF,
and fracture critical welded members 50WF, or HPS 50WF (345F,
345SF,
345WF, or HPS 50SF)
(3) Other shapes, plates, and bars AASHTO M 270, Grade 50, 50S,
50W, or HPS 50 (345, 345S,
345W,
or HPS 345)
(c) High-strength quenched and tempered (QT) steel. Conform to the following:

(1) Primary bridge members AASHTO M 270, Grade 70WT,

HPS 70WT, 100T, 100WT, or
HPS 100WT (485WT,
HPS 485WT
690T, 690WT, or HPS 690WT)
(2) Fracture critical bridge members AASHTO M 270, Grade 70WF,
HPS 70WF, 100F, 100WF, or
HPS 100WF (485WF,
HPS 485WF
690F, 690WF, or HPS 690WF)
(3) Other shapes, plates, and bars AASHTO M 270, Grade 70W,
HPS 70W, 100, 100W, or
HPS 100W (485W, HPS 485W,
690,
690W, or HPS 690W)

Section 717 – Structural Metal 696

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(4) Hollow structural sections ASTM A500, Grade B,

ASTM A501,
ASTM A847, or ASTM A618
(d) Bolts and nuts. Conform to ASTM F1554, Grade 36 or ASTM A307 as shown in the plans.
Use nuts conforming to ASTM A563 for appropriate grade and size of anchor bolt. Heat treat nuts
to be galvanized to Grade DH or DH3. Lubricate galvanized nuts with a lubricant containing a
visible dye.

(e) High-strength bolts, nuts, and washers. Conform to ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 as
specified. Use Type 1 bolts with steels other than weathering steel. Use Type 3 bolts with
weathering steel.

ASTM A 325, Type 1 bolts may be either hot-dip galvanized according to AASHTO M 232, Class
C or mechanically galvanized according to ASTM B695, Class 50. Retest galvanized bolts after
galvanizing according to ASTM A325. Do not galvanize ASTM A 490 bolts.

Galvanize washers, nuts, and bolts of any assembly by the same process. Overtap the nuts to the
minimum amount required for the fastener assembly and lubricate with a lubricant containing a
visible dye.

Except as noted below, for ASTM A325 bolts, use nuts conforming to ASTM A563, grades DH,
DH3, C, C3, or D. For ASTM A490 bolts, use nuts conforming to ASTM A563, grades DH or
DH3. Heat treat nuts to be galvanized to Grade DH. Lubricate galvanized nuts with a lubricant
containing a visible dye.

Provide plain nuts with a minimum hardness of 89 HRB. Use only Grade C3 or DH3 nuts with
ASTM A325, Type 3 bolts. Use only Grade DH3 nuts with ASTM A490, Type 3 bolts.

Use washers conforming to ASTM F436.

717.02 Steel Forgings. Conform to AASHTO M 102, Classes C, D, F, and G.

717.03 Pins and Rollers. Furnish pins and rollers more than 225 millimeters in diameter from
annealed carbon-steel forgings conforming to AASHTO M 102, Class C.

Furnish pins and rollers 230 millimeters or less in diameter from either annealed carbon-steel forgings
conforming to AASHTO M 102, Class C or cold finished carbon-steel shafting conforming to
AASHTO M 169, Grade 1016 to 1030 inclusive, with a minimum Rockwell Scale B hardness of 85.
The hardness requirement may be waived if the steel develops a tensile strength of 480 megapascals
and a yield point of 250 megapascals.

For pin threads, conform to ANSI B1.1 Coarse Thread Series, Class 2A. Thread pin ends with a
diameter of 1⅜ inches (35 millimeters) or more with 6 threads to the inch (25 millimeters).

717.04 Castings.

(a) Steel castings. Conform to AASHTO M 103, Grade 70-36.

(b) Chromium alloy steel castings. Conform to AASHTO M 163, Grade CA-15.

Section 717 – Structural Metal 697

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(c) Gray iron castings. Conform to AASHTO M 105, Class No. 30B, unless otherwise specified.
Make the castings without pouring faults, sponginess, cracks, blow holes, and other defects in
positions affecting strength and value for the service intended. Boldly fillet the castings at angles
and make the arrises sharp and perfect. Sand blast castings or otherwise effectively remove the
scale and sand to present a smooth, clean, and uniform surface.

(d) Malleable iron castings. Conform to ASTM A47, Grade 35018, unless otherwise specified.
For workmanship, finishing, and cleaning, conform to (c) above.

717.05 Welded Stud Shear Connectors. Conform to AASHTO M 169 and AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Construction Specification, article 11.3.3, Welded Stud Shear Connectors.

717.06 Steel Pipe. Furnish galvanized steel pipe conforming to ASTM A53, Type F, standard weight
class, and plain ends for the designation specified in the contract.

717.07 Galvanized Coatings. When specified, galvanize structural steel according to AASHTO M
111.

717.08 Sheet Lead. Furnish common desilverized lead conforming to ASTM B29. Furnish sheets in a
uniform 6±1 millimeters thickness without cracks, seams, slivers, scale, and other defects.

717.09 Steel Grid Floors. Conform to ASTM D5484, Type I. Furnish galvanized steel grid floors
unless painting is specified.

717.10 Bearings.

(a) Elastomeric bearings, plain or laminated. Conform to AASHTO M 251.

(b) High load rotational spherical bearings. Conform to ASTM D5977.

717.11 Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Surfaces for Bearings. When PTFE surfaces are specified
for bearings, which are not listed in Subsection 717.10, conform to the following:

(a) PTFE resin. Furnish virgin PTFE resin material conforming to ASTM D4894 or ASTM
D4895.

(b) Filler material. Furnish milled glass fibers, carbon, or other approved inert material.

(c) Adhesive material. Furnish epoxy resin adhesive conforming to AASHTO M 235.

(d) Unfilled PTFE sheet. Furnish unfilled PTFE sheet made from PTFE resin. Conform to Table
717.1.

(e) Filled PTFE sheet. Furnish filled PTFE sheet made from PTFE resin uniformly blended with
filler material. Do not exceed 15 percent filler content using fiberglass or 25 percent filler content
using carbon fibers. For filled PTFE sheets containing glass fibers or carbon, conform to Table
717.1.

(f) Fabric containing PTFE fibers. Furnish fabric made from oriented multifilament PTFE
fluorocarbon and other fibers or from a mixture of PTFE fibers made from twisted, slit PTFE tape
and other fibers as required by proprietary designs. Conform to Table 717.1.

Section 717 – Structural Metal 698

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 717.1
Polytetrafluoroethylene Sheeting
Property ASTM Sheet Sheet Sheet Woven
Method Unfilled with 15% with 25% Fabric
Glass Fibers Carbon Fibers
Min. tensile strength D638 19 MPa 14 MPa 9 MPa 165 MPa
or
D2256
Min. elongation D638 200% 150% 75% 35%
or
D2256
Min. specific gravity D792 2.16±0.03 2.20±0.03 2.10±0.03 —
Melting point D4591 328±11 ºC 327±10 ºC 327±10 ºC —

(g) Interlocked bronze and filled PTFE components. Furnish a phosphor bronze plate
conforming to AASHTO M 108 with an 0.25-millimeter thick porous bronze surface layer
conforming to ASTM B103 into which is impregnated a lead-PTFE compound. Overlay the
surface with compounded PTFE not less than 25 micrometers)

(h) Lubricants. Use lubricants consisting of a combination of solids which does not react
chemically or electrolytically with the PTFE and its mating surface and remains stable in the
environmental conditions expected at the bridge site.

(i) Surface treatment. For epoxy bonding, factory treat one side of the PTFE sheet with a sodium
naphthalene or sodium ammonia process.

(j) Stainless steel mating surface. Conform to ASTM A167, Type 304 or ASTM A240, Type 304
and the following:

(1) Thickness 0.91 mm min.

(2) Surface finish 2 µm root mean square max.

Polish or roll stainless steel mating surfaces as necessary to a finish no less than 5 µm.

717.12 Aluminum Alloy for Bridge Rail. Conform to AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA A Guide to

Standardized Highway Barrier Hardware.

717.13 Aluminum Bolt Heads and Nuts. Conform to American standard heavy hexagon ANSI
B18.2. For threads, conform to American standard coarse series, Class 2 fit, ANSI specification B1.1.

Section 717 – Structural Metal 699

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

717.14 Aluminum Welding Wire. Conform to Table 717.2.

Table 717.2
Aluminum Welding Wire
Alloys Series Specification Wire

3xxx and 6xxx ER 4043

3xxx, 5xxx, and 6xxx AWS 5.10 ER 5356

5xxx and 6xxx ER 5556 or ER 5183

Section 717 – Structural Metal 700

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 718. — TRAFFIC SIGNING AND MARKING MATERIAL

718.01 Retroreflective Sheeting. Conform to ASTM D4956, including supplementary requirements.

718.02 Reserved.

718.03 Panels. Conform to the following:

(a) Plywood. Furnish exterior Type B-B high-density overlay plywood or better conforming to
NIST specification PS-1 for construction and industrial plywood. Use 13-millimeter thick plywood
for sign panels with a facial area 0.4 square meters or less and the horizontal dimension no greater
than the vertical dimension. Use 19-millimeter thick plywood for larger panels.

(b) Steel. Furnish continuous coated (galvanized) 2-millimeter sheet steel blanks conforming to
ASTM A653 and zinc coating designation G 90.

Furnish panels with a substantially plane surface. Do not use twisted or buckled panels.

(c) Aluminum. Furnish panels conforming to ASTM B209, alloy 6061-T6 or 5052-H38.

Fabricate temporary panels and permanent panels smaller or equal to 750 by 750 millimeters from
2-millimeter thick aluminum sheets. Fabricate larger permanent panels from 3-millimeter thick
aluminum sheets.

Furnish blanks without laminations, blisters, open seams, pits, holes, or other defects that may
affect their appearance or use. Select blanks with uniform thickness and are commercially flat.

(d) Plastic.

(1) Non-reinforced plastic. Furnish polycarbonate material that is ultraviolet stabilized for
outdoor weathering and will accept adhesives, coatings, and retroreflective sheeting material.

Fabricate panels smaller or equal to 600 by 600 millimeters from 2-millimeter thick plastic
blanks. Fabricate larger panels from 3-millimeter thick plastic blanks.

Furnish panels that are flat and free of buckles, warps, and other defects. Do not allow a gap
between adjacent panels greater than 16 millimeters where multiple panels adjoin. Attach
reinforcement stiffeners on the back of panels larger than 600 by 600 millimeters for rigidity
and mounting on supports.

(2) Reinforced plastic (fiberglass). Furnish panels made from fiberglass reinforced thermoset
polyester acrylic modified laminate sheets. Furnish sign panels ultraviolet stabilized for outdoor
weathering ability that will accept adhesives, coatings, and retroreflective sheeting material.

Furnish sign panels free of visible cracks, pinholes, foreign inclusions, or surface wrinkles that
would affect implied performance, alter the specific dimensions of the panel, or otherwise
affect the sign panels serviceability.

Fabricate fiberglass reinforced panels conforming to the following mechanical and physical
properties:

Section 718 – Traffic Signing and Marking Material 701

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(a) Average tensile strength, ASTM D638 69 MPa min.

(b) Average tensile modulus, ASTM D638 8.3 GPa min.
(c) Average flexural strength, ASTM D790 140 MPa)min.
(d) Average flexural modulus, ASTM D790 8.3 GPa)min.
(e) Average compression strength, ASTM D695 220 MPa min.
(f) Average compression modulus, ASTM D695 9.7 GPa min.
(g) Punch shear, ASTM D732 90 MPa min.
(h) Thickness 3.4±0.1 mm
(i) Size, dimension < 12 ft (3.6 m), ASTM D3841 ±3 mm
(j) Squareness in 12-ft (3.6 m) length, ±3 mm
ASTM D3841
(k) Surfaces, top and bottom Smooth
(l) Color, visually uniform gray, N7.5 to N8.5
Munsell color system
(m) Coefficient of lineal thermal
expansion, ASTM D696 0.1 μm/mm/°C)max.
(n) Flame resistance 25 mm max.
(extent of burning), ASTM D635
(o) Weather resistance, 3000±100 hours, grade 2 min.
ASTM D3841
(e) Extruded Aluminum. Furnish panels conforming to ASTM B221, aluminum alloy 6063-T6.
Conform to Subsection 718.03(c) for panel thickness and fabrication. The maximum allowable
deviation from flat on the face is 4 millimeters per meter.

718.04 Sign Posts. Furnish sign posts that are straight, smooth, and without defects affecting strength,
durability, or appearance. Conform to the following:

(a) Wood. Furnish posts conforming to AASHTO M 168. Treat the posts according to AWPA
Standard U1-UC4A (Use Category 4A) for waterborne preservative treatments ACA, ACZA, or
CCA.

(b) Galvanized metal. Conform to the following:

(1) U-channel steel. Furnish flanged, channel, galvanized steel posts conforming to ASTM
A499, Grade 60, and the following:
(a) Punching. Starting 25 millimeters from the top and extending the full length of the
post, drill or punch 10-millimeter holes on 25 millimeter centers along the centerline of
the bottom of the U. Remove burrs and sharp edges.
(b) Galvanizing after punching AASHTO M 111
(2) Square tubular steel. Furnish square tubular galvanized steel posts conforming to ASTM

Section 718 – Traffic Signing and Marking Material 702

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

A1011, Grade 55 and the following:

(a) Punching. Starting 25 millimeters from the top and extending the full length of the
post, drill or punch 11-millimete) holes on 25-millimeter centers along the centerline of
all four sides, in true alignment and opposite each other directly and diagonally. Remove
burrs and sharp edges.
(b) Galvanizing after punching ASTM A123 or ASTM
B695
(c) Aluminum. Furnish standard shapes and thicknesses conforming to ASTM B221, alloy
6061-T6, 6351-T5, 6063-T6, or 6005-T5.

(d) Corrosion resistant steel. Furnish posts conforming to ASTM A588 or ASTM A242. Zinc-
coat the embedded portion of the corrosion resistant steel post according to ASTM A123.

718.05 Object Marker and Delineator Posts. Conform to the following:

(a) Wood. Furnish 100- by 100-millimeter wooden posts conforming to Subsection 718.04(a).

(b) Steel. Furnish flanged U-channel steel posts weighing not less than 3 kilograms per meter and
conforming to ASTM A36. Galvanize according to AASHTO M111.

(c) Aluminum. Furnish standard shaped 3-millimeter thick aluminum posts conforming to ASTM
B221, alloy 6063-T6.

(d) Plastic. Furnish flexible delineator posts made with high-impact resistant polymer material.

718.06 Hardware. Furnish galvanized steel or aluminum alloy lag screws, washers, clip angles, wood
screws, shear plates, U-bolts, clamps, bolts, nuts, and other fasteners. For high-strength steel bolts,
nuts, and washers, conform to Subsection 717.01(e). Galvanize steel hardware according to AASHTO
M 232. For aluminum alloy bolts, nuts, and washers, conform to Subsections 717.12 and 717.13 as
applicable. For neoprene or nylon washers, furnish 3.2 millimeters thick by 25 millimeters minimum
outside diameter with maximum allowable applied torque 54 Nm .

718.07 Legends and Borders. Use colors specified in plans or Standard Highway Signs and Marking
Manual and material conforming to Subsection 718.01.

718.08 Delineator and Object Marker Retroreflectors. Furnish retroreflectors that are ready for
mounting.

(a) Type 1 (acrylic plastic lens). Furnish an acrylic plastic lens with a minimum dimension of 3
inches (75 millimeter) with prismatic optical elements and a smooth, clear, transparent face.
Fabricate the back from similar material and fuse it to the lens around the entire perimeter to form a
homogenous unit. Seal the units against the intrusion of foreign material. Conform to Table 718.1
regardless of the orientation angle.

Section 718 – Traffic Signing and Marking Material 703

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Table 718.1
Minimum Coefficient of (Retroreflective)
Luminous Intensity (RI) (1)
Candelas per Foot-candle
Observation Entrance
White(2) Yellow Red
Angle Angle
0.1° 0° 115 70 30
0.1° 20° 45 25 12
Candelas per Lux
Observation Entrance
White(2) Yellow Red
Angle ° Angle °
0.1° 0° 10.7 6.5 2.8

0.1° 20° 4.2 2.3 1.1

(1) See AASHTO T 257.
(2) Crystal, clear, or colorless are acceptable color designations.

Mount the retroreflector unit in a housing fabricated from 0.063-inch (1.6-millimeter) aluminum
alloy 3003-H-14 or similar, or from 1.6-millimeters cold rolled and hot dip galvanized steel.
Furnish antitheft attachment hardware.

(b) Type 2 (retroreflective sheeting). Furnish a prismatic retroreflective sheeting with a minimum
dimension of 75 millimeters and with a Class 1 or 2 adhesive backing conforming to Subsection
718.01. Attach the sheeting to an aluminum or plastic support panel (target plate) of the size and
dimension specified.

718.09 Solventborne Traffic Paint. Conform to AASHTO M 248 Type N or Type F traffic paint.

Use VOC compliant solventborne paint with a volatile organic content of 150 grams per liter or less.
Yellow pigment must be free from lead, chrome, and other heavy metals as defined by the EPA.

718.10 Waterborne Traffic Paint. Furnish an acrylic water-based, ready-mixed paint conforming to
the following:

(a) Composition. Furnish a paint composed of resin solids of 100 percent acrylic polymer with the
exact formulation determined by the manufacturer. Conform to the following:

(1) Pigment, ASTM D3723 45 to 55 percent by mass

(2) Lead, chromium, cadmium, or cobalt 0 percent by mass
ASTM D3335 & ASTM D3718
(3) Volatile organic compounds, EPA Method 24 150 g/L max.
(4) Density of paint, ASTM D1475 1.44 kg/L min.

Section 718 – Traffic Signing and Marking Material 704

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Viscosity. ASTM D562 75-90 Krebs units

(c) Drying time.

(1) Dry to no pickup, ASTM D711 10 minutes max.

(2) Drying to no track, ASTM D713 90 seconds max.
(d) Flexibility. ASTM D522, using the No cracking or flaking
6.4 mm cylindrical mandrel

(e) Dry opacity. ASTM D2805, contrast ratio at 0.96 min.

7.85 m2/L spreading rate

(f) Color.

(1) White, ASTM D1729 Match FHWA standard

highway white
(2) Yellow, ASTM D1729 Match FHWA standard
highway yellow
(g) Daylight reflectance. (Without glass beads)

(1) White, ASTM E1347 84 percent relative to

magnesium oxide
standard
(2) Yellow, ASTM E1347 55 percent relative to
magnesium oxide
standard
(h) Bleeding ratio. ASTM D868. 0.96 min.
Determine reflectance according to ASTM D 1347
immediately after drying. Divide the average of 3 reflectance
readings of the paint over the bleeding surface by the average
of 3 readings over the non-bleeding surface to determine the bleeding ratio.

(i) Freeze-thaw stability. ASTM D2243.

Change in viscosity ±5 Krebs units max.

(j) Storage stability. During a 12-month storage period, conform to the following:

(1) No excessive setting, caking, or increase in viscosity; and

(2) Readily stirred to a consistency for use in the striping equipment.
718.11 Epoxy Markings. Furnish a 2-component, 100 percent solids type system for hot-spray
application conforming to the following:

(a) Pigments. Component A. Percent by mass.

(1) White.
(a) Titanium dioxide (TiO2), 18 percent min.

Section 718 – Traffic Signing and Marking Material 705

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

ASTM D476, Type IV

(b) Epoxy resin, ASTM D1652 75 to 82 percent
(2) Yellow:
(a) Chrome yellow (PbCrO4), 23 percent min.
ASTM D126.
(b) Epoxy resin, ASTM D1652 70 to 77 percent
(3) Non-Lead Yellow:
(a) Titanium dioxide (TiO2) 14 percent min.
ASTM D476, Type II and Type III
(b) Organic yellow 7 to 8 percent
(c) Epoxy resin, ASTM D1652 75 to 79 percent
(b) Epoxy content. Component A. Manufacturer’s target
Mass per epoxy equivalent, value ±50
ASTM D1652

(c) Amine value. Component B, Manufacturer’s target

ASTM D2074 value ±50

(d) Toxicity. Toxic or injurious fumes none

at application temperature

(e) Color. 15 mil (0.38 millimeter) film thickness specimen (cured).

(1) White, ASTM D1729 Match FHWA standard

highway white
(2) Yellow, ASTM D1729 Match FHWA standard
highway yellow
(f) Directional reflectance. (Without glass beads)

(1) White, ASTM E1347 84 percent relative to

magnesium oxide
standard
(2) Yellow, ASTM E1347 55 percent relative to
magnesium oxide
standard
(g) Drying time. 15-mil (0.38-millimeter) film thickness with glass beads (cured).

(1) Laboratory at 22 °C, 30 minutes max.

ASTM D711 to no-pick-up condition
(2) Field at 25 °C, viewed from 10 minutes max.
15 m, ASTM D713 to no-tracking condition
(h) Abrasion resistance. Wear index 82 max.

Section 718 – Traffic Signing and Marking Material 706

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

with a CS-17 wheel under a 1000 g load

for 1000 cycles, ASTM D4060

(i) Hardness. Type D hardness with 75 to 100

72-hour cure at 22 °C, ASTM D 2240

718.12 Thermoplastic Markings. Conform to AASHTO M 249.

718.13 Preformed Pavement Marking Tape. Conform to ASTM D4505, Reflectivity Level I; Class
1, 2, or 3; Skid Resistance Level A or B.

718.14 Glass Beads. Conform to AASHTO M 247 for the type specified. Treat glass beads with an
adherence coating as recommended by manufacturer.

718.15 Pavement Markers.

(a) Non-plowable, extended life, retroreflective, pavement markers. Conform to ASTM

D 4280.

(b) Plowable, retroreflective, pavement markers. Conform to ASTM D4383.

(c) Non-reflective pavement markers. Furnish ceramic, plastic, or thermoplastic markers that are
100 ± 3 millimeters in diameter at the base, 17.5 ± 1.6 millimeters in height, and where the base of
the marker does not deviate from a flat plane by more than 1/16 inch (1.6 millimeters).

Furnish markers of uniform composition, without surface irregularities, cracks, checks, chipping,
peeling, spalling, crazing, and other physical damage interfering with appearance, application, or
durability. Furnish precast markers in the form of a single based spheroidal segment terminating in
a rounded or squared shoulder.

718.16 Temporary Pavement Markings.

(a) Preformed retroreflective tape. Furnish 100-millimete) wide tape conforming to ASTM
D4592, Type I (removable).

(b) Pavement markers. Furnish temporary pavement markers conforming to ASTM D4280 or
flexible pavement markers not exceeding approximately 50 millimeters high, with retroreflective
tape on both faces of the vertical section, capable of retroreflecting light from opposite directions,
and with an adhesive on the base.

(c) Traffic paint. Conform to Subsections 718.09 or 718.10.

718.17 Epoxy Resin Adhesives. Furnish epoxy resin adhesives conforming to AASHTO M 237 for
bonding traffic markers to rigid and asphalt concrete pavements.

Section 718 – Traffic Signing and Marking Material 707

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 719. — PAINT

719.01 General. Furnish a contrasting color for each coat of paint. For the finish coat color, conform to
FED-STD 595 B. If requested, provide color chips from the paint supplier.

(a) Packaging. Furnish paint in strong, substantial containers, plainly marked with the following:

(1) Trade name or trade mark;

(2) Paint type, color, formulation, lot number, and date of manufacture;
(3) Net mass;
(4) Volume including the percent of solids and the percent of volatile organic compound
(VOC);
(5) Storage requirements and shelf life;
(6) Mixing instructions and equipment cleanup instructions; and
(7) Name and address of the manufacturer.
(b) Volatile organic compound (VOC) content. Conform to the following VOC limits for both
shop and field painting:

(1) Clear (unpigmented) coatings 450 g/L max.

(2) Other coatings 350 g/L max.
(c) Lead content. none

(d) Other properties. Furnish paint that:

(1) Does not show excessive settling in a freshly opened full container;
(2) Easily redisperses with a paddle to a smooth, homogeneous state free of curdling,
livering, caking, color separation, lumps, and skins;
(3) Does not skin within 48 hours in a three-quarter filled, closed container;
(4) Brushes on easily;
(5) Possess good leveling properties;
(6) Shows no running or sagging tendencies when applied to smooth steel vertical surfaces;
(7) Dries to a smooth uniform finish, without roughness, grit, unevenness and other surface
imperfections;
(8) Shows no streaking or separation when flowed on clean glass; and
(9) Shows no thickening, curdling, gelling, or hard caking after 6 months of storage in a full,
tightly covered container at a temperature of 20 ºC.

Section 719 – Paint 708

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

719.02 Paint for Timber Structures.

(a) Primer. Conform to MPI no. 5 or 6.

(b) Paint. Conform to MPI no. 5 or 6.

719.03 Paint for Masonry Block Structures. Conform to MPI 4, 10, or 11. Color tint with universal
or all-purpose concentrates.

719.04 Paint for Steel Structures. Conform to the following:

(a) Zinc rich coating. SSPC no. 20

(b) White or colored silicone alkyd paint SSPC no. 21

(c) Epoxy polyamide paint. SSPC no. 22

(d) Latex primer for steel structures. SSPC no. 23

(e) Latex semigloss exterior topcoat. SSPC no. 24

(f) Zinc-oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer. SSPC no. 25

(g) Aliphatic polyurethane topcoat. SSPC no. 36

(h) Moisture-cured polyurethane. SSPC no. 38

(i) Zinc-rich moisture-cured polyurethane primer. SSPC no. 40

(j) Moisture-cured polyurethane primer. SSPC no. 41

(k) White or tinted alkyd paint SSPC no. 104

719.05 Paint for Concrete Structures. Conform to the following:

(a) Epoxy low gloss paint MPI 108

(b) Epoxy semi-gloss paint MPI 177

719.06 Paint for Aluminum Structures. Conform to the following:

(a) Metal Primer MPI 95

(b) Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water-Based MPI 161, 163, or 164

719.07 Paint for Other Metal Structures. Conform to the following:

(a) Metal Primer, galvanized surfaces SSPC no. 27

(b) Exterior Latex MPI 5

(c) Alkyd/Oil MPI 6

Section 719 – Paint 709

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

719.08 Penetrating Stain. Conform to the following:

(a) Weatherometer on base 1000 hours

material, ASTM G23

(b) Acrylic dispersion 73.4 percent of nonvolatile

solvent

(c) Viscosity 58±2 Krebs units

(d) Solids volatile content 40.3 percent by mass

Store stain according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

719.09 Mineral Spirits (Petroleum Spirits). Conform to ASTM D235

Section 719 – Paint 710

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 720. — STRUCTURAL WALL AND STABILIZED

EMBANKMENT MATERIAL

720.01 Mechanically-Stabilized Earth Wall Material.

(a) Concrete face panels. Conform to Section 552 and the following:

(1) Use concrete Class A(AE) with a minimum 4,000-pound per square inch
(30-megapascals) 28-day compressive strength.
(2) Conform to Section 562 and fully support the units until the concrete reaches a minimum
compressive strength of 7-megapascals. The units may be shipped and installed after the
concrete reaches a minimum compressive strength of 24 megapascals.
(3) Finish the front face of the panel with a Class 1 finish according to Subsection 552.16.
Screed the rear face of the panel to eliminate open pockets of aggregate and surface
distortions in excess of 6 millimeters. Cast the panels on a flat area. Do not attach galvanized
connecting devices or fasteners to the face panel reinforcement steel.
(4) Clearly scribe on an unexposed face of each panel the date of manufacture, the production
lot number, and the piece mark.
(5) Handle, store, and ship units in such a manner as to eliminate the dangers of chipping,
discoloration, cracks, fractures, and excessive bending stresses. Support panels in storage on
firm blocking to protect the panel connection devices and the exposed exterior finish.
(6) Manufacture units within the following tolerances:
(a) Panel dimensions. Position of panel connection devices within 25 millimeters. All
other dimensions within 5 millimeters.
(b) Panel squareness. Do not exceed 13 millimeters as determined by the difference
between the 2 diagonals.
(c) Panel surface finish. Do not exceed 3 millimeters for surface defects on smooth
formed surfaces of 1.5 meters or more in length. Do not exceed 8 millimeters for surface
defects on textured-finished surfaces of 1.5 meters or more in length.
Concrete face panels having the following defects will be rejected.
• Defects that indicate imperfect molding;
• Defects indicating honeycombed or open texture concrete;
• Cracked or severely chipped panels; or
• Color variation on front face of panel.
(b) Wire facing. Fabricate from welded wire fabric conforming to AASHTO M 55, except that
Section 7.4. applies for longitudinal and transverse wire sizes. Galvanize according to AASHTO
M 111, grade 85 after fabrication.

Section 720 – Structural Wall and Stabilized Embankment Material 711

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(c) Backing mat. Fabricate from welded wire fabric conforming to AASHTO M 55 except that
Section 7.4 applies for longitudinal and transverse wire sizes. Galvanize according to AASHTO
M 111, Grade 85 after fabrication.

(d) Clevis connector. Fabricate from cold-drawn steel wire conforming to AASHTO M 32, and
weld according to AASHTO M 55. Galvanize according to AASHTO M 111, Grade 85 after
fabrication.

(e) Connector bars. Fabricate from cold-drawn steel wire conforming to AASHTO M 32.
Galvanize according to AASHTO M 111, Grade 85.

(f) Fasteners. Furnish 13-millimeters diameter, heavy hexhead bolts, nuts, and washers
conforming to ASTM A325. Galvanize according to AASHTO M 232.

(g) Hardware cloth. Fabricate with maximum 7-millimeter square mesh openings from woven or
welded galvanized steel wire fabric conforming to ASTM A740.

(h) Reinforcing mesh. Fabricate from cold-drawn steel wire conforming to AASHTO M 32. Weld
the wire into the finished mesh fabric according to AASHTO M 55. Galvanize according to
AASHTO M 111, Grade 85 after fabrication. Repair damage to the galvanized coating before
installation.

(i) Reinforcing strips. Fabricate from high-strength, low-alloy structural steel conforming to
ASTM A572, Grade 450, Type 3. Galvanize according to AASHTO M 111, Grade 85 after
fabrication.

(j) Tie strip. Fabricate from hot-rolled steel conforming to ASTM A1011, Grade 50. Galvanize
according to AASHTO M 111, Grade 85.

720.02 Gabion and Revet Mattress Material. Fabricate gabion baskets 300 millimeters or greater
in vertical dimension and revet mattresses less than 300 millimeters in vertical dimension from either
welded wire mesh or twisted wire mesh. Conform to the following:
(a) Welded wire mesh ASTM A974

(b) Twisted wire mesh ASTM A975

Section 720 – Structural Wall and Stabilized Embankment Material 712

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 721. — ELECTRICAL AND ILLUMINATION MATERIAL

721.01 Electrical Material. Conform to the following:

(a) Conduit. Conform to the following:

(1) Nonmetallic conduit and duct couplings, elbows, bends, and nipples. For above
ground and underground use without concrete encasement, furnish rigid PVC, heavy wall
conduit conforming to UL 651. For solvent cement to join conduit, conform to ASTM
D2564.
(2) Metallic conduit and duct, couplings, elbows, bends, and nipples. Furnish rigid
galvanized steel conduit conforming to UL 6. Uniformly coat the conduit on the outside with
an asphalt mastic conforming to AASHTO M 243 or a 0.5-millimeter PVC coating. Furnish
rigid, full-mass sherardized or galvanized threaded fittings.
(3) Flexible conduit. Furnish a watertight metallic conduit conforming to UL 360, acceptable
for equipment grounding. Furnish insulated throat, grounding, malleable iron watertight
fittings.
(4) Conduit bodies, boxes, and fittings. Furnish watertight, galvanized steel conforming to
UL 514 B.
(b) Pull boxes, frames, and covers. For boxes formed in concrete, fabricate with cast iron or
welded sheet steel having a minimum thickness of 5 millimeters. Galvanize, inside and out,
according to AASHTO M 232.

(c) Wire and cable.

(1) Lighting. Furnish either ozone resistant cross-linked polyethylene (XLP) or polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) insulated cable, with or without a nylon jacket conforming to the following:
(a) Polyethylene (XLP). Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) S-66-524, ICEA
S-95-658/NEMA WC70 Nonshielded 0-2kV Cables, ICEA S-96-659/NEMA WC71
Nonshielded 2001-5kV Cables, ICEA S-93-639/NEMA WC74 Shielded Power Cable 5-
46 kV; or
(b) Polyvinyl chloride (PVC). UL 83.
(2) Electrical. Furnish soft drawn or annealed copper conductors conforming to ASTM B3,
and stranding conforming to ASTM B8.
Furnish 7 strand for 5.3 square millimeters through 33.6 square millimeters, and 17 strand for
42.4 square millimeters through 107 square millimeters. Furnish 13.3 square millimeters
minimum solid copper ground wires.
(d) Circuit breakers and panels. Conform to UL 489 and UL 67. Furnish molded case thermal
magnetic trip type breakers. Furnish panel enclosures conforming to NEMA 3R, lockable with
padlocks.

(e) Safety disconnect switches. Furnish heavy duty, NEMA 3R, safety disconnect switches
conforming to UL 98.

Section 721 – Electrical and Lumination Material 713

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(f) Grounding and bonding equipment. Furnish 16-millimeter diameter, 2.5-meter long, copper-
clad steel ground rods, ground clamps, grounding and bonding bushings, and lock nuts conforming
to UL 467.

(g) Contactors and control transformers. Furnish a magnetic, 60-ampere, 2-pole contactor with a
120-volt coil, equipped with control switches for automatic actuation conforming to UL 508.
Furnish cadmium-sulfide type photocell controls for 120 or 240-volt operation, as applicable; rated
at 1000 watts resistive load or 1800 volt-amperes inductive load; adaptable for pole-top mounting
in a plug-in, locking-type receptacle, conforming to UL 773; and with a built-in surge protective
device for protection from induced high-voltage and follow-through currents.

Furnish single-phase, 240/480 volt primary, 120/240 volt secondary, dry type, 60 hertz, 1 KVA
transformers for indoor or outdoor use, conforming to UL 506.

(h) Secondary lightning arrester. Furnish a secondary lightning arrester rated for a maximum
operating voltage of 650 volts RMS with a bracket for mounting on the control cabinet backboard.

(i) Service poles. Furnish treated southern yellow pine, treated Douglas fir, butt-treated western red
cedar, or butt-treated northern white cedar service poles that are at least 9 meters long. Treat the
poles according to Subsection 716.03.

(j) Meter cabinet. Conform to local power company requirements.

(k) Control cabinet. Furnish a NEMA Type 4 cabinet, equipped with door clamps on the unhinged
sides, solid neoprene gasket, welded seams, continuous hinge with stainless steel pin, stainless steel
external hardware, backboard for mounting apparatus, padlock with an outdoor, tumbler-type
padlocks keyed the same, supplied with 2 keys for each lock. Furnish a cabinet constructed of one
of the following:

(1) Code-gauge stainless steel, ASTM A167; or

(2) Code-gauge aluminum sheet with mechanical properties equivalent or exceeding ASTM
B209, alloy 5052-H32.
721.02 Lighting Material. Conform to the following:

(a) Poles. Furnish 11-gage (3-millimeter thick) round steel conforming to ASTM A595 or
aluminum shafts conforming to ASTM B429, alloy 6063-T6, tapered uniformly at 12 millimeters
per meter. Provide hand holes with no rough edges and a reinforcing frame and cover designed to
maintain the required pole strength. Weld a 60- to 75-millimeter outside diameter vertical tenon,
fabricated from the same material as the pole, and welded at the top and on the same axis as the
pole.

Furnish pole sections in minimum 4.5-meter lengths. Furnish pole sections less than 21 meters in
height in 2 sections or less; between 21 and 30 meters in 3 sections or less; and over 30 meters in 4
sections or less.

Design and furnish poles capable of sustaining the following loadings:

(1) A horizontal load of 2.2 kilonewtons applied 450 millimeters from the shaft top, in any
direction, without failure of any component part, and a maximum allowable vertical
deflection of 7.5 percent of the shaft length.

Section 721 – Electrical and Lumination Material 714

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(2) A horizontal load of 220 newtons applied at the luminaire attachment point and normal to
the pole bracket member plane, with a vertical load of 130 newtons on the luminaire
supporting arm, and a maximum allowable horizontal deflection of 10 percent of the
luminaire supporting arm's horizontal length.
(3) A vertical load of 440 newtons applied at the luminaire attachment point, and a maximum
allowable vertical deflection of 5.5 percent of the pole arm's horizontal length.
(4) A vertical load of 1.1 kilonewtons applied at the luminaire attachment point, and no
collapse or rupture of any portion of the structure.
(5) The pole arm and luminaire mass with a maximum allowable deflection from vertical at
the top of the pole of 1 percent of the total shaft length.
Prime the poles inside and out according to the fabricator's recommendation. Use epoxy modified
enamel matching FED-STD 595 color 27040 for the finish coat.

(b) Pole arms.

(1) Material. Furnish steel or aluminum. Use the same material as the pole.
(2) Type. Furnish bracket type, truss or single member arms. Furnish single member arms
with a minimum diameter of 50 millimeters and the same taper as the pole.
(3) Connection. Furnish a weather resistant connection to the pole and a smooth raceway for
wiring. Furnish fittings for connection to the pole.
(c) Anchor bases. Furnish a one-piece base dimensioned for adequate pole mounting and structural
support with holes for anchor bolts and tapped holes for anchor bolt covers. Fabricate anchor bases
from material similar to the pole material and conform to the following:

(1) Steel casings AASHTO M 103, Grade 65-35

(Grade 450-240)
(2) Steel plate ASTM A36
(3) Aluminum castings ASTM B26, alloy SG70A-T6 (356-T6)
(d) Bolts, nuts, and washers.

(1) Steel anchor bolts. Conform to ASTM A36, except as amended by (a) or (b) below:
(a) (1) Yield strength 380 MPa min.
(2) Tensile strength 520 to 650 MPa
(3) Elongation in 200 mm 18 percent min.
(4) Elongation in 50 mm 21percent min.
(5) Area reduction 30 percent min.
(b) (1) Yield strength 725 MPa)min.
(2) Tensile strength 680 to 1030 MPa

(3) Elongation in 50 mm) 15 percent min.

Section 721 – Electrical and Lumination Material 715

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(4) Area reduction 45 percent min.

(2) Hex head bolts. Conform to the following:
(a) 380 MPa yield anchor bolts ASTM A325
(b) 725 MPa yield anchor bolts ASTM A354, Grade BC
(3) Nuts. Conform to ASTM A 563. Furnish nuts appropriate for the strength of the anchor
bolt.
(4) Washers. Furnish flat, circular washers conforming to ASTM F436.
Galvanize the top 300 millimeters of anchor bolts and associated hardware according to AASHTO
M 232.

(e) Anchor bolt covers. Furnish a bolt cover for each anchor bolt and 6-millimeter stainless steel,
Phillips-head or hex-head screws to attach the cover to the base or pole.

(f) Luminaries. Operate luminaries on a 240-volt series circuit. Furnish the following types of
luminaires.

(1) Conventional highway luminaires. Furnish materials for a complete installation

including:
(a) aluminum housings with refractor holder and slipfitter;
(b) thermal shock-resistant glass prismatic refractors with gaskets and clips;
(c) aluminum detachable reflectors with ethylene propylene terpolymer gaskets; and
(d) internal regulator or auto regulator type ballast, with a power factor greater than
90 percent that will start lamps at a minimum ambient temperature of -29 °C.
Comply with ANSI specifications.
(2) Sign lighting luminaries. Furnish material for a complete installation including:
(a) die-cast aluminum housings with mounting bracket and door assembly;
(b) thermal, shock-resistant, borosilicate glass refractors with gaskets;
(c) aluminum reflectors; and
(d) 120/240 volt, 60 hertz, constant-wattage ballasts with a power factor greater than
90 percent that will start lamps at a minimum ambient temperature of -29 °C.

Section 721 – Electrical and Lumination Material 716

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 722. — ANCHOR MATERIAL

722.01 Anchorage Devices. For post-tensioning, furnish anchorage devices capable of holding the
prestressing steel at a load producing a stress of not less than 95 percent of the guaranteed minimum
tensile strength of the prestressing steel.

Use a steel distribution plate or assembly to effectively distribute the compressive stresses from the
anchoring device to the concrete. If the anchorage device is sufficiently large and is used with a steel
grillage embedded in the concrete, the distribution plate or assembly may be omitted. Conform to the
following:

(a) Do not exceed 21 megapascals for the final unit compressive stress on the concrete directly
beneath the plate or assembly.

(b) Do not allow bending stresses induced by prestressing to exceed the yield point of the material
in the plates or assemblies, or cause visible distortion in the anchorage plate when 100 percent of
the nominal load is applied.

722.02 Anchor Tendons. Furnish materials conforming to the following:

(a) Prestressing steel. Conform to one of the following:

(1) Wire, uncoated stress-relieved for ASTM A421

prestressed concrete
(2) Steel strand, uncoated seven-wire AASHTO M 203
stress-relieved for prestressed concrete
(3) Steel strand, uncoated, seven-wire, ASTM A779
compacted, stress-relieved for
prestressed concrete
(4) Uncoated high-strength steel bar for AASHTO M 275
prestressed concrete
(b) Couplers. Supply couplers that are capable of developing 95 percent of the minimum specified
ultimate tensile strength of the tendon.

(c) Sheathing. Conform to one of the following:

(1) Free-stressing length.

(a) Polyethylene plastic tubing. Conform to ASTM D1248, Type II, III, or IV with a
minimum wall thickness of 1.5 millimeters.
(b) Hot-melt extruded polypropylene tubing. Conform to ASTM D4101, cell
classification PP 210 B5554211 with a minimum wall thickness of 1.5 millimeters.
(c) Hot-melt extruded polyethylene tubing. Conform to ASTM D3350 and ASTM D1248
high-density Type III with a minimum wall thickness of 1.5 millimeters.

Section 722 – Anchor Material 717

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(d) Steel tubing. Conform to ASTM A500 with a minimum wall thickness of
5 millimeters.
(e) Steel pipe. Conform to ASTM A53, schedule 40 minimum.
(f) Plastic pipe. Conform to ASTM D1785, schedule 40 minimum.
(2) Bonded length.
(a) High-density corrugated polyethylene tubing. Conform to AASHTO M 252 with a
minimum wall thickness of 0.75 millimeters.
(b) Corrugated, polyvinyl chloride tubes. Conform to ASTM D1784, Class 13464-B.
(c) Fusion-bonded epoxy. Conform to AASHTO M 284 with a minimum film thickness
of 0.4 millimeters.
(d) Corrosion inhibiting compounds. Use grease conforming to PTI Recommendations for
Prestressed Rock and Soil Anchors.

(e) Centralizers and spacers. Fabricate centralizers and spacers from any type of material, except
wood, that is not deleterious to the prestressing steel.

(f) Anchorages. Furnish materials conforming to PTI Recommendations for Prestressed Rock and
Soil Anchors.

For strand tendons, supply anchorages that permit lift-off testing without the jack engaging the
strand.

Furnish steel plates conforming to ASTM A36 or ASTM A588 for bearing plates. Provide grout
tube holes in the bearing plates.

722.03 Rock Bolts. Furnish deformed bars (tendon), bearing plates, washer, nuts, and other accessories
for tendons conforming to ASTM F432 and as follows:

(a) Tendon. Furnish hollow core bars conforming to ASTM A615. Use minimum Grade 75 (Grade
520) steel.

(b) Coupler. Supply couplers that are capable of developing 95 percent of the minimum specified
ultimate tensile strength of the tendon.

(c) Bearing plate. Furnish bearing plates with grout tube holes.

(d) Corrosion inhibiting compounds. Use grease conforming to PTI Recommendations for
Prestressed Rock and Soil Anchors.

(e) Centralizers and spacers. Fabricate centralizers and spacers from any type of material, except
wood, that is not deleterious to the tendon.

(f) Corrosion protection. Furnish steel with either fushion bonded epoxy coating or hot dip
galvanizing for corrosion protection. Use fusion bonded epoxy coating conforming to AASHTO M
284 with a minimum film thickness of 15 mils (0.4 millimeters). Use hot dip galvanizing conforming
to ASTM A153 with a minimum thickness of 3.9 mils (0.1 millimeters).

Section 722 – Anchor Material 718

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

722.04 Soil Nails.

(a) Tendon. Furnish deformed bars conforming to one of the following:

(1) Deformed bars, Grade 420 or 520 ASTM A615

(2) Deformed bars, Grade 1035 ASTM A722
Provide new, straight, continuous, undamaged, bare, epoxy coated, or encapsulated bars.

(b) Coupler. Furnish couplers that are capable of developing the full, ultimate tensile strength of
the tendon as certified by the manufacturer.

(c) Fusion bonded epoxy coating. Apply epoxy coating conforming to ASTM A775, with the
exception of the bend test requirements. Electrostatically apply the coating to a minimum thickness
of 0.3 millimeters. The coating at the wall anchorage end of epoxy-coated bars may be omitted
over the length provided for threading the nut against the bearing plate.

(d) Encapsulation. Furnish corrugated polyethylene pipe conforming to AASHTO M 252 or

corrugated polyvinyl chloride pipe conforming to ASTM D1784, Class 13464-B.

Section 722 – Anchor Material 719

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 723. — RESERVED

Section 724. — RESERVED

Sections 723 and 724 – Reserved 720

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 725. — MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL

725.01 Water. Conform to the following:

(a) Water for mixing or curing cement concrete, mortar, or grout. Conform to AASHTO M
157. Potable water of known quality may be used without testing according to AASHTO T 26.
Potable water is safe for human consumption as defined by the public health authority having
jurisdiction.

(b) Water for planting or care of vegetation. Furnish water that is free of substances injurious to
plant life such as oils, acids, alkalies, or salts.

(c) Water for earthwork, pavement courses, dust control, and incidental construction. Furnish
water free of substances detrimental to the work.

725.02 Calcium Chloride, Magnesium Chloride, and Lignosulfonate.

(a) Calcium chloride liquid. Furnish a water solution conforming to the following:

(1) Calcium chloride liquid AASHTO M 144, Type L

(2) Calcium chloride by mass 35 percent min.
(b) Calcium chloride flake. Conform to AASHTO M 144, Type S, Grade 1, 2, or 3, Class A.

(c) Magnesium chloride liquid. Furnish a water solution conforming to the following:

(1) Magnesium chloride by mass 28 percent min.

(2) Specific gravity, ASTM D1298 1.29 to 1.33
(d) Lignosulfonate liquid. Furnish a water solution with a base cation of ammonia, calcium, or
sodium. Conform to the following:

(1) Dry solids (1) 50 percent

(2) Specific gravity, ASTM D1475 1.20 min.
(3) pH, ASTM E70 3.0 to 8.0
Note (1) Use standard test Method H.1, Determination of Solids Content of Pulp and Paper Mill Effluents from the
Canada Pulp and Paper Association.

725.03 Lime.

(a) Lime for masonry. Conform to ASTM C207, Type NA.

(b) Lime for soil stabilization. Conform to AASHTO M 216.

(c) Lime for asphalt mixtures. Conform to AASHTO M 303.

Section 725 – Miscellaneous Material 721

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

725.04 Pozzolans.

(a) Fly ash. Conform to AASHTO M 295, Class C or F.

When used to mitigate alkali-silica reactivity,
also available alkalies as equivalent Na2O 1.5 percent max.

(b) Ground granulated blast-furnace slag. Conform to AASHTO M 302, Grade 100 or 120.
When used to mitigate alkali-silica reactivity,
also total alkalies as equivalent Na2O 1.0 percent max.

(c) Silica fume (microsilica). Conform to AASHTO M 307.

When used to mitigate alkali-silica reactivity,
also total alkalies as equivalent Na2O 1.0 percent max.

725.05 Mineral Filler. Conform to AASHTO M 17.

725.06 Concrete Building Brick. Conform to ASTM C55, normal weight.

725.07 Concrete Masonry Units. Conform to one of the following:

(a) Loadbearing concrete masonry units ASTM C90, normal

weight

(b) Concrete masonry units for constructing ASTM C139

catch basins and manholes

(c) Nonloadbearing concrete masonry units ASTM C129, normal

weight

725.08 Paving Brick. Conform to one of the following:

(a) Pedestrian and light traffic paving brick ASTM C902, Class SX,
Type I

(b) Heavy vehicular paving brick ASTM C1272, Type F,

application PS

725.09 Precast Concrete Units and Accessories. Conform to the following:

(a) Reinforced concrete manhole sections. AASHTO M 199

(b) Precast concrete barrier. ASTM C825

(c) Concrete grid paving units. ASTM C1319

(d) Underground concrete utility structures. ASTM C858

(e) Concrete water and waste water structures. ASTM C913

(f) Solid concrete interlocking paving units. ASTM C936

(g) Other precast concrete units and accessories. Section 601

Section 725 – Miscellaneous Material 722

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

725.10 Frames, Grates, Covers, and Ladder Rungs. Fabricate metal grates and covers to evenly
bear on the frames. Correct bearing inaccuracies by machining. Assemble all units before shipment.
Mark all pieces to facilitate reassembly at the installation site. Uniformly coat castings with a
commercial preservative according to the manufacturer’s standard practice. Conform to the following:

(a) Gray iron castings AASHTO M 105

(b) Carbon steel castings AASHTO M 103

(c) Structural steel ASTM A36

(d) Galvanizing AASHTO M 111

(e) Malleable iron castings ASTM A47

(f) Aluminum alloy ladder rung material ASTM B221, alloy

6061-T6

(g) Aluminum castings ASTM B26, alloy

356.0-T6

725.11 Corrugated Metal Units. For steel corrugated units, conform to AASHTO M 36. For
aluminum corrugated units, conform to AASHTO M 196. For coatings, conform to the following:

(a) Asphalt-coated corrugated units AASHTO M 190, Type A

(b) Polymer precoated corrugated units AASHTO M 245,

Grade 250/250

725.12 Plastic Lining. Furnish a film or fabric that is serviceable for the duration of the installation.

725.13 Grout.

(a) Neat hydraulic cement grout.

(1) Ground anchors, micropiles, and soil nails. Furnish a pumpable mixture of portland
cement, sand, water, and admixtures. Use Type II portland cement conforming to AASHTO
M 85. Furnish sand according to Subsection 703.01. Furnish water according to Subsection
725.01(a). Provide the minimum water content necessary for placement and a maximum water
to cementitious materials ratio of 0.45 by mass.

Chemical admixtures that control bleed or retard set may be used provided the additives
conform to Subsection 711.03 and are mixed according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Do not use admixtures containing more than trace (from impurities, not as
an intended constituent) amounts of chlorides, fluorides, aluminum, zinc, or nitrates.

The maximum water-soluble chloride ion (Cl-) content of the grout is 0.06percent Cl- by mass
of cement when tested according to ASTM C1218.

Furnish grout conforming to the following minimum compressive strengths:

(a) Ground anchors 25 MPa at 7 days.

Section 725 – Miscellaneous Material 723

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(b) Micropiles 17.5 MPa at 7 days and

35 MPa at 28 days.
Do not use chemical admixtures unless approved by the
Engineer.

(c) Soil nails. 10.5 MPa in 3 days and

21 MPa in 28 days.

(2) Miscellaneous applications. Furnish a grout consisting of a mixture of hydraulic cement,

water, and admixtures. Do not exceed a water/cement ratio of 0.44. Do not exceed 20 percent
of the cement by mass if fly ash is used. Admixtures to reduce water content, improve the
flowability, control bleeding, or control shrinkage may be added according to the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Furnish admixtures free of chlorides, fluorides, sulphites,
and nitrates.

(b) Nonshrink grout. Conform to ASTM C1107. Provide a minimum compressive strength of 35
megapascals in 3 days.

(c) Grout for post-tensioned structures. Conform to the requirements of the PTI Guide
Specification for Grouting of post-Tensioned Structures.

(d) Polyester resin grout. Furnish polyester resin grout with a minimum ultimate compressive
strength of 97 megapascals) a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 17 megapascals, and a
minimum ultimate shear strength of 31 megapascals when fully cured. Conform to ASTM F432,
except where noted.

Furnish polyester resin grout consisting of an unsaturated polyester resin, evenly filled with
nonreactive, inorganic aggregate of suitable size, and a separated catalyst filled with nonreactive
inorganic filler. Supply resin in cartridge form. Provide cartridge lengths and diameters according
to the manufacturer recommendations for the specified drill hole and reinforcing bar size.
Provide resin cartridges readily and individually identified as to their respective gel times.

725.14 Polymer Concrete and Mortar. Furnish a polymer binder and fine aggregate in the
proportions recommended by the polymer manufacturer with a minimum compressive strength of
25 megapascals in 4 hours. Conform to the following for the material specified:

(a) Epoxy mortar. Conform to ACI 503.4.

(b) Other polymer concrete or mortar. Conform to ASTM C1438, Type II.

725.15 Color Coating. Furnish a semi-opaque colored toner containing methyl methacrylate-ethyl
acrylate copolymer resins or equivalent resins, solvents, and color-toning pigments suspended in
solution by a chemical suspension agent. Provide color-toning pigments consisting of laminar silicates,
titanium dioxide, and inorganic oxides. Conform to the following:

(a) Mass per liter, ASTM D1475 38 kg min.

(b) Solids by mass, ASTM D2369 30 percent min.

(c) Solids by volume 21 percent min.

Section 725 – Miscellaneous Material 724

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

(d) Drying time, ASTM D1640 30 minutes at 21 °C and

50
percent max.humidity
(e) Color change, ASTM D822, 1000 hours No appreciable change

(f) Resistance to acids, alkalies, gasoline, Excellent

and mineral spirits, ASTM D543

(g) Water vapor transmission from interior Transmittable

concrete, ASTM D1653

(h) Oxidation over time None

725.16 Slurry (Drilling Fluids).

(a) Mineral slurry. Furnish sodium bentonite or attapulgite in potable water. Use a mineral grain
size that remains in suspension with sufficient viscosity and gel characteristics to transport drilled
material out of the hole.

(b) Polymer slurry. Furnish a slurry compatible with soil type and water chemistry.

725.17 Reinforcing Fibers.

(a) Fibers for shotcrete. Use deformed steel or fibrillated polyolefin fibers conforming to
ASTM A820 or ASTM D7508.

(b) Fibers for concrete. Use fully oriented, collated, fibrillated, white, 19-millimeter long fibers of
100 percent virgin polyolefin conforming to ASTM D7508. Dose at 0.9 to 1.8 kilograms per cubic
meter of concrete.

725.18 Epoxy Resin Adhesives.

Furnish epoxy resin adhesives conforming to AASHTO M 235 for structural concrete injection and
crack repair.

Section 725 – Miscellaneous Material 725

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

DIVISION 800
ENVIRONMENTAL
MEASURES

Section 800 – Environmental Measures 726

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 801. — ENVIRONMENTAL / SAFETY EXPERT

Description

801.01 This work consists of hiring, on a monthly basis for the duration of the project, an
environmental and safety expert. Who is to be integrated into the Contractor’s staff team.

Requirements

801.02 General. The environmental and safety expert will have the training and experience to perform
this work on the type of construction work this project is undertaking.

The expert will give written reports on a daily/weekly/monthly basis as directed by the Engineer and in
a format which is acceptable to the Engineer.

The expert will also investigate any accidents, incidents or near misses which are environmental or
safety related.

The expert will review and sign off on all of the Contractor’ environmental and safety plans and
programs.

801.03 Acceptance. The environmental and safety expert will be acceptable to the Engineer.

Measurement

801.04 Measure pay items listed in the bid schedule according to Subsection 109.02.

Payment

801.05 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the item
listed in the BOQ. Payment will be full compensation for the work prescribed in this Section. See
Subsection 109.05.

Section 801 – Environmental Safety Expert 727

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 802. — ENVIRONMENTAL / SOCIAL STUDIES AND

INVESTIGATIONS

Description

802.01 This work consists of the execution of all additional environmental, social studies, and
investigations before and after the project.

Requirements

802.02 General The work for this section is

(a) Design of a program for the implementation of environmental measures matching the works
provisional schedule

(b) Design by an independent Consultant of an environment management system (EMS) for the
Contractor which will be in harmony with the Contractor’s Quality Assurance Plan

(c) Execution of investigations before choosing areas designed for the use of the Contractor, choice of
life-base implantation sites, equipment warehouse, crushing and hot mix asphalt plants, borrowing
and deposit areas, possible dump areas, etc..

(d) Inventory of existing conditions (before the works) and final conditions (after the works) by an
independent consultant, including an inventory of special plant species for the local population as
well as wild fauna.

802.03 Acceptance. The social studies, investigations and reports are required to be aceeptable by the
Engineer

Measurement

802.04 Measurement of the pay item listed in the BOQ according to Subsection 109.02:

Payment

802.05 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the pay
item listed in the BOQ. Payment will be full compensation for the work prescribed in this Section. See
Subsection 109.05.

Section 802 – Environmental/Social Studies and Investigations 728

 Standard Specifications for
Rwanda Transport Development Agency (RTDA)
Road and Bridge Works

Section 803. — EQUIPMENT AND WORKERS SAFETY

Description

803.01 This work consists of the safety measures required for the safety of the contractor’s workforce
during the length of the project.

Requirements

803.02 General The safety measures for this section includes but is not limited to:

(a) Providing workers with special security and safety equipment:

(1) helmates (hard hats)

(2) gloves

(3) masks

(4) fluorescent vests

(5) work/safety boots

(6) safety glasses

(7) other equipment as required, for example, safety harness, welding hoods, cutting torch glasses

(b) Replacement of worn out equipment.

(c) A plan to ensure and enforce the use of all safety equipment required for the work being performed.

803.03 Acceptance. The plan, enforcement, and use of safety equipment are required to be aceeptable
by the Engineer

Measurement

803.04 Measurement of the pay item listed in the BOQ according to Subsection 109.02:

Payment

803.05 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for the pay
item listed in the BOQ. Payment will be full compensation for the work prescribed in this Section. See
Subsection 109.05.

Section 803 – Equipment and Workers Safety 729

 Rwanda Transport Development Agency Standard Specifications for
(RTDA) Road and Bridge Works

Section 804. — HIV /STD AWARENESS CAMPAIGNS FOR WORKERS

Description

804.01 This work consists of the sensitization actions targeting the Contractor’s workers about
sexually transmitted diseases and AIDS (STD/AIDS).

Requirements

804.02 General The Contractor will have a plan, which includes but not limited to sensitization
actions listed below for this section:

(a) Monthly visits of a doctor:

(1) conduct checkups to the life base

(2) control worker’s health

(3) check hygiene conditions

(4) conduct sensitization meetings

(5) conduct sensitization campaigns

(b) Distribution of condoms including supply and all constraints.

804.03 Acceptance. The plan and sensitization actions for this section are required to be
acceptable by the Engineer

Measurement

804.04 Measurement of the pay item listed in the BOQ according to Subsection 109.02:

Payment

804.05 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for
the pay item listed in the BOQ. Payment will be full compensation for the work prescribed in
this Section. See Subsection109.05

Section 804 – HIV/STD Awareness Campaigns for Workers 730

 Rwanda Transport Development Agency Standard Specifications for
(RTDA) Road and Bridge Works

Section 805 — ROAD SAFETY AWARENESS CAMPAIGNS

Description

805.01 This work consists of the sensitization actions targeting the Contractor’s workers,
neighbors, and users of the road about road safety.

Requirements

805.02 General The Contractor will have a plan, which includes but not limited to sensitization
actions listed below for this section:

(a) recruitment of associations (facilitators):

(b) audio facilitation

(c) community meeting to sensitize the population about traffic safety

(d) information for the community about traffic safety

(e) installation of four sensitization metal signs (3m x4m) every 15 km along the project,

805.03 Acceptance The plan and sensitization actions for this section are required to be
acceptable by the Engineer

Measurement

805.04 Measurement of the pay item listed in the BOQ according to Subsection 109.02:

Payment

805.05 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for
the pay item listed in the BOQ. Payment will be full compensation for the work prescribed in
this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 805 – Road Safety Awareness Campaigns 731

 Rwanda Transport Development Agency Standard Specifications for
(RTDA) Road and Bridge Works

Section 806 — MANAGEMENT OF THE ENVIROMENTAL

AWARENESS CAMPAIGNS

Description

806.01 This work consists of the sensitization actions targeting the Contractor’s workers,
neighbors, and users of the road about environmental management.

Requirements

806.02 General The Contractor will have a plan, which includes but not limited to sensitization
actions listed below for this section:

(a) recruitment of associations (facilitators):

(b) radio facilitation

(c) community meeting to sensitize the population about environmental management

(d) information for the community about environmental management

(e) sensitization seminars about ecological assts of regions crossed by the road

(f) installation of four sensitization metal signs (3m x4m) every 15 km along the project,

805.03 Acceptance The plan and sensitization actions for this section are required to be
acceptable by the Engineer

Measurement

806.04 Measurement of the pay item listed in the BOQ according to Subsection 109.02:

Payment

806.05 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for
the pay item listed in the BOQ. Payment will be full compensation for the work prescribed in
this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 806 – Management of the Environmental Awareness Campaigns 732

 Rwanda Transport Development Agency Standard Specifications for
(RTDA) Road and Bridge Works

Section 807 — HIV /STD AWARENESS CAMPAIGNS FOR

POPULATION

Description

807.01 This work consists of the sensitization actions targeting road neighbors and users of the
road about sexually transmitted diseases and AIDS (STD/AIDS).

Requirements

807.02 General The Contractor will have a plan, which includes but not limited to sensitization
actions listed below for this section::

(a) recruitment of associations (facilitators):

(b) radio facilitation

(c) community meeting to sensitize the population about sexually transmitted diseases and
AIDS (STD/AIDS)

(d) information for the community about sexually transmitted diseases and AIDS (STD/AIDS)

(e) installation of four sensitization metal signs (3m x4m) every 15 km along the project,

807.03 Acceptance The plan and sensitization actions for this section are required to be
acceptable by the Engineer

Measurement

807.04 Measurement of the pay item listed in the BOQ according to Subsection 109.02:

Payment

807.05 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for
the pay item listed in the BOQ. Payment will be full compensation for the work prescribed in
this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 807 – HIV/STD Awareness Campaigns for Populations 733

 Rwanda Transport Development Agency Standard Specifications for
(RTDA) Road and Bridge Works

Section 808 — EQUIPMENT AND FUNCTIONAL SITE INFIRMARY IN

THE SITE CAMP

Description

808.01 This section covers the costs of the equipment, maintenance, staffing, and operation of a
healthcare center for the Contractor’s life camp during the length of the project.

Requirements

808.02 General The Contractor will have a plan, set-up staff and operate a healthcare center in
the project life camp this includes but not limited to the following:

(a) set up and operations of healthcare center, including all utilities (power, water, sewer and
etc)

(b) proper disposal of medical waste

(c) staffing of center

(d) medicine

(e) healthcare

(f) all costs associated with the setup, monthly operation, and removal of the healthcare center

(g) plan and procedure to move one or more injured persons to a more suitable healthcare
operation (hospital) in case the injury is beyond the capability of the camp healthcare
center.

808.03 Acceptance The plan and operation of the healthcare center are required to be
acceptable by the Engineer

Measurement

808.04 Measurement of the pay item listed in the BOQ according to Subsection 109.02:

Payment

808.05 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for
the pay item listed in the BOQ. Payment will be full compensation for the work prescribed in
this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 808 – Equipment and Functional Site Infirmary in the Camp 734
 Rwanda Transport Development Agency Standard Specifications for
(RTDA) Road and Bridge Works

Section 809 — ADJUSTMENT, EQUIPMENT AND SERVICES FOR

ENVIRONMENT PRESERVATION

Description

809.01 This work consists of the equipment, developments, plans and services designed for the
protection of the environment and preventive environmental provisions to protect the natural
and human environment.

Requirements

809.02 General The Contractor will have a plan, which includes but not limited to actions
listed below for this section::

(a protection of tree trunks identified by the local population to exceptional, by construction of

wood fences around these tree trunks or other protection methods acceptable to the local
population and the Engineer

(b) equipment and plan for the management of soild waste of the Contractor’s life camp (trash,
dumpsters etc)

(c) equipment and plan for the management of soild waste of the Contractor’s sub - camps

(d) development of an environmentally friendly dump area for the placement of trash and other
waste from the camps and project sites.

(e) maintenance of worksite installations designed to preserve the environment

(1) addition of lime to septic pits for disinfection

(2) burying and covering trash

(3) transport of used oils to cement plant for incineration

(4) maintenances of basins used fro the settlement of equipment washing waters

809.03 Acceptance The plan, equipment and actions for this section are required to be
acceptable by the Engineer

Measurement

809.04 Measurement of the pay item listed in the BOQ according to Subsection 109.02:

Payment

809.05 The accepted quantities will be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement for
the pay item listed in the BOQ. Payment will be full compensation for the work prescribed in
this Section. See Subsection 109.05.

Section 809 – Adjustment, Equipment, and Services for Environmental Preservation 735
 Rwanda Transport Development Agency Standard Specifications for
(RTDA) Road and Bridge Works

INDEX
Abbreviations ...................................................................................................................................2
Acceptance
partial and final ...........................................................................................................................36
Acceptance of work .......................................................................................................................25
Accidents (report) ..........................................................................................................................40
Acquisition regulations ..................................................................................................................11
Acronyms .........................................................................................................................................2
Agreements ....................................................................................................................................37
Anchor bases (lighting material) ..................................................................................................719
Anchor bolt covers (lighting material) .........................................................................................720
Archeological .................................................................................................................................37
As-built drawings .........................................................................................................See Drawings
Authority of
Engineer (Engineer) ....................................................................................................................16
inspectors ....................................................................................................................................16
Backer rod ....................................................................................................................................675
Backfilling
pipe culverts ..............................................................................................................................133
structural plate structures ..........................................................................................................133
Backing mat (MSE wall material) ...............................................................................................716
Balled and burlapped plants .........................................................................................................680
Bars
dowel ........................................................................................................................................668
fabricated deformed steel..........................................................................................................669
low alloy steel deformed...........................................................................................................669
Bedding
other than pipe culverts.............................................................................................................132
pipe culverts ..............................................................................................................................133
Bid
guarantee .....................................................................................................................................12
opening of ...................................................................................................................................13
preparation ..................................................................................................................................11
rejection of ..................................................................................................................................12
Blended hydraulic cement............................................................................................................641
Bolts, nuts, and washers (lighting material).................................................................................719
Bonded fiber matrix hydromulch .................................................................................................679
Bonds (performance and payment) ................................................................................................13
Boring logs (drilled shafts) ..........................................................................................................486
Bulletin board.................................................................................................................................38
Certificates of insurance ................................................................................................................39
Certification
commercial .................................................................................................................................27
production ...................................................................................................................................27
Channel preservation ...................................................................................................................128
Chromium alloy steel castings .....................................................................................................701
Circuit breakers and panels (electrical material) .........................................................................717
Claims ............................................................................................................................................39

Index 736
 Rwanda Transport Development Agency Standard Specifications for
(RTDA) Road and Bridge Works

release .........................................................................................................................................55
Clean Water Act ................................................................................. See Environmental protection
Clearances
contractor-selected, noncommercial ...........................................................................................41
Clevis connector (MSE wall material) .........................................................................................716
Cofferdams ...................................................................................................................................128
Coir rolls ......................................................................................................................................682
Cold-drawn steel wire ..................................................................................................................669
Commercial weighing systems ......................................................................................................49
Compost socks .............................................................................................................................682
Concrete
curing ........................................................................................................................................406
finishes ......................................................................................................................................406
Concrete face panels (MSE wall material) ..................................................................................715
Concrete-lined corrugated steel pipe ...........................................................................................665
Conduit (electrical material) ........................................................................................................717
Conformance
measured or tested ......................................................................................................................27
Conformity with contract requirements .........................................................................................25
Connector bars (MSE wall material) ...........................................................................................716
Contactors and control transformers (electrical material) ...........................................................718
Contract
conformity with requirements ....................................................................................................25
intent of .......................................................................................................................................14
time
determination and extension....................................................................................................42
liquidated damages ..................................................................................................................44
stop order .................................................................................................................................45
Contract quantity............................................................................................................................47
Contractor records ..........................................................................................................................14
Contractor-located sources............................................................................... See Material Sources
Control cabinet (electrical material) ............................................................................................718
Control strip .................................................................................................................................294
Coordination of contract documents ..............................................................................................21
Crack fillers ..................................................................................................................................674
Curing concrete ............................................................................................................................406
Definitions
measurement units ......................................................................................................................47
Subsection 101.04.........................................................................................................................6
Deformed steel wire .....................................................................................................................669
Direct & indirect payment ............................................................................................See Payment
Direct costs.....................................................................................................................................52
Direct payment ..............................................................................................................See Payment
Disposal
excess material ..........................................................................................................................106
materials......................................................................................................................................98
unsuitable material ....................................................................................................................106
Disputes..........................................................................................................................................14
Dowel bars ...................................................................................................................................668

Index 737
 Rwanda Transport Development Agency Standard Specifications for
(RTDA) Road and Bridge Works

Drawings ........................................................................................................................................16
As-built .......................................................................................................................................18
Earthwork geotextile ....................................................................................................................690
Elastomeric bearings (plain or laminated) ...................................................................................702
Embankment
construction ..............................................................................................................................103
Environmental protection...............................................................................................................40
Epoxy mortar ...............................................................................................................................728
Epoxy-coated reinforcing bars .....................................................................................................668
Excavation
borrow .......................................................................................................................................102
subexcavation ...........................................................................................................................102
Excelsior fiber rolls ......................................................................................................................682
Fabricated deformed steel bar or rod mats ...................................................................................669
Fasteners (MSE wall material).....................................................................................................716
Federal Lands Highway Field Materials Manual (FMM)..............................................................25
Fillers
crack..........................................................................................................................................674
preformed expansion joint ........................................................................................................674
Final acceptance ....................................................................................................... See Acceptance
Final payment.................................................................................................................................55
Fly ash (pozzolan material) ..........................................................................................................726
FP (definition) .................................................................................................................................. i
Geotextile
earthwork ..................................................................................................................................690
paving .......................................................................................................................................691
Geotextile (silt fence) ...................................................................................................................683
Government-provided
material stockpile .......................................................................................... See Material Sources
sources .......................................................................................................... See Material Sources
Grading standards (nursery stock) ...............................................................................................680
Grass straw cellulose fiber (mulch) .............................................................................................678
Gray iron castings ........................................................................................................................701
Ground granulated blast-furnace slag (pozzolan material) ..........................................................726
Grounding and bonding equipment (electrical material) .............................................................718
Grout (post-tensioned structures) .................................................................................................728
Grouted riprap ..............................................................................................................................148
Hardware cloth (MSE wall material) ...........................................................................................716
Health .............................................................................................................................................40
High load rotational spherical bearings .......................................................................................702
High-strength low-alloy structural (HSLA) steel ........................................................................700
High-strength quenched and tempered (QT) steel .......................................................................700
Hook bolts ....................................................................................................................................668
Indirect payment ...........................................................................................................See Payment
Industry standards ..........................................................................................................................27
Inspection
at the plant ..................................................................................................................................36
Government’s rights ...................................................................................................................25
visual ...........................................................................................................................................26

Index 738
 Rwanda Transport Development Agency Standard Specifications for
(RTDA) Road and Bridge Works

Inspection and Quarantine (nursery stock) ..................................................................................680

Inspectors
OSHA & others ..........................................................................................................................40
Insurance
automobile liability .....................................................................................................................39
certificates of ..............................................................................................................................39
comprehensive/general ...............................................................................................................39
worker's compensation ...............................................................................................................39
Invoices (weighing) .......................................................................................................................49
Joint
sealants......................................................................................................................................674
Keyed riprap.................................................................................................................................148
Laws ...............................................................................................................................................37
Liquidated damages .......................................................................................................................44
Load restrictions.....................................................................................................................21, 410
Low-modulus silicone joint sealant .............................................................................................675
Luminaries (lighting material) .....................................................................................................720
Maintaining roadways
during non-work periods ............................................................................................................82
during work.................................................................................................................................81
Malleable iron castings ................................................................................................................701
Masonry cement ...........................................................................................................................641
Material
disposal .......................................................................................................................................98
salvaging .....................................................................................................................................97
source
management ............................................................................................................................23
source restoration ........................................................................................................................24
sources ........................................................................................................................................22
storing and handling ...................................................................................................................23
Material found in work ..................................................................................................................24
Materials Manual .................................................... See Federal Lands Highway Materials Manual
Mature compost (mulch) ..............................................................................................................678
Meaning of terms .............................................................................................................................2
Measurement record format ...........................................................................................................46
Meter cabinet (electrical material) ...............................................................................................718
Metric
prefix symbols ..............................................................................................................................5
symbols .........................................................................................................................................4
Mineral filler ................................................................................................................................726
Mineral slurry (drilling fluids) .....................................................................................................729
Mortar cement ..............................................................................................................................641
Neat hydraulic cement grout ........................................................................................................727
Nonshrink grout ...........................................................................................................................728
Notice to Proceed .............................................................................................................................8
Noxious weeds ...............................................................................................................................41
Operations
limitations on ..............................................................................................................................82
nighttime .....................................................................................................................................82

Index 739
 Rwanda Transport Development Agency Standard Specifications for
(RTDA) Road and Bridge Works

Overhead ........................................................................................................................................53
Painting
steel ...........................................................................................................................................425
Paleontological ...............................................................................................................................37
Partial acceptance..................................................................................................... See Acceptance
Partnering .......................................................................................................................................14
Pavement markers (temporary pavement markings) ...................................................................711
Paving geotextile..........................................................................................................................691
Pay factor
concrete .....................................................................................................................................179
Payment
final .............................................................................................................................................55
scope of .......................................................................................................................................51
Peat moss (mulch) ........................................................................................................................678
Permits ...........................................................................................................................................37
Placed riprap ................................................................................................................................148
Plank floors ..................................................................................................................................453
Plant names ..................................................................................................................................680
Planting material (antidesiccant)..................................................................................................681
Planting material (braces and anchors) ........................................................................................681
Planting material (hose) ...............................................................................................................681
Planting material (tree wound dressing) ......................................................................................681
Planting material (twine)..............................................................................................................681
Planting material (wire) ...............................................................................................................681
Planting material (wrapping material) .........................................................................................681
Pole arms (lighting material) .......................................................................................................719
Poles (lighting material) ...............................................................................................................718
Polyester resin grout ....................................................................................................................728
Polymer concrete or mortar .........................................................................................................728
Polymer slurry (drilling fluids) ....................................................................................................729
Portland cement ...........................................................................................................................641
Posts (silt fence) ...........................................................................................................................683
Post-work pricing ............................................................................................................. See Pricing
Preconstruction conference ............................................................................................................42
Preformed
expansion joint fillers ...............................................................................................................674
joint seals ..................................................................................................................................675
sleeves .......................................................................................................................................675
Preformed polychloroprene elastomeric joint seal for bridges ....................................................675
Preformed retroreflective tape (temporary pavement markings) .................................................711
Prework meeting ..........................................................................................................................356
Pricing
adjustments .................................................................................................................................52
direct costs ..................................................................................................................................52
overhead......................................................................................................................................53
post-work ....................................................................................................................................52
profit ...........................................................................................................................................53
unilateral determination ..............................................................................................................52
Profit ..............................................................................................................................................53

Index 740
 Rwanda Transport Development Agency Standard Specifications for
(RTDA) Road and Bridge Works

Progress payments .........................................................................................................................53

Project weighing systems ...............................................................................................................50
Protection
archeological ...............................................................................................................................37
environmental ................................................................................. See Environmental protection
forests, parks, and public lands ...................................................................................................41
paleontological............................................................................................................................37
property.......................................................................................................................................37
railroad ........................................................................................................................................38
utilities ........................................................................................................................................37
workers .......................................................................................................................................38
Pull boxes, frames, and covers (electrical material) ....................................................................717
Quality of plant material ..............................................................................................................679
Railroad ..........................................................................................................................................38
Receiving procedures .....................................................................................................................50
Recycled pulp fiber (mulch) ........................................................................................................679
Regulations
blasting......................................................................................................................................113
FAR .............................................................................................................................................. i
TAR .............................................................................................................................................. i
Reinforcing bars ...........................................................................................................................668
Reinforcing mesh (MSE wall material) .......................................................................................716
Reinforcing strips (MSE wall material) .......................................................................................716
Reset curb.....................................................................................................................................560
Restoration
material
source ......................................................................................................................................24
Right-of-Way
furnishing ....................................................................................................................................40
Roadways
maintaining during non-work periods ................................................ See Maintaining roadways
maintaining during work .................................................................... See Maintaining roadways
Safety .............................................................................................................................................40
audible alarms .............................................................................................................................40
traffic and safety supervisor .......................................................................................................83
Safety disconnect switches (electrical material) ..........................................................................717
Salvaging
material .......................................................................................................................................97
Sample
labeling .......................................................................................................................................70
Sand
bags (material) ..........................................................................................................................683
Sanitation .......................................................................................................................................40
Scales .......................................................................................................................... See Weighing
Schedules .......................................................................................................................................72
Scope of payment ...........................................................................................................................51
Secondary lightning arrester (electrical material) ........................................................................718
Service pole (electrical material) .................................................................................................718
Sieve (AASHTO M 92.....................................................................................................................9

Index 741
 Rwanda Transport Development Agency Standard Specifications for
(RTDA) Road and Bridge Works

Silica fume (pozzolan material) ...................................................................................................726

Silicone joint sealer ......................................................................................................................675
Silt fence reinforcement ...............................................................................................................683
Slope notation ..................................................................................................................................6
Source
of supply .....................................................................................................................................22
quality requirements ...................................................................................................................22
Specifications .................................................................................................................................16
format............................................................................................................................................2
more strict ...................................................................................................................................25
Spill prevention, control, and countermeasure (SPCC) plan .........................................................40
Steel castings ................................................................................................................................701
Stop Order ......................................................................................................................................45
Storing and handling material ........................................................................................................23
Straightedge measurement ...................................................................................................277, 307
Straw (mulch)...............................................................................................................................677
Straw fiber rolls............................................................................................................................682
Straw for hydroseeding (mulch) ..................................................................................................679
Structural carbon steel..................................................................................................................700
Structural steel (bolts and nuts)....................................................................................................700
Structural steel (high-strength bolts, nuts, and washers) .............................................................701
Subcontracting ...............................................................................................................................42
Substantial completion ...................................................................................................................10
Surety .............................................................................................................................................12
Survey and staking
tolerances ....................................................................................................................................64
Tackifier (plant based) .................................................................................................................681
Tackifier (polmer stabilized fiber matrix)....................................................................................682
Tackifier (polymeric emulsion blend) .........................................................................................682
Tie bars.........................................................................................................................................668
Tie strips (MSE wall material) .....................................................................................................716
Time extensions .............................................................................................................................43
Tolerances
manufacturing .............................................................................................................................25
Topsoil
conserved ..................................................................................................................................102
Traffic and Safety Supervisor ........................................................................................................83
Traffic paint (temporary pavement markings) .............................................................................711
Trusses .........................................................................................................................................454
Tubular mesh for fiber rolls .........................................................................................................683
U.S. Customary
unit abbreviations .........................................................................................................................4
Unilateral determination ................................................................................................................52
Utilities...........................................................................................................................................37
Value Engineering .........................................................................................................................14
Visual Inspection ....................................................................................................... See Inspection
Weigh ticket format .......................................................................................................................50
Weighing ........................................................................................................................................49
Welded fabric

Index 742
 Rwanda Transport Development Agency Standard Specifications for
(RTDA) Road and Bridge Works

deformed steel wire ..................................................................................................................669

steel wire ...................................................................................................................................669
Welding ........................................................................................................................................449
Wheelstops ...................................................................................................................................560
Wire
cold-drawn steel ........................................................................................................................669
deformed steel...........................................................................................................................669
Wire and cable (electrical material) .............................................................................................717
Wire facing (MSE wall material) .................................................................................................716
Wood (mulch) ..............................................................................................................................679
Wood fiber (mulch)......................................................................................................................677
Work
acceptance ...................................................................................................................................25
Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion .........................................................................42
contractor's responsibility ...........................................................................................................39
eliminated ...................................................................................................................................53
Government's responsibility .......................................................................................................40
limitations ...................................................................................................................................82
measurement of...........................................................................................................................46
remove and replace .....................................................................................................................26
statistical evaluation ...................................................................................................................27
Writing style
imperative mood ...........................................................................................................................2

Index 743
 Rwanda Transport Development Agency Standard Specifications for
(RTDA) Road and Bridge Works

CONVERSION FACTOR

Multiply By To Obtain Multiply By To Obtain

acre 43,560 square feet (ft2) joule (J) 9.478 × 10–4 Btu
ampere-hr (A-hr) 3,600 coulomb (C) J 0.7376 ft-lbf
ångström (Å) 1 × 10–10 meter (m) J 1 Newton•m (N•m)
atmosphere (atm) 76.0 cm, mercury (Hg) J/s 1 watt (W)
atm, std 29.92 in., mercury (Hg)
atm, std 14.70 lbf/in2 abs (psia) kilogram (kg) 2.205 pound (lbm)
atm, std 33.90 ft, water kgf 9.8066 newton (N)
atm, std 1.013 × 105 pascal (Pa) kilometer (km) 3,281 feet (ft)
km/hr 0.621 mph
bar 1 × 10 5
Pa kilopascal (kPa) 0.145 lbf/in2 (psi)
bar 0.987 atm kilowatt (kW) 1.341 horsepower (hp)
barrels–oil 42 gallons–oil kW 3,413 Btu/hr
Btu 1,055 joule (J) kW 737.6 (ft-lbf )/sec
Btu 2.928 × 10 –4
kilowatt-hr (kWh) kW-hour (kWh) 3,413 Btu
Btu 778 ft-lbf kWh 1.341 hp-hr
Btu/hr 3.930 × 10 –4
horsepower (hp) kWh 3.6 × 10 6
joule (J)
Btu/hr 0.293 watt (W) kip (K) 1,000 lbf
Btu/hr 0.216 ft-lbf/sec K 4,448 newton (N)

calorie (g-cal) 3.968 × 10–3 Btu liter (L) 61.02 in3

cal 1.560 × 10–6 hp-hr L 0.264 gal (U.S. Liq)
–3
cal 4.186 joule (J) L 10 m3
cal/sec 4.184 watt (W) centimeter (cm) L/second (L/s) 2.119 ft3/min (cfm)
centipoise (cP) 0.001 pascal•sec (Pa•s) L/s 15.85 gal (U.S.)/min (gpm)
centipoise (cP) 1 g/(m•s)
centipoise (cP) 2.419 lbm/hr-ft meter (m) 3.281 feet (ft)
centistoke (cSt) 1 × 10–6 m2/sec (m2/s) m 1.094 yard
cubic feet/second (cfs) 0.646317 million gallons/day (MGD) m/second (m/s) 196.8 feet/min (ft/min)
cubic foot (ft3) 7.481 gallon mile (statute) 5,280 feet (ft)
cubic meters (m3) 1,000 liters mile (statute) 1.609 kilometer (km)
electronvolt (eV) 1.602 × 10–19 joule (J) mile/hour (mph) 88.0 ft/min (fpm)
mph 1.609 km/h
foot (ft) 30.48 cm mm of Hg 1.316 × 10 –3
atm
ft 0.3048 meter (m) mm of H2O 9.678 × 10 –5
atm
ft-pound (ft-lbf) 1.285 × 10–3 Btu
ft-lbf 3.766 × 10–7 kilowatt-hr (kWh) newton (N) 0.225 lbf
ft-lbf 0.324 calorie (g-cal) newton (N) 1 kg•m/s2
ft-lbf 1.356 joule (J) N•m 0.7376 ft-lbf
N•m 1 joule (J)

Conversion Factor 744

 Rwanda Transport Development Agency Standard Specifications for
(RTDA) Road and Bridge Works

CONVERSION FACTOR (Continued)

Multiply By To Obtain Multiply By To Obtain

ft-lbf/sec 1.818 × 10 –3
horsepower (hp)
pascal (Pa) 9.869 × 10–6 atmosphere (atm)
gallon (U.S. Liq) 3.785 liter (L) Pa 1 newton/m2 (N/m2)
3
gallon (U.S. Liq) 0.134 ft Pa•sec (Pa•s) 10 poise (P)
gallons of water 8.3453 pounds of water pound (lbm, avdp) 0.454 kilogram (kg)
gamma (γ, Γ) 1 × 10–9 tesla (T) lbf 4.448 N
gauss 1 × 10 –4
T lbf-ft 1.356 N•m
gram (g) 2.205 × 10 –3
pound (lbm) 2
lbf/in (psi) 0.068 atm
psi 2.307 ft of H2O
hectare 1 × 104 square meters (m2) psi 2.036 in. of Hg
hectare 2.47104 acres psi 6,895 Pa
hp 745.7 watt (W)
hp 33,000 (ft-lbf)/min radian 180/π degree
hp 550 (ft-lbf)/sec
2
hp-hr 2,545 Btu stokes 1 × 10–4 m /s
hp-hr 1.98 × 10 6
ft-lbf
hp-hr 2.68 × 10 6
joule (J) therm 1 × 105 Btu
hp-hr 0.746 kWh ton (metric) 1,000 kilogram (kg)
ton (short) 2,000 pound (lb)
inch (in.) 2.540 centimeter (cm)
in. of Hg 0.0334 atm watt (W) 3.413 Btu/hr
–3
in. of Hg 13.60 in. of H2O W 1.341 × 10 horsepower (hp)
2
in. of H2O 0.0361 lbf/in (psi) W 1 joule/s (J/s)
in. of H2O 0.002458 atm weber/m2 (Wb/m2) 10,000 gauss

Conversion Factor 745

 RTDA
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS
Final, December 2014